Drbeteraudiolettersvol 2 BOOK

THE DR.
BETER AUDIO LETTERS
VOLUME 2
AUDIO LETTERS 41 THROUGH 80
1979-1982
BY DR. PETER DAVID BETER
Published by
Transactual Systems
www.transactual.com
ISBN: 1441472002
EAN-13: 9781441472007
Copyright © 2009 Transactual Systems — All rights reserved
Printed in the United States of America by CreateSpace
Bulk purchases and reseller discounts, contact dave@transactual.com
AUDIO LETTER ® is a registered trademark of Audio Books, Inc.,

a Texas corporation, which originally produced these tape recordings.
Reproduced under open license granted by Audio Books, Inc.
Cover image was created, authored and prepared for NASA by STScI.
No claim to copyright is asserted by STScI and the image may be freely
used and is in the public domain in accordance with NASA's contract.
THIS BOOK IS
DEDICATED TO
ONE OF THE LAST
TRUE AMERICAN
PATRIOTS
DR. PETER DAVID BETER

1921-1987
LET THE EVENTS SPEAK FOR THEMSELVES.

CONTENTS
Who is Dr. Peter David Beter? 1
Audio Letter 41 — December 26, 1978 3
1 The economic countdown toward Nuclear War I
2 Spiritual warfare and the collapse of trust
3 Bolshevik maneuvering to buy time to rearm
Audio Letter 42 — January 31, 1979 21
1 The decline of the House of Rockefeller
2 The Bolshevik plot for a Pope’s Revolution
3 UFOs, IFOs, and Russia’s master secret weapon
Audio Letter 43 — February 28, 1979 37
1 The mysterious disappearance of Dr. Henry Kissinger
2 The plundering of the Rockefeller family empire
3 Our last chance to save Western Civilization
Audio Letter 44 — March 29, 1979 53
1 The hoax reappearance of Dr. Henry Kissinger
2 The impending collapse of the Chase Manhattan Bank
3 The Egyptian-Israeli Treaty for nuclear war

The Dr. Beter Audio Letters
Audio Letter 45 — April 27, 1979 69
1 The domestic Guyana at Three Mile Island
2 The secret intelligence war of doubles
3 Last call for a Pilgrimage for Peace
1 Nelson Rockefeller’s revenge from the grave
2 The cosmosphere shuttles to prevent nuclear war
3 The modern rebirth of the Holy Alliance
Audio Letter 47 — June 28, 1979 101
1 The scientific background of the Russian robotoids
2 The Russian strategy to dismantle Bolshevik power
3 The shifting currents between war and peace
Audio Letter 48 — July 30, 1979 117
1 The final chapter in The Great Skylab Cover-Up
2 The secret war of the walking dead
3 How America will relearn the fear of God
Audio Letter 49 — August 27, 1979 133
1 Russia’s transformation of America’s Middle East policy
2 The domestic fallout of the Andrew Young affair
3 Russia’s two-front war against Rothschild world power

Contents
Audio Letter 50 — September 30, 1979 151
1 Runaway inflation and the collapsing American economy
2 The Cuban Crisis to destroy SALT II
3 The thousand-year war between Russia and the Khazars
Audio Letter 51 — October 27, 1979 169
1 The crash of the United States dollar
2 The Russian program to sell SALT II
3 The surprise Bolshevik deployment of synthetic automatons
Audio Letter 52 — November 30, 1979 187
1 Strategic Iran and the Islamic Khomeini Revolution
2 The Bolshevik Iran strategy for thermonuclear war
3 American hostages and the Battle of Tehran
1 War tensions and the late Shah of Iran
2 The surprise takeover by the Kremlin hardliners
3 The nuclear strike operations now in progress
1 The secret American defeat of January, 1980
2 Weather modification as a weapon of retaliation
3 Russia’s accelerating preparations to survive nuclear war

1 The public signs of nuclear war fever
2 Multiplying disasters in the expanding secret war
3 Battle to the death in the Kremlin
1 Ian Fleming and the Fort Knox Gold Scandal
2 Narrowing options in the Bolshevik plan for nuclear war
3 Step One in what you can do
1 America’s nuclear first strike plans in the news
2 Hurricane Allen and Russia’s expanding weather warfare
3 Step Two in what you can do
1 American gold and the Iraq-Iran War
2 Russia’s first strike against a Titan II missile
3 Step Three in what you can do
Audio Letter 59 — October 31, 1980 317
1 The Iran hostage-release plan for war
2 Senator William Proxmire and Action Step Four
3 Action Step Five on a new battle front

Contents
1 The Great Election Surprise of 1980
2 The planned collapse of America’s banking system
3 The new age of warfare by stealth
1 The legal sabotage of the Reagan transition
2 The forfeited opportunity of Senator William Proxmire
3 The golden swindle of the Federal Reserve Banks
1 The secret military mission of the Space Shuttle Columbia
2 The new ferment of growing war tensions
3 Gold swindles by the modern-day moneychangers
1 First-strike planning by America and Russia
2 The economic road to dictatorship in America
3 Your decision to flee or to fight
1 The advance preparations for the Space Shuttle mission
2 The aborted flight of the Space Shuttle Columbia
3 The NASA cover-up of the Columbia disaster

1 The Pope, the President, and assassination politics
2 The aftermath of the Shuttle Columbia disaster
3 Mounting world crises and accidental nuclear war
1 The Israeli practice raid for nuclear Armageddon
2 America’s launch-on-warning plan for nuclear suicide
3 What you can do during America’s final days
1 The unexpected rebirth of an American gold standard
2 The emergence of the Jewish Question in America
3 The Libyan dogfight and hidden naval war games
1 The Reagan-Begin Axis and expanding world crises
2 Deliberate delays in the Space Shuttle launch
3 The Reagan Budget and corrupt economic plans
1 The Sadat assassination for Nuclear War I
2 The Reagan Administration program to Polandize America
3 The MX decision and America’s first-strike posture

Contents
1 The Christmas Crises for Nuclear War I
2 The American Space Shuttle Failure Number Two
3 A new scandal over America’s disappearing gold
1 The Siberian Express and renewed Russian geophysical warfare
2 Russia’s secret economic coup in dollar assets
3 The shifting alliances for Nuclear War
1 Nuclear war fever and expanding secret warfare
2 The third Space Shuttle challenge to Russia
3 The shortening timetable for Nuclear War I
Audio Letter 73 — March 31, 1982 579
1 The new Phantom war planes of the United States
2 Project Z—the three-phase strategy for Nuclear War I
3 The first military success of the Space Shuttle
1 The military secret of South Georgia Island
2 The secret naval war of the Southern Hemisphere
3 The Rockefeller fear campaign against nuclear war

Audio Letter 75 — May 31, 1982 619
1 The Pentagon countdown toward Nuclear War I
2 The economic attack on the United States Constitution
3 Billy Graham vs. the Bolshevik war lobby
1 The collapse of the Haig anti-war coup de etat
2 The final crises to ignite nuclear war
3 The final Space Shuttle mission for war
1 The growing momentum toward Nuclear War I
2 America’s domestic shift onto a war footing
3 The rising pitch of Russian anti-war warnings
1 The surprise halt to the Beirut holocaust
2 Final Pentagon plans for surprise nuclear war
3 The Russian surprise weapon for nuclear defense
1 The aborted plan for surprise nuclear war
2 The Beirut Massacre for war to come
3 The return of the Siberian Express weather war

Contents
1 America’s economic decline into a new Dark Ages
2 War countdown toward the Israeli Year of Doom
3 Changing of the guard in the new Kremlin
See The Dr. Beter Audio Letters Volume 1 - 1974-1978 for Audio Letters 1 to 40.
I
Who is Dr. Peter David Beter?
Dr. Beter was General Counsel for the Export-Import Bank of Washington; a
candidate for governor for the state of West Virginia; cofounded a mineral ex-
ploration company in Zaire called SODESMIR; represented American gas
utilities while they built a pipeline the length of Argentina; represented mining
interests in underwater manganese nodule exploration in the Pacific; was fea-
tured at financial seminars in New York City, Los Angeles, San Francisco,
Toronto, Montreal, Geneva, and other international financial centers. Dr. Beter
practiced general law in Washington, D.C., from 1951 to 1961, becoming a
member of the U.S. Court of Military Appeals in 1952 and the U.S. Supreme
Court in 1964. Many of his cases were against the federal government, all of
which he won—including one case in which he caught none other than the U.S.
Department of Justice burning records in an attempt to defeat him. The result-
ing decision (Farley vs. U.S., 131 C. Cls. 776 [1955], 127 F Supp. 562) made
new law.
In 1961, President John F. Kennedy appointed Dr. Beter Counsel to the U.S.
Export-Import Bank, the largest government-owned bank in the Western world,
where he served until 1967. After leaving the Export-Import Bank, he became
an international financial and legal consultant, as well as one of the chief devel-
opers of private international business in the Republic of Zaire. He was a
member of the Judicature Society, the Bankers’ Club of America, the Royal
Commonwealth Society of London and the United States Naval Institute. He
was listed in biographical reference works such as Who’s Who in the East, the
Blue Book of London and 2000 Men of Achievement (London).
He wrote prolifically, including his masterwork Conspiracy Against the Dollar.

In 1975, he began releasing his Audio Letters, which are transcribed in this
book, and continued until 1982, producing a total of 80 one-hour Audio Letters.
Dr. Beter died on March 14, 1987. An open license for reproduction of these
Audio letters was granted after his death.
Audio Letter 41
December 26, 1978
Yesterday my family and I were among the millions of Christians world-wide
who were celebrating the birth of our Lord Jesus Christ. And yet, Christmas
itself may soon become a thing of the past in America because even as I say
these words the silent Bolshevik take-over of America is showing itself in dras-
tic changes in church worship in many areas. In every possible way Jesus Christ
is being removed from our minds, and ideas foreign to Christianity are being
substituted in His place. At this rate it will not be long before Christmas itself is
outlawed by the Bolsheviks, just as they did in Russia six decades ago. Mean-
while the Bolsheviks in our midst are using the Christmas season to divert our
attention from their Satanic intrigues, just as they have done in the past.
Economic manipulations are being set in motion to lead to accelerating

STAGFLATION here in America—that is, inflation combined with depression.
Political maneuvering both here and abroad is setting the stage for
BOLSHEVIK DICTATORSHIP—and soon NUCLEAR WAR ONE! Militarily
the Bolsheviks are pressing forward with feverish preparations to fight a war
with Russia that will kill millions of us. For their part, the Bolsheviks also re-
fuse to face reality. For them, America is fast becoming their last pasture to
roam around in, and it is their last stand. They believe they must win here in
order to wreak revenge not only on Russia, which is expelling their kind, but
also a Russia which has become a Christian nation once again.
My three topics for this month are:
Topic #1—THE ECONOMIC COUNTDOWN TOWARD NUCLEAR WAR

ONE;
Topic #2—SPIRITUAL WARFARE AND THE COLLAPSE OF TRUST;
Topic #3—BOLSHEVIK MANEUVERING TO BUY TIME TO REARM.
Topic #1—A week ago, on December 19, a million-dollar discrepancy in

United States gold reserves made headlines. The New York Assay Office of the
3
United States Mint of the United States Treasury is unable to account for at
least 5,200 troy ounces of gold, and some say a lot more may be missing. The
question is: How much more?
My friends, nearly 3-1/2 years ago in July 1975 I recorded Audioletter No. 2.
At that time I gave just one documented example of how big the discrepancies
really are. That example consisted of the January 20, 1965 gold shipment from
Fort Knox to the New York Assay Office. The shipment came to more than 1-
3/4 million ounces of gold, yet it was not shown on the official Treasury listing
of Fort Knox shipments. My friend Mr. Edward Durell forced the United States
Mint to admit this shipment by confronting them with photographic evidence;
and yet subsequent Treasury listings continue to omit that shipment, as well as
others. The simple truth is that the United States is gold poor. The official
Treasury and Federal Reserve documents that list a huge United States gold
hoard are totally false, as I have explained in detail in the past. The dollar has
no backing—and it is dying!
My friends, on November 1, 1978, Jimmy Carter announced the Administra-

tion’s plan supposedly to support the dollar. As part of this plan, it was
announced that the United States Treasury would increase the size of the
monthly gold auctions from America’s alleged gold hoard. Beginning with this
month’s auction on December 19, the amount of the monthly auction was in-
creased to 1.5 million ounces. The problem is that there is no way for the
Treasury to keep up this charade to fool the public for long. When the auctions
began last April at 300,000 ounces per month, the United States had only
around six (6) million ounces available, mostly obtained from the International
Monetary Fund and the Exchange Stabilization Fund. And even this small gold
supply is not all in the form known as good delivery gold. The scheduled Janu-
ary auction will include melted-down foreign coins as one-third of the total
amount to be auctioned off. Can you imagine? But some excuse has to be found
to suspend the Treasury gold auctions before the small gold supply is used up.
The flap over a few thousand missing ounces of gold at the New York Assay
Office could prove ideal for this purpose, or it could be that action will be taken
in February by the Treasury to stop all gold sales because they have not stopped
the decline in the value of the dollar here and abroad. Whatever the excuse, be
warned!
In the past I have explained in detail how the theft of America’s gold was tied
into the larger plan to deliberately destroy the United States dollar. And nearly
three years ago in Audioletter No. 9 I described how the gold manipulations
were used in March 1973 to force Europe to pay World War II reparations of
$45-billion dollars to the Rockefellers, the Rothschilds, and their military part-
4
Audio Letter 41
ners. At this moment David Rockefeller and company is in the process of ex-
torting a second pay-off of $45-billion dollars from the Central Banks of West
Germany, Switzerland, and Japan; but this time it is blackmail pure and simple.
And while it is being done under the guise of the so-called Dollar Support Plan
of the Carter administration, it is actually helping to hurry along the final col-
lapse of the United States dollar.
The alleged Dollar Support Program announced on November 1 includes, as its

most prominent feature, a guarantee arrangement aggregating $30-billion dol-
lars by the United States Government alone. This is exactly the same
arrangement as that suggested in speeches by David Rockefeller. Under this
arrangement the Central Banks of West Germany, Switzerland, and Japan each
agree to support the dollar by exchanging their hard currencies for dollars. In
turn, the Central Banks can use these unwanted dollars to purchase United
States Treasury obligations bearing high interest rates; but, in addition—and
this has not been made public before—each Central Bank is responsible itself
for another $5-billion dollars in support. The total currency credit package,
therefore, adds up to a total of $45-billion dollars. My friends, this has all been
made to appear as a scheme to prop up the dollar, but it’s actually nothing more
than a means by which the Rockefeller multi-national corporations can unload
unwanted dollars and receive in their place hard currencies. When the $45-
billion dollars in so-called support has been used up, as will soon be, the dollar
will be adrift again—even worse off than before. This plan is a bitter pill for
Europe and Japan to swallow, but they are willing to pay the price for David
Rockefeller not to rock the boat when the new European Monetary System goes
into operation on January 1, 1979.
As I revealed nearly six years ago in my book, THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST

THE DOLLAR, there are five (5) Rockefeller-controlled multi-national corpo-
rations which all by themselves can swamp the European monetary system. The
companies are: GENERAL MOTORS, FORD, IBM, UNILEVER, and ROYAL
DUTCH SHELL. Their combined assets exceed those of the governments of
Western Europe.
Here is how the so-called Dollar Support Plan really works:
First, a Rockefeller-controlled multi-national (for example, IBM) dumps $10-

million dollars in West Germany and demands the equivalent in Deutsche-
marks, a hard currency. The Central Bank complies, buying the dollars and
giving IBM the D-marks; but the Central Bank doesn’t want dollars either, and
so the Bank turns around and buys United States Treasury obligations which
bear high interest rates. This increases the national debt—and we American
5
taxpayers pay the interest. So the Rockefeller multi-nationals get all the benefit,
while you and I pay the price!
To make these Treasury obligations attractive to the foreign Central Banks, in-
terest rates in the United States are continuing to rise. This is making a sick
Stock Market even sicker and leading to a collapse in the real estate market by
making homes impossible for most people to finance. That in turn is producing
a downturn in construction with an increase in unemployment that will have a
domino effect throughout our economy. So, prices are accelerating while busi-
ness is headed toward stagnation and depression. The result: STAGFLATION,
as I warned in my book nearly six years ago. The long-range plan is right on
track. And so the gimmick sold to the public as the Carter Administration Dol-
lar Support Plan is merely nothing more than a blackmail payoff, and it is
designed to help bring on a major depression in America.
But the Dollar Support Plan is only half of the plan to produce a depression
with inflation. As I have mentioned, this plan is having a strong impact on one
of the two critical sectors needed to trigger a depression—namely,
CONSTRUCTION. The other critical sector, my friends, is that of
AUTOMOBILES; and there, too, ominous developments are under way. In
Audioletter No. 5 for October 1975 I referred briefly to the wise German
economist whose information was misused in order to bring on the Great De-
pression of the 1930’s. I studied under this man and we became good friends.
He was the one who taught me to look beyond effects—to causes; and he ex-
plained in detail how the two critical sectors of Automobiles and Construction
were manipulated to bring on the depression. Today the same scheme that
worked then is being brought into play again.
Last month on November 7, General Motors gave the first signal of impending
trouble in Automobiles. On that day, General Motors announced a cut by one-
half in the dividend rate on GM stock. It was GM’s way of saying, Hard Times
Ahead; and the Stock Market shivered and went into a slump. At that time there
was no apparent reason for the GM dividend cut, since automobile sales this
year have been good. But, my friends, those who control General Motors know
what lies ahead because cars run on petroleum energy; and as part of the chain
of events leading to NUCLEAR WAR ONE, manipulated oil shortages are on
the way.
Throughout the 20th century oil has been a dominant factor in economics, poli-
tics, and war. As I have detailed on past occasions, World Wars I and II were
both fought over oil. In World War I it was Saudi Arabian and Russian oil, and
Christian Russia was all but consumed in the flames of Bolshevik revolution. In
6
Audio Letter 41
World War II it was Saudi Arabian oil again, and this time the back of the Brit-
ish Empire was broken. It was also about Chinese oil whose attempted
development by the Japanese led finally to atomic fireballs over Hiroshima and
Nagasaki.
Today, NUCLEAR WAR ONE is fast approaching between Russia and the
United States. This time it is different, in one respect—this time it is to be a
grudge match. On one side are the Christian sect who have taken over the
Kremlin after a struggle of six decades; on the other side are their overthrown
deadly enemies, the atheistic Bolsheviks who are rapidly seizing total control
over America. But even in this situation, energy continues to play a major role.
To the Russians, control of nearby sources of energy is a prime consideration
influencing their diplomatic and military strategy. To the Bolsheviks, oil is a
tool of intrigue and economic conquest as well as a trigger for war.
To understand the real significance of the OPEC oil price increase announced
on December 17, it must be viewed in this light of Bolshevik intrigue because,
my friends, what has just taken place is not what it appears to be. Saudi Arabia
has now been lured into a trap; she is to be both scapegoat and victim in the
economic chaos and warfare our rulers are now bringing down upon us all. The
giant oil companies of the Rockefeller cartel will use the OPEC oil price in-
crease as an excuse to reap tremendous windfall profits. As the American
economy falters, public bitterness against Saudi Arabia will be whipped up. At
the same time Saudi Arabia will be blamed for destroying the Camp David ac-
cords between Egypt and Israel. Increasingly we will be told that the United
States must disengage and disconnect from Saudi Arabia. Events will deterio-
rate in the Middle East, with Saudi Arabia being made to appear even more
sinister. Finally it is all to culminate in the American-Israeli limited nuclear
strike against Saudi Arabia’s oil fields. It’s all part of the elaborate American
strategy for a nuclear first strike against Russia, which I revealed in detail four
months ago. So for both economic and military reasons, our rulers were deter-
mined to bring about a substantial increase in OPEC oil prices. To accomplish
this, they have applied a triple squeeze on the OPEC countries.
The first element of this triple squeeze is the declining value of the United
States dollar. Once America’s rulers began to actively debase the dollar, the
dollar in effect was on strike against the OPEC countries. OPEC oil was being
paid for in cheaper and cheaper dollars causing the real income of the OPEC
countries to decline steadily. In addition, the value of dollars already held by
OPEC countries has been evaporating before their very eyes. Yet, in spite of all
of this, OPEC oil prices were kept frozen for the past two years and it was
Saudi Arabia that prevented any price increase from taking place.
7
The second arm of the triple squeeze on OPEC lay within OPEC itself. Agita-
tion to raise prices was led by Venezuela which came under Rockefeller control
long before World War II. At the same time, the CIA agents within the OPEC
structure made sure that OPEC would continue to base oil prices on the dollar.
Our rulers wanted to have a visible connection between oil prices and the value
of the dollar for propaganda purposes. What OPEC will finally be forced to do,
my friends, will be to abandon the dollar within the next six months and begin
pricing oil in terms of a basket of foreign hard currencies. But for now, our rul-
ers have forced OPEC into continuing to price oil in terms of shriveling dollars.
So now, the predominantly Arab OPEC countries have been trapped into ap-
pearing to be the cause of the dollar’s decline, inflation, and the coming
depression here in America.
The third and final arm of the triple squeeze against OPEC involved the actual
triggering of the price increase. Some way had to be found to under-cut the lev-
erage and influence within OPEC of Saudi Arabia long enough to force a
substantial price increase. This was accomplished by means of the recent riot-
ing against the Shah of Iran accompanied by drastic cutbacks in Iran’s oil
production.
The recent trickery involving Iran has been very successful in fooling almost
everyone; and yet, what has just been done is one of the oldest tricks there is.
To illustrate that, let me take you back for a moment to the spring of 1962. At
that time tremendous riots were taking place in Greece, they were being labeled
as Communist-inspired in the press, and likewise secret CIA reports were say-
ing that a virtual Communist take-over of Greece was well under way by means
of these riots. Ex-President Harry Truman, though long out of office, was still
very actively interested in the policies of the American government. Also, Tru-
man had always worried about Greece due to its strategic position on NATO’s
southern flank. Through the Marshall Plan and other means he had done all he
could to keep Greece strong and pro-Western. When President Truman read all
the stories and CIA reports about Communist rioting in the streets of Athens, he
became very worried. But Truman was always suspicious of the CIA, feeling
that they were feeding him half truths. He considered Greece to be too impor-
tant to depend on the probably slanted assessment by the CIA, and concluded
that totally independent intelligence was needed on Greece. And so President
Truman contacted his close personal friend, Robert Kennedy, who was then At-
torney General. One of the things on which Truman and Kennedy saw eye to
eye was their distrust of the CIA. Both were convinced that the CIA was actu-
ally serving a different master—and of course they were right. After conferring
with Truman, Robert Kennedy contacted George Docking, the former Governor
8
Audio Letter 41
of Kansas, who had become a key Director of the United States Export-Import
Bank. In turn, Docking contacted me and asked me to set up the Intelligence
Mission to learn the true situation in Greece. At that time I was Legal Counsel
to the Export-Import Bank, but my true function was very often the gathering
and analysis of intelligence under the imposing cover of the Export-Import
Bank. And while we were at it, President Truman wanted us to deliver a per-
sonal message to the Greek leaders. They were laying plans to erect a statue to
Truman for his great help in keeping Greece in the Western camp after the war.
He appreciated the thought, but he had made clear in rather salty language he
did not want any statues.
As a cover for the Intelligence Mission to Greece, we concocted an Exim Bank

(Export-Import Bank) Mission to Austria, Greece, Turkey, Lebanon, and Spain.
The story was that we were checking up on various projects where Exim Bank
loans were involved. On April 18, 1962, the Exim Bank travel group, which
included Governor Docking and myself, left Washington. After visiting all five
countries, we finally arrived back here in Washington on May 1. The official
report on the trip ended up at 46 typewritten pages. Tucked in, almost lost
among all the words, was only one page about Greece. That single page con-
tained only one statement of true significance, and it had nothing to do with the
rioting which actually prompted the trip. This statement was: “Mr. Zelatas was
particularly concerned about the steady decline in the gold reserves held by the
United States.” Mr. Zelatas was an official of the Central Bank of Greece, and
his actual words were a lot more emphatic. He said to me that if he did not pro-
tect the gold reserves of Greece, “My people would hang me.”
But the real information sought on the trip had been the matter of the Greek ri-
ots and their origin. That information was contained only in a secret report
which I delivered personally to Robert Kennedy. What I had done in Greece
had actually been very simple in spite of the elaborate cover we had to use for
the Mission. I went out and mingled with the crowds of demonstrators. Posing
as a business man from Lebanon, I asked what the rioting was all about; was it
Communist inspired? The answers were all the same. “Nonsense” they said.
“The government itself is putting out the story that it’s Communist inspired.
You see, that way America would give them more money than to Turkey.” The
information which I obtained in this way turned out to be much more accurate
than that given Truman by the CIA. As we all know, Greece did not go Com-
munist; and today few Americans even remember the Greek riots of 1962.
In the same way the riots in Iran have been orchestrated so as to create the im-
age of a threat to accomplish a given purpose. That purpose was to provide an
excuse for a drastic cutback in Iranian oil production that would help trigger an
9
increase in OPEC oil prices. CIA-directed funds were channeled into support
for the rioting in Iran, but this fact was camouflaged by CIA reports beforehand
that foresaw no threat to the Shah. The famous November 11 memo of Jimmy
Carter which criticized the CIA for failing to foresee the rioting in Iran was
only part of the cover tactics to allay suspicion.
In the weeks before the OPEC oil meeting, the crisis atmosphere surrounding
Iran was assisted by certain American multi-national corporations. They began
evacuating personnel from Iran, and this was played up very big on television.
We saw people flooding into airports at Athens, Tel Aviv, Rome, Paris—
getting out in a hurry from Iran. At the same time remarks by Jimmy Carter
added to fears that the Shah was doomed. On November 30 he said, “We do not
have any intention of interfering in the internal affairs of Iran, and we do not
approve any other nation interfering in the internal affairs of Iran.” And in fur-
ther statements on December 1, December 6, December 7, and December 12,
Carter continued to contribute to the crisis in Iran by refusing to publicly back
the Shah. Thus the United States appeared to be deserting him, and the crisis
continued to build in Iran. Meanwhile the oil flow from Iran was cut to a
trickle. The other members of OPEC were put under an enormous and expen-
sive strain in an effort to take up the slack. For weeks before the OPEC meeting
in Abu Dhabi, this was the situation. The result was to pull the rug out from un-
der Saudi Arabia. On December 17, just nine days ago, an OPEC oil price
increase of 14.5% was announced to occur in four stages during 1979. As
planned, everyone was shocked at such a large increase, but the following day
Sheik Yamani, Saudi Arabia’s oil minister, said on the BBC World Service,
“With the situation in Iran, the price of crude went up sharply, and we were not
able to argue so much inside OPEC against an increase like this.” For now, the
turbulence in Iran has served its immediate purpose of triggering a large OPEC
oil price increase; but the pressure, my friends, will be kept on Iran to keep
OPEC in line. The recent artificial turbulence in Iran has been a preview of
things to come. We have now been provided with a careful demonstration of
how vulnerable Iran could be, and how vital her oil supplies are to us and the
world; and when the time is ripe, we will be reminded of these things for war
propaganda purposes.
In Audioletter No. 37 four months ago I detailed the secret American first-strike
strategy to initiate all-out nuclear war with Russia. Under the plan, the Camp
David accords between Egypt and Israel are to be shattered in a way that will
lead to the nuclear destruction of Saudi Arabia’s oil fields. Already the ‘Hate
Saudi Arabia’ campaign is building up in America’s controlled major media.
As for Sadat, he has placed his hopes on President Carter, but in Audioletter
No. 38 I revealed that Carter had suddenly contracted leukemia and cancer in
10
Audio Letter 41
the left side of the head. I must now reveal that the cancer has begun spreading
to other areas of his body. This is the truth behind the recent cover stories about
his hemorrhoid problem; and on Saturday December 23, Carter secretly re-
turned to Washington from his Christmas trip to Plains, Georgia. He was here
for cobalt treatments at the Bethesda Naval Hospital. My friends, in Audioletter
No. 38 I explained how Jimmy Carter’s involuntary departure from the scene is
intended to help ignite war in the Middle East. Now, those events are drawing
closer by the day.
Topic #2—Nearly two months ago, in late October, Soviet Foreign Minister
Andrei Gromyko paid a three-day visit to France. On October 28 Gromyko held
a press conference at the impressive new Soviet Embassy in Paris. Symboli-
cally, the Embassy is located next door to the former headquarters of NATO,
from which France withdrew years ago. In his press conference Gromyko said
that his visit had “confirmed the privileged relations” between France and Rus-
sia; and he added: “I want to stress the word ‘privileged’.” My friends, what
Gromyko was talking about was the unique position of trust that now exists be-
tween France and Russia. It all began long ago when General Charles De
Gaulle, as President of France, began to see the handwriting on the wall. On
one hand the United States was becoming increasingly devious and untrust-
worthy in its dealings with other countries. On the other hand, De Gaulle
learned that something was taking place in the ruling circles of Russia, some-
thing that was gradually making Russia worthy of at least cautious cooperation.
De Gaulle was determined that France should be strong and independent, so in
a very cautious way he began to develop the relations between France and Rus-
sia as a counterbalance to the powerful influence of the United States.
Gradually the process expanded to the mutual benefit of France and Russia.
Meanwhile, American policies in both diplomacy and defense continued to de-
teriorate.
As the United States became bogged down in the quagmire of Vietnam, it be-
came obvious that we were not even fighting the war in a rational military
fashion. The French, for their part, had learned their Indo-China lesson at Dien
Bien Phu in 1954. For this and other reasons, De Gaulle concluded that the
United States had become unreliable as a military partner. France, he decided,
must go it alone, so in the 60’s De Gaulle pulled France out of NATO. The
NATO headquarters building in France was closed, and NATO moved its
headquarters to Brussels, Belgium, where it remains today. In taking this action,
De Gaulle repudiated American leadership in the defense of Europe. He also
signaled a truly independent attitude in foreign policy and defense. The door
was open to increased dialogue and cooperation with Russia. Since that time the
ties between France and Russia have grown steadily. There has been a historic
11
affection between France and Russia that dates back to the time of the czars,
and today it is being restored again through cooperation in all kinds of areas.
Nearly a year ago in Audioletter No. 32 I revealed the Franco-Russian intrigues

in Canada. For the French, it is intended to lead to French domination of Can-
ada; for Russia, it is expediting preparations for the invasion of the United
States. But there are other areas of cooperation between France and Russia
which are much more visible yet generally not recognized for what they are.
For example, the French are contributing heavily to the instrumentation carried
to Venus by the Russian Venera series of space probes. In the realm of military
technology, France is participating with Russia in ongoing testing of charged
particle beams in space. And last spring when France carried out neutron bomb
tests in the Pacific, Russia raised not a word of protest. By contrast, the Ameri-
can neutron bomb is the target of intense Russian propaganda. Yet all of this
does not mean that France has become a secret satellite of Russia; quite the
contrary. France is continuing to pursue a foreign policy rooted in her own in-
terests, and as a result French actions sometimes cause Russia great irritation.
And Russia, for her part, is not above applying intense pressure on France
whenever it is necessary. But even in areas where there is not agreement be-
tween France and Russia, there is an atmosphere of basic understanding. The
situation was summarized in the article distributed by the Soviet Embassy in
Paris before Gromyko arrived there in late October. It was titled:
“MOSCOW-PARIS, AN AXIS OF DETENTE.” It praised relations between

France and Russia as a model of peaceful coexistence between states with dif-
ferent systems, and it noted that their differences “will continue to predetermine
a certain non-coincidence in the positions of the USSR and France in foreign
policy, but the things which unite them are more important.”
My friends, the unique factor tending to unite France and Russia today is
TRUST. Wherever there are specific commitments between the two, there is
trust that neither side will double-cross the other. It is this atmosphere of trust
that is missing between Russia’s rulers of today and the rulers of America. As
Gromyko said in a toast in France, “France practices a policy of detente without
zigzags.” By implication, he was saying that others, especially America, cannot
be trusted. And so when Gromyko called the relations between France and Rus-
sia “privileged,” he was talking about a matter of trust; and the benefits of that
trust can hardly be overstated.
In Audioletter No. 36 last July, I mentioned southern France as one of the areas
that should be spared in NUCLEAR WAR ONE. I can now reveal that Russia’s
campaign of nuclear sabotage has now been extended to Europe. It is by no
12
Audio Letter 41
means as extensive as that which has been carried out in America, which I first
began to make public in Audioletter No. 23 for April 1977; but as of now, al-
most every country in both eastern and western Europe has now been mined
with Russian cobalt bombs in key major cities. Russia’s intention is to use these
bombs as blackmail. She wants to force Western Europe to stay out of the com-
ing war, and she wants to fend off the revolutions in Eastern Europe which the
Roman Catholic Church, dominated increasingly by Bolsheviks, is trying to
bring about. Of all the countries of Europe, only one has so far been completely
spared of all sabotage by the Russians—that country is France. In all of the
other countries Bolshevik influence is great enough that Russia does not feel
able to trust them completely; but where France is concerned, the element of
trust is more powerful than nuclear weapons.
My friends, lack of trust is the real reason for America’s coming catastrophe in
NUCLEAR WAR ONE. There was a time when the United States of America
was respected and honored for keeping its word with other countries, but that
time has long gone. The atheistic Bolsheviks, who are seizing control of Amer-
ica, favor intrigue over honor and deception over truth. As the nationalist
Chinese on Taiwan have just found out, years of solemn promises and guaran-
tees by the United States no longer mean anything at all. The only way
NUCLEAR WAR ONE could be prevented, my friends, would be for the Sa-
tanic Bolsheviks to be thrown out of their positions of power here in America.
Russia today is controlled by Christians; and if America were once again con-
trolled by Christians, trust could be established. But the Christian revolution
which has been taking place in the ruling circles of Russia is not being repeated
here in the United States. Instead, the atheistic Bolsheviks are using the guise of
Christianity itself in order to attack Russia.
Four months ago in Audioletter No. 37 I revealed that Bolshevik influences

within the Vatican were preparing to throw the Roman Catholic Church into the
Bolshevik war against Russia. Two months later I explained how Pope John
Paul I had run afoul of this game plan, and what had happened to him as a re-
sult. I also pointed out the tangible evidence which was available to prove my
charges of deceit and fraud within the Vatican. And now, the real Pope John
Paul II has also fallen by the wayside, contrary to appearances.
As I explained in Audioletter No. 39, Karol Cardinal Wojtyla of Poland was

elected pope because the Bolsheviks wanted to make use of his anti-Communist
image in their war against Russia; but as Pope John Paul II, he also had a flaw
which the Bolsheviks could not tolerate. From the moment he became pope,
Wojtyla made it clear that he intended to shake up the Vatican bureaucracy
known as the CURIA. Initially, he did not re-confirm any top officials of the
13
Curia. He merely asked Cardinal Villot of France to stay on as Secretary of

State “until other decisions have been made.” Through these actions and other
statements, Pope John Paul II made it clear that he was planning to completely
restructure the Curia. Any such restructuring, my friends, would have dealt a
serious blow to Bolshevik power within the Vatican, for it is through the Curia
that the Bolsheviks now exercise their Vatican control; and their key agent,
Giovanni Cardinal Benelli, is one of those who would have been replaced in a
Curia reshuffle. But the Bolsheviks had known that Cardinal Wojtyla, as pope,
would try to change the Curia. As Archbishop of Krakow, he had often spoken
in favor of such restructuring; so when he became pope, they were already pre-
paring to make sure he did not carry out his plans. When Cardinal Wojtyla was
named pope on October 16, 1978, it was only his anti-Communist image that
the Bolsheviks wanted. Wojtyla himself was a strong-minded man, not the type
that usually makes a good puppet; and so, even before his election, Wojtyla’s
unacknowledged replacement was being prepared.
For the first few weeks of Pope John Paul II’s reign, he was kept busy with
public appearances. On October 27 he began his shake-up of the Curia by firing
a veteran Cardinal, Cardinal Felici, as President of an important Vatican coun-
cil. But his heavy schedule of public activities tied his hands for moving rapidly
on the promised reforms. Then in mid November the Pope virtually dropped out
of sight for a time, but on November 21 the Vatican released an announcement
that was as brief as it was stunning. As of that date, Pope John Paul II was said
to have confirmed in their posts all of the top Curia officials who had served the
previous two popes, without explanation. We were told in effect that Pope John
Paul II had undone his own plans for Vatican reform.
My friends, here is what actually happened. During the period in mid Novem-
ber when Pope John Paul II was seen very little, his poisoning was in process.
Beginning November 18 this took the form of a very powerful air-borne poison
based on plutonium and zirconium, a variant of the poison that produces Le-
gionnaires’ Disease. The Pope’s condition deteriorated rapidly, and he died at
approximately 4:00 P.M. Rome time on November 20, 1978. Shortly thereafter
his body was secretly removed from the Vatican, being taken first to an interim
location about 45 miles northwest of Rome. By 8:00 P.M. Rome time the fol-
lowing evening, November 21, his body had been cremated. It was earlier that
same day that the Vatican issued the terse announcement saying the entire Cu-
ria had been re-confirmed by the Pope. Since that time an actor has been
playing the part of Pope John Paul II. This man is neither Polish nor Christian.
Those in Europe who have more opportunities than we in America to see the
Pope should observe him closely. Pay close attention to the voice, the manner-
isms, the closeness of the photography; compare the pictures of the dead Pope
14
Audio Letter 41
and this actor, and the exact nature of his public utterances. These days the ‘ac-
tor Pope’ is the most visible pope in history, made so by the controlled major
media; and his pronouncements are moving the Roman Catholic Church closer
and closer to open confrontation against Russia.
My friends, in Audioletter No. 39 I explained how the Satanic fraud surround-

ing the death of Pope John Paul I could be proven. Now the fraud has taken the
life of another Pope, and 700,000,000 Catholics are gradually being called to
arms in the cause of Bolshevik warfare against reviving Christianity in Russia!
Topic #3—Last month I devoted Audioletter No. 40 to a detailed explanation of

the gruesome events which had just taken place in the Republic of Guyana. As I
explained then, the Jonestown tragedy was a mass murder, not a mass suicide.
It was staged in order to provide access to Guyana for a military operation—a
commando raid to wipe out a secret Russian missile base. The base was the
same one about which I had begun warning over four years ago in the summer
of 1974. It was basically an American operation, but with heavy participation
by the Israelis because of their unparalleled experience in such operations. And
when I recorded Audioletter No. 40 last month, I was able to report that Jim
Jones had not died at Jonestown but had escaped. The body identified by the
FBI as that of Jones was that of a look-alike, a double. Jim Jones had followed
an elaborate escape route which ended up in Israel on November 30, the same
day I recorded Audioletter No. 40. Jim Jones was alive, my friends, but he was
not well. It is time now to finish the nightmare story of Jim Jones.
When Jones arrived in Israel he was suffering from cancer—in his head, in his
left lung, in his stomach, and in his colon. After an intelligence debriefing near
Jerusalem, he began receiving cobalt treatments for the cancer in his head. The
treatments began on December 4, but they did not last long. The following day
Jones was told that it would be necessary to transfer him to another location
where more comprehensive treatment could be given for his advanced cancer.
So shortly after 5:00 P.M. Israeli time, Jones boarded a small airplane with a
doctor and three other men. The plane headed northwest toward Turkey, and
then inland along the border between Turkey and Syria. At about 35 miles east
of the town of Jerablus on the Euphrates River, the plane crossed briefly to the
Syrian side of the border. At that point the door of the plane was thrown open
and three men grabbed Jones. In his weak condition and caught by surprise, he
was thrown out of the plane with almost no struggle.
Meanwhile Dr. Lawrence Schacht was making his way to Israel, unaware of the
fate that had befallen Jones. Unlike Jones, Schacht had been an Israeli agent
from the beginning, and now he was returning home; but just as with Jones, the
15
FBI has been used to give false reports that Schacht died at Jonestown. It was
Schacht who prepared the cyanide poison mixtures which were administered,
some orally, some by injection, to the Jonestown victims. The cover stories
about Schacht in the controlled major media of the United States have generally
given him an idealistic image, but a Jonestown survivor who worked with
Schacht in the Jonestown Medical Department paints a far different picture. She
has been quoted as saying: “He was a sadist, he liked to see people in pain. He
didn’t do anything to relieve pain.” On the day when Jim Jones was thrown out
of an airplane over Syria, Dr. Schacht was making his way to Paramaribo, the
capital of Surinam. Just before noon Washington time December 9, he left
Paramaribo by jet across the Atlantic, taking with him a large amount of gold.
His route took him to Conakry, Guinea; Bamako, Mali; and across the corner of
Egypt near Wadi Halfa, Sudan, on the way to the Red Sea. At approximately
3:00 A.M. Israeli time December 11, Dr. Schacht arrived at Jerusalem. Dr.
Schacht was afflicted with cancer in his head and throat; and, like Jones, had
been promised the best in treatment for it upon arrival in Israel. But Schacht
was given only a brief examination near Jerusalem and then told that he would
have to be moved to another location for better treatment. There was no need
for a long debriefing of Schacht, since Jones had already told everything there
was to tell; and so barely an hour after his arrival in Jerusalem, Schacht was in
the air again in a small plane with four other men. Three and a half hours later
Dr. Lawrence Schacht met his end, as Jones had done six days earlier—falling
from the skies to a lonely spot along the Turkish-Syrian border.
My friends, it’s hard for most of us even to imagine such diabolical and cold-
blooded activities as these; but sadism and disregard for human life were the
hallmarks of the Jonestown mass murder, and in the end those who sell their
souls and their country for gold always pay the price!
As I mentioned last month, Operation Guyana was successful in wiping out the
Russian missile base there, yet this will have very little impact now on Russia’s
ability to pulverize America in NUCLEAR WAR ONE. What it did accomplish
was to buy a little time for our rulers for the coming war and to help throw the
Russians off balance. Our rulers are also now trying to buy more time to put off
NUCLEAR WAR ONE by a few months by establishing full diplomatic rela-
tions with Red China. In their feverish attempts to re-arm the United States in
preparation for war, they are willing to do almost anything that will buy a little
more time. Crash military programs are secretly under way, but even crash pro-
grams take time to bear fruit. The ruling circles in Red China are well aware
that our own rulers cannot do without Red China as an ally against Russia, and
so three months ago on September 19 they applied pressure tactics to force full
recognition by the United States. On that date, as I revealed that month in
16
Audio Letter 41
Audioletter No. 38, a secret agreement in principle for a secret alliance was
signed between Russia and China. But the Chinese leadership is far from
united, unlike that of Russia; and while the Hua faction wants to side with Rus-
sia, the rival faction headed by Deng Hsiao-ping wants to go with America for a
while. China can dictate tremendous concessions by the United States—but can
dictate nothing to Russia. And so the ink was hardly dry on the Sino-Russian
agreement of September 19 when it was used to panic our own rulers. As Sep-
tember 19 followed the sun around the world from China to America, news of
the Sino-Russian secret agreement was flashed to Chinese agents here in Amer-
ica by the Deng faction. That same day, September 19, our rulers were
confronted with the reality of this agreement and they were told that it could be
undone only if two things took place. First, the Deng faction must be assisted in
overcoming the faction headed by Chairman Hua; then, to consolidate Deng’s
power and China’s allegiance to the United States, full diplomatic relations
must be granted between America and Red China on China’s terms.
The major media, while they have not explained all this, have drawn attention
to September 19 as the critical day. For example, an article in the Washington
Star on December 16 said:
“In the fall the talks entered a new phase. On September 19 the Chinese consul
in the United States visited Carter in the White House, conferring with him in
the Oval Office.” The next day the Washington Post said near the end of a long
article about the China decision: “By this account, the crucial United States de-
cision was taken September 19, two days after the euphoric end of the Egypt-
Israeli summit meeting with Carter at Camp David.” Soon the great wall poster
battle erupted in Peking. Deng was making a bid to upset the power of Chair-
man Hua, and he succeeded; and as the war of words died out, Washington
prepared feverishly to announce full diplomatic relations with China. That an-
nouncement on December 15 was the third major surprise handed to Russia by
our rulers in less than a year. The first was the Korean air liner intelligence mis-
sion into northern Russia last April; the second was the Battle of Guyana last
month, wiping out the secret Russian missile base there; and now Red China.
But one has to ask: Where is all this really leading?
On December 15, the day of the Red China announcement, there were only six
Russian Cosmospheres on patrol over Red China; but less than two days later,
105 Cosmospheres have taken up their positions there. All Cosmospheres are
equipped among other things with exotic lighting equipment for nighttime psy-
chological warfare. The Chinese, robbed of all religion by their godless regime,
are prime targets for such tactics. Who is to say how millions of Chinese might
react if 100-plus Cosmospheres began haunting the night skies of China, flash-
17
ing and hovering at low altitudes? In any case, our rulers cannot hope to do
more than buy time with China. To achieve that, they are even willing to bleed
off some of America’s productive capacity in building up China. With whatever
time that will buy, they hope to improve their readiness for war by concentrat-
ing on secret weapons.
The surprises dealt to Russia during the past year do prove that Russian intelli-
gence, while it is very good, is not perfect. They can be surprised. This fact is
not lost on the Kremlin either, and they are preparing some surprises of their
own. I mentioned last month that geophysical warfare is high on the list of
probable techniques to be used by Russia in retaliation for Guyana, but I can
now reveal that the Russian Navy has removed the seven gigaton-range super
bombs which had been planted around the Philippines when I recorded Audio-
letter No. 24. The Philippines, the only Christian nation in Asia, has now come
to terms with Russia. This is true even though the United States may continue
to use the huge Clark Air Force Base and the Subic Bay Naval Base there.
With the new Russian cosmo-strategic weaponry, these bases are no longer so
important. Instead, the Russians are reinforcing their network of cobalt bombs
along America’s west coast itself. As of my latest report on December 20, there
are now 46 bombs planted where they could devastate southern California.
Along the California coast eight (8) are above the 36th parallel of latitude, four
(4) above the 35th parallel, twelve (12) above the 34th parallel, and ten (10)
above the 33rd parallel. There are nine (9) more between the 33rd parallel in
California and the north end of the Gulf of California which contains three (3)
more bombs above the 31st parallel. Some of these bombs are at sea, the others
are generally underground in caves and mine shafts where they can help to trig-
ger a massive earthquake. It remains to be seen how soon these capabilities will
be used; but one thing seems clear, the United States has now had three strikes
against Russia—the Korean air liner incident, Operation Guyana, and now Red
China. Any hope for trust on the part of Russia is gone; and now, it is Russia’s
turn at bat.
On the evening of December 17, just over a week ago, the CBS television pro-
gram “60 Minutes” devoted its lead story to the particle beam-weapons race.
The program pointed out the potentially decisive importance of particle beams,
and the fact that Russia is far ahead in this field. Within minutes my telephone
began ringing. Fifteen months ago when I first revealed Russia’s operational
status in particle beam-weapons, they were being ridiculed, so at that time
many people paid little attention to what I revealed; but now, callers were say-
ing: “Do you see what’s on television? You were right!”
18
Audio Letter 41
My friends, I warned long ago about the false wisdom called “Wait and see.”
Now those who have chosen that course have waited; and now they are begin-
ning to see. If we keep waiting, my friends, we will get to see it all—and we
will all believe on the day that television programs are interrupted by a surprise
announcement that NUCLEAR WAR ONE HAS COME!
Until next month, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God bless
each and every one of you.
19
Audio Letter 42
January 31, 1979
Eight days ago Jimmy Carter delivered what is sure to be his only “State of the
Union” message to Congress and the Nation, and in some ways his speech truly
reflected the desperate state of our Union. In a feeble effort to call forth echoes
of John F. Kennedy and F.D.R., Carter spoke of a “new foundation” as the
theme of his wandering Administration. This phrase, taken from the old Bol-
shevik anthem, “The Communist Internationale,” is a fitting title for a
government that is now far gone in a quiet Bolshevik revolution. Last June he
said Russia must choose between “confrontation and cooperation”; but, since
then, America’s military plight has gotten steadily worse. And in his “State of
the Union” speech, Carter said “...it is a myth that we must choose between
confrontation and capitulation”; and, just for good measure, he repeated the
same lie his Administration has been giving out now for sixteen months ever
since the Battle of the Harvest Moon, and that is: “...nearly all issues of SALT
II have been resolved.” And while he was at it, Carter also said, “I am grateful
that in the past year—as in the year before—no American has died in combat
anywhere in the world.” Yet only two months ago, the Jonestown mass murder
and the Battle of Guyana took place to wipe out the secret Russian missile base
there, and there were American soldiers who did die there—their coffins are
still at Dover, Delaware, unclaimed.
As he spoke, Carter was heavily medicated for pain, his cancer still getting
worse despite frequent cobalt treatments for his so-called hemorrhoid problem.
Meanwhile, the cancer in his head which I first reported four months ago in
Audio Letter No. 38, is not being treated and is growing rapidly. It now engulfs
an area about 3-1/2 by 4 inches inside his left temple and around the left eye.
By March the effects should be publicly visible in his unusual behavior. Soon
the 25th Amendment to the United States Constitution will come into play
again when Carter dies, resigns, or is removed for incapacity. But the man who
had hoped to benefit again from his own 25th Amendment, Nelson Rockefeller,
has just passed from the scene forever.
My three topics this month are:
21
Topic #1—THE DECLINE OF THE HOUSE OF ROCKEFELLER
Topic #2—THE BOLSHEVIK PLOT FOR A POPE’S REVOLUTION
Topic #3—UFOs, IFOs, AND RUSSIA’S MASTER SECRET WEAPON.
Topic #1—As war clouds were gathering over Europe and Asia in the 1930’s,
four men in America were gathering the reins of world-wide power. These men
were the third generation heirs to the most powerful dynasty the world has ever
known, THE ROCKEFELLER DYNASTY. They were the four Rockefeller
brothers—John D. III, Nelson, Laurance, and David. There was also another
brother, Winthrop, as well as a sister Abby; but Winthrop cared little about
world power and intrigue, and so long ago he was cast aside by the other four
brothers. Winthrop went his own way, and eventually spent two terms as Gov-
ernor of Arkansas before dying in 1973. Meanwhile the other four brothers
were taking the very fate of Western civilization into their very own hands. As I
have detailed on many past occasions, they played key roles in bringing on
World War II and using it to expand their empire. In speeches during the war
their father, John D. Rockefeller, Jr., described the carnage as a great crusade.
In glowing terms he painted it all as well worth the suffering, death, and trag-
edy for millions upon millions. The Rockefellers believe in the old Chinese
proverb that “Opportunities arise out of crises”; but as I reminded you last
month, World War II was really fought over oil, and as a wise old friend of
mine once said: “Oil is thicker than blood so long as it is the other fellow’s
blood.”
As the moans of World War II slowly died away, the four brothers surveyed the
vistas of world domination that seemingly lay before them. World War II had
shattered their most important rival in oil and world power, the British Empire.
At the same time, the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance had emerged stronger
than ever—an indispensable key to their future plans; and best of all, the oil
treasure house of Saudi Arabia now lay firmly in the Rockefeller grasp. Using
their unprecedented profits from Saudi Arabian oil, the Rockefeller cartel was
soon to outstrip all financial rivals world-wide. For three decades following
World War II, the world-wide power of the Rockefeller cartel expanded without
letup under the hands of the four brothers. Politically, economically, and mili-
tarily they appeared to have the Midas touch. Their plans—unknown and
unsuspected by the general public—usually went off without a hitch, and right
on schedule. Through deliberate no-win wars and fabricated American setbacks
in foreign relations, the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance made steady progress
toward their joint take-over of the entire world. At the same time, beginning in
1961, the Brothers set in motion their Machiavellian two-pronged strategy for
22
Audio Letter 42
an eventual wartime double-cross of their Soviet allies. In this way, the Broth-
ers were planning to finally pick up all the marbles for themselves. Their goal
was nothing less than to rule all of the Planet Earth through a One-World Gov-
ernment.
With the dawn of the 1970s, the four Rockefeller brothers were embarking on
the final decade of their plan to seize control of the world. They were deter-
mined that the goal be reached within their own lifetimes. Secret joint plans
with their Soviet allies were right on track for a carefully programmed thermo-
nuclear war in the late 1970s. The war, NUCLEAR WAR ONE, was being
programmed to involve the United States as the prime battleground; so to get
ready for the war, the Brothers were rapidly transferring as much of America’s
real wealth, including our gold and our technological know-how, into their own
coffers overseas. America was being turned into a hollow shell—impressive on
the surface but ripe for a shocking defeat by the Soviet Union. And yet, in a se-
cret final twist, America’s Moon Program was setting the military stage for
Russia’s destruction as the climax of the coming war. There appeared to be
nothing to stop the four brothers; but then, within the past several years, things
began to go wrong. They began making mistakes, and slowly but surely events
began slipping loose from their former iron grip. Three and one-half years ago
in Audio Letter No. 2 I pointed out some of the early symptoms of this slippage
in Rockefeller control. Barely a year later in the summer of 1976, their carefully
drawn plans began to be torn apart. Suddenly the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alli-
ance of nearly 60 years was being terminated unilaterally by the Kremlin. The
still secret underwater missile crisis of 1976 was under way, as I reported in
Audio Letters Nos. 14 through 16. As my older listeners know, this crisis led to
my meeting for more than an hour with the late General George S. Brown, then
Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. The meeting took place on September 16,
1976, in General Brown’s office at the Pentagon. In Audio Letter No. 16 I re-
ported that meeting to my listeners. Thanks to the brave leadership of General
Brown, the United States had been spared a surprise nuclear attack, and now
there was a golden opportunity to completely stop America’s march toward nu-
clear war. But the four brothers simply could not believe that their secret
alliance with their Bolshevik allies in the Kremlin was gone for good. In the
autumn of 1976 they did not yet understand that the Bolsheviks themselves had
lost control of the Kremlin—that would not become clear for another year. And
so they began trying desperately to appease the Kremlin in an effort to restore
the alliance. An early victim of this insane effort was none other than General
Brown. Within weeks of my meeting with him, he was cut down by the con-
trolled major media and passed rapidly into obscurity. In Audio Letter No. 23 I
detailed just how much General Brown had sacrificed for his loyal service to
America. And for those who have heard what I warned about then, I can only
23
point out that General Brown did not actively serve out his term as Chairman of
the Joint Chiefs—nor did he live long.
Then came the worst miscalculation by the four Rockefeller brothers and their
intimates—it led to disaster in space in September 1977. As I described that
month in Audio Letter No. 26, the Russians succeeded in wiping out the Rocke-
feller ace in the hole for the coming nuclear war. In the Battle of the Harvest
Moon, September 27, 1977, the crew of the secret American beam-weapons
base in Copernicus Crater were killed by a Russian neutron particle beam-
weapon. It was fired at the moon from earth orbit by Cosmos 954, a manned
Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satellite. Four months later, Cosmos 954 made an
emergency landing in northern Canada. It was described in the news as a nu-
clear satellite crash.
The Battle of the Harvest Moon was only the beginning of a complete revolu-
tion in the military equation between Russia and America, because during the
final months of 1977, Russia began deploying all three legs of her still secret
space triad of military weapons. The first leg of the space triad are the manned
Cosmos Interceptors—that is, Killer Satellites. During the six months following
the Battle of the Harvest Moon they began methodically destroying America’s
fleet of spy satellites over Russia. That led in April 1978 to the Korean airliner
intelligence mission over northern Russia, as I detailed in Audio Letter No. 33.
Immediately after the Battle of the Harvest Moon, the Russian manned space
program suddenly sprang to life. Suddenly the Russians began launching one
batch of cosmonauts after another into orbit, setting new records and accom-
plishing new feats of all kinds. Meanwhile, without publicity, Russia’s first
manned landing on the moon took place. The landing was made on October 16,
1977 on the back side in Jules Verne Crater; and by late the following month,
as I reported in Audio Letter No. 28, Russian charged particle beam-weapons
were already operational on the near side of the moon. These Russian moon
bases can blast any visible spot on earth in less than two (2) seconds, and they
constitute the second leg of the Russian space triad.
On December 2, 1977, the third leg of Russia’s space triad announced its pres-
ence to our surprised leaders. On that day tremendous air quakes—loud blasts
in the atmosphere—began rolling in from the sea along America’s east coast. In
Audio Letter No. 29 I described the amazing Russian Hovering Platforms re-
sponsible for these blasts. Like the other two legs of the Russian space triad,
these Hovering Platforms—called Cosmospheres by the Russians—are armed
with charged particle beam-weapons. All of these secret weapons were
unleashed operationally with blinding speed by Russia just over a year ago.
24
Audio Letter 42
They ruined the original Rockefeller plan for a carefully programmed

NUCLEAR WAR ONE to end with the surprise destruction of Russia, and they
drastically altered the military balance between East and West.
As a result, the leadership of the four Rockefeller brothers in their world-wide

power structure began to be seriously challenged over a year ago. They had
made mistakes and their judgment was no longer accepted so easily by their
most powerful associates and allies. At the same time, something had to be
done, and quickly, to respond to the altered situation. For these and other rea-
sons, Rockefeller power has increasingly been turning toward support for a
sophisticated new Bolshevik revolution here in America. This began more than
a year ago. In February 1978 I reported that Rockefeller doors world-wide were
about to be thrown open to Red China in the fight against Russia. Today we
hear all about America playing the so-called “China card”; but, as I told you six
months ago, China is actually playing the America card. China’s goal is a re-
stored alliance with Russia on the best possible terms, later on.
More than a year ago the four Rockefeller brothers began using these and other
stopgap measures trying to save their dynasty from utter ruin; but they have
been trying to swim against the current of history. Last June I pointed out the
historical fact that all true dynasties have a natural life span of approximately
100 years. By that standard the end of the Rockefeller dynasty is inevitably at
hand. The very next month, July 1978, the lights began going out in the House
of Rockefeller. The oldest of the four brothers, John D. III, met his fate alleg-
edly in an automobile accident—and a bizarre accident to say the least—near
his estate in Pocantico Hills, New York. That month I reviewed the true legacy
of John D. Rockefeller III. Now, hardly six months later, the second oldest of
the four brothers has abruptly left the scene. The true legacy of Nelson Rocke-
feller remains as I reviewed it more than 3-1/2 years ago in Audio Letter No. 1;
but just five days ago, on the evening of January 26, 1979, he died.
My friends, in life Nelson Rockefeller craved publicity, yet his death is

shrouded in obscurity and unanswered questions. Normally it is customary for
the body of an important public personality, such as a Senator or Vice-
President, to lie in state so that the public can pay their last respects. This ser-
vice was offered to Nelson Rockefeller’s family here in Washington by the U.S.
Senate leaders, and was rejected—so there was no lying in state, no formal
viewing at all. Instead, he was accorded a hasty cremation, an unusual step in
the case of the Rockefellers, and a strictly private memorial service. Originally
it was announced by Rockefeller aides that the cremation would take place
Monday morning, January 29, the day before yesterday. This was to be fol-
lowed by the memorial service at 11:00 A.M. Meanwhile, reports about the
25
circumstances of Rockefeller’s death have been contradictory and strange, rais-

ing one question after another. In response, Rockefeller spokesmen have kept
changing their story from one day to the next; and as the questions multiplied,
the cremation was hurried up. It was performed a day ahead of time, on Sunday
morning. Later that day, a family spokesman announced the cremation to re-
porters, but he at first refused to identify the crematorium that was used and
gave no explanation for the rush involved. There had been no change in the
plans for the memorial service, which was still scheduled for the next day.
My friends, the strange circumstances surrounding the death of Nelson Rocke-

feller are not just a morbid puzzle—they have to do with the fate of the United
States and of Western civilization! He was one of the most powerful men on
earth and, by his own choice, a public figure. Like the mass deaths in Guyana
two months ago, Nelson Rockefeller’s death will affect your life and mine. Just
as happened with Guyana, a smoke screen of maneuvers, changing stories, and
confusion are being used to hide the truth about his death; but just as with Guy-
ana, I believe you have a right to know the truth.
At first the mass media chanted in unison that Rockefeller died of a heart attack
while working at his desk on the 56th floor of Rockefeller Center. The time of
death was said to be 10:15 P.M., Friday evening January 26, 1979. By the next
day, however, a conflicting story emerged. It was said that he had died not at
Rockefeller Center but at a town house located at 13 West 54th Street. Accord-
ing to the New York Times for Sunday January 28, “Neighbors and passersby
reported that when the ambulance arrived a woman in an evening dress
emerged from 13 West 54th Street and accompanied the attendants as they car-
ried Mr. Rockefeller to the vehicle.” By Saturday afternoon the official story
changed to the town house address. The Washington Post said on Sunday Janu-
ary 28, “Rockefeller collapsed in his first-floor office in a town house at 13
West 54th Street at about 10:15 P.M. Friday, and apparently died instantly,
family spokesman Hugh Morrow reported. It was initially reported by Morrow
that Rockefeller had suffered his heart attack in his 56th floor office at 30
Rockefeller Plaza.” The Post then quotes Morrow as saying, “Actually the
death occurred in Mr. Rockefeller’s private office. The error was entirely
mine.”
But now there were new questions. People wondered: Who was the mystery
woman in the evening dress? Family spokesman Morrow said he did not know
of any woman being present at the time of Rockefeller’s death, according to the
Sunday New York Times; instead, he said that the emergency number 911 had
been called “by an unidentified woman neighbor.” Reportedly the only call for
an ambulance was made by means of the 911 emergency number, and even
26
Audio Letter 42
more serious questions boiled up in this connection. For one thing, this number
is for use by the general public in police and fire emergencies; and as New
Yorkers know, it is rarely answered promptly—and yet there has been no report
of so much as a call for a private ambulance. And still spokesman Morrow said
by Saturday afternoon that a body guard and a chauffeur had been with Rocke-
feller at the time of death.
Even worse was the question of the delay before the call was placed. Rockefel-
ler spokesmen kept saying that Rockefeller had died at 10:15 P.M., even after
they changed their story about where he died, but Police records showed that
the 911 call was not placed until over an hour later, at 11:16 P.M. During the
missing hour, Rockefeller aides worked feverishly, making arrangements to
prevent any autopsy from taking place. By the next day, Sunday January 28,
Rockefeller spokesman Morrow delivered his third version of the story to the
press. According to the New York Times for the following day, he said, “that
the death actually had occurred at about 11:15 P.M., and that the two people
present when Mr. Rockefeller was stricken at the town house were Andrew
Hoffman, a security aide, and Megan Ruth Marshack, a 31-year old staff assis-
tant on Mr. Rockefeller’s recent art projects. Miss Marshack, who resides a few
doors away at 25 W. 54th Street, placed the call to police within a minute after
Mr. Rockefeller was stricken, Mr. Morrow said yesterday. On Saturday Mr.
Morrow had said he did not know of any woman being present.” Even the age
of 31 given for Miss Marshack by Morrow later turned out to be wrong; but
with this newly revised story another Rockefeller spokesman said Sunday, ac-
cording to the New York Times the next day that “There was no discrepancy in
the hour, it was simply a case of people under pressure making a mistake.” And
also according to the New York Times, Spokesman Morrow also told reporters
that Miss Marshack arrived at the town house for work around 9:00 P.M. Friday
evening “wearing a long black evening gown.”
But most important of all is the question of the cause of death; and by the time
spokesman Morrow gave his third version of events to reporters on Sunday
January 28, the rush, rush cremation of Nelson Rockefeller had already taken
place. The chance that an autopsy might allow the truth to leak out had been
eliminated. Here, too, confusion reigned supreme in the public announcements.
For example, the New York Daily News for Sunday January 28 reported that it
had learned from a member of the family, “that Rockefeller had been complain-
ing of chest pains for the last week or so, but no one, it was reported, thought
the pains were significant and little attention was paid to them.” Yet elsewhere
in the flood of Rockefeller items in the same newspaper there are the words of
Dr. Kenneth Ryland, Rockefeller’s personal physician for forty years. He is
27
quoted as saying, “I examined him last Wednesday, and he was in excellent

shape. I was shocked, completely shocked.”
As in the case of the strange death of Nelson’s brother John D. III last July in
an alleged automobile accident, we may never know the full details about Nel-
son Rockefeller’s death. Even now the young female aide who was with John
D. III at the time of his sudden death, is still in seclusion. She is in a hospital in
Westchester County, New York, under heavy guard; and now Rockefeller
spokesmen are trying to hide the truth about Nelson’s death. As a result, their
statements reported in the press media are a study in confusion.
But, my friends, there was no confusion about what was to take place late that
Friday evening, January 26, 1979. As is always done in intelligence circles, the
psychological profile of Nelson Rockefeller had been studied. It would show
that it was often his custom after dinner with his family on Fridays to leave to
go to his private five-story town house at 13 West 54th Street for whatever pur-
pose. It would also show that on these occasions his regular large contingent of
armed guards would be off duty. On that Friday evening he made his usual trip
to the town house. There he became preoccupied with doing what he had gone
there to do. The moment came when his guard was completely down, and at
that precise moment a shot was fired. The bullet tore into Rockefeller’s head
with professional accuracy. After the shooting, his 25-year old female aide ap-
parently collapsed in a semi-state of shock. At last report she is said by
Rockefeller spokesmen to be in seclusion and unavailable for comment.
As I say these words, the Rockefeller cover-up efforts are continuing, but new
questions and glaring inconsistencies keep arising. For example, Rockefeller
spokesman Hugh Morrow said for nearly two days that he did not know of any
woman being present when Rockefeller died; but just yesterday the New York
Times said that, “The Associated Press yesterday reported that at 4:00 A.M.
Saturday, less than five hours after Mr. Rockefeller died, one of its reporters,
recalling that Miss Marshack had worked as a radio AP news reporter in Wash-
ington before being hired by Mr. Rockefeller, had called her seeking a radio
report on his death. She declined to make the radio tape, the Associated Press
said, but told the reporter that Mr. Morrow was with her in her apartment and
might speak to him later.” When asked about this by the Associated Press, Mor-
row reportedly replied that “Whatever Megan said at 4:00 A.M., I’m not going
to comment on it. I’ve been through this thing over and over again, and I’m
tired of it.”
The two remaining brothers, Laurance and David, believe they cannot afford to
let the truth be generally known about Nelson’s death. It would raise too many
28
Audio Letter 42
questions at this critical time. The greatest protection for their power has always
been the false halo of philanthropy. That tranquil image would be shaken to its
foundations by public knowledge that Nelson Rockefeller was murdered. And
so because of the ugly head wound, his body was cremated with dispatch and
his death attributed publicly to a heart attack.
The once mighty four-man unit comprised by the four Rockefeller brothers is
now very badly crippled. David and Laurance will need desperately to have
someone join their inner family circle as a replacement for Nelson Rockefeller;
and as it happens, the man most likely to don Nelson’s cloak of power is al-
ready conveniently at hand. In fact, he was with Rockefeller only hours before
his death. He is the man most responsible for America’s disastrous intelligence
gap, as I discussed at the Pentagon over two years ago with the late General
George S. Brown. Several years ago a former CIA officer described this man to
me as “a little Hitler waiting in the wings”; and now after 25 years as Nelson
Rockefeller’s political protege, he now has a chance to become a member of the
inner family circle of the Rockefeller family—and if he does, which is likely,
he will be the man who will have gained the most from the murder of Nelson
Rockefeller. His name: HENRY KISSINGER.
Topic #2—Here in the United States the death of Nelson Rockefeller stole
some of the headlines from another major event, which is drawing to a close.
On Friday afternoon, January 26, just a few hours before Rockefeller was
killed, the man who parades as Pope John Paul II arrived in Mexico. Today,
after five tumultuous days there, he is returning to Rome.
It was five months ago in Audio Letter No. 37 that I first alerted my listeners to
the drastic changes that were afoot in the Roman Catholic Church. Pope John
Paul I had been elected just the previous day; but as I explained then, Bolshevik
influences within the Vatican were preparing to throw the Church into their
fight against Russia, which has wrestled free of Bolshevik control, and Pope
John Paul I, soon known as the smiling pope, vanished from the scene barely a
month later. In Audio Letter No. 39 I explained how he had run afoul of the
Bolshevik game plan, and what had happened to him as a result. And last
month I revealed that his successor, the real Pope John Paul II, has also been
eliminated. In his place there is now an actor, a man who is neither Polish nor
Christian, who is doing the bidding of his Bolshevik masters. He bears a close
resemblance to the man he replaced, but there are visual clues to look for.
Close-up photographs of this actor should be compared carefully with those
taken in October 1978 immediately after Cardinal Wojtyla was named Pope. As
identification experts know, a person’s ears are almost like fingerprints in their
29
uniqueness, and you will discover that the ears along with other detailed fea-
tures are not the same now as they were at first.
Since making public the tragic destruction from within that is taking place in
the Catholic Church, I have received heartbreaking letters from Catholic priests
everywhere. They have confided in me about their torment because of the Bol-
shevik control, which is spreading like cancer throughout the Catholic Church.
From my own past experience, I share their deep sadness. To report the machi-
nations of Bolshevism in the Church is painful for me; but, my friends, the
central and dominant issue facing men of good will today is that of the Satanic
forces rampant on Planet Earth. In this vein, some Catholic priests have re-
vealed their fear to me that to remain in their priestly positions would
jeopardize their faith itself.
Last month I pointed out how important publicity is for the actor pope in the
anti-Russian game plan of the Bolsheviks. Describing this game plan, I said:
“These days the actor pope is the most visible pope in history, made so by the
controlled major media”; and early this month, on January 6, the New York
Times echoed this very theme in an article titled “JOHN PAUL’S WINNING
WAYS.” The second sentence read: “He has become the most highly visible
pope in modern history, sallying forth from the remoteness of the Vatican every
few days and charming the crowds, from school children to old people and
from nuns to soccer players.” Ironically the same article adds later on that: “He
plays to different crowds with the skills of the former actor that he is.”
My friends, the actor pope is being used as a Pied Piper. Strictly as a tactic, he
is singing a tune of progressive conservatism that is music to the ears to untold
millions of Catholics, yet his two major themes, “Religious Freedom” and
“Human Rights,” are actually centered on Man, not God. With this clever coun-
terfeit of the real message of Jesus Christ, deadly politics is being disguised as
religion; and the Catholic world, entranced by the tune of the actor pope, is al-
ready being led down the path toward the Bolshevik slaughterhouse of WAR
against Russia.
It was 14 months ago, in Audio Letter No. 28, that I was first able to reveal the
revolutionary change that has taken place in the Kremlin. The atheistic Bolshe-
viks, who all but destroyed Christian Russia 60 years ago, have been
overthrown after a struggle of six decades. In their place are the self-styled
“Spiritual Communists,” an old and extremely tough Christian sect of native
Russians; and as I revealed in Audio Letter No. 36, these new rulers of the
Kremlin are actually in a process of discarding Communism in everything but
name. Instead, their basic political viewpoint today is that of a strong Russian
30
Audio Letter 42
nationalism, as I discussed in Audio Letter No. 28; so, in a descriptive sense,

they would be more accurately called Spiritual Nationalists.
The overthrown atheistic Bolsheviks are in a frenzy to cut down Christian Rus-
sia again before the last vestiges of Bolshevik influence can be expelled. They
know that their time is short if Russia’s holy war to wipe out Bolshevism is
successful. The Bolsheviks know that the heart of Russia is spiritual, and so
they are trying to rip out the heart of Russia by means of a spiritual attack. Al-
ready the actor pope is working feverishly on overtures to the Eastern Orthodox
Churches hoping to reunite them with the Roman Church after 15 centuries of
separation; and the real target in all of this is the Russian Orthodox Church. Be-
fore the Bolshevik Revolution of 1917, the Russian Orthodox Church was
infiltrated by the Bolsheviks. Today Bolshevik influence is fast being weeded
out in Russia; but if the plans of the Bolsheviks in the Vatican succeed, it will
be restored as a weapon against Russia. All of this is tied to the secret American
first-strike strategy, which I exposed in detail in Audio Letter No. 37; and the
just-ended visit to Mexico by the actor pope is part of an elaborate strategy to
throw eastern Europe into bloody revolution against Russia.
On January 24, just hours before the actor pope left for Santo Domingo and
Mexico, Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko had a two-hour audience
with him. Vatican officials said they could not recall such a long, intensive au-
dience between a pope and a statesman. No statement was issued about what
was discussed, but I can reveal that the actor pope pretended to show his con-
cern for Catholics in Russia. Gromyko, however, argued in effect that the Pope
not rock the boat in eastern Europe, saying that the moves under way by the
Church will destroy Christianity, not help it. Then the actor pope left for Latin
America. At his elbow throughout the trip was Giovanni Cardinal Benelli, a
close friend of Henry Kissinger. As I revealed last month, Benelli is the key
Bolshevik agent in the Vatican, and he went along to write the script for the ac-
tor pope to follow.
The papal trip to Mexico was a tremendous publicity stunt and a prelude to the
confrontation with Russia. The heavy news coverage surrounding the trip
served to build a much broader public awareness of the actor pope’s image as
an anti-Communist. At the same time the visit to Mexico was a preview of the
Pope’s scheduled trip to Poland next May; and, as such, it was well calculated
to send nervous shivers up the spines of government officials in Warsaw and
Moscow. In Mexico, as in Poland, the government does not officially condone
the Catholic Church; instead, for historical reasons, the Mexican Constitution
imposes stringent limitations on church activity and power. Yet in Mexico, just
as in Poland, the population is about 90% Catholic; and so when the Pope de-
31
cided to go to Mexico, the Mexican government had no practical choice but to

allow him to come. Furthermore, Mexican law forbids churchmen to preach in
public or even to wear a clerical garb in public; but these restrictions were
clearly unenforceable for the Pope. To limit his visibility that way would have
invited riots and mayhem, and the government knew it.
For Mexico, the only practical thing to do was to wink at the law and give the
Pope free rein during his visit; but for Poland, the situation is not so simple. The
public intention of the actor pope is to visit Poland for the 900th anniversary of
the martyrdom of Saint Stanislaus. To most Americans, having little idea who
Saint Stanislaus was, this probably sounds remote, irrelevant, and therefore
somewhat tame; but to the Poles, the symbolism and emotional tensions in-
volved are enormous.
The actor pope is the look-alike of the late Karol Cardinal Wojtyla of Poland.
Before becoming Pope last October, Wojtyla was the Archbishop of Krakow.
Nine hundred years ago, Saint Stanislaus was also the Archbishop of Krakow.
Wojtyla was widely known among Polish Catholics as a man who stood up to
the government even back in the brutal days of Stalinism; and 900 years ago
Saint Stanislaus repeatedly spoke out in defiance of the king. He even excom-
municated the king for cruelty to his subjects. Nine hundred years ago this May
Saint Stanislaus was sought out by the king and killed for his defiance; and this
May, the actor pope is scheduled to appear in Krakow to climax observances on
the date of the anniversary of the martyrdom.
Since this past September, the Vatican has been engaging in tactics designed to
steadily build up tensions in Poland; and since Christmas Day the rise in ten-
sions have been focused around Saint Stanislaus Day, because in messages to
Polish churches just before Christmas, the actor pope urged that the Saint
Stanislaus observances begin Christmas Day and continue until May. The War-
saw government is trying to figure out how to keep the lid on in the face of the
feverish tensions that will apparently exist by May; but the final key to the Bol-
shevik plan is a stratagem, which even the actor pope himself does not suspect.
If all goes according to plan, he will arrive in Krakow after first filling the
streets with crowds that will dwarf those seen in Mexico. There in Krakow dur-
ing the observances of the martyrdom of Saint Stanislaus, the actor pope
himself is to be assassinated! The Bolshevik conspirators will arrange to make
it appear that the Russian dominated Warsaw regime is at fault, and agitators
will whip up the crowds. It will provide the classic triggering incident for re-
volt, and the Pope’s revolution will be on. It will erupt in Krakow, and spread
like wildfire throughout Poland; and if the Bolshevik plans are a complete suc-
32
Audio Letter 42
cess, the Pope’s revolution will spill over into Hungary, 67% Catholic, and to
other Catholic strongholds of eastern Europe.
The Bolsheviks believe that by lighting the fires of revolution at Russia’s front
door, they will be able to continue to keep the Kremlin off balance; and if Rus-
sia has her hands full trying to put down the Pope’s revolution, they reason,
Russia will be in no position to go to war. Like America’s shotgun diplomatic
marriage to Red China, they expect the coming revolution to buy more time for
their panic rearmament for NUCLEAR WAR ONE. But, my friends, the Bol-
sheviks are wrong, dead wrong. If they do succeed in their plans to stain eastern
Europe with a sea of Catholic blood, it would not stave off Russia. Instead, it
will be the last straw for the Kremlin. As Russia’s rulers see things getting out
of hand, they will realize that their advantage over the West, all things consid-
ered, has stopped increasing at that point. Seeing that further delay is no longer
on their side, they will wait no longer. The remaining moves on their pre-war
chess board will simply be abandoned. Contrary to Bolshevik expectations, the
Russians will not try to put down the Pope’s revolution before going to war.
Instead, they will shift quickly to a full war footing. Their first priority will be
TO DESTROY THE UNITED STATES and other pockets of Bolshevism
world-wide, using their space triad with devastating effect. Only after the war
will they try to pick up the pieces in eastern Europe.
Topic #3—One year ago last month loud air blasts at sea began shaking homes
and frightening thousands along America’s east coast. For a while government
spokesmen tried to just ignore them; but the booms, now known as AIR
QUAKES, would not go away. Next they were ridiculed in the controlled major
media, but that tactic quickly changed too because too many people were hear-
ing them to accept it all as a big joke. Finally, after these air quakes had been
going on for several months, the government tried to explain it all away by
blaming the whole thing on freak weather conditions. Alleged experts were
trotted out to impress the public with the mumbo jumbo about unusually cold
air layers. Waving their arms about these weird weather conditions, some tried
to say that the booms were due to military aircraft, perhaps a hundred miles out
to sea. Others managed to keep a straight face as they told us that the booms
were caused by the Concorde supersonic transport. Somehow, they said, the
shock waves from the plane were striking America’s east coast more than an
hour ahead of the plane itself, and with incredible force. Explanations like these
were ridiculous on their face; yet many Americans, eager to be pacified, ac-
cepted these insults to their intelligence at face value. Most of the vast number
of air quakes taking place nation-wide were kept out of the press, and people
calmed down. Even many of my listeners tried not to believe the truth about the
air quakes, which I made public shortly after they began in Audio Letter No. 29
33
for December 1977. They were caused by newly operational Russian Cosmos-
pheres firing their Particle Beam-weapons in a defocused mode into the air over
the Atlantic Ocean.
When I recorded Audio Letter No. 29 there were seven Cosmospheres hovering
over the United States, but in the months that followed the numbers of Cos-
mospheres grew into the hundreds world-wide. Now that the media lid is on the
air quakes, a government-sponsored study of them by the Miter Corporation has
been quietly released. The report, released early last month, lists 594 air quakes
between December 1977 and the following June. By June, of course, those al-
leged ‘freak cold air layers’ of last winter had to be long gone. The study does
its best to blame the booms on aircraft noises anyway, but 181 air quakes were
impossible to link, even artificially, to any acceptable excuse, so the report
lamely concludes that they must be of some natural origin—it wouldn’t do, af-
ter all, to admit the real cause.
The Cosmospheres, my friends, are Russia’s version of the HOVERING

WEAPONS PLATFORMS about which the late General Thomas Power tried
in vain to give a warning 14 years ago. General Power, former head of Air
Force Research and Development and then of the Strategic Air Command,
knew what he was talking about. In Audio Letter No. 32 last March I reviewed
in detail the efforts of General Power to warn the American people; but as with
many others who have tried to alert us over the years, his efforts were sup-
pressed and ignored.
As the numbers of Cosmospheres have multiplied world-wide during the past

year, UFO sightings have likewise been mushrooming. As in the past, some
UFO sightings today are just that—Unidentified Flying Objects; but nowadays
it would be more appropriate in many cases to call the sighted objects IFOs—
that is, Identified Flying Objects, because they are not unknown space visitors
but identifiable as Russian Cosmospheres. In some cases though, combined
sightings are taking place which involve both Cosmospheres and true UFOs.
In the past, UFOs have always been attracted by aircraft, rockets, and space-
craft, especially when these are new or experimental. The Cosmospheres are no
exception to this rule. Wherever Cosmospheres are congregated nowadays over
military targets, UFOs occasionally show up and dart around among the Cos-
mospheres. The best known case of this type so far happened recently in New
Zealand. Late last month on the evening of December 30, an Australian televi-
sion news crew made headlines world-wide by filming what they called UFOs
from an airplane over New Zealand. The film, some seven minutes long, was
purchased by the BBC and by the CBS TV network. On January 2 CBS showed
34
Audio Letter 42
less than 50 seconds of the film which showed a glowing spherical object, and
most of the objects sighted that evening by the camera crew and other observers
were described as spheres of light. However, as the film clip was shown, a
sound track was played. The Australian newsman described a different object.
He said it looked like “a flying saucer.” Walter Cronkite did not say whether or
not the sound track had been recorded simultaneously with the film clip that
was being shown. In any case, the spherical object in the film was a Russian
Cosmosphere, but the attempts to discredit the film are an echo of the ridiculous
government stories about the air quakes last year. On the evening of January 25,
just six days ago, Walter Cronkite of CBS News reminded viewers of the New
Zealand UFOs; then he went on: “Well, the New Zealand Air Force reported
today that freak atmospheric conditions, not visitors from outer space, were re-
sponsible. Investigators said one definite cause was an unusually bright Venus
rising in the eastern sky.”
My friends, the recent flurries of so-called UFO sightings over Australia and
New Zealand are actually due to Cosmospheres—and with good reason. Lately
we are hearing a great deal about plans for America’s so-called MX mobile
missile; but, in fact American mobile missiles are already being scattered like
popcorn world-wide. Our Bolshevik rulers are hoping to outflank Russia with
sheer numbers of missile sites if nothing else. The missiles involved are based
on our standard Minuteman. As a solid fuel rocket, it is well suited for mobile
basing—in fact, this was designed into some versions of the Minuteman in the
first place; and now New Zealand is host to two American mobile missile
bases. One is not far from Hamilton on the North Island, the other is near Alex-
andra on the South Island. They are concealed in mountainous areas. Likewise,
a very large missile complex is in the Northern Territory of Australia—it strad-
dles the Robinson River and spreads out over an 18 by 22-mile area. In that
area there is no one to watch what goes on but alligators and aborigines.
The Russians are keeping close tabs on all American missile bases, new and
old, by means of their Cosmospheres. As I have explained in the past, their Par-
ticle Beam-weapons can blast our missiles at the moment of launch; but our
Bolshevik rulers believe they have devised a way to disable the Cosmospheres
just long enough to get the missiles safely launched against Russia. Scientific
intelligence analysts in the United States understand that the Cosmospheres
hover by floating in the earth’s electrostatic field. They also presume that the
Russians use the same techniques we would in order to aim their Particle Beam-
weapons—that is, a combination of infrared detection and radar. They reason
that if the Cosmospheres can be disturbed from their hovering positions and if
their sensing systems can be blinded, their Particle Beam-weapons will do no
good. Even if they fire they will be aimed wild and will miss our rockets as they
35
are launched. The solution they have devised is called a Cobalt Ionization
Bomb. Unlike a normal cobalt bomb, such a device is not designed to create a
tremendous blast; its primary purpose instead is to create tremendous quantities
of totally ionized cobalt—that is, the cobalt atoms are stripped of all their elec-
trons, leaving bare nuclei. The plan is to detonate these at various locations in
the upper fringes of the atmosphere, as high as possible, but below the hovering
altitude of the Cosmospheres. The result will be an enormous storm of elec-
trons, spreading horizontally in the earth’s magnetic field to pass underneath
the Cosmospheres. This, they believe, will briefly disrupt the electrostatic field
around each Cosmosphere and also the infrared and radar systems used to
watch the missiles below; and while the Cosmospheres are briefly incapacitated
in this way, our rulers plan to launch our ICBMs right past them. Meanwhile,
ground-based high-power lasers will be used in an effort to shoot down the
Cosmospheres. But, my friends, our masters are falling victim to the very intel-
ligence gap which they themselves brought about years ago, because the
Russians well understand the importance of surprise, including technological
surprise. And so while they have allowed their space triad to become known in
intelligence circles because of its deployment, they still have a master secret
weapon in reserve for the war itself. This weapon is a system to protect the
Achilles’ heel of their beam-weapons—the ability to aim them accurately. It is
called “Psychoenergetic Range Finding,” or PRF. PRF does not rely on conven-
tional radiations like infrared or radar—instead, it’s based upon detection of the
actual atomic signature of the target, and normal jamming techniques have no
effect on PRF. So when the American cobalt ionization bombs explode, the
Cosmospheres will be able to aim right through the electron storms to blast our
missiles. And so, my friends, day by day the atheistic Bolsheviks are leading
the Anglo-Saxon West into the caldron of thermonuclear war! Already we can
sense the impending doom in our nostrils, yet still we refuse to do anything to
stop it. If we allow Western civilization to be dissolved, will the survivors dare
to say, “May God forgive us?”
36
Audio Letter 43
February 28, 1979
All across the United States millions of Americans are growing weary of a
long, harsh winter. Over large areas of the country winter storms this year have
been abnormal and unpredictable. Time and again America’s industrial heart-
land in the Midwest has been paralyzed by unusually heavy snowstorms.
Powerful rainstorms have battered California, which supplies a major share of
America’s food supply. The major population corridors of the Northeast have
endured storm after storm, taxing energy supplies and human patience. In the
Southwest and elsewhere storms have caused losses of electrical power on an
unprecedented scale, and even here in Washington, D.C., the biggest snow-
storm in over 50 years has just taken place. For days, the nation’s capital was
brought to a standstill by two feet of snow, and we are still digging out. And
strange weather patterns have struck also in Europe this winter.
Four weeks ago on January 31, NATO ground forces gathered in Germany for
their first winter maneuvers in six years. When they began, conditions appeared
ideal, the ground was frozen solid to the depth of five inches, making a nice
firm footing for NATO tanks and other vehicles. There was also a convenient
amount of snow on the ground, a little less than a foot. This was enough to
make the war games seem realistic without actually making things difficult.
The NATO teams were divided up into mock invaders, called the “Orange
Force”; and defenders, called the “Blue Force.” At one minute after midnight
January 31 the Orange Force began its make-believe invasion. It was right on
schedule without the element of surprise that would exist in a real invasion.
Even so, the attacking Orange Force soon outflanked the Blue defenders, and
for the next two days the Orange Force, representing the Warsaw Pact, rode
southward across the West German landscape. Meanwhile the so-called Blue
Force, representing NATO defenders, were getting set to counterattack. On the
morning of February 2, the third day of the make-believe war, the Blue Force
was almost ready to go; but then, the unexpected happened. Suddenly the
weather changed, strong warm winds blew up out of nowhere, and soon these
were joined by rain. Within hours the ideal maneuvering conditions vanished—
the snow melted, swelling streams and causing local flooding; and the frost
melted, causing the whole area to turn into a mud bog. Tanks churned and
37
groaned as they sank into the mire. Meanwhile NATO’s alleged new wonder
weapon against enemy tanks, the A-10 Close-support Aircraft, turned out to be
absolutely useless. They were grounded by dense fog. Flooding caused a rush
evacuation of a Field Hospital, and for three days NATO troops, tanks, and ar-
tillery sat stalled in a so-called “Administrative Hold.” Finally, NATO
Commander General Alexander Haig flew over the scene by helicopter and
then called off the whole thing. And so the NATO exercise, which had been
named “CERTAIN SENTINEL” ended on a very uncertain note. Meanwhile,
200 miles away in Czechoslovakia, Warsaw Pact maneuvers were under way
too; and when the weather changed, they went on as if nothing had happened.
It’s almost as if the weather itself had turned against the United States and the
NATO alliance. And, my friend, it has!
Over a year ago in Audio Letter No. 29, I revealed that Russia had begun the
operational deployment of Hovering Weapons Platforms. These remarkable
machines, which the Russians call Cosmospheres, are armed with Charged Par-
ticle Beam-weapons. When I recorded Audio Letter No. 29, seven
Cosmospheres were on station over the continental United States, and they
were causing the famous ‘air blasts’ now called AIR QUAKES. These were the
by-product of weather modification experiments using their Beam-weapons in a
defocused mode. Fourteen years ago the late General Thomas Power, former
Commander of the United States Strategic Air Command, gave a public warn-
ing in advance about these hovering military craft. In Audio Letter No. 32 I
reviewed General Power’s efforts to warn America before it was too late, but he
was ignored and Russia developed these machines, while America did not. And
today they are on station over our missile bases, major dams, and cities, ready
to pulverize targets on command. They are also manipulating the weather over
the United States, and a squadron of Cosmospheres used the weather to turn
NATO’s so-called “CERTAIN SENTINEL” maneuvers into a farce. The pur-
pose was a bloodless object lesson to the Western European members of
NATO. The Kremlin is trying by every possible means to persuade Western
Europe to stay out of the coming thermonuclear war between Russia and Amer-
ica, while most Americans still are blissfully unaware of the reason for much of
this winter’s unusual weather. All they know is that they are tired of winter and
looking forward to the first signs of spring. And yet, my friends, if the “new
Bolsheviks” who now control the American government have their way, the
season of real trial and hardship is only beginning, NOT ending. Their intrigues
are accelerating toward a climax, and as winter melts away the world is heating
up with the danger of WAR.
Six months ago in Audio Letter No. 37, I revealed in detail the top secret plans
of America’s rulers to initiate nuclear war with Russia. For the first time in
38
Audio Letter 43
American history it is now the master strategy of the United States to strike first
in a major war, and in this same Audio Letter I outlined the steps which were
being planned to lead up to full scale war with Russia. The strategy of the “new
Bolsheviks” to launch an American nuclear first strike against Russia is already
far advanced, and moving fast. Many elements of the top-secret plan which I
revealed last August have already become highly visible. First, the Camp David
summit of last September 1978 set the plan in motion. The plan I had revealed
was followed to the letter, and the so-called surprise “Peace” accords were
signed with big smiles by Carter, Begin, and Sadat on nation-wide television.
Likewise, the Bolshevik plan to throw the Roman Catholic Church into their
own fight against Russia has been moving along right on track. Pope John Paul
I, elected only the day before I recorded Audio Letter No. 37, quickly left the
scene, and today the anti-Russian policies of the Vatican are becoming more
visible by the day. More recently the crucial importance of Iran and China in
the first-strike plan has caused them both to dominate the news. As planned six
months ago, Iran has been made a source of concern to the American public;
and China, whose western province of Sinkiang is essential to the American
first-strike strategy, forced the United States into full diplomatic recognition
over two months ago. Now we are moving rapidly toward the stage of ‘oil
shortages’ and ‘gas rationing’ as the crisis atmosphere intensifies prior to war.
And exactly according to plan, Saudi Arabia is being painted more and more as
a threat to peace by politicians and the controlled major media.
My friends, springtime is always a time of unrest and possible war. It is the

easiest time of the year to trigger violence; and as spring approaches, prepara-
tions are under way jointly by the United States and Israeli governments to
trigger an incident that will cause war to erupt in the Middle East. The nuclear
destruction of Saudi Arabia’s oil fields is intended to follow soon afterward. In
Eastern Europe too, the coming of spring is accompanied by great danger this
year. Last month I revealed the Bolshevik plan for the “Pope’s Revolution” to
erupt in Krakow, Poland, this May. The key to the plan is to be the visit to Po-
land in May by the ‘actor Pope’, the man who calls himself Pope John Paul II;
and just six days ago it was revealed that the Pope now plans to be in Poland
May 13 through the 15th. For the reasons I revealed last month, my friends, it
will be the beginning of the end for the West if the “Pope’s Revolution” does
take place. That means the next two months or so could well determine the fu-
ture course of human history. If that history is written according to the Satanic
Bolshevik plan, it will be written in our blood, and it will be a story of thermo-
nuclear catastrophe, unparalleled destruction, tragedy, suffering, torment—all
on a scale that is beyond human comprehension. And yet, my friends, I must
remind you once again of something I pointed out in my very first talking tape
39
recorded over four years ago in October 1974. That was Audio Book No. 1 ti-
tled:
“HOW TO PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE COMING DEPRESSION

AND THIRD WORLD WAR.” The information I make public from my own
intelligence concerns the plans of men. These human plans are not unchange-
able. The men who make these plans like to play God, but they are not gods.
Their plans do change, their timetables do slip, they do make mistakes, and the
unexpected does happen. During the past several weeks, my friends, the unex-
pected HAS happened, dramatic events are taking place hidden from the public,
which will inevitably have profound effects on the course of events both here
and world-wide.
My three topics for this month are:
Topic #1—THE MYSTERIOUS DISAPPEARANCE OF DR. HENRY

KISSINGER
Topic #2—THE PLUNDERING OF THE ROCKEFELLER FAMILY

EMPIRE
Topic #3—OUR LAST CHANCE TO SAVE WESTERN CIVILIZATION.
Topic #1—Last month on the evening of January 26 the life of Nelson Rocke-
feller suddenly came to an end. Five days later when I recorded Audio Letter
No. 42, I was able to report that he had been murdered by a single expert shot to
the head. Immediately Rockefeller aides and spokesmen were put to work in a
feverish effort to cover up what had happened. For the reasons I mentioned last
month, Nelson’s surviving brothers, David and Laurance, felt that it would be
too dangerous to have the public know he had been murdered. It would have
raised too many questions, and so Rockefeller spokesmen spouted one set of
lies after another for public consumption. Meanwhile, Nelson Rockefeller’s
body was cremated quickly to make sure that the multiplying public questions
about his death did not lead to an autopsy. By the time I recorded Audio Letter
No. 42 on January 31, key Rockefeller family spokesman, Hugh Morrow, had
run through three versions of the circumstances surrounding Rockefeller’s
death and each new version demolished what he had already said. About a week
later, the third version began falling apart. News reports quoting unnamed
sources within the Rockefeller family said that the person who had called the
New York emergency number 911 for an ambulance was not Megan Marshack.
Miss Marshack, Rockefeller’s young aide, had been with him in his townhouse
at the time of death; but the 911 call, it was now said, had been made by Miss
40
Audio Letter 43
Ponchitta Pierce. Miss Pierce, a New York television personality, was said to be
a friend and neighbor of Marshack. On Saturday night February 10, Ponchitta
Pierce put an end to several days of questions and rumors by releasing a state-
ment through her attorney; but her statement triggered new questions as it
ruined all previous statements by Rockefeller spokesmen about Rockefeller’s
death.
In her statement, Ponchitta Pierce said that Megan Marshack had called her be-
tween 10:50 and 11:00 P.M. on that evening of January 26. That ruined the
official story of Rockefeller spokesmen to the effect that Rockefeller had suf-
fered his “heart attack” at 11:15 P.M., and it revived the early questions to the
effect: Why all the delays between Rockefeller’s alleged heart attack and a call
for help? The Pierce statement added to the mystery in another way too. She
said that she got to Rockefeller’s townhouse about 11:15 P.M., called the 911
emergency number to request an ambulance, and then left quickly to go back to
her own apartment. The natural question is: Why would anyone flee from the
scene of a heart attack? Especially since contrary to some reports Ponchitta
Pierce had known Nelson Rockefeller for more than 10 years! Why didn’t she
stay to help?...unless he was obviously beyond help.
On the same day that Ponchitta Pierce released her statement to the press, the
New York Post quoted Steven Rockefeller, Nelson Rockefeller’s second eldest
son, as calling for clarification of the whole situation; and two days later his
son, Steven, Jr., Nelson Rockefeller’s 18-year old grandson, reportedly said,
“We just want the truth. The issue is simply whether he could be alive now.
Had he been a more practical man, thorough in his bodyguard protection,
maybe this would not have happened.” These words of Nelson Rockefeller’s
grandson Steven, Jr. were dangerously close to the mark. Last month I ex-
plained how Nelson Rockefeller had been caught in a weak moment with “his
guard down” and with his normal large contingent of bodyguards off duty. Two
days later, February 14, his father Steven made a complete turnabout: he joined
with his brother Rodman and sisters, Ann and Mary, in a joint statement aimed
at cutting off the controversy. The statement said in part: “Since we are con-
vinced that nothing could be done to save Father, and that all the people who
tried to help acted responsibly, we feel that it is wrong for us to take part in a
continued debate over the details. Consequently, we do not intend to make any
further public comment.”
But the circumstances surrounding the death of Nelson Rockefeller have an im-
portant bearing on the future of the United States, not just the future of the
Rockefeller family; so the questions about those circumstances will not go
away just by wishing it so. As a footnote to what I made public last month, I
41
can now reveal the reason for the long delay between Rockefeller’s shooting
and the 11:16 P.M. call for an ambulance. Rockefeller did not die at 11:15
P.M., nor even at 10:15 P.M., as stated in the earliest news reports. The death
actually took place between 9:30 and 10:00 P.M. After Megan Marshack recov-
ered from her semi-state of shock following the shooting, she placed a call
which still has not been made public. As a result of this call, a doctor quickly
arrived who was prepared to handle the situation. The single gunshot wound in
Rockefeller’s forehead stopped bleeding in less than an hour. The doctor then
filled the bullet hole with Calamine Lotion, which hardened. After cleaning off
all the blood, the doctor’s job was done. It would now be possible to remove the
body by ambulance without the true cause of death being apparent at a glance to
casual bystanders. The doctor’s make-shift work on the scene did fool bystand-
ers, but if you will look on page 39 of LOOK magazine for March 5, 1979, you
will discover that the job was not quite perfect. The photo at the bottom of the
page is of Nelson Rockefeller’s body as it was being carried out of his town-
house on a stretcher. The picture is grainy and shows little detail; even so, look
closely. One to two inches above the bridge of the nose and slightly toward the
left eyebrow you will see a roughly circular dark area. That, my friends, is the
hastily disguised bullet hole. The Calamine Lotion did not completely hide the
discoloration and was not smoothed to perfection.
Last month I alerted my listeners to the fact that the man who stood to gain the
most from Nelson Rockefeller’s death was his protege of 25 years, HENRY
KISSINGER; and Kissinger wasted no time in pushing ahead with his bid to fill
Nelson Rockefeller’s shoes in the inner family circle of the Rockefeller empire.
His campaign was already well under way on Friday February 2, 1979. On that
day a memorial service for Nelson Rockefeller at the Riverside Church in New
York was attended by well over 2000 people from 71 nations. Eulogies were
delivered by a daughter, Ann Rockefeller-Roberts; by a son, Rodman C. Rocke-
feller; and by brother David Rockefeller, and by Henry Kissinger. It was
Kissinger whose eulogy received all the attention from the controlled major
media—and no wonder. The huge audience was hushed as Henry Kissinger
made his way to the pulpit. Then, seemingly with tears in his eyes, Kissinger
began to speak of Nelson Rockefeller. As his choking voice echoed through the
great sanctuary of the Riverside Church, Kissinger referred to Rockefeller as:
friend, inspiration, teacher, and “my older brother.” Kissinger’s eulogy was a
masterpiece and brought tears to the eyes of many. The final passage was about
sitting with Nelson Rockefeller “on the veranda overlooking his beloved Hud-
son River in the setting sun.” And as the last words of the eulogy, Kissinger
claimed that Rockefeller would occasionally say: “Never forget that the most
profound force in the world is Love.”
42
Audio Letter 43
With those final words echoing through the church, the man who had plotted
the death of Nelson Rockefeller turned and slowly left the pulpit. What Kiss-
inger did not suspect was that he had just said his final words in public. The
following evening, Saturday, February 3rd, Kissinger was reportedly in Seattle
with the stated intention of seeing China’s Deng Hsiao-ping. In fact, the Wash-
ington Post two days later reported that Kissinger saw Deng in Seattle on
Sunday morning, February 4; but the Post was wrong about that. At about the
same time that the Washington Post said Kissinger was in Seattle, he was actu-
ally at Dulles Airport outside Washington, D.C. Just past noon at 12:30 P.M.
Washington Time, February 4, Kissinger took off for London on the British
Airways Concorde. Less than 11 hours later, Kissinger arrived at Chaumont in
the Loire Valley, France, where it was the morning of February 5th. From there
Kissinger flew nearly 200 miles west to Blois, France, in time to breakfast
there. By late that evening of February 5, Henry Kissinger and his wife Nancy
were in London. At approximately 11:00 P.M. London Time, they took off for
the United States in a private jet; and as they did so, they were subject to con-
tinuous surveillance. A network of 26 Russian cosmospheres were on station at
that time above the air lanes between America’s east coast and Europe. At 7:12
P.M. Eastern Standard Time, February 5, all contact with the jet carrying Henry
and Nancy Kissinger was abruptly lost. The jet did not arrive at its destination,
and Henry and Nancy Kissinger are nowhere to be found. Kissinger aides claim
that he is “on vacation,” meanwhile articles keep being printed about Kissinger
which keep his name before the public, but he himself has dropped out of sight.
On February 15, I stated publicly that Kissinger was missing on the Ray Briem
Talk Show over Radio Station KABC, Los Angeles; and on February 17, I ap-
peared on the Bob Snyder Talk Show over Radio Station WINQ, Tampa, Fla.
On that program I not only reported that Kissinger was missing but stated that
he had been so since February 5. I also gave Kissinger’s itinerary immediately
preceding his disappearance—that is, Washington to London, to France, to
London again—and then missing.
Now there is already an attempt to head off public awareness that Kissinger is
missing. His aides are now giving out a cover story, which has already found its
way into print. In the New York Daily News for February 26, just two days
ago, the “People” section contained an item titled: “K Soothes Sorrow in
Europe.” It began: “Where is Henry Kissinger hiding?” Saying that an unnamed
Washington commentator suggested he was missing, the article says: “Well,
forget it all. The fact is Henry and his wife Nancy left town shortly after the
death of his close friend, Nelson Rockefeller, for a vacation from the news
hounds. Henry left New York February 4, went to England, then France, back
to London, and is now in Mexico.” As I mentioned before, Kissinger left Wash-
43
ington on February 4, not New York; and his plane did not land in Mexico or
anywhere else after leaving London on February 5. But the New York Daily
News article says Kissinger is expected back next month; and just for good
measure, a Kissinger aide is quoted as saying: “He is alive and well, and may
show up anywhere in the world because he is welcome anywhere.”
My friends, I can only say that it will be a miracle if the real Henry Kissinger is
ever seen again; and speaking as a lawyer, I can tell you that only the real
Henry Kissinger could bring legal action against me for what I have told you
concerning his criminal activities against the life of Nelson Rockefeller. Henry
Kissinger has vanished from the scene just as he was on the threshold of the
ultimate grab for power that was his dream. But Kissinger conspired with others
to bring about far more than the mere death of Nelson Rockefeller; and the star-
tling events he helped to set in motion have continued despite his own
mysterious disappearance.
Topic #2—On February 7, two days after the disappearance of the Kissinger jet
over the North Atlantic, Megan Marshack emerged out of hiding. She was seen
briefly in New York and was photographed wearing a raccoon coat. That was
the last time she was seen in public. That night she and David Rockefeller
boarded one of David Rockefeller’s private jets and took off for London. Arriv-
ing in London the morning of February 8, local time, they headed for separate
destinations. She went to a location in the western end of London, while he had
business in the Seven Oaks section of South London. Early the following morn-
ing David Rockefeller received an urgent message to go to Megan’s location in
the west end of London. There had been some trouble. Arriving there he saw
for himself. Megan Ruth Marshack, the only known witness to the actual mur-
der of Nelson Rockefeller, was dead. She had died as Rockefeller had, with a
single bullet in the forehead. Megan Marshack was far less well known in Eng-
land than she had become here in America, but the psychological profile of
David Rockefeller would show that his reaction in this new crisis would be
much the same as it had been when his brother had been murdered. David
Rockefeller would insist upon overseeing arrangements to make sure that the
public did not learn that Megan Marshack had been shot to death. And so, he
stayed on the scene just long enough to become a target himself. Within a few
hours the body of Megan Marshack was on its way to a morgue in northeast
London without identification of any kind.
But then, David Rockefeller died in the same way—a single bullet to the head.
Early that afternoon, February 9, David Rockefeller’s body was placed aboard
the private jet that had brought him and Megan Marshack to London the previ-
ous day. The jet took off for the United States. Just as the Kissinger jet had
44
Audio Letter 43
done four days earlier, it was running a gauntlet of surveillance by Russian

Cosmospheres; and apparently the Russians did not know that David Rockefel-
ler was already dead as his jet streaked westward across the North Atlantic. At a
point within 100 miles of the last known location of the Kissinger jet, all con-
tact was abruptly lost with the jet carrying David Rockefeller’s body; and the
jet never arrived at its destination.
On Sunday morning, February 11, Ponchitta Pierce was seen on her television
program by viewers of New York’s Channel 4, WNBC; but the program was on
tape as usual. Ponchitta Pierce herself was nowhere to be found. The previous
evening she had released her statement to the press about her actions on the
evening of Nelson Rockefeller’s death, and had raised all sorts of new questions
in the process—and since that time Ponchitta Pierce has been missing. Mean-
while, her television program is going on each week just as usual. She is said to
have already taped programs until some time in May. When questioned, her
office has been saying lately that she is “on vacation.” The same thing is now
being said of Megan Marshack at her office—“on vacation.”
On the evening of February 13, the body of Hugh Morrow, the long-time
Rockefeller family spokesman, was discovered. Following the death of Nelson
Rockefeller, it was Morrow who was given the heaviest responsibility for carry-
ing out the cover-up campaign. Now the death of Morrow himself is the subject
of cover-up efforts. Morrow died of a bullet between the eyes on February 13
and that is the real reason why we are hearing no new pronouncements from
him these days, but his office claims that he is “on vacation.” Early Saturday
morning February 17, the third generation of the Rockefeller dynasty came to
an end. Laurance Rockefeller died in the same manner as Pope John Paul I did
last October—of a bullet to the nape of the neck, and the next morning both
Laurance Rockefeller and Hugh Morrow were cremated.
In my appearance of February 15 on the Ray Briem radio show in Los Angeles

I mentioned all of these missing persons, except for Laurance Rockefeller who
was still alive then. Two days later on the Bob Snyder show in Tampa, Florida,
I listed them all and stated how long each had been missing. And according to
the New York Post for February 15, 1979, it was claimed that Rockefeller secu-
rity aides, Andy Hoffman and William Keogh as well as chauffeur Lonnie
Wilcher, cannot be found.
My friends, according to high intelligence, what has just taken place is nothing
less than a bloody coup d’etat involving the real rulers of America; and those
responsible are none other than those former allies of the Rockefellers—the
“new Bolsheviks.”
45
Now, the plundering of the Rockefeller family fortune is beginning without the
Rockefeller fourth generation suspecting a thing. After all, as I have always
made clear in the past, the fourth generation Rockefellers were not party to the
machinations of the four brothers. As a result they are not aware of the true im-
plications of the recent upheavals that have wiped out the third-generation
brothers, and they are being duped into public silence about these chilling
events in the mistaken belief that silence is in their own best interest. The fact is
that their silence is playing into the hands of those who want to loot the Rocke-
fellers of their wealth, and it is also serving the interest of those who are
working feverishly to throw the United States into the fires of
DICTATORSHIP and WAR—the “new Bolsheviks.”
During the recent past the four Rockefeller brothers made one final great mis-
take that has now cost them their lives. That mistake was brought on by panic
over a year and a half ago. In a stunning upset on September 27, 1977, the
United States was defeated by Russia in the most decisive battle of the 20th
Century. It was the still secret BATTLE OF THE HARVEST MOON in
space—history’s first true Space Battle. In a single blow the Russians had un-
done the Machiavellian Rockefeller two-prong strategy for world domination,
and now it was Russia that was suddenly calling the shots. The Rockefeller
brothers knew they were in deep, deep trouble. In a state of near panic, the four
Rockefeller brothers began casting about for a way to stave off Russia, and that
is when they made their final fatal mistake.
Certain of their advisers reminded them that the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance was
not really with Russia itself but with the BOLSHEVIKS in Russia. The new
Russian regime had already begun weeding out and expelling the old Bolshe-
viks from Russia. The advisers argued that since they were the real allies of the
Rockefellers and since they knew Russia, the old Bolsheviks should be wel-
comed to America and placed rapidly in positions of power. In their panicky
need to do something fast, the Rockefeller brothers accepted this line of reason-
ing. but in doing so they were forgetting the true nature of their alliance with
the Bolsheviks.
When I recorded Audio Letter No. 7 in December 1975, over three years ago,
the long-standing secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance was still functioning. In
that Audio Letter I explained the nature of the alliance—it was an alliance be-
tween CORPORATE SOCIALISTS on one hand (the Rockefellers) and the
STATE SOCIALISTS on the other (the rulers of the Soviet Union). As I ex-
plained in Audio Letter No. 7, Corporate Socialism and State Socialism are two
sides of the same coin—both are systems for amassing great wealth and power
46
Audio Letter 43
into the hands of only a few people, so an alliance between the rulers of two
separate countries having these two systems is natural. But what the Rockefel-
lers forgot—their fatal mistake—is that Corporate Socialism and State
Socialism cannot co-exist in the same society. Corporate Socialism has as its
goal giant monopolies that are completely exempt from governmental regula-
tion; State Socialism seeks the exact opposite—that is, total governmental
control and regulation of everything and everyone. To bring them together un-
der the same roof is to guarantee a head-on collision between the two; and that,
my friends, is what is beginning to happen now.
It was in Audio Letter No. 29 for December 1977 that I was first able to reveal
that a new Bolshevik Revolution was getting under way here in the United
States, with the aid of the Rockefeller brothers! By the time I recorded Audio
Letter No. 38 last September, the handwriting was already on the wall for the
four Rockefeller brothers. Already the oldest of the brothers, John D. III, had
suddenly vanished from the scene; and in Audio Letter No. 38 I pointed out
that: “Increasingly, it is not the Rockefeller brothers who are using the Bolshe-
viks, but the other way around. Soon the remaining three Rockefeller brothers
will fade from the scene, but that will not undo the cancer of Bolshevism with
which they have infected the West.” (End of quotation from Audio Letter No.
38.)
The kingpin among the “new Bolsheviks” in America was to be HENRY

KISSINGER. He was Nelson Rockefeller’s protege for 25 years, but he played
both sides of every street! With his easy access to the plans, the personnel, the
resources of the Rockefeller empire, Kissinger was the most important single
person among the “new Bolshevik” faction in America. Kissinger truly believed
that he could replace Nelson Rockefeller and some day become PRESIDENT
OF THE WORLD.
My friends, the known witness to Nelson Rockefeller’s death, Megan Mar-

shack, as well as others close to that case, have vanished from the scene. The
entire pattern of events, except for Kissinger’s disappearance, is typical of Bol-
shevik purges, which always include measures to cover their tracks. The “new
Bolsheviks” are now in control of America through their grip on the United
States government, but it still remains for them to spread and consolidate their
power base. And to this end, they will perpetuate the fiction as long as possible
that David Rockefeller, Laurance Rockefeller, and Henry and Nancy Kissinger
are still alive. In this way, actions can be taken in the name of these other peo-
ple that would not be possible if they were known to be dead. Surviving
members of the Rockefeller family have been led to believe that their own secu-
rity, even their physical security, depends upon their maintaining silence about
47
the events of recent days; but the truth is that their silence is being used against
them. Unlike the late four brothers, the fourth generation Rockefellers do not
wield great influence over the far-flung Rockefeller cartel of banks, multina-
tional corporations, Foundations, etc. They are largely at the mercy of managers
of all these assets. By their silence they are leaving many of these managers
with the power to plunder the collapsing Rockefeller empire of its riches. To
preserve their power governmentally and otherwise, it is crucial right now that
the Bolsheviks suppress any news of the disappearances I have told you about.
Therefore, “doubles” or look-alikes may begin to appear on the scene for these
people. What is amazing, especially in the case of Kissinger, is that they have
been able to stifle public questions for so long in his absence. But the Bolshe-
viks know that “doubles” fool only the public. An intimate friend of David
Rockefeller, for example, would not be deceived for long in a face-to-face
meeting; and so “doubles” would be used only as a last resort.
My friends, with the four Rockefeller brothers out of the picture, and with
Henry Kissinger gone, a new ad hoc gang of four has emerged who are now in
control of the United States government. These four are:
ZBIGNIEW BRZEZINSKI, Jimmy Carter’s National Security Adviser. In 1973

Brzezinski did the leg work for David Rockefeller in organizing the Tri-Lateral
Commission. Like the late Henry Kissinger, he is foreign born.
W. MICHAEL BLUMENTHAL, Secretary of the Treasury, Tri-Lateral Com-

mission member, and foreign born. As a former head of Bendix Corporation,
Blumenthal has important ties to the Rockefeller corporate aristocracy. This is
particularly true in the area of arms and defense, which is the real topic of his
present trip to Red China.
HAROLD BROWN, Secretary of Defense, Tri-Lateral Commission member;

and
JAMES SCHLESINGER, Secretary of Energy. Schlesinger is not an official

member of the Tri-Lateral Commission but he is of like mind with the others.
His approach is: Control from the top, and heavy governmental regulation of
everything. Schlesinger formerly headed the Atomic Energy Commission, the
CIA, and the Department of Defense.
One common thread that runs through the background of all these men is their
preoccupation with matters of warfare, weaponry, and international maneuver-
ing. In every possible way they are all trying to hurry along the Bolshevik
strategy for a NUCLEAR FIRST STRIKE AGAINST RUSSIA. My friends, all
48
Audio Letter 43
of them are very dangerous men; but the new gang of four cannot truly replace
the four Rockefeller brothers. For the first time ever these men no longer have
anyone to give them instructions and pave their way. They are trying to carry
out the very detailed plans which have already been set in motion, but they are
doing it without the same power base which the four Rockefeller brothers had
at their disposal; and so the question is: CAN THEY BE STOPPED?
Topic #3—Over 100 years ago the United States of America began falling un-
der the spell of Rockefeller power. Slowly at first, but then faster and faster
John D. Rockefeller, Sr. moved to the head of the line of America’s robber bar-
ons. As the 19th Century was on the wane, the Rockefellers were forming
alliances with other powerful groups, not only here in America but overseas.
Through their influence on America’s leaders, they began turning the United
States away from the virtues extolled by George Washington and toward the
vicious ways of Machiavelli.
More than 80 years ago the Spanish-American War broke out as a shadow of
things to come. The war was brought about by the United States, not Spain, yet
most Americans were lured into supporting America’s acts of shame. America
began to trade national honor for prestige as a world power. In this way the
stage was being set for the 20th Century. It was to be the century of OIL
POLITICS, of war after war—each worse than the one before—and ever ex-
panding Rockefeller power. In all of this the United States of America was to
be no more than a springboard in the Rockefeller plan to finally control the
whole world. And so, as Rockefeller power became ever more complete in
America, our country’s behavior became increasingly foreign to our own tradi-
tions and values. As a nation, we began to court our enemies while punishing
our friends. The Land of Opportunity gradually was twisted into the Land of
Regulations, and the original American concept that all men are equal in the
sight of the law was gradually warped into the idea that all human beings have
to be the same in all respects. Our value as individuals began fading from our
own minds so that we might be molded more perfectly into a society of perfect
slaves.
Down through the years millions of Americans have been alert enough to feel at
least vaguely that something was wrong, but the real source and reason for all
these disturbing trends was always kept hidden and so there was no one to chal-
lenge or hinder the master program of Rockefeller conquest. In recent years
America’s drift toward nuclear war has also been more and more apparent; but
here, too, Americans sat paralyzed as the Rockefeller planners dragged us
closer and closer to the fire. For decades now, most Americans have fallen into
one of two groups. By far the larger group has consisted of that great “Silent
49
Majority,” so called. They have been silent about Rockefeller power and in-
trigue because they did not know about it. The other main group, much smaller,
has consisted of those who did know about Rockefeller power and felt it was
too great to be challenged. Down through the years only scattered individuals
have both known the truth and dared to actively oppose what was happening to
America; and those few, my friends, have always been easy to isolate and neu-
tralize in various ways. But now, for the first time in a century, the situation has
changed.
Almost over night the centralized control of the world-wide power of the
Rockefeller Empire has been shattered. The four Rockefeller brothers of the
third generation are no more, and there is no one who can really fill their shoes.
But the new gang of four—BRZEZINSKI, BROWN, BLUMENTHAL, and
SCHLESINGER—are eager to set themselves up as our undisputed RULERS.
Left to themselves they will lead America into thermonuclear national suicide.
But their dreams of replacing the four Rockefeller brothers are insane. What
will they do, my friends, when it becomes known in the corridors of power
world-wide that David Rockefeller is no more?
Who will hold the intimate, private dinner gatherings with the Powerful here
and abroad by which David Rockefeller kept everyone on the same track?
Who will take his place, giving word from ‘on high’ on big policy shifts?
Who will keep the TRI-LATERAL COMMISSION, the COUNCIL ON

FOREIGN RELATIONS (CFR), the COUNCIL OF THE AMERICAS hum-
ming along in unison as he did?
Who will coordinate the actions of the top 200 industrial corporations and
banks of the world as he did?
Who will guide the policies of the Business Council or of the Business Round-
Table as David Rockefeller did?
Who will take his place in assigning tasks to his former private detective
agency—the CIA?
Who will decide the global issues that he did? And force unified action to im-
plement those decisions—Brzezinski? Blumenthal? Brown? Schlesinger?
It is in the nature of people to form their own opinions about things if they are
not forced to accept and implement certain policies. And so think of the free-
50
Audio Letter 43
for-all that will soon start developing behind the scenes on all sides! Within the
industrial community, for example, honest differences of opinion will start
cropping up as to how to handle new situations as they arise. Without David
Rockefeller to act as arbitrator, these differences will not just go away. Indus-
trial leaders will begin to break up into factions built around different policies,
but no faction will be able to impose its will on all the others as David Rocke-
feller did. And so, inevitably, that phenomenon which John D. Rockefeller, Sr.
denounced as a “sin” will begin to rear its battered head. It’s called
COMPETITION. If we can avoid a suicidal disaster in NUCLEAR WAR I, the
same thing will also begin happening in all other areas of life—in banking, in
business, in politics, even in religion. A new freedom of independent thought
may yet be reborn—IF war can be prevented between Russia and the United
States.
Soon the inevitable internal conflict here in the United States will be getting
under way. On one side there are the Corporate Socialists of the now headless
Rockefeller cartel; on the other side there are the Bolshevik State Socialists
who are now in control of the United States government. Right now the Rocke-
feller Corporate Socialist Empire is still more powerful than the United States
government. If they wake up in time, they could put a stop to the Bolshevik
plan which is now directed AT THEM; and if the people also awaken, then the
inevitable re-birth of competitive enterprise could lead gradually to a new era of
freedom and prosperity in the West. By breaking their silence about recent
events, the fourth generation Rockefellers could help bring about this turn of
events.
As the conflict builds up between the Corporate Socialists and the Bolsheviks,
Jimmy Carter will be caught in the middle. Already he is racked by leukemia
and by cancer in his head, in his intestines, and now in his lungs and bladder. If
he does not die first, watch for him to flee from the presidency under these
pressures. When that happens, my friends, you will be faced with a choice
which you cannot avoid. Carter’s hasty departure from the presidency will be
the first public sign that the rout of the Bolsheviks is beginning here in Amer-
ica. At that point you must decide to do one of two things—to act, or not to act!
If you decide to act to help save America from the Bolshevik nightmare, you
will be choosing FREEDOM, LIFE, and the SURVIVAL OF CHRISTIANITY.
But if you decide to step back and do nothing, you will be casting your vote for
BOLSHEVIK CONTROL over America; and if you do that, you will be choos-
ing SLAVERY, DEATH, and the SATANIC HELL of Bolshevism.
51
52
Audio Letter 44
March 29, 1979
It has now been 15 months since I first revealed in Audio Letter No. 29 that a
new Bolshevik revolution was getting under way here in the United States. Last
month I revealed that a Bolshevik coup d’etat had just taken place, bloody and
vicious, yet out of the public limelight. All four of the third generation Rocke-
feller brothers are now dead, as are others who were close to them. Now,
America is being dragged along toward revolution, dictatorship, and war by the
ad hoc gang of four—BRZEZINSKI, BLUMENTHAL, BROWN, and
SCHLESINGER. It was Schlesinger who said in the fall of 1975: “Some years
from now someone will raise the question, ‘Why weren’t we warned?’ and I
wanted to be able to say, ‘Indeed you were’.” Now Schlesinger himself is work-
ing fast to help bring on the very disasters he warned us about. Can you
imagine?
Seven months ago in Audio Letter No. 37 I spelled out the secret new strategy
for an American nuclear first strike against Russia; and as I say these words,
more and more parts of that plan are falling rapidly into place. At the same
time, the Bolsheviks are trying to schedule coming events to bring on full-scale
revolution here as their first priority; then, with a stunned America in their iron
grip, they intend to move us quickly into NUCLEAR WAR with RUSSIA. Al-
ready the plan I revealed last August for the Camp David summit to lead to an
Egyptian-Israeli ‘Peace Treaty’ has been accomplished. At the same time, Bol-
shevik control within the Vatican has brought about the drastic shift of the
Roman Catholic Church to a strongly anti-Russian stance. Two popes—John
Paul I and the real John Paul II—were murdered last fall by the Bolsheviks in
the process, as I detailed in Audio Letters Nos. 39 and 41. The crucial impor-
tance of Red China and Iran in the plan I revealed last August has also caused
both of them to undergo dramatic developments during the past six months.
My friends, we are now at the crossroads. It is do or die for the Satanic Bolshe-
viks who will never turn back from their suicidal plans. It is also do or die for
the survivors of the four Rockefeller brothers—the rest of the Rockefeller fam-
ily—who are in mortal danger from the Bolsheviks. And, my friends, it is DO
or DIE for us, for Christianity in the West, and for Western civilization itself!
53
Many people today are now saying, “What can I do?” After you have heard this
recording, you have my suggestion as to what you can do; and I urge you to act
quickly, because there is no time to be wasted!
Topic #1—THE HOAX RE-APPEARANCE OF DR. HENRY KISSINGER;
Topic #2—THE IMPENDING COLLAPSE OF THE CHASE-MANHATTAN

BANK; and
Topic #3—THE EGYPTIAN-ISRAELI TREATY FOR NUCLEAR WAR.
Topic #1—Two months ago on the evening of January 26, the life of Nelson
Rockefeller ended abruptly. As I revealed five days later in my Audio Letter
No. 42, he was murdered—shot once in the head. Last month I reported that
Rockefeller’s murder had been only the beginning of a pattern of events. The
pattern is that of the Bolshevik purge—that is, a bloody, yet secret, coup d’etat.
In the space of only a few weeks, the secret rulership of the United States
changed hands. The coup began on January 26 when, as the Bolsheviks put it,
Nelson Rockefeller was liquidated; and by February 17, the coup d’etat had
been achieved because by that date both David and Laurance Rockefeller had
also been executed. Meanwhile, the purge had also eliminated several persons
who knew too much about Nelson Rockefeller’s murder. These included:
Megan Marshack, Ponchitta Pierce, and Rockefeller family spokesman Hugh
Morrow. But there was one disappearance last month that was not according to
the Bolshevik game-plan.
As I reported in Audio Letter No. 43, Dr. Henry Kissinger was to be the key
man in the new Bolshevik power-group. Kissinger had conspired with others
for Nelson Rockefeller’s murder and was positioning himself to pick up the
reins of Rockefeller power; but on February 5 the private jet carrying Henry
and Nancy Kissinger with their five body guards from London to the United
States disappeared over the North Atlantic. I can now reveal that the Kissinger
jet suffered a mid-air explosion. The crippled airplane crashed into the sea at
the navigational coordinates 54 degrees, 40 minutes, 57 seconds North; 26 de-
grees, 40 minutes, zero seconds West. No one escaped from the plane, the
remnants of which sank in approximately 8,000 feet of water. The exact fate of
the Kissinger jet was not immediately known last month but it did soon become
obvious that Kissinger was gone for good. As a result, the Bolsheviks here in
America were thrown into turmoil. The plans Kissinger had helped set in mo-
tion to dispose of the Rockefellers were carried forward. Meanwhile, the ad hoc
54
Audio Letter 44
gang of four emerged as the guiding force of the secret new Bolshevik revolu-
tion here in America. These four men have only a small fraction of the power
formerly wielded by the four Rockefeller brothers—but they are very dangerous
men indeed! These men are: National Security chief ZBIGNIEW
BRZEZINSKI, Treasury Secretary W. MICHAEL BLUMENTHAL, Defense
Secretary HAROLD BROWN, and Energy Secretary JAMES SCHLESINGER.
Together they are working feverishly toward a complete take-over of America’s
industry, banking, agriculture, EVERYTHING; and beyond that their goal is
NUCLEAR WAR with Russia—an act of national suicide for the rest of us!
As of now, the Bolshevik coup d’etat—that is, the change in ruling circles—has
already been accomplished. What still lies ahead is the full-fledged open revo-
lution to transform American society as a whole into a Bolshevik HELL. Using
the excuse of a deliberate war-crisis in the Middle East and resulting oil short-
ages, the Bolsheviks plan to start closing down American freedoms in a
declared ‘National Emergency.’ From there the Bolshevik grip around our
necks will steadily tighten, gradually choking and strangling us into total sub-
mission. As the last gasp of free air is squeezed from our lungs, the blackness of
BOLSHEVIK DICTATORSHIP will gather itself around us. Then, those who
have been content to ‘Wait and See’ will realize too late that IT CAN HAPPEN
HERE.
In Audio Letter No. 14 I described some of the valuable lessons the four Rocke-
feller brothers had learned from their clandestine support of Adolf Hitler. One
of these lessons was that a revolution is best carried out with, and not against,
the full power of a nation’s government; and that lesson is not lost on the Bol-
sheviks here in America—the former allies of the Rockefeller brothers. Using
the excuse of crisis conditions, they will use their governmental authority for
revolutionary purposes:
Businesses large and small will be nationalized as the Bolsheviks take over
America’s means of production;
The banks will be closed, cutting off access of millions of people to their life
savings;
Both corporate and private farms, ranches, orchards, and vineyards will be
taken away from their owners nation-wide and collectivized;
Engineers of all types will be put to work wherever the government puts them
in all-out preparation for war—and the prelude to this is already visible in the
job market of today;
55
People without special skills will be herded like cattle from one location to an-
other for agricultural or other tasks; and millions who are troublesome for
various reasons will be sent to Concentration Camps—of which 13 already ex-
ist in America in various states of condition.
These things, my friends, are what the Bolsheviks—including the new ad hoc
gang of four—have in mind for us very soon. All they have to do is to hold on
to their present power until the coming Middle East crisis unties their hands.
Until then they cannot unleash the DICTATORIAL EMERGENCY POWERS
they want—and so they are vulnerable. While they are waiting for their hour to
come, they know they must not let the American public realize anything about
the Bolshevik coup d’etat that has taken place.
Last month I revealed intelligence that the disappearances of Henry and Nancy
Kissinger, David and Laurance Rockefeller, and others were all connected to
the Bolshevik coup d’etat, so the Bolsheviks dare not let you know that any of
these people have dropped out of sight. That is why I said last month: “Doubles
or look-alikes may begin to appear on the scene for these people. What is amaz-
ing, especially in the case of Kissinger, is that they have been able to stifle
public questions for so long in his absence.”
During the past month or so the Bolsheviks have been orchestrating a careful
campaign using the major media to deceive the American public and, sure
enough, doubles are being used as part of this deception campaign. Falsified
stories are being planted in the news media, both with and without the knowl-
edge of those who publish the stories. One day it may be just a sentence or two
in a Society column alleging that Henry Kissinger showed up at a social gather-
ing, without saying where or when. A day or two later a different newspaper
may print a story alleging that Megan Marshack is looking for a new job here in
Washington. The picture that accompanies the story is one of the same old file
photos we have been seeing for two months. Several times, however, a “dou-
ble” has been used. Then, an item appears about Ponchitta Pierce with a
supposedly new photo, but you are not told that the person in the photo is only a
“lookalike.” The real Ponchitta Pierce is dead, of a bullet in the head. And then,
of course, once in a while there has to be a low-key item in the news about
David Rockefeller. In his case, a very good “double” has been on the job since
late February, and he appears occasionally in photos. One example of this took
place on February 27 when the David Rockefeller “double” spoke before the
Staten Island Chamber of Commerce. He had never spoken there before and so
his audience never suspected that this man was not David Rockefeller. The next
56
Audio Letter 44
day the New York Times ran a brief news item about the talk, complete with a
small photograph of the David Rockefeller “double” at the lectern.
But of all the disappearances I revealed last month, by far the most dangerous
to the Bolsheviks is that of Dr. Henry Kissinger. For many years Kissinger was
highly visible to the American public. Any time a major new development takes
place in international relations, Americans expect to see Kissinger giving his
comments on television. His name is a household word and his distinctive face
and guttural voice are recognized instantly by millions. These factors would
have made Kissinger a great asset to his fellow Bolsheviks if he had lived, but
now these very same factors are presenting the Bolsheviks with a difficult prob-
lem. Of all the missing persons, it is Kissinger whose prolonged absence from
public view would be noticed first by Americans; and yet, he is also very diffi-
cult to imitate successfully enough to pass the test of prolonged television
interviews with close-up shots. And so up to now the use of the “double” is
only a secondary factor in the Bolshevik cover-up of Kissinger’s disappearance.
In recent weeks, a well-tanned “double” for Kissinger was dispatched to Aca-

pulco, Mexico, to lend credence to the cover-story that he was vacationing
there. He has also shown up elsewhere mingling with people who do not know
him well, and even speaking to such groups of people. This is the man who was
seen momentarily on television three days ago in connection with the signing of
the Egyptian-Israeli treaty in Washington. As the television cameras gave us a
brief, instant look at this man hugging Egypt’s President Sadat, we were told,
“That’s Henry Kissinger.” In ways like this, the Kissinger “double” is playing
an important role now. But the big problem facing the Bolsheviks is the televi-
sion interview problem, and so far they have not been able to produce a
“double” who is capable of completely solving that problem. So instead they
have recently concocted a different kind of hoax using the little known techni-
cal tools of television itself. In a moment I will describe in detail how a
television hoax has just been perpetrated by the Bolsheviks. The purpose of this
hoax is to trick you into believing that Henry Kissinger, after disappearing for
over a month, has miraculously reappeared. They will stop at nothing to make
you believe this, my friends, because in order to believe that Kissinger is alive
you must disbelieve what I told you last month about his permanent disappear-
ance on February 5. That means you will also disbelieve what I told you about
the other secret deaths and disappearances last month; and that means, in turn,
that you will refuse to believe that a Bolshevik coup d’etat has taken place here
in America. And so, my friends, you are faced with a clear choice upon which
YOUR FREEDOM and YOUR LIFE depend. One choice is to keep your mind
open to what I have told you—that Kissinger is dead—and decide whether the
fast-growing crisis atmosphere makes sense in that light. Your only other
57
choice is to believe what the Bolsheviks want you to believe—that is, that Kiss-
inger is alive because “I saw him on television.” Your decision about what you
believe in this situation is so important that I cannot stress it enough; so before I
describe the Kissinger television hoax itself, I believe it is essential that I give
you some background for what is going on now.
There is nothing new about “doubles,” hoaxes, and trickery by those who con-
trol the mass media. Many people think that a “double” is an exotic, rare
occurrence, but actually “doubles” are relatively easy to find for those who spe-
cialize in that field. For example, in Hollywood, California, there is an agency
called “Celebrity Look-Alikes, Inc.” run by Ron Smith. The agency provides
look-alikes for all kinds of public figures for entertainment purposes. They have
over 400 look-alikes, including one for Kissinger; and not one, but two look-
alikes for Jimmy Carter. One Carter look-alike is named Ed Beheler from
Waco, Texas; the other named Walter Hannon is from Los Angeles. Both look
so much like Carter that most people can’t tell the difference. Not long ago Bob
Hope illustrated this fact when he wrote to Ed Beheler: “Dear Ed—Thanks for
bringing the Jimmy Carter look and your talent to NBC for the ‘All Star Com-
edy Tribute to Vaudeville’ special. May I say your presence was somewhat
unnerving. After your appearance on the set, three of the pages left immediately
to pay their back taxes.”
But “doubles” and other hoaxes are not always so entertaining. Since medieval
times “doubles” have been used as an instrument of intrigue. History is replete
with the exploits of impostors who have taken the place of the rich and the
powerful, and often they have been remarkably successful. If all of this is new
to you, I urge you to do your own library research. For example, one of the lat-
est books on the whole area of hoaxes was published in 1977 by Reader’s
Digest—it’s called “The Pleasures of Deception” by Norman Moss. Chapter 4
of the book deals with a topic that is specially relevant here—that is, hoaxes
perpetrated by means of the mass media. It begins: “With the creation of the
mass media, a whole new area of deception was opened up. This provided the
means of fooling the whole public at the same time in the same way. Anything
told through the mass media carries credibility; it is more solid than rumor,
more respectable than gossip, more believable than hearsay.” A few lines fur-
ther on the author points out that people tend to just swallow what they read,
saying “The newspapers say so and so.” He might have added, “I saw it on
television.” The psychological key to all this is explained in the words: “This
authority stems partly from the fact that the media, and particularly the news
media, deal with public issues that are beyond the experience of most of its au-
dience.” In other words, if we don’t know any better, we just believe what we
are told. Still you may say, “Surely the great major media of the United States
58
Audio Letter 44
are not used for really serious distortions. It just couldn’t happen here.” Well,
my friends, it began happening here over 80 years ago.
I’ve pointed out on several past occasions that America began selling her soul
at the time of the build-up to the Spanish-American War. Spain was dragged
into war by the United States, and American public opinion eagerly welcomed
the war. The Hearst newspaper chain deliberately whipped up American pas-
sions to the point where the cries of “Remember the Maine” led America into a
national crime against Spain. Later on, the gross distortions and outright lies by
the Hearst media came out publicly; but by then the damage was done, and the
American public did not cry out in anger over the trickery nor insist that we
make amends to Spain. Instead, we were too puffed up over being suddenly a
world power. With that, we began to blind ourselves to the dangers of media
lies. It has gotten worse and worse, and we have become more and more blind.
The major media have fallen ever more completely under centralized control,
and have become increasingly powerful and ruthless. In June 1972, a national
scandal called “Watergate” began, and from start to finish it was orchestrated
by the controlled major media. The media script to destroy first Vice-President
Spiro Agnew and then President Richard Nixon was incredibly detailed. For
example, beginning early in 1973 I was able to reveal on radio Talk Shows all
over America that the face of Spiro Agnew was scheduled to appear on the cov-
ers of Time and Newsweek for the week of August 13, 1973. That was to be the
signal for Agnew to be cut down fast by scandal. Everything went off exactly as
planned. Agnew did appear on the covers of Time and Newsweek right on
schedule, and less than three months later he left office under the cloud of scan-
dal. I revealed more about the Watergate scandal in the past, and there is no
time to review all of that again now. The point is this: the controlled major me-
dia of the United States have proved themselves to be powerful enough to bring
on a war, or to end a presidency; and now they are under the control of the In-
ternational Bolsheviks—the most diabolical, crafty, and ruthless people ever to
stalk the earth. Regardless of the other details, their schemes always have one
key ingredient in common—that is to instill trust in their intended victims until
the moment of vicious attack. And that, my friends, is what they are trying to
do to you now by means of their television hoax about Henry Kissinger’s seem-
ing reappearance.
The Kissinger television hoax began early this month, March 1979. My Audio
Letter No. 43 had been recorded on February 28 and began reaching subscribers
the first few days of this month. Within days the Bolsheviks began their coun-
terattack in an effort to discredit what I had revealed about Kissinger’s
disappearance. As a preliminary step, an interview of Kissinger was shown on
the NBC “Today Show” of March 9. Jimmy Carter was then in the midst of his
59
trip to Egypt and Israel, and the topic of the NBC interview with Kissinger was
the Middle East; and yet, Kissinger made no reference to the Carter trip then
under way. Instead he spoke in generalities that were months out of date. Many
viewers all over the United States recognized the interview segment as having
been shown before by NBC, and many stations received complaining telephone
calls about it; but the “Today Show” episode was only a stopgap measure. The
master hoax took place just four days ago on the NBC television interview pro-
gram “Meet the Press.”
My friends, the history of “Meet the Press” is like the story of America’s entire
network of major media news sources in miniature. “Meet the Press” was
started as a radio show here in Washington in the late 40’s by my friend of 30
years, Martha Roundtree. As a highly intelligent woman and a real patriot, Mar-
tha Roundtree ran “Meet the Press” in such a way that it truly informed
Americans with all sides of an issue. But in the late 50’s she was pressured into
selling “Meet the Press,” which quickly lost its former award-winning quality.
Meanwhile, she found herself systematically blackballed from introducing any
fresh news programs anywhere in the broadcast media. Just as happened to me
a decade later, Martha Roundtree was discriminated against and locked out; and
just as I am doing now, she has for some time been informing Americans as
best she can by other means. For those who would like to know more, you may
write to her at:
Leadership Foundation, Box 1720, Washington, D.C., zip 20013.
Her current project is called “Proposition One - The Great Awakening,” and it
is a program to restore the moral and spiritual values to our nation. You can re-
ceive a free brochure about it if you will enclose a stamped self-addressed
business envelope with your letter.
Returning to “Meet the Press,” control recently passed to NBC itself. Unlike
individual radio and TV stations, the networks are completely unregulated by
the FCC. Now “Meet the Press” has joined other network programming as a
vehicle of propaganda, answerable to no one. This past Sunday, March 25,
NBC fed a “Meet the Press” program to affiliated stations nation-wide featuring
Henry Kissinger as the guest; and, my friends, that was the real Henry Kiss-
inger answering questions; but in exactly the same way, the real Clark Gable
was also seen on television recently in “Gone with the Wind.” Both men looked
alive on television, but in actuality both men are dead. But, my friends, the
“Meet the Press” program of last Sunday was much more than a mere re-run of
an old tape—it was carefully doctored so that Kissinger appeared to be answer-
ing new and up-to-date questions. When you hear how it was done, I believe
60
Audio Letter 44
you will understand why there were so many strange things about that program,
and you will also see that NBC went to a great deal of trouble to produce an
artificial and falsified edition of “Meet the Press” last Sunday. It had only one
purpose and that was to deceive you.
Under his million-dollar a year contract with NBC, Kissinger was periodically
taping interviews to be kept on hand for instant use whenever they might prove
useful. All of Kissinger’s answers that you saw and heard last Sunday were
taped over two months ago on Saturday, January 20, 1979; but that session was
not shown the next day on “Meet the Press.” Instead, the guest that day was
Leonard Woodcock, newly designated Ambassador to Red China. The footage
you saw last Sunday of the panelists on “Meet the Press” was taped early that
same morning, March 25. Each of the four panelists asked questions which
were designed to fit Kissinger’s answers of two months ago. In addition, sev-
eral scenes were shot using a look-alike to be used at commercial breaks and at
the end. In these brief scenes the panel were seen on the left of your screen fac-
ing the alleged Kissinger on the right; and as you may have noticed, the
Kissinger stand-in sat as still as a zombi in those scenes without saying a word.
Finally, computerized video tape editing techniques were used to splice to-
gether the new questions, Kissinger’s old answers, and the ‘break’ scenes. The
net result was “Meet the Press” for March 25, 1979—a TV hoax by NBC.
The March 25 “Meet the Press” hoax preceded by only one day the signing of
the so-called Egyptian-Israeli Peace Treaty here in Washington. The treaty is
the end product of a process begun by Kissinger’s own famous shuttle diplo-
macy, so the treaty should have been a prominent topic among the questions;
and yet, the fact is that not one single question was asked about the treaty. No
one asked Kissinger the obvious question: “What do you think of the treaty?”
Instead, the illusion of an up-to-date program was conveyed by means of clever
wording of questions by the two NBC representatives—Bill Monroe and Rich-
ard Valeriani. In each case a passing reference to the treaty was made in the
course of asking about something else, such as the perennial West Bank prob-
lem; and during the entire program, Kissinger himself used the word “treaty”
only in two brief sentences. These were edited into the beginning of the pro-
gram for maximum psychological effect, but they said only what Kissinger
began saying over six months ago that we will be better off with a treaty than
without one. The two NBC representatives dominated the program asking 12
out of the total of 21 questions, and except for the deceptive references to a
“treaty,” the entire program was strangely out of date. For example, one ques-
tion about the Middle East had to do with the prospects after Begin leaves
office. With Begin here in Washington in triumph for the treaty signing, such a
question was ridiculous; but two months ago when Kissinger was taped, rumors
61
were widespread that Begin might resign shortly. Likewise one question about
Nicaragua, of all things, was of current interest two months ago; but today?
Even the questions about Iran were two months behind the times. There was not
one word about the so-called Khomeini government of today. Instead, the ques-
tions and Kissinger’s answers revolved around the fall of the Shah and who was
to blame for it. When Kissinger was taped on January 20, those questions were
right up-to-date because the Shah had just left Iran only four days earlier on
January 16. But who is talking about the Shah today?
My friends, what is most revealing about last Sunday’s “Meet the Press” hoax
is what was not asked. Kissinger played a key role in opening America’s doors
to Red China, yet there was not a word about the visit here by Deng Hsiao-ping
last month. There was a flash-back question about Kissinger’s role years ago in
regard to Vietnam, Cambodia, and Chile; yet China’s just completed border war
with Vietnam was not even mentioned. We have heard stories for weeks that
Kissinger was vacationing in Mexico last month, yet Kissinger was asked noth-
ing to shed light on the hostile reception Jimmy Carter received there last
month. And strangest of all, there was not a word to acknowledge Kissinger’s
alleged ‘terrible grief’ over the death of Nelson Rockefeller.
In the dream world of last Sunday’s “Meet the Press” hoax, it was as if none of
these things had ever happened—and that is only natural, my friends, because
when Kissinger was taped on January 20, they had not happened yet. Kissinger
did not even have the impressive tan he was supposed to have gotten in Mex-
ico; instead, he appeared pale and unusually nervous. The nervousness, my
friends, was due to the fact that on January 20 Kissinger knew that his own
conspiratorial activities would lead to the murder of Nelson Rockefeller only
six days later.
My friends, the “Meet the Press” hoax was an act of desperation by the Bolshe-
viks. They want desperately for you to swallow it whole, to say “Of course
Kissinger is alive. I saw him on television.” If you do that, you will be your
own worst enemy in the Bolshevik game-plan. They cannot keep up this cha-
rade for very long, but they are only playing for time—and not much time at
that! Timetables have slipped before, but the Bolshevik target date to start shut-
ting down our freedoms is the middle of May, only six weeks from now; and
after the Bolshevik death grip is around our throats, they could not care less if
we then realize that we have been tricked, because then it will be too late.
Topic #2—For hundreds of years doubles, look-alikes, and impostors have been
recurring facts of life throughout modern civilization. Where the rich and the
powerful and the ruling classes are involved, the pattern is always the same.
62
Audio Letter 44
Quoting once again from the book I cited earlier, THE PLEASURES OF
DECEPTION: “A monarch or heir to the throne dies but in circumstances
which leave the possibility of doubting that he really did die, at least to those
who want to doubt it, and claimants come forward.”
When one considers the enormous empire which the late four Rockefeller
brothers presided over, the attractions for impostors are overwhelming and
there is no need to resort to confidential information to recognize this much.
For example, you might look over the book titled THE ROCKEFELLERS by
Peter Collier and David Horowitz published in 1976 by Holt, Reinhart and
Winston. It reveals such a major role in history and such family wealth that
anyone who could get control of it all would put themselves in a very powerful
position. The plunderers would gain not only the wealth and assets but the
power that goes with controlling the dynasty’s fortune. If the heads of the dy-
nasty were to vanish from the scene without this becoming widely known, the
way would be opened for doubles and impostors to enter the picture. The whole
empire could be taken over without eliminating anyone except the very closest
associates of those who had secretly disappeared.
Last month I revealed that the Rockefeller family empire has now been placed
in exactly this vulnerable condition. All four of the third generation Rockefeller
brothers have been killed in a Bolshevik coup d’etat behind the scenes, and the
deaths of the last two—David on February 9 and Laurance on February 17—are
being kept secret. Even the surviving members of the Rockefeller family who
know about it, the widows and the members of the fourth generation, are keep-
ing quiet about it. As I mentioned last month, they have been led to believe
wrongly that silence is in their own best interest. And so the plundering of the
Rockefeller family fortune is now underway in earnest. On one hand the Bol-
shevik purge of those who were closest to the four brothers is continuing. The
most conspicuous case of this lately was the murder of Dr. John Knowles,
president of the Rockefeller Foundation, early this month on March 6. He was
shot in the head. At the same time, doubles for David Rockefeller are now play-
ing an important role in the Bolshevik plundering of the Rockefeller family
fortune. Ironically the most vulnerable part of the whole Rockefeller financial
complex is its heart, the mammoth Chase-Manhattan Bank.
For many years the late David Rockefeller was preoccupied with manipulating
the world-wide tentacles of the Rockefeller cartel. One day he would be some-
where in the United States presiding over a meeting to coordinate the actions of
huge multinational corporations; next, it might be a rush trip by private jet to
the Middle East to patch up some problem there. For example, when David
Rockefeller got word that his brother Nelson was dead on January 26, he was in
63
Oman pressuring the Bank of Oman to stop buying gold. Had he not returned
here for that emergency, his next stop might have been Singapore or Tokyo. On
and on it went, always on the move. The world was David Rockefeller’s oyster
and he all but ignored the pearl at the center, his own Chase-Manhattan Bank.
His constant travels made David Rockefeller a stranger in his own bank in re-
cent years, he was so seldom there; and thereby without realizing it he
developed a fatal weakness in his pattern of behavior. Like his brother Nelson,
David Rockefeller had been subjected to psychological profile studies without
his knowledge; and as with Nelson, David’s weakness was discovered. He was
not minding the store—that is, the Chase Manhattan Bank.
As I mentioned last month, the closest associates of David Rockefeller would

not be fooled for long in an intimate meeting with a “double”; but those close
associates, my friends, are scattered world-wide, they are not found at Chase-
Manhattan Bank. And so the David Rockefeller doubles are using the Bank it-
self as the “open sesame” to plunder the Rockefeller family riches. Obeying
instructions, they are ordering the transfer of tremendous sums of money out of
Chase-Manhattan Bank and into Bolshevik coffers here and abroad. Meanwhile
they are keeping up the image of the late David Rockefeller by darting around
on quick trips here and there. In this, they are being assisted by Bolshevik
agents within the fabric of the Rockefeller network of banks, businesses, and
publications. By means of the David Rockefeller doubles and other actions, the
Bolsheviks are working like a swarm of termites eating away the assets of
Chase-Manhattan Bank from within. Other banks, here and abroad too, are be-
ing affected by this process. Already Columbia University in New York has
begun dumping millions of dollars worth of bank stocks including that of
Chase-Manhattan. And in a portent of things to come, a subsidiary of Chase-
Manhattan Bank has just filed for bankruptcy. When Chase-Manhattan itself
collapses, it will have staggering consequences for the banking system of the
entire world.
Last month I revealed the beginning of the plundering of the Rockefeller family
fortune. At that time the Rockefeller fourth generation members did not know
what was afoot. Now they do know but are at a loss of what to do about it. The
four third-generation brothers always kept tight control over the Rockefeller
empire. As a result, the fourth generation Rockefellers were always left in the
dark about what the Brothers were up to and without any control over their own
assets. But I believe now is the time to remind the fourth generation members
of the Rockefeller family and also the third generation widows of the one time
when they did exert their collective muscle and make it stick. I am referring to
the June 1974 conclave of 84 members of the Rockefeller family. The top item
on the agenda for that conclave was to answer the question: “What shall we do
64
Audio Letter 44
about Dr. Beter?” The four brothers—John D. III, Nelson, Laurance and
David—argued that I should be “taken care of” before I could become well-
enough known to be dangerous to their plans. Two months earlier I had testified
before Congress about the missing gold at Fort Knox. The Brothers had easily
prevented Congress from investigating my charges, but now I was going public
with the story. The Brothers did not admit that my charges were true in the con-
clave, only that they were dangerous; and they urged that I be silenced quickly
by whatever means. But my friends, the fourth generation said “No.” The
Brothers were told in no uncertain terms that the fourth generation would have
no part in such a plan. As a result, the Brothers decided instead simply to ignore
me, to force me off the Radio Talk Shows on which I had been appearing and to
let me say whatever I wanted since I would be denied an audience.
My friends, over the past several years I have been asked countless times,
“Why are you alive?” My basic answer is that I trust in the Lord Jesus Christ to
protect me, and He has done so. But one of the concrete examples of that pro-
tection was the action taken nearly five years ago by the fourth generation
Rockefellers. So if you have ever wondered why I have always made such a
sharp distinction between the four Rockefeller brothers and the rest of the fam-
ily, now you know. In all likelihood, they saved my life. Now I would like to
repay them if only they will listen. If they will meet once again in conclave,
they will discover that there are concrete steps by which they can retake control
of what remains of the Rockefeller empire for the good of all Americans. As I
explained last month, the interests of the surviving members of the Rockefeller
family are now identical with those of all patriotic Americans; and so if they
will seize this brief opportunity now, they can not only save what remains of
their own assets but, more importantly, help save America.
My friends, the Rockefeller survivors have a golden opportunity now to redeem

themselves and the family name. By acting now they can truly become the
benefactors of society which their forebearers only pretended to be. But I must
add this final observation as well: if the Rockefellers do not take courage and
act as I have said, history shows clearly what their fate will be. Whenever the
heads of a dynasty are overthrown or killed, those responsible always seek out
and kill all survivors to make sure the dynasty can never rise again. That is
what the Bolsheviks have in store for the entire Rockefeller family IF THEY
DO NOT NOW ACT to prevent it!
Topic #3—Three days ago on March 26, 1979, the Washington air was filled
with the promises of ‘Peace, Peace’ that always pave the way for war. Shortly
before noon that day, Egypt’s President Sadat and Israel’s Prime Minister Be-
gin joined Jimmy Carter on the lawn of the White House. In a dramatic open-air
65
ceremony, the Egyptian-Israeli Peace Treaty was signed. Then Sadat and Begin
each spoke in glowing terms about achieving, after 30 years of hostility, peace
between Egypt and Israel. Even Mrs. Sadat and Mrs. Begin had their turn, side
by side at the microphones. Echoing the feelings of wives and mothers every-
where, Mrs. Sadat spoke of the blessings of no longer having to look forward to
more war, suffering, and death. And in a display of pure joy, she abruptly
leaned over and embraced Mrs. Begin. But that same afternoon, with the ink
barely dry on the so-called “Peace Treaty,” the Carter administration quietly
signed two separate agreements with Israel. In one agreement the United States
has now given Israel an unconditional guarantee that it will receive all the oil it
needs for the next 15 years. This agreement means that Israel will be com-
pletely unaffected by the coming destruction of Middle Eastern oil fields, and it
is to remain in force no matter how severe the rationing will become here in
America. The other agreement or Memorandum of Understanding pledges the
United States to go to war against Egypt should the treaty break down. Egypt
was not warned in advance about this second American-Israeli agreement and
has reacted as if she had been betrayed, which she was! Meanwhile Israel’s
Prime Minister Begin has been gloating over this agreement in public, calling it
“A beautiful document, well written, and what it contains is very important.”
My friends, what we are seeing now is the culmination of the late Henry Kiss-
inger’s “shuttle diplomacy” of three and four years ago. In Audio Letter No. 6
for November 1975, I explained what the SINAI ACCORD was all about. It
consisted of a pair of treaties—one between the United States and Israel, the
other between the United States and Egypt—and the purpose of the Sinai Ac-
cord was to lay the groundwork for a Middle East war that would involve the
United States. As I said then, the Middle East war plan was to involve a limited
nuclear strike against Arab OPEC oil wells jointly by the United States and Is-
rael.
Since I first revealed this basic plan over three years ago, events have caused it
to be delayed and revised several times but now it is moving along fast as part
of the Bolsheviks’ game-plan. They want to use the coming Middle East crisis
to shut down America in a Bolshevik revolution before going to war against
Russia; and right now cadres of Bolsheviks are pouring into the United States,
most all of them experienced in revolution tactics and strategy. Shortly before
the Bolshevik revolution of 1917, the ruling circles of the United States sent
more than 1,500 of these people to Russia to foment revolution. Now they are
returning to do the same thing here in the United States.
Beginning with the strange death of John D. Rockefeller III eight months ago,
control of America began shifting rapidly to these Satanic Bolsheviks; and last
66
Audio Letter 44
August 1978 in Audio Letter No. 37, I was able to reveal their master strategy
to build up to a nuclear first strike against Russia. It’s a prescription for up to
350-million people to die world-wide, all to no avail. But it’s “do or die” for the
Bolsheviks. They would rather have all of us die than to give up their own
dreams of total WORLD DOMINATION, and the key to this catastrophic plan
lies in igniting the long-delayed Middle East war.
We have already been given a sample of what lies ahead for us in the Jones-
town, Guyana tragedy. Four months ago I devoted Audio Letter No. 40 in its
entirety to the military operation that took place there and the role played in that
operation by the mass murder. As I revealed then, Israeli Commandoes were
the key to the success of the operation. It wiped out the secret Russian Missile
Base I began warning about over four years ago. My friends, the joint Ameri-
can-Israeli operation in Guyana was only a dress rehearsal for the coming joint
American-Israeli limited nuclear strike against Saudi Arabian oil fields. In Au-
dio Letter No. 37 I explained how the plan was to begin with the supposedly
surprise success in the Camp David talks last September. The goal was to be an
eventual treaty between Egypt and Israel set up in such a way as to drag in the
United States, and now this situation is a fact, and the “Hate Saudi Arabia”
campaign is also far advanced—right on track, as I reviewed it in Audio Letter
No. 41. Soon a major manufactured incident in the Middle East will scuttle the
Peace Treaty. The ensuing nuclear destruction of Saudi Arabia’s oil fields will
give the rulers of both Israel and the United States what they want. Freed of any
concern about her own oil supplies, Israel will be free to destroy the engine of
Arab economic power—oil revenues; and the resultant cut-off of oil supplies
will give our Bolshevik rulers here in America the excuse to shut down our
freedoms under the guise of a NATIONAL EMERGENCY. Quickly then they
plan to bring us all under total regimentation as America gradually shifts onto a
full war footing.
My friends, the time left to us is very short, and yet there is one last chance left
IF WE WILL TAKE IT. The rulers of Russia today are Christians. Right now
the ‘actor Pope’ who masquerades as the dead Pope John Paul II is preparing to
create trouble in Poland. By contrast, Russia has just invited over 200 Polish
priests into Russia to begin opening monasteries, schools, and churches there.
Two years ago I began asking: “Where are the churches in this hour of need?”
!! I urge now that American church leaders at all levels and from all denomina-
tions band together for a “Pilgrimage for Peace” to Moscow. Pastors and other
church leaders who want life and freedom for America, instead of death and
destruction, can do this for our Lord Jesus Christ. Therefore, I urge you to call
my business number here in Washington, D.C.—Area Code 202-659-3999.
67
Give me your name, address, telephone number, and what your church position
is so that you can be contacted later. My friends, it’s up to YOU to make sure
Christian leaders and church leaders all over America hear this message in time
to respond by April 30, 1979.
When I record Audio Letter No. 45 next month, God willing, I plan to tell you
whether or not American church leaders have responded in great enough num-
bers to rise to this occasion. If that takes place, and a massive pilgrimage of
church leaders can be formed to visit the Kremlin leaders, perhaps they can be
convinced that the Bolsheviks have not infiltrated all of our churches. And if
that is true, perhaps we can turn aside the BOLSHEVIK WAR PLAN; but if
church leaders here do not respond, Russia’s leaders will continue to believe as
they do now. They are convinced that what happened to the Russian Orthodox
Church 60 years ago has now happened to the churches here in America; and if
that is true, then God help us all.
68
Audio Letter 45
April 27, 1979
This evening the last in a 10-part special series of reports called “Second to
None?” was shown on ABC’s World News Tonight program. For two entire
weeks the series has drummed away night after night about America’s military
weakness compared to Russia. Full-page newspaper ads have urged viewers to
watch the series; so have various newspaper articles. And the series itself has
carried so much impact that it has made an indelible impression on millions of
Americans. Most of all, the nine-minute installment on April 17 describing the
outbreak of nuclear war between Russia and America left many viewers badly
shaken. The frightening picture painted in the ABC news series is accurate as
far as it goes, but it also would have been accurate three to four years ago. We
were not shown these things then, so the question is: WHY NOW? One reason
that has been given is that we might be about to sign the SALT II treaty with
Russia, and that we ought to look before we leap. But if that were the real rea-
son, a series like this should have been shown more than 18 months ago;
because that is when SALT I expired and the air was full of promises of a new
SALT treaty then.
My friends, the people who put together the ABC documentary series did a
very good job indeed; but the reason our Bolshevik rulers want it to be shown
now is to help add to the atmosphere of war tensions. They also want to make
sure that SALT II, if it is signed, will generate a storm of controversy and be
defeated in the Senate. If that happens, it will be like closing the door to peace
and telling the world that war with Russia is inevitable. In more and more ways
the atmosphere of mounting crisis and the threat of war is being stoked up by
the Bolsheviks here in America. The low drum beat of BRING BACK THE
DRAFT keeps coming back over and over, a little louder each time. The specter
of gas rationing keeps haunting the news as the artificial crisis in the Middle
East heats up. For example, former Defense Secretary Melvin Laird now says
the government should institute gas rationing just to make the crisis seem more
real to people. Can you imagine?
My friends, I realize that today, as in the past, many people are skeptical about
what I have to reveal. After all, these things are probably contrary to what they
69
have heard from friends, family, teachers, and the news media. They do not
have my intelligence sources; and if I were to reveal these sources, they would
dry up. But I believe that my duty is simply to reveal the truth—not cover it up
just because it may be hard to accept.
This month events have been moving very fast in startling ways. Four days ago
I said over the Ed Busch Show on WFAA, Dallas, Texas, that the take-over
here in the United States has already taken place. The people you will see on
your television screens are not the people you think they are! Now I can say
more.
Topic #1—THE DOMESTIC GUYANA AT THREE MILE ISLAND
Topic #2—THE SECRET INTELLIGENCE WAR OF “DOUBLES”
Topic #3—LAST CALL FOR A “PILGRIMAGE FOR PEACE”
Topic #1—As dawn was breaking over Pennsylvania 30 days ago on March 28,
it looked like the beginning of just another ordinary day. It was a Wednesday
and there were jobs to go to, schools to attend, errands to run. The streets of
Harrisburg, the capital city, were coming to life as people began their day’s ac-
tivities. East of the city the rich farm lands of the Pennsylvania Dutch country
were coming to life with the bloom of spring. For generations the Pennsylvania
Dutch have been famous for their life close to God and far from modern tech-
nology; but on that Wednesday morning of March 28, 1979, the Pennsylvania
Dutch were completing their first year with a landmark of modern technology
almost on their doorstep. It was the THREE MILE ISLAND NUCLEAR
POWER PLANT located in the Susquehanna River southeast of Harrisburg.
In the first rays of morning light the distinctive outlines of the nuclear plant
gave no hint of the danger within it. The plant appeared quiet and peaceful; in
fact, quieter than normal. Two of the four giant cooling towers 37 stories high
had stopped belching steam. That meant one of the two nuclear reactors on the
Island had been shut down for some reason; and, in fact, some residents near
the power plant had been awakened in the pre-dawn hours by a thundering roar
of escaping steam. But no one seemed to be really worried. A few minutes be-
fore 7:00 AM someone close to the plant might have detected the first clear
signal that something ominous was happening. An emergency siren began to
wail telling workers to abandon immediately certain critical areas of the power
plant. Several workers made a dash for their cars in an attempt to escape. Two
70
Audio Letter 45
cars raced out of the power plant site across the bridge to freedom—then the
gate was closed to make sure no one else could leave! A few minutes later at
7:02 AM officials of Metropolitan Edison called the Dauphin County Civil De-
fense authorities. A site emergency had just been declared at the nuclear
powerplant. By this time, Three Mile Island Plant No. 2 had already been in a
state of growing crisis for more than three hours; and for nearly an hour the
computer designed to monitor conditions inside the reactor had been printing
question marks instead of numbers. The reactor was overheating so badly that
the computer system could no longer measure the temperatures.
It had all begun shortly after 3:00 AM when trouble developed in a key water
pump. Soon the pump failed, halting the flow of water to the steam-driven
power turbine. Automatic devices immediately shut down the turbine in a situa-
tion known as a “turbine trip.” Superheated steam at enormous pressures was
diverted from the turbine and vented to the outside, producing the thunderous
roar that wakened nearby residents. At the same time, other automatic devices
were shutting down the nuclear reactor itself in a so-called “scram”—that is, a
rapid emergency shutdown. Normally when a nuclear reactor is started up or
shut down, it is done gradually. This allows temperatures throughout the reactor
to rise or fall gently, avoiding thermal stresses that might do damage. It also
allows the start-up or shutdown process to be monitored carefully at every step
to make sure nothing unexpected happens. But on that Wednesday morning of
March 28 there was no time for all that. With the pump failure and “turbine
trip,” the nuclear reactor was left producing enormous quantities of heat that
had no place to go. So the automatic control system “scrammed” the reactor.
Within seconds, all the reactor’s control rods were dropped into the core to
make the fission chain reaction die away. But even with the rods in place, the
hot reactor was still generating heat, at a slower rate. So to cool it down, the
automatic control system turned on three big standby pumps—two were meant
to flood the reactor core with cooling water, while the third had a related safety
purpose. The three pumps roared to life, but nothing happened. There was no
water for them to pump, because before the episode began someone had turned
off the valves ahead of the pumps. It was far more than a mere breach of regula-
tions! Shutting those valves was an act that could not have been more expertly
calculated to bring on a potential catastrophe. All three valves were closed,
thereby defeating the redundancy which was built into the backup systems for
safety purposes. It was an unthinkable thing to do! It threatened a power plant
worth nearly one billion dollars with possible destruction. It threatened untold
thousands of lives; and if done by an employee, it even threatened the life of
whoever closed the valves. It was, in short, a kamikaze act of sabotage!! But
perhaps because it was so unthinkable, it worked.
71
A number of workers have stated that they noticed the valves closed and tagged
in the days just before March 28; and everyone who worked in the vicinity of
the valves knew very well how critical they were. So the tendency was to as-
sume that there must be some good reason why they had been closed. After all,
they even had tags to show that they were closed. It was an obvious and serious
violation of safety procedures, but it seemed unthinkable that this could be un-
authorized and deliberate. And so the valves remained closed, and no one did
anything to correct the situation. In this way, the stage was set for Wednesday,
March 28, 1979. As the reactor was “scrammed,” the backup pumps screamed
in vain, trying to draw water through valves that were closed. No fresh water
went to the reactor to cool it, pressures built up in the reactor, and a safety valve
popped open. Superheated radioactive water began flashing out of the reactor
into the huge concrete containment dome, and the water level started dropping
in the reactor itself. Then the valve stuck open, instead of closing as it was sup-
posed to do. Radioactive water kept right on gushing out of the reactor.
Strangely, it was more than two hours before the Control Room button was
pushed to stop radioactive water from escaping.
My friends, all this was going on while neighbors of Three Mile Island were
drifting back to sleep. They had been awakened by the brief roar of vented
steam when the turbine tripped, but then all had quieted down again. All
seemed peaceful and normal again around the nuclear power plant; but inside
the Control Room of Three Mile Island No. 2, claxons were blaring, alarms
were ringing, and trouble lights were flashing. The reactor was fast losing water
and heating up rapidly. Soon the last-ditch emergency cooling system automati-
cally turned on; but within a few minutes one of the emergency pumps was shut
off by person or persons unknown for unexplained reasons. Six minutes later
the same was done to the other emergency cooling pump—once again redun-
dant emergency systems had been thwarted by human intervention! Soon there
was a radioactive pool of water on the floor of the huge containment dome
where it had spilled out of the reactor. Sump pumps began sucking the water
out of there into a nearby auxiliary building which is not equipped to seal in
radioactive materials. From there radioactive materials soon began to filter out-
side to be carried downwind.
Strangely enough, while pumps critical to safety were being turned off right and
left, the one pump that should have been turned off, the sump pump, was left
running! As a result, it was guaranteed that radiation from the reactor would
find its way outside to contaminate the countryside. Within 20 minutes after the
episode began, someone discovered that all the water to the reactor had been cut
off, and took corrective action. Cooling water began rushing into the reactor,
and for a while the situation was under control. But within an hour, the un-
72
Audio Letter 45
thinkable happened again! All four water pumps were quietly turned off again,
and the reactor started heating up fast. Soon the monitoring computer began
printing question marks, thousands of small cylinders of uranium fuel in the
reactor began coming apart at the seams with heat, highly radioactive uranium
and fission products bubbled out of the reactor with the still-escaping water.
At 7:02 AM the first call was placed to Civil Defense. By 7:20 AM Metropoli-
tan Edison had to call Civil Defense officials again. Radiation levels in the
containment dome were skyrocketing, and now the Three Mile Island situation
had been upgraded to a general emergency. Yet, to the public at large, there still
was no word that anything was wrong at Three Mile Island. Thousands of
commuters in Harrisburg drove to work without a hint on their car radios that
anything unusual was taking place. Mothers hurried to get their children packed
off to school on time, farmers in the neighboring countryside set about their
daily chores without giving the nuclear plant a second thought. Meanwhile
traces of radioactive uranium and fission products from the crippled reactor
were already wafting downwind and beginning to contaminate the Pennsylvania
landscape for miles around.
It was not until 9:06 AM, more than five hours after the episode began, that any
public notice of the emergency was given. It was a brief report over the Associ-
ated Press news wire marked “Urgent” to the effect that a general emergency
was underway at Three Mile Island. From then on, Three Mile Island became
like a domestic Guyana story—and in more ways than one! Like Guyana, it
captured the headlines for a week and more; like Guyana, it seemed unthink-
able—and yet there it was right before our eyes. Just as with Guyana, news
stories about the events at Three Mile Island were marked by confusion; and in
Pennsylvania as in Guyana, large numbers of innocent American civilians were
the victims. In Guyana they were poisoned by means of potassium cyanide; in
Pennsylvania thousands have been poisoned by varying amounts of radioactive
uranium and its fission products, such as xenon and krypton gases.
Right now doctors in the vicinity of Three Mile Island are reporting many pa-
tients who are now exhibiting symptoms such as nausea, headaches, diarrhea,
nervousness, insomnia, and eye trouble. Many doctors are not aware of it, but
these are among the classic symptoms of low-level radiation poisoning. The
Government is telling a half truth in saying that the contamination from Three
Mile Island should not lead to an increase in cancer. The reason is that the par-
ticular elements released in the nuclear accident do not cause cancer but other
disorders. The word cancer, for that matter, has been turned into a medical scare
word that hides more than it reveals. “Cancer” is a Latin word meaning “crab.”
It is used to describe a certain kind of growth or tumor that grows with tentacles
73
in various directions, giving it a crab-like appearance. What makes cancer so

frightening is that it grows fast, consuming healthy tissue as it goes; so any tu-
mor that grows rapidly is labeled as cancer, while tumors that remain stable or
grow very slowly are usually called “benign.”
In the 1920’s Dr. Otto Warburg earned the Nobel Prize for determining exactly
what cancer really is. He was able to prove that the malady called cancer is just
a condition of blocked cell oxidation. Today, more than 50 years later, we hear
year in and year out about new ideas about what cancer might be. Meanwhile
Warburg’s conclusive findings of long ago are ignored. Billions of dollars and
millions of lives have been wasted over the years in efforts to figure out how to
kill cancer when it occurs. The reality, my friends, is that cancer is itself the
conversion of normal tissue into a kind of living death. True elimination of can-
cer can only be achieved not by agents of death, but by restoring life.
In the area surrounding Three Mile Island though, cancer is not the problem.
Uranium and its derivatives can produce a fungus that leads to lumps and tu-
mors which often are misdiagnosed as cancer. If the fungus enters the
bloodstream, it produces a disease known as cystic fibrosis. With this disease,
the entire body undergoes weakening and gradual degeneration. It often strikes
children, and is usually considered fatal. The best protection against these dis-
orders produced by radiation as well as against cancer and other diseases is to
make sure your body cells are provided with the things they need to stay
healthy. A key to this lies in four key minerals which need to be in proper bal-
ance in your body at all times. The therapeutic value of these minerals was
established by Dr. Wilhelm Schussler of Basel, Switzerland a century ago and
has been confirmed in countless ways since then. In order of importance, these
four are: potassium, calcium, magnesium, and sodium. It is best to obtain these
four minerals in as non-toxic a form as possible. Ordinary table salt, for exam-
ple, is sodium chloride—an inorganic poison to the cell. It has to be de-toxified
by the liver and companion organs of the body before assimilation. Likewise,
many forms of potassium are toxic, even though potassium is vital to good
health. So it is important to get these minerals in an organic form—such as cit-
rate, gluconate, or oyster shells. In the United States proper supplements like
these are especially important because most American food is badly demineral-
ized, and this is most true of potassium, the most vital mineral of all.
The episode at Three Mile Island blanketed hundreds of square miles and pos-
sibly a million people with low-level radiation; but the miracle is that it was not
much worse than it was, for most of the radioactive materials released during
the episode are still confined to the power plant site itself. The huge concrete
containment dome around the reactor became so radioactive inside that no one
74
Audio Letter 45
could enter it without dying almost instantly; and the reactor itself was dam-
aged so badly that today, 30 days later, the shutdown of the reactor is just
reaching its final stages. The damage and contamination at Three Mile Island
Plant No. 2 are so extreme that there are serious doubts as to whether it can ever
be cleaned up and used again. Already there have been suggestions by some
that it should be encased in a tomb of concrete and abandoned.
My friend, that is an echo of the suggestion I made about the United States Bul-
lion Depository at Fort Knox 3-1/2 years ago in Audio Letter No. 5. The
Depository had been contaminated by a leaking radioactive CIA superpoison
secretly stored there, and it remains contaminated to this day. Three Mile Island
has proven that there are great potential hazards from nuclear power plants, but
those proven hazards lie in the area of vulnerability to sabotage that can pro-
duce terrible consequences. The available evidence strongly indicates that the
emergency at Three Mile Island was not an accident—it was a criminal act. Its
effect is to help speed up the plan to shut down American freedoms by means
of energy shortages, economic disruptions, and government controls.
Five months ago in Audio Letter No. 40, I revealed in detail how hundreds of
American civilians had been deliberately sacrificed by the American govern-
ment in Guyana, and why. I warned then that the gruesome tragedy at
Jonestown, Guyana, is only a pale shadow of what lies ahead for the entire
United States if the cancer of Bolshevism is not stopped. And now, a domestic
Guyana has taken place at Three Mile Island. A completely unnatural sequence
of events took place causing a nuclear crisis to take place which had never even
been analyzed in official studies.
Those responsible—the Bolsheviks among us—were hoping to achieve a full-

fledged disaster at Three Mile Island with massive releases of radiation. This
would have killed many people outright, sickened many more, and required a
mass evacuation of several counties in the Harrisburg area. That would have
accomplished two things. For one thing, it would have increased the general air
of crisis, of emergency, and of a need for decisive federal action; but, more im-
portantly, it would have turned all nuclear power plants into objects of fear and
hate by the American public. This would have justified an immediate shutdown
of all 70 nuclear power plants across the United States. In one blow America
would have lost 13% of its electric power. The virtual rationing of electricity by
various means would have followed quickly as one means of tightening gov-
ernmental control over American life. But the Three Mile Island episode never
quite reached the level of catastrophe except in terms of damage to the power
plant itself, and so the Bolshevik plan for now is to settle for half a loaf.
75
Three Mile Island Plant No. 2 was built by a company named Babcock & Wil-
cox, which has also built eight other nuclear plants, including the No. 1 plant on
Three Mile Island; so the plan now is to blame that company in various ways
and to shut down those eight plants, as was ordered today by the Nuclear Regu-
latory Commission. In the areas affected, the cutbacks in electric power will
have the disruptive effects planned by the Bolsheviks. The Bolshevik scheme to
rob America of part of its electric power by shutting down the nuclear plants is
elaborate. In recent months, controversy over nuclear power has been stirred up
to unprecedented levels, and in mid March two actions were taken to set the
stage for Three Mile Island. First, the Nuclear Regulatory Commission abruptly
shut down five plants in the northeast, ostensibly over earthquake worries; then
the movie, “The China Syndrome,” was released—and, my friends, there is
more to come. By means of Bolshevik coup d’etat and revolution an interna-
tional group who were once more powerful than the Rockefellers are making a
new bid for power here in America. But the outcome in the turbulent events
now going on behind the scenes is impossible to predict, because there is now a
clandestine war going on involving not one but several major intelligence agen-
cies. The prize: CONTROL OF AMERICA!!
Topic #2—Long before the American Revolution for Independence, a famous

principle was formulated in Europe. It was:
“GIVE ME THE POWER TO ISSUE A NATION’S MONEY, AND I CARE

NOT WHO WRITES THE LAWS.”
The man who originated this dictum used it to launch a family dynasty of un-
precedented wealth and power. His name: MAYER AMSCHEL
ROTHSCHILD (pronounced as Rothsheeld). The power of the Rothschilds, or
Rothschilds (pronounced with long “i”) as many people call them, grew fast in
Britain and Europe. By the time of the American Revolution, the financial af-
fairs especially of Britain and France were in the Rothschild pocket. The
taxation schemes which brought on the Revolution actually originated not with
King George but in the House of Rothschild. After the Revolution, Rothschild
agents were on hand to try to return America to Rothschild control. One of the
most powerful of these was Alexander Hamilton, but his maneuverings were
ended by the famous duel with Aaron Burr. America managed to steer clear of
Rothschild control until the Civil War provided a new opportunity. In Audio
Letter No. 26 I mentioned how Russia, then the greatest Christian nation on
earth, came to America’s rescue in 1863. Britain and France were preparing to
dismantle the United States, but Russia prevented it. For that and other reasons,
the Rothschilds thereafter marked Russia for utter destruction. At the same time
the Rothschilds were determined to take over America and decided to do it by
76
Audio Letter 45
promoting powerful groups already within our country. The era of America’s
robber barons was spawned and with it a new superdynasty—the
ROCKEFELLERS. By 1917 Rockefeller power in America had become so
great that they were strong partners with their former mentors, the Rothschilds.
The Bolshevik cancer to destroy Russia was a Rothschild creation, but it was
the Rockefeller interests who actually injected that cancer into Russia.
As the 20th Century progressed, the power of the aging Rothschild dynasty fi-
nally was eclipsed by that of the upstart Rockefellers. Where Rothschild power
had begun with the control of money, Rockefeller power was rooted in the con-
trol of ENERGY; and with Saudi Arabia in their grasp after World War II, the
Rockefellers soon began to out-distance all rival power groups world-wide, in-
cluding the Rothschilds. But, my friends, the Rothschild interests bided their
time. They waited for the Rockefellers to start making mistakes, and not long
ago it began happening.
In Audio Letters No. 38 and elsewhere, I have described how the atheistic Bol-
sheviks who used to run Russia have recently been overthrown. This final
overthrow is the culmination of six decades of determined effort by a tough,
tightly-knit band of Russian Christians. When the final phase of undisguised
overthrow began two to three years ago, it was the Rothschilds—not the Rocke-
fellers—who learned about it first. For 60 years the Rockefellers had been
secret allies of the old Bolsheviks in Russia. But the Rockefellers were sadly
mistaken in their belief that they actually controlled the Bolsheviks. Instead, it
was always the Rothschilds who secretly controlled the Bolsheviks in Russia—
and who now control them here in the United States. In the past, the interests of
the Rockefellers and Rothschilds always coincided well enough that this dis-
tinction did not really matter; but after the Battle of the Harvest Moon, which I
made public in Audio Letter No. 26, everything changed.
Recently I explained the fatal mistake which the four Rockefeller brothers made
in their panic following the Battle of the Harvest Moon. That mistake was to
open America’s doors to the old-line Bolsheviks, who are being expelled from
Russia now. It was a suicidal act for the Rockefellers because their own Corpo-
rate Socialist empire could not hope to coexist with those Satanic State
Socialists—the Bolsheviks. But the Rockefellers accepted the recommendations
of certain advisers to do so—and those advisers, my friends, were Rothschild
agents! During the past several months a Bolshevik coup d’etat has taken the
lives of all four of the Rockefeller brothers, as I have made public in my tapes.
The Rothschild interests of today are making a desperate bid to regain their
former status as the world’s No. 1 power group, and they are doing it through
their own forces of Bolshevism.
77
Last month I tried to warn the remaining members of the Rockefeller family
that they must join forces and act now to stop what is happening. If they do take
action as I said last month, they could help save not only themselves but all of
us here in America; but if they do not act, and quickly, they will suffer the his-
toric fate of all overthrown dynastic families—they will all be tracked down
and killed by their Bolshevik enemies. So far, I’m sorry to report, the Rockefel-
ler survivors remain fragmented and neutralized, persuaded wrongly that they
do not have enough power to act; and now, my friends, another prominent
member of the Rockefeller family has been killed—murdered near Paris,
France; but a double has already been substituted.
My friends, if the Bolshevik coup d’etat and coming full-scale revolution are
successful, our land faces a future of agony and despair. Christians will have to
hide their Bibles and hope for some day long in the future when it will be safe
to read them once again. When the Bolshevik revolution swept across Russia
six decades ago, that was the way it was. Our Lord Jesus Christ is a thorn in the
side for the atheistic Bolsheviks, and their hatred for Him will be expressed in
merciless persecution of His followers. No doubt about that!
There are those who say today, “America is too big, no one could take over our
whole country”; but, my friends, the continental United States has only four (4)
Time Zones. Sixty-two years ago smaller numbers of Bolshevik revolutionaries,
using cruder techniques than today, succeeded in taking control of Russia—and
Russia spreads almost half way round the world, with eleven (11) Time Zones!
The Bolsheviks, doing the bidding of the Rothschilds, are working fast; and yet
in recent days the situation has become much more complicated than before.
The struggle for control of America has now mushroomed into a secret intelli-
gence war, involving not one but several major intelligence agencies of the
world. Where it is all leading is by no means clear right now. All I can do at
this point is to report the facts to you and urge you to keep your eyes open. At
the present time, for example, the Bolsheviks are planning to ignite a Middle
East crisis around mid May. The Pope’s revolution was also planned for May
when I first made the plan public in Audio Letter No. 42, but that has now been
pushed back to June. But these and other plans have been thrown into question
by recent eruption of intelligence warfare by means of “doubles,” look-alikes,
and impostors.
For example, earlier this month on April 11, Vice-President Walter Mondale
reportedly left Washington on a trip to Iceland, Scandinavia, and the Nether-
lands; but, my friends, the man and woman on Air Force II were not Mondale
and his wife but actually “doubles.” The real Walter and Joan Mondale had
78
Audio Letter 45
been spirited away. The following day Jimmy, Rosalyn, and Amy Carter, the
real ones, left the White House for a 10-day Easter vacation in Georgia. The
first 8 days were to be spent offshore in seclusion at Sapelo Island. Carter was
looking more haggard by the day, racked by leukemia and multiple cancers. His
visible loss of weight lately had prompted cover stories about his alleged suc-
cess at dieting. He was fast losing the ability to work at all, and news stories
said he was going to Georgia to seek solitude. And so for a week and a half sur-
rounding Easter, the President and Vice-President of the United States were out
of public view. A few low-key reports appeared in the papers about the alleged
activities of Mondale on his trip. Otherwise all was quiet here in Washington.
The real purpose of the trip by Mondale’s Bolshevik “double” was to try to ob-
tain oil for Israel, but in this the Mondale “double” failed because very recently
Russia’s Marshal Dmitry Ustinov—the man now in charge in the Kremlin—
had visited Norway personally, and Norway has now come to terms with Rus-
sia.
The weekend after Easter things happened fast, completely unseen by the pub-
lic. On Friday night, April 20, the real Walter Mondale was being held
incommunicado by Bolshevik captors in New Richmond in western Wisconsin.
Sometime between 9:30 and 10:00 PM local time, Vice-President Walter Mon-
dale was executed! Mondale had been one of Nelson Rockefeller’s closest
political allies and had been prominent among the mourners at Rockefeller’s
memorial service at Riverside Church in early February. Now he had died on a
Friday evening, as Rockefeller had, at almost the same local time and from the
same cause—a bullet in the forehead. Barely an hour later, Mondale’s body was
dumped into Lake Superior at a point about 12 miles southeast of Taconite
Harbor, Minnesota. Meanwhile Air Force II was already on its way westward
across the Atlantic with a Mondale “double” aboard. Mondale had been sched-
uled to return on Sunday, according to public announcements, but his plane was
returning a day early for security reasons—but it did no good. Air Force II, a
duplicate of Air Force I flown by the President, was a specially outfitted mili-
tary Boeing 707 known as a VC 137-C. Its remains all except for the left wing
are now lying under thousands of feet of water in the North Atlantic. The navi-
gational coordinates are 57 - 30 - 35 North, 26 - 38 - 20 West. That’s about 150
miles north of where the Kissinger jet crashed in February. The left wing of Air
Force II is lying on the ocean floor about 13 miles to the east of the rest of the
plane. The flight crew were unable to radio details, but a blast close to the fuse-
lage tore off practically the entire left wing in flight. The wing fluttered away
like a leaf while the rest of the plane spiraled downward 7 miles into the sea. At
present Mondale’s office claims that he returned Sunday April 22 at 1:00 PM,
but the next person you see in the news as Mondale will be his second “dou-
ble,” recruited to fill in for the first “double” who died in a North Atlantic crash
79
of Air Force II. A replacement for Air Force II will no doubt appear as soon as
one can be outfitted.
On Saturday April 21, Jimmy Carter flew secretly from Georgia to Camp David
unaware that Mondale was dead. After lunch he went to Bethesda Naval Hospi-
tal for a checkup on his cancer and then to the White House briefly. It was not
until roughly 8:00 PM that night that the real Jimmy Carter returned to Plains.
There about 10:30 PM Jimmy Carter, President of the United States, was shot
between the eyes, but incredibly he retained some signs of life. He was rushed
from Plains to Andrews Air Force Base outside of Washington, arriving shortly
after midnight. By 2:00 AM Sunday April 22, he was in surgery at Bethesda
Naval Hospital; but it was hopeless, just as it was in 1963 when President Ken-
nedy was shot in the head. With Rosalyn Carter in shock, the body of the late
President of the United States was disposed of quickly. That evening the real
Rosalyn Carter was at the White House under heavy sedation, but shortly after
midnight she, too, was executed with a bullet between the eyes.
During the past several days Jimmy Carter No. 2 (that is, Carter’s “double”) has
been seen repeatedly in public—and what a change! Jimmy Carter No. 2 looks
and acts 10 years younger than the real Carter did. Listen now to the tired, halt-
ing voice of the old Carter as he read a prepared statement just 17 days ago on
April 10 (sound track follows):
“We have already begun to hear a good deal of talk from the oil companies
about so-called ‘plow backs’; but what this talk covers up is that this proposal,
as it will be presented with the Windfall Profits Tax, already provides six bil-
lion dollars in increased revenue.”
Now compare that with the more shrill voice—forceful, vigorous, and confi-
dent—of Carter No. 2 just two days ago on April 25 (sound track follows):
“The bottom line is, that if there is an effort to cheat on the SALT agreement
including the limits on modernizing ICBMs, we will detect it.”
My friends, the flat, awkward speaking style of the old Carter is gone. In its
place is a new style of delivery which imitates the old Carter but has better
phrasing and more lively inflection of the voice. The eyes which were becom-
ing glazed with pain and sedative are now gone, and in their place are eyes that
are piercing and alert. Gone is the old Carter under siege. In his place is a man
who is talking about storming the country by entering every Democratic Presi-
dential Primary in the nation, but he is making do with only a weak imitation of
that most famous of all Carter campaign assets—the face-splitting Carter grin.
80
Audio Letter 45
The change in appearance and behavior are so striking that something had to be
done to focus peoples’ attention in a way that would explain it all away—in
other words, distraction. And so the new Jimmy Carter, the “double,” is receiv-
ing great publicity over the fact that he parts his hair on the left; the old Carter,
of course, parted it on the right. So now anyone who looks at him and thinks,
“Carter sure looks different these days,” will also think, “I guess it’s the hair
that does it.”
My friends, strange things are going on and you should prepare yourself for big
surprises in the days ahead. Besides the clandestine services of the United
States and the Rothschild interests, there are at least three other factions secretly
busy here now. These are the Intelligence Agencies of Russia, Great Britain,
and Israel. Within the past two months, Britain has secretly come to terms with
Russia, and the Russian underwater missiles around Britain have been removed;
and the “doubles” for Jimmy and Rosalyn Carter have been at the Russian Em-
bassy here in Washington a great deal this past week, avoiding the White House
as much as possible.
One thing, my friends, is certain: whatever these things mean, the Russians are
taking it all very seriously. Since last Sunday, April 22, there have been 24
Russian Cosmospheres deployed over the Washington metropolitan area.
Something important is afoot, and however it turns out, the Russians intend to
be ready.
Topic #3—One week ago today, April 20, was Lenin’s birthday. In the past it
has always been a day that demanded a properly reverent attitude on the part of
all Russians; but things are changing in Russia today. Brezhnev No. 2—the
“double” who replaced the real Brezhnev after his death in January 1978—is
used today to convey Russian policy positions to the world, and this year
Brezhnev No. 2 was conspicuous by his absence from Lenin Day celebrations.
Instead, he went to a hockey match and one which had little significance to
Russia, whose team was not one of those playing. It was a graphic way of say-
ing in effect:
Lenin doesn’t live here any more. Meanwhile other members of the Russian
leadership were giving signals about what does matter in Russia today. The
hockey game attended by Brezhnev No. 2 was taking place on Good Friday, as
reckoned in Russia. At the time, a Congressional delegation from the United
States was in Moscow meeting with leaders including Prime Minister Kosygin
and Foreign Minister Gromyko. In James Reston’s NEW YORK TIMES article
of April 24, 1979, some surprising behavior by the Russian leaders is men-
tioned: “Paradoxically they arranged with the Congressmen on Easter weekend
81
to go into the old Christian church at Syzran and watch, if not take part, in the
ceremony of the Resurrection.” More than a week earlier the Easter season had
begun in Moscow in a way that stunned many outside observers. On the eve-
nings of April 13 and 14 the Moscow Conservatory, the most important concert
hall in Moscow, was packed with capacity crowds. They were there to hear
something not heard in Russia since the Bolshevik Revolution in 1917—they
were there to hear Handel’s MESSIAH. And in the capital city of the land our
leaders want us to hate, the Moscow Conservatory thundered with those trium-
phant words of the Hallelujah Chorus: “THE LORD SHALL REIGN FOR
EVER AND EVER.”
In an interview by the British Broadcasting Corporation on February 3, exiled

Russian author Alexander Solzhenitsyn said he wants to return to Russia. He
says there is a rejuvenation of society going on there now—and no wonder!
During the Easter season just past the Russians have been celebrating not only
the Resurrection of our Lord Jesus Christ, they have also been celebrating the
resurrection of Christianity itself in Russia.
My friends, it’s a fact that Russia is no longer ruled by Satanic Bolsheviks, but
by native Russian Christians. Yet it is also a fact that the Kremlin today is in
command of the most powerful military machine the world has ever known.
Russian underwater missiles are poised within our own territorial waters, ready
for launch in a devastating nuclear strike at a moment’s notice. Russian subma-
rines armed partly with neutron weapons now patrol continuously along our
East, West, and Gulf coasts. Russian charged Particle Beam-weapons are on the
Moon, in earth orbit, and on floating Electrogravitic Platforms over our coun-
try. Our major dams and many other targets have been sabotaged with hydrogen
bombs which are already in place ready for detonation upon satellite command.
If the kamikaze war plans of our Bolshevik rulers are not stopped, there’s no
question what the outcome will be. All of America will be turned into a funeral
pyre, and the American dream will end in a nightmare. Looking at all this, ever
so often someone asks me: “If the rulers of Russia today are Christians, why
would they want to hurt us; much less, kill us?” My friends, to begin with, their
actions have already proven that they do not have a desire to destroy us at all.
Over a year and a half ago Russia defeated the United States in the still secret
Space Battle of the Harvest Moon. Ever since then Russia has been increasingly
in a position to destroy America at will—but the Russians have not done it in
spite of continuing treachery by America’s Satanic rulers.
As I detailed last September in Audio Letter No. 38, the rulers of Russia do
plan to wipe BOLSHEVISM off the face of the earth. Even so, it’s now clear
82
Audio Letter 45
that if they find a way to do it without resorting to full-scale war, they will try
to do it; but the problem is that our own rulers who are now the Bolsheviks are
making war increasingly unavoidable. First, the Bolsheviks want to bring us all
under their own TOTAL DICTATORSHIP. Then they will be able to mold
America into a much more efficient war machine than it is now; and under the
conditions of Bolshevik dictatorship, you and I will be powerless to stop it.
Russia’s rulers will then be faced with only two possible choices. One choice
will be to allow Russia’s people, who have suffered beyond belief at the hands
of the Bolsheviks, to suffer again when the American nuclear first strike is
launched. The only other choice will be to put America out of action. In that
case, untold millions of American Christians will be killed; but the attitude of
Russia’s rulers is that if we allow the Bolsheviks to carry things that far, we
will have only ourselves to blame!
Last month I proposed that a “Pilgrimage for Peace” to Moscow be formed by

American Christian leaders. It’s purpose would be to begin building bridges of
trust between the peoples of Russia and America as the only real foundation for
peace and friendship. I appealed to Christian leaders of all denominations and at
all levels to respond in great numbers by April 30. That way there was a chance
Russia’s rulers could be proven wrong in their conviction that America’s
churches are infiltrated by Bolshevism. Now, my friends, it is time to report the
results. In all of the United States there have been only a tiny handful of inde-
pendent-minded pastors and church officials who have responded. There is no
chance that such a tiny group would convince the Kremlin of anything; and so I
am forced now to repeat the question I asked in Audio Letter No. 21, and that
is:
WHERE, OH WHERE ARE THE CHURCHES TODAY?
But there is still a ray of hope, my friends. My call for a “Pilgrimage for Peace”
last month was directed only to church leaders, who for the most part have not
responded. Yet there has been a spontaneous outpouring of interest from lovers
of our Lord Jesus Christ in all other walks of life; therefore, I am hereby ex-
panding my proposal for a PILGRIMAGE FOR PEACE. The name Christian
originally meant “Christ one”—that is, anyone who loved and followed the
Lord Jesus Christ. Now I am appealing to all Christ ones in all walks of life:
Would you be willing to join me in a “Pilgrimage for Peace” to Russia?
Do you want Russia’s Christian rulers of today to understand that there is still a
backbone of decency, honesty, and truth in America??
83
Would you be willing to spend some of your time and money on a pilgrimage
to Russia if it might prevent thermonuclear war???
My friends, if you could participate in a Pilgrimage for Peace in any way,

please contact me BY THE END OF MAY 1979. If you could go yourself, or if
you could help sponsor someone else to go, please let me know. To streamline
things as much as possible, please do not call but—
WRITE to me (Dr. Peter Beter) here at:
1629 K Street, N.W. Washington, D.C. zip 20006
WRITE the word “Pilgrimage” in the lower left corner of the envelope.
Please give your name, address, telephone number, occupation, and whether
you are available to go yourself or to sponsor someone else.
It remains to be seen whether Russia’s rulers will approve such a visit, but I be-
lieve that depends mostly on you. If they see that the people of America truly
want peace, and trust, and friendship, I believe their response will be favorable;
but if they are not convinced that we are serious, there will be no Pilgrimage,
and the consequences for America and the world will be very grave.
84
Audio Letter 46
May 28, 1979
In most all of the black nations of Africa, criminals and internal enemies of the
state do not last long. People disappear in the dead of night never to be seen or
heard from again, and when they disappear their families know they are gone
for good. They know better than to say anything about it. The victim is taken to
a secret place that is spoken of only in fearful whispers in black Africa—the
place is usually known as “The Pit.” The victim is blindfolded and led through
the night-time darkness to the edge of the pit. There kerosene is poured over
him until he is thoroughly soaked. Then as the victim screams in vain, the
torchbearer approaches. Moments later the scene around the pit is illuminated
as the kerosene catches fire. Then the victim is pushed over the edge to fall
alive, but aflame, into the pit.
In most all of black Africa that’s how Law and Order is kept; but that is not the
only place where people are rumored to disappear in silence. Lately there have
been reports of wholesale disappearances in Argentina. A few days ago, on
May 22, the BBC put the number of disappearances at 4,000 since 1976, and a
few days before that on May 16 the New York Times ran a story titled “Van-
ished in Argentina.” The article referred to a major story in the Buenos Aires
Herald and also quoted from a related newspaper advertisement. Included were
the words: “The most capable and most renowned people become used to keep-
ing quiet.”
To most Americans, nighttime disappearances in Africa probably don’t seem

very relevant. We relax and say to ourselves, “Maybe that’s Africa, but it’s dif-
ferent here. This is America.” Argentina may strike a little closer to home since
Argentina is a modern, advanced nation. Even so, most of us are likely to com-
fort ourselves that this is America, not Argentina; it’s different here, we think.
Well, my friends, it is different here. In Africa the natives may talk only in
whispers about disappearances and “The Pit,” but whispers travel fast. Every-
one knows about “The Pit.” In Argentina, too, the people at least know
disappearances are going on because so far the press has been left free to pub-
lish reports about them. But it is here in the United States that the most
momentous disappearances are now taking place. It began four months ago
85
with the murder of Nelson Rockefeller. Now important and famous people are
disappearing. Nelson Rockefeller’s murder has been followed by convulsions in
the rulership of America, and yet there is no hint to the public about what is tak-
ing place. The Rockefeller murder in January signaled the beginning of an all-
out Bolshevik coup d’etat here in America. A secret Bolshevik purge of the
Rockefellers was under way, bloody but hidden from public view. But last
month I revealed that a secret Intelligence war between “doubles” had erupted
for control of the United States Government. When I recorded Audio Letter No.
45 last month, the situation was confusing and my information was still frag-
mentary, but I told you what I could—and now I can tell you more.
The war of “doubles” involves not only the Bolsheviks but the clandestine ser-
vices of Russia, Great Britain and Israel; but the basic battle lines are being
drawn between Russia and the Bolsheviks. As of now, the Russians appear to
be gradually gaining the upper hand, thanks to their use of an astonishing new
Intelligence weapon. There is irony in what the Russians are now doing in the
war of “doubles.” They are raising the ghost of none other than Nelson Rocke-
feller—and in a way that he would have appreciated.
Topic #1—NELSON ROCKEFELLER’S REVENGE FROM THE GRAVE
Topic #2—THE COSMOSPHERE SHUTTLES TO PREVENT NUCLEAR

WAR
Topic #3—THE MODERN REBIRTH OF THE “HOLY ALLIANCE”
Topic #1—In the summer of 1976 a missile crisis erupted between Russia and
the United States which to this day has never been made public officially. As all
my older listeners know, I am referring to the underwater missile crisis of 1976.
The Russian Navy was planting small, short-range, underwater-launched nu-
clear missiles within the territorial waters of the United States.
They were doing the same thing in selected other locations world-wide. They
were preparing for a surprise nuclear first strike against the United States in-
volving not ICBMs but a naval strategy. By this means they were hoping to
bring America to her knees with one swift blow; but if that failed, they were
prepared for all-out war. It was a desperate gamble by the Kremlin, far more
dangerous than the Cuban Missile Crisis of 1962. In a military double-cross the
Kremlin was terminating unilaterally the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance of
nearly six decades. But nuclear war did not erupt then, thanks primarily to the
86
Audio Letter 46
brave actions of just one man. That man was the late General George S. Brown,
then Chairman of the Joint Chiefs of Staff. It was he who persuaded then Presi-
dent Gerald Ford to give the order overruling Henry Kissinger to remove the
Russian missiles from America’s waters.
In Audio Letter No. 16 that September I revealed the loyal, brave actions of
General Brown in preventing nuclear war. Those actions included my own
lengthy meeting with him at the Pentagon on September 16, 1976. For doing his
duty, General Brown very soon encountered reprisals against him. It began in
October 1976, soon after my meeting with him. The major media began cutting
him down, and he was even forced to apologize on national television for some
alleged remarks that were six months old. Up until then, General Brown had
been famous for his outspoken, forthright behavior; but after that he quickly
faded into obscurity. He did not actively serve out his term as Chairman of the
Joint Chiefs, and reportedly died of cancer soon after retiring. In Audio Letters
Nos. 17 and 23 I revealed how the fate of General Brown was tied directly to a
drastic reversal in America’s fortunes, but until now I have never revealed what
finally happened to General Brown. Now, at last, I can tell you. I’ll return to the
matter of General Brown after telling you some other things which you need to
know first.
The neutralization of General Brown was part of an effort by the late four
Rockefeller brothers to reinstate their former secret alliance with the Soviet Un-
ion. The Brothers simply could not believe at first that the alliance was gone for
good. It was not until mid 1977 that they received evidence convincing them
that their old allies in Russia, the atheistic Bolsheviks, were being overthrown.
Up until then the Brothers were still trying to glue things back together.
In this regard, a little-known practice of the late Nelson Rockefeller is now ac-
quiring crucial importance. Of the four brothers, Nelson in particular always
lived in fear of being assassinated. Like a moth drawn to a flame, he craved the
limelight and yet feared it at the same time. Most of all, he was always worried
that someone close to him, someone he himself had placed in power, would
some day double-cross him. And as I revealed in Audio Letter No. 43, his fears
were well founded. For Nelson Rockefeller the lust for power was rivaled by
only one other emotion—revenge. He never forgot a grudge. For example, three
decades ago a young California Congressman named Richard Nixon marked
himself for Rockefeller’s hatred. Nixon went after an intimate associate of
Rockefeller named Alger Hiss, charging treasonous activity by Hiss. Finally
Hiss wound up behind bars—not for treason but for perjury in connection with
treason. Rockefeller was enraged and vowed to “do-in” Nixon one day. Later
when Rockefeller created the 25th Amendment to the United States Constitu-
87
tion, he kept Nixon in mind. The 25th Amendment was the means by which
Rockefeller intended to become President without being elected. The stage was
set for a scandal called WATERGATE, and Nixon was maneuvered into the
Oval Office so that it would be he who was ruined by WATERGATE. As
planned, Nixon left the presidency in disgrace, and Hiss left prison as a sympa-
thetic figure in the major media.
In the same way, Nelson Rockefeller wanted to make sure that if he should ever
be murdered he would have his revenge, even from the grave. And so over the
years he made a habit of keeping a complete list of all the people placed in im-
portant positions by his brothers and himself. Periodically he provided copies of
the latest list to certain elements within Russia’s Intelligence community. His
political testament contained instructions that were very simple: “If anybody
ever killed me, use the list; find out who did it. I don’t care if you have to get
rid of everybody on the list, just do it.” In doing this, the one thing he never an-
ticipated was that the Rockefeller-Soviet alliance itself would come apart. Even
so the Rockefeller “Hit Lists” are now coming into their own in a way that he
could never have anticipated, because the Bolsheviks who carried out the coup
d’etat against the Rockefellers are also the enemies of the new ruling faction in
Russia. So Russia, for her own reasons, is now using Nelson Rockefeller’s “Hit
List” in the secret Intelligence war now going on. They know exactly whom to
go after here in America and have known for years, and they have been prepar-
ing for years to be in a position to use the list if that turned out to be the best
way to proceed. Here, my friends, is where the new Russian Intelligence
weapon enters the picture.
What I am about to reveal I am revealing primarily for history. I know even be-
fore I reveal it that some of my listeners will desert me after they hear it, saying
“It just cannot be”; but, my friends, I also know that the events in the days
ahead will be impossible to understand without knowing this secret. So I do not
ask that you believe it simply because I say it. What I do ask—and I ask it for
your own good—is that you keep an open mind. Listen and hear what I must
now reveal, then watch events themselves.
My friends, since World War II and before, scientists the world over have been
probing for the basic secrets of life itself; and in this field as in others, progress
has been much faster than the public has been led to believe. Today it’s com-
mon knowledge that heredity is governed by something called genes, yet barely
a generation ago this relationship was only beginning to be suspected. When it
was suggested in 1944 by a theoretical physicist, Erwin Schrodinger, it was a
novel idea. Beyond that no one was too certain what genes were aside from
huge molecules or clusters of molecules. Some thought they were molecular
88
Audio Letter 46
chunks of protein, some thought they were something else. When Schrodinger’s
ideas about genes were published, World War II was still raging and basic sci-
entific research was on a back burner; and yet, barely a half a dozen years later,
researchers were zeroing in on a building block of life even more basic than
genes. The solution was found to this revolutionary puzzle in April 1953 at
Cambridge University in England. Scientists James Watson, Francis Crick, and
Maurice Wilkins were later to share the Nobel Prize for solving the puzzle.
They had discovered the molecular structure of DNA, the famous “double he-
lix.” In 1968 Watson published a book titled “THE DOUBLE HELIX,”
published by Athenaeum, New York, N.Y. To understand the overwhelming
importance of the double helix discovery in 1953, one need go no further than
these few words on the jacket of the book:
“DNA is the molecule of heredity, and to know its structure and method of re-
production enables science to know how genetic directions are written and
transmitted, how the forms of life are ordered from one generation to the next.”
In other words, to understand DNA is to begin to understand life itself.
It has now been over a quarter century since the crucial discovery of the DNA
double helix, and since then research in molecular biology has not been stand-
ing still but speeding up. In some cases research has gone in directions which
are deliberately sheltered from publicity because of the fear of public reaction.
Not so long ago, for example, universities doing research into artificial mi-
crobes found their neighbors in an ugly mood when they found out about it.
Test tube babies are now a reality, and that began not long ago in England
where the mystery of DNA was first unraveled. Then, of course, there are
clones—that is, creatures which are reproduced by artificial means and which
are exact duplicates of an original. Clones of all kinds of animals have been
produced successfully in the laboratory, but that is not what bothers people. In
the recent past it has been claimed that human clones are also possible and that
some may already be in existence. These last claims about human clones have
been ridiculed, denied, and suppressed by all kinds of officials—the reason is
that the idea of duplicate human beings impinges upon a super-secret realm of
Intelligence activities by both Russia and the United States. True clones are not
involved, but something that bears a superficial resemblance to cloning is going
on; and the last thing the powers-that-be want is for you and the public to have
any hint about what is afoot.
In Russia as well as in the West, research has been under way for many years in
biological synthesis—that is, artificial life forms; and according to high intelli-
gence, a stunning break-through took place in Russia some years ago. The
89
Russians refer to this break-through as a “providential discovery,” something

they learned almost by accident. They discovered the key to creating what are
known as “organic robotoids.” An organic robotoid is an artificial robot-like
creature, it looks and acts exactly like a human being and yet it is not human. A
robotoid is alive in the biological sense but it is an artificial life form. Ro-
botoids respond to conventional routine medical tests in the same way as
humans do; they eat, they drink, they breathe, they bleed if cut; and they can be
killed. Robotoids can also think, but they think only in the sense that a com-
puter thinks. Like any other computer, the brain of a robotoid has to be
programmed for each assignment it is given; but unlike many electronic com-
puters, the biological computer brain of a robotoid possesses an enormous
memory. As a result, robotoids can be programmed to communicate and think
in such complex patterns that they act human.
Organic robotoids are remarkable creatures, but they have many drawbacks.
They don’t grow or reproduce but must be manufactured one by one in the de-
sired form. They also have a very limited life span, measured in months or even
weeks, depending upon how they are utilized. This is due to the fact that their
metabolism, while it resembles that of humans, is very inefficient. A robotoid
can be manufactured on very short notice, a matter of hours; but after a few
weeks or months it suddenly begins to degenerate physically and mentally.
When that takes place, the robotoid has to be removed from service and dis-
posed of. To extend its useful life as much as possible, a robotoid is customarily
cooled down to slow its metabolism between assignments. Organic robotoids
are extremely expensive, troublesome creatures to produce and utilize; and ro-
botoid capabilities do not exceed those of human beings. All they can really do
is simulate human beings; but, my friends, for Intelligence purposes that’s all
they have to do!
To produce an organic robotoid it is necessary to have a pattern to go by. The

pattern required is that of genetic coding taken from a few cells from the body
of a human being. In this respect the Russian technique sounds like cloning, but
the technique itself is totally unrelated to genuine cloning. A robotoid is pro-
duced within a matter of hours, and it simulates the human donor at his current
age. Like any man-made copy of anything, a robotoid is never a perfect copy of
the human that is to be simulated; there’s always small discrepancies in appear-
ance and behavior, but these are seldom great enough to arouse any suspicion.
When the initial Russian break-through in robotoids took place years ago, the
Rockefeller-Soviet alliance was still functioning. The Christian group who now
rule Russia were already secretly more powerful than the Bolsheviks, but the
final overthrow had not yet taken place. When the robotoid break-through took
90
Audio Letter 46
place, they moved quickly to minimize the amount of information obtained

about it while those Bolsheviks still retained positions of power. They also tried
to prevent information about it from leaking through Intelligence channels to
the CIA, nevertheless partial information did reach the CIA and the late four
Rockefeller brothers. By early 1975 the Russians were known to have success-
fully created at least one organic robotoid in the laboratory. Meanwhile the CIA
was coordinating a feverish research effort aimed at accomplishing the same
feat. Up to now, robotoid technology in the United States is far behind that of
Russia. The American capability in robotoids is not even close to being opera-
tional, whereas the Russians are deploying them right now.
But there has been at least one attempt to create an organic robotoid for public
use in the United States, and I am referring to the final fate of the late General
George S. Brown. In April 1977 I revealed how much General Brown had sac-
rificed by that time as the price of doing his duty for America, but not long after
that General Brown paid the supreme price for his actions. It is only now that I
am free at last to reveal it.
On July 10, 1977, General Brown was taken to CIA headquarters near Wash-
ington, D.C., in Virginia. There he was taken to one of the many secret rooms
designed into the CIA building by Nelson Rockefeller. The room was a labora-
tory, and the attempt was made to create a robotoid replacement for General
Brown. The techniques employed were far more crude than those used in the
Russian process since the CIA process required General Brown to be on the
scene. The attempt ended in complete failure. A crude facsimile of General
Brown was generated but it refused to come to life. Even so, General Brown
could not be allowed to live because now he knew too much; and so on the
evening of July 10, 1977, General George S. Brown, the last great patriot in the
United States Government, was MURDERED.
A normal human “double” was found for General Brown since a robotoid at-
tempt had failed. This was the man who testified in the role of General Brown
at the Congressional hearings on the Panama Canal Treaty, September 27,
1977! At his side throughout, briefing and prompting him, was the Secretary of
Defense, Harold Brown. Occasionally the “double” would be flustered by a
question and looked down at the table in front of him until the Defense Secre-
tary whispered something in his ear. Then he would look up again, say what he
had been told, and so on. Once the Panama Canal hearings were out of the way,
the “double” for the late General Brown was seen as little as possible in public.
Soon there were stories that he had contracted cancer. Then the Air Force Chief
of Staff, General David Jones, began acting as Chairman of the Joint Chiefs
months before the end of General Brown’s tour of duty. In June 1978 we were
91
told that General Brown was retiring, and last December 5, 1978, we were told
that he had died of cancer. At that point the General Brown “double” collected
his pay and headed for Frankfurt, West Germany, where he landed on Decem-
ber 11, 1978, at 3:30 AM local time. It is a standing rule that “doubles” for
important people never live long, and so at about 7:30 that evening General
Brown’s “double” was shot to death in the back of the neck.
Last month I revealed that an Intelligence war of “doubles” had erupted in the
United States. President Carter, Vice-President Mondale, and their wives had
fallen victim to this war of “doubles” as their Easter breaks away from Wash-
ington were ending. Now I’m sorry to report that Amy Carter, Billy Carter,
Lillian Carter, and Hugh Carter all died soon after Jimmy and Rosalyn did. All
of them, including Amy, have been replaced by “doubles”; but instead of the
Bolshevik “doubles” who had been waiting in the wings, those we are seeing
are Russian organic robotoids. The voice of the Jimmy Carter “double” which
was reproduced last month in Audio Letter No. 45 is the voice of a robotoid.
That robotoid was the one who was dazzling everyone with his vigorous new
image. Only a few months ago Carter had been limping around with what we
were told were severe hemorrhoids; but now, out of the blue, here was a Carter
who was a powerhouse—hiking, fishing, and jogging ten miles a day, he also
looked and sounded younger than before—that was the first robotoid “double”
for Carter which I referred to last month as Carter No. 2. By the time I recorded
Audio Letter No. 45, there was also another Carter robotoid making the
rounds—this one, Jimmy Carter No. 3, was the one that attended the Holocaust
observances in the Capitol building here in Washington. By contrast with
Carter No. 2, No. 3 looks noticeably older and more haggard. As I mentioned
earlier, robotoids are very good copies but they are not perfect, no two look ex-
actly alike.
Last month I mentioned that the “doubles” for Jimmy and Rosalyn Carter were
spending a great deal of time at the Russian Embassy here in Washington in-
stead of at the White House. Now I can tell you why. Robotoids are
programmed at the Embassy for each assignment. Between assignments they
simply rest there in a state of reduced metabolism.
When the Bolshevik coup d’etat against the Rockefellers began four months
ago, the Kremlin rulership already knew that Bolshevik “doubles” would soon
be on the scene, and they knew that if the Bolsheviks were allowed to complete
their take-over of the United States, Russia would soon suffer. The Bolshevik
plans for nuclear war against Russia are a blueprint for suicide for America—
but they have not been abandoned. Up until now the Russians had been keeping
the robotoid capability under wraps, and there was a real question whether they
92
Audio Letter 46
would ever be used; but the Bolshevik coup d’etat convinced them the time had
come to deploy the robotoids. Now they are using Nelson Rockefeller’s “Hit
List,” and using their robotoids the Russians have already altered the course of
world events in dramatic ways.
Topic #2—As recently as two months ago the Bolsheviks here in America had
big plans for this, the month of May. By now they were planning for tensions in
the Middle East to be at the breaking point with events building fast toward
war. There was to be a atmosphere of crisis over our own supplies of Middle
East oil; and with that as an excuse, they were planning to begin the process of
closing down American freedoms. The Bolshevik “ad hoc gang of four”—
BRZEZINSKI, BLUMENTHAL, BROWN, and SCHLESINGER—were ex-
pecting their power to start growing fast in this atmosphere of crisis. Meanwhile
the big oil companies of the now headless Rockefeller cartel have been playing
right into the hands of the Bolsheviks. Overnight they have trumped up a gaso-
line shortage that does not exist, and they are lying about their costs and
pushing up prices out of sheer greed. They are creating an artificial crisis at-
mosphere to set the stage for events to come.
Until a few weeks ago the tensions in the Middle East were building up as
planned; Egypt was calling Saudi Arabia names, saying Saudi Arabia had paid
the other Arabs to isolate Egypt;
Israel was continuing its hard line toward the Palestinians; there was talk of a
growing rift between Saudi Arabia and the United States—and all the while gas
lines were growing longer here in the United States. But in recent weeks some-
thing has happened. The news in the United States has been full of trivia for the
most part as if world events were in suspended animation. The reason is that
while events have been taking place with blinding speed, they have been behind
the scenes!
The Intelligence war now going on is intense, and the situation is changing
daily. Bolshevik strategies have been badly jolted by the Russians using their
robotoids, and as a result the Bolsheviks are not sure what propaganda line to
feed to the public right now. A major shock to the Bolsheviks in recent days has
been their loss of the “ad hoc gang of four.” First, I can now report that Brzez-
inski was with the Bolshevik “double” for the late Vice-President Mondale last
month on April 20. They were aboard Air Force II which crashed in the North
Atlantic, as I reported last month. Then on May 13 the other three were elimi-
nated—Blumenthal, Brown, and Schlesinger. All four were promptly replaced
with Russian robotoids, as has been done with the Carters and the Mondales. A
number of other top officials have also been removed and replaced by Russian
93
robotoids. Last month Secretary of State Cyrus Vance was replaced; and on the
1st of May, May Day, the American Association of Newspaper Editors were
treated to speeches supposedly by Vance and Brzezinski. In the past, Vance and
Brzezinski have always been noted for being at loggerheads on every issue; but
this time, as they spoke of the need for a new diplomacy by America, it was as
if they were both thinking with the same mind. Many observers were surprised
but no one suspected the truth.
As there begin to be more and more Russian robotoids in key positions of the
United States Government, there will be more and more surprises. One key
public personality I would urge you to watch very carefully now is Walter
Cronkite in his television broadcast on CBS Evening News. During this month
of May he left on what was said to be a vacation. Today, May 28, he resumed
broadcasting. If you are accustomed to watching the Cronkite news program, I
suggest that you watch carefully now, look for a change in the slant given the
news—it will be subtle, but it will be there. If you are serious about it, you
might tape the shows every evening for a week, then play them all back one
after another sometime the following week-end. That way you can compress a
week into two hours or so not counting commercials, and better tell what the
drift is. Otherwise the most important single personality to watch is the one la-
beled “Jimmy Carter.” Periodically there will be small changes in his
appearance and behavior as one robotoid wears out and is replaced by another;
and by listening to the Carter robotoid, you can get some hints about what the
Kremlin is up to.
The invasion of the Russian robotoids goes far beyond the mere removal of
troublesome people from official positions. Robotoids assume the identity and
authority of those whom they replace. As a result they can carry out official
acts, give orders, and sign agreements. A prime example is to take place next
month in Vienna, Austria, on June 15. To the world it will appear that the
United States in the person of President Carter will be signing the SALT II
Treaty with Russia in the person of President Brezhnev; but the signatories will
actually be a robotoid that looks like Carter and a human double who looks like
Brezhnev. Over a year ago in Audio Letter No. 33 I reported the January 1978
death of the real Brezhnev and his replacement with Brezhnev No. 2. So the
SALT II Treaty will actually involve Russia signing with itself through puppet
personalities!
For over a year and a half following the Battle of the Harvest Moon in Septem-
ber 1977, the United States stalled off SALT II, but now it is the era of Russian
robotoids, and now SALT II is about to be signed. In recent weeks Russian ro-
botoids masquerading as American officials have been busy not only here in the
94
Audio Letter 46
United States but abroad as well. They have been used to carry out diplomatic
shuttle negotiations in the Middle East. The Russians are trying to keep the lid
on there so the Bolshevik first-strike plan which I revealed in Audio Letter No.
37 cannot be carried out. The shuttles have been taking place by means of a
small fleet of second generation Cosmospheres. These are a more advanced
version of the Floating Electrogravitic Weapon Platforms which first appeared
operationally over the United States in December 1977. The new second gen-
eration Cosmospheres are designed specifically as high-speed transports.
Unlike the first generation machines, they do not use rocket thrusters to move
horizontally; instead, the electromagnetic fields around the earth are tapped for
that purpose. They normally climb to a height of 100 miles or more above the
earth to get beyond the bulk of the earth’s atmosphere, then they travel to any
desired destination typically at around 9,000 miles per hour. That is about half
the speed of a satellite in orbit, so passengers feel somewhat lighter than normal
but not weightless. When the occasion calls for it though, the Cosmosphere
transports can go even faster. To make a trip from Washington, D.C. to some
far distant part of the globe, the passenger first travels to Bangor International
Airport in Maine; from there another plane takes him to a Cosmosphere landing
site in east central Quebec Province, Canada. This site, which was first men-
tioned in Audio Letter No. 31, is on the north edge of Manicouagan Lake. If the
destination is in Russia, be it Moscow or Novosibirsk, the Cosmosphere can
land usually within a few tens of miles of the final destination. For other desti-
nations, however, secluded landing sites like the one in Quebec are used to
maintain secrecy.
The earliest Russian robotoid to appear on the American scene was one simu-
lating the late David Rockefeller. That robotoid replaced a Bolshevik “double”
for Rockefeller by early March. On April 25 this robotoid (David Rockefeller
No. 2) left the Russian Embassy in Washington and headed for Jerusalem. The
following day he met with high Israeli officials, pressuring them to back off
from the plan to destroy Saudi Arabia’s oil fields. The Israelis were astonished.
The plan had been in gestation for over four years and was a joint plan between
Israel and America. Now here was one of David Rockefeller’s “doubles” telling
them that Russia knows about the plan and does not plan to let it succeed. The
Israelis resisted. Rockefeller No. 2 left Jerusalem for Moscow where he met
with John Paisley shortly after noon. Paisley is the former high CIA official
whose body was supposed to have been found October 1, 1978 floating in
Chesapeake Bay. He has been described in various news reports as a “mole”
within the CIA—a foreign agent. That he was, an extremely important one. It
was Paisley who provided Russia with the orbital data on America’s Spy Satel-
lites. With that data Russia’s fleet of manned killer satellites, the Cosmos
Interceptors, finished destroying America’s Spy Satellites in orbit over a year
95
ago. Since his disappearance last fall, Paisley has been living near Leningrad,
following a vacation at Odessa on the Black Sea. Rockefeller No. 2 briefed In-
telligence officials in Moscow about his discussions with the Israelis. Paisley
had been brought there because it was anticipated that his services would
shortly be needed. This was confirmed by the report of the robotoid. It was de-
cided that Paisley should go to Jerusalem the following day, April 27, but
accompanied by an agent of the KGB since the Russians did not entirely trust
Paisley. The Rockefeller robotoid was to return to Jerusalem that day also and
put in an appearance along with Paisley. In addition it was decided that Jimmy
Carter No. 2 should visit Jerusalem in a quick secret trip by Cosmosphere
Transport. David Rockefeller No. 2 was then dispatched to Washington with
instructions for Jimmy Carter No. 2. By the evening of April 26, Carter No. 2
was at the Israeli Intelligence Station outside Jerusalem. At the same time
Carter No. 3 was keeping up appearances here. Rockefeller No. 2 was seen at
the World Trade Center in New York but left that night for Moscow and then
Jerusalem. While Jimmy Carter No. 3 was appearing at the Holocaust ceremony
in Washington, Carter No. 2 was in Moscow having already been to Jerusalem;
meanwhile Paisley and Rockefeller No. 2 were in Jerusalem. Paisley’s testi-
mony was being used to convince the Israelis of the extent to which America’s
military security has been breached. Carter No. 2 likewise was there to prove
that Bolshevik support for the Middle East war plan was being removed as a
factor in Washington. Late on the 27th of April Rockefeller No. 2 began en-
countering questions and problems which he was not programmed to handle; so
obeying standing instructions for such an event, he departed for Moscow for
further programming. On the 28th he went to the Russian Embassy in Washing-
ton. That night he returned to Jerusalem. For further impact on the Israelis, the
Carter No. 3 robotoid had been dispatched to Jerusalem along with Rosalyn No.
2. Paisley had remained in Jerusalem all three days. Meanwhile here in the
United States Carter No. 2 and another new robotoid, Rosalyn No. 3, were on
duty. On April 29 Paisley left for Leningrad and the robotoids left for Washing-
ton—the first robotoid shuttle to the Middle East was ended after five days, in
total secrecy.
As April was ended and May was getting under way, the main focus of activity
by the Russian robotoids was here in Washington. On April 30 a Carter ro-
botoid surprised everyone with an uncharacteristic response to critical
statements by Senator Ted Kennedy. He said, “That is just a lot of baloney.”
“That just wasn’t like Carter,” people said. The next day the Brzezinski and
Vance robotoids had their turn to surprise everyone. That was the day they
abandoned their usual fisticuffs in favor of sweetly humming the same tune to
newspaper editors. “Just not like those two to behave that way,” said some puz-
zled observers. Two days later on May 3 it was suddenly announced that a top
96
Audio Letter 46
official of the State Department, Leslie Gelb, was resigning. Two days after that
on May 5 another important resignation was announced, and this one had a
short fuse. Only a few days earlier on April 26 Air Force Secretary John Stetson
had said some important things in public. Without divulging any secrets he al-
most let the cat out of the bag about America’s recent military reverses.
Speaking of our ability to verify the proposed new SALT II Treaty he said in
effect that he wasn’t worried about that. To him the real story was something
far different, far different—that is, the possibility of secret development and
sudden deployment of new weapons by Russia. That, my friends, is exactly
what Russia has been doing now for nearly three years—Underwater Missiles,
Charged Particle Beam-weapons, Killer Satellites, Cosmospheres, and the
Moon bases; and now Organic Robotoids! All were developed secretly and then
deployed suddenly, and not one of them is touched upon in the SALT II Treaty.
Speaking as he did, Stetson was not long for the Pentagon. His resignation was
announced May 5 and was effective on May 18, ten days ago. His resignation
was an echo in some ways of that of the Undersecretary of Defense, Stanley
Resor, in March; and the trend toward transfers of key personnel, shake-ups,
and resignations is continuing. Within a few days one of the men in the position
to observe Carter most closely will be transferred out and replaced with some-
one new—that’s the President’s Naval Attache, the man who carries the so-
called “Black Bag” for nuclear war. On May 16 it was reported that seven aides
to National Security Chief Brzezinski are quitting—and so it goes.
On May 7 Pravda praised the United States for having finally become sober-
minded about SALT II. Two days later it was announced that the United States
had reached an agreement in principle with Russia for a SALT II Treaty; but in
still another strange twist that raised many eyebrows, the announcement was
not made by “President Carter,” instead it was made by “Secretaries Brown and
Vance”—but then one robotoid is as good as another. Carter robotoids began
lobbying on Capitol Hill immediately for the Treaty, one robotoid at a time, of
course; but shortly the emphasis began shifting again to the Middle East.
On May 13 Paisley arrived in Iran from Russia. After checking with Intelli-
gence agents in Tehran and Abadan, he returned to Moscow before the day was
out. News reports on May 16 said that Defense Secretary Harold Brown was
going to Brussels to drum up support for SALT II among our NATO allies; but
a Harold Brown robotoid was in Moscow on May 13 and 14 and arrived in Te-
hran on the 15th. The next day he went to Jerusalem, where he joined Paisley
and the No. 2 Jimmy and Rosalyn Carter robotoids. Thus began the second
Middle East Cosmosphere shuttle involving robotoids. After intensive meetings
with Israeli leaders, Paisley left for Leningrad; the rest of the group went to Ri-
yadh, Saudi Arabia, where they were joined by David Rockefeller No. 2. After
97
giving assurances of support to Saudi leaders, they went next to Tehran to ana-
lyze the situation there. Meanwhile things were turbulent in the Middle East—
the Cabinet of Lebanon resigned, President Sadat suddenly announced that
Egypt is ready to pursue friendship with Russia, and gold prices started rising
fast thanks to heavy buying from the Middle East. The next day, May 17, the
shuttle group were back in Riyadh, then back to Jerusalem, then to Cairo all in
the same day. Suddenly on that day, May 17, Israeli Defense Minister Weizman
withdrew from the West Bank Negotiating Commission. Foreign Minister
Moshe Dayan did likewise. Both were angry with the continuing Begin hard
line denying the possibility of Palestinian statehood. The next day Begin sud-
denly adopted a more conciliatory line, offering to meet with Jordan’s King
Hussein and saying: “We recognize the Arab nation.” Can you imagine? On
May 18 the shuttle broke up, ending with brief trips by Harold Brown No. 2 to
Damascus and Tehran. For the moment the lid seemed to be on the pressure
cooker; but two days later Iran blasted the United States for the Senate resolu-
tion condemning the executions there. The United States was told to delay
sending the new Ambassador; and Senator Jacob Javits of New York, sponsor
of the resolution, was denounced as a criminal. Javits was promptly put under
24-hour police guard. At the same time it was announced that Secretary of State
Vance was to leave right away on a two-week trip overseas. Reportedly Vance
was to be going first to London and several other points, but the real destination
of the current Vance robotoid No. 3 was Tehran.
As I explained last summer in Audio Letter No. 37, Iran is an indispensable key
to the Bolshevik plan for a nuclear first strike against Russia. The Bolsheviks,
as they see their power slipping, are making a feverish attempt to go ahead with
the first-strike plan. The Vance robotoid was sent to Iran to gather information
and to seek ways to foil the first-strike plan. He arrived early May 22 in Tehran,
but less than 36 hours later the Vance robotoid was killed—shot in the head. It
was less than 36 hours later that another Vance robotoid arrived in Tehran,
Cyrus Vance No. 4, but that one lasted only a few hours before being gunned
down on the morning of May 25. The Russians are now very worried about the
situation in Iran; they are also concerned that the pressures and inducements
they have brought to bear in the case of Israel and her neighbors still may not
prevent double-cross and war there. That is true even though both Sadat and
Begin have secretly been eliminated during the past month and replaced with
robotoid “doubles.”
My friends, besides the Middle East there is one other imminent trouble spot
for Russia right now, and that’s Poland. In Audio Letter No. 42 I revealed the
Bolshevik plans for a Pope’s Revolution to erupt during the actor Pope’s visit to
Poland. Originally the visit was scheduled for this month, May, but was delayed
98
Audio Letter 46
until next month instead; and very early this month the actor Pope, the Bolshe-
vik “double” for the late Pope John Paul II, was eliminated along with his
Bolshevik boss, Cardinal Benelli. Both have been replaced by “doubles” from
Russia, but the evidence is not yet clear as to whether these “doubles” are hu-
man or robotoid. Having accomplished this Vatican coup d’etat, the Russian
and Polish leaders believe they will be able to prevent the assassination of the
Pope from taking place next month. That is why early this month Poland sud-
denly reversed her earlier plans to levy stiff charges against journalists who
entered Poland to cover the Pope’s visit. It is a calculated risk, but the Russians
feel that the publicity surrounding the Pope will be beneficial if the Bolshevik
assassination plan can be thwarted.
Topic #3—For centuries Russia has endured war after war, and invasion after
invasion. Every time the Russians have somehow endured the worst and some-
how come back again, stronger than ever; but each time the hatred of war has
sunk deeper into the Russian soul. Over 150 years ago Czar Alexander I of
Russia proposed that a community of the Christian nations of the world be
formed. There was to be no question of victors or vanquished in the wars just
ended; instead, it was to be an alliance of trust and friendship with all parties
pledging to deal with one another according to Christian principles. It was to be
not a military alliance but a new kind of alliance designed to remove the causes
of warfare throughout Christendom. It was to be as Alexander I named it: a
HOLY ALLIANCE. The treaty creating the Holy Alliance was signed in Paris
on September 26, 1815, and for a while there were signs that it might actually
work. Most of the nations of a war-torn Europe were eager to join the Alliance,
designed as it was for the prevention of war. Alexander was hoping to see the
Holy Alliance unite all of Europe, the British Isles, and America—not so much
politically as in spirit. The beliefs and policies of Alexander I were derived
from the influence of a Christian sect in Russia, the same one that now has
taken control of Russia. Prior to their recent resurgence the days of Alexander I
had been their heyday. But those days were also the heyday of mushrooming
Rothschild power in Britain and Europe; and while Alexander I wanted to unite
the Christian nations to prevent war, the Rothschilds wanted the exact opposite.
Their objective was to divide nations, one against the other, and to become
richer and richer by financing armaments and warfare. Through diplomatic ma-
neuvering and economic pressures the Rothschilds succeeded in dismantling the
Holy Alliance.
The events taking place around us today are far different in detail from those of
a century and a half ago, but they are cut from the same historical cloth. In-
creasingly the main protagonists in the Western arena are the same as they were
then—on one side are the atheistic Bolsheviks and the Rothschild sponsors who
99
destroyed the Holy Alliance long ago, and on the other side is the Russian
Christian sect which greatly influenced Czar Alexander I and which now rules
Russia. For many people it is still hard to shake the image of Russia that was
true in the days of Stalin; and in Russia as elsewhere, things do not change over
night—but they are changing and for the better.
For example, consider the matter of taking Bibles into Russia. I quote now from
an article titled “WE PRAISE GOD” published last month, April 1979, in the
record of the American Bible Society:
“The trip was less than 3,000 miles, but it took 65 years. As the heavily laden
lorry lumbered from the loading dock at the Bible printing plant of the German
Bible Societies in Stuttgart, the first leg of the journey began. Actual driving
time was only six days and would have been faster had the roads been in better
condition; however it was close to Christmas and Moscow was already well
into winter. But the last time such a large shipment of Bibles had reached Mos-
cow with the full approval of the government was 66 years ago in 1913. In
October 1978 the Soviet government granted an Import Permit to the All Union
Council of Evangelical Christians, Baptists, in the Soviet Union for 25,000
Russian Bibles and 5,000 concordances. As soon as the order was received the
United Bible Societies in Stuttgart stopped all other production so that the
presses could be devoted exclusively to the printing of these Russian Scriptures.
By early December they were ready and on their way by truck through the
German Democratic Republic and Poland, and into Russia. The Bibles cleared
customs on January 22, 1979, and before the end of the month more than 60%
of them had been distributed to churches. They are already in the hands of
Christians in places as far apart as Kiev in the Ukraine and Novosibirsk on the
northern edge of Siberia, as well as in Moscow and throughout the Baltic area.”
My friends, throughout the old Christian areas of Russia the words of Jesus
Christ are being heard once again, churches long in disuse are being refurbished
often at government expense and re-opened, and the most hopeful sign is that in
Russia it is the young who are most eager to hear and learn about our LORD
JESUS CHRIST. Whether the Russians will succeed in their grand design for a
modern Holy Alliance remains to be seen. Perhaps it all depends upon whether
we, the Christians of the world, will continue to allow ourselves to be divided
and pitted against each other—or whether we will at last unite in trust and
brotherhood.
100
Audio Letter 47
June 28, 1979
The final Friday in May, last month, was a sunny spring day in Chicago. It was
a perfect day to fly, and O’Hare Airport was busy as usual. Inside the terminal
complex, thousands of air travelers were rushing to and from their flights.
Nearby the runways were alive—airplanes were taking off and landing in a
steady stream, one right after another. It was just another day at the world’s
busiest airport.
Shortly before 3:00 o’clock that Friday afternoon two hundred and fifty-eight
passengers boarded American Airlines Flight No. 191. It was a DC-10 Jumbo
Jet bound for Los Angeles. With its crew of 13, there were 271 people aboard
when the doors were closed. Then the DC-10 was rolled away from the termi-
nal and taxied out toward the runway. There Flight 191 took its place at the end
of a line of jets waiting to take off.
Meanwhile, a passenger waiting in the terminal for a different flight was pass-
ing the time by taking snapshots. Reportedly, the man with the camera was a
pilot himself. Most fliers simply enjoy watching airplanes, and apparently he
was no exception.
Just after 3:00 P.M. the O’Hare Tower cleared Flight 191 for take-off. The big
DC-10 moved onto the end of the runway. Three mammoth engines—one on
the tail and one under each wing—changed their tune from a whine to a roar.
The engines strained like locomotives in their mounts and the jumbo jet began
moving down the runway. Half a minute or so later, after rolling a mile and a
half, the nose of the DC-10 rotated upward for take-off. Up to that moment eve-
rything had been normal and routine; but then, without warning, the world
began to end for Flight 191. The engine under the left wing suddenly ripped
loose. It lurched forward, then up and over the top of the wing. It smashed
down onto the runway, but the suddenly crippled DC-10 continued to climb.
The plane reached an altitude of about 600 feet, but by then it had rolled steeply
to the left. The wings were vertical instead of level, and the DC-10 began to
fall. Moments later the plane disappeared in a giant fireball as it hit the ground.
101
In the terminal, the man with the camera caught a picture of the Airliner on its
side in the air. Moments later he was photographing the fireball, which was par-
tially obscured by Airport buildings. Later the man who took those famous
pictures—Michael Laughlin of Ontario, Canada—gave his reactions to UPI. He
reportedly said:
“After I had taken all the pictures, I just stood there stunned, wondering to my-
self, ‘Did this really happen? Did I really take these pictures? Did that plane
really crash?’ I thought, ‘There has to be some other explanation for this crazy
airplane turning over and for all that fire.’ I just couldn’t believe it. I just stood
there shaking.”
My friends, reality is always hard to accept whenever it is unpleasant. Our

minds play tricks and tell us it just cannot be. Like the man who photographed
the crashing DC-10, we don’t want to believe our own eyes and ears. Instead of
accepting the truth as it is when it disturbs us, we try to deny its existence.
Right now this is happening to some listeners to the Dr. Beter AUDIO
LETTER.
Last month I made public one of the most carefully guarded of all Intelligence
secrets—that is, the existence of ORGANIC ROBOTOIDS. As I explained last
month, they are now the key fact of life in understanding current world events.
Without knowing this very important secret, you will have no hope of under-
standing present and coming events. Even so, some of my listeners are not
waiting for events to speak for themselves. Instead, they are shakily telling
themselves, “There just has to be some other explanation for the strange things
in today’s news.”
These people, my friends, are turning away from the AUDIO LETTER. They
want only to have their ears tickled with the words they like to hear. They want
only to hear the words they have heard before over and over again, year in and
year out: Runaway government, taxes, dishonest politicians, the Russian threat,
and so on. With these things they can feel dissatisfied yet content—reassured
that nothing really ever changes. But as I said last month, I knew very well that
this would happen before I ever said a word about the “robotoids.” I knew that
there would be a falling away by some who have followed the AUDIO
LETTER up to now.
But there is only one way that the AUDIO LETTER can serve those who do
choose to listen—that way is to continue to reveal the truth exactly as it is. If I
were to withhold crucial information whenever it is frightening or unfamiliar,
perhaps I could avoid losing any listeners; but then the AUDIO LETTER would
102
Audio Letter 47
end up serving no one—no one, that is, but the enemies of our Lord Jesus
Christ.
When our Lord walked the earth 2000 years ago, He said: “You shall know the
truth, and the truth shall make you free.” He gave the Good News that a new
day was dawning for those ready to accept it. He began awakening His follow-
ers from their slumber; and those who were benefitting from the oppressive
status quo of that day began to feel threatened. Soon Jesus made it clear that He
was not talking about politics or military conquest but something deeper than
that. Many of His followers fell away in disappointment. But the ruling circles
felt even more threatened. Their real control over the people was through their
beliefs, and Jesus was opening their eyes with the truth; so they had Him cruci-
fied, and the people cheered.
My friends, the French have a saying that: “The more things change, the more
they stay the same.” Our modern world is radically different in some ways from
the Mediterranean world of 2000 years ago. Yet today, as then, there are those
who want to keep you ignorant and asleep so that they can control and use you.
The Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER is interfering with these plans simply by re-
vealing the truth from behind the scenes; and because the influence of the
AUDIO LETTER is growing faster and faster, a “hate campaign” is now under
way in an effort to destroy it.
Right now, some people are turning away; but others are awakening from their
slumber. Like Rip van Winkle, they are beginning to open their eyes after living
for years in a dream world of the past. They are beginning to ask questions and
to see for themselves what is really taking place in our world. After years of
sitting glued to the television sets, more and more Americans are beginning to
talk to one another again. People are gathering in groups to listen to the AUDIO
LETTER and then arguing about it. Concerned listeners are making countless
copies of my AUDIO LETTERS to give to friends and relatives. In New York
City and elsewhere unauthorized copies are being sold by illegal scalping op-
erations for $10 and more; and these homemade and scalped copies of my
AUDIO LETTERS are themselves being listened to in groups, and further re-
copied.
The majority of those who are benefitting from the AUDIO LETTER nowadays
are doing so without contributing to its support. Free and scalped copies after
all do nothing to help sustain the AUDIO LETTER, which is expensive and dif-
ficult to produce. Nevertheless, the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER is having an
impact that is growing wider every day.
103
Now that the four Rockefeller brothers have all left the scene, as I have re-
vealed in recent months, even the major media are beginning to take notice of
the AUDIO LETTER. This past Easter Sunday morning, April 15, 1979, it was
a syndicated feature article in the Sunday Magazine of the Washington Post. A
month later on May 17, it was an article on page B2 of the New York Times.
And earlier this month on June 11, I was contacted by a producer for the CBS
television program “60 Minutes” about the “Guyana story.” Because of the
growing impact of the AUDIO LETTER, those who benefit by keeping you
asleep and ignorant feel increasingly threatened by it. And so a “hate cam-
paign” has now erupted in an effort to destroy the AUDIO LETTER.
All kinds of techniques are being used in this “hate campaign.” Articles are be-
ing printed in certain publications that stoop to outright libel in an effort to
defame my personal reputation. Damaging rumors of all kinds are being circu-
lated. Whisper campaigns are being stirred up with ridiculous stories about my
family. Now I’m told they are even picking on my little five-year-old daughter
Petra, saying somehow that Petra has a Russian name. Petra, my friends, is
simply the female form of the Greek word meaning “rock.” It is also the name
of an ancient, beautiful, and historical crossroads town in Jordan.
The hate campaigners are all waving the flag in an effort to dispute the patriot-
ism of the AUDIO LETTER. But their arguments are based on deceit and
fraud—not truth. Christ ones do not do such things.
What is most significant is the timing of this hate campaign. All of the groups
now attacking the Dr. Beter AUDIO LETTER have one identifying characteris-
tic in common. In every case, they have spent years in pointing accusing fingers
at the Rothschilds.
This has led many people with some knowledge of past history to accept the
leadership of these organizations; and yet, years of finger pointing by these
groups has had no effect at all on the Rothschilds. The only people really af-
fected are the duped ones—the followers of these groups and publications.
Until very recently the Rothschilds have actually been in a state of eclipse by
the Rockefellers; but since the Bolshevik coup d’etat secretly terminated
Rockefeller power early this year, the situation has changed.
In the past two or three months, I have focused attention on the Rothschilds and
their bid for renewed power; and as if on signal, the Dr. Beter AUDIO
LETTER is now under attack supposedly by anti-Rothschild groups. False op-
position, my friends, is a trick even older than Machiavelli. The hate campaign
now under way will do its damage but it will not stop the AUDIO LETTER.
104
Audio Letter 47
My employer is our Lord Jesus Christ, and my AUDIO LETTER series will not
end until it is time to end. This month I am beginning the fifth year of my
AUDIO LETTER.
It has been another year of surprises and dramatic events. It was only one year
ago next month that the oldest of the four Rockefeller brothers, John D. III, died
abruptly in an alleged auto accident. And it was only five months ago that the
all-out Bolshevik coup d’etat against the Rockefellers began with the murder of
Nelson Rockefeller. Today the Bolsheviks themselves are in retreat, thanks to
the Russian “organic robotoids.” So the years to come will hold even more sur-
prises for us all.
My topics this month are:
Topic #1—THE SCIENTIFIC BACKGROUND OF THE RUSSIAN

ROBOTOIDS
Topic #2—THE RUSSIAN STRATEGY TO DISMANTLE BOLSHEVIK

POWER, and
Topic #3—THE SHIFTING CURRENTS BETWEEN WAR AND PEACE.
Topic #1—In the spring of 1973 my book “THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST

THE DOLLAR” was published by George Braziller, New York, New York. In
the book I revealed in detail how forces were being set in motion deliberately to
destroy the United States dollar. I named a lot of names, and I explained the
role being played by various individuals and multinational corporations. Of all
the individuals I named in the book, the most important was that of the late
David Rockefeller. He was the kingpin in the plan to destroy our dollar and our
economy, as I showed in the book; but when he was asked for his public com-
ment about my book, he said:
“Interesting science fiction.” But as events have proven, my book was anything
but science fiction. I was a lone voice in 1973 because I was revealing things
that were not publicly known. Instead, until I went public with them, these
things had been known only to a handful of the most powerful in America and
abroad. For that reason, many people found what I revealed then hard to be-
lieve; yet today the things I warned about have already come true or are
happening now behind the scenes.
When I wrote my book in 1973, Americans had yet to experience an embargo

of foreign oil. The dollar was still thought of as almighty, and my warnings that
105
it would soon shrivel sounded preposterous to many Americans. But today, who
in his right mind would speak of the so-called “almighty dollar”? As for gold,
Americans could not even own it legally in 1973 except under special circum-
stances. Very few Americans even thought about gold in 1973, so the plans I
exposed in my book for gold prices to shoot up past $200 an ounce sounded
ridiculous to many; but today, who among us is unaware of the daily news re-
ports about astronomical gold prices? In 1973 I spoke of stagnation with
inflation, of shortages, of financial distress in municipal governments, and on
and on. At that time these things sounded too far off to many of my readers—it
sounded like science fiction. But today, just look around you, my friends. Look
at the gas lines, the truckers’ strike, the defaults and near defaults by major cit-
ies, the prices that change almost daily in your grocery stores. Today everyone
talks about these things, they are just facts of life; but when I warned about
them six years ago, I was ridiculed for saying they would happen because I was
out of step with the crowd.
The same thing is happening now in the wake of my revelations last month
about the Russian “organic robotoids.” The conventional wisdom, of course, is
that there just cannot be such things; or at least if they are possible, they must
lie far in the future, not now. But, my friends, the conventional wisdom is
wrong, dead wrong. They are not only possible but they are real, and they are
walking among us right now. To those who are ignorant of the scientific ad-
vances that have taken place in the past 20 to 30 years, they sound incredible;
but within a small select group of scientists both in and out of government, here
and abroad, the existence of Robotoids is known, and certain of those who
know and understand about them are faithful listeners to the Dr. Beter AUDIO
LETTER. As I mentioned in my introductory comments, those who seek to
control us want to keep us all in a horse-and-buggy mentality. That way we re-
main unaware of the forces we are confronting and therefore more vulnerable.
Ever since World War II began four decades ago, we Americans have been liv-
ing with a shroud of secrecy in the military and scientific fields. As a result,
most Americans today are actually living in the past without knowing it. But in
my AUDIO LETTERS I’m trying to bring you up to date with reality. For the
past four years I’ve been letting you in on developments which have taken dec-
ades to materialize in secret. Learning about all these things over such a short
time span is like having the world itself change almost overnight. So it is little
wonder that some of my listeners are getting a case of “future shock” from my
AUDIO LETTERS. By the way, the term “future shock” is taken from the fa-
mous book titled “FUTURE SHOCK” by Alvin Toffler. The book was
published nearly 10 years ago, in 1970, by Random House.
106
Audio Letter 47
Toffler defines future shock as “the shattering stress and disorientation that we
induce in individuals by subjecting them to too much change in too short a
time.” In his book Toffler called attention to the fact that numerous rapid and
drastic new developments are taking place today without people quite knowing
how to cope with it all. Among these developments Toffler discussed the revo-
lutionary advances in biology and genetics. Quoting leading scientists in the
field, he gave examples of astonishing things which are either possible now or
will be soon.
All of these are fascinating to read about and many are frightening as well. In
particular, several items point directly toward organic robotoids, although the
book does not say so. As I explained last month, an organic robotoid is an arti-
ficial robot-like creature. It is a kind of biological machine with a biological
computer brain. With this in mind, consider the words of Arne Tiselius, a bio-
chemist and Nobel Prize winner. As quoted in “FUTURE SHOCK” nearly a
decade ago, he said: “It is quite obvious that computers so far are just bad imi-
tations of our brains. Once we learn more about how the brain acts, I would be
surprised if we could not construct a sort of biological computer. Such a com-
puter might have electronic components modeled after biological components
in the real brain, and at some distant point in the future it is conceivable that
biological elements themselves might be parts of the machine.”
Dr. Tiselius was on the right track with these words of 10 years ago, but he was
too conservative. At that time, the Russians were already on the threshold of
their key breakthrough which I referred to last month. That breakthrough had to
do with the biological computer brain which is the key to a successful robotoid.
In a few moments I’ll tell you more about that.
In other places, too, one can find many bits and pieces of information that point
straight toward robotoids, but you will not often find this information on televi-
sion or in the newspapers. Instead, it crops up here and there in specialized
publications directed at particular audiences. An example of this is the book
“THE DYNAMICS OF CHANGE” published in 1967 by Prentice-Hall,
Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey. The book is copyrighted by Kaiser Aluminum
& Chemical Corporation, having first published all the material in six issues of
Kaiser Aluminum News.
The revolution in biology and genetics is only a very small part of the subject
matter in the book. Even so, listen to just a few brief quotes. Under the heading
GENETIC MANIPULATION: “The ability to control the formation of new be-
ings may be one of the most basic developments of the future. Recent
discoveries about the nucleonic acids, the basic building blocks of life, have led
107
to the belief that man may some day be able to treat genes in such a way that
desired characteristics can be realized...” Under the heading DIRECT
EDUCATION OF BRAIN CELLS: “Experiments indicate that certain chemi-
cals in the brain will, when implanted in another brain, transfer knowledge...”
Under the heading MAN-MACHINE SYMBIOSIS: “...Computers exist which
can learn, remember, see, seek goals, reason, walk, sing on key, talk, be irrita-
ble, play games, grasp, adapt to an environment, and even design improvements
in themselves...” My friends, remember, these things were published for public
consumption, and a dozen years ago! Further, under the same heading: “...man-
like computers may one day contain plasma circulating through a viscera-like
envelope, allowing them to be self-healing.” Finally, under the heading
HUMAN ROBOTS: “...An electronic circuit that imitates two neurons, the cells
of the human brain, has been built, and has enabled a robot to deal with some
unexpected situations, but the neuron structure was bulky. The brain has bil-
lions of neurons, meaning an incredible miniaturization job will be necessary
before truly human robots are developed.”
Since those words were written, of course, incredible things have been done in
miniaturizing electronic computers. For example, a mere dozen years ago there
was no such thing as an electronic hand calculator. Within a few years they
were on the market but at a cost of hundreds of dollars. Today, just a few scant
years further on, they are all over the place—tiny, inexpensive, and able to do
things only bulky computers could do a decade ago. But these things only hint
very vaguely at the scientific strides that have made Organic Robotoids a real-
ity.
The man-made biological machine known as a Robotoid is remarkable from

head to foot; but the most astonishing thing about them is their ability to simu-
late human beings—not just in appearance but in behavior. In other words, the
most crucial and most amazing thing about a Russian Organic Robotoid is its
biological computer brain. The developments that were destined to lead to Rus-
sia’s breakthrough in robotoid brain research began 32 years ago, in 1947. In
that year a Hungarian-born physicist, Dr. Dennis Gabor, conceived of a way to
make three-dimensional photographs called “holograms.” It was a revolutionary
scientific discovery, and it was destined to lead to the Nobel Prize for Dr. Ga-
bor. He did not receive the Prize until 24 years later, in 1971. By then,
holograms were a reality in numerous laboratories world-wide; and yet most
members of the general public still had not heard of holography. And even to-
day, more than three decades after Dr. Gabor’s original discovery, holography
is still unfamiliar to the public as a whole. In 1947 Dr. Gabor’s theory pointed
the way toward holography, but at that time holograms could not actually be
made. What was needed in order to make them was something called “mono-
108
Audio Letter 47
chromatic light”—that is, light of just one wave length. No one knew how to
create that kind of light in 1947, but in 1960 the situation suddenly changed—
that was the year the laser was invented. When lasers are discussed in public,
attention is usually focused on just one of their amazing characteristics—that’s
the ability of a laser to produce a narrow, intense beam of light. The beam can
travel great distances without spreading out and diffusing. Lasers pointed the
way toward energy-beam weapons, among other things; and as I revealed long
ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 26, this is what secretly spawned America’s crash
program to get to the moon in 1961. But the reason laser beams behave the way
they do is that the light they produce is monochromatic, so they are made to
order for generating holograms. Like lasers, holography has led to develop-
ments that were totally unexpected, and one of these was the Russian
breakthrough in biological computer brains some years ago. When you hear
how they work, you’ll understand why robotoids act so much like the human
beings they replace.
A hologram is a very unusual kind of photograph. To make one, the film is ex-
posed using a laser and a set of mirrors and lenses; and to make the holograph
image on the film visible later on, laser light must again be used. When you
look at a hologram, it is as if you were looking through a window at the real
object. You can move back and forth, up and down, and see it from different
angles in three-dimensional detail. By contrast, of course, a conventional pho-
tograph is flat and looks the same from all angles. Holograms are also different
in another way. If you tear a normal photograph into several pieces, you ruin it.
Each piece contains only a disconnected fraction of the total, but not so with a
hologram. If you cut up a holographic film into several pieces, each piece still
contains almost the entire image. There is some loss of detail but basically it’s
all there. It’s this fact that led years ago to the Russian breakthrough in biologi-
cal computer brains for their robotoids.
For quite some time, scientists in the Intelligence Community world-wide,

studying the human brain, have known one very important fact. That fact is that
a portion of a human brain can be removed through accident or surgery and yet
the person still retains most of his original memory, so in this respect the mem-
ory in a human brain is like a hologram. Nowadays the relationship between
holography and human memory is beginning to be understood in the West. For
example, Dr. Karl Pribram, a neuropsychologist at Stanford University, wrote
about it recently in the magazine “PSYCHOLOGY TODAY.” As he pointed
out, the implications of holography are enormous, both for brain research and
for computers; but this relationship was first recognized not in America but in a
research laboratory at Russia’s Siberian Science City, Novosibirsk.
109
The reason the Russians have scooped the West in many recent scientific dis-
coveries is not that they are supermen while we are mental midgets, instead it
has to do with the way they organize their efforts in science and technology.
This organization is totally different from that in the West, and it’s turning out
to be far more efficient. For one thing, when it comes to research, communica-
tions in Russia are far superior to those in the West. There are more than 5,000
research centers and laboratories in Russia doing research and development of
all kinds, and they are all linked together by vigorous communications—not
only within each scientific field, but between different fields. There’s also a
fundamental difference in what is discussed in Russian technical literature, as
compared with the West. In the West, a scientist usually publishes a technical
paper only to report a success of some kind. If he carries out a research project
that fails, he generally publishes nothing about it; but in Russia, many failures
and problems are discussed very openly in the technical literature. As a result,
many areas of research meet a very different fate in Russia than in the West.
Here in America an elaborate and expensive scientific project may come very
close to success but fall through because of a key missing ingredient. When that
happens, very little is published about it; but in Russia, the researchers describe
their problems and failures; and among the thousands of other scientists nation-
wide, one might have the answer. So the Russian system, which is built around
cooperation, often produces success; but the Western system, especially in
America, is built around jealousy and it often leads to failure. It’s happened
many times, my friends, and it happened several years ago in robotoid brain
development.
Last month I revealed that the Russians can manufacture organic robotoids,
which are almost exact carbon copies of real human beings. This is done by a
process that simulates the genetic coding of the person to be copied. It sounds a
little like cloning, but it’s not. A clone of a human would itself be a human, but
an organic robotoid is NOT human. It’s an artificial life form, like an animal in
some ways but like a computerized machine in others. Every Russian robotoid
has what is called a “holographic brain.” This brain duplicates essentially the
entire memory of a person being copied. The key to doing this is a new tech-
nique called an “ultrasonic cerebral hologram.” Using high-frequency sound
waves, which are inaudible, a complete three-dimensional picture is made of a
person’s brain. This is a painless, non-destructive process; and under the proper
conditions it can be done without the person even being aware of it.
Last month I revealed that the Russians are using Nelson Rockefeller’s “Hit
List” to weed out Bolsheviks here in America, and for roughly three years they
have been preparing for this day. They have been secretly making cerebral
holograms of the people on the list at every opportunity. This has been done to
110
Audio Letter 47
every person on Rockefeller’s list who has visited Russia or Eastern Europe in
the past three years.
When an organic robotoid is made to simulate, for example, our late President
Jimmy Carter, two major factors are involved. One is the genetic coding re-
quired to simulate Carter’s appearance, voice, fingerprints, and so on. The other
is a holographic image of Carter’s brain. This image is a complete record of the
neuron patterns which existed in Carter’s brain at the moment the hologram
was made. Therefore it contains all of the memory and knowledge Carter had
up to that moment. When a Carter robotoid is made, the biological computer in
its head is caused to form according to the holographic record of Carter’s brain.
However, certain portions of the robotoid computer are caused to deviate from
the holographic record. The end result is a biological computer which has to be
programmed but which contains essentially all of Carter’s memory, involuntary
mannerisms, and the like. As a result, a Carter robotoid will automatically do
certain kinds of things without the need for specific programming. For example,
a Carter robotoid will seem to recognize old friends. That’s because the com-
puter memory of the robotoid reproduces Carter’s memory of that friend. The
holographic process puts it there automatically without the Russian program-
mers even having to know it’s there.
Organic robotoids are such amazing creatures that they are still a subject of
questioning and debate. This is true even among the Russian scientists who
made them a reality. For example, robotoids seem to have no true instinct for
self-preservation. In this regard they act like machines, simply doing as they are
told to do. By contrast, both humans and animals generally have the instinct for
self-preservation. Robotoids can be programmed for self-preservation, but they
are equally willing (if “willing” is the word) to perform suicide missions, ex-
ploratory one-way trips into space. I’ve only one example of this: if a space
mission looks too dangerous to risk the life of an experienced cosmonaut, a ro-
botoid can now be used. The robotoid copy of the cosmonaut is already trained
the moment it’s made, thanks to its holographic memory.
Organic robotoids look and act so much like human beings that it’s hard for us
to get used to the idea that they are not human; but the Russians decided several
months ago that the stakes are too high not to employ them, and so the silent
Russian invasion of America by robotoids is now well under way.
Topic #2—The Russian strategy is to work from the top down in dismantling
Bolshevik power here in the United States. In this respect they are doing the
same thing in principle as they did in overthrowing Bolshevik power in Russia.
Within Russia itself the overthrow process made use of human “doubles.”
111
These “doubles” were Christians with a level of dedication that is almost un-
thinkable in the West. They underwent plastic surgery at the expense of a life-
long change in their appearance, they spent years in detailed study of the per-
sons they were to replace; and then once they had replaced powerful people,
they saw to it that other members of their Christian sect acquired positions of
power. Over the years untold numbers of these Christian “doubles” in powerful
positions were eventually found out. When that happened, they were purged by
the Bolsheviks; but when they died they took with them the knowledge of the
identities of other Christians whom they had placed in power. And so with
every Christian they killed, the Bolsheviks were gradually sealing their own
fate. They never caught on to the master take-over plan of the native Russian
Christians until it was too late.
Today the Russians are putting that experience to use again in their robotoid
strategy to take control of America. Bolshevik power is always centralized, so
the Russians are starting with the head of the Bolshevik serpent. From there
they intend to work outward gradually to the many tentacles of Bolshevik
power. As of now, the White House and Cabinet are under complete control by
Russia. According to my latest Intelligence report only one member of the
Carter Cabinet is still alive. All of the rest, including the “ad hoc gang of four,”
have been replaced by Russian robotoids. Likewise, the United States now has
a Supreme Court made up of nine (9) Russian robotoids, and now Russia is fo-
cusing on the main members of the United States Senate who are opposing
SALT II.
When Carter robotoid No. 3 was in Vienna earlier this month for the SALT II
summit, he acted like a puppy dog around Leonid Brezhnev No. 2; and
Brezhnev 2, the human double for the late real Brezhnev, likewise treated the
alleged Carter like a puppy. Whenever he tired of talking or became hungry,
Brezhnev 2 simply got up and walked off, and the grinning replica of the late
Jimmy Carter would follow obediently at his heels. Finally on June 18 the
Carter robotoid set the world on its ear by kissing and hugging Brezhnev 2 after
the SALT II signing ceremony.
While the process of takeover is under way, the Russians will not render the
robotoids vulnerable to neutralization by the Bolsheviks. For that reason, the
robotoids which have already replaced certain Senators are continuing to pre-
tend that they oppose SALT II. To do otherwise would attract attention
prematurely. But the really bitter opposition to SALT II is coming from people
who don’t know what is going on.
112
Audio Letter 47
My friends, the Russians are now speaking from strength. They are not bluff-
ing. A few days ago on June 25 Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko went
out of his way to demonstrate this fact. It is a very rare occurrence for Gromyko
to give a news conference, and even more rare for him to speak in English. But
on the 25th he gave a two-hour News Conference in Moscow; and to make sure
he got his point across in no uncertain terms, he spoke in English. He declared
that there must be no changes whatsoever in the SALT II treaty, and he said: “I
tell you frankly it is impossible to resume negotiations. It would be the end of
negotiations, the end, no matter what amendments would be made.” Then after
a moment’s pause, he added firmly: “Fantastic situation.” My friends, the ratifi-
cation of SALT II could be the litmus test that will decide between PEACE and
WAR for America and Russia.
Twenty-one months ago, on September 27, 1977, America lost the decisive
“Battle of the Harvest Moon” in space to Russia. That evening, as I reported
that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 26, Gromyko delivered a SALT II ultima-
tum to the White House. Meanwhile excited news reports said there had been a
breakthrough in SALT II. That was a lie, as I told you at the time, and events
since then have proven that it was a lie. Now Russia’s ultimatum for SALT II is
being repeated—and for the last time. When SALT II is ratified, secret provi-
sions of the treaty will begin America’s surrender by means of unilateral
disarmament. The Russians are presently trying to achieve this ratification by
replacing as few Senators as possible with robotoids. This approach is an act of
mercy by the Kremlin, which could now robotize the entire Senate if it wished,
and at will. This means there remains a slim chance that the Bolsheviks will
somehow find a way to upset SALT II; but if they do, it will be as Gromyko put
it, “the end.” It will be the end of SALT II, it will also be the end of any re-
maining Russian restraint or mercy toward their Bolshevik enemies; and if the
Russians should finally conclude that their plans for peace are hopeless, it will
really be the end, because then they will do as Gromyko threatened at the White
House 21 months ago; that is, they will give America the war which our former
rulers tried so hard to bring about.
My friends, the top priority of the new Christian rulers of Russia is to prevent
Nuclear War I if possible. That’s why the decision was made early this year,
1979, to deploy the robotoids. If they had not done that, Saudi Arabia oil fields
would have vanished in nuclear fireballs last month. The plan for an Israeli pre-
emptive strike against Saudi Arabia, which I first made public late in 1975,
would have been carried out. But as I reported last month, two top secret Mid-
dle East shuttles were carried out to stop the plan (one shuttle was in late April,
the other during mid May)—the shuttles involved robotoid replacements for top
American officials—and so far Saudi Arabia has been saved.
113
If the Israeli strike against Saudi Arabia had been carried out, this would have
provided the desired excuse for the contrived gasoline lines we are now seeing.
For months they have been diverting petroleum products to other countries at a
handsome profit instead of building up normal supplies here. By now they were
expecting the Saudi Arabia strike to be an accomplished fact. Under those con-
ditions we Americans would have simply accepted gasoline shortages, and the
shortages would have been worsening fast—on the way to a declaration of a
“National Emergency.” By the autumn of this year the Bolshevik plan for an
American nuclear first strike against Russia would have been carried out. So the
plan which I outlined in AUDIO LETTER No. 37 last August would now be in
full swing; but by stopping the Saudi Arabia strike, at least for the time being,
the Russians have so far kept the peace.
Right now Israel is frustrated and is taking it out on southern Lebanon. Yester-
day Israel violated her agreement with the United States and used F-15s to
attack alleged Palestinian bases there; but the Russian robotoid replacement for
Secretary of State Cyrus Vance ordered the State Department to issue an imme-
diate and very stern written protest to Israel. The Russians have also put the big
oil companies of the now headless Rockefeller cartel in a very embarrassing
spot. Without a Saudi Arabia disaster to point to, they have no excuse to give
for the gasoline shortages now taking place. But at the same time they cannot
instantly increase supplies because they started turning down their own oil
spigots months ago, so they have outsmarted themselves, my friends. Ameri-
cans are growing more angry by the day because almost everyone can tell that
it’s all a big swindle. On all sides there is beginning to be a growing chorus of
“Nationalize the oil companies.”
The Russians are using the robotoids in an attempt to stop the Bolshevik war
schemes, and they are doing so even though they know there’s a risk to them-
selves in what they are doing. Bolsheviks have infiltrated into positions of
power throughout American society, so rooting them out is a gigantic chal-
lenge. This is especially true in the military. A quarter century ago the late
Senator Joseph McCarthy made a genuine and brave attempt to stop this infil-
tration, but America’s Bolsheviks succeeded in cutting him down, using tactics
far worse than those of which he was accused; so today there are Bolsheviks at
every level and in every branch of the United States military. Using their ro-
botoids the Russians may be able to ferret them out within 18 months to two
years, but during that time Bolshevism will remain a very dangerous force here
in America.
114
Audio Letter 47
The Bolsheviks may well keep on trying to find a way to surprise and destroy
Russia; so if Russia’s rulers of today shared the Bolsheviks’ fascination with
war, they would not bother to use the robotoids. Instead they would just stir up
a confrontation between Russia and America and then unleash their “space
triad.” Since late 1977, as I’ve reported in my tapes, there have been seven (7)
Russian Particle Beam-weapons bases on the near side of the moon. These
could start pounding American strategic targets worldwide into dust without
producing radioactive fallout. If the United States attempted to counterattack
with ICBMs, they would be blasted during launch by the Cosmospheres now
floating overhead; and the 37 Cosmos Interceptors now in orbit would continue
to deny America a military toehold in space. These satellites are manned and
armed with Charged Particle Beam-weapons. They finished destroying Amer-
ica’s spy satellites over a year ago, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 33.
But at the very least, such a war would kill tens of millions of people, mostly in
the United States; and if things got out of hand, a full-fledged thermonuclear
war could kill hundreds of millions. My friends, the rulers of Russia today are
Christians and to them nuclear war is insanity if it can be avoided, and so they
are using their robotoids.
Earlier this month on June 16, Leonid Brezhnev No. 2 summed up Russia’s atti-
tude at the SALT II summit in Vienna. He said: “God will not forgive us if we
fail.” Many people were shocked to hear those words but I reported the expla-
nation long ago in my AUDIO LETTERS, such as No. 38. Russia’s leaders are
out to save their own souls.
Topic #3—My friends, we are now living through a critical and confusing pe-
riod. Most of our neighbors are asleep, unaware that their destinies are hanging
in the balance; and for those of us who are awake, it is a difficult and lonely
time. I don’t think anyone could express it any better than Dr. Harry Schultz. In
the late June 1979 issue of his famous International Investment Advisory Let-
ter, he mentions that his readers often cannot understand or believe his
investment advice because he has always been ahead of his time, and here’s
how he expresses it: “To gain universal appeal you must be too late, not too
early; to be popular you must predict and write what even the general public
have already perceived to be happening.” And how true!
More and more the events we see will be reflecting Russia’s gradual take-over
of the United States; but at the same time, things which were put into the pipe-
line by the four Rockefeller brothers before they died will be gradually winding
down. Our present manipulated gasoline shortages are a good example. These
are things which were set in motion long ago and they have too much momen-
115
tum to come to a halt overnight. The same is true of Bolshevik schemes which
have been gathering steam in the United States now for nearly two years.
As I have explained in the past, the Bolshevik mentality is one in which human
life is only a tool of power. Last November 1978 the Guyana tragedy took
place—a military operation in which hundreds of civilian lives were sacrificed
as a ploy. In AUDIO LETTER No. 40 I described what took place there in de-
tail. Then, in March, there was the Bolshevik sabotage of the Three Mile Island
Nuclear Power Plant. In AUDIO LETTER No. 45 I reported what had been
done. Its purpose was to help in the Bolshevik shutdown of America, using hu-
man lives as a tool of revolution. And only late last month it happened again
when an American Airlines DC-10 was sabotaged by explosives by remote con-
trol. The result was the tragic, senseless, inhuman inferno of American Airlines
Flight 191 in Chicago. But the Chicago DC-10 crash was for nothing because
the Russians, using their robotoids, are undoing the Rothschild-Bolshevik shut-
down plans for America. This is just one example of the cross currents now
going on behind the scenes.
My friends, the United States is now being transformed into a satellite state of
the Soviet Union, so the schemes which were set in motion first by the Rocke-
fellers and then by the Bolsheviks will gradually fade away. Already robotoid
replacements for top American officials are beginning to subtly speak the Rus-
sian line on major issues; and when it comes to SALT II, the Carter robotoids
are not even being subtle about it. Every few days Moscow repeats: “We will
accept no amendments,” and each time an echo comes forth from a Carter ro-
botoid: “We will accept no amendments.”
My friends, in AUDIO LETTERS No. 44 and 45 I proposed that the Christ

ones of America go on a “Pilgrimage for Peace” to meet with Russia’s leaders.
The response to my proposal from American Christians has been overwhelm-
ing. Only a handful of ministers and church officials have responded. Instead it
has been primarily the Christians in all other walks of life. Already enough
people have expressed interest to fill up not just one but several Aeroflot Jet
Transports. Up to now, my friends, I have had no official reply from the Rus-
sian government about my proposal. So far they have not turned us down, but a
pilgrimage like this would be a very serious matter. Whatever they decide, we
cannot go back to business as usual because, my friends, nothing will ever be
the same again!
116
Audio Letter 48
July 30, 1979
In recent weeks we Americans have been reeling from one crisis to another—
the gasoline crisis, the dollar crisis with gold peaking at new record levels, the
fall of Nicaragua, the alleged crash to earth of SKYLAB, rumors of a new Rus-
sian military command in Cuba, controversy over the SALT II treaty, and
above all the Carter crisis—with one shocking and unprecedented development
after another. Meanwhile, in the background, there’s a continuing drumbeat of
lesser mysteries to worry about—chemical plants, refineries, and oil storage
depots keep exploding and burning daily all around us; railroad tank cars keep
derailing, leaking and exploding here and there—but these things have become
so commonplace in the past two years that we hardly even pay attention any
more. Instead we wonder, “Why did those 41 sperm whales suddenly beach
themselves and die last month on the Oregon coast?” Even the marine biolo-
gists in that area leave us with the words: “It may always be a mystery.”
But that soon fades from our minds, and instead our attention is diverted by pa-
thetic television re-runs of America’s heyday in space a decade ago. As we
watch the fuzzy picture of a spaceman as he steps gingerly onto the moon, for a
moment it is once again July 20, 1969; and for a brief moment we thrill once
again to those famous words of Neil Armstrong: “That’s one small step for a
man, one giant leap for mankind.” For a moment we may forget how different it
is today. Our manned Space Station SKYLAB is now officially dead according
to NASA, while Russian cosmonauts are setting new records in their Salyut 6
Space Station; and, strangely, the American Space Shuttle just can’t seem to get
off the ground. “What’s happened to NASA?,” we may ask ourselves; and “If
we could land men on the moon, why can’t we solve any of our other prob-
lems?” But before we can think of any answers, our attention is diverted again.
“Here comes another bombshell from Washington,” says the TV, and we forget
everything else, absorbed in the latest bewildering event in the Carter crisis.
My friends, news reports about these events always make them seem as if they
were separate and unrelated. As a result, they seem to make no sense; and so we
do as we are intended to do, we just throw up our hands. The more evil our
leaders have become, the more we have decided to just trust them; and the more
117
secretive our Government has become, the more we have lied to ourselves that
we knew what was going on. But the events I mentioned a few moments ago
are not separate and unrelated. They are all parts of a bigger picture; like pieces
of a jigsaw puzzle, each piece makes sense when you know what the total pic-
ture is. That is why in my AUDIO LETTER series I keep focusing on the total
picture—that is what I said I would do when I inaugurated the AUDIO
LETTER series in June 1975. Each month I can only highlight a few of the spe-
cific events that are pieces of the puzzle, but each month I try to add more to
your own understanding so that you can learn to see the truth for yourself.
For long-time careful listeners of my AUDIO LETTERS, recent events ought

not to be any real surprise. For example, consider the fluctuating decline of the
United States dollar and the fluctuating rise of gold prices. Lately many former
anti-gold figures have jumped onto the gold bandwagon, as if they had always
been there. Yet they tell you nothing about why these events are now taking
place. My friends, the reasons are those which I made public six years ago in
my book, five years ago in Congressional testimony, and then in my AUDIO
LETTERS.
Those who expected to benefit most from the death of the dollar began vanish-
ing from the scene early this year of 1979. This began with the murder of
Nelson Rockefeller, which I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. The follow-
ing month I reported that his brothers David and Laurance were also killed and
replaced with “doubles.” It is now widely known in international banking cir-
cles that the real David Rockefeller is dead. But powerful long-range economic
forces were unleashed years ago by the late David Rockefeller and his inti-
mates. The death of the dollar was just one part of an elaborate plan for
Dictatorship here in America, followed by a One-World Government. Another
element of the plan was to be a Middle East war with the nuclear destruction of
Arab OPEC oil wells. Over 3-1/2 years ago I made the plan public in AUDIO
LETTER No. 6, and in later tapes—for example, Nos. 28, 37, and 41—I have
kept my listeners informed about the status of this plan; and in AUDIO
LETTER No. 41 last December 1978, I called attention to the “Hate Saudi Ara-
bia” campaign which was building up here in America. The nuclear doom of
Saudi Arabia was being planned for the spring, and the American people were
being conditioned to accept it. In AUDIO LETTER No. 37 I had revealed the
secret American plan by which the Middle East disaster was to lead to war with
Russia. In March came the Egyptian-Israeli “Peace Treaty” which was designed
to set the stage not for peace, but for war; but in late April 1979 events behind
the scenes altered completely the direction of events. In AUDIO LETTER No.
46 two months ago, I revealed how Russia stopped the secret nuclear war plan
in its tracks, especially after the death of David Rockefeller. Meanwhile, only
118
Audio Letter 48
the tip of the iceberg of all this showed up here in America. Most Americans
only knew that there was a gasoline shortage with long lines; what we were not
told was that the so-called shortage was artificial. It had been timed to coincide
with the Saudi Arabian disaster, which did not happen due to Russia’s interven-
tion. Now the oil companies are covering their tracks, releasing more gasoline;
and most Americans still have no idea what the gas lines were really all about.
And then there are those whales which beached themselves last month in Ore-
gon. It was almost a re-run of the beaching of some 120 whales in Florida
nearly 2-1/2 years ago. In AUDIO LETTER No. 20 for January 1977 I had re-
vealed that some huge secret American underwater missiles had been planted in
the Atlantic Ocean off our east coast. These enormous missiles had begun rup-
turing and leaking plutonium from their warheads into the Ocean. Early the
following month the whales began beaching themselves near Jacksonville, Flor-
ida. The stories then were the same as we heard recently in Oregon. Somehow,
we were told, the Florida whales must have gotten disoriented; but as I revealed
in AUDIO LETTER No. 21, their breathing had been disrupted by a fungus in
their lungs, and the fungus was the product of the plutonium from one of the
leaking missiles I had revealed. This time, in Oregon, the whale-beaching was
once again caused by plutonium-induced fungus in the lungs; but the source
this time was not a leaking underwater missile, instead a different weapon of
secret warfare mentioned in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 20 and 21 is involved.
Recently Russia resumed radiochemical warfare against the United States.
Large remote-control canisters have been dropped at sea at intervals along our
Pacific, Atlantic, and Gulf coasts. These are spewing radiochemical warfare
agents into our air on command whenever wind conditions are favorable. Most
of the canisters used plutonium as one of their active ingredients. These re-
newed attacks so far are at a low, non-lethal level; their purpose is not to kill
but to promote low-grade ailments and to sap our strength and national will.
But the whales that beached themselves on the Oregon coast last month, June
16, had high concentrations of plutonium in their lungs along with the other
canister products. Apparently they surfaced very close to a canister off the Ore-
gon coast. They breathe the air just as you and I do, and at that close range the
canister gave them a dose that destroyed their ability to breathe; and so like the
whales in Florida 2-1/2 years ago, they beached themselves to die.
In other ways, too, the United States is gradually being rendered incapable of
going to war against Russia. In World War II the Western allies brought Ger-
many’s war machine to a crawl by bombing chemical plants and disrupting rail
transportation. Likewise, today American chemical, petroleum, and rail targets
are being destroyed in a war of attrition by Russian sabotage. Russia’s new rul-
ers are taking no chances, my friends. Of all people, they know there is always
119
the danger of being surprised and upset in their plans; and so, even while they
are trying to prevent nuclear war, they are still preparing to win such a war if it
does take place. This even includes continuing preparations for a possible inva-
sion of the United States from Canada and Mexico. I first revealed these
activities sixteen months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 32, and this is the expla-
nation for the news reports just a few days ago about a major new Russian
Army command structure in Cuba. Cuba is serving as a staging center for the
steady flow of troops and arms into Mexico’s Yucatan Peninsula. This is going
on secretly but with the knowledge and cooperation of the Mexican Govern-
ment. Early this year President Carter paid a visit to Mexico and was greeted
with official contempt and hostility. Now you know why. Mexico, like Quebec
Province in Canada, has already made her peace with Russia. Russia’s prepara-
tions are already far-advanced to enable her to survive and win all-out war; and
yet, as I have revealed over the past several months, Russia’s new rulers are
using every means at their disposal to prevent nuclear war. They are doing
nothing less than taking control of the United States, working from the top
down.
Today I want to call your attention to major current events which are proving
what I have been telling you all along. Because the AUDIO LETTER stands
alone, you must use your own judgment in evaluating what I reveal, instead of
depending on what anyone else says. The AUDIO LETTER, my friends, is not
for the many but for the few with ears to hear.
My three special topics this month are:
Topic #1—THE FINAL CHAPTER IN THE GREAT SKYLAB COVER-UP
Topic #2—THE SECRET WAR OF THE WALKING DEAD
Topic #3—HOW AMERICA WILL RE-LEARN THE FEAR OF GOD.
Topic #1—On a midsummer day ten years ago this month, an estimated half
billion people world-wide sat transfixed before television sets. We were watch-
ing a television image that was fuzzy, flickering, in black and white, and yet it
was awesome because we were watching the impossible take place before our
very eyes. We were watching two American astronauts, Neil Armstrong and
Buzz Aldrin, the first two men on the moon. That day, July 20, 1969, was a
great day to be an American. The impossible promise of an assassinated Presi-
dent, John F. Kennedy, had come true. On May 25, 1961, he had told us that
America would put a man on the moon before the decade was out, so when Neil
Armstrong stepped onto the moon’s surface and called it “a giant leap,” he was
120
Audio Letter 48
right. In barely eight years we had leapfrogged past Russia to be first on the
moon.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 26 I explained why it was so important to beat Russia

to the moon. It was all sold to us as a sort of Space Age Olympics, a peaceful
sporting race to gather moon rocks; but it was actually a military crash pro-
gram, ten times bigger than the Manhattan Project in World War II, and its real
purpose was to establish a secret base on the moon. From there, revolutionary
new Beam-weapons would become the key to ruling the earth. At the time of
the Kennedy announcement in 1961, the United States was far behind Russia in
space, but NASA planners had figured out a way to jump past Russia in order
to get to the moon first.
The Russians were firmly committed to what is called the Earth-Orbital Ap-
proach to moon flight. Under this approach, missions to the moon would be
assembled and launched from earth orbit with the aid of Space Stations. This
technique has always been recognized as the surest and safest route to the
moon. Even our own late great Wernher Von Braun had advocated the earth-
orbital approach for more than a decade. The earth-orbital technique is like
building a firm foundation before building the rest of the house. It’s the right
thing to do, but it takes time. NASA planners were given the task of beating
Russia to the moon, and they soon concluded that we were too far behind Rus-
sia to catch up by the earth-orbital method. There was only one way we could
beat the Russians—it was bold, but it was also very risky. It would be like
building a house with almost no foundation for the sake of speed. It was called
the Lunar-Orbital moon mission. Under this plan, the first priority was to get
men on the moon fast and start laying the groundwork for a moon base; then
with the moon in American hands, we could drop back and fortify our Space
Logistics system. Its keystone was to be a Space Station known as SKYLAB.
And that’s how Project Apollo was conceived, with its predecessors Project
Mercury and Project Gemini. NASA was gambling in several ways at once, but
the gamble paid off—America did beat Russia to the moon.
In December 1972 the Moon Program was supposedly cut off prematurely with
Apollo 17; but in AUDIO LETTER No. 26 I explained that the flights did not
really stop; instead the Moon Program was simply taken out of public limelight.
Moon-launch missions were shifted from the highly visible Cape Kennedy to
the island of Diego Garcia in the Indian Ocean. On May 14, 1973, less than five
months after the Apollo 17 Moon Mission, SKYLAB was launched. From then
on the secretly continuing American Moon Program began benefitting from
earth-orbital techniques. By late 1977, plans called for the American military
base in Copernicus Crater to be armed and operational. The base was to be
121
armed with Beam-weapons which can blast any visible spot on earth within two
seconds. The weapons were to include eventually both Lasers and Particle
Beams.
In the United States itself, Particle Beam research had been sent down blind
alleys as a decoy, but in other locations world-wide Particle Beam-weapons
were being developed. It was an elaborate plan—and it almost worked. But on
the night of the Harvest Moon, September 27, 1977, it all ended in catastrophe.
Already the Soviet Union had begun orbiting operational killer satellites called
Cosmos Interceptors. These are manned and armed with Particle Beam-
weapons. Two were in orbit by late September 1977, and one was armed with a
deadly Neutron Beam. This was used to bombard the Copernicus Base, killing
all of the astronauts there, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 26. Only two
days later, the Russian manned space program suddenly came to life. The Sa-
lyut 6 Space Station was launched into orbit, then cosmonaut crews began
visiting Salyut 6 in a steady stream, which continues to this day. Even now, the
latest Salyut 6 cosmonauts have been in orbit more than 150 days. This far ex-
ceeds any record ever set by the United States.
All of this is in stark contrast to the fate of our own Space Station, SKYLAB.
Earlier this month on July 11, NASA pretended that SKYLAB had unavoidably
crashed from orbit, but SKYLAB actually came to an abrupt end 21 months
ago, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 27. On October 18, 1977, a tremen-
dous fireball flashed across the southwestern United States. The sky was lit up
over a track nearly a thousand miles long. It was seen by thousands across at
least five (5) States—Texas, Oklahoma, Louisiana, Arkansas and Missouri.
Witnesses included pilots, military observers, and even the McDonald Observa-
tory in far southwest Texas. It produced headlines all over the United States.
People were asking, “What in the world was that?” That, my friends, was
SKYLAB. As I said that month, it was blasted out of space by a Russian Cos-
mos Interceptor. The destruction of SKYLAB was part of Russia’s program to
terminate America’s secret military control of space.
Later that month, the SKYLAB cover-up by NASA got under way. SKYLAB
was said to be sinking from orbit sooner than expected, but at first NASA pre-
tended that SKYLAB could probably be saved by the Space Shuttle. There was
never any chance, my friends, that SKYLAB could be saved because it was al-
ready gone. From time to time the SKYLAB cover-up story was revived, each
time with more pessimism. Finally, last December 1978, NASA announced,
with deep regret of course, that all plans to rescue SKYLAB were being aban-
doned. Those pesky sunspots were just bringing it down too fast to reach it in
time with the Space Shuttle. From then on, speculation mounted: Where would
122
Audio Letter 48
SKYLAB crash—India? China? The Andes? Russia? Downtown Chicago?

NASA spokesmen kept insisting that they had no idea. Even on the alleged fi-
nal orbit this month, July 11, NASA pretended to be taken by surprise. They
pretended to be trying to bring it down in the South Atlantic, but it over-shot,
they said. Then there were several minutes of dramatic silence from SKYLAB
Control in Houston. Then came the initial announcement of SKYLAB’s official
fate—“Purely by chance,” they said, “SKYLAB had apparently crashed into the
Indian Ocean.” They pretended that it was a surprise, but 17 months ago, my
friends, I alerted you to the Indian Ocean as being on NASA’s mind for cover-
up purposes. The Indian Ocean provides no witnesses to dispute NASA’s claim
of a SKYLAB re-entry there. Nevertheless, NASA finally decided it would be
much safer to provide something for people to see than to say it just disap-
peared without a trace; and sure enough, the initial NASA announcement about
the Indian Ocean was followed by reports of sparkles in the sky over southwest
Australia. NASA then said apologetically that a few portions of SKYLAB had
apparently made it past the Ocean, re-entering over western Australia. But
strangely enough, the Australian Government said not a word.
My friends, this final chapter of the SKYLAB cover-up involved another mili-
tary secret, which I made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. There’s a large
secret American missile base in the Northern Territory of Australia. The base is
controlled by the Military, not NASA; but SKYLAB was part of a secret mili-
tary program and so NASA received some military help in the SKYLAB cover-
up.
On July 8, only three days before SKYLAB’s fictional crash to earth, a world-
wide military exercise called “GLOBAL SHIELD 79” began. It received very
little publicity here in the United States, and yet it was the biggest exercise in
over 20 years by the Strategic Air Command. NASA scheduled the fictional
end of SKYLAB to take place during this exercise. On July 10 two Minuteman
III missiles were launched into the Pacific from Vandenberg Air Force Base in
California, but that same day another missile was also launched under cover of
the world-wide exercise. It was launched from the missile base in Australia in
coordination with NASA. The missile was unarmed, and so the Russian Cos-
mospheres overhead observed the launch without interfering. It was launched
shortly past noon Eastern Daylight Time, which was the middle of the night in
Australia. The missile headed northeast over Indonesia and the South Pacific,
into orbit. Nearly 24 hours later the orbital package was following a path that
would soon bring it over Australia once again. A small retro-rocket was fired,
and re-entry took place over southwest Australia. It was timed for maximum
effect—nighttime in Australia and midday in the United States. The orbital
package, consisting of ceramic fragments of a special design, created a nice
123
fireworks display in the night sky. The very next day reports in the United
States said that Australians were finding pieces of purported SKYLAB debris
lying all around; and in the most famous case, an alleged 17-year-old beer keg
delivery man swung into action like a professional. Traveling by chartered
Learjet, commercial airplane and limousine, he raced to San Francisco. Carry-
ing a few nondescript black lumps, he beat the deadline for the $10,000
SKYLAB prize offered by the San Francisco EXAMINER. Those lumps, my
friends, were merely chunks of volcanic rock consisting mostly of iron and car-
bon; but predictably, NASA said a few days later that they were probably from
SKYLAB, and the prize was awarded. Can you imagine?
My friends, NASA has now closed the book on SKYLAB. It’s just yesterday’s
news now, something we are supposed to forget about; but if we do forget it,
we would deserve whatever may happen to us because the SKYLAB cover-up
was elaborate, and its purpose was to keep the truth from us. There are still very
powerful forces in America who want to drag us all into war with Russia; but
the message of SKYLAB is that if we let that happen, we will be committing
suicide for ourselves, for our children, and for the United States of America!
Topic #2—Two months ago I revealed that a revolutionary new Intelligence

weapon was being introduced by Russia. I refer to their “Organic Robotoids.”
These are man-made robot-like living creatures, perhaps best described as com-
puterized animals. They’re designed to simulate human beings almost perfectly
in appearance and behavior, and yet they are not human. Robotoids are so far
removed from the knowledge and experience of most people that they are very
difficult for many people to believe, but now more and more major surprises
are filling the news—that is, they are surprises if you do not know about Rus-
sia’s robotoids. For example, consider the Middle East and the alleged gasoline
shortage. Nearly four years ago on October 12, 1975, I wrote an article on the
Op-Ed page of the Washington Star. It was titled: “WHO’S TO BLAME FOR
INFLATION? It’s Time to be Fair to OPEC.” The comments I made then are
still true today. For example, we hear constantly about the increasing price of
oil, but, quote: “You must remember that products from the oil-consuming
countries to the oil-producing countries are costing more each day” and, quote:
“...thus oil price rises appear to be limited, while the products of the industrial-
ized countries are unlimited, open-ended. Is this fair?” When I wrote those
words in 1975 I was out of step with the crowd. For the next 3-1/2 years we
were told increasingly that OPEC, especially Saudi Arabia, was our economic
enemy, but suddenly in the past two months everything has changed. The “Hate
Saudi Arabia” chant in the major media has abruptly stopped, at least for the
moment. Instead, stories are appearing about renewed trust between the United
States and Saudi Arabia; and as if by magic, the contrived gasoline lines are
124
Audio Letter 48
disappearing with promises of more gas on the way. It’s all the result of the
Russian robotoid shuttles to the Middle East, my friends, which I reported in
AUDIO LETTER No. 46. Russia stopped the War Plan and robbed the big oil
companies of their excuse for shortages.
Now, consider the SALT II treaty. There’s a relationship, my friends, between

SALT II and, of all things, the SKYLAB debacle.
There is nothing at all in the major media news about this relationship; but as
my older listeners know, SALT II and SKYLAB are just tips of the same ice-
berg, and it’s an iceberg that is already sinking our “Ship of State.” Earlier I
reviewed how the real story of SKYLAB’s fate began on September 27, 1977.
That was the day America lost the secret “Space Battle of the Harvest Moon” to
Russia. Three weeks later a Russian Cosmos Interceptor blasted SKYLAB out
of existence. The real story of the present SALT II treaty also began on Sep-
tember 27, 1977. That day Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko delivered
a speech at the United Nations. By the time Gromyko spoke, it was already
clear that Russia was winning the Space Battle so he spoke very harshly about
American stalling on SALT II. He delivered what amounted to a veiled ultima-
tum, then he left for Washington for a highly unusual nighttime meeting at the
White House with the real Jimmy Carter and Secretary of State Cyrus Vance.
Breathless reporters told the nation there had been a breakthrough in SALT II;
but when I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 26 three days later, I revealed what
had really happened. The stories about a SALT breakthrough were lies, cover-
stories to allay public concern. That’s what my listeners heard in AUDIO
LETTER No. 26, and for the following year and a half SALT II went nowhere;
but early this year drastic changes in America’s rulership began taking place.
For the past six months the AUDIO LETTER has been focusing on these
changes as they have taken place; and they have led, among other things, to a
turn-around on SALT II.
The changes began on January 26, 1979, with the murder of Nelson Rockefel-
ler. That was the opening shot of a secret Bolshevik coup d’etat against
America’s real rulers. As I have explained in previous tapes, the atheistic Bol-
sheviks no longer rule Russia. They have been overthrown by a tough band of
native Christians. Today Christianity is being re-born in Russia—but here, in
the United States, the Bolsheviks want to create a new Bolshevik revolution.
They want to seize control of America and then to strike back at their bitter
enemies, the Christ-ones who now run the Kremlin. For several months the
Bolshevik coup d’etat was moving fast, important people were being purged
and replaced by “doubles” beginning with David and Laurance Rockefeller and
their intimates; and the week-end after Easter 1979 the Bolshevik purge
125
claimed the lives of President Carter, Vice-President Mondale, and their fami-
lies. But as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 45, the Russians then began to
intervene. A secret war of “doubles” broke out, and by late April the White
House was already under Russia’s control. In AUDIO LETTER No. 46 I was
able to let my listeners in on the key to Russia’s success. They are using “ro-
botoids” to replace and simulate powerful people. The United States is secretly
becoming a Russian satellite state, and the American turn-around on SALT II
came fast. On May 9, 1979, the robotoid replacements for Defense Secretary
Brown and Secretary of State Vance made the initial announcement: an agree-
ment in principle had been achieved on SALT II, and with lightning speed the
treaty itself was signed in Vienna barely five weeks later. My friends, Russia
signed with herself through Carter robotoid No. 3 and Brezhnev No. 2, the hu-
man “double” for the late real Brezhnev.
At first the new SALT II treaty brought howls from Capitol Hill. We heard over
and over that it was in serious trouble, but last month I reported the true situa-
tion. SALT II’s most bitter opponents in the Senate are people who are playing
ball with the Bolsheviks here in America. Russia is replacing them with ro-
botoids, and the earlier hard line against SALT II is slowly evaporating. The
shift is subtle so far, but it is clearly visible. For example, the late Senator Barry
Goldwater worried constantly in public about verification, but on July 23 ro-
botoid Goldwater said, quote: “I would not be too exercised over it now.” An
even more bitter SALT II opponent was the late Senator Henry Jackson. Jack-
son always played up the Russian threat, but on July 23 he accused robotoid
Defense Secretary Harold Brown of exaggerating that threat. He called it “scare
tactics to sell SALT II.” Even our outgoing Ambassador to the Soviet Union
Malcolm Toon is no more. Toon was publicly very suspicious of SALT II, but
now a Toon robotoid has abruptly started campaigning in favor of SALT II—
and he won’t explain the change.
Robotoids, my friends, are a very powerful weapon; but as I pointed out in

AUDIO LETTER No. 46, they are also very troublesome. They do not live
long, especially under conditions of constant exposure and stress. They must
also be programmed, and yet they are also somewhat unpredictable. Last month
I described the process by which the holographic brain of a robotoid reproduces
the memory of a person being duplicated. Other parts of the brain are altered so
that the robotoid ends up as a robot-like being that obeys instructions. But the
memory includes involuntary responses which sometimes produce unwanted
behavior. This is turning out to be a severe problem in the case of the Jimmy
Carter robotoids, because the real Carter had mental instabilities which are re-
produced partially in the robotoids. The first signs of erratic behavior by the
Carter robotoids came in public comments about Senator Kennedy. The real
126
Audio Letter 48
Jimmy Carter had a strong personal dislike for Kennedy and on several occa-
sions Carter robotoids have simply blurted out these reactions in very raw form.
To a degree, this type of thing is a danger with all robotoids—they do not pos-
sess truly human judgment. They appear to have it under certain conditions, but
this is the result of programming for those situations. The problems of instabil-
ity and short life cause robotoids to be best suited for interim purposes. For
long-term purposes, human agents are still the best. For that reason, don’t be
surprised to see more and more new faces in high positions. Some of the new
faces will themselves be robotoids, but some will be human beings.
The Carter crisis of recent days demonstrates two things at once: one is the ex-
tent of secret Russian control that now exists in Washington; the other is the
difficulty the Russians themselves are having with their robotoids. On July 1,
Carter robotoid No. 4 returned to Washington from South Korea following the
“Economic Summit” in Tokyo. The scheduled Carter holiday in Hawaii was
canceled, and the next day a Carter Energy speech was scheduled for the eve-
ning of July 5. Then the Carter robotoid family disappeared to Camp David.
Jimmy Carter robotoid No. 4 was burning out, and was disposed of. Robotoid
No. 5 was next in line and had already been tried out several times; but on the
4th of July, the day before the scheduled speech, Carter robotoid No. 5 went
berserk. It was disposed of, leaving only robotoid No. 6 on deck. Each new ro-
botoid is given exposure on a small scale first, to test its wings so to speak—for
example, our alleged President goes fishing with a few friends or visits a farm
family. But this had not yet been done with robotoid No. 6 on July 4, so that left
the Russians no choice. The speech was canceled without explanation. The
Jody Powell robotoid refused to answer reporters’ questions. The press was
stunned, Capitol Hill was shocked and dismayed, and Carter’s own staff (those
who are still human) were caught by surprise. The following evening, July 5,
the White House “Energy group” held a meeting. Afterward the Washington
Star quoted a key Administration official as saying that, quote: “There was in-
credible disarray.” Meanwhile Carter’s political advisers supposedly were
summoned to Camp David. By Friday evening July 6, Carter robotoid No. 6
was programmed and ready for initial controlled exposure. Thus began the so-
called “Domestic summit” at Camp David. Puzzled observers said they could
not figure out what Carter hoped to accomplish with all this. The people invited
to Camp David after all were people whose views were already known to
Carter. Almost without exception, a number of the participants as they left
scratched their heads in puzzlement. “Carter,” they said, “had talked little. He
simply sat taking notes and nodding most of the time.”
My friends, two things were going on at Camp David: one was the controlled
exposure I mentioned earlier for Carter robotoid No. 6; but in addition, key in-
127
dividuals among the visitors were robotized—that is, the real person arrived,
but a robotoid departed!! The individuals who were robotized at Camp David
had been identified from Nelson Rockefeller’s “Hit List,” which I discussed
two months ago. Others were invited and left untouched as a smoke screen. All
those on the List who arrived at Camp David are now dead—in their place are
robotoids carrying on in their places like programmed zombies. The people
themselves are dead, and the robotoids are not conscious of being alive; and so
the “Secret War of the Walking Dead” goes on.
On July 11, SKYLAB Day according to NASA, the Camp David “Domestic
summit” ended abruptly. Carter robotoid No. 6 had started behaving erratically,
Wall Street was rife with rumors that Carter had suffered a nervous breakdown,
robotoid No. 7 was brought onto the scene, and the next day robotoid No. 6 was
eliminated. Once again Carter was said to be at work on his Energy speech. On
Friday the 13th of July, journalists who met with robotoid No. 7 described
Carter as, quote: “a thoroughly chastened leader”; others called him a deeply
troubled and worried man. Nevertheless, the next day Carter robotoid No. 7 was
sent forth to try his wings. Like a dead El Cid strapped to a horse, the 7th ro-
botoid copy of the late President Carter sallied forth. We were told that the
President of the United States visited private homes near Pittsburgh, Pa. and
Martinsburg, West Virginia. Afterward, the Russian Robotoid Command in
Novosibirsk must have sighed with relief. One of the hosts told UPI, quote: “I
feel better about him now. He’s acting more like a president now.” That Satur-
day evening July 14, Carter robotoid No. 7 arrived on the White House lawn by
helicopter at roughly 6:30 P.M., but the Russians were taking no chances. An
Associated Press dispatch that evening described another unexplained strange
turn of events, quote: “Members of the Press corps who normally are allowed
on the lawn to see and photograph the arrival, were barred from doing so on
Saturday.
White House Press officials gave no reason for the change except to say they
saw no reason for the coverage.” The following evening, Sunday July 15,
Carter robotoid No. 7 successfully delivered the long-delayed Energy speech;
but, as it turned out, Energy was only part of his subject. In that regard, the
Russian program to nationalize the big oil companies was set in motion.
That is what the so-called “ENERGY SECURITY CORPORATION” is actu-

ally all about; and to cut down all bureaucratic obstacles to Russia’s “Energy
plans” here, the “ENERGY MOBILIZATION BOARD” is to be created.
But the speech had a much broader thrust, dealing with the crisis of the Ameri-
can spirit. Some commentators have joked about the speech as, quote: “Carter’s
128
Audio Letter 48
Sunday night sermon”; but as I will point out briefly in Topic #3, we would be
wise not to laugh because, my friends, the words of the Carter robotoid No. 7
came straight from the Kremlin, and the Kremlin is not joking. Even the speech
itself was not without its mystery. The following day an article in the New York
Times pointed out, quote: “Another extraordinary development was that the
White House had no advance text of the speech, the President’s ten days of de-
liberations notwithstanding. It was the first time in the memory of veteran
reporters that no prepared text was released.”
Even so, the speech gave the impression momentarily that things were finally
back to normal, but that impression was shattered less than 48 hours later.
Shortly after 4:00 P.M. July 17, the Jody Powell robotoid issued another brief
surprise announcement to reporters. Something unprecedented had happened—
the entire Carter Cabinet and all senior members of the White House staff had
offered their resignations. Once again the Washington establishment was
shaken to its foundations. But if the resignations were a shock here, they were a
lightning bolt overseas, because in other countries the resignation of an entire
Cabinet means just one thing—it means the Government has fallen. For the
next few days news reports world-wide were filled with worried reactions. On
all sides we were hearing words like Dismay, Bewilderment, Disbelief. Sena-
tors and others described Carter as acting erratically. One said publicly, quote:
“We are worried about him having some kind of breakdown”; another said,
quote: “I think the President is nuts.”
Soon a Jimmy Carter robotoid may well flee the White House. That will leave
1980 as “The Year of the Dark Horse,” because as of now, every major poten-
tial presidential candidate has been replaced with a robotoid! Two months ago
when I first made public my intelligence on the Russian robotoids, I gave a
warning. I knew many people would find them unbelievable, but I also cau-
tioned that, quote: “Events in the days ahead will be impossible to understand
without knowing this secret.” And now, my friends, those events are already
taking place.
Topic #3—There was a time in America not long ago when the fear of God was
a meaningful phrase. To be a God-fearing man or woman was seen as a good
thing; such a person could be trusted and relied upon. But today in America, the
fear of God is generally thought of as an outmoded concept. If we think of our
Lord Jesus Christ at all, it’s as a baby in a manger, or as the Healer, or as the
Feeder of five thousand. We forget that He also drove the moneychangers out
of God’s house with whips. We have reduced God to a convenience in our
minds, even a servant. We think we can summon Him anytime we need help,
but forget about Him otherwise.
129
Those are the attitudes in America today which arouse contempt and even anger
in the new Kremlin. In AUDIO LETTER No. 38 I told my listeners about the
struggle of six decades that led to the overthrow of the atheistic Bolsheviks in
Russia. Russia’s new rulers are Christians, and they endured incredible sacri-
fices. Now they are continuing their holy war against Bolshevism here in
America by means of robotoids. We in America have not lifted a finger to save
the soul of our own land from the hell of Bolshevism, so now the Russians are
doing it. The Russians waited until the last possible moment to see if we
American Christians would try to save our own country, but we are as blind to-
day as Russia was six decades ago. So now, my friends, we have forfeited the
chance to save America from Bolshevism ourselves. Now the Russians are do-
ing it in their own way. The only alternative was to permit the outbreak of
nuclear war. Rather than permit that, they are seizing control of the United
States.
Last month in Vienna, Leonid Brezhnev No. 2 startled the world by saying,
quote: “God will not forgive us if we fail.” Those, my friends, are words that
signify the fear of God; and now that the Russians have begun taking over
America, they consider it their duty to teach us the fear of God as well.
In his July 15 speech, Carter robotoid No. 7 said, quote: “In a nation that was
proud of hard work, strong families, close-knit communities, and our faith in
God, many of us now tend to worship self-indulgence and consumption. Human
identity is no longer defined by what one does, but by what one owns; but we
have discovered that owning things and consuming things does not satisfy our
longing for meaning. We have learned that piling up material goods cannot fill
the emptiness of lives which have no confidence and purpose.” Those words,
my friends, came straight from the Kremlin. That’s why the official daily
newspaper Pravda quoted the Carter speech without comment.
The people who are becoming our new rulers are beginning to tell us what lies
ahead for us. The things which cause us to take our Lord Jesus Christ for
granted will be allowed to fall away from us. Already the props are being pulled
out from under the artificial United States economy. Soon there will be eco-
nomic collapse, hardship, regimentation; and the only way up will be through
hard work, patience, and spiritual strength. In the hard times that lie ahead, my
friends, there will be many who will say the Russians have no right to let us
plunge into such troubles, but the fact is that we have forfeited the right to
choose our own future. If the Russians had not intervened, thermonuclear war
would now be virtually upon us, so now the Russians are going to do it their
way because our way was leading to total disaster.
130
Audio Letter 48
What is beginning to happen now is what I told my listeners a year ago in

AUDIO LETTER Nos. 35 and 36. We are witnessing the end of a way of life,
our own way of life. In AUDIO LETTER No. 36 I said, quote: “The selfish and
self-destructive license of today will be stamped out, but it will give way to real
human freedom rooted in eternal spiritual values.” That’s what Carter robotoid
No. 7 was talking about on July 15, my friends, and that is what the Kremlin
intends for us as they lay plans to teach us anew the fear of God.
131
Audio Letter 49
August 27, 1979
As I say these words, the slow, lazy days of summer 1979 are drawing to a
close. Most of us are sorry to see them go. For many people summer is a time to
ignore the outside world as much as possible. It’s time to relax, to bask in the
sun, to pretend that today will blend into tomorrow without change or trouble.
Television news programs in these later days of August have been filled with
items that reinforce this mood. Even the alleged President has seemingly found
time to lay aside the tedium of doing his job, and for a week or more we were
assured by television reports that the Carter robotoid family were enjoying a
tranquil steamboat ride down the Mississippi River. To all appearances, this
robotoid President has had nothing to do except jog around the boat deck, shake
hands with well-wishers, and give the same Energy speech over and over. If he
can take life that easy, we think, why shouldn’t we relax too? But, my friends,
at this very moment the world is in ferment as never before.
If you depend on television news and newspaper headlines as most people do,
the world may seem to be just rolling along just like Old Man River; but if you
want to have some hint of what is really taking place today, you should listen to
the short-wave radio. Get into the habit of listening to the BBC World Service,
to Radio Moscow World Service, to Radio Australia, to Radio South Africa,
even Radio Canada right next door to us. It often contains important reports
which you will never hear through our domestic major media. You might even
tune in the Voice of America once in a while—there, too, you may hear things
you will never hear in our domestic news media, and without commercials. But,
my friends, you should listen to these with a certain amount of charity for they
all have their own biases. There is not enough time in this entire tape even to
list all the important areas of ferment in our world; but for a moment let me just
skim the surface for you, then ask yourself whether the slick major media im-
age of our country and the world is real or artificial.
Not long ago the Boat People from Vietnam were filling our headlines. Viet-
nam was expelling large numbers of its people—most all of them were Chinese,
not Vietnamese. Vietnam has become a client state of Russia, and is preparing
for possible all-out war with China. Of all countries, Vietnam knows the dan-
133
gers of internal strife at this time, and so all those who refuse to cooperate with
the present regime are being rounded up and expelled in one way or another.
Vietnam is in a hurry because already tensions are building again along the
border with China.
The Boat People now constitute a refugee problem of staggering proportions.

Hundreds of thousands of people are crammed into refugee camps. Even so, the
recent actions of Vietnam should be placed in proper perspective. In 35 years of
continuous war in Indochina, the mass expulsion of political undesirables is a
new phenomenon. In the past, the actions of the former Pol Pot regime in Cam-
bodia, now known as Kampuchea, would have been more typical. When the
Chinese-backed Pol Pot regime took control of Cambodia several years ago, a
reign of terror began. It was alleged that more than a million Cambodians were
murdered by their own government. Most of them were members of the middle
class, regardless of their ethnic background. In that way the Pol Pot regime
broke the back of any possible resistance. If the present regime in Vietnam were
carrying on according to these traditional methods, there would be no Boat
People—instead, there would be only mass graves throughout Vietnam. There
would be no television pictures of pathetic refugees crammed into boats, and
there would be no controversy over Vietnam’s actions; because, at most, all we
would hear would be a few passing rumors—then, all would be quiet again.
The shift in Vietnam’s behavior, my friends, is the result of Russian pressure.

Since the end of the Vietnam war, all remaining Chinese influence in Vietnam
has been rooted out. Vietnam is now purely a Russian client state; and like Rus-
sia herself, Vietnam is getting rid of internal enemies by expelling them. As for
the bloody Pol Pot regime in Cambodia, that was recently overthrown by the
Vietnamese invasion.
The ferment in Indo-China is visible elsewhere too. Recently the United States
has started speeding up arms shipments to Thailand, but the United States Gov-
ernment is now coming under Russia’s control, so for all intents and purposes,
Thailand’s fate is already sealed. Soon it, too, will enter the Russian orbit.
Russia’s continuing encirclement of China is moving right along. Early in 1978,

my friends, I alerted you to watch for America’s doors to start opening wide to
Red China. Within a few months the news was filled with comments that we
had decided to play the so-called “China card.” It was all a panicky attempt by
America’s real rulers to buy time against Russia. During the final months of
1977, Russia had wrestled the military control of space away from the United
States. This had altered completely the East-West balance of power; but due to
the death of the real Leonid Brezhnev on January 7, 1978, our Rulers thought
134
Audio Letter 49
they had a chance. They expected the Kremlin to be divided by infighting to

decide Brezhnev’s successor. They thought they could keep the Kremlin off
balance for two to three years. Using that time, they would rush ahead with se-
cret weapons programs on a crash basis. And so America tried to play the
“China card.” Before the year of 1978 was out, the Carter Administration an-
nounced that the United States was establishing diplomatic relations with
China, but it was an act of pure desperation. The late four Rockefeller brothers
had badly underestimated the tightly knit band of Christians who now rule Rus-
sia. Since March 1978, Marshal Dmitry Ustinov has been the top man in the
Kremlin. At the proper time he will step down in favor of a younger man, but
for now the Kremlin power structure is stable and effective.
Current events in Asia demonstrate an important fact. America’s attempt to

play the so-called “China card” was a failure. It’s no longer fashionable even to
speak in those terms. China’s invasion of Vietnam early this year of 1979
showed up the United States as a paper tiger in Asia. By contrast, Russia’s pro-
file there is becoming taller and taller. As I revealed long ago, China was
actually playing the “America card” to get the best deal possible with Russia.
Next month, formal talks will begin in Moscow between China and Russia to-
ward improving relations between the two.
Six years ago in my book I warned about the forces leading to a vast new Asian
Axis. Today this axis built around Russia, China, and Japan is coming together,
but Russia is making sure there’s no doubt in anyone’s mind about who will be
its leader. Even on the eve of major talks between Russia and China, Russia
does not hesitate to point fingers at China. For example, look at Afghanistan on
Russia’s southern border which is now a Russian client state. Civil war has
been underway there for nine months. Early this month a four-hour pitched bat-
tle took place right in the capital city of Kabul. Afghan Radio has charged that
trained guerrillas, anti-revolutionaries, have entered Afghanistan from
neighboring Iran and Pakistan; and Russia charges that some of these intruders
were trained in China.
In ways like this, my friends, Russia is putting pressure not only on China but
also on Pakistan and Iran. This is part of Russia’s preoccupation with bordering
states, which I have explained in the past. Afghanistan and Iran both border on
Russia, and Russia wants secure borders. Pakistan is a land bridge from Af-
ghanistan to the Arabian Sea. Russia has historically wanted a land corridor in
this area for access to the Indian Ocean. In other ways too, Pakistan is being
given good reason to think over her attitude toward Russia.
135
Lately Pakistan’s relations with the United States have taken a turn for the
worse. Earlier this month, on August 11, the New York Times made public
some stunning policy planning within the State Department. Pakistan is very
close to creating its own atomic bomb, but the Times revealed that the United
States intends to stop Pakistan one way or another. One of the options under
specific consideration has brought a stinging protest by Pakistan—and no won-
der. That option is: covert operations. That, my friends, is exactly the option
used by the United States in Guyana last November. In the case of Pakistan,
those operations would involve sabotage of her atomic installations. Here at
home, of course, sabotage is supposed to be inconceivable.
All across the world, the ferment increasingly has the flavor of dramatic
change. For example, less than a decade ago the United States supported Paki-
stan in the war with India; and for five years now India has had the atomic
bomb—but now, the United States reportedly wants to stop Pakistan from get-
ting it. But things have changed, my friends. The Rockefellers a decade ago
were at the peak of their power. India was slated for conquest in a plan which
later ousted Indira Gandhi from power. But as I have revealed in recent tapes,
the four Rockefeller brothers are no more. Their old allies who overthrew them,
the atheistic Bolsheviks, have also been stopped in their tracks. It is now Russia
who controls most all of the top echelons of the United States Government; and
as Pakistan ponders a changed America, Indira Gandhi is staging a comeback in
India.
In the past year the biggest change of all has gone unannounced in our daily
news. The end of a dynasty has taken place, the Rockefeller dynasty. It began a
year ago last month with the eldest of the four brothers, John D. III. In AUDIO
LETTER No. 36 I revealed how his death would cause Rockefeller efforts in
Africa and Asia to start unraveling, and today the headless Rockefeller cartel is
losing fast in southern Africa. The initiative is shifting back to Britain, which
has established a special secret relationship with Russia. As for Asia, I have al-
ready pointed out the collapse of America’s so-called “China card” strategy,
notwithstanding the present visit to China of the robotoid Mondale.
Turning to the Persian Gulf, we keep hearing about United States plans for a
large contingency force. This force, known as the “Quick Reaction Corps,”
would rush to the Gulf to protect our oil lifeline in time of crisis; but throughout
the Gulf region itself, this plan has raised cries of protest. It’s an offshoot of the
plan I made public a year ago to set up an American first strike against Russia;
but even without knowing that, it’s obvious to everyone that the force would
mean trouble. Kuwait has already served notice in public that the United States
136
Audio Letter 49
must not deploy these forces in the Gulf. If we do, Kuwait will destroy her own
oil wells.
At this time last year the Shah of Iran was still in power, but the upheaval in
Iran which was tied to the secret American war plan ended his rule earlier this
year. The revolution in Iran was also designed to break the access by British
Petroleum to Iranian oil. That has left practically the whole pie to the Rockefel-
ler big oil cartel; but increasingly the Khomeini regime has turned out to be an
awkward puppet for big oil. Now Iran is becoming destabilized by internal
strife among Kurds, Arabs, and leftist Iranians; and lately there have been huge
demonstrations in Iran favoring the Palestine Liberation Organization. The Ira-
nian demonstrations have also been against Israel and the United States, as if
the two were one. Meanwhile Israeli artillery continues to pound southern
Lebanon almost daily, and yet there’s been an obvious shift in America’s Mid-
dle East policy. Several weeks ago Israeli Foreign Minister Dayan said publicly
that a shift had taken place recently. There were official denials but now the
Andrew Young affair has created a bombshell for United States policy in the
Middle East, and here at home smoldering tensions between Blacks and Jews
have been fanned into open flames.
And so it goes, my friends. Wherever you look you will see the ferment of
change. One way to look at this is to tell yourself that all these things are unre-
lated just as they are presented in the news. Viewed in that way, world events
are impossible to understand or even remember. That’s the attitude that says:
There’s no cause for human events, they just happen. But, my friends, there is a
cause for everything we see. The sun does not rise every day by accident—
there’s a reason for it; and the world is not stirring with the winds of change by
accident—there’s a reason for it. This month, as always, I want to focus your
attention on the reasons behind current events. Knowing these, you can better
understand the individual events in the news for yourself. Maybe you can’t al-
ways affect these events directly, but it’s always better to be aware than to be
taken by surprise; and for those who are not aware, there will be many surprises
in these days of radical changes.
Topic #1—RUSSIA’S TRANSFORMATION OF AMERICA’S MIDDLE

EAST POLICY
Topic #2—THE DOMESTIC FALLOUT OF THE ANDREW YOUNG

AFFAIR
137
Topic #3—RUSSIA’S TWO-FRONT WAR AGAINST ROTHSCHILD

WORLD POWER.
Topic #1—One summer night in 1974 I was in the studios of a New York City
radio station. The station was WMCA, the program was the famous LONG
JOHN NEBEL SHOW. For quite some time the late Long John Nebel had been
having me on his program as a guest once a month for about six hours. But that
night I was asked a question about the Middle East. In my answer I said among
other things that the troubles there began with the Palestinians and the Israelis,
and they will end with the Palestinians and Israelis. Now many Zionist listeners
were shocked to hear these words. For them, the Palestinians did not exist; and
since that night I have never again been allowed to appear on WMCA or any
other New York radio station. The then owner of WMCA is now the head of
the VOICE OF AMERICA. Can you imagine?
It has now been five years since I said those forbidden words about the Pales-
tinians. Today, as then, the Zionists here and in Israel bristle with hostility at
the very word “Palestinian”; and for most of those five years, American policy
toward the Palestinians has echoed that of Zionists and of Israel.
Four years ago, in 1975, Israel was secretly guaranteed that this policy would
continue by the late Secretary of State Henry Kissinger. This policy was never
passed on by Congress. As recently as last March 26, 1979, American policy
was still to exclude the Palestinians. On that day the so-called “Egyptian-Israeli
Peace Treaty” was signed in Washington. It did not amend this 1975 policy in
any way, and so it continued to lock out the Palestinians.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 44 I explained how this secret policy was intended to
lead very quickly not to peace but to war in the Middle East. That in turn was to
lead to an American nuclear first strike against Russia. The secret American
plan, which I made public one year ago this month in AUDIO LETTER No. 37,
was moving fast, but since that time dramatic changes have been taking place in
America’s foreign policy. This includes our foreign policy in general and our
Middle East policy in particular. The changes began last April 1979 behind the
scenes. At that time the changes were not yet visible to the public, but that
month I reported to my listeners that a secret war of “doubles” had broken out
in Washington. The Intelligence Agencies of Russia, Britain, and Israel were
struggling for control of the United States Government. Our own CIA was in
disarray. The CIA had always been David Rockefeller’s private detective
agency, but by then David Rockefeller was dead, replaced by a “double.”
Rockefeller power in America had been shattered. In AUDIO LETTER No. 45
I reported that Russia was gaining the upper hand in the war of “doubles.” The
138
Audio Letter 49
following month I was able to reveal why they were winning. I also reported
that two supersecret diplomatic shuttles to the Middle East had taken place. The
shuttles involved what appeared to be top American officials, but it was actu-
ally a Russian operation to stop the Middle East war plan. And that was only
the first step in Russia’s plan to revolutionize United States policy in the Mid-
dle East.
Many of my listeners seem to have ignored the detailed report I gave on these
shuttles in AUDIO LETTER No. 46. For one thing, there was no hint about
these developments in the major media news at that time; and if anything, the
Middle East appeared to be on the back burner. But I think the significance of
the shuttles may have been overlooked by many people for another reason.
AUDIO LETTER No. 46 was the tape in which I first revealed Russia’s secret
weapon—that is, “Organic Robotoids.” These artificial, living, robot-like crea-
tures are shocking and mind-boggling. Their mere existence is a hard fact to
absorb; so when I described their use in the shuttles later in the tape, it may
have sounded minor by comparison. My friends, the events of recent days re-
garding the Middle East are the direct result of those shuttles! They initiated a
radical shift in America’s Middle East policy because that policy is now being
established by the Kremlin. I would urge you to go back and listen again to
what you heard in AUDIO LETTER No. 46, especially regarding the Middle
East shuttles, then the events of recent days should be much easier for you to
understand.
On June 18, 1979, the SALT II signing took place in Vienna, Austria. Amer-
ica’s turnabout in favor of SALT II is another aspect of Russia’s take-over here.
I have discussed that in recent tapes; but on the same day as the SALT II sign-
ing, another important meeting took place in Vienna. The robotoid replacement
for Secretary of State Cyrus Vance met with Austria’s Chancellor, Bruno
Kreisky. Kreisky is a Jew; but like many Jews, he has no sympathy with the
political force known as Zionism. In the recent past, he has made scalding at-
tacks on the ruling circles in Israel. In public statements about this, Kreisky has
used words such as “paranoid,” “a police state,” to describe the Israeli govern-
ment. The tough band of Christians who now rule Russia agree completely.
Like Kreisky, the Russians have often made public statements blasting Zion-
ism. In Topic #3 I’ll say more about the controversy over Zionism because this
controversy is now moving onto center stage in a struggle over the future of all
mankind.
In the Kreisky meeting with the Vance robotoid, the diplomatic status of the
Palestinians was discussed. Ten days earlier, United States Ambassador to Aus-
tria, Milton Wolf, had already had a meeting with the representative of the
139
PLO. Kreisky said he intended to invite Arafat, the PLO leader, for a formal
visit to Vienna. In that way, Kreisky would be initiating a quasi-official recog-
nition of the PLO as a political force. On July 8 Arafat arrived in Vienna,
creating headlines in Europe. Meanwhile, there had already been three meetings
in Austria between United States Ambassador Wolf and a PLO representative.
On July 31 a Jimmy Carter robotoid began setting the stage for the Andrew
Young affair. In an interview, robotoid Carter compared the Palestinian prob-
lem to the Civil Rights movement in the United States. For days Israeli leaders
were boiling, and their sympathizers in this country denounced the Carter re-
marks. On August 5, Israeli Foreign Minister Dayan complained publicly that
in the past two months or so, quote: “There has been a shift in United States
policy.” That shift, my friends, began with the secret robotoid shuttles, which I
revealed three months ago. On August 13, special Middle East Envoy, Robert
Strauss, or rather a Strauss robotoid, spoke before the American Bar Associa-
tion in Dallas. He said the United States is committed to the security of Israel
but also, quote: “the legitimate rights of the Palestinian people.” The same day,
the Andrew Young affair began. NEWSWEEK magazine broke the story that
Young, as Ambassador to the United Nations, had met with the UN observer of
the PLO, Zehdi Terzi. The next day the Israeli government loudly protested
Young’s action. The day after that, August 15, he resigned.
Last month I alerted you to watch for more changing faces in positions of
power here in the United States. The departure of Andrew Young is part of this
“changing of the guard,” but it’s also much more. For one thing, the Young af-
fair has highlighted the fact that America’s Middle East policy is changing, and
it did so in a way that cast the Palestinians in a far more favorable light than in
the past. Equally important to Russia, Israel has been lured into giving itself a
black eye. In the past, Israel could always claim that the PLO was making peace
impossible, but now the PLO is concentrating on a diplomatic drive for a peace-
ful accommodation with Israel. Israel’s response has been to try to sabotage this
process. World-wide the reaction has been to start questioning whether Israel
really wants peace. For example, on August 17, the BBC carried an interview
with Antony McDermott of the Financial Times of London. He was asked his
opinion of the Israeli objective in bringing about the Young resignation. He re-
plied in part, quote: “I would speculate that if the PLO were through some
miracle to come out and say ‘We accept the existence of Israel’, it would be ex-
tremely embarrassing to Mr. Begin because he’s constantly comparing them to
the Nazis.” Russia had foreseen that Israel would try to stop the United States
policy shift. The Andrew Young affair has caused Israel to injure herself by
these efforts.
140
Audio Letter 49
World opinion toward Israel is changing; but for Israel, the worst setback of all
may be right here in the United States because the domestic fallout, my friends,
of the Andrew Young affair is not at all what Israel had in mind.
Topic #2—When Israel was proclaimed a separate nation in 1947 by the United
Nations, the United States was the first great power to give it diplomatic recog-
nition. Ever since that time, there has been a special relationship between the
governments of the two countries. An essential ingredient in maintaining this
relationship has been domestic support within the United States. For more than
three decades American public opinion has been generally pro-Israel, but the
Andrew Young affair is causing Israel to be seen in a different light by many
Americans. For one thing, questions are now being raised about Israeli Intelli-
gence activity in the United States. In the past this has never been a public
issue, but that is changing because of the way in which the Young affair broke
wide open.
On August 16, the day after he resigned, Young held a news conference at the
United Nations. In the words of the BBC that evening, Young blamed Israel for
the events which led to his resignation. That same day, the Atlanta Constitution
reported that Israeli Intelligence agents had spied on Young’s meeting with
PLO representative Terzi. The newspaper said that this enabled Israel to chal-
lenge Young’s original statement that the meeting had been inadvertent. Israel’s
United Nations Ambassador Blum immediately denied the report; but when
Young was asked about it, he said that he assumed he was being bugged but he
did not care. Since then reports have continued to multiply about Israeli spying
in the Young episode.
Israeli denials have just led to increasingly detailed reports about the spying,
and in the process broader questions are being asked about Israeli spying here
in the United States. All this is very worrisome to the government of Israel be-
cause they have, my friends, left a trail. The fact is that the Mossad, Israel’s
Intelligence Agency, is very active in the United States, but this is in violation
of a secret agreement under which the Mossad is forbidden from this activity.
In return, our own CIA is forbidden from the clandestine activities in Israel.
Strangely enough, I can report that the CIA has adhered to the agreement, but
both did work together in the Jonestown, Guyana tragedy, as I revealed in
AUDIO LETTER 40. Israel is fearful of having Mossad activities here exposed
as a cause celebre. Technically, the hundreds of Mossad agents in the United
States could be rounded up and expelled. If this was done with great fanfare,
the impact on Israel’s image here in America could be devastating. World opin-
ion would also veer away from Israel, so the Zionists are doing everything in
their power not to have an investigation. What they want most is for the contro-
141
versy to just go away. At the same time, they’re trying to put the best possible
face on Israeli Intelligence. For example, on August 21 an article appeared in
the Washington Star entitled: “Discreet Mossad called World’s Best.” The arti-
cle is built mainly around the statements not by Israelis but by former American
Intelligence officials. The impression conveyed is that the mighty Mossad eas-
ily could spy on anyone it wants to, but we are also to believe they just
wouldn’t do such a thing as spy on the Young-Terzi meeting. So far though the
questions about Israeli spying in the Young affair are refusing to go away. On
August 23 the Washington Star carried a story in which an unnamed United
States source is quoted as saying: “The Israelis have staked out the Arabs
around the United Nations with bugs, taps, and surveillances. Young walked
right into it.” The article says considerably more about the Young episode, then
it expands into the subject of Israeli spying here in general. For example, quote:
“According to one source, New York City is the center of Israeli spying in the
United States and has been for years.” Another quote: “On one occasion United
States officials learned that an Israeli wire tap operation was using a local syna-
gogue as a cover.” And a final quote: “Each year in New York, moreover, there
are numerous cases in which Israeli agents have been identified posing as FBI
agents, complete with seemingly authentic credentials.”
By any standards, my friends, words like these in a major American newspaper

signal a change from the past. Controversy over Intelligence activities could
become a major fallout against Israel from the Young affair, but there is another
domestic fallout which is even more important and that is the rupturing of po-
litical and other ties between the Blacks and the Jews. These tensions are very
real, my friends, and have been building since the mid-sixties; but they have
only now burst into the open for all to see. The catalyst, of course, was the
Young affair. Up until now, practically the only Americans who were aware of
these tensions were the Blacks and Jews themselves, but the strongest feelings
in this rift are felt by the Blacks. They are the ones who feel they have been
wronged, so I think the easiest way to describe the situation is in the words of
Blacks themselves.
On August 16 Young himself blamed Israel for making his resignation neces-
sary. The same day it was disclosed that United States Ambassador to Austria,
Milton Wolf, had met three times with PLO representatives; but Wolf, who is
Jewish, was not being reprimanded, much less forced to resign! For Blacks, that
news added insult to injury. It got still worse the next day, August 17. It was
announced that the United States had made a surprise proposal regarding the
Security Council resolution on Palestinian Rights. The United States had asked
Israel to support an American-sponsored resolution to that effect, but without
142
Audio Letter 49
success. With that news, Andy Young looked like nothing more than the fall
guy for a new American policy. Blacks wondered:
“Why Andy? Why a Black?” The same day, Young made comments on the
NBC “Today Show” which were repeated on the BBC World Service. Young
was asked about latent anti-Semitism in the Black community, and said, quote:
“I think there may be a resentment of a certain kind of arrogance that was

played up, especially in the New York press; and there was a kind of arrogance
of Jewish power, headlines saying: ‘Jews demand Young’s ouster.’ I think
that’s caused the reaction by the Black community, which is a natural reaction,
but in no way does that constitute anti-Semitism.”
The following day, August 18, an article in the New York Daily News illus-
trated the growing reaction of Black America. The article was by Black
columnist Earl Caldwell. It was titled:
“Finally Played the Game, and Lost.” Referring to the day after Young’s resig-
nation, Caldwell wrote, quote:
“On Thursday, the afternoon was filled with the fallout. The clamor for his res-
ignation had come primarily from the Jewish community. That is fact. And now
the backlash that Andrew Young had warned the Israeli Ambassador about was
rising. Downstairs on the steps of the Mission the Rev. Jesse Jackson was say-
ing that Andrew Young was the fall guy, and that it was not the Klan that
brought the Bakke case, that it was not the Klan that deals with Southern Af-
rica, and that it was not the Klan that brought the pressure to fire Andrew
Young; it was our former allies. And the backlash was building.” (End of quote
from the Earl Caldwell column.)
The rift between Blacks and Jews is continuing to grow, my friends. Already a
group of Black ministers of the Southern Christian Leadership Conference has
held a meeting with Palestinians, and they have announced their support for
Palestinian rights. And during the past several days, a series of very powerful
commentaries about the situation were carried over the American Forces Radio
and TV Service. The commentator was James Rowe of the Mutual Black Net-
work. Unlike most other programs on the American Forces Radio, the Rowe
commentaries are followed by a disclaimer originating with the Mutual Black
Network; but they are being beamed straight to our troops here and overseas.
And, of course, our Armed Forces of today have a very high proportion of
Blacks, here and abroad.
143
The Rowe commentaries on the Young affair are instructive for two reasons.
For one thing, they illustrate the growing backlash by many Blacks against Is-
rael, but also Rowe reminds his listeners of some historical background facts
which must be taken into account. Most Americans, Black or otherwise, do not
remember this background, or at least do not think about it. In his commentary
four days ago, August 23, Rowe began, quote:
“It’s time the United States stopped placating the Israelis and got down to the
serious business of negotiating Peace in the Middle East. Every time something
offends Israel, the Jewish American population rises up. They expect Black
Americans to support them, despite the refusal of Jewish groups to support
some of our most recent concerns. The Jewish groups left us when it came to
reverse discrimination. Despite that, what is more important is RIGHT and
WRONG. It is wrong that we support an ethnic group when they are mistaken,
and Israel is mistaken in the treatment of the Palestinians. We cannot continue
to pay for Hitler’s mistakes. Israel cannot be permitted to perpetrate upon an-
other group of people what the Germans tried to do to them in World War II. If
Israel has a right to exist, then so does the State of Palestine. The goal now
should be: How do we achieve that?”
Further on, Rowe said:
“The United States Ambassador to Austria was not asked to resign although he
had several meetings with the PLO representatives. So why did Andrew Young
have to resign? Why did the first black United States Ambassador have to be-
come the fall guy in a plan to appease Jerusalem and the Jewish lobby here? It
is extremely complicated and much greater than concerns for oil from the re-
gion.”
The next day, August 24, James Rowe had more to say about the Young resig-
nation, and he included some history in very concise terms. Here’s an excerpt
from his commentary; quote:
“We cannot let ourselves go on the defensive every time the Jewish American
lobby criticizes Blacks as anti-Semitic because we don’t agree with them. Any-
body that doesn’t agree with Israel’s hard line stand is considered anti-Semitic
in Jerusalem.
If anyone is to be charged with responsibility for the current crisis in the Middle
East, it should be Great Britain. And if anyone is to be charged with the pro-
tracted conflict in that region of the world, it is to be Israel. Britain had control
over the land that made up Jordan and Palestine under a League of Nations’
144
Audio Letter 49
mandate. The British wanted to end their colonialism there, and permitted Zion-
ists to move in uncontrolled, and left the Palestinians to the Jordanians. The
Palestinians were left without a home because London did not follow through
on the United Nations’ recommendation of creating two separate states—one
for the Israelis and one for the Palestinians. It appears Israel wants the Pales-
tinians completely removed from the scene. Now comes the Andrew Young
card. How does the United States support the human rights of the Palestinians
without offending our long-time and hard-line friends in the Zionist movement?
The United States is faced with supporting the human rights of the Palestini-
ans—but to the offense of Jews. Perhaps Andy Young was the test of how
offended Israel would be if America decided to give in to demands from the
Palestine Liberation Organization.” (End of quotation from the Rowe commen-
tary of August 24.)
My friends, there was nothing accidental about the Young affair. To those who
do not know about Russia’s secret take-over here in Washington, it all looks
like a big mistake; but in reality Israel’s mighty Mossad has just been out-foxed
by Russia’s KGB. The Russians, through the robotoids in the White House,
control most all the top positions in the United States Government. They
brought about the Young-Terzi meeting of July 26, and in doing so they knew it
would be monitored by Israeli Intelligence. The Russians succeeded in planning
and guiding events in a way beneficial to Russia.
In AUDIO LETTER 46, I mentioned that Prime Minister Begin of Israel had
been replaced with a robotoid, as had Sadat of Egypt. Wholesale robotizing is
not taking place in those countries. By using their Begin robotoid, Russia was
able to make sure that Israel’s policy would be to make an issue of Young’s
PLO contact. This action has caused the backlash reactions against Israel which
I have already discussed. It has also enhanced the image of the Palestinians in-
ternationally. In addition, the Young flap provides an excuse for the United
States to back into a more favorable treatment of the Palestinian cause. But, my
friends, there will be other manipulated events to distract you from the Andrew
Young affair, all created by friends of Israel still in our United States State De-
partment.
The Russian target in the Andrew Young affair appears at first glance to be all
the Jews in both Israel and the United States, but that is not the case. The true
target in these Kremlin maneuvers is the political force called ZIONISM. Many
Jews are not Zionists, and there are also Zionists who are not Jews; but Zionism
masquerades as a movement that speaks for all Jews. For reasons I will discuss
in Topic #3, the Christ-ones who rule Russia today intend to utterly break Zion-
ism as a force in the world. A major part of this is to be the dismantling of
145
Zionist power here in America. To that end, the Andrew Young affair was en-
gineered to uncork the political pressures between Jews and Blacks. On the
surface, this appears to mean all Jews; but the commentaries I quoted by James
Rowe suggest that already the focus is narrowing. Black leaders are looking
around carefully; and as they look at the Zionists, they are doing so with frowns
and narrowed eyes.
Topic #3—It has now been nearly two years since I first made public the over-
throw of the Bolsheviks in Russia; and as my older listeners know, this is the
outcome of six decades of struggle by a tightly knit band of native Russian
Christians. Now they are out to destroy Bolshevism world-wide. The Kremlin’s
campaign to wipe out Bolshevism is still a secret officially; but as important as
Bolshevism is, the Kremlin rulers regard it as just one major tentacle of a giant
serpent; and if they keep their anti-Bolshevism secret, they make no bones
about their opposition to what they see as another tentacle. That tentacle is
ZIONISM.
The origins of modern-day Zionism trace back to the late 19th Century, but the
first major milestone toward the creation of a Jewish state happened in 1917.
Great Britain was looking for all the friends she could find in what was then
called “The Great War.” That year the United States was drawn into that war
with the deliberate help of President Woodrow Wilson. But that same year,
Russia was removed from the war against Germany by the Bolshevik Revolu-
tion. So the Allies were still under great pressure; and in order to enlist the
growing power of the Zionist movement on the side of Britain, the famous Bal-
four Declaration was announced. Lord Balfour announced that Britain would
look with favor on the creation of a national home for the Jewish people in Pal-
estine. Most Americans were too preoccupied with news of the war to think
long about the Balfour Declaration in Britain; but soon after the war ended, a
major protest was published against the plans of the Zionists. On March 5,
1919, readers of the New York Times saw a long PETITION on page 7 with the
headline: “PROTEST TO PRESIDENT WILSON AGAINST ZIONIST
STATE.” Nowadays if we saw a headline like that, most of us would probably
pay little attention. We would assume that it was the work of the Arabs and turn
the page; but that 1919 protest was presented and signed exclusively by Jews.
And these were not some small splinter group of malcontents, they were a gal-
axy of Jewish stars in American politics, education, law, business, medicine,
journalism, banking, as well as prominent rabbis; people like Congressman
Julius Kahn of California who headed the list; Henry Morganthau, Sr., ex-
Ambassador to Turkey; Simon Wolf, former consul to Egypt; Max Senior, for-
mer president of the National Conference of Jewish Charities; Professor Morris
Jastrow of the University of Pennsylvania; Adolph Ochs, publisher of the New
146
Audio Letter 49
York Times; Lessing Rosenthal, Chicago attorney; Dr. Julius Rosenstein, sur-
geon at Mount Zion Hospital in San Francisco; L. H. Kampner, mayor of
Galveston, Texas; I. W. Hellman, president of the Union Trust Company in San
Francisco; and many others.
The PETITION begins, quote:
“As a future form of government for Palestine will undoubtedly be considered

by the approaching Peace Conference, we, the undersigned citizens of the
United States, unite in this statement setting forth our objections to the organi-
zation of a Jewish State in Palestine as proposed by the Zionist societies in this
country and Europe.”
The petitioners felt that they were, quote: “voicing the opinion of the majority
of American Jews.” To back that up, they pointed out, quote:
“The American Zionists represent, according to the most recent statistics avail-
able, only a small proportion of the Jews living in this country, about 150,000
out of 3-1/2 million.”
As their source, they cited the 1918 edition of the “American Jewish Yearbook”
in Philadelphia.
The PETITION goes on to sound not only a protest but a series of warnings.
The signers did sympathize with the concept of, quote:
“A refuge in Palestine or elsewhere.” They felt that this would be a good thing
purely as a haven for Jews living under oppression; but they were bitterly op-
posed to the Zionist demands for, quote: “Reorganization of the Jews as a
national unit to whom now or in the future territorial sovereignty in Palestine
shall be committed.”
The Jews who published that PETITION against a Zionist State 60 years ago
turned out to be prophets. Like most prophets, their warnings went unheeded;
but for more than three decades events in the Middle East have been acting out
their warnings in flesh, blood, and tragedy.
I can do no more than highlight a few points from the anti-Zionist PETITION,
which is long and detailed, but history demands that we be aware of the efforts
of the anti-Zionist Jews to turn aside tragedy, deep tragedy. They pointed out
that the Zionists were demanding, quote:
147
“A home not merely for Jews living in countries in which they are oppressed,
but for Jews universally. No Jew, wherever he may live, can consider himself
free from the implications of such a grant.”
From a practical standpoint, my friends, they pointed out that tiny Palestine
could not hold all the Jews then living in the world. The 6 to 10 million in Rus-
sia and Romania alone would have produced hopeless overcrowding; but
beyond that, they objected to what they termed “political segregation.” They
felt it was both undemocratic and dangerous to Jews themselves the world over.
They worried, quote:
“All Jews repudiate every suspicion of a double allegiance; but to our minds, it
is necessarily implied in, and cannot by any logic be eliminated from, the estab-
lishment of a sovereign state for the Jews in Palestine.”
They added that, quote:
“As a rule, those who favor such a restoration advocate it not for themselves but
for others. Those who act thus and yet insist on their patriotic attachment to the
countries of which they are citizens are self-deceived in their profession of Zi-
onism.”
They were worried that Jews themselves would be torn internally by pressures
for double allegiance, and they were concerned that this would play into the
hands of those who considered Jews, quote:
“Aliens in every land, incapable of true patriotism, and prompted only by sinis-
ter and self-seeking motives.”
Quoting Sir George Adam Smith, an authority of that day on Palestine, they
also foresaw the bloodshed to come, quote:
“It is not true that Palestine is the national home of the Jewish people and of no
other people. It is not correct to call its non-Jewish inhabitants Arabs, or to say
that they have left no image of their spirit and made no history except in the
great mosque; nor can we evade the fact that Christian communities have been
as long in the possession of their portion of this land as ever the Jews were.”
The PETITION also says, quote:
“The claims to various sections of this undefined territory would unquestiona-

bly evoke bitter controversies. To subject the Jews to the possible recurrence of
148
Audio Letter 49
such bitter and sanguinary conflict, which would be inevitable, would be a

crime.”
Finally, they concluded with the words:
“We do not wish to see Palestine, either now or at any time in the future, organ-
ized as a Jewish State.”
But, my friends, the Zionists were successful in thwarting this appeal by promi-
nent American Jews. Israel became a nation in 1947, and the predicted
bloodshed began immediately. Israeli terrorism by Menachem Begin and others
caused Palestinian blood to run red in the streets. Palestinians became refugees
in their own land, and the borders of Israel began expanding. Soon there was
nothing left of what had been called Palestine.
The Middle East war plan, which the Russians halted in May 1979, involved
the Zionists in alliance with the Bolsheviks. The Russians are determined to end
the threat of nuclear war; and after 30 years of Israeli history, they have con-
cluded the same thing about Zionism as about Bolshevism. They are convinced
that there will be no peace in the world for Jew, Moslem, or Christian so long
as Zionism exists. So they are now in a two-front war to destroy both Zionism
and Bolshevism.
Long ago Russia’s new rulers discovered that Zionism and Bolshevism had
common origins. These origins involved the ROTHSCHILDS, but others are
involved also, so they are now following the trail of Satanic power towards its
origins using their secret weapons—the robotoids. Right now they are striking
at the tentacles of world power, like ZIONISM and BOLSHEVISM; but when
the time is ripe, they are hoping to strike at the very head of world Satanic
power.
149
Audio Letter 50
September 30, 1979
Forty years ago this month World War II began. On September 1, 1939, the
German war machine of Adolf Hitler began the blitzkrieg against Poland. Soon
all Europe was aflame with war. The flames soon spread to engulf the United
States, Japan, and much of Asia. In the nearly six years that it lasted, World
War II took an estimated 35-million lives. About half of those killed were civil-
ians—men, women, and children; but whether they were in uniform or not, very
few of those who suffered and died had any real idea WHY.
The forces that led to World War II were set in motion in secrecy, then the war
itself intensified the secrecy on all sides—secrecy in diplomacy, secrecy in
planning military campaigns, secrecy in developing new weapons; and, my
friends, it was a secret weapon that finally ended the war in the Pacific.
On August 6, 1945, the first atomic bomb was dropped in war. It was dropped
by a nation which thought of itself as a Christian nation, the United States of
America; and the city which was chosen to be the first victim, had one of the
largest Christian communities in Japan—Hiroshima. One might have asked:
Why are the Christians of America killing the Christians of Hiroshima with the
world’s first nuclear attack? But of all the questions which have been asked
about Hiroshima during the past 34 years, that question has been asked the
least, if at all. Everyone knows this was war. Hiroshima was considered a major
military target; and so Christians or no Christians, Hiroshima was attacked.
Today I’m often asked: “If Russia’s new rulers of today really are Christians,
why are they willing to kill people? And why are they willing to do things
which may cause even Christians to be killed?” The answer today is the same
as it was in World War II—THIS IS WAR. But today, after four decades of in-
creasing secrecy, war itself is secret. Not only do we not know the reasons for
war, we do not even know certain kinds of warfare are taking place! The most
important military and political developments today are parts of a secret war in
which the United States is now the prime battleground. The battle is between
the new Christian rulers of Russia and their bitter enemies. These enemies are
151
the overthrown Bolsheviks and their close relatives, the Zionists. The Kremlin
of today is trying above all to prevent their enemies from igniting nuclear war.
Last spring, as I revealed in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 45 and 46, the Russians
began seizing control of the United States Government. Key officials from
President Jimmy Carter on down have been replaced by doubles, and these
doubles are not human beings in spite of their appearance and behavior. They
are artificial, robot-like living beings called “Organic Robotoids.” When I first
revealed these things, I braced myself. I knew that many of my listeners would
be unable to absorb them; but my reason for doing it was the one I stated then:
Without knowing about the robotoids, events would become impossible to un-
derstand. Since that time, robotoids in key positions of power have been
causing many surprises in the news these days. The strangest surprises of all
have been caused by the Jimmy Carter robotoids. In AUDIO LETTER No. 48
two months ago, I detailed the major instability problems the Russians are hav-
ing with their Carter robotoids. The holographic computer brains of the
robotoids include instabilities which were present in the real Carter brain in a
way that exaggerates those instabilities. As a result, every so often a Carter ro-
botoid does something so unpredictable that it is dangerous to the Russians. An
example was the famous so-called “killer-rabbit incident” of a few weeks ago.
A Carter robotoid told the press in all seriousness that he and his family had
been attacked by a swamp rabbit while fishing. Can you imagine?
The Russians want to rid themselves of the nerve-racking problem of the unsta-
ble Carter robotoids. Earlier this month, on September 15, an attempt was made
to do just that. The alleged President Carter was entered in a foot race, of all
things, in the Catoctin Mountains near Camp David. It was a strenuous six-mile
course which included much uphill running. Carter robotoid No. 14 was pro-
grammed to run at maximum speed and not to let up for any reason. The
Russian strategy was simple: Runners who over-exert themselves and who do
not stop and rest when danger signs appear can do themselves serious harm.
Sudden overheating, dehydration, and heart failure can take place abruptly in
extreme cases. Robotoids, as I have explained in past tapes, embody a crude
facsimile of human metabolism, their hearts are relatively weak, and they live
for only a few weeks or months, depending on the stress problems. They have
no self-preservation instinct, so Carter robotoid No. 14 was programmed to run
like the wind. It was expected that suddenly without warning he would suffer
complete heart failure, collapse, and die on the spot. If the robotoid died before
aid could reach him, everyone would just accept it as a tragic accident, and the
Russians would be rid of the problem of unstable Carter robotoids. But the day
of the race dawned cooler than it had been expected by the planners. Carter ro-
botoid No. 14 did collapse, but did not expire instantly. His face turned a
152
Audio Letter 50
deathly greenish-gray, and he was moaning and incoherent; and yet when the
Secret Service men picked him up, his legs kept running as programmed. Fi-
nally an ambulance arrived, but Carter robotoid No. 14 did not use it. Instead
the robotoid was bundled off in a car to Camp David, and there robotoid No. 14
finally died—too late, and out of public view.
The purpose of the race had been to eliminate the Carter robotoid problem in a
way that would leave no questions—that is, sudden death on the spot. But there
would have been a storm of questions if Carter’s alleged death had been an-
nounced after help arrived and took him away. So after the race, Carter robotoid
No. 15 showed up to reassure everyone. He looked nothing at all like the
deathly figure who had collapsed just a short while earlier in the race. He
looked like a new man, and in a sense he was. The contrast between the dying
robotoid No. 14 and the fresh robotoid No. 15 is something you can see for
yourself. Just get a copy of Sports Illustrated magazine for September 24, 1979.
On pages 16 and 17 you will see the pictures of robotoid No. 14—stricken,
stumbling, mouth agape. Then look at the fresh, smiling picture of robotoid No.
15 handing out trophies on page 19 only a short while later, and then ask your-
self: Is this the same man?
My friends, the robotoids are one example of what you need to know to under-
stand the secret war now going on; but there are other things you need to know
too, because the war between Russia and her Bolshevik and Zionist enemies has
many facets, and it is very ancient.
My three topics for today are:
Topic #1—RUNAWAY INFLATION AND THE COLLAPSING AMERICAN

ECONOMY
Topic #2—THE CUBAN CRISIS TO DESTROY SALT II
Topic #3—THE 1000-YEAR WAR BETWEEN RUSSIA AND THE

KHAZARS
Topic #1—To most Americans the most worrisome headlines these days are
probably those about our weakening economy. By comparison, most other ma-
jor news events may seem remote and less important to us. SALT II, troops in
Cuba, and arguments between Blacks and Jews may disturb us, but they hardly
seem to touch most of us personally. The economy is another matter. We all
have to keep food on the table, clothing on our backs, and a roof over our
heads, and it’s becoming harder by the day to do these things. Hardly a day
153
seems to pass without some new item of bad news about the economy. One day
the Federal Reserve System announces that it’s raising its own interest rates to
member banks to an all-time record level, another day leading banks raise their
interest rates to their best customers to levels which also set new records. With
each increase, young couples wanting to buy their own homes find it more and
more impossible to do so. For them the American dream of a home of their own
is fading into a fantasy. They are watching helpless as their fondest hopes ex-
plode in the tornado of rising consumer prices and runaway interest rates. But
somehow, my friends, it turns out to be only the average working man and
woman who are being priced out of borrowing the money they need.
By contrast, business loans are increasing fast, instead of dropping off. Many
business men are borrowing all they can get regardless of interest rates. They
are pouring their dollars into plants and equipment, building up inventories, and
in some cases speculating in foreign currencies and gold. And so while you and
I are being squeezed out, big business is borrowing dollars like they are going
out of style, because, my friends, the dollar is going out of style. They are ex-
pecting to repay their loans later on with dollars that are almost worthless.
Meanwhile, the bad economic news goes on. One day we’re told that unem-
ployment is up—not good, we think, especially if we happen to be among the
unemployed. But at least this ought to start bringing down inflation, according
to most all the experts. For years they have always told us that, but NO, infla-
tion keeps speeding up too. We know it is every time we buy groceries.
Next we hear that productivity is dropping off in the United States. According
to government figures released last month, productivity was plunging at the
fastest rate in five years by last spring. That means that America’s economy is
becoming less and less efficient and more and more service oriented. If that is
so, we wonder: How can we compete in world markets?
Then someone mentions that what is happening to the United States’ economy
is called STAGFLATION. Our economy is stagnating, and yet inflation is heat-
ing up. Again we scratch our heads. This is something new to us in America. In
the past we have had recessions and we have had inflation, but not together!
Now we have both at once, and where is it all leading? One clue to where it is
leading is contained in other figures released by the Labor Department last
month. Last spring hourly compensation measured in dollars was rising, people
were receiving increases in pay at a rate of about 8% a year in dollars; but infla-
tion is now outrunning these pay increases. As a result, real compensation in
terms of what you can buy with your money dropped 5% during the spring
154
Audio Letter 50
quarter; so our pay checks may look bigger and bigger, but on the average
they’re able to buy less and less.
The sliding value of the dollar at the grocery store is reflected also on the inter-
national monetary scene. Overseas, holders of dollars are unloading them as
fast as they can before they can shrink to nothing. Dollars are being traded for
hard currencies like the West German Deutschemark. The shift is massive. A
few days ago on September 20 there was an effective devaluation of the dollar
against the mark by about 2%. Dollars are also being traded so fast for gold that
the trading has been called “frenzied.” That is why the price of gold in United
States dollars is soaring to incredible levels. Just two days ago it passed $400 an
ounce for the first time in history.
My friends, our growing economic woes are the fruits of deliberate planning by
very powerful men. I made much of this plan public nearly seven years ago in
my book, THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, published by
George Braziller, New York, New York. Now that the things I have described
there are happening, my book is out of print. But at that time most of my read-
ers simply could not believe that these things could really happen; and so even
though I identified many of the people responsible, nothing at all was done to
stop the plan. A year later in the spring of 1974, I revealed in Congressional
testimony that most of America’s alleged gold hoard was gone. It was a key
ingredient in the plan to destroy the United States economy on the way to Dic-
tatorship. I stood ready to back up my charges with evidence and witnesses, but
Congress did nothing. So I went public with my charges. Public pressure finally
led to the so-called Gold Inspection Visit to Ft. Knox by Congressmen and
newsmen in September 1974. It was a fraud, and touched off many questions
and suspicions in the foreign press; but here at home the fraud worked, and
people calmed down about Ft. Knox. Nothing lasting was done, and the plan for
America’s economic collapse continued.
The fall of 1974 I began recording talking tapes. My very first tape, AUDIO
BOOK No. 1, was recorded 5 years ago next month. That tape included infor-
mation which my listeners could use as a starting point in their own personal
planning for the events to come. I did not give financial advice as such, but I
did describe the kind of things which historically have been useful under ad-
verse economic conditions. Today many of those conditions are developing all
around us. Early in 1975 I recorded a second tape, AUDIO BOOK No. 2 about
the Ft. Knox gold scandal. In that tape I gave more details about the secret dis-
appearance of America’s former gold hoard. I also gave more details about the
economic and political upheavals which were being planned for America’s fu-
ture.
155
In those tapes I gave the best information then available to me, but I made the
mistake of revealing an approximate time table for coming events as they were
then being planned. I stated clearly that these were purely the plans and sched-
ules of men. My hope in revealing those plans was that by doing so I could
contribute in some small way to delaying or even stopping them. My intentions
in making public the secret time tables—which were plans, not prophecies—
were sadly misunderstood by some. I have actually been condemned by some
people because World War III did not take place on schedule. Can you imag-
ine? Even so, the confidential sources who gave me that information which I
revealed four and five years ago knew what they were talking about.
For example, in those early tapes I revealed the plans of the late David Rocke-
feller and his intimates for gold to reach $2,000 an ounce. At that time it
sounded ridiculous to many people. Even $200 an ounce sounded like too high
a price for gold to reach more than temporarily, but today gold has already es-
tablished a new record of at least $400 an ounce. The old conventional wisdom
is in the wastebasket. The so-called “gold bugs” of only a few years ago have
turned out to be too conservative. Whether gold will still reach $2,000 an ounce
as originally planned remains to be seen. After all, the real David Rockefeller
has been dead now for seven months, since February 1979. Even so, the basic
economic forces which he and his collaborators unleashed now have tremen-
dous momentum. The total collapse of the United States dollar, and with it our
economy, is now only a matter of time.
There is a historical precedent for what is happening to us, my friends. It hap-

pened in Germany in the early 1920’s. It was a case of super-inflation leading
to disintegration of the economy. The seeds of disaster were planted in July
1914 at the outbreak of World War I. The German government did not want to
provoke opposition to the war by imposing heavy taxes, so instead the re-
deemability of the mark in gold was suspended. Then the government began
borrowing to finance the war without any limit on the amount of money that
could be printed.
In the same way, the process of divorcing the dollar from its gold backing be-
gan during World War II. In 1945 the gold backing was reduced from 42% to
25%. Then in March 1968, Congress quietly removed the last remaining gold
backing of 25%. That meant the printing presses were free to roll. Finally on
August 15, 1971, President Nixon finished the job of untying the dollar from
gold. He slammed the international gold window, saying that the United States
would no longer redeem dollars with gold in international dealings. What he did
not say was that most all of America’s alleged gold hoard was gone by then.
156
Audio Letter 50
The German government’s action in cutting the mark loose from gold in 1914
triggered the accumulation of currency during the war. After the war ended,
people began spending their stored up marks, and inflation took off. And in the
same way, after Nixon closed the gold window in the United States, the prices
for international commodities began to zoom upward and gold followed suit.
As the German inflation accelerated, the German Central Bank tried to support
the mark in the international exchange markets. Every time the mark would
start sliding relative to other currencies, the Reichsbank would buy marks using
their own reserves of foreign currencies.
It’s the same today, my friends. Whenever the dollar starts tumbling, we hear
that the Federal Reserve, our privately-owned central bank, is supporting the
dollar. Sometimes the key word used is that the Federal Reserve Bank is “inter-
vening” on behalf of the dollar. Either way it means that the Fed is throwing
away hard foreign currencies to buy up sick dollars on foreign markets—in
other words, throwing good money after bad. The Reichsbank also tried to sup-
port the mark by giving gold for marks, not at home but in the international
money markets.
The parallel to this today is the series of “gold auctions” by the United States
Treasury. The Treasury keeps these auctions as small as possible, because there
is no huge gold hoard left to back up the dollar. Instead there’s a secret scram-
ble going on continuously to scrape together gold from various sources to
auction off. The gold is sold, in the words of the GSA invitations to bid, “as is.”
There are no guarantees, and the gold offered is highly impure instead of what
is called “good delivery gold.” Even so, buyers gladly exchange their shriveling
dollars for the Treasury gold scraps.
For a while the German inflation gave the appearance of stimulating business,
but this was because no one wanted to hold on to marks that were losing their
value. Instead the money was spent, traded for goods of all kinds which would
not lose their value, but this was a self-defeating process. As people became
more anxious to get rid of marks, they became less eager to accept them. As a
result, prices climbed ever more steeply. Organized workers in unions managed
to win pay raises but not fast enough to keep up. Unorganized workers and
those on fixed incomes were left behind altogether. Wages in marks rose, but
real wages began to drop. This is the very thing which is now happening here in
the United States. Germans who earned a living by legitimate work of all kinds
began to slip downward in their standard of living. The point was reached
where speculation in gold and commodities was the only way to keep up with
inflation.
157
There are obvious parallels today. In recent years investors have increasingly
shifted their attentions to the Commodity Exchanges, while the stock market
wanders in the doldrums. As for gold, who doesn’t know about gold these
days?
The German inflation reached the point where it fed on itself. It was no longer a
question of basic economics—it was a question of confidence. People lost all
confidence in the mark, and from that point on the presses literally could not
print marks fast enough. By the middle of 1923, men were paid as often as three
times a day. Their wives would meet them and hurry off to spend the money
before it could depreciate still further. The point was reached where doing busi-
ness in this way became impossible. Men would not work for money that was
worthless before they could spend it. Farmers would not trade food for paper
that would buy nothing, businesses started closing, food riots erupted, the Ger-
man economy started falling apart at the seams.
The German super-inflation was eventually stopped in the same way that is al-
ways used when the currency collapses. A new currency is introduced to
replace the old one. In Germany it was called the Rentenmark, and it was
backed up by pledges that restored confidence. Here in the United States our
replacement currency has already been printed for initial distribution when the
time comes. We will trade many old dollars for each new dollar, but even the
new dollar will not be backed by gold because we have almost no gold for that
purpose. Instead it will be a garrison dollar—usable only within the United
States, unacceptable in other countries.
In AUDIO BOOK No. 1 five years ago I explained that those who were putting
these forces in motion were declaring war on us, the American people. The four
Rockefeller brothers were hoping to end up as our absolute Dictators, on the
way to conquering the whole world. Now, the Bolsheviks here in America are
trying to take advantage of the economic forces which they helped the Rocke-
fellers set in motion. The Rockefellers were aiming for a complete Corporate
Socialism take-over, whereas the Bolsheviks want a new Bolshevik revolution
and a brutal State Socialism take-over. The Russians meanwhile are using their
robotoids in key positions in an effort to thwart the Bolshevik design here in
America. The Russians did not create the forces leading to our economic col-
lapse, but neither are they trying to stop them. Instead they are attempting to
guide the process of economic collapse here in such a way that it will backfire
on the Bolsheviks.
158
Audio Letter 50
Seven years ago, five years ago, even three years ago we the American people
might have acted to undo the forces leading to collapse. We could have de-
manded that our gold be brought back to Ft. Knox, that those who took it be
punished, and that the dollar be “good as gold” once again; but we as a people
did nothing at all! It was far easier to accept official lies than the unofficial
truth. So now, our land has become an economic battleground in a war between
the Russian Christians and their ancient enemies. It remains to be seen who will
win that war, but either way millions of Americans are going to lose and to suf-
fer.
Topic #2—Late last month, on the evening of August 30, another of our never-
ending crises began. News wires crackled with ominous words from the Idaho
home of Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman, Frank Church. He was
quoted as saying that American Intelligence had confirmed the presence of
Russian combat troops in Cuba; and breaking with his past behavior, he sur-
prised everyone. He demanded the immediate withdrawal of all Russian combat
troops from Cuba.
What’s going on, my friends, is another skirmish, a major one, between the
Bolsheviks and the Christian rulers of Russia. The Bolsheviks in our govern-
ment here in America are following a strategy now which has important
similarities to their Guyana strategy of last November 1978. There’s not enough
time for me to review all the details of what happened then. For those details
you may want to refresh your memory by listening again to AUDIO LETTER
No. 40; but for now, let me just remind you that last November the Bolsheviks
used tensions over Cuba as a part of a larger strategy. The same thing is hap-
pening again now, but this time there’s an important difference. Using their
robotoids, the Russians are succeeding so far in staying one step ahead of the
Bolsheviks. Last time the real target was not Cuba but the secret Russian mis-
sile base in Guyana. This time the primary target again is not Cuba but the
SALT II Treaty. And yet, just as before, the Russians do not dare lower their
guard around Cuba or anywhere else because the Bolsheviks here will lash out
wherever they can find an opening anywhere in the world.
Last time the artificial Bolshevik crisis over Cuba was built around MiG-23s.
This time it is Russian ground combat troops. Three thousand Russian troops
could no more attack the United States from Cuba today than the MiG-23s
could have attacked last year. What’s more, the Bolsheviks here are using old
information about Russian troops now, just as they used old information about
MiG-23s last year. The alleged spy satellite pictures of Russian troops in Cuba
were not obtained last month as claimed. Regardless of what robotoid Carter
159
says tomorrow night on television, the pictures are actually almost two years
old, obtained in late 1977.
Two years ago this month, on Sept. 27, 1977, the United States lost the most
decisive battle of the 20th Century to Russia. It was history’s first space battle,
the Battle of the Harvest Moon. I reported it that month in AUDIO LETTER
No. 26, but it has never been reported to the public officially. Following that
battle the United States and Russia were on the brink of war. The Russians were
pressuring our own rulers behind the scenes to abandon their plans for conquest
by nuclear war. America’s step-by-step surrender by unilateral disarmament
under SALT II was demanded by the Russians.
Meanwhile Russia’s newly operational Cosmos Interceptors had begun system-

atically destroying America’s space fleet of Spy Satellites. The Cosmos
Interceptors, which are manned and armed with Particle Beam-weapons were
seeking out and blasting our Spy Satellites one by one. The United States has
no defense against the Cosmos Interceptors, but the process of eliminating all
our Spy Satellites was a gradual one, taking several months to complete. By
April 1978 they were all gone, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 33. But in
the meantime the CIA turned on all of our Spy Satellites. The idea was to
gather as much information as possible world-wide before they were destroyed.
Normally they are only turned on selectively in order to extend their operating
life; but with Russian Cosmos Interceptors blasting them into fireballs one after
another, that no longer mattered.
One of the things picked up by the satellites in their dying days late 1977 was
Russian maneuvers in Cuba. The maneuvers were taking place in brigade
strength, which was puzzling. The Russian Army normally does not use the
brigade as a unit of organization. It only made sense later on when it was
learned that Soviet troops, mostly from Asia, were being infiltrated into Canada
and Mexico. This is in preparation for possible invasion of the United States
across our northern and southern borders, as I reported long ago in AUDIO
LETTER No. 32. The troops are entering Canada through the Province of Que-
bec as part of an arrangement, a secret arrangement, between Russia and
France. In Mexico, they are entering through the Yucatan Peninsula. French
influence is also great in Mexico, although this is less well known here in the
United States. Cuba is the key way station for the troops, whether headed for
Canada or Mexico.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 32 I explained the manner in which the Russian troops
are remaining dispersed and therefore undetected in Canada and Mexico; but
when and if the order to invade the United States is given, they are to form up
160
Audio Letter 50
quickly into organized fighting forces. In planning this strategy, the Russian
generals concluded that the optimum organizational unit would be the brigade,
and so when the troops arrive in Cuba they are trained in brigade-size maneu-
vers. Then they disband and are injected into Quebec and the Yucatan
Peninsula. So the Bolsheviks here in the Government in charging that there is a
brigade of Russian troops in Cuba are telling such a small fragment of the truth
that it amounts to a lie. They dare not tell the whole truth because that would
open up questions about our non-existent Spy Satellites. Even so, the Bolshe-
viks have calculated cleverly. The Russians have no way in which they can
defend themselves by explaining what is really going on because no one would
understand. So it is once again a battle of maneuver and intrigue.
My friends, when the SALT II Treaty was signed in Vienna three months ago, I
alerted you to be on the lookout for certain things. At that time there was great
publicity that SALT II was in trouble in the Senate; but as I told you then in
AUDIO LETTER No. 47, the Russians were replacing key Bolshevik agents in
the Senate with their own robotoids. As a result, I was able to tell you to watch
for opposition to SALT II to gradually fade away, and through the rest of the
summer that is exactly what was happening. SALT II prospects were getting
better by the day.
Even so I also cautioned in AUDIO LETTER No. 47 that, quote:
“There remains a slim chance that the Bolsheviks will somehow find a way to
upset SALT II”; and also, quote: “The ratification of SALT II could be the lit-
mus test that will decide between Peace or War for America and Russia.”
These are the stakes in the struggle now over Russian troops in Cuba. It began
in mid July. Bolshevik sources began feeding carefully fabricated tips about
Russian troops in Cuba to Florida Senator Richard Stone. Stone then brought it
up during the SALT II hearings by the Senate Foreign Relations Committee.
During testimony by the Secretary of Defense, robotoid Harold Brown, Stone
unexpectedly asked about a Soviet Combat Brigade in Cuba. Robotoid Brown
had not yet been programmed for that question and was puzzled; but robotoid
Senator Frank Church, the Chairman of the Committee, jumped into the discus-
sion. Between them, the two Russian robotoids Brown and Church defused the
issue temporarily. Robotoid Brown authorized robotoid Church to issue a com-
forting statement to the Press. It denied that Cuba harbored a Russian military
presence other than advisers. But now, the Russians knew what the Bolsheviks
were going to use for their manufactured anti-SALT II crisis. They knew they
could not stop the Bolsheviks from somehow breaking it into the open, so they
played for time. Every additional day made the SALT II Treaty just a little
161
more secure. Meanwhile, using their robotoids in key positions, the Russians
stayed alert for the next Bolshevik move.
In mid August the Russian KGB learned about the ploy being cooked up by the
Bolsheviks within the CIA. The robotoid replacement for CIA Director Stans-
field Turner had learned about the intended use of the two-year-old satellite
pictures of Russian troops in Cuba. The Russians braced themselves. They also
programmed the Frank Church robotoid to take the initiative on Cuba the mo-
ment he was told anything about alleged recent satellite pictures of Cuba. On
August 30 the Church robotoid was among those who were informed about the
supposedly new satellite pictures. As programmed, he swung into action imme-
diately. In Idaho for the Labor Day recess, the Church robotoid summoned
reporters for a news conference. There he made the announcement and hard-
line statements which launched the present crisis. By taking such a hard-line
position, the Church robotoid surprised everyone. Fellow Senators raised their
eyebrows in astonishment and so did many members of the Press, but it was a
clever and unexpected move by the Russians because in this way the Russians
took the ball away from the Bolsheviks. Senator Stone, who had started the
whole thing, was left no room to be more hawkish than Church; and since
Church is the Chairman of the Committee while Stone is only a member, eve-
ryone promptly forgot about Stone. Now when the conditions are ripe, robotoid
Church will be in command of the situation. Having been the hardest of the
hard-liners, he will have credibility if he later announces: “I am satisfied. The
Cuban situation is now resolved, so let us proceed with SALT II.” That is the
outcome which the Russians are striving for. Meanwhile the Russians are using
their robotoids in the Senate to delay a vote on SALT II. This is a move to save
the Treaty which would be defeated if a vote were taken right now.
Meanwhile, very dangerous and intricate maneuverings are continuing on both

sides. The Russians are still having difficulties with their robotoids and are hav-
ing to introduce them more slowly than planned. At the same time, the
Bolsheviks are beginning to regroup and regain some strength. As a result, the
risk of nuclear war is beginning to rise again. The danger is still far less than it
was at this time last year, but it is growing. In fact, as of this moment a military
war of nerves is secretly in progress between Russia and the United States.
Three nights ago the National Security Council held one meeting after another
in this war of nerves. The meetings began the evening of September 27, the
second anniversary of the Battle of the Harvest Moon, and they continued long
through the night. Russian robotoids in the Council were working overtime to
keep the lid on the situation.
162
Audio Letter 50
Meanwhile, my friends, there are presently about 500 Russian submarines in

positions for possible attack around the United States. About 200 are lined up
along our east coast while 150 are stationed along the west coast, and roughly
the same number along our Gulf coast. Of course the Russians do not have to
depend on their submarines if they ever decide to actually attack. For three
years now, Russian short-range underwater-launch missiles have been planted
within our own territorial waters, and for more than two years Russian hydro-
gen bombs have been planted at their targets throughout the United States.
These range from tiny micro-nukes to giant dam busters. Finally, the Russians
also have their space triad of weapons, for which we have no equivalent. One
leg of their space triad consists of the Cosmos Interceptors, which I referred to
earlier. Another leg is on the moon where Russian Particle Beam-weapons have
been stationed for nearly two years; and the third leg is their fleet of Cosmos-
pheres, which are floating high above our cities and military sites. But as of
now, the Russians do not wish to attack.
Their actual goal is the opposite—it is called “deterrence.” They are using their
submarine deployment to send a message to the Bolsheviks here in America. In
particular, the Russian subs are deployed with special emphasis on the south-
eastern United States, reflecting their concern for Cuba. That emphasis consists
of missile submarines known to be armed with neutron warheads. Neutron
weapons, my friends, are the most usable of all nuclear weapons because they
produce essentially no fallout.
So, by deploying them, the Russians are warning the Bolsheviks:
If you strike, so will we.
Topic #3—Over the past two years or so I have discussed the struggle within
Russia between the Christians and the Bolsheviks since 1917. Current events
cannot be understood without knowing about the past six decades of struggle
for control of the Kremlin. But that struggle in turn is part of an even bigger
historical picture. What we are seeing today, my friends, is the climax of a war
of more than a thousand years between the two most bitter enemies on earth. It
is the war between RUSSIA and the KHAZARS.
The kingdom of the Khazars vanished from the map of the world many centu-
ries ago. Today many people have never even heard of it, yet in its day the
Khazar kingdom was a very major power indeed, holding sway over a large
empire of subjugated peoples. It had to be reckoned with by the two neighbor-
ing superpowers of that day. To the south and west of Khazaria the Byzantine
Empire was in full flower with its Eastern Orthodox Christian civilization. To
163
the southeast, the Khazar kingdom bordered on the expanding Moslem Empire
of the Arab Caliphs. The Khazars influenced the histories of both of these other
empires but, far more importantly, the Khazar kingdom occupied what was later
to become a southern portion of Russia between the Black and Caspian Seas.
As a result, the historical destinies of the Russians and the Khazars became in-
tertwined in ways which have persisted down to the present day.
In case you have never heard of the Khazars, I think I should mention where
you can look to learn more about them. Three years ago in 1976 a book about
the Khazars was published by the British writer Arthur Koestler. The book is
titled “THE 13TH TRIBE - THE KHAZAR EMPIRE AND ITS HERITAGE.”
The American publisher is Random House, New York, N.Y.
History records that the Khazars were derived from a mixture of Mongols,
Turks, and Finns. As early as the 3rd Century A.D., they were identifiable in
constant warfare in the areas of Persia and Armenia. Later, in the 5th Century,
the Khazars were among the devastating hordes of Attila the Hun. Around 550
A.D., the nomadic Khazars began settling themselves in the area around the
northern Caucasus between the Black and Caspian Seas. The Khazar capital of
Itil was established at the mouth of the Volga River where it emptied into the
Caspian, in order to control the river traffic. The Khazars then exacted a toll of
10% on any and all cargo which passed Itil on the river. Those who refused
were attacked and slaughtered.
With their kingdom firmly established in the Caucasus, the Khazars gradually
began to create an empire of subjugated peoples. More and more Slavonic
tribes, who were peaceful compared to the Khazars, were attacked and con-
quered. They became parts of the Khazar Empire, required to pay tribute
continually to the Khazar kingdom. Tribute by conquered peoples has always
been a feature of empires, of course, but not in the fashion of the Khazars. The
so-called great empires of the world always gave something in return for the
tribute they exacted.
Rome, for example, made citizens of those they conquered; and in return for the
taxes they levied, they brought civilization, order, and protection against attack
from would-be invaders. But not so in the Khazar Empire. The peoples who
were subject to the Khazars received only one thing in return for their payments
of tribute, and that was a shaky promise: the Khazars would refrain from further
attacks and pillage so long as the tributes were paid. The subjects of the Khazar
Empire, therefore, were nothing more than the victims of a giant protection
racket. The Khazar overlords were therefore resented universally and bitterly
throughout their domain, but they were also feared because of the merciless
164
Audio Letter 50
way in which they dealt with anyone who stood up to them. And so the Khazar
Empire expanded until it occupied large areas of what is now Russia and south-
eastern Europe. By the 8th Century, the Khazar Empire extended northward to
Kiev and westward to include the Magyars, the ancestors of modern Hungary.
In about 740 A.D., a stunning event took place. The Khazars had been under
continual pressure from their Byzantine and Moslem neighbors to adopt either
Christianity or Islam; but the Khazar ruler, called the Kagan, had heard of a
third religion called JUDAISM. Apparently for political reasons of independ-
ence, the Kagan announced that the Khazars were adopting Judaism as their
religion. Overnight an entirely new group of people, the warlike Khazars, sud-
denly proclaimed themselves Jews—adoptive Jews. The Khazar kingdom
began to be described as the “kingdom of the Jews” by historians of that day.
Succeeding Khazar rulers took Jewish names, and during the late 9th Century
the Khazar kingdom became a haven for Jews from other lands.
Meanwhile the brutal Khazar domination over other peoples continued un-
changed. But then a new factor appeared on the scene. During the 8th Century
they came coursing down the great rivers—the Dnieper, the Don, the Volga.
They were the eastern branch of the Vikings. They were known as the Varan-
gians, or as the Rus. Like other Vikings, the Rus were bold adventurers and
fierce fighters; but when they tangled with the Khazars, the Rus often ended up
paying tribute like everyone else.
In the year 862 a Rus leader named Rurik founded the city of Novgorod, and
the RUSSIAN NATION was born. The Rus Vikings settled among the Slavonic
tribes under Khazar domination, and the struggle between Vikings and Khazars
changed in character. It became a struggle by the emerging nation of Russia for
independence from Khazar oppression.
Over a century after the founding of Russia’s first city, another momentous
event took place. Russia’s leader, Prince Vladimir of Kiev, accepted baptism as
a Christian in the year 989. He actively promoted Christianity in Russia, and his
memory is revered by Russians today as “Saint Vladimir”; and so a thousand
years ago Russia’s tradition as a Christian nation began.
Vladimir’s conversion also brought Russia into alliance with Byzantium. The
Byzantine rulers had always feared the Khazars, and the Russians were still
struggling to free themselves. And so in the year 1016, combined Russian and
Byzantine forces attacked the Khazar kingdom. The Khazar Empire was shat-
tered, and the kingdom of the Khazars itself fell into decline. Eventually most
of the Khazar Jews migrated to other areas. Many of them wound up in eastern
165
Europe, where they mingled and intermarried with other Jews. Like the Semitic
Jews some 1000 years earlier, the Khazar Jews became dispersed. The kingdom
of the Khazars was no more.
As they moved and lived among the Jewish people, the Khazar Jews passed on
a distinct heritage from generation to generation. One element of the Khazar
Jew heritage is a militant form of ZIONISM. In the view of Khazar Jews, the
land occupied by ancient Israel is to be retaken—not by miracle but by armed
force. This is what is meant by Zionism today, and this is the force that created
the nation which calls itself Israel today. The other major ingredient of the
Khazar Jew heritage is hatred for Christianity, and for the Russian people as the
champions of the Christian faith. Christianity is viewed as the force which
caused the ancient so-called kingdom of the Jews, the Khazar kingdom, to col-
lapse. Having once dominated much of what is present-day Russia, the Khazar
Jews still want to reestablish that domination—and for a millennium they have
been trying continually to do just that.
In 1917 the Khazar Jews passed a major milestone toward the creation of their
own state in Palestine as I mentioned last month. That same year they also cre-
ated the Bolshevik Revolution in Russia. There followed a Christian holocaust,
the likes of which the world has never seen. The Khazar Jews were once again
in control of Russia after more than 900 years, and they set about the task of
destroying Christianity by destroying Christians—over 100-million of them,
and at the same time over 20-million religious Jews also died at the hands of the
Khazar Jews. This, my friends, is what the Russian Christians were up against
in their 60-year struggle to overthrow the atheistic Bolsheviks; but they finally
succeeded in their overthrow program, and now the 1000-year-old war between
the Russian Christians and the Khazar Jews is reaching a climax. At stake is not
only the future of Russia and of Christianity, but also of the Jewish people as a
whole.
Last month on August 19, 1979, Rabbi Joel Teitelbaum died in New York. He
died in the morning, and was buried the same afternoon. Very short notice, and
yet some 100,000 Jewish men arrived in time for the funeral. It is hard to imag-
ine how many more hundreds of thousands could not arrive on such short
notice. A month later, on September 18, his followers placed a memorial tribute
by way of a paid advertisement in the New York Times, and clearly it spoke for
many Jews. Among other things it said, quote: “He was the undisputed leader
of all Jews everywhere who had not been infected by Zionism”; and also,
quote: “With a courage all too rare in our time, he called the Zionist state ‘a
work of Satan, a sacrilege, and a blasphemy.’ The shedding of blood for the
sake of the Zionist state was abhorrent to him.”
166
Audio Letter 50
These words, my friends, were spoken by Orthodox Jews mourning for their
fallen leader. And the new Christian rulers of Russia would agree for they, too,
regard the Zionist state of Israel as a counterfeit, a cruel and dangerous hoax for
Christian and Jew alike. The Khazar state called the “Kingdom of the Jews” a
thousand years ago was a parasite, living on the tribute from conquered peo-
ples. Likewise today, Israel depends for its survival on a never-ending flow of
support from outside. Left unchecked, the Russians believe that the Khazar
Jews will destroy Christianity by means of Zionism, and Russia through Bol-
shevism; so Russia’s Christian rulers are on the offensive against their enemies
of a thousand years, the Khazars.
We Americans who call ourselves Christians have not cared enough to open our
eyes to try to save our own country, or to defend our faith. So now our land has
become the battleground of the Christian Russians and their deadly enemies—
the Bolsheviks and the Zionists. And like it or not, my friends, we are caught up
in this all-out war.
167
Audio Letter 51
October 27, 1979
The autumn of 1929 was a time of restless anticipation. On all sides the air was
stirring with the winds of change, radical change. In the United States the Pro-
hibition Era was in full swing. Countless thousands of illegal speak-easies
sprouted up all over America. Millions of Americans determined to enjoy the
high times filled the speak-easies. One dance craze after another swept the na-
tion, and yet it was all just a little unreal. Now and then people wondered:
“Where is all this leading?” At the same time, Americans were increasingly
worried about crime. Prohibition had brought with it a crime wave unprece-
dented in America. It was the era of the famous gangsters—the Capones and
the Dillingers. On one hand people were afraid, yet they were also fascinated,
and gangster movies would soon be packing the theaters. It was also a time of
turbulence on the international scene. In the Far East, tensions over Manchuria
were building among China, Russia, and Japan. Soon China would be fighting,
first with Russia, then with Japan; but even as these and other tensions were
rising, disarmament was in the air. The great powers were discussing naval
limitations, and there was talk of convening a great conference for general dis-
armament.
Developments like these were setting the stage for war to come; but to most
Americans they did not seem to matter much. It was more exciting to watch the
multiplying exploits in aviation of that day. In 1927 Charles Lindbergh had
flown the Atlantic in the first non-stop flight from New York to Paris. Later he
and other aviators of this and other countries were outdoing themselves with
new accomplishments. An era was beginning which would see flights spreading
across continents, spanning oceans, and girdling the globe. It was a time of
thrills with both tragedy and triumph. Aviation had caught the imagination of
the public, and yet very few had enough imagination to foresee how aviation
would soon revolutionize the world.
But in that autumn of 50 years ago all eyes were turning to watch just one thing
above all others—it was the New York stock market. For years the stock mar-
ket had been booming upward. It had been so strong for so long that it seemed
like a sure thing, but now for some reason the stock market was beginning to
169
shudder slightly. Prices reached a peak in September 1929, then they began to
shiver and shudder erratically. Some stocks continued to climb, others dropped;
trading volume began to increase as more and more shares changed hands.
Meanwhile the market as a whole began to drop. The market was suffering
from chills and fever, shivering slowly downward. Then came Black Thursday,
October 24. Stocks were sold off in an avalanche as panicky traders tried to
beat each other to the punch in getting out. The tumult on the floor of the New
York Stock Exchange grew so loud that worried crowds collected outside in
Wall Street. By noon there were beginning to be news bulletins. Well-known
speculators committed suicide. Meanwhile a visitor had arrived from England
just at the right moment to stand in the galleries and watch the frenzy. His
name: Winston Churchill. It was not until well into that evening that the ticker
tape finally caught up with the chaos. All around the country, investors and
speculators waited and watched. For many, the numbers on the tape spelled
RUIN. As people began to recover from the shock, there were all kinds of offi-
cial reassurances. The public was assured that the market and the economy still
were sound and strong. It was said that there had been simply a shaking out of
weak spots.
The one thing no one told the public was the TRUTH. The truth was that the
worst was yet to come. It came five days later, on Black Tuesday, October 29,
1929. As soon as the New York Stock Exchange opened it was flooded with
orders to sell. More than 16-million shares were sold, a record that stood for 40
years. In the process, the Dow Jones averages dropped nearly 12% in a single
day. Near the close there was a sudden rally because those who secretly had
triggered the crash were snapping up bargains, but the day ended as the worst in
history for the New York stock market.
That terrible day, Black Tuesday, was not the end but only the beginning of the
Wall Street disaster. It took nearly three more years, until the summer of 1932,
for the stock market crash to run its course. When it finally reached bottom,
stock prices were down to 17 cents on the dollar and the United States was in
the depths of the Great Depression—a depression exported to the rest of the
world.
As America was dragged downward into depression, most Americans became

preoccupied with the hard work of simply surviving. Concerns over Asian bat-
tles half a world away were eclipsed by concern over how to earn a loaf of
bread. Arguments over disarmament were lost on multitudes who were standing
in soup lines, and the stirrings of Nazi power in Germany seemed far less
threatening than the real enemies—hunger and unemployment. The stage was
being set for radical change in the United States Government and for war, and
170
Audio Letter 51
an economic disaster—the crash and depression—was an indispensable part of

the plan. It prepared us to accept the changes wanted by the powerful, and at the
same time it kept us so preoccupied that we could hardly raise our eyes and see
what was coming.
This month, October 1979, is the 50th anniversary of Black October 1929. To-
day we are assured that it is all different, that it just can’t happen here again;
and yet once again the autumn air is stirring with the winds of change. In the
Far East, tensions and hostilities are breaking out as they did 50 years ago. Rus-
sia, China, and Japan are fencing and maneuvering with one another in complex
ways on the way to a great new ASIAN AXIS. In southeast Asia, Thailand is
becoming more involved in a new Indo-China war, seemingly siding with
China. American military equipment and advisors are pouring into Thailand as
they did into Vietnam two decades ago. Meanwhile Russia’s client state, Viet-
nam, is putting pressure on Thailand through Cambodia; and in northeast Asia,
news from South Korea is suddenly in the headlines. Only yesterday, October
26, President Park was assassinated by the Korean CIA, which is a puppet of
the American CIA.
Fifty years ago America was fascinated with the dawning of the Air Age. To-
day it is Space that appeals to that same spirit of adventure; but unlike the
situation then, America today is locked out of space by Russia. And so while
America’s space program slowly runs down, the American appetite for space
exploits is being satisfied by Hollywood instead of NASA. But through it all, it
is the economy which is attracting more and more attention these days. In the
autumn of 1929 it was the stock market which people were watching nervously.
Everyone knew that speculation was rampant. The Federal Reserve Board had
started tightening the screws, raising interest rates and cutting down credit. No
one quite knew what to expect.
Today it is not just the stock market but the DOLLAR itself which is crashing.
After the 1929 crash, the dollar was worth 200 cents. After this crash, the dollar
will be worth two (2) cents. In recent months the price of gold has been climb-
ing faster and faster, as the 1929 stock market did just before the crash. Once
again the privately-owned Federal Reserve System is tightening the screws.
Once again one of the targets is said to be speculation—not in stocks this time
but in gold and commodities, and once again America’s investment community
is developing a case of the jitters.
The crash of 1929 was followed by economic depression, disarmament, and

war. Today the DOLLAR is crashing on the way to STAGFLATION—that is,
inflation and depression at the same time. Meanwhile the issue of strategic nu-
171
clear disarmament by way of SALT II is on its way through Congress; and all
the while, my friends, a SECRET WAR is already in progress. Up to now most
of the battles have been hidden from the public, but in recent days there have
been new developments. As a result, the secret war may soon surface in very
spectacular ways. When that happens, most people still will not know the rea-
sons for what they see; but the events themselves will make headlines the world
over.
Topic #1—THE CRASH OF THE UNITED STATES DOLLAR;
Topic #2—THE RUSSIAN PROGRAM TO SELL SALT II; and
Topic #3—THE SURPRISE BOLSHEVIK DEPLOYMENT OF SYNTHETIC

AUTOMATONS
Topic #1—Throughout the decade of the 1920’s, stock prices in the United
States were surging upward. It was the era of the great bull market. It was a
time of prosperity for most Americans with business booming right along with
the stock market. Even the year of 1923 saw nothing worse than a pause in
America’s bull market. That was the year in which another economy—that of
Germany—totally collapsed, as I described last month. Germany’s economy
disintegrated in a tornado of super-inflation, wild speculation, and currency col-
lapse; and the same people who brought about the German depression then are
bringing about the second great American depression today.
After 1923 the great American bull market went charging upward again. As in
every market, there were occasional brief pauses and dips, but the overall trend
was up and up. It became obvious that all one had to do to become rich was to
buy into the great bull market. More and more people did just that, and the
market surged ahead stronger and stronger. At the same time, the market be-
came fertile ground for speculators who make their money from jumping in and
out as prices bob up and down. Credit was plentiful so there were fast fortunes
to be made by buying and selling stocks on borrowed money, and it seemed as
if a speculator could hardly lose because the market as a whole was heading
ever upward. It became a process that fed upon itself. The higher the market,
the easier the credit for still further stock purchases. Fueled by credit, the great
bull market rocketed higher and higher, faster and faster.
By the late 1920’s the stock market had become a towering giant, resting upon
a huge foundation of credit. To take away that credit would be to undo the mar-
172
Audio Letter 51
ket; to take it away suddenly would be to trigger a stock market crash—and

this, my friends, was exactly what the privately-owned Federal Reserve System
did.
Beginning early in 1928 the Federal Reserve Board began a process of tighten-
ing up on credit. It was a process which was little noticed by the public as a
whole, but gradually it began to slow down the engines of business. At the
same time, the Federal Reserve Board made occasional timid comments about
speculation in the stock market; but for the moment they allowed the runaway
market to keep climbing ever higher on its own momentum. Then came the
summer of 1929. A few telltale statistics began to show up in the news, show-
ing that America’s economy had begun to turn downward. Most people paid no
attention, or else they did not understand; but in the investment world there be-
gan to be frowns of uncertainty. At the same time, the Federal Reserve
suddenly became more vocal about speculation. They made it clear they in-
tended to crack down on the use of credit for that purpose; and as part of their
supposed crackdown on speculation, they abruptly raised the discount rate by a
full percentage point.
Listen now to a pair of headlines: “DISCOUNT RATE RAISED ONE

PERCENTAGE POINT,” and “UNITED STATES MONEY PLAN CALLED
REACTION TO SPECULATION.” These headlines, my friends, might have
come from the summer of 1929—but they did not. They appeared earlier this
month on the 7th and 8th of October respectively in the Washington Post and
the New York Times. This time the target is not merely the stock market, as in
1929, but the DOLLAR itself, as I detailed in my book “THE CONSPIRACY
AGAINST THE DOLLAR” six years ago. Rising interest rates and other more
important measures are being used now to throttle credit.
In 1929, the Federal Reserve pretended to be suddenly worried about the stock
market speculation, which they had fostered. Today, the Federal Reserve is pre-
tending to be attacking speculation in commodities and gold. In 1929, they
pretended to be worried about the economy, and then acted dumb as they de-
stroyed it. Today, they are saying they are worried about inflation and our
weakening dollar; but now, as then, they are only pretending to be confused as
they systematically make the situation worse. As the summer of 1929 faded into
autumn, the stock market began to develop the jitters. The worst part of it was
that no one was quite sure what to expect.
To quote another pair of headlines: “WALL STREET IS FINDING THE

FED’S POLICY MORE DIFFICULT TO READ,” and “SPECULATORS
THREATENED ‘BUYING BUBBLE’ MAY BURST.” It sounds like the au-
173
tumn of 1929, but again I am quoting headlines for this month, October 1979.
They appeared respectively in the Washington Star of October 15 and the
Washington Post of October 11. Of course sometimes headlines are more dra-
matic than the articles, but listen to just a few quotes from the Star article about
the Fed’s policy this month. The article says that the new policy, quote:
“threw bond markets into chaos last week with prices dropping by record
amounts.” Another quote: “A lot of the bond traders wished they had chosen
another line of work this past week as red ink flowed through Wall Street. Bond
prices dropped more on Tuesday than on any previous day, and estimates of
total losses by underwriters ranged up to 100-million dollars.” The article is
peppered with phrases like: “fears the Fed would cause a new credit
crunch...municipals joined the slaughter...corporate prices plummeted ...the bot-
tom fell out of the municipal market.” As for the Post article about the so-called
“buying bubble” in commodities, consider the words, quote: “Prices could fall
or at least flatten out, and speculators could fail. Even banks are threatened and
some could go under, warns John Heimann, the Comptroller of the Currency,
who is in charge of bank regulation.”
As the jitters grew worse in the early autumn of 1929, the great bull market lost
its momentum. At last it was ripe for the kill! Federal Reserve actions had ren-
dered it vulnerable. Now other manipulators who were part of the plan went
into action. On certain days the manipulators suddenly dumped large amounts
of stock onto the market. Edgy speculators responded by dumping their stocks
too to get out fast and cut their losses. The process would thereby feed on itself
each time, once it was started; but after each downward break in prices, the
market would again settle down temporarily. Each time financial spokesmen
would assure the public there was nothing to worry about. Each pause was only
a breather before the next plunge—but no one told the people the truth. Instead,
without fail, stocks were said to be a bargain because the market had become
stable at last. Then the manipulators would trigger another plunge, and it would
all happen again.
Today we tend to look back at Black Tuesday, October 29, 1929, as marking
the onset of the Great Stock Market Crash. That is because we now have the
benefit of hindsight. We now know that it turned out to be the worst single day
of trading in New York Stock Exchange history—but the fact is that the stock
market had begun its three-year-long crash nearly a month earlier. October had
seen a number of increasingly bad days, but there had also been some days of
recovery. Everyone now knows that the handwriting was on the wall, but at the
time only a few people could bring themselves to see it. Most people wanted to
believe that this was only a temporary break in the market and that it would
174
Audio Letter 51
soon head upward again. Most simply could not imagine that they were watch-
ing the beginning of America’s greatest depression; but while the majority were
blind, there were a small minority who were not. A select few knew that some-
thing fundamentally different was happening. Some of those who knew what to
expect were the plotters themselves. The others who could tell what was com-
ing were people who understood how the manipulators operated. Everyone
else—that is, everyone who assumed normal market forces were at work—was
lost.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 19 nearly three years ago I revealed very important
information given me by my friend Mr. Norman Dodd. The information had to
do with the major tax-exempt foundations in America. Twenty-five years ago
he was Director of Research for the Reece Committee of Congress, which in-
vestigated the foundations; and he remains an expert on the subject to this day.
But in 1929 Mr. Dodd was a banker at one of New York’s most prestigious
banks. In a New York speech in 1956, he described a remarkable development
which he witnessed in early October 1929. He said, quote: “I was impressed
when Mr. Henry Morganthau, Sr., a retired banker and former ambassador,
called on the bank in person and directed it to dispose of every security then
held in his trusts, and to re-invest the proceeds in bonds of the United States
Government. Gratuitously he added that he wished these trusts to remain so in-
vested until he directed otherwise—a step which he said he did not contemplate
taking for at least 15 years.”
Before that same month of October 1929 ended, the market crash took place. It
ushered in the Great Depression, which spanned a dozen years until America
entered World War II. It also spawned the “New Deal” and big government
here in America. In light of all this, Mr. Dodd says: “Mr. Morganthau’s action,
which contrasted so sharply with that of the bank, assumed great significance.
To me it seemed he knew what he was doing, and why. He did not appear to be
following a hunch nor the advice of others. The impression he gave was one of
confidence in his own judgment. It was this impression which convinced me
there was a basis for that judgment—that what he knew, others could know.”
A few weeks after Morganthau took this action, Wall Street began to shake
with violent tremors. Each tremor was worse than the one before. On Black
Thursday, October 24, brokers, traders, and bankers began to see the chasm of
collapse opening at their feet. Speculators began taking their own lives. Then
came a selling panic on Monday, October 28, followed by that blackest day of
all, Black Tuesday. Stocks plummeted in trading so heavy it set a record, than
rallied briefly at the end. A headline in the New York Times read: “STOCK
TRADING SETS RECORD AS MARKET DIVES, THEN RALLIES.” The
175
article begins with the words: “Panic selling by many small investors swamped
the New York Stock Exchange yesterday, following two days of sharp drops in
stock prices.” And, quote: “Buying by cash-rich pension funds and other large
investors looking for bargains in the pandemonium brought prices up from the
huge declines that they had seen during the course of the day.” Another quote:
“The break was described by dealers as one of the worst in memory; and as one
trader put it, ‘I don’t think we’ve reached bottom’.” And, quote: “Yesterday’s
uniqueness was evident from the moment brokers started arriving at their of-
fices. Phones were ringing incessantly with investors wanting to sell stock. Top
executives at some of the smaller brokerage firms found themselves pressed
into service to handle the onslaught.” My friends, these words might have de-
scribed Black Tuesday 1929; but they actually are taken from the New York
Times of October 11, 1979—this month.
I am continually asked questions these days which boil down to two things:
“What should I do?” and “When should I do it?” But, my friends, I cannot give
you that kind of advice. No two persons live exactly the same way, and what
might be right for one might be wrong or impossible for another. Instead I am
trying to put you into a position of being able to understand for yourself what is
going on, like Henry Morganthau, Sr. 50 years ago. Then it is up to you to ex-
ercise your own judgment in deciding what to do. For six years now, beginning
with my book “THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR,” I’ve been
revealing information about the total plan to destroy the United States dollar. It
is this that underlies all the other economic turbulence we are seeing today in
America.
When President Nixon closed the international gold window in August 1971, it
rendered the dollar inconvertible. This led to an acceleration of the inflation
throughout the industrialized world. The rise in prices of international com-
modities, including oil, led to a rise in gold prices. Meanwhile, confidence in
the dollar has been slipping steadily.
In the past I have explained how all this could be stopped IF the United States
really had the gold claimed by the Government, but the United States gold fig-
ures are a fraud. We are actually “gold poor”; and even the Federal Deposit
Insurance Corporation (FDIC), now a private corporation, cannot help when the
dollar collapses, along with the banks. So for years, my friends, the Federal Re-
serve Board and the United States Treasury have been deceiving the people
with propaganda and gold charades. For months the Treasury has been scraping
together scraps of junk gold to auction off as a bluff, mainly to fool the public;
but this month the Treasury announced that the regular auctions are over; in-
stead, there may be only erratic auctions on very short notice. The first of these
176
Audio Letter 51
is now scheduled for November 1, 1979, but Swiss gold dealers now believe
that this change is only a first step toward phasing out the auctions completely.
If this is so, this is exactly what I alerted my listeners to watch for in AUDIO
LETTER No. 41.
Meanwhile, my friends, it is now increasingly every country for itself monetar-

ily. Only four days ago on October 23, Britain removed currency controls on
her citizens and granted the right of gold ownership. The next day the BBC re-
ported that gold sales by Russia are now over. The day after that Switzerland,
which has supported the dollar for the past three years, announced a shift back
to her traditional monetary policies designed to restrain inflation there. Increas-
ingly the United States is losing its anchors as the economic storm builds. As a
nation, we have forfeited all our chances to prevent economic disaster; so now,
my friends, it’s only a matter of time.
Topic #2—At this time last month the artificial crisis over Russian troops in
Cuba was in the news. On all sides there was speculation about what the United
States would do; but as it turned out, it was all building up to an anticlimax.
Last month I revealed the Russian strategy to defuse the crisis, and that plan has
stayed right on track. The whole flap over Cuba began as a Bolshevik ploy here
to stir up opposition to the SALT II treaty.
The struggle now over SALT II is part of a secret war in which the United
States is the prime battleground. On one side in this secret war are the atheistic
Bolsheviks, the former rulers of the Soviet Union. They have been overthrown;
and as they are expelled from Russia they are flocking here to the United States
of America. On the other side in the secret war are those who overthrew the
Bolsheviks in Russia. They are Russia’s new rulers, the tough band of native
Russian Christians who fought for 60 years to take over the Kremlin. Bolshevik
power has been building fast in the United States for several years. They want
to seize total control here and use America’s military power to destroy Russia
by plunging the world into nuclear war. To prevent that, the Russians are push-
ing their own levers of power here to move America toward disarmament.
SALT II is to be only the beginning, but it is also a crucial test of power be-
tween the Russians and their Bolshevik enemies here in America.
The recent flap over Russian troops in Cuba began as a Bolshevik maneuver,
but last month I described how the Senator Church robotoid strategy had en-
abled Russia to take the initiative away from the Bolsheviks. The organic
robotoid replacement for the late Senator Frank Church was programmed to act
even more hawkish about Cuba than the Bolsheviks. In that way, the Church
robotoid became the one voice in the Senate that would count most. As every-
177
one cooled off about Cuba, the Church robotoid would be programmed to
gradually act more satisfied, and in the process it would get SALT II moving
ahead once again. But the key to the Russian plan was timing.
An important ingredient in the Russian campaign to sell SALT II is their under-

standing of American psychology. Often we read or hear comments that those
fellows in the Kremlin just do not understand how Americans think; but noth-
ing, my friends, could be further from the truth. In Moscow the “Institute on the
U.S.A. and Canada” does nothing else but study our ways and our psychology.
They have been at it for 20 years, and they do their job very well indeed. One of
the most important facts about our American psychology was used expertly in
defusing the Cuba crisis. This is the fact that the American public as a whole
has a short memory. Given a little time, we can be counted on to forget about
anything no matter what it is. To choose a vivid example of this, just ask your-
self when was the last time you thought about the Guyana tragedy of last
November. Congressman Ryan, the slaughtered newsmen, and the hundreds of
helpless men, women, and children murdered at Jonestown are as dead today as
they were then; but today, who thinks about it? Russia lost her secret missile
base in Guyana, about which I had been warning publicly for over four years. A
joint American-Israeli commando raid wiped it out, and the Bolsheviks got
away with killing hundreds of Americans as a publicity stunt which was used to
gain military access to Guyana. They got away with it because we, the Ameri-
can people, quickly lost interest in having our questions answered.
And so in the recent Cuban non-crisis, the Russians knew exactly what to do.
First they programmed the Senator Church robotoid to grab the ball about
Cuba. They made him make stern statements that those Russian troops would
have to go, otherwise no SALT II treaty. Then the robotized Carter Administra-
tion spent a full month pretending not to know quite what to do. Gradually the
Bolshevik-inspired fever over Cuba cooled off—anything that could drag on
that long could hardly be a real crisis, and besides the World Series was just
around the corner. The whole Cuba flap gradually began to get boring. Finally
the first evening of this month, Monday October 1, Jimmy Carter robotoid No.
17 grinned out at America on television. Our robotoid President praised Russia
for new assurances he had supposedly received, quote: “from the highest levels
of the Soviet government.” The so-called assurances amounted to a declaration
that Russia was not about to change a thing in Cuba. Then robotoid Carter an-
nounced a few muscle-flexing exercises to make everyone feel good. A small
new military unit would be set up in south Florida to watch the Caribbean more
closely. We would step up surveillance of Cuba, and sometime soon some Ma-
rines would be sent to visit our naval base at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba. On
Capitol Hill, reaction to the speech was feeble—with one exception. The excep-
178
Audio Letter 51
tion was robotoid Senator Frank Church. Before the speech, the Church ro-
botoid had been holding up the SALT II treaty. Afterwards, he announced that
he was sufficiently encouraged to allow consideration of SALT II to get under
way in his Foreign Relations Committee; but to keep up appearances, he pre-
tended not to be completely satisfied yet.
During the remainder of this month of October, SALT II has been gathering
steam. In mid October the process called “marking up the treaty”—that is, con-
sidering amendments and changes—got going. All along, the Bolshevik plan
has been to kill the treaty by adding amendments unsatisfactory to Russia; but
already several killer amendments have been defeated in Committee. Robotoid
Church, along with several other robotoids on the Foreign Relations Commit-
tee, is doing his job. As programmed, he is so far succeeding in moving SALT
II right along. Meanwhile the Cuban non-crisis is gradually fizzling out.
Four days after Carter’s speech on Cuba, an American SR-71 reconnaissance

plane reportedly went sight-seeing over Cuba; and on October 17, more than
two weeks after the Carter robotoid speech, the Marines finally showed up at
Guantanamo Bay. Originally the mock amphibious assault was scheduled to
take place as dawn was breaking; but since the whole thing was for domestic
consumption here at home anyway, the time was changed to 8:30 A.M. By then
the sun was up nice and bright. As explained in an Associated Press dispatch
the previous day, quote: “In addition to providing better light for TV cameras,
officials said the change would keep Marines from getting hurt while boarding
the boats in the dark.” And so it was, my friends, that on the television news
that evening, we got to watch the United States Marines scamper ashore at
Guantanamo Bay.
As of now, the Bolsheviks are trying frantically to devise some new stratagem
to upset SALT II. And, as I will discuss in Topic #3, they may yet succeed in
doing so; but at this moment, the Russian campaign to sell SALT II is gathering
momentum. Only two days ago, on October 25, the Russians dropped another
important weight into the balance. The Senate Majority Leader, robotoid Sena-
tor Robert Byrd, announced he will vote for SALT II. The late Senator Byrd
himself, from my home state of West Virginia, visited Russia this past June.
The organic robotoid who returned in his place has been working ever since for
the passage of SALT II.
The Russian program to pass SALT II also includes much more than their ro-
botoid maneuvers in Congress. The ratification of SALT II is becoming a
thread which runs through the entire fabric of American defense and foreign
policy. No matter where you stand you will find arguments in the news today
179
designed to appeal to you. The greatest single worry which most Americans
have about SALT II is that it will weaken us militarily; and as I mentioned ear-
lier, that is exactly its purpose. Russia’s rulers want to do this in order to
prevent nuclear war if possible, but the Guyana episode last year proved con-
clusively that most Americans prefer comfortable lies over the uncomfortable
truth! Time is precious, because the Bolsheviks here in the United States are
working day and night to try to bring about war, NUCLEAR WAR. And so,
instead of trying to explain everything to a public that does not care about the
truth, the Russians are telling us what we want to hear. They are convinced that
the alternative would be the death of hundreds of millions in nuclear fireballs;
and given the choice, they believe human lives count more than words. As
Brezhnev No. 2 of Russia said last June at the SALT II signing in Vienna, “God
will not forgive us if we fail.” So every possible argument is now being used to
sell SALT II. We are being told SALT II will make us safer by making it harder
for Russia to hide what it is doing militarily.
Meanwhile, all kinds of new military toys are being publicized widely on the
American side. The leader is the MX missile. If it is ever built, the MX will not
be fully operational for ten years, but its impact in making people feel stronger
is here already. Likewise there is talk of an ABM defensive missile to protect
the MX installations, and maneuverable missile warheads for our missiles to
evade any future Russian ABMs.
Another variation, though, is that we are too weak to do without SALT II. This
theme is basically true, thanks to Russia’s secret space triad of weapons. As
I’ve detailed in the past, these are: the manned Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satel-
lites, the manned bases on the moon, and the manned electrogravitic platforms
called Cosmospheres floating high over our heads and in other land and sea ar-
eas of the earth. These super weapons were developed in secret by Russia and
deployed suddenly during the closing months of 1977. The United States has no
equivalent space triad and is at a great military disadvantage as a result. But
most people today are living in the distant past, scientifically; and so the fact
that we are too weak to do without SALT II is explained in more understand-
able ways. For example, someone points out that America’s highly publicized
quick-reaction force still exists only on paper. We do not have enough air lift or
sea lift capabilities to actually make it work. No wonder it took the Marines 16
days to get to Guantanamo Bay after robotoid Carter’s speech.
And then to make things worse, none other than robotoid Henry Kissinger
throws cold water on NATO. In a Brussels speech last month on September 1,
robotoid Kissinger said, quote: “Our European allies should not keep asking us
to multiply strategic assurances that we cannot possibly mean.” In this and
180
Audio Letter 51
other ways, the Russians are shaking Europe’s confidence in the United States;
and in the process they have set up what may be the most powerful selling point
of all for SALT II, because now the ratification of SALT II is increasingly seen
as a test of leadership for America. On one hand, Europe wants nothing to do
with any more wars; on the other hand, the strange behavior of the secretly ro-
botized Carter Administration is destroying confidence. NATO leaders are
beginning to say: If Carter can’t get a SALT II treaty, what good can he do?
This move may be the cleverest maneuver yet by Russia. Should the Senate
somehow fail to ratify SALT II, it could spell the end of the NATO alliance.
War might then be inevitable, but America would stand alone. If SALT II is
ratified, NATO may continue; but the desired disarming of America will also
be under way.
My friends, in the AUDIO LETTER for this past June 1979 I explained that the
ratification of SALT II could well be the key issue that will decide between
PEACE and WAR for America and Russia; and early this month on October 3,
a headline in the Washington Star said, “UNITED STATES-SOVIET
RELATIONS BACK IN HOLDING PATTERN.” The article itself said, quote:
“The whole relationship is hung up on whether the Senate ratifies the Strategic
Arms Limitations treaty.” And an Administration official was quoted as saying,
“It’s an unstructured relationship because there’s nothing but SALT on the ta-
ble.” SALT II is of supreme importance to Russia’s rulers. It will be only a
beginning; but without that beginning, nothing else can follow. Already pro-
SALT members of the Senate Foreign Relations Committee are talking about
SALT III. On October 15 the robotoid replacement for the late Senator Jacob
Javits of New York said, quote: “We want reductions.”
By the same token, my friends, the Bolsheviks want desperately to defeat

SALT II and stop the process. They don’t want reductions; they want WAR. Of
all people, Russia’s new rulers never forget that surprises are always possible in
any human activity. They also know from long and bitter experience that the
Bolsheviks have an uncanny talent for springing surprises. In fact, another of
these surprises has just taken place, as I will discuss in Topic #3. And so by
every possible means, the Russians are working to dismantle America’s ability
to wage war. They already have crushing military superiority over the West; but
where the Bolsheviks are involved, that is not enough. So long as the Bolshe-
viks are left with as much as a box of matches, there is always a chance that
they will find a way to burn the house down.
We sometimes forget that as of now, there is no SALT treaty of any kind.

SALT I expired over two years ago on October 3, 1977; but once SALT II is in
force, it will provide Russia with an important new tool. It remains to be seen
181
exactly how Russia will use SALT II, but the effect will be to begin putting
handcuffs on the Bolshevik war planners here in America.
Topic #3—Five months ago I reported that Russia had begun deploying an as-
tonishing new Intelligence weapon. These are the “organic robotoids”—
artificial robot-like living creatures that simulate human beings. By introducing
the robotoids, the Russians were able to make a shambles of the Bolshevik
plans then in progress. Preparations were moving fast for a new Bolshevik
revolution here in the United States, but the Russian robotoids stopped it cold.
Even more importantly, the joint Bolshevik and Zionist Middle East war plan
was thwarted, at least for the time being. This prevented the Bolsheviks from
going ahead with the rest of their plan for an American nuclear first strike
against Russia.
Since that time, the Russians have been pressing forward with their robotoid
take-over of the United States. Within weeks, the year-and-a-half SALT II
stalemate vanished and the treaty was signed in Vienna; and for months now,
major surprises have been peppering the news which are the direct result of
Russia’s robotoid invasion. I alerted you to watch for these in AUDIO LETTER
No. 46, and have commented on them as they have taken place. In Topic #2 I
pointed out the continuation of the Senator Church robotoid strategy to undo
the Cuba crisis and save SALT II, and this month there continued to be impor-
tant new developments in Russia’s robotoid take-over here.
A very important case has to do with America’s new relations with Red China.
In 1978, the Carter Administration was in a state of panic over Russia’s newly
deployed crushing military power in space. The so-called China-card policy
was the result.
America suddenly dumped Taiwan and recognized Red China last December,
but the Russians are working fast to unravel the ties between the United States
and China. Russia is determined to re-establish her own working relationship
with China. This month talks are continuing between Russian and Chinese offi-
cials in Moscow with this goal in view. And suddenly, just this month, a
Federal District Judge has ruled that it is illegal for President Carter to breach
the treaty with Taiwan. Instead, he says, Congress must be consulted. Only last
June the same judge had refused to rule in the case; but since then Russia’s ro-
botoid take-over here has changed things, and so out of the blue has come the
surprise thunderbolt of this ruling. It could hardly be better calculated to shake
Chinese confidence in the United States, and it comes at the very moment when
Red Chinese negotiators are staring across the table at their Russian counter-
parts in Moscow.
182
Audio Letter 51
In every possible way, the Russians are trying to make use of their robotoid ad-
vantage while they can, because there is a lesson which runs throughout
military history and the Russians know it well. That lesson is that when one
side in a conflict develops a new weapon, the other side will soon counter it
with a similar weapon. So a new weapon can decide a conflict only if it is used
quickly.
In AUDIO LETTERS 46 and 47 I reported that robotoid technology in the

United States is far behind that of Russia, but now the Bolshevik and Zionist
enemies of Russia have achieved their own surprise. The Rothschild interests,
which control both movements, have for many years been deeply involved in
biological research of all kinds. They have not succeeded in learning the secrets
of the Russian robotoids, but they have achieved success with something simi-
lar. They are called “synthetic automatons” or simply “synthetics.” A
Rothschild synthetic is similar to a Russian robotoid in certain ways. Each is an
artificial life form designed to simulate a human being, but synthetics also dif-
fer from robotoids in important ways. For one thing, they are generated by
radically different techniques. Both utilize genetic samples from actual humans
as their starting point, but beyond that everything is different.
The Russian process is a close relative of recombinant DNA techniques involv-

ing bacteria. The details of the process are shrouded in great secrecy, but it
enables robotoids to be generated from scratch very rapidly. The Rothschild
process, by contrast, does not start from scratch. Instead, certain tissues ex-
tracted from cattle are the starting point. The synthetic is then generated in a
process that changes the genetic make-up in order to simulate a person being
copied. It is the outgrowth of a discovery made 20 years ago in France. The ex-
periment involved two species of ducks called khaki Campbells and white
Pekins. The landmark duck experiment of 1959 was reported in a book titled
“THE BIOLOGICAL TIME BOMB” by Gordon Rettray Taylor. It was pub-
lished in 1968 by the New American Library, New York, N.Y. Taylor
described the experiment in the words, quote: “They had extracted DNA from
the cells of the khaki Campbells and had injected it into the white Pekins, think-
ing that just possibly the offspring of the latter might show some character
derived from khaki Campbells. To their astonishment, the actual ducks they in-
jected began to change. Their white feathers darkened, and their necks began to
take on the peculiar curve which is a mark of the khaki Campbell.” Beginning
with that clue of two decades ago, the Rothschild synthetic process has been
developed in secret; and now, my friends, synthetics are beginning to appear on
the scene.
183
Earlier this month on October 9, Carter robotoid No. 18 was scheduled to hold
a news conference. Three days earlier, Brezhnev No. 2 had made his proposals
in East Berlin for military reductions in Europe. Robotoid No. 18 had been pro-
grammed to react positively to the proposals, but instead our alleged President
said, quote: “I think it’s an effort designed to disarm the willingness or eager-
ness of our allies adequately to defend themselves.” The Russians were
dumfounded. This was a fresh robotoid, surely the recurring instability problem
could not be showing up this fast! After the news conference, he was bundled
off for examination and testing, and that produced the second surprise. It was
not robotoid No. 18 at all, but a synthetic. The synthetic was then transported to
Novosibirsk for further study. There robotoid scientists were able to establish
an important and unpleasant fact: the source of the genetic material used in
generating the synthetic had been robotoid No. 18; and whereas the Russian
robotoids vary somewhat from one to another, the synthetic was virtually iden-
tical in appearance to the missing robotoid No. 18. But an important favorable
fact was also discovered—the synthetics are inferior mentally to the robotoids.
It is not yet clear how fast the Bolsheviks will be able to deploy their synthetics,
but the guerilla war between the Rothschild synthetics and the Russian ro-
botoids is already beginning.
The Carter synthetic on October 9 was a shock to the Russians, and yet they
have known for months that the synthetics would soon appear. For that reason,
the Russians are beginning to re-emphasize their other weapons in their battle
against the Bolsheviks here in America. As of now, they are beginning to use
geophysical warfare again as part of their overall campaign to whittle away at
the danger of nuclear war. On October 16, Chairman Hua of China was in
France, trying to buy Mirage Fighters among other things; but the Russians sent
a clear message to both France and China that they should forget the whole
idea. That day a Russian geophysical warfare weapon was set off in an undersea
trench in the Mediterranean off Nice, France. It produced a sudden ebb tide,
followed by a tidal wave that smashed 36 miles of the French Riviera. It was a
new experience for the French, but not for Chairman Hua. The Russians used
geophysical warfare to give him a message a year ago, as I reported in AUDIO
LETTER No. 38.
But for us Americans, it is now coming closer to home. In AUDIO LETTER

No. 41 I reported the planting of 46 bombs underground for earthquake genera-
tion in California. During the past few months, the Russians have been setting
off preliminary quakes with gradually rising strength. On August 6 the strong-
est quake in 68 years—5.9 on the Richter scale—shook San Francisco, and this
month on October 15 a Richter 6.4 quake was set off in southern California.
The Russians are becoming convinced that their robotoids will not be enough to
184
Audio Letter 51
stop the Bolsheviks. As I have reported in recent months, they have been
slowed by troubles with the robotoids, and now they are faced with the added
problem of the Rothschild synthetics. And so rather than let the Bolsheviks re-
group and launch nuclear war, the Russians are turning once again to
geophysical warfare, including weather warfare. The west coast is a prime tar-
get because of the heavy concentrations of aerospace and military activity there.
The Kremlin is debating whether the time has come after all to unleash the great
man-made catastrophe on America’s west coast.
185
Audio Letter 52
November 30, 1979
Where will you be, my friends, if nuclear fireballs begin erupting soon over the
United States of America? If war comes, will you be among the majority of
Americans who will be caught by surprise? Or will you be among the few who
will have escaped from target areas in time?
I pray that war will not come, but at this very moment the world is teetering
dangerously close to thermonuclear catastrophe; and if it happens, air raid si-
rens and radio alerts will come too late. It will be like Hiroshima just after dawn
on August 6, 1945. Radio Hiroshima began to broadcast an air raid alert, but
never finished! It was cut short by the unearthly flash of a second dawn as a
man made sun rose over the city. These are the true stakes, my friends, in the
present crisis over American hostages in Iran. The hostages are only helpless
pawns in a deadly chess game behind the scenes.
For more than two years now, a world-wide secret war has been under way.
The secret war is between the new rulers of Russia and the overthrown rulers of
Russia—the Bolsheviks now here in America. Last month I reported that,
quote: “The secret war may soon surface in very spectacular ways. When that
happens, most people still will not know the reasons for what they see; but the
events themselves will make headlines the world over.” Eight days after I re-
corded those words in AUDIO LETTER No. 51, the present crisis in Iran
suddenly began. The American Embassy in Tehran was overrun, supposedly by
Iranian students, and more than 60 hostages were taken. Today, more than three
weeks later, some 50 Americans are still being held hostage. Day by day the
crisis has deepened. On both sides there has been confusion, and one contradic-
tion after another. Iran, like the United States, is speaking with several voices in
the crisis because Iran, like the United States, is a battleground in this secret
war.
The real reason for the Iran crisis is one that I warned about 15 months ago in
AUDIO LETTER No. 37. The Bolsheviks here in America have created a plan
to launch an American nuclear first strike against Russia. The plan has been
updated and revised continuously since I first revealed it in AUDIO LETTER
187
No. 37, but the underlying military strategy has not changed at all and Iran is an
indispensable key to that strategy. The Bolsheviks intend for the Iran crisis to
cause American and other troops to pour into Iran. As a pretext, we will be told
that it has become necessary for America to seize Iran’s oil fields and facilities
to keep Iranian oil flowing; but the real purpose will be to get ready fast for a
sneak attack on Russia. This is the real meaning of the Iran crisis, and yet the
crisis so far is not going according to Bolshevik plan. For the past six months
the Russians have been seizing control of certain key positions of power here in
the United States. Up to now, Russia’s new rulers have relatively few agents
here compared to the vast number of their Bolshevik enemies; but the Russians
are working from the top down for maximum leverage. They were unable to
prevent the Iran crisis, but they are using their new power here to alter its
course. Up to now, the Russians have been able to keep their Bolshevik ene-
mies here in America off balance in the Iran crisis.
Two months ago in the crisis over Russian troops in Cuba, they were content to
make the whole affair just fizzle out; but this time the chess players in the
Kremlin are shooting for checkmate.
They are having to calculate their moves very quickly, but they are calculating
carefully because their goal is to wreck the Bolshevik war plan built around
Iran. Right now, my friends, the world is staggering along like a blindfolded
man only inches away from the unseen chasm of nuclear war. If the Russian
maneuvering is successful, we will be pulled a step toward safety; but one
wrong move and the Bolsheviks here in America will push us over the edge.
Topic #1—STRATEGIC IRAN AND THE ISLAMIC KHOMEINI

REVOLUTION
Topic #2—THE BOLSHEVIK IRAN STRATEGY FOR THERMONUCLEAR

WAR, and
Topic #3—AMERICAN HOSTAGES AND THE BATTLE OF TEHRAN.
Topic #1—The Iran crisis was triggered by an event here in the United States
late last month. On October 22 the deposed Shah of Iran arrived in New York
City, ostensibly for medical treatment. As a result, tempers boiled over fast in
Iran and in less than two weeks the United States Embassy in Tehran was at-
tacked and seized. To understand the headlines of today about Iran, you need to
know why and how the Shah was deposed. You deserve to know some key
188
Audio Letter 52
facts about the Khomeini government which the news media are not telling you.
Also, there are certain things about the religion of Islam itself which you must
know, because otherwise you’ll be unable to interpret what you see happening
in the Iran crisis.
Only a short two months ago we Americans were preoccupied with a different
crisis. We were worried, not about American hostages in Iran, but about reports
of a Russian Combat Brigade in Cuba. And a year ago this month there was a
fake alarm over Russian MiG-23 Fighters in Cuba. Yet during the days of the
Shah, Iran amounted to a super Cuba against Russia. Iran is 15 times the size of
Cuba with three times the population, and the Shah was turning it into an armed
camp as an American puppet. The Iranian Army was being whipped into a large
modern fighting force. The very latest in America’s supersonic fighters, the F-
14, was being shipped to Iran in great numbers complete with the advanced
Phoenix missile; and the Iranian Navy was growing steadily. American-made
warships were being shipped to Iran with equipment even more sophisticated
than that supplied to the United States Navy.
Over the years we have heard often about the 60,000 to 70,000 Russians in
Cuba; but how often have we heard our robotoid President say in a press con-
ference, as he did just two nights ago, quote: “I think one of the points that
should be made is that a year ago we had 70,000 Americans in Iran, 70,000!”
Iran was becoming a great engine of war fueled by Iranian oil, and at the con-
trols sat the Shah of Iran, a puppet of the Rockefeller cartel. But the strength of
the Shah was also his weakness. His secret police force, the SAVAK, was hated
and dreaded universally by Iranians. As many as 60,000 Iranians may have died
at the hands of the SAVAK, many of them under torture; and meanwhile at the
urging of his then masters, the Rockefellers, the Shah was trying to remake Iran
in the Western mold. Some Iranians welcomed these changes, but others only
resented them. To them, Western influences, especially from America, meant
support for the Shah’s reign of terror. This turned everything Western into a
symbol of hate and fear; and, most of all, millions felt that the Shah was turning
Iran away from her ancient roots as an Islamic society.
Islam was founded 1400 years ago by the prophet Mohammed. Moslems be-
lieve that God communicated directly to Mohammed through the angel Gabriel,
and that Mohammed wrote those words down. The collection of these writings
is known as the Koran.
The religion based on the Koran is called Islam; and its adherents, Moslems.
Islam is a major force in the world, especially in the Middle East, Africa, and
189
southern Asia. There are as many Moslems in the world as there are Roman
Catholics—around 700,000,000; and yet most of us in the West have no under-
standing at all of Islam. Instead, we are in the habit of looking at the Moslem
world through Western eyes, and that always leaves us bewildered. Our igno-
rance of Islam is so great that not so long ago Moslems were typically called
Mohammedans by Western Christians; and since we Christians worship Christ,
it is often assumed that the people we wrongly call Mohammedans worship
Mohammed; but nothing could be more offensive to a Moslem. The basic tenet
of Islam is that there is no god but Allah, and Mohammed is His prophet. Allah
is the Moslem name for God. Mohammed’s memory is loved and revered but
he is not worshipped. The Koran, the Holy Book of Islam, is not a book of laws
nor is Mohammed thought of as a law giver, like Moses. Instead, the Koran is
an eloquent appeal to mankind, and especially to the Arabs to obey the law of
God. Over and over the Koran states that the law of God has already been re-
vealed to the Jews and to the Christians. In fact, in one passage the Koran tells
the pious Moslem if he has any doubt, to consult those to whom the Scriptures
have been revealed previously. Even so, it is a great mistake to expect Moslems
to think in terms that are familiar to us. For one thing, we in the West tend to
separate religion from other areas of life—such as business, law, and diplo-
macy. To a devout Moslem, this is unthinkable for in Islam, religion is life
itself.
In the present crisis over Iran, several very important points of Moslem law and
diplomacy are involved. The Moslem approach in these matters is not the same
as in the West. Instead, they have been derived down through the centuries
from the Koran, from examples set by the Prophet himself, and from other
sources. Once you become aware of these things, I think the Iran crisis may be-
gin to take on a different appearance in important ways.
I am about to give you several important quotations from a highly authoritative

book on these matters. It is titled “LAW IN THE MIDDLE EAST,” Volume I,
by Majid Khadduri and Herbert J. Liebesny. It was published in 1955 by the
Middle East Institute here in Washington, D.C. First, in the West we generally
think in terms of separation of church and state, but, quote:
“Islam, in contrast to Christianity, combined both the religious and civil author-
ity in the hands of the head of the state.”
Before Islam was founded, the Arab world was a scene of continual fighting,
intertribal warfare, with raids for robbery or vendettas; but, quote:
“Islam abolished all wars except the jihad—that is, the holy war.”
190
Audio Letter 52
It had to be, quote:
“War that would spread the belief in Allah and make His Word supreme over
the world.”
No other kind of war was legally permitted. In addition, the jihad, quote:
“had to be conducted according to certain specific rules in order to be just. The

violation of these rules deprived the jihad of its religious sanction, and entailed
punishment by Allah or the imam whether in this world or the next.”
The first of these rules is that, quote:
“The jihad was a required duty of the whole Moslem community, binding the
Moslems en masse rather than individually.”
The second rule is that, quote:
“The jihad may be regarded as a doctrine of permanent war.”
But thirdly, quote:
“The jihad, though a doctrine of permanent war, did not necessarily mean con-
tinuous fighting. The objective of the jihad was not fighting per se but the
conversion of unbelievers to Islam. If means other than fighting were used,
such as propaganda or persuasion, then the jihad duty was fulfilled. The essence
of the doctrine was that the Moslems could not relax their effort to convert the
unbelievers.”
And, finally, quote:
“The validity of the jihad depended on the observance of certain rules. The
imam had to declare the jihad, to invite the unbelievers to adopt Islam before
fighting began, and to agree to negotiations if they were requested by the en-
emy before actual fighting had taken place.”
Beyond these general rules, there is one more point of Islamic law which bears
directly on the present Iran crisis. It has to do with the treatment of hostages,
quote:
191
“The system of taking human hostages to insure the sanctity of treaties was fol-
lowed by the Moslems. If the treaty were violated, however, the Moslems did
not kill the hostages. If the Moslems started the war, the hostages were sent
back home; but if the war was started by the other party, then the hostages were
kept.”
In other words, my friends, under Moslem law, the worst that can legally be
done to hostages is to keep them indefinitely. Their position as hostages cannot
justify their being killed.
The hostages in Tehran, my friends, are there in connection with a jihad led by
Ayatollah Khomeini. He has publicly proclaimed that Iran is embarked on a
holy war against America, “the great Satan.” He has called upon all Moslems
everywhere to join in the struggle, and yet the Ayatollah is being manipulated
by forces which he may not understand.
When the Shah was in power, he was building up Iran for war purposes which
had nothing to do with a jihad; and as he Westernized his country, he also ter-
rorized it. As a result, many pockets of discontent and opposition developed
against the Shah. One of the most forceful of these was Ayatollah Khomeini.
Ayatollah Khomeini was an implacable foe of the Shah for many years before
we began hearing about him here in the United States. The Ayatollah had good
reason to know the character of the Shah’s regime. Years ago the agents of the
Shah tortured and murdered one of the sons of the Ayatollah, and a generation
ago the present Shah’s father executed Ayatollah Khomeini’s father; and so
even when he was driven into exile, the Ayatollah did not cease in his efforts
against the Shah’s regime. From his places of exile he continued to appeal to
his followers in Iran. He exhorted them to turn away from the Shah and turn
back to Islam. And in accordance with the Shiite Moslem beliefs, he extolled
martyrdom in service to God as something to be desired. He told his followers
to oppose the Shah without fear, accepting martyrdom as a reward if it should
come. The Ayatollah spent 14 long years in exile, most of them without seri-
ously threatening the Shah’s regime; and yet, early this year of 1979, Ayatollah
Khomeini returned in triumph to Tehran. In less than a year’s time a revolution
had suddenly crystallized around him.
The sudden rise in the Ayatollah’s political fortunes took place for reasons he
could never have suspected. It all began two years ago this month in November
1977. In mid month the Shah of Iran made a sudden rush, rush trip here to
Washington, D.C., but news about the Shah’s mysterious trip was practically
lost in the headlines about another unexpected rush trip. It was the week of the
192
Audio Letter 52
trip to Jerusalem by Egypt’s President Sadat. The two trips were closely related,
as I revealed that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 28.
Two months earlier Russia had begun the rapid deployment of a secret arsenal
of space weapons, her new space triad. The controlled Carter Administration
was reeling from the shock, but in November 1977 the sudden trips by Sadat
and the Shah were the shaky beginnings of America’s shift to a first-strike
strategy. When the Shah discovered just how crucial Iran was becoming mili-
tarily, he decided to demand better reimbursement by the Rockefeller cartel for
services rendered.
A consortium of 14 oil companies marketed Iran’s oil under contract, and it was
contract-renewal time. The Shah said he was willing to renew, but only on more
favorable terms. Hearing that and other demands, the late David Rockefeller
began thinking his Shah was expendable and this new situation might offer an
opportunity to get rid of British Petroleum as an unwanted partner. Originally
the Iranian oil fields had been controlled by Britain, but in 1953 the Rockefel-
lers had acquired major concessions in Iran as the price of restoring the pliable
Shah to his throne. By 1977 BP was down to only a 40% share in Iran’s oil,
while the Rockefeller cartel controlled 49%; but as usual, David Rockefeller
wanted the whole pie. British Petroleum was an arch rival to be knocked out if
possible, and so Rockefeller gave an assignment to what was then still his pri-
vate detective agency, the CIA. They were to figure out how to get rid of the
Shah in such a way that it would also knock out BP; but the CIA was also or-
dered to make sure that any plan they developed could also be used militarily.
The CIA planners concluded that the only way to get rid of British Petroleum in
Iran would be to disband the consortium of oil companies—in other words, the
Shah should be removed in favor of someone who would nationalize the Iranian
oil industry. For decades the Rockefellers had made a specialty of re-
establishing their own effective control over nationalized industries, as I have
indicated in AUDIO LETTER No. 40 about Guyana and other tapes. As for the
military factor, surprise had become the No. 1 consideration. In view of Rus-
sia’s newly deployed space triad, most of the Shah’s expensive weapons were
no longer of much use. They could still be used in regional conflicts, but that
was no longer of interest. Nothing mattered any more except the ability to
mount a surprise attack on Russia from Iran, and that would have to be done
using secret weapons instead of the Shah’s impressive-looking conventional
weapons. So it was concluded that there was no military reason not to over-
throw the Shah; and, in fact, overthrowing the Shah held out the possibility of
greater military surprise against Russia. To do this, the new regime would have
to be one that did not want to continue the Shah’s military programs. That
would cause a dramatic collapse of Iran as a highly visible military threat to
193
Russia, but it was also essential that whoever followed the Shah be less effi-
cient organizationally than the Shah. This would allow covert activities to
continue in Iran without the new regime being aware of it.
The CIA then carried out a search for a candidate individual, or group, to re-
place the Shah. They were not looking for a puppet this time, instead the
concept was to find someone having certain characteristics who could be ma-
neuvered without their knowledge into serving the intended purposes. The
search ended by identifying Ayatollah Khomeini. He fit the profile of desired
characteristics: he was violently anti-Shah, his position as a religious leader
provided an ideal base for political power, yet his group was weak organiza-
tionally and lacked administrative experience. Even the Ayatollah’s fascination
with martyrdom looked ideal to the war planners because the government of
Ayatollah Khomeini is to be sacrificed to a military purpose. It is Guyana all
over again, but on a grand scale. One year ago this month, as I reported in
AUDIO LETTER No. 40, the deliberate mass human sacrifice at Jonestown had
a military purpose. It was to achieve surprise and the destruction of the secret
Russian missile base about which I had warned publicly for over four years.
This time, human sacrifice in Iran is intended to lead to the destruction of Rus-
sia herself. And so after a dozen years in obscurity, the cause of Ayatollah
Khomeini suddenly started picking up steam. In countless ways the CIA began
multiplying Khomeini’s impact in Iran. Cassette tapes of the Ayatollah’s fiery
speeches flooded the country; photos of the Ayatollah began to multiply, be-
coming a rallying point for opposition to the Shah; and covert CIA agents
began organizing the pro-Khomeini opposition to the Shah into a potent politi-
cal force. And in the process, the powerful Bolsheviks here in America were
able to put some of their own agents close to the inner circles of Ayatollah
Khomeini.
In August 1978 I alerted my listeners that the rioting in Iran was a serious threat
to the Shah’s regime. Four months later in AUDIO LETTER No. 41, I reported
that none other than the Shah’s former supporters, the Rockefeller cartel, were
causing his troubles. By early the following month, January 1979, the Shah’s
regime was visibly falling apart. The Deputy to General Alexander Haig (the
NATO Commander) was then sent to Iran on orders from Washington. There
he met with top Iranian military leaders. Following orders, the NATO Deputy
Commander, Major General Robert E. Huyser, talked Iran’s Military out of
staging a coup d’etat. Washington’s unstated purpose in ordering General
Huyser to Iran was to clear the way for Ayatollah Khomeini.
194
Audio Letter 52
The old Hegelian principle of thesis, antithesis, and synthesis was at work: Step
1—Remove the powerful Shah; Step 2—Replace him with an interim straw
man, the unpopular Bakhtiar government; and Step 3—Allow this weak straw
man to be knocked down by Ayatollah Khomeini. But the Rockefeller cartel
was afraid the Iranian Military would substitute their own Step 3. The Military
wanted to set up a stable, moderate, pro-West regime. The CIA first-strike
planners wanted anything but stability in Iran, and so the Iranian military lead-
ers were talked out of staging a coup. Later on they were tried for treason and
executed by the Khomeini government.
On January 16, 1979, the Shah fled from Iran. Barely two weeks later, on Janu-
ary 31, the Ayatollah made his triumphal return to Tehran. The unseen,
unsuspected CIA support for the Islamic Khomeini revolution had done its job.
That is what CIA Director Stansfield Turner meant in a statement he made only
four days later on February 4. On the ABC television news program “Issues and
Answers,” Turner said, quote: “I would suggest even Ayatollah Khomeini
didn’t realize how well his force was moving along.”
Even so, an event took place only one week after the Ayatollah’s return which
might still have ended the Khomeini revolution. When the “old man” and some
aides came out the door of the Khomeini headquarters on February 7, 1979, an
assassin was waiting. He shot the old man in the chest with an arsenic-coated
high-powered bullet. All efforts to save him were useless, and that night the old
man died. For several hours the British news agency REUTERS carried bulle-
tins that the Ayatollah had been reported killed, but there were no such bulletins
by American news agencies because the Rockefeller cartel here knew that Aya-
tollah Khomeini was not dead. The old man who was shot to death in Tehran
last February 1979 was a “double.” He was a devoted Shiite follower of his be-
loved Ayatollah Khomeini. He knew, like everyone else in the Khomeini inner
circle, that efforts would be made to assassinate the Ayatollah; but as a devout
Shiite Moslem, the “double” welcomed the prospect of martyrdom as a sacred
privilege, and so he willingly gave his life to insure the success of the Islamic
Khomeini revolution. And as we all know, the revolution did succeed, but the
cruel fact is that it was secretly helped along by Satanic forces who plan to
undo it all. They plan to martyr the entire Khomeini government as they set off
thermonuclear war.
Topic #2—The present crisis in Iran is the outgrowth of the CIA plan set in mo-
tion two years ago by David Rockefeller. But the four Rockefeller brothers did
not live to see their war plans carried out; instead the remains of Rockefeller
power are being carved up today by two bitter enemies on the world stage.
195
They are the joint heirs of the situation created in Iran by the CIA, and now
they are both struggling for control in the Iran crisis.
As the Shah of Iran was being overthrown in the early days of 1979, the Rocke-
fellers were being overthrown here in America. Just 10 days after the Shah fled
from Iran, Nelson Rockefeller was murdered in New York City. It was the be-
ginning of a Bolshevik coup d’etat against the Rockefellers. The Bolshevik
purge here in the United States continued out of the public eye.
By late February 1979 the new Khomeini regime was taking hold in Iran, and at
the same time the Bolsheviks were taking control here in America. When these
changes were taking place, there were headlines about Iran but no hint of the
Bolshevik coup here in the United States. As they picked up the reins of Rocke-
feller power and CIA planning, the Bolsheviks were in a hurry.
The Bolsheviks are being expelled from their former positions of power in Rus-
sia, and they want to get even. They were trying to trigger a Middle East war by
mid May 1979 on the way to a nuclear first strike against Russia; and, at the
same time, they were planning to throw the world’s 700,000,000 Roman Catho-
lics into their war against Russia. The Bolsheviks were planning to set off what
was to be known as the “Pope’s Revolution” in eastern Europe. I gave the de-
tails of the plan in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. The key to the plan was to be the
papal visit to Poland on the 900th anniversary of the martyrdom of St. Stanis-
laus.
For a while the Bolshevik war plans were moving fast, but around Easter 1979
the Russians began intervening here in the United States. They began deploying
their “organic robotoids,” as I first revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 46. Using
them in the Middle East shuttles I described that month, the Russians prevented
a Middle East war in May. Likewise they were able to spoil the Bolshevik plan
for a Pope’s Revolution. In early May the Russians began eliminating Bolshe-
vik influence in the Vatican, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 46, and the
Pope’s visit to Poland was re-scheduled for June. By then the emotion sur-
rounding St. Stanislaus Day had cooled off and there was no trouble.
Ever since that time the United States has been a battleground in a secret war
between the Russians and the Bolsheviks here. Over the months I have been
keeping you informed about these developments. The Bolsheviks here are still
trying to find a way to throw America’s military power at Russia in a knockout
punch. Russia’s new Christian rulers are countering by a campaign to disarm
the United States, starting with the SALT II treaty. As of now, both sides—the
Russians and their Bolshevik enemies—exert great power here in the United
196
Audio Letter 52
States. Russian power here is based on their agents, both human and robotoid,
in top positions of power; but the Bolsheviks began infiltrating our land 30
years ago. Today they are in every nook and cranny of America, especially the
military. So the Bolshevik strategy now is to find ways to circumvent Russia’s
control at the top.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 46 I revealed how Russia prevented a Middle East

war in May by means of secret Middle East shuttles, but I also revealed that
their shuttles involving Iran were meeting with complete failure. Unknown to
Ayatollah Khomeini, Iran was and still is swarming with Bolshevik-Zionist
agents, and they have been able to keep Russia virtually locked out of Iran up to
now. Even so just over two months ago Russia did succeed in establishing a
way to monitor what goes on around the Ayatollah. Doing this had become a
top priority for Russia. Russian Intelligence agents had uncovered evidence that
the Bolsheviks here in America were once again moving fast toward war. Once
again the Bolsheviks were working toward a nuclear first strike against Russia;
and just as before, Iran was to be used somehow as the key to the plan. But the
Russians did not know exactly how Iran was to be used until late September,
two months ago. By the time Russian Intelligence had pieced it all together,
there was no time to be lost.
The joint Bolshevik-Zionist war plan called for a sequence of events to begin
on November 20; and once it began, the chain reaction toward war was de-
signed to be very hard to stop. As of late September 1979 the new Bolshevik
war plan consisted of six major steps:
Step #1 was to be a series of incidents beginning in Saudi Arabia during the an-
nual pilgrimage to Mecca. The incidents were being designed by the Bolshevik-
Zionists to inflame Moslem rage against the United States and Israel.
Step #2 was to be the American Embassy take-over in Tehran. Bolshevik-

Zionist agents in Iran had been feeding the resentment of the Iranian militants
against the Embassy; and under the cover of generalized rioting against the
United States in Moslem countries, the Embassy take-over was to be staged in
Tehran. At the same time, the plan was for Saudi Arabia to be growling with
rage at Israel over the incidents. This would have brought the “Hate Saudi Ara-
bia” campaign of a year ago out of the closet again in the Zionist media of the
United States. This was to lead to
Step #3—the long-planned, limited nuclear strike against Saudi Arabia’s oil
fields by Israel. This would have been like throwing gasoline into the fire storm
of Moslem passions. Seven hundred million Moslems would have united in the
197
spirit of the jihad (the holy war), and against this backdrop the Bolshevik-
Zionist plan was to carry out
Step #4—the slaughter of the hostages in Tehran. In Topic #1 I explained how

any such slaughter is forbidden by Islamic law; but we Americans, knowing
nothing about Islam, would have automatically blamed the Khomeini govern-
ment; and with American bodies coming home from Iran, like they did one year
ago from Guyana, we would have cried out for revenge.
In Step #5 the Bolsheviks here in America were planning to bring about a sud-
den, no-notice mass deployment of American troops and equipment to Iran. The
Bolsheviks have figured out how to do it without approval from the top where it
would be vetoed by Russian agents here in America. Once the troop deploy-
ment was under way, the Bolsheviks believe it would be impossible for Russia
to stop without herself triggering nuclear war; and under the cover of deploy-
ment, first-strike preparations would be rushed ahead by the Bolsheviks.
Step #6 was to be the actual nuclear attack on Russia. This, too, is to occur
without approval from top levels of the United States Government.
The military strategy of the “attack plan” is still basically as it was when I re-
corded AUDIO LETTER No. 37. The main difference now is that China’s
western provinces are not available to the Bolsheviks in power in the United
States, so Russia’s Cosmosphere installations in Central Siberia are targeted by
the United States missiles in northern Australia, which I revealed in AUDIO
LETTER No. 42. As I also explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, American
war-planners believe incorrectly that they can succeed in getting the missiles
launched.
It was not until late September that the Russians were able to piece together
their Intelligence and deduce this total plan. By then the destabilization inci-
dents in Saudi Arabia were less than two months away on the Bolshevik War-
Timetable, and it was clear that some of the forces in the Bolshevik plan had
already been set in motion irrevocably. Iranian militants in Tehran were already
being inflamed against the United States Embassy, and the provocations in
Saudi Arabia were tied directly to the Moslem calendar.
The situation was like a nightmare replay of the artificial “troops in Cuba cri-
sis” of two months ago. Forces had been set in motion which the Russians
could not hope to stop altogether. The Russians could see only one way to
block the fast-moving Bolshevik war plan. That was to do as they had done two
198
Audio Letter 52
months ago in the Cuba flap—that is, to pre-empt parts of the Bolshevik plan—
and that, my friends, is what they are doing now in the Iran crisis.
Meanwhile their Bolshevik-Zionist enemies are trying to revise their own plans
and still set off nuclear war. In the secret war between the Russians and the
Bolsheviks, Tehran is now the decisive battleground.
Topic #3—In the Battle of Tehran, the Russians are trying to make a shambles
of the sequence of events planned by the Bolsheviks. The Bolshevik plan is to
destroy Saudi Arabia’s oil fields, whereas Russia is doing everything possible
to prevent that. On the other hand, Iran’s oil fields are to be used by the Bol-
sheviks as a pretext for flooding American and other troops into Iran in the
preparation for the first strike. To prevent that, Russia plans to disable Iran’s oil
fields with air strikes of her own if it becomes necessary.
The initial step in Russia’s pre-emptive strategy was to bring the overthrown
Shah of Iran to New York City last month on October 22. To do this, the Rus-
sians used their robotoid doubles for the late David Rockefeller, Henry
Kissinger, and others whom I have identified in other tapes. The Shah was lured
here with hints that he might be restored a second time to the Peacock Throne,
but only his medical treatment was mentioned to the public as a cover. As ex-
pected, the Shah’s arrival here caused the passion stoked up by Bolshevik-
Zionist agents in Tehran to explode prematurely. Iranian militants there had
been led to expect the United States and Israel to do something foul toward Is-
lam in general, and Iran in particular. Reacting to the Shah’s arrival here, they
took over the American Embassy and took hostages on November 4. This was
more than two weeks before the triggering incidents planned by the Bolsheviks
for November 20, and there was no way for those incidents to be speeded up by
the Bolsheviks because they were tied directly to the Moslem calendar; but
immediately, as if on signal, Bolshevik-Zionist agents whipped up flames of
hatred against Iranian students here in the United States. On November 6, two
days after the take-over, Prime Minister Mehdi Bazargan resigned. This re-
sulted from a secret meeting one day before the Embassy take-over between
Bazargan and robotoid Zbigniew Brzezinski. It was a Russian maneuver to peel
away one layer of confusion in the crisis. It thrust the Ayatollah squarely into
the public eye as the only voice that really mattered in Iran, but behind the
scenes that voice is being influenced by other voices. For the next several days,
all was confusion over Iran.
Meanwhile the Bolsheviks here in America began testing their ability to launch
military operations without presidential approval. On Thursday November 8,
there was an alert for the Strategic Air Command and for paratroops of the
199
82nd Airborne. The next day, November 9, there was a dry run for a nuclear
war. At NORAD headquarters near Colorado Springs, Colorado, a computer
was fed false data indicating a missile attack on the United States. For test pur-
poses, the false data said only a few missiles were on the way, but the result
was a nuclear-war alert to every Command Center of the United States military.
All of our missile bases were placed on Preliminary Alert to be ready to launch
if so ordered; and just for good measure, several Jet Fighters were scrambled
into the air. For six minutes the NORAD computer was preparing for a nuclear
war. The computer thought it was a real attack, but there was no notice to the
President, to the Secretary of Defense, or even to the Joint Chiefs of Staff—
much less, air raid sirens. Then, the test was terminated. The Bolsheviks were
satisfied; it had been a complete success—but it was not overlooked by the
Russians!
Three days later a similar test took place involving troops. In the pre-dawn
hours of November 12, certain Paratroop and other units were suddenly mobi-
lized without previous warning. Within hours they were converging for
exercises at Fort Hood, Texas. Some 2,700 soldiers were involved, drawn from
the groups which the Bolsheviks here intend to deploy to Iran. Like the
NORAD war test, the Fort Hood exercise was actually set in motion without
top-level approval, and once again the Bolsheviks were completely satisfied. In
addition American troops have already been deployed secretly to forward posi-
tions in the Middle East. For example, over 2,000 American troops have
recently landed on the Omani island of Masira in the Arabian Sea.
On November 11, my friends, the war of words began heating up. That day
Ayatollah Khomeini stirred Iran with a fiery speech. To the ears of Shiite Mos-
lems it was a speech of dedication, but to Western ears it may seem to be an
echo of the Guyana suicide rehearsals of Jim Jones. The Ayatollah said, quote:
“We are a nation of 35-million, and many of these people are looking forward
to martyrdom. We will move with the 35-million. After they have all been mar-
tyred, then they can do what they want with Iran.”
The next day robotoid Jimmy Carter announced a reverse oil embargo against
Iran. The Bolshevik plan to send troops to Iran is built around creating a public
impression that Iranian oil is essential to us, which of course it is not. So to un-
dercut that Bolshevik ploy, it was announced that the United States refuses to
buy any more oil from Iran.
The same day, November 12, Russian Cosmospheres were reacting to the Bol-
shevik triggering of exercises at Fort Hood. Russian Cosmospheres were on
patrol over Spain in potential American airlift routes across the Mediterranean.
200
Audio Letter 52
That day the pilot of a Caravel Jet Liner in Spain saw four Cosmospheres at
close range. Thinking they were UFOs, he promptly landed at the next available
airport.
Two days later economic war broke out between the United States and Iran.
Iran announced that it was about to withdraw its deposits from United States
banks; but within hours robotoid Carter declared a National Emergency, acti-
vating presidential emergency powers. Under that alleged authority he froze
Iran’s assets here, and ostensibly abroad, amounting to some 8-billion dollars or
more. The freezing of Iran’s assets will lead to a collapse of the dollar abroad.
That will lead in turn to inflation and depression here in the United States. In
1929 America exported its depression to the rest of the world, but this time it
will be imported from the collapsing dollar market overseas.
On November 14 Russia also set off an earthquake in northeastern Iran measur-

ing 6.7 on the Richter scale. This was an attempt to distract the Khomeini
government with internal problems.
The next major development confounded both the Russians and the Bolsheviks.
On November 16 the Khomeini government threatened to stop accepting dol-
lars for oil. This was in retaliation for the order freezing Iranian funds here. For
a few days the media were mum about Iran, and gold prices went nowhere.
Having detected no particular reaction to their threat, the Iranians decided to
abandon their threat, for the moment, about not accepting dollars. It was the lull
before the storm. The Iranian militants released three hostages on November
19, and 10 more on November 20; but as for the rest, the Ayatollah said, quote:
“Spying has been proven by evidence.”
November 20, my friends, was the fateful day in the original Bolshevik plan. It
was the beginning of year 1400 in the Moslem calendar. It was the beginning of
the Month of Maharam of mourning for martyrs for the Shiite Moslems of Iran;
and it marked the start of the annual Moslem pilgrimage to Mecca, Saudi Ara-
bia. In early October Russia had alerted the Saudis through discreet channels in
Kuwait to expect trouble during this year’s pilgrimage. As a result the Saudis
deployed 17,000 Security men in Mecca, Medina, and Jeddi. The Russians also
warned the Saudis that the incidents, whatever their nature, will be coupled
with evidence of American and Israeli involvement. The Saudis were warned
that this was a trap designed to lure Saudi Arabia into a threatening stance to-
ward Israel. The very survival of Saudi Arabia would depend upon the Saudis
turning the other cheek, discounting these rumors, and managing the news.
201
On November 20 large bands of armed men stormed two of Saudi Arabia’s

great mosques. One was the Grand Mosque in the holy city of Mecca. Three
times the size of Yankee Stadium, the Grand Mosque houses within it the Kaba,
the holiest shrine of Islam, the holy of holies. The other mosque which was at-
tacked was the Prophets Mosque in Medina. As soon as the incidents began,
Saudi Arabia broke communications with the outside world. Crack Saudi Secu-
rity forces put down the Medina incident quickly, but it took days of bloody
fighting to retake the Grand Mosque. Even now, a few of the attackers are re-
ported to be still holding out in the catacombs under the mosque. Through it all
the Saudis were the model of restraint. It was the first attack on the Grand
Mosque in a thousand years, yet the Saudis waved it all aside as if it had been a
minor incident. They said the attackers were, quote:
“renegades operating outside the Moslem religion,” but bit their lips rather than
say more. Meanwhile the Russians made sure the focus stayed on Iran, not
Saudi Arabia.
The evening of November 20, robotoid Carter suddenly hinted broadly at pos-
sible military action against Iran. At the same time, the aircraft carrier Kitty
Hawk and companion ships were ordered into the Indian Ocean. There, over the
horizon, they will reinforce the carrier Midway and associated ships already
there.
Ayatollah Khomeini was given supposed evidence about the Mosque take-overs
in Saudi Arabia, and denounced them as American and Israeli inspired. Anti-
American Moslem riots erupted in several countries. The American Embassy in
Islamabad, Pakistan was sacked and burned, and a Marine guard was killed.
The Mosque attacks in Saudi Arabia had inflamed much of the Moslem
world—except for Saudi Arabia itself.
The war of words continues between Iran and the United States.
On November 22 the Ayatollah called it a conflict, quote:
“between Islam and the heathens,” or in other words, a jihad. On November 26

robotoid Carter declared the United States will discuss nothing at the United
Nations except the hostages, and Ayatollah Khomeini said Iran’s 20-million
youth should take up 20-million rifles and prepare to fight. The next day the
Ayatollah announced that the hostages will be tried. Meanwhile the insurgents
at the Embassy said that the Embassy is now wired with explosives. The White
House announced a pull-out of non-essential State Department personnel from
202
Audio Letter 52
eleven Moslem countries, and that day a Richter 7.3 earthquake provided new
distractions for the Khomeini regime.
The Battle of Tehran between the Russians and their Bolshevik-Zionist enemies
is building toward a climax. The Russians are convinced that the hostages are
already doomed to die by their Bolshevik-Zionist captors who control the situa-
tion in the Embassy and who are not true Moslems. Because of this, the
Russians are prepared to take military action in Iran to block any successful
Bolshevik-Zionist military actions there.
The stage is now set for war, leading to nuclear war; but, my friends, we should
reflect for a moment on how it all began. In recent weeks we have heard con-
tinually about “diplomatic immunity.” We are hearing that it is a terrible crime
that the United States Embassy has been captured; and yet the Rockefeller car-
tel captured their entire country. Is that not a crime too? In an AUDIO LETTER
several years ago I stated that the real shah of Iran was Richard Helms, then
Ambassador to Iran. Having been formerly Director of the CIA, Helms was op-
erating under the cloak of diplomatic immunity in Iran. He was in league with
the forces that were holding all of Iran hostage and torturing and killing thou-
sands of Iranians.
My friends, what we need today is not immunity but accountability of every-

one. We need to be rid of intrigue and maneuver—whether by Bolsheviks,
Zionists, Russians, or anyone else. We need a return to fair play and a restora-
tion of honesty and trust. We need to sweep out the cobwebs of secrecy and to
light up the darkness of our world with the searchlight of truth. In Iran we have
seen a revolution take place—the revolution of Ayatollah Khomeini. Unseen
forces are attempting to exploit the revolution for their own purposes, and yet it
is also a very real revolution. It is an Islamic revolution of an Islamic people
yearning to return to their roots.
The roots of the United States of America, my friends, are Christian; but like
Iran under the Shah, we too have been led far away from our roots, and what we
need to do is to return to these roots in a Christian way—a way of Light and
Truth. Through secrecy, intrigue, and double-cross we Americans have long
since become hostages in our own land; but as our Lord Jesus Christ said so
long ago, “...you shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free.”
(JOHN 8:32)
203
Audio Letter 53
January 21, 1980
It has now been seven weeks since I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 52 on the
last day of November, 1979. I want to thank each and every one of you for your
patience during this unavoidable delay.
The headlines in recent weeks have been filled with one shock after another.
For example, the alleged former Shah of Iran has made sudden surprise
moves—first to Texas, then to Panama. The world has been jolted by a radical
change in the behavior of Russia, starting with massive intervention in Af-
ghanistan. And even more startling, the United States is answering Russia with
a revival of the Cold War. Meanwhile the gold skyrocket is seemingly streaking
higher and higher in panic buying, and hanging over it all is the dark cloud of
the expanding Iran crisis. In a matter of weeks the international climate has un-
dergone a dramatic change. The blue skies of peace and prosperity are fading
away. Suddenly the atmosphere is filled with the smell of approaching war, and
the events in the headlines are only a pale shadow of what is taking place be-
hind the scenes. Since I spoke with you in AUDIO LETTER No. 52, I have
been receiving an avalanche of urgent Intelligence reports. Drastic secret devel-
opments have been taking place world-wide which have turned the international
scene upside down. The most important of these have taken place right here in
the United States, and in Russia. Now at last I am in a position to bring you up
to date on what has happened.
My friends, during the weeks just passed, the prospects for world peace have
been shattered. Here in the United States powerful forces who are bent on war
are fast gaining the upper hand. And in Russia the “peace faction” in the Krem-
lin has been toppled from power. It began as a family squabble among the
secret new Christian rulers of Russia, and it ended in tragedy for some. The re-
sult has been a return to power by the hard-liners among the secret sect that
now rules Russia. The rise to power by the Christian “peace faction” in Russia
was a miracle, but it was a miracle that was short-lived. It is now over, and now
the world is once again moving down the path to THERMONUCLEAR WAR.
The hard-liners now running the Kremlin are members of the same religious
group as the “peace faction.” The hard-liners and the “peace faction” disagree
205
on only one major point. The “peace faction,” who are known as the “White
Doves,” believe nuclear war must be prevented if it is humanly possible. By
contrast, the hard-liners believe nuclear war is inevitable; so, my friends, their
guiding military strategy is not to prevent nuclear war indefinitely but to WIN it
when it comes.
Topic #1—WAR TENSIONS AND THE LATE SHAH OF IRAN
Topic #2—THE SURPRISE TAKE-OVER BY THE KREMLIN “HARD-

LINERS”
Topic #3—THE NUCLEAR STRIKE OPERATIONS NOW IN PROGRESS
Topic #1—Four nights ago on Thursday, January 17, millions of Americans

tuned in the ABC television program “20/20.” The program that night presented
a heavily-edited interview by the British television personality David Frost. The
person interviewed was said to be the former Shah of Iran. The individual we
saw on the David Frost interview looked, sounded, and acted very much like
the Shah, but he looked much healthier than the sickly-looking Shah in New
York two months ago. This was true even though news reports had been saying
the Shah’s condition was deteriorating. Almost every time he answered a ques-
tion the face became expressionless, and the eyes froze into a glassy stare. He
spoke slowly, haltingly, as if groping around in a fuzzy memory to find the an-
swers. And time after time he just gave up and said simply, “I don’t remember
that.”
Later that same evening ABC presented its nightly special on the Iran crisis.
The program began with some follow-up discussion of the David Frost inter-
view program. Dr. Joseph Sisco, former Under-Secretary of State, was among
those asked for his reactions to the interview. Sisco appeared to be shaken by
what he had seen. He said the Shah he knew had always been able to discuss
the intricacies of geopolitics, not only as they affect the Persian Gulf but world-
wide. By contrast, the man he saw on the David Frost interview was, quote:
“Uncertain in his speech; a completely different man from the one I knew.”
My friends, Dr. Sisco could not have been more right. The individual inter-
viewed by David Frost in Panama was not the Shah at all. In fact, he was not
even a human being. It was a kind of living robot, known as a “synthetic
automaton,” or more briefly, a “Synthetic.” I first revealed last October 1979 in
AUDIO LETTER No. 51 that Synthetics were beginning to appear on the
206
Audio Letter 53
scene. They are being deployed as a tool of intrigue by the warlike Bolsheviks
here in the United States. They are the Bolshevik answer to another type of bio-
logical robot which the Russians began deploying earlier in 1979. The Russian
type is known as an “Organic Robotoid,” and I first made them public in
AUDIO LETTER No. 46 last May. Both the Russian “Robotoids” and the Bol-
shevik “Synthetics” are remarkable creatures. They are manufactured by
radically different technologies; but they have one thing in common—they are
both artificial life-forms which live and breathe but have to be programmed like
computers, and they are the products of three decades of spectacular scientific
discoveries out of public view. I have given a little of the scientific background
in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 47 and 51, but Robotoids and Synthetics remain
perhaps the most secret of all Intelligence weapons.
In my previous tapes about these biological robots, I have mentioned that their
most critical feature is their biological computer brain. In that regard, the Rus-
sian Robotoids are far superior to the Bolshevik Synthetics. That’s because of
their holographic brain, which I described in detail in AUDIO LETTER No. 47.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 51 I mentioned the low brain quality of the Synthet-
ics; and if you were watching the alleged Shah of Iran in the David Frost
interview the other night, you saw a perfect example with your own eyes. Syn-
thetics easily pass for human beings, but they act dull-witted compared to the
humans which they simulate. When David Frost interviewed the Synthetic
“double” for the former Shah, he no doubt thought he was talking with the real
thing; but by that time the real Shah had been dead for well over a month. He
died in the early morning hours of Sunday, December 2, 1979.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 52 last November I explained why the Shah had been
brought to New York City in the first place. He did undergo medical treatment,
but that could have been done elsewhere. The once mighty Shah arrived in New
York as a mere pawn in a deadly world-wide game of chess. For more than two
years a secret war has been in progress between the new rulers of Russia and
the overthrown former rulers of Russia, the Bolsheviks. Having been expelled
from Russia by the tens of thousands, the old Bolsheviks have been flocking
mainly here to the United States. They are in a rage to strike back at Russia, and
they plan to do it using America’s military power.
Over the past two years and more a sophisticated new Bolshevik revolution has
been under way without fanfare here in the United States. I have kept my lis-
teners informed about this situation in past AUDIO LETTERS.
The Bolsheviks are in a do-or-die frenzy to throw America’s military might at

Russia; and in AUDIO LETTER No. 37 for August 1978, I revealed how they
207
plan to do it. The Bolshevik war plan is based on an American nuclear first
strike against Russia; and the chain of events to lead up to the first strike was to
begin with a crisis over Iran. That is what I made public nearly a year and a half
ago, and that is what is going on now right before our very eyes. My friends, we
are on the road to NUCLEAR WAR ONE!
In AUDIO LETTER No. 52 I explained the purpose for which the former Shah
of Iran was lured to New York City in late October. This was a Russian ploy
carried out using their own Robotoid replacements for certain powerful Ameri-
cans. They had discovered that the Bolsheviks here in America were setting in
motion the dreaded Iran crisis. It was already too late for the Russians to pre-
vent the crisis from erupting, so instead they maneuvered the Shah here in a
pre-emptive strategy to change the course of the crisis. I gave the details of all
this in AUDIO LETTER No. 52, so I won’t repeat it again here. The Russian
maneuvers involving the former Shah of Iran were set in motion while the
Kremlin “peace faction,” the White Doves, were still calling the shots. They
succeeded in their plan to make the former Shah the center of the Iran crisis,
contrary to the Bolshevik plans; and later, when the time was ripe, they were
planning to use their control over the Shah to make the crisis fizzle out. But, as
I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 52, the Russians had their hands full in try-
ing to sort out the Iran crisis. The Shah’s trip to New York City was arranged
on short notice. Having accomplished that much, the Russians put the Shah “on
ice” during November 1979 while they concentrated on other pressing aspects
of the crisis. As December 1979 began, Russian agents here in the United States
were preparing for new moves involving the Shah. For over five weeks the
Shah had been holding court and receiving medical treatment at the New York
hospital, Cornell Medical Center, in New York City. His suite on the 17th floor
was walled off by a special barricade of bullet-proof glass. Everything having
to do with the Shah was subject to intensive security precautions. Unknown to
the Shah himself, he was the key to Russia’s plan to unravel the Iranian crisis
without war; so the one thing the Russians could not afford was to have some-
thing happen to the Shah at that time.
By the time I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 52 on November 30, 1979, plans
were being laid to move the Shah. The Russians had begun to penetrate the
Bolshevik strangle hold on Iran and were establishing a dialogue with the
Khomeini government. The time had come to remove the Shah from the hospi-
tal. The advance preparations at the hospital were subtle—but not subtle
enough. They were detected by Bolshevik agents within the hospital, and they
were successful in learning the details of the plan to move the Shah before it
took place. Shortly after 4:00 A.M. on the morning of December 2, 1979, the
Shah left his hospital room in a wheel chair. He was accompanied by armed
208
Audio Letter 53
guards, including FBI agents brandishing submachine guns. They entered an

elevator on the 17th floor of the hospital and went down to the subbasement.
From there the Shah and his guards traveled along an underground tunnel to the
Payson House staff residence on East 71st Street. There the Shah’s party en-
tered a parking garage. The Shah was wheeled up to a blue-green FBI van. The
Shah was helped out of his wheel chair and into the van. As soon as the Shah
was inside, the doors of the van were shut and the van started moving. As it did
so, three FBI cars joined up as an escort. The four-vehicle motorcade drove
carefully toward the exit of the parking garage. As they did so, one of the
Shah’s guards in the van pulled out a powerful gun equipped with a silencer. He
and the other guards in the Shah’s van turned out to be Bolshevik Synthetics.
By the time the Shah’s van reached the exit of the parking garage the Shah’s
body lay slumped on the floor inside. Like his former patron Nelson Rockefel-
ler, the Shah had died of a single bullet to the forehead. The other Synthetics in
the front of the van did exactly as programmed. They drove on as if nothing had
happened. FBI agents in the other cars detected no hint that anything was
wrong. The motorcade drove the rest of the way to La Guardia Airport without
incident. Only when the van was opened at the Airport was it discovered what
had taken place.
News reports that day and the next were filled with headlines about the Shah’s
mysterious move to Texas. On television we were shown an Air Force DC-9
taking off in the darkness at La Guardia. We were told that the Shah was
aboard, but he was not! His body was kept in a remote location at New York’s
La Guardia Airport until around 6:00 P.M. that evening, after which it was
flown to a southern state for disposal. When the DC-9 was shown landing at the
Air Base in Texas, we were told again it was the Shah’s plane. Normally Lack-
land Air Force Base is unrestricted, but the Air Base was suddenly closed after
the plane landed. There was confusion. Initially, Air Force officials at the Base
said there would be a Press Conference that afternoon, but soon they reversed
themselves. They not only canceled the Press Conference but told all reporters
to leave the Base immediately or be forcibly ejected. The public relations plans
which had been made ahead of time just fell apart. Instead a cover-up was hast-
ily set in motion on orders from certain Russian agents in the Pentagon.
In the days that followed, all was mystery concerning the Shah. He was said to
be in certain hospital quarters at Lackland; but as days passed and no one saw
the Shah, questions began to multiply. Had it been suspected that the Shah was
already dead, the Bolshevik agents holding the American hostages in Tehran
might have killed the hostages, and that could have led very quickly to nuclear
war. Meanwhile the Bolsheviks here in America were preparing to take control
of the Shah controversy.
209
The Bolshevik Synthetics are programmed by a technique completely different

from that used by the Russians with their Robotoids. It is not as good, but it
also does not require a cerebral hologram. Bolshevik agents in New York had
been able to obtain the genetic samples needed, and on Saturday December 15
there was a new surprise regarding the Shah. He was said to have left Texas
that morning for a small island off Panama. Then the invisible Shah seemingly
reappeared in the form of a Synthetic, and since that time the Shah’s image has
been utilized by the Bolsheviks. As I told you earlier, it was a Synthetic that
was seen in the David Frost television interview four nights ago. What hap-
pened to the late Shah of Iran is only part of a much larger pattern of recent
days.
The Bolshevik deployment of Synthetics began in earnest three months ago, as

I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 51. As a by-product of this, bizarre cattle
mutilations are once again taking place in North America. A few years ago
there was a rash of these incidents in the western United States. At that time the
earliest large-scale experiments were under way with Synthetics. Now, after a
lull, the Synthetics are being deployed operationally, and the cattle mutilations
have resumed. Right now, however, they are taking place primarily in Canada
to minimize attention to them here in the United States. My friends, the cattle
mutilations are nothing more than a modern twist on cattle rustling. The Syn-
thetic process uses certain glands and tissues of cattle as raw material, as I
explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 51. To obtain these raw materials, the cattle
involved have to be destroyed in a very wasteful manner; so the Bolshevik
agents who are manufacturing Synthetics do not use their own cattle, instead
they let others suffer the losses involved in slaughtered herds. The cattle mutila-
tions may turn into an epidemic that is too big to ignore, because during the
past three months the Bolshevik circles have started deploying Synthetics in
great numbers.
A covert war of biological robots is now raging world-wide between the Rus-
sians and their old Bolshevik enemies. The Russians got a head start by
deploying their Robotoids first, last spring; but they knew their advantage
would not last long, and they tried to use it fast to nail down approval of the
SALT II treaty. Soviet Foreign Minister Andrei Gromyko summed it up last
June 25, 1979. In an unprecedented two-hour news conference in Moscow he
paused at one point and said simply, “Fantastic situation.”
My friends, the dangers we face now are fantastic, but so was aerial warfare
until World War I, the atomic bomb until World War II, and moon flight until
Project Apollo. The Bolsheviks in our midst are obsessed with their schemes
210
Audio Letter 53
for revolution and war, rule or ruin. Using their Synthetics, they are fast regain-
ing the power they were losing at the hands of Russia’s Robotoids. Unlike the
Russians, the Bolsheviks have an entrenched power base here in the United
States; and so the Russians are now losing the invisible war of the biological
robots. With every day that their power increases, the Bolsheviks here in Amer-
ica redouble their frenzy to seize still more power.
To advance their revolution here, the Bolsheviks are gradually shutting down
America. Tremors are shaking our economic system, and the United States dol-
lar is awaiting the moment of collapse. In April 1974 I gave a warning in
Congressional testimony about plans which were being laid for a gold sky-
rocket. I testified that the plan called for gold to streak upward past $2,000 per
ounce, and I described how this was tied to the secret theft of America’s mone-
tary gold supply by international forces. I later offered to present evidence and
witnesses under oath, but Congress was not interested. Then I went public with
my warnings. But lies and maneuvers by the United States Treasury Depart-
ment were swallowed like honey by most Americans, so nothing lasting was
done to stop the plan for our economic destruction. Now, the gold skyrocket is
a matter of daily headlines. Since I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 52 less than
two months ago, the price of gold has more than doubled. Gold auctions by the
gold-poor United States Treasury have stopped, as I alerted you they would in
December of 1978, AUDIO LETTER No. 41. Thousands of people are lining
up to turn in their gold and silver, thinking they are receiving good dollars in
exchange. But that’s because the dollar is still being propped up artificially.
When the time is ripe in Bolshevik plans, the props will be pulled out and the
dollar will crash. The dollar is on the road to repudiation, which will make it
worthless; and many of the wealthy abroad now believe that the United States
does not have the gold it claims to have. The very few who do know about the
plan to repudiate the dollar are not selling their gold and silver. They are hold-
ing on to it, and even buying more.
As the Bolsheviks press ahead in taking control of the United States, they are
also working overtime to get ready for war. They want to destroy Russia, and
they want you and me to do their dirty work. They already know that
NUCLEAR WAR ONE will kill three out of every four Americans, but that
does not worry them. Using their positions of privilege and power here in
America, they believe they will survive, so they can’t wait to throw the United
States into nuclear war against Russia.
When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 52 last November 30, the official line
we were hearing daily was that Moslem students were holding our hostages in
Tehran. Those stories were lies, and I told you so. The situation in the Embassy
211
is controlled by Bolshevik agents. They are not true Moslems at all, and are be-
yond the control of Ayatollah Khomeini. Now more than a month later, you’re
hearing a distorted echo of what I told you then. It is now being admitted that
Ayatollah Khomeini does not control those who are holding our hostages, but
you are being fed only half truths designed to rally your support for war. Thir-
teen days ago on January 8, 1980, a Synthetic “double” for our late President
Carter said, quote: “The most powerful single political entity in Iran consists of
the international terrorists, or the kidnappers who are holding our hostages”—
but their Bolshevik ties are not mentioned! Instead, you are being given the im-
pression that they may be Russian inspired in some manner. Two months ago
all Iranians were being lumped together, and the Bolsheviks were whipping up
Americans into hating them all; but now we are suddenly hearing about the
threat to Iran from Russia. We are being prepared for war with declarations that
we may have to defend Iran militarily.
The Bolshevik military strategy remains as I described it nearly a year and a

half ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. I will now repeat, word for word, the
warning I gave you then:
“The American public will demand that it is time for the United States to stand
up to Russia; and with full public support, American troops and weapons will
pour into Iran. From that point onward, the outbreak of NUCLEAR WAR ONE
will be all but impossible for the public to follow by way of the so-called
news.”
Topic #2—For nearly two years beginning early in 1978, Russia’s policies were
controlled by the “peace faction” in the Kremlin, the “White Doves.” Mean-
while their Bolshevik enemies here in the United States have continued their
relentless drive for war. As a result, the policies of the Kremlin “peace faction”
have now been abandoned. Recent events in both the United States and Russia
have brought about this change. My friends, you will not be able to understand
events in the days to come if you do not understand the recent Kremlin take-
over by the Hard-Liners; and to understand that, you need to remember the
background of events which have led up to this point during the past several
years.
I first began discussing the new rulers of Russia in AUDIO LETTER No. 28 for
November 1977. Later on I revealed much more about them in AUDIO
LETTER No. 38, which was a special issue dealing entirely with Russia. Rus-
sia’s new rulers struggled for six decades to overthrow the Bolsheviks, and
through this long and bitter struggle the secret Kremlin Christians came to
know the disease of Bolshevism more intimately than anyone else on earth. As
212
Audio Letter 53
I revealed also in AUDIO LETTER No. 38, they are embarked on what they
consider a holy war to wipe out Bolshevism from the face of the earth. So long
as it still survives anywhere in the world, they are convinced that both Russia
and Christianity itself will be in mortal danger. Even so, there have always been
two factions within the secret sect of Kremlin Christians on the issue of nuclear
war. They all agree that nuclear war would be horrendous, but they disagree on
whether it can be avoided. The minority faction, the White Doves, believe it is
possible to avoid nuclear war; but the majority, the Hard-Liners, believe other-
wise. They are convinced that no matter how many times nuclear war may be
delayed, their Bolshevik enemies will eventually bring it about; and so they in-
sist that the only realistic thing to do is to make sure Russia will win the war
when it comes with as few casualties as possible.
The secret Kremlin Christians first began to outweigh the Bolsheviks in power
when Joseph Stalin died in 1953. From that time until early 1978 the Hard-
Liners were in power, and they were anxious to speed the day when Russia
would break free not only from the Bolsheviks in Russia but also from the
Rockefeller Cartel. In the summer of 1976 Russia began preparing for a limited
nuclear Pearl Harbor attack against the United States, Great Britain, and other
countries. It was the Underwater Missile Crisis of 1976, which I revealed in
AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 14 through 16. It was a desperate situation, as my
long-time listeners will recall; and yet the strategy of Admiral Gorshkov, the
head of the Russian Navy, was one of limited war. If his naval strategy had
worked, the initial attack on strategic coastal targets would have made further
warfare useless. As I outlined in AUDIO LETTER No. 18, the world’s ICBM’s
and other nuclear weapons would never have been used. But the limited public
exposure of the underwater missile crisis through my AUDIO LETTERS had
its consequences in the Kremlin. The Russians lost the critical element of sur-
prise, and so the White Doves argued that the result of the Hard-Liners’ gamble
could easily have been not limited war but total war. They insisted that Russia
must never again try to deliberately trigger nuclear war. From then on, the in-
fluence of the White Doves grew steadily, but the Hard-Liners headed by the
original Leonid Brezhnev stayed in the driver’s seat until the end of 1977. It
was the Hard-Liners who presided over Russia’s lightning-fast deployment of
her secret new “Space Triad” of weapons during late 1977. I reported the de-
ployment as it took place in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 26 through 29.
All three legs of the Space Triad are built around Particle Beam Weapons. Up
to now, Russia is still the only nation to deploy Particle Beams as operational
weapons. The first leg of Russia’s Space Triad are the Cosmos Interceptors.
These are manned killer satellites armed with Particle Beams. I first reported
that they were operational in September 1977. They began destroying Amer-
213
ica’s fleet of Spy Satellites. An especially equipped Cosmos Interceptor, Cos-

mos 954, fought history’s first true space battle—the Battle of the Harvest
Moon, September 27, 1977. Firing a special Neutron Particle Beam, Cosmos
954 knocked out America’s secret military base on the moon.
The Russians then quickly deployed their own military bases on the moon, and
these constitute the second leg of the Space Triad. Today Russian Particle
Beam Weapons are located in seven (7) places on the near side of the moon.
They can strike any visible spot on earth less than two (2) seconds after pulling
the trigger; and they can deliver a blast of devastating force, as proven in the
test firing of November 19, 1977, which I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 29
the following month.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 29 I also reported the beginning of Russia’s deploy-

ment of the third leg of her Space Triad. These are the Cosmospheres—
electrogravitic weapon platforms which can hover over any spot on earth. They
can operate in altitudes from ground level to about 800 miles, and are armed
with Charged Particle Beams. The first few Cosmospheres to be deployed over
the United States were used in an effort at intimidation. In late December 1977
they began firing their Beam Weapons into the atmosphere off the east coast in
a defocused mode. The results were the mysterious giant air booms which came
rumbling in from the Atlantic Ocean to rattle and shake thousands of homes.
Government and other spokesmen put out all kinds of stories to try to explain
away the booms. One of the favorites was based on the Concorde supersonic
transport. Somehow, we were told, the shock waves must be racing far ahead of
the plane and causing the booms. Can you imagine? As I told you at the time,
explanations like that were just ridiculous cover stories and lies; and recently a
scientific study at Cornell University headed by Professor A. R. George proved
exactly what I told you two years ago—that is, a freak shock wave racing ahead
of the Concorde could not have produced those bone-rattling booms. But two
years ago, the stories served their purpose. People swallowed them and calmed
down.
With the deployment of the secret Russian Space Triad during the closing days
of 1977, the Russians were acting more aggressive by the day, but the No. 1
Hard-Liner in the Kremlin then was Leonid Brezhnev and his health was fail-
ing. He died on January 7, 1978, as I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 33. I
also revealed that the new No. 1 man in the Kremlin was then Marshal Dmitry
Ustinov, the Defense Minister. Ustinov was the leader of the White Doves, the
“peace faction,” and from then on the Kremlin concentrated on preventing nu-
clear war by using SALT II to begin disarming their Bolshevik enemies here in
America. After they deployed the Robotoids last spring, they almost succeeded
214
Audio Letter 53
with SALT II; but during the past few months they have been dealt one reversal
after another by the Bolsheviks, and with the Synthetics now entering the pic-
ture, heated debate broke out in the Kremlin early last October between the
White Doves and the Hard-Liners. Then tragedy struck in late October 1979.
Suddenly the men who had been ruling Russia since early 1978 began dying of
poison. These included Marshal Ustinov; Leonid Brezhnev No. 2, the ceremo-
nial “double” for the late real Brezhnev; Chief of Staff Nikolai Ogarkov; and a
number of others. Since then they have all been replaced by Robotoids. The
men who died were members of the “peace faction.” They had accepted the fact
that their mandate to govern was at an end. The new ruling group in Russia to-
day are the Hard-Liners, and their leader is Admiral Sergei Gorshkov.
Topic #3—The final legacy of the White Doves was their plan to use the Shah
of Iran to unravel the Iranian crisis. The new Hard-Liners followed through
with that plan out of reverence for their fallen friends; but when the Bolsheviks
assassinated the Shah on December 2, they were ready to shift very quickly to
more aggressive policies. The pace of events since then has been speeding up
fast.
On December 12 NATO Foreign Ministers meeting in Brussels agreed to the

new American plan for nuclear missiles to be aimed at Russia. Immediately the
Kremlin totally withdrew all offers for negotiating arms control agreements in
Europe. The Russians declared that NATO had destroyed the basis for negotia-
tions. The Russians had also learned that the Bolsheviks in the United States
were preparing to seize the Iranian oil fields, using the American hostages as an
excuse. Russia prepared to move into Afghanistan. On December 27, 1979, a
pro-Russian coup in Kabul brought the new regime of Babrak Karmal to power,
and within days tens of thousands of Russian troops were pouring into Afghani-
stan. It was a classic case of chess-playing by Russia’s rulers. When an expert
chess player makes a move, he always does so in anticipation of other moves to
come. He evaluates the moves which his opponent will be forced to make in
retaliation and has already planned how he will respond to those. Whenever
possible he tries to provoke moves by his opponent which will work to his own
advantage. And so it was in Afghanistan.
First the Bolsheviks were deliberately provoking Russia by means of large-

scale insurgent operations in Afghanistan. These were supported by at least 18
separate rebel bases in neighboring Pakistan and involved Bolshevik CIA op-
eratives and Chinese agents there. Afghan insurgents had already taken control
of two-thirds of the country, and operations were also under way to stir up Mos-
lem unrest in the whole region. Since Russia has 40-million Moslems of her
own, these actions were bound to draw a response from Russia. The Bolsheviks
215
here in America were fostering these operations in order to lure Russia into ag-
gressive-looking behavior near Iran. Their plan, as I revealed in AUDIO
LETTER No. 37 is, quote: “Incidents and clashes will condition the American
public to the increasingly aggressive behavior of Russia.” But, my friends, the
Russians know that is the Bolshevik war plan so they have looked one step be-
yond the Bolsheviks, and they are letting the Bolsheviks of America walk right
into a military trap.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 37 I explained the plan for an American nuclear first
strike against Russia. Its basic objective is to destroy the ground bases in Russia
for her awesome Space Triad. There are six targets in this plan—four are rocket
bases called Cosmodromes, the other two are the Cosmosphere installations in
south central Siberia. The plan calls for the targets to be attacked by American
secret weapons, which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. The four Cos-
modromes are to be attacked from bases in northern Norway and the Caspian
Sea coast of Iran. Hybrid machines called “Submersible Aircraft” or “Subcraft”
are to be used. As for the Cosmosphere installations in Central Siberia, the
original plan was to use Sinkiang Province in western China as the base. In
AUDIO LETTER No. 52 I stated that Sinkiang Province is not available; but
early this month, on January 4, a Synthetic “double” for Defense Secretary
Harold Brown went to China to try to change that. The Bolsheviks want to use
Sinkiang Province to launch high speed pilotless aircraft called RPV’s into
Russia.
After Russia took action in Afghanistan, the Bolsheviks here in the United
States began whipping up war fever quickly. On January 4 the Carter Synthetic
then in the White House spoke on television about American retaliation for
Russia’s intrusion into Afghanistan. Calling Russia’s rulers a, quote: “atheistic
government,” the Carter Synthetic fired a series of broadsides. Invoking the old
Bolshevik weapon of hunger, he embargoed 17-million tons of grain from go-
ing to Russia. To dramatize the crisis in a universal way, he threatened to pull
the United States out of the Summer Olympics in Moscow; and to further kill
hopes for peace, he suspended consideration of SALT II.
In the days that followed, we began hearing more and more about the alleged
threat to Iran from Russia, and within the past week or so the message suddenly
started getting through to people. Everywhere I go I hear people talking about
the threat of war, and THE THREAT IS REAL, my friends. Several days ago
the military preparations for conflict shifted into high gear. Many Reservists are
being called up all over the United States without a word about it in the news.
216
Audio Letter 53
On January 12 the Kremlin issued a statement in the name of Leonid Brezhnev

denouncing the Carter Administration. It spoke of the United States as having
become, quote: “an absolutely unreliable partner in international ties.” It said
the United States was, quote: “sending to the shores of Iran a naval armada
armed with atomic weapons and including a considerable part of the United
States Carrier force.” And, quote: “If there were no Afghanistan, certain circles
in the United States and NATO would surely have found another pretext to ag-
gravate the situation in the world.”
As the supposed Brezhnev statement was issued, two American Carrier Task
forces were in the Arabian Sea near Iran built around the Midway and the Kitty
Hawk. Two days later a third powerful Carrier group arrived. It includes Amer-
ica’s newest and biggest Carrier, the nuclear-powered Nimitz, as well as the
nuclear-powered Cruisers California and Texas.
On January 17 the Russian Navy began deploying fast toward the Indian Ocean.
A late model Kara-class Cruiser and four other ships were spotted sailing south
through the Japan Sea that morning. By the following day, January 18, there
were over 180 Russian Submarines on the way and still more were being or-
dered to join them; and at the same time Submarines were swarming into
position around the United States armed with Neutron Missiles. Meanwhile a
State Department spokesman helped heat up the crisis atmosphere. He said,
quote: “Our commitment to Iran’s territorial integrity stands, despite their viola-
tion of International Law represented by their continued holding of our people.”
The same evening, just last Friday, some television news programs tossed in
items to say any conflict over Iran could quickly lead to nuclear war. And as
these events were unfolding, Russian Cosmospheres were forming up over the
crisis area. By early Friday evening there were 144 Cosmospheres on alert hov-
ering over the Arabian Sea and adjacent land areas from Saudi Arabia to
southern India. Last Saturday, January 19, robotoid Ambassador Thomas Wat-
son returned to Moscow after weeks of absence. When he arrived at the airport
he said, quote: “There is no doubt but what we are in a very serious situation”;
and as he spoke of hopes for good will and effort on both sides, echoes of Pearl
Harbor were in the making.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 34 I described how Japan was lured into making an
attack on Pearl Harbor. First, Japanese anger at the United States had been
stirred up by a variety of boycott techniques. Then, our fleet at Pearl Harbor
was held out as an enticing target. Most of our Pacific fleet were conveniently
bottled up in the harbor and they sat peacefully at anchor unable to respond
quickly in an emergency, but our three Aircraft Carriers had been pulled away
217
to safety because they were indispensable to the plans for counterattack against
Japan.
Today it is four decades later and we live in a new era of weaponry, so now it is
the Aircraft Carriers themselves which have been demoted to the status of bait
in a war trap. As of my latest report yesterday evening, all three American Air-
craft Carriers near Iran are sitting at anchor. All are near the entrance to the
Persian Gulf along the coast of Oman. The Midway and Kitty Hawk are resting
at opposite ends of the Island of Masira; and the big prize, the Nimitz, is about
twenty-five miles southeast of the capital, Muscat.
American statements have been designed to fuel Russian suspicions of an

American military strike into Iran. This is intended to draw Russia’s Navy into
the region in order to counter the United States military build-up there; and by
ordering the Carriers to sit at anchor, the Bolsheviks in the United States mili-
tary establishment hope to provoke the Russians into an attack but it is all a
gigantic diversionary action. The purpose is to distract the Russians from the
real preparations for a nuclear first strike against Russia. These preparations are
the ones I warned about in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. When American military
sources detected Russia’s massive naval deployment beginning January 17, it
indicated that the plan was working. By the following day the Bolsheviks were
sure. The Russian Navy was converging toward the Arabian Sea with break-
neck speed.
At that point the real action got under way in the Caspian Sea and off northern
Norway. The Subcraft with Israeli pilots were on their way. They were travel-
ing under water on the first legs of their attack missions. By late Saturday night,
two nights ago, the number of Russian naval vessels in the Arabian Sea was
approaching 400. The majority of these were Submarines of all types; and as
anticipated, the Russian fleet was fanning out into a band stretching from Saudi
Arabia to India. The Russians were sealing off the southern portion of the Ara-
bian Sea. As a result, American naval forces in the area, including the three
Aircraft Carriers, are trapped. They are bottled up and hopelessly outnumbered,
but all of this was exactly as expected by the American Bolsheviks; and so late
Saturday night, Washington time, a coded signal was flashed to the Subcraft to
continue as planned. By that time, the northern contingent of Subcraft were in
the White Sea. The southern contingent had reached the north end of the Cas-
pian Sea. It was already daylight Sunday morning, the 20th, for the Subcraft
contingents. Their orders were to wait out the day under water, out of sight;
then, after nightfall they were to continue their steady approach to get close to
their targets. The Subcraft were maintaining strict radio silence. They were also
deep enough under water to be invisible from the air to either the eye or radar,
218
Audio Letter 53
yet they were also hugging the shorelines in water too shallow for Russian so-
nar to pick them up, and their infrared signatures were negligible as the result of
extensive development. In short, by the standards of Western technology, they
were undetectable; but in AUDIO LETTER No. 42 I revealed Russia’s master
secret weapon. It is called “Psychoenergetic Range Finding” or PRF. It is
unlike sonar and similar techniques. PRF tunes into the actual atomic signature
of a target, and there is no method known by which PRF can be jammed.
By deploying their Navy to the Arabian Sea, the Russians are pretending to be
fooled by the Bolshevik distraction with the Aircraft Carriers. In this way they
encouraged the Bolsheviks to launch the Subcraft toward their targets. They
waited until the Subcraft were far away from their bases and out of sight of the
Bolsheviks, who are directing the American first-strike operation; but the whole
time they were being tracked by Cosmospheres overhead using PRF, and
shortly after 1:00 A.M. yesterday morning Eastern Standard Time the Cosmos-
pheres began firing their Charged Particle Beam Weapons. There were 10
Subcraft in the White Sea. Each disappeared in a blinding blue-white water
spout of steam, smoke, and fire. In the north end of the Caspian there were 19
Subcraft—they, too, met the same fate.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 33 for April 1978 I revealed that the United States no
longer has Spy Satellites which can spy on Russia. By that time, Russia had al-
ready destroyed them all, using their Cosmos Interceptors; and so the Bolshevik
war-planners here in America were unable to observe the destruction of the
Subcraft. The Subcraft had also been instructed to maintain strict radio silence,
ironically to escape detection. So their total silence now has aroused no suspi-
cions on the part of the Bolsheviks.
At this moment the Russian Navy is still deployed in the Arabian Sea as before.
They are still pretending to be misled by the Bolshevik ploy with the Aircraft
Carriers, because the Subcraft contingents were only half of the first-strike plan
I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. The other half is to involve the RPV’s
in Sinkiang Province, China. When synthetic Defense Secretary Harold Brown
went to China earlier this month, agreement was reached to allow American
RPV’s into Sinkiang Province. They are on their way there now, and are due to
be set up for attack at the earliest possible moment.
The Bolsheviks here in America believe their Subcraft are now waiting at their
final checkpoints for the order to attack the Cosmodromes. They intend to give
that order as soon as the RPV’s are in place in Sinkiang Province. But the Rus-
sians intend to ruin the plan. Presently stationed along Russia’s border with
Sinkiang Province are four special Russian Commando detachments.
219
They are an elite corps, highly trained and armed with battlefield nuclear weap-
ons. They are there to attack and destroy the RPV’s upon arrival before they
can be fired. As a back-up, there are also 18 Cosmospheres overhead, but those
will not be used unless it becomes absolutely necessary. The Russians are sav-
ing their most powerful weapons for the big war to come for maximum
surprise. Right now they regard what they are doing as an operation to begin
pulling the fangs of the Bolshevik dragon. They used Cosmospheres to destroy
the Subcraft because their enemies were unable to observe it and learn any-
thing; but there will be witnesses, even if they say nothing publicly, in Sinkiang
Province.
The coming operation against Sinkiang Province is essential to the Russians,

and so the operation is under the command of a top member of the new ruling
group of Kremlin Hard-Liners. He is Victor Paputin, an engineer and formerly
second in command of Russia’s National Police. Early this month on January 3,
the day before the Harold Brown synthetic left for China, Pravda carried an an-
nouncement about Paputin. It reported his “untimely death,” but this was only a
cover story to explain his sudden absence from Moscow. He was actually on his
way to the Chinese border to be one step ahead of the Bolshevik first-strike
plan.
My friends, the decade of the 80’s is starting off as a decade of mortal danger;
but if the tempo of events continues at this rate, the danger will not last very far
into the decade. One way or another it will all be over, soon.
220
Audio Letter 54
February 24, 1980
Some day a few years from now the survivors of NUCLEAR WAR ONE will
start asking questions. They will look at the smoky remains of a devastated
world and ask: “How could this have happened? And why was it not pre-
vented?”
Perhaps you are one of those unhappy survivors. This message will have been
heard first early in 1980 by my listeners, but maybe you are not a 1980 listener.
Maybe you found this tape in an attic in 1985 or in a basement in 1990, and
perhaps you are playing it now out of curiosity with no idea of what I have to
say.
My friend, if you are listening to this message some day after NUCLEAR
WAR ONE, I am speaking especially to you; because unlike my listeners in
1980, you who are listening in 1985 or 1990 have the benefit of hindsight, a
sense of history. You know that NUCLEAR WAR ONE really did take place.
You know that it was more destructive than all the previous wars in history
combined; and you also know something which I, speaking in early 1980, do
not know. If you are a survivor of NUCLEAR WAR ONE as you listen to this
tape, you know who won the war. Did Russia’s new rulers achieve their goal of
total victory? Or did America’s new ruling circles, the Bolsheviks, succeed in
their goal of nuclear stalemate with 350-million dead world-wide? As a survi-
vor of the war, you will know the answer to that question, but you will still be
asking all those questions about Why and How it happened in the first place.
My purpose in this message is to give you some of the answers, and in the
process I’m also giving a warning to the few who are already willing to listen
today in 1980.
It has now been seven years since I first began going public with my confiden-
tial information about economic, political, and military plans. It all began with
my nonfiction book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, pub-
lished in 1973 by George Braziller in New York. In the book I showed how
powerful people and organizations were planning to deliberately destroy the
221
United States economy on the way to war. I described how inflation had been
set in motion by divorcing the United States dollar from its gold backing, and I
explained how this was intended to benefit the powerful few at the expense of
all the rest of us. Today I am sorry to say it’s all happening before our very
eyes. To the planners of it all, it is a giant game of numbers on a computer; but
for all the rest of us, it’s a tragic human story repeated millions of times over.
No one has to be told anymore that something is wrong—we can all feel it in
the air. But our leaders are not telling us the truth, and so the people are de-
stroyed for lack of knowledge.
I receive countless letters these days which express it all far better than I can.
I’m about to read part of a letter I received recently from a wife and mother in
my home state of West Virginia. It may sound familiar to you. I now quote:
“In my short 29 years of life, the changes in economy seem so drastic as well as
swift. My father, a foreman at a local oil refinery, now deceased, made $500 a
month. We ate very well, and I was supplied with new school clothes come fall
and spring of each year, plus comforts of many toys children long for. We
weren’t rich but middle class and comfortable.
Now, my husband and I make $1500. We do not own a new car, we do not have
credit cards, no charge accounts. Our one asset, our home, is quickly becoming
smaller as our three children grow into adolescence. We live from one payday
to the next, and have had to ask for our parents’ help in more than one crisis. I
can hardly believe this is possible. In 1970 I had my first car and remember
paying 27 to 29 cents per gallon. I constantly worry about my boys and how
they will survive their grown-up years. My oldest son will be at the age for the
draft in five short years, and I fear for his life.”
End of quotation from my listener’s letter.
My friends, things like these are the bottom line in what our own Rulers here in
America are doing to us. There’s nothing accidental in all of this. If it were ac-
cidental, I would not have had the information to warn about it starting seven
years ago, and our troubles now are only a pale shadow of things to come! The
letter that I just read for you describes the beginning of the end of a way of life,
the American way; and this month, February 1980, it has been symbolized by
the beginning of the end of another tradition—the Olympic Games.
Six weeks ago in early January, the puppetized Carter Administration began
agitating for a boycott of the Summer 1980 Olympics in Moscow. Supposedly
the Olympic boycott would be to punish Russia for moving into Afghanistan
222
Audio Letter 54
two months ago, but in fact the Olympic boycott is only part of a much broader
boycott campaign designed to goad Russia into war; and the very Olympic
movement itself is now threatened as the first casualty of this United States
campaign. The stated target of the anti-Olympic campaign by the White House
is the Moscow Olympiad next summer, but already the maneuvering for war
has whipped up gray clouds over the Winter Olympics at Lake Placid, New
York.
For the past two weeks Lake Placid has been the scene of Winter Olympiad No.
13, and bad luck has seemingly cast its shadow right from the start. First, on
February 9 the United States soured the atmosphere at the opening session of
the International Olympic Committee in Lake Placid. The Committee was
shocked and outraged by the speech delivered that evening by the United States
Secretary of State. His only official function at the session was an honorary one
to declare the opening of the session; but he did not bother to do that nor did he
waste one word on matters like good sportsmanship, brotherhood, or anything
else that the Olympics were supposed to stand for. Instead, the entire speech
was a tirade against Russia, demanding that the summer games be taken away
from Moscow.
The next day, February 10, an Aeroflot jet airliner carrying 122 Russian ath-
letes bound for Lake Placid landed at Kennedy Airport in New York—but the
plane was denied ground service and had to fly on to Dulles Airport outside
Washington! From here the Russian athletes had to make their way back north
to Lake Placid by bus, and when they arrived they were given a taste of the lat-
est in American Olympic hospitality. The Russians were herded into lodgings
without adequate heat and with only one toilet for 18 rooms.
As the games got underway in Lake Placid, they did so in the shadow of an
Olympic ultimatum to Russia by the United States. If Russia did not pull out of
Afghanistan by February 20, then the United States would pull out of the Mos-
cow Olympics. The deadline passed without a Russian withdrawal from
Afghanistan, and the Olympic movement appears to be on its way to destruc-
tion.
War talk is now swirling all around us. Like a giant whirlpool it is spreading
wider and wider, sucking in everything around it. The overthrown Bolsheviks
from Russia who now control America will use anything and everything to
achieve their goals. They care about nothing at all but war, revolution, and
catching us all in their swirling hell of Satanic power. As always, innocent vic-
tims are the key to Bolshevik designs. Today these innocent victims are
countless Olympic athletes whose dreams of glory are drowning in the vortex
223
of Bolshevik intrigue. Tomorrow, the Bolsheviks intend for the victims to be

you and me by the millions; and it will not be just our dreams which are snuffed
out but our very lives, because human sacrifice on a grand scale is always a
hallmark of Bolshevik schemes for power.
Earlier this month our situation was summed up accurately by an anti-draft

speaker to students at Berkeley, Calif. He said, quote: “We all live in Guyana
now.”
The Bolsheviks here in America are shutting down our land as they prepare for
nuclear war and Bolshevik dictatorship. The threat to revoke passports of ath-
letes who want to go to the Moscow Olympics is only the beginning. Most
Americans still do not understand what is happening, but the trap is already
closing around us all.
Topic #1—THE SECRET AMERICAN DEFEAT OF JANUARY 1980
Topic #2—WEATHER MODIFICATION AS A WEAPON OF

RETALIATION
Topic #3—RUSSIA’S ACCELERATING PREPARATIONS TO SURVIVE

NUCLEAR WAR
Topic #1—Four days ago on February 20 the United States Olympic ultimatum
against Russia expired. That day Pravda and the official Soviet news agency
Tass said that the Politburo member Mikhail Suslov had given a speech at a
town on the Volga River. The speech was actually a collective response by the
Kremlin to American actions. The answer to the expiration of the Olympic ul-
timatum was, quote: “The Soviet people will not be intimidated.” Then,
America was described as using Afghanistan as a pretext for blackmail and
threats. And in answer to that, Suslov said, quote: “The American government’s
actions will inflict damage mainly to the United States itself.”
The Russians plan to make these words come true, my friends. They plan to let
the United States walk into one military trap after another. Each time they plan
to let the Bolsheviks here in America believe they are springing a surprise, but
each time the Russians intend to be one step ahead. Each time the Bolshevik
dragon shows a fang, the Russians intend to pull it; and so as Suslov put it a
few days ago, the American government’s actions will inflict damage mainly to
the United States itself.
224
Audio Letter 54
The new Russian master strategy was already at work when I recorded AUDIO
LETTER No. 53 last month. At that time I revealed that the Bolsheviks had al-
ready set in motion the August 1978 plan for a nuclear first strike against
Russia. The secret planners of the American operation fully expected that the
operation could lead to NUCLEAR WAR ONE before the end of January—but
last month I reported that the secret American nuclear strike operation against
Russia was already in deep trouble.
First, the Israeli-piloted American Submersible Aircraft in the White Sea and
Caspian Sea were blasted out of existence on January 20. I was able to report
that to you last month and so I won’t describe it all again now. The important
thing to recall is that the Russians had lured the American Subcraft into a trap,
where they were destroyed; and their destruction took place under conditions
which prevented the Bolsheviks here from learning about it immediately. As a
result, other parts of the American nuclear strike plan were still going ahead.
When I recorded my AUDIO LETTER last month on January 21, I reported

that American RPV’s were being rushed to Sinkiang Province, Red China. An
RPV is a remote-control airplane; and those which were on their way to China
last month were very special. They were relatively small and hard to spot, very
fast, and able to outmaneuver any known antiaircraft missile. Like the Subcraft,
the RPV’s were essential to the attack plan which I first revealed in August
1978.
When I revealed the attack plan I also explained how desperate America’s Rul-
ing Circles were to gain access to China’s Sinkiang Province. This was the
geographic key to the plan for using American RPV’s to attack Russia’s Cos-
mosphere installations in Siberia, but it took nearly a year and a half before
China finally agreed to the plan.
The breakthrough came during the urgent trip to China early last month by the
United States Secretary of Defense. Right away we started hearing rumors in
the news about a military alliance with Red China. Part of the price of the deal
was for the United States to afford Red China “most favored nation” trade
status immediately; and so as his trip to China ended, the White House sud-
denly started leaning on Congress to act fast. By January 20, China was given a
guarantee that it would be passed; and four days later our rubber-stamp House
and Senate approved “most favored nation” status for Red China by over-
whelming margins. The Bolshevik war planners here in the United States did
not wait for the actual vote; they were in a hurry.
225
On January 21 the RPV’s were on their way to China, as I reported last month.
I can now report that they arrived in Sinkiang Province the same day I recorded
AUDIO LETTER No. 53, January 21. There were 14 RPV’s—seven were to be
launched at Semipalatinsk where Russia’s Cosmospheres and Particle Beam
weapons are assembled. The other seven were to be launched at Novosibirsk,
where the operational Cosmosphere base is located; and each RPV carried a
multimegaton hydrogen bomb with a cobalt jacket. In nuclear bombs lingo,
they were extremely dirty bombs, designed to blanket the target area with a
deadly radiation for decades. But last month I reported that four separate Rus-
sian Commando groups were poised on the border waiting for the RPV’s. When
they did arrive on January 21, the Russians waited only long enough to make
sure all the RPV’s were in place. Then around midnight that night, the Russians
began moving in. Just in case, there were also 45 Cosmospheres hovering over
the area, but they were not needed. The Russian Commandos achieved a com-
plete surprise, and it was all over in a matter of minutes. The RPV’s were all
blown up and the camp was overrun.
In November 1978 a secret Russian missile base in Guyana, about which I had
been warning publicly for four years, was destroyed. Joint American and Israeli
Commando forces took the base by storm and killed every single Russian on
the base, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 40. But last month the Russians
evened the score. Russian Commandos wiped out the secret American RPV
base in Sinkiang Province, China, and not one member of the joint American
and Israeli forces at the base was spared.
As the Chinese dawn broke over the smoldering ruins of the American RPV
base, January 23 was working its way around the globe. That evening the latest
replica for the late President Jimmy Carter was scheduled to be on television. It
was to be a tough speech, setting the stage for war itself to erupt within days,
but the Bolshevik military planners here in America were in a state of upheaval.
The RPV operation in China had turned into a disaster, so it was obvious that
the Russians were now on the alert. The decision was made to freeze all other
parts of the nuclear first-strike operation to assess the situation. Coded signals
were flashed to the nonexistent Subcraft in the White and Caspian Seas to con-
tinue “holding” at their final check points.
At the same time, another Subcraft operation was getting under way in the
Black Sea. Twenty-nine (29) Subcraft were involved, and all were ordered to
stop in their tracks and await further orders. The Black Sea Subcraft operation
was not a part of the original plan which I revealed a year and a half ago, but
during that time Russia’s Particle Beam weapons program has caused addi-
tional targets to be added to the Bolshevik first-strike plan. Three of the most
226
Audio Letter 54
important new targets are at Kharkov, Voronezh, and Kazan, as I will explain in
Topic #3. The first two were to be attacked from the Black Sea; the third target,
Kazan, was to be approached from the Caspian by Subcraft, using the huge
Volga River.
When the Black Sea Subcraft were ordered to halt on January 23, many were
still close to their bases in northern Turkey. Eleven Subcraft were arranged
along Russia’s Crimean seacoast, but the rest were still in Turkish waters. That
presented the Russians with a slight dilemma. As I reported last month, the
Russians prefer not to use their most important weapons right now where they
can be observed in action; but it soon became clear to the Russians that the Bol-
sheviks were getting cold feet and would shortly order the Subcraft back to
their bases. Soon after night fell across the Black Sea on January 23, the Rus-
sian High Command gave the order to attack the Subcraft. There were 92
Cosmospheres hovering over the Black Sea at that time. Each Subcraft was be-
ing tracked continuously by at least three Cosmospheres using their
Psychoenergetic Range-Finding equipment—that is, PRF. When the attack or-
der was given, selected Cosmospheres started firing their Charged Particle
Beam weapons downward into the Sea far below them. Each Subcraft was rest-
ing motionless a short distance underwater, not nearly deep enough to avoid
destruction; and so each Subcraft erupted briefly into a brilliant cloud of steam
and debris. Then the Sea was dark once again. Chance observers ashore and on
ships saw nothing more than a brief intense light on a distant horizon—a spark
that disappeared as quickly as it had appeared. But to the Bolshevik war plan-
ners here in America, those brief sparks on the horizon spelled disaster. They
meant that all those nuclear-armed Subcraft in the Black Sea would not be
available for a second try later on—and the Bolsheviks then guessed correctly
that the same was true of the Subcraft in the White and Caspian Seas.
The destruction of the Subcraft in the Black Sea took place just after 4:00 P.M.
Eastern Standard Time January 23, 1980. A few short hours later the so-called
Carter Doctrine was proclaimed in the “State of the Union” speech on televi-
sion. For public consumption, the United States was still talking tough,
threatening to use military force in the Persian Gulf; but later that same eve-
ning, January 23, it was the Russians who were doing the really tough talking
out of the public eye.
Soviet Ambassador Anatoly Dobrynin suddenly arrived at the State Department

for an unexpected late night meeting. There he met for an hour and a half with a
top-level representative of the Bolsheviks. Dobrynin is famous for the beaming
smile he always wears, but he stopped smiling as soon as the meeting began.
227
Speaking with icy precision, he confirmed that Russia had destroyed the
American Subcraft and RPV’s. He also called attention to an unpublicized dis-
aster earlier that day near northern Greece in the Aegean Sea.
A hush-hush “oil rig,” so-called, had been at work under Norwegian and
American control, using German and Dutch workers; but that day the rig had
suddenly gone up in flames, killing everyone aboard. Dobrynin explained that
Russia had known what the rig was up to and did not approve. It was preparing
to plant nuclear missiles on the ocean floor to be aimed at the heart of Russia.
The Russians had waited until the missiles were aboard the platform ready for
planting—then a trio of Cosmospheres overhead had destroyed platform, mis-
siles, and the crew all at once.
Finally, Dobrynin added something which was intended to drive home the
hopelessness of the Bolshevik war plans. He revealed that Russia knew that
there was one more element in the overall first-strike plan which was still under
way. A tiny force of four more Subcraft were moving into the Baltic Sea armed
with cobalt bombs. They were a suicide force and they were all heading for a
single target—Moscow. They were to approach Russia’s Baltic Sea coast under
water until they arrived at widely separated points near Kaliningrad, Riga, and
Leningrad. Then when the order came, the plan was for them to surface and
make the transition to flight configuration. From there, their mission called for
them to take off, arming their cobalt bombs for detonation on impact. Flying
their super-quiet Subcraft at tree-top height, their mission called for them to get
as close as possible to Moscow before being shot down. As each suicide Sub-
craft crashed in flames, the cobalt bomb it was carrying would detonate
automatically. The Bolshevik war planners here in the United States did not ex-
pect that any of them would actually reach Moscow, but they were confident
that they would get close enough to do the job.
The ground-level detonation of four cobalt bombs would send an enormous

cloud of deadly radioactive fallout drifting eastward, and the Bolsheviks here
were sure that Moscow, the nerve center of Russia, would not survive. By ad-
ministering a giant dose of radioactive poison, the Bolsheviks were planning to
turn Moscow into a giant Jonestown of silent death. Dobrynin described it all
during the meeting. Then he revealed that Russia was tracking all four suicide
Subcraft. He proved it by giving their locations; then he said: “I am instructed
to inform you that you are now invited to attempt to save these four machines
from destruction if you can. You may try to hide them or protect them in any
way you choose—you will discover that you cannot. Promptly at 1:00 PM
Eastern Standard Time tomorrow, twelve hours from now, they will all cease to
exist.”
228
Audio Letter 54
The next day, January 24, the Russians made good their threat. One suicide
Subcraft was near the Russian Baltic coast itself close to Kaliningrad; another
was well to the west near the border between East Germany and Poland, where
it strikes the coast; the third was far to the north, 30 miles west-northwest of
Pori, Finland; and the fourth was clear outside the Baltic, about 70 miles north-
northwest of Bergen, Norway—but all four were blasted simultaneously by the
Cosmospheres hovering in the sky above them.
The destruction of the suicide Subcraft with their cobalt bombs marked the end
of the abortive first-strike operation last month. It was a total defeat for the
United States, while Russia did not receive so much as a scratch on the arm;
and its ramifications are still spreading. For example, the debacle in Sinkiang
Province was a major shock to China. It has revived the arguments within Chi-
nese ruling circles that the United States is a paper tiger, and the Chinese
military commanders who were involved in the Sinkiang affair are in deep
trouble. In recent days, reports have begun reaching the West about a major re-
shuffle in the Chinese military. Russia plans to unseat all of the Bolshevik
leaders of China.
Meanwhile, my friends, only a few hours ago, I received confirmed evidence

about an urgent new development in Iran. The doctors at Tehran Hospital have
announced within the past 12 hours that Ayatollah Khomeini will see no visi-
tors until further notice, including religious and political leaders. The doctors
say he has been over-taxed; but the real reason, my friends, is that within the
past 48 hours Ayatollah Khomeini was assassinated and replaced by a double. It
was the fourth attempt on his life, and this time it succeeded. He was shot above
the left eye.
Topic #2—A few nights ago on February 21, the CBS Evening News presented
a sensational report. The report claimed that Israel had carried out its first
atomic bomb test last fall. CBS alleged that the bomb had been exploded over
the South Atlantic last September 22, 1979. It was also stated that nearby South
Africa had assisted the Israelis in making the atomic test. It all sounded like a
neat answer to the famous mystery of the giant double flash in that area several
months ago.
The mystery began last October 25, 1979. On that date the United States re-
leased a statement through the State Department. The statement began by
saying the United States had obtained, quote: “An indication suggesting the
possibility that a low-yield nuclear explosion occurred on September 22.”
Those are very uncertain words, but the rest of the statement was even more
229
vague. For example: The location of the supposed explosion was narrowed
down to, quote: “an area of the Indian Ocean and South Atlantic including por-
tions of the Antarctic Continent and the southern part of Africa.” That’s an area
of several million square miles. In addition, the United States Government ad-
mitted having no corroborating evidence about whatever had happened, and the
announcement ended in the doubtful words: “We are continuing to assess
whether such an event took place.”
Many people were very disturbed by the fuzziness of the announcement. It was
apparent that something spectacular had taken place near South Africa, possibly
an atomic blast; but the United States was not sure what it was, or where it had
happened, or even if it had really happened. Some people wondered, “How
could this be?”
We are constantly told that the United States can watch the world with Early
Warning and Spy Satellites. We are led to believe that no one could fire a mis-
sile at us even from a submarine at sea without being caught in the act by our
satellites. To make matters worse, reporters soon found out that the satellite
which picked up the mysterious double flash was not an Early Warning or Spy
Satellite. It is an aging relic launched a decade ago called a Vela Satellite. It is
the die-hard last survivor of a series of monitoring satellites for the Atmos-
pheric Test Ban Treaty, and it was little more than luck that it happened to spot
the mysterious double flash last fall. Had the double flash taken place out of
range of the Vela, it would have gone completely undetected by the United
States, because the United States no longer has any Spy or Early Warning Sat-
ellites continuously orbiting the earth. Russia finished shooting them down
nearly two years ago, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 33 for April 1978.
Ever since the United States announcement about the double flash late last Oc-
tober, the mystery about what happened has refused to go away. A panel of
scientific consultants were convened by the White House early last November,
but they have ended up with no conclusion. Then came the CBS report a few
nights ago describing the alleged atom bomb test by Israel in the South Pacific.
My friends, Israel does have the bomb, but the CBS story about a test was a lie.
By the very next evening, February 22, CBS was already backing away from its
Israeli A-bomb story. The truth is that there was a giant double flash in the
South Atlantic last fall, but beyond that point you have been hearing nothing
but lies and inaccurate guesses about the double flash mystery. The lies began
with the Government announcement of October 25, which gave a falsified date
and time for the incident, and since then the confusion has just kept on growing.
230
Audio Letter 54
My friends, I am now in a position to give you my report on the mystery of the

so-called South African double flash. What happened there is something which
you need to know about as a matter of survival. The brilliant flashes detected by
the Vela Satellite were produced by an experimental test, but what was tested
was not an atomic bomb. The test was carried out not by Israel or South Africa
but by Russia, and what Russia learned from that test has just been put to use
against the United States. The incredible series of storms which have recently
devastated southern California and Arizona were not natural but man made!
The original State Department announcement of October 25 did not describe

what the Vela Satellite had seen. It simply said that it appeared to be an atomic
test, but within a day or two word leaked out that it was a pair of blinding
flashes one right after the other. The first one was powerful, but the second was
many times more powerful. For months now debate has been raging over
whether this was the result of a nuclear explosion.
The light produced by a nuclear blast behaves in a way that is similar to what
the satellite detected last fall—that is, there is a bright flash, followed moments
later by a second much brighter flash. So why the big mystery? Just this: Visi-
ble light is not the only radiation from an atomic blast. A nuclear explosion
sends out floods of deadly gamma rays, X-rays, and neutrons. The Vela Satel-
lite is equipped to pick up all those things if they are present—but they were not
present. There was a giant double flash of light only—no X-rays, no gamma
rays, no neutrons; and afterward, no radioactive fallout could be found any-
where in the world. Acoustic sensors on earth confirmed that some kind of
giant explosion had taken place, but the question remained: What kind of ex-
plosion?
My friends, last month I reminded you of the giant air booms of two years ago
off America’s east coast. For many weeks thousands of people from South
Carolina to Connecticut and elsewhere were being frightened out of their wits
by the booms. Public officials dreamed up all kinds of ridiculous cover stories
to try to explain them away. Since that time the official cover stories about the
booms have been proven to be nonsense by Cornell University scientists and
others; but to our Rulers, the only thing that matters is that people forgot about
the booms after a while. The real reason for those air booms two years ago was
what I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 29 for December 1977. They were be-
ing produced by several newly deployed Russian hovering space platforms.
These platforms called Cosmospheres constitute the third leg of Russia’s secret
Space Triad, and they were creating those giant air booms by defocused firing
of their charged Particle Beam weapons into the atmosphere.
231
In later AUDIO LETTERS I reported much more about the Cosmospheres, in-
cluding their use in weather modification. But the Cosmospheres all by
themselves have never been as effective in weather modification as desired by
Russia. Russian scientists have been hard at work to devise more powerful
techniques of weather warfare as a contingency weapon; and now they have
succeeded in developing a newer and more powerful system for weather modi-
fication. Russia’s newly operational weather-war system involves two legs of
their Space Triad working together. One leg consists of the Cosmospheres; the
other leg is the Moon with its network of giant Particle Beam weapons.
When I first reported on Russia’s new Cosmospheres in AUDIO LETTER No.

29, I also reported on the first operational test of the Russian Moon Bases. The
Particle Beam weapons on the moon are at least 100 times more powerful than
those aboard the hovering Cosmospheres. When fired at the earth, they can
produce instant destruction over a wide area, so for their first test firing they
chose a target area where they thought the effects would go unnoticed by eve-
ryone else; but their choice turned out to be a tragic one. In AUDIO LETTER
No. 29 I described that test firing from the moon at the earth.
(At this point Dr. Beter stopped speaking and the recording engineer is heard.)
The following is the “EMERGENCY TRANSCRIPT” (unrecorded final portion

of AUDIO LETTER No. 54) received by mail a few days later—starting with an
explanatory note:
Note: “On February 24, 1980, Dr. Beter attempted to record his AUDIO
LETTER No. 54. He was not feeling well due to extreme overwork, but tried
anyway. He was concerned about the need for his listeners to be informed as
quickly as possible about some urgent new information about weather modifi-
cation underway in the United States, as well as other matters.
Dr. Beter finished Side 1, but the recording session was halted partway through
Side 2 when he suddenly became visibly weak and ill. It turned out that Dr. Be-
ter was suffering a severe heart attack.
To avoid further delay for his listeners, Dr. Beter requested that the unrecorded
final portion of his message be released for now in printed form. This is a costly
and abnormal procedure for us, and we trust you will understand that we have
worked as quickly as possible to get this transcript to you.
We know that many of you will be concerned with Dr. Beter’s well-being and
will want word of his progress, but we ask you to help us by resisting the desire
232
Audio Letter 54
to call. Bulletins about Dr. Beter’s progress will be sent periodically to all ac-
tive subscribers. You are invited to write any messages of encouragement to Dr.
Beter at his office address:
Dr. Peter Beter, 1629 K Street NW, Washington, D.C. 20006
Interested non-subscribers may receive any bulletin about Dr. Beter when it is
released by sending a stamped, self-addressed envelope for that purpose to Dr.
Beter’s office.
During the past seven years, Dr. Beter has been giving his life for us Ameri-
cans. Now, Dr. Beter and his family need our support. Let us all pray for Dr.
Beter’s total recovery, and his ability to continue his mission to benefit us all!”
(Dr. Beter’s Topic #2 is now continued—with the last line he recorded being
repeated.)
In AUDIO LETTER No. 29, I described that test firing from the moon at the
earth. There was a huge cyclone in the Bay of Bengal, southeast of India. It was
a giant storm, many hundreds of miles across—the perfect cover for a test fir-
ing. Or so the Russians thought. But they made a small miscalculation as they
chose their aiming point at the earth. They knew that the particle beam would
be deflected by the earth’s electromagnetic field, and tried to correct for it. But
there was a small error in that correction—and as a result, the particle beam
blasted the sea too close to the Indian coastline.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 29, I quoted the words of an eyewitness who saw the
results. She was a British relief worker, who told the BBC: “There were TWO
enormous BLINDING FLASHES, and the whole sky lighted up as though on
fire. Then this vast tidal wave—about 30 miles in length along the coast and 18
feet high—just bore down upon them.”
My friends, the giant double flash which I reported over two years ago in con-
nection with the Indian cyclone disaster had the same source as the giant double
flash last fall in the South Atlantic. Both were caused by Russian Particle Beam
weapons, fired from the moon.
When a target on earth is to be fired at from the moon, a pair of beam weapons
are fired in sequence—first one, then the other. That is what I reported to you in
AUDIO LETTER No. 29, over two years ago. The first blast is largely dissi-
pated in the atmosphere. In the process, it creates an ionized condition called a
confinement channel through the air. Moments later, the second beam is fired at
233
the same spot, and it follows the confinement channel right down to the earth’s
surface. The target on the earth’s surface—even if it is the sea itself—explodes
violently. And so a lunar particle beam attack creates a double flash. The first
flash is somewhat diffused, since it takes place mainly in the air; but the second
flash is more concentrated and intense. This, my friends, is what our tired old
Vela Satellite accidentally picked up last fall in the South Atlantic.
When the Government here made the first announcement about it on October
25, 1979, they lied about both its date and time. The official story is that the
double flash took place at 3:00 AM, in the early morning hours of September
22, 1979. But it actually took place on October 22—just three days before the
October 25 announcement about it. October 22 was the same day that the for-
mer Shah of Iran arrived in New York City. On one hand the Russians were
maneuvering the Shah in hopes of undoing the Bolshevik Iran Crisis strategy,
as I have reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 52 and 53. But at the same time,
the Russians were also gearing up for hostilities in case their maneuvers with
the Shah should fall apart.
As a matter of interest, I can also report to you that the double flash took place
around 3:00 PM in the afternoon—not 3:00 AM as claimed officially. The
United States Government falsified the time and date as a trap for the unwary—
and many have fallen into that trap. The CBS fairy tale of February 21 about an
Israeli A-bomb test is only one example.
At the time of the initial public reports about the double flash last October, the
Russian experiment in the South Atlantic was still in progress. It had begun on
October 22, when two lunar particle beams were aimed at a location in the
South Atlantic. The desired bull’s-eye was at the navigational coordinates 35
degrees South, 26 degrees West. This point is on a parallel with the lower tip of
South Africa, but is slightly closer to South America than to Africa.
Two of the Russian particle beam weapons on the moon zeroed in and prepared
to fire. Meanwhile, a quadrangle of Cosmospheres were ranged around the tar-
get area. The four Cosmospheres were deployed at the corners of a square 800
miles on one side, centered on the bull’s-eye at sea. They were hovering at an
altitude of 100 miles. It was expected that the moon bases would achieve much
better accuracy this time than they had two years ago. But just to be safe, the
Cosmospheres were deployed well away from the target.
Then the two moon weapons fired at the earth. Firing from a quarter-million
miles away in space, the beams missed the center of the 800-mile target square
234
Audio Letter 54
by only a little over ten (10) miles. The resulting double flash was centered at
roughly 34 degrees, 54 minutes South; 26 degrees, 10 minutes West.
Tremendous quantities of sea water in the target zone flashed instantly into su-
perheated steam. The hot water vapor and surrounding hot air started rising fast
toward the stratosphere. Cooler air started racing into the target zone to fill the
vacuum. The inward-rushing winds began to swirl due to the earth’s rotation,
and the barometric pressure began dropping in the target zone. Within minutes,
the atmosphere above the target zone was a spiraling chimney of tumbling, ris-
ing air and water vapor. The world’s first totally man-made storm cell was
being born over the South Atlantic.
The powerful beams fired from the moon had started the process. Then it was
up to the quadrangle of Cosmospheres to keep it going. The vast quantities of
water vapor sent skyward by the blasts began condensing rapidly in the cool
upper air. Normally, this would have led quickly to localized rain showers. As a
result, most of the water would have rained right back into the sea, not far from
the target area. But the four Cosmospheres were there to prevent that.
Right after the moon shots that produced the giant double flash, the Cosmos-
pheres went to work. Each began firing a powerful electron beam into the target
zone, in a de-focused mode. The electrons mingled into the rising torrents of
water vapor, giving a negative charge to the water droplets as they formed. This
caused the tiny droplets to repel each other, so that they could not condense into
rain. So the water vapor was forced to stay aloft instead of raining back down
into the sea.
The Cosmospheres remained on station for several more days in order to com-
plete the experiment. They were able to confirm that the artificial storm clouds
remained stable, drifting eastward with the winds. They also monitored the tar-
get zone itself, to learn how fast conditions would return to normal. Then they
finally dispersed, in early November 1979. The artificial storm cell was left to
dissipate gradually of its own accord, and as a result it attracted no attention.
Early last month on January 4, 1980, the United States announced what
amounts to a new Cold War. A whole series of embargoes and restrictions
against Russia were initiated. The most important of these was the embargo of
17-million metric tons of grain ordered by Russia.
The grain embargo, my friends, is an effort by the Bolsheviks here to hit the
Russians right where they live. Four days after it was announced, the grain em-
bargo was described by a White House spokesman as the most punitive of all
235
steps against Russia; and ever since then, the Bolsheviks here have been twist-
ing arms world-wide to force other countries to do the same.
Early this month on February 6, the Russians summed up their view of all this.
Throughout the Soviet press that day, there were stories that the Carter Admini-
stration wants to starve the Russian people; and since the Bolsheviks always
use starvation as a tool of power, this was no idle comment by Russia.
The very next day, there began to be reports of strange developments in the
weather of the southwestern United States. For example, northern New Mexico
experienced a heavy snowstorm combined with thunder and lightning. But it
was the following week, on February 13, that the real weather news began. Un-
precedented rainstorms began pounding southern California and Arizona.
Day after day they came, one incredible storm right after another. Dams filled,
and then began overflowing. Levees broke. Houses washed into canyons. Cas-
kets floated away from cemeteries. Mudslides caught several victims and buried
them alive. Bridges washed out. Entire communities became flooded and ma-
rooned. Phoenix endured a flood so vast that another like it would not be
expected for 500 years. And: in the vital agricultural areas of southern Califor-
nia, damage was mounting fast.
On February 19, the seventh day of the rains, a CBS Evening News report said:
“It’s like an organized assault—one storm after another.” And an organized as-
sault is exactly what it was, my friends. Centered at a point 576 miles west of
San Diego, a quadrangle of Russian Cosmospheres were in operation. Based on
the results of their “double flash” experiment last fall, the Russians have refined
their technique; and each time the Moon Bases fire at the earth, they are becom-
ing more accurate. So the quadrangle west of San Diego was only about 100
miles on a side, and the Cosmospheres were at the decreased altitude of 40
miles.
Using the technique tested last October in the South Atlantic, the Russians were
creating the storm cells, one after another; and this time, they did not just let the
cells drift away to dissipate. Instead, they were drawn precisely to the areas to
be attacked in southern California and Arizona. Then the storms were triggered
by additional Cosmospheres hovering over those areas.
Eighty-five (85) miles above Yuma, Arizona, there was a pair of Cosmos-
pheres. Nearly 100 miles to the north, another cosmosphere duo was hovering
over the vicinity of Blythe, California. Both locations are on the Colorado
River, bordering California’s crucial Imperial Valley agricultural area. These
236
Audio Letter 54
cosmosphere duos used their beam weapons to load the atmosphere with pro-
tons, which are positively charged. This attracted the artificial storm cells with
their negatively charged clouds. That is why the storms pounded exactly the
same areas—time after time after time; and it was also the proton clouds that
triggered the actual storms. They neutralized the electrons in the storm clouds,
the water condensed into rain, and the devastating storms were the result.
Finally, after nine (9) days and over half a billion dollars in damage, the Rus-
sians called a halt on the storms for the moment. But this, my friends, is only a
sample of what may lie ahead for food-producing areas throughout the United
States!
While the western weather disaster was filling the headlines, the Russians were
also testing out their weather-control system in less dramatic ways all over the
United States. A total of five more cosmosphere quadrangles at sea and fifteen
more cosmosphere duos over land were involved. The Russians are determined
to retaliate in kind for the Bolshevik starvation campaign against Russia. If the
American Bolsheviks keep to this food boycott against Russia, then American
food shortages will be making headlines by this time next year!
In the meantime, you still have a chance to stock up on storable foods—and,

my friends, I would waste no time in doing just that.
RUSSIA’S ACCELERATING PREPARATIONS TO SURVIVE NUCLEAR

WAR
Topic #3—It has now been more than a year-and-a-half since I first revealed
America’s shift to a first-strike military strategy. Many of my listeners were
shocked when I made this public. “Never,” they said. “The United States would
never strike first in a nuclear war!”
But how fast times change. A few days ago, on February 21, Defense Depart-
ment spokesman Thomas Ross gave a briefing to reporters. He said that if
Russia should go beyond Afghanistan, it could lead to a nuclear confrontation.
And he added that in that event, “...the United States might shoot first.”
Our Bolshevik rulers are determined to bring about nuclear war against Russia,
no matter how suicidal it may be. But to do that, they have to have the support
of you and me—the American people; and to keep our support, the Bolsheviks
here are hiding the truth of our military situation from us. They build up our
anger at Russia, and then tell us how “backward” Russia is. They are condition-
237
ing us to believe that we will have to fight Russia, and egging us on with lies
that we can win.
Those stories we always hear about Russia’s backwardness may comfort us

now, but they will not help us when war comes. The difference between Russia
and the United States is one of emphasis, not ability. We Americans have been
living in luxury, with all the comforts—but we are living in a fragile glass
tower. By contrast, the Russian way of life is modest; but they are living in a
powerful fortress. Soon, the earth will tremble with the blows of NUCLEAR
WAR ONE—and it will not be the fortress, but the glass tower that shatters and
falls in ruins.
We Americans may look down our noses at Russian consumer technology and
feel smug. Yet when it comes to military technology, the Russians have dealt
the West many surprises over the years.
For example, one day nearly 20 years ago, NATO and other observers were in
Moscow to watch an aerial display on Aviation Day. Various Russian airplanes
roared over, and the NATO observers tried to spot any new details they could
detect—but they got more than they had bargained for. Suddenly a big, sleek
airplane thundered over which was totally unknown in the West. It had swept-
back wings and two enormous engines on the tail. It was obviously a bomber,
and it was also obvious that it was supersonic! The stunned NATO observers
watched with mouths agape. The shock deepened as the first mystery plane was
followed by nine more exactly like it. Here was a highly-advanced warplane—it
was in quantity production, and it was a complete surprise to NATO. When
they recovered from the shock, NATO aviation officials assigned the code-
name Blinder to the plane.
If you are not a military specialist, you have probably never even heard of the
Blinder, much less the jarring surprise it gave to the West. But the supersonic
Blinder of two decades ago was produced by Russia’s Tupolev Design Bu-
reau—and you have heard a great deal about a more recent Tupolev supersonic
bomber. It’s called the Backfire.
Now, the Tupolev aircraft team in Russia is once again involved in a major
military surprise. In Topic #1, I described the unsuccessful attempt last month
to mount a nuclear first strike against Russia. The cities of Voronezh, Kharkov,
and Kazan were targeted because of the Tupolev plants located there. They are
the temporary bases for an airborne anti-ballistic-missile or ABM system,
which is about to become operational. The system is to be a last-ditch backup
for the Cosmospheres which are hovering over our country. The Cosmospheres
238
Audio Letter 54
are supposed to blast our ICBM’s at the moment of launch; but in case a few
should get through, the Russians plan to blast them during re-entry over Russia.
The new Russian ABM system uses charged Particle Beam weapons carried by
Tu-144 supersonic transports. At a glance, the Tu-144 looks similar to the An-
glo-French Concorde. But the Tu-144 is bigger, considerably faster, and
radically different in some very important ways. Among other things, Russian
civil transports are always designed with the option for military conversion
built in, and the Tu-144 is no exception.
In June 1978, the Tu-144’s were suddenly removed from service by the Soviet
airline Aeroflot, without explanation. Western commentators crowed that they
had turned out to be too expensive to fly; but they were actually returned to the
Tupolev plants for military conversion, to be outfitted with charged Particle
Beams. This process is now nearing completion.
Late last month, the Tu-144 flying ABM system passed a major hurdle. It was
tested against a missile, with complete success. But the Russians encoded the
data from the target missile, making it impossible for the United States to learn
any details. Western analysts were able to tell that something happened to the
missile in mid-flight, but nothing more.
And so, my friends, we are heading for the “moment of truth.” The Russians are
speeding up their preparations to survive the kamikaze war plans of the Bolshe-
viks now here in America. But for America, the countdown is under way
toward the Day of Chastisement.
239
Audio Letter 55
June 28, 1980
As most of you know I am resuming the AUDIO LETTER today after a silence
of four months. My feelings at this moment are hard for me to express; but for
all of you who have stood by me when it mattered most, I want to say a few
personal words, because without your loyal support I might never have returned
to this microphone.
Just before I entered my recording studio last February 24, I began to feel
slightly ill. At first there was only mild discomfort, but somehow I knew that it
was something serious. I tried my best to record AUDIO LETTER No. 54 while
I was still able to do it. I got about two-thirds of the way through the recording
session before I was overcome by a massive heart attack. I didn’t want to let
you down, but I simply could not finish. On the way to the hospital I knew that
I would not be speaking to you again soon, so I gave instructions for the release
of the unrecorded final portion of AUDIO LETTER No. 54 in printed form.
During the time since my heart attack last February, my associates have re-
leased three progress reports to keep you informed. I won’t go over all of that
again now, but it was a dark and difficult time for a while—not only for me, but
also for my associates and especially my wife and three children.
I entered those hospital doors on the brink of death, and I truly believed that I
had failed in my mission. During at least the first week of my stay in Intensive
Care, I felt no will to live. At one point I was even told by my doctors that I had
gone through death’s door, yet had somehow come back again. The doctors
were prepared for the worst, but yet something of a miracle began to unfold.
From all over the United States, and then Canada, and then around the world, I
began receiving messages of cheer and encouragement—countless beautiful
cards with equally beautiful personal wishes written on them, telegrams telling
me of prayer meetings on my behalf, inspirational and religious books and
pamphlets of all kinds, letters and books with suggestions to improve my
health. There were flowers, there were gifts, there were religious relics—on and
on until it grew into an avalanche. For weeks I was not well enough even to
241
look at all these things, but I could not believe my ears as I was told what was
taking place.
I had entered the hospital spent and exhausted, convinced that all of my work
had been in vain; but several weeks later when I left the hospital to go home, it
was with renewed hope and determination to carry on. And in that spirit I have
been regaining my strength against all the odds; so it is that I speak to you once
again today. That, my friends, is what you did for me. I will never forget all of
you who stood by me in my hour of need, and I promise you that I will always
do everything in my power never to let you down.
It was five years ago this month, in June 1975, that I began recording my
AUDIO LETTER Intelligence Reports. It was a shaky beginning, because I was
recovering from my first heart attack; and yet little more than a year later I
found myself at the Pentagon because of the AUDIO LETTER. I had been in-
vited there by the late General George S. Brown, then Chairman of the Joint
Chiefs of Staff. My conference with America’s top military officer was about
the secret nuclear crisis then under way.
Of all the information media in the United States, only the AUDIO LETTER
had made the crisis public. In AUDIO LETTER No. 16 I told my listeners
about the crisis conference with General Brown. General Brown was doing his
duty by taking urgent actions to prevent imminent nuclear war; and yet, Amer-
ica’s controlled major media said not a word! Even after Pentagon spokesmen
confirmed my meeting with General Brown to newspaper reporters, there was
almost no publicity.
From that point onward, America’s fortunes have gone down hill steadily. Hav-
ing staved off nuclear disaster for the moment, General Brown found himself
deserted and alone. Within weeks after our crisis meeting, General Brown be-
gan to be cut down by bad publicity. He was quickly neutralized by America’s
enemies within. He did not even serve out his tour of duty, except in name, and
soon we were told of his untimely death. In AUDIO LETTERS 17, 21, 23, and
46 I revealed the facts about the downfall of General Brown. While America
slept, our last great patriot in government was whittled down, taken away, and
finally murdered!
Four years ago the prospect of imminent nuclear war sounded unbelievable to
most Americans. Something called “detente” was still in effect, or so we were
told. But public knowledge is always years behind the truth; so today, war fever
is all around us.
242
Audio Letter 55
This month I’m beginning anew with my AUDIO LETTER series. Once again I
am doing so on the heels of a heart attack, just as I did five years ago; but this
time there is a difference. Five years ago very few Americans would listen seri-
ously to warnings about secret plans for nuclear war. Today it’s a different
world. We’re all hearing about false nuclear alerts, worries over Russia’s mili-
tary power, and so on. Most of us are waking up far too late. We have waited
too late to avoid many great disasters because they have already been set in mo-
tion; but if enough people wake up soon, there may still be hope that our planet
will survive. That is the goal to which I dedicate my AUDIO LETTER series
from this day forward.
As I launch year No. 6 of my AUDIO LETTER, I will try to serve you better
than ever before. For that purpose, I am now introducing the first change in
format of my reports in five years. As you know, my standard practice is to pre-
sent some introductory remarks followed by three major topics, and I will
continue to do this; but from now on, I will also add a brief final section called
the LAST MINUTE SUMMARY. My new Last Minute Summary will help me
do several things better than before. For example, I sometimes receive urgent
information at the very last minute before recording an AUDIO LETTER.
Whenever this happens from now on, you will hear about it in my Last Minute
Summary. I will also try to highlight major points from the topics I have dis-
cussed. By doing these things, I want to make my AUDIO LETTER even more
up-to-date and more useful to you than ever before.
My friends, during the past several months the drums of approaching war have
been beating louder and louder, and day by day more Americans are falling into
step in the war march. For the first time in a generation, the word “Patriotism”
is being revived in America; and after years of being trampled into the dust, the
American flag is suddenly being waved high for all to see. The Pied Pipers of
war are using the symbols of America to lure us into national suicide. They are
not trying to revive true patriotism—which is based on loyalty and love for our
country. Instead, our so-called leaders are selling us a cheap substitute, “tough
guy patriotism,” based on hatred.
Today a patriot is anyone who hates Iran, anyone who hates Russia, anyone
who is ready for war. And those who have trampled on our flag for so long are
holding it high today for a reason! They know that the American spirit is not
dead, even though it has been stifled for so long. They know that even today
Americans by the millions will still rally around the flag, and so the Pied Pipers
are using the Stars and Stripes as their banner to lead us all to WAR.
243
Topic #1—THE PUBLIC SIGNS OF NUCLEAR WAR FEVER
Topic #2—MULTIPLYING DISASTERS IN THE EXPANDING SECRET

WAR
Topic #3—BATTLE TO THE DEATH IN THE KREMLIN.
Topic #1—During the past four months I have had to be silent about the grow-
ing dangers of nuclear war, but the visible signs of approaching war have been
speaking for themselves. For example, there’s the Draft Registration issue. Last
March when this Bolshevik Administration first brought it up, tens of thousands
of draft age demonstrators took to the streets. So the Bolsheviks, who now con-
trol our government, put it on the back burner to cool off. They waited until
summer when students would be home from college, scattered and unable to
organize. Then they acted fast. This month it became law, as did another war
measure—the Standby Gas Rationing plan. Measures like these are helping to
raise the pitch of war fever by one small degree after another; but to the Bol-
sheviks here who are responsible for these measures, something else is even
more important. Draft Registration and Gas Rationing plans are designed most
of all to control you and me.
To the Bolsheviks who now infest America, war, even nuclear war, is only a
means to an end. The end is their own Bolshevik DICTATORSHIP over us all;
and they are so consumed with their frenzy for control that they no longer care
very much whether the United States wins or loses the war. Either way, they
now believe that they will somehow end up with the remains of America within
their grasp. And so we are plunging down the road to nuclear suicide.
Another sign of this is the series of nuclear false alarms. In AUDIO LETTER
No. 52 last November 1979 I called your attention to the first of these false nu-
clear war alerts, and early this month, on June 3 and June 6, there were two
more false alerts. As I told you last November, the Bolsheviks here are actually
carrying out deliberate tests by means of these false nuclear alerts.
The American Strategic Military forces were designed for the purpose of re-
taliation against a surprise attack; but now, those who control our military
strategy are planning for America to strike first. And so Bolshevik agents are
now testing ways to falsify all of the early-warning signals of a Russian nuclear
attack. Once they have perfected their false-alarm techniques, they will be
ready to set off nuclear war at any moment. By fooling our entire early-warning
system, they will set off massive retaliation by our ICBMs, missile submarines,
244
Audio Letter 55
and bombers. The crews of missile bunkers, submarines, and bombers will do
their duty, believing America has been attacked, but in reality we ourselves will
be firing the opening shots of all-out war.
America’s early-warning network involves a number of complex systems. As a

result, several different kinds of falsified data will have to be fed into the com-
puters in order to simulate an all-out attack. Each of the false alerts has been
testing a different part of this plan. For that reason, more false alerts may still
take place, but all three nuclear false alarms have had one thing in common.
The first line of defense in our Early Warning system is supposed to be our fleet
of early warning satellites over Russia. We are told that they keep a continuous
watch for the launching of ICBMs; and sure enough, all three nuclear false
alarms have started with incorrect satellite signals about Russian ICBMs.
My friends, the satellite signals are the easiest part of the Bolshevik plans to
falsify a Russian nuclear attack. As I revealed over two years ago in AUDIO
LETTER No. 33, the United States no longer has any early warning satellites
over Russia. They have long since been blasted out of space by Russia’s fleet of
Cosmos Interceptor Killer Satellites. Since that time, all of the alleged early-
warning satellite signals monitored daily by NORAD have been artificial. But it
is an easy matter to change those signals to make them say that Russian mis-
siles are on the way.
It has now been nearly two years since I first reported America’s shift to a first-
strike nuclear strategy; but the first official admission of this drastic change
took place only four months ago on February 21. On that day Pentagon
spokesman Thomas Ross said that America might, quote: “shoot first” in a nu-
clear war. But to this day, most Americans still believe that America’s military
posture is a defensive one, and so we cannot comprehend what we see in the
news of mounting nuclear war fever. It is all around us, my friends, and yet we
cannot understand because we are not told the truth by our leaders.
Day by day we are hearing about nuclear weapons designed for offensive use,
but we are conditioned to see only self-defense in all these things, which leaves
us unable to see what is really happening. One of the new weapons systems we
keep hearing the most about is the so-called MX Mobile Missile. As with eve-
rything else, we are told that it is strictly a defensive weapon. It is said that our
existing stationary ICBMs might be knocked out by Russia’s incoming mis-
siles, so the new MX Missiles will have to keep moving around to make them
harder to hit. But the stories we are hearing about the MX program are a mix-
ture of half truths and lies.
245
The whole MX controversy is just a smoke screen to hide America’s real mo-
bile missile program. We are told that the giant MX Missile system cannot be
ready for another half decade, but the fact is that mobile ICBMs are already be-
ing deployed here in the United States. Their deployment began over six
months ago in late 1979. America’s real mobile missile is not the MX, and it is
not a defensive weapon. It is intended for use in a nuclear first strike against
Russia, and it is called the “Minuteman TX”—the traveling Minuteman!
Nearly a year and a half ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, I revealed America’s
deployment of one type of mobile missile world-wide.
The missiles I talked about then are deployed secretly, not only in the United
States but in Australia, New Zealand, and elsewhere. But those missiles are
only mobile in a limited sense. They can be set up quickly at unprepared sites,
and moved from one site to another from time to time. But America’s new mo-
bile missile, the Minuteman TX, is another matter. It’s designed to be moved
constantly until almost the moment of launch. The public stories about the al-
leged MX program serve several purposes. For one thing they are helping to
condition us to the growing prospect of NUCLEAR WAR. Even more impor-
tantly, the MX is being used as an excuse for funding, which is actually going
into the secret TX project! The latest example of this funding trickery took
place only a few weeks ago in early June. The Senate Armed Services Commit-
tee of the United States approved over 1.5-billion dollars for the MX program.
In addition, funding was also authorized for deploying 100 more Minuteman
missiles. They look like separate measures, but they are actually both related to
the secret Minuteman TX mobile missile project.
The publicity surrounding our supposed MX missile program also serves one
other very important purpose. That purpose is to keep the Traveling Minuteman
project a secret, even from most of those who are working on it. Any large
modern weapons program involves many thousands of people, and the Min-
uteman TX program is no exception. There are engineers, technicians,
manufacturing personnel, managers, secretaries, and so on. But the vast major-
ity of these people are led to believe that they are working on the MX program.
All kinds of projects which are actually meant for the Traveling Minuteman are
carried out under the false heading “MX.” In some cases other known missile
programs are also used as a cover for work on the Traveling Minuteman.
What makes this technique successful is the fact that all of the work on the pro-
gram is subdivided into many separate tasks. For example, one engineering
design group may be given the job of designing a mobile launch tower. They’re
told that the design is part of the MX program with operational deployment
246
Audio Letter 55
years away, but they are also given the explanation that a few are needed now
for developmental purposes. And so they design the launcher, build a few, and
deliver them after doing any necessary testing and redesign to make it work
properly. Next the launcher design is broken up into several chunks by a secret
working group within the Minuteman TX project. The various portions of the
launcher are then contracted out for production by several different manufactur-
ing concerns. Each individual chunk is unrecognizable, so they have no idea
that they are making parts for a secret weapon. And so only a tiny handful of
people fully understand what’s going on. They are the people who coordinate
the whole thing and bring it all together.
The supersecret Minuteman TX program is being carried on almost in the open,

but the constant publicity about the supposed MX makes it all unrecognizable
to us. And whenever necessary, the publicity about the MX cover project is ad-
justed to maintain the secret. It’s a highly sophisticated technique, and if you’ve
heard AUDIO LETTER No. 26 it may ring a bell with you. The cover-up tech-
nique for the Minuteman TX is very much like what was done in America’s
Moon program.
“Project Apollo” was a military program from start to finish, but we never real-
ized that because it was flooded with publicity that made us believe otherwise.
Today the clever publicity about a decoy program called MX is being master-
minded by a man who is uniquely qualified for the task. He is the same man
who orchestrated the great publicity that hid the real secrets of our Moon pro-
gram. His name was once a household word, but he was far more important
than we were ever told. He was often called “The Voice of the Astronauts.” His
name: Colonel John “Shorty” Powers. Early this year on January 19, 1980,
there were news reports that Powers had been found dead in his Phoenix home
but that, my friends, was only a cover story to explain his sudden disappear-
ance. He has been tapped in order to coordinate all the MX coverup stories
which we are now hearing. Powers lived alone, and it was little sacrifice for
him to go underground for his new secret job.
America’s deployment of Minuteman TX mobile missiles is secret, and yet it is

going on right under our noses. If you live in certain parts of the country you
have a good chance to see for yourself a Minuteman TX railroad shuttle car.
You may even have seen one already without knowing what it was. Let me de-
scribe it so that you will know what to look for.
A TX railroad car is somewhat like a boxcar but wider and much taller than
most boxcars. Also, a TX car does not have a flat roof like a boxcar. Instead, a
TX car looks a little like a long, slender barn on wheels. The roof has sloping
247
sides several feet high with a narrow flat strip along the top. This unusual shape
provides the necessary space for the long slender ICBM resting on supports in-
side. The design of the TX railroad car illustrates the rush-rush nature of the
whole Minuteman TX program. It was borrowed in large part from an existing
design for a special railroad car used by certain aerospace companies; but most
TX cars are not even built from scratch. Instead, flatcars used for carrying
truck-trailers are being commandeered. The flatcar is given extra reinforcement
if necessary to handle the weight of the missile and launcher. Then the odd-
looking TX transporter shell is built on and painted a nondescript brown. The
resulting railroad car is a strange combination of old and new. The shell on top
may be smooth, fresh, and clean but the base it is built on is likely to have old
paint, rust, and the scars of years on the rails.
In certain parts of the country, TX cars can be spotted fairly often in the midst
of normal freight trains. First, empty TX cars can be spotted in the areas where
they are built—such as Chicago and St. Louis. The missiles are built in Wash-
ington State, California, and Colorado so the TX cars can be spotted in those
areas. The special mobile launchers are built in Texas near Dallas and TX cars
can be seen in that region. The final mating of the missiles and their launch-
control systems takes place under direct military supervision. This is done in a
vast underground complex in the southwest corner of Ft. Hood, Texas. From
there the Minuteman TX missile cars head north for operational deployment.
The deployment is being coordinated from Minot Air Force Base, North Da-
kota. The Minuteman TX Traveling Missile is being deployed along existing
railroad tracks in our northern tier of states. The tracks have recently been re-
moved from normal freight-hauling service. This has created outcries from
farmers left with no means to get their crops to the market. They are among the
first victims of the secret Minuteman TX Traveling Missile project. When the
missiles are fully deployed, they will be in every northernmost state from
Washington to Wisconsin.
Every Minuteman TX missile now deployed is being shuttled back and forth
over a long stretch of railroad track. It rides in its mobile-launch car covered
against the weather and sightseers. A locomotive moves it up and down the
track according to instructions called “stochastic programming.” These instruc-
tions tell a locomotive to speed up, slow down, stop, back up, stop, go forward
again in an unpredictable fashion. The idea is to make the missile and its mobile
launcher a very difficult target. Right now, Russian Cosmospheres are hovering
on guard over every TX missile. These platforms (which America decided not
to develop in the 1960’s) carry Beam weapons which could blast the missiles;
but as I explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, American military planners are
248
Audio Letter 55
hoping to stun the Cosmospheres briefly as war begins. And so, they are ne-
glecting the Cosmospheres in planning their nuclear first strike with TX
missiles.
When the Bolsheviks, who now dominate America, decide to set off
NUCLEAR WAR ONE, here’s how they presently plan to do it. First they will
use their tested methods to swamp NORAD with false warning data of a Rus-
sian attack. America’s entire strategic retaliatory forces will respond by
attacking Russia. But even faster, our secretly deployed Minuteman TX mis-
siles will go to war. In the opening moments of the NORAD war alert, a special
attack order will be flashed across the Minuteman TX system. Within 30 sec-
onds the locomotive pulling each missile car will brake to a stop. As it does so,
explosive bolts will blast the cover off the launch car, exposing the missile in-
side. At the same time, powerful hydraulic pumps will be started. As soon as
the missile car comes to rest, safety locks will release the missile erector.
Within 15 seconds, ear-shattering pumps will raise the Minuteman TX ICBM to
firing position. Moments later, the launch car will be engulfed in rocket exhaust
as the missile streaks off toward Russia.
Unlike the United States, Russia does still have early-warning satellites. The
American missile attack will be detected, and within minutes Russian missiles
will be on their way. The early phases of the NORAD war alert will be like the
false alarms which have already taken place; but about 10 minutes into the alert,
the false alarm phase will be over. That is when our ballistic missile radars
along the Arctic Circle will first detect the approaching swarms of Russian
ICBMs. By means of false-alarm trickery and goading Russia into a missile at-
tack, the Bolsheviks here believe they will at last achieve their goal—ALL-
OUT THERMONUCLEAR WAR.
Topic #2—Recently a former United States Secretary of Labor, William Usery,

paid a visit to Japan. In more and more fields the United States can no longer
compete with Japan in international markets. I warned that this was coming in
my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR. Usery went to Japan
to see for himself why this is happening. But Usery was not prepared for the
shock he encountered. He visited all kinds of big manufacturing plants in Japan,
and everywhere he went he saw assembly lines made up of robots. What we
think of as Science Fiction here in the United States is everyday reality in mod-
ern Japan. For example, one of the plants visited by Usery assembles Datsun
automobiles. After his walk through it, the Washington Post quoted him as say-
ing: “It was downright scary. We walked for great distances down those aisles
and we didn’t see anybody.”
249
My friends, we in America are living in the past. Our stores may be filled with
pretty packages, but the other advanced nations of the world are passing us by.
That is one of the things which I have been trying to make you aware of for
years through my AUDIO LETTER reports, and now a special report is about
to be presented to the White House which confirms part of what I told you.
To illustrate this, let me remind you of the many disastrous reversals in Amer-
ica’s fortunes which have taken place secretly in recent years. I have made
many of them public through my AUDIO LETTER. We have been defeated in
space; we have slipped into a hopeless military predicament. As I have made
clear in the past, it is our own leaders who have done this to us!
For example, nearly 20 years ago our leaders ignored the urgent warnings of the
head of the Strategic Air Command. He was the late General Thomas Power.
General Power was worried about a threat on the technical horizon of electro-
gravitic levitating weapons platforms. He wanted the United States to develop
these hovering platforms so that we would not be caught by surprise. But as I
detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 32, our leaders paid no attention. They
thought they knew better. They had other plans!
But our leaders were making a grave mistake. It was only one of many great
miscalculations during the past 20 years. They were underestimating the poten-
tials for technical surprise because for the most part America’s leaders, in and
out of government, are not trained in science or engineering. Just as General
Power had feared, Russia did develop the floating weapons platforms. They are
called Cosmospheres, and their deployment over our heads began in late 1977,
as I first reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 29. They announced their presence
for a while by creating tremendous air booms along America’s east coast and
elsewhere. This they did by means of defocused blasts from their Charged Par-
ticle Beam weapons; and like the Cosmospheres themselves, Russia’s
operational Particle Beam weapons came as another surprise to our Rulers.
The report which is about to go to the White House says not a word about these
life and death secrets, but the report does describe the scientific backwardness
of America’s leaders. In Great Britain, France, Germany, Japan, and especially
in Russia, the report points out that things are very different. In those countries
the leadership, quote: “has a high level of scientific and technical literacy.”
By contrast, the report describes the progressive splintering of American soci-

ety into two groups. One group is the minority who are trained and work in
science and engineering. The other group includes the great majority of us. We
are being left uneducated about most of the ever changing realities of modern
250
Audio Letter 55
technology. The report being prepared for the White House is accurate enough
as far as it goes; but what it leaves out is even more important than what it says,
because the division of American society into two camps—one technically
trained and one not, is no accident! The old axiom “Divide and Conquer” is still
true as ever. On one hand the scientific and engineering community itself is
manipulated constantly without being aware of it. The secret Minuteman TX
Missile project is a typical example. But for the rest of us the situation is even
more confusing, so the few who are in a position to pull all the strings have us
at their mercy.
Earlier this month an outstanding authority on Constitutional law passed away,

Professor Fred Rodell of Yale University. In a book titled “WOE UNTO
LAWYERS,” he wrote some words which are a perfect description of our situa-
tion today. He said, quote:
“For every age there is a group of bright boys, learned in their trade and jealous
of their learning, who blend technical competence with plain and fancy hocus-
pocus to make themselves masters of their fellow men.”
In some ways the problems we face today are not new at all. Earlier this month
this fact was illustrated by a series of biographical dramas on the Public Broad-
casting Service. They dealt with the life of a British writer who became Prime
Minister, Benjamin Disraeli. Disraeli spent his life struggling against the things
he considered unfair within the British government, and in a novel he once
wrote, quote: “The world is governed by very different personages to what is
imagined by those who are not behind the scenes.” That was true a century ago,
and it is true today. But in other ways, today is different from the past. The dif-
ference is that incredible technologies which were unthinkable in Disraeli’s
time are now changing our world. Throughout history there has always been
unseen skirmishes, undeclared battles, and unofficial wars; but today these have
reached levels never imagined in the past. Even as we see the multiplying pub-
lic signs of war to come, secret warfare is growing more intense by the day.
During the four months of my absence from this microphone, there have been
too many of these events to discuss in detail; but I have already given you the
background for all these events in past AUDIO LETTERS. So what I will try to
do now is simply to remind you of what you already know to understand recent
headlines. A bird’s-eye view of the past several months will make one thing all
too clear. The secret war between the United States and Russia is becoming
more and more violent. The Satanic Bolsheviks who have been overthrown and
expelled by Russia are tightening their stranglehold on our own country, and
the secret Christian sect who took over the Kremlin are pressing ahead in a war
251
of attrition. With one hand they are still keeping the lid on all-out war, but with
the other hand they are chipping away at America’s ability to make war.
In the final printed portion of AUDIO LETTER No. 54 last February, I gave a
warning to expect bad weather in the United States. I described how Russia had
begun a campaign of weather modification to reduce crops in the United States.
This is in direct retaliation for the Carter grain embargo, which the Russians
regard as starvation politics.
As March began, a killer snowstorm blanketed the southeast and many crops
were damaged. A month later killer rainstorms struck New Orleans, much as
they had done in February in California; but meanwhile the grain-bearing bread
basket of the Great Plains was becoming parched and dry. By the end of April it
was already guaranteed that grain yields in large areas will be reduced this year.
As the spring continued, severe weather turned into a record-setting epidemic
nation-wide. Every single day from May 9 to June 7, tornadoes or other severe
and destructive weather struck somewhere in the United States. During the final
two weeks of that period, the National Weather Service reported 964 cases of
violent weather. On May 29 the United States tried to launch a new weather
satellite to watch the fireworks, but the satellite called NOAA-B never reached
its intended orbit.
Earlier this month America’s unprecedented weather took a new turn. There
was a strange split in the jet stream. Cool northern states grew even colder, and
warm southern states boiled over with heat. On June 16 there was even frost in
Michigan and Wisconsin, while the South sweltered. A few days later on June
20 the so-called Carter Administration gave the first hint that Russia’s weather
war is really hurting. For the first time there were hints of possibly lifting the
Russian grain embargo, but the next day the Bolsheviks changed their minds
again. They said the grain embargo will continue, so as of now there is no pros-
pect of an improvement in America’s weather. Instead it may well grow worse,
and the food shortages I warned about last February are in the making.
In AUDIO LETTERS 53 and 54 I reported the details of secret warfare involv-

ing Iran. Starting in late January the Bolsheviks here in America tried to carry
out a surprise nuclear attack against Russia. The plan they were following was
the one I first made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 37, with some additions.
As I reported, the Russians used their Cosmospheres to completely ruin the
American attack plan. Nuclear war hysteria had been building fast here in
America, but with our secret defeat the war chant stopped abruptly. Our defeat
in January was kept out of view and completely secret.
252
Audio Letter 55
But the Bolsheviks here tried again to set off nuclear war just three months
later, in April. Once again the American war plan met with total failure, but this
time our Rulers could not hide it completely. The April 25 raid into Iran—
supposedly to rescue our hostages—became a disaster that filled the headlines.
The American Commandoes who were sent into Iran tried their best to follow
orders and do their duty; but unknown to them, those who had planned the raid
did not intend for it to succeed! They were supposed to reach Tehran, but dis-
cover too late that they were too small a force to do the job. As soon as the
Commandoes ran into big trouble, that was to be used as an excuse for Ameri-
can Navy jets to strafe Tehran; and with American passion stirred up, the Iran
crisis was to escalate with additional military moves. But for more than a year
now, Russian Intelligence has been informed about even the most secret plans
in Washington; and so the Russians were ready.
They unraveled the latest Bolshevik war plan in two ways. First the huge ar-
mada of Cosmospheres were floating overhead on April 25 as the American
helicopter force entered Iran. Using their weather modification capabilities, the
Cosmospheres intensified dust storms in the area. They also utilized microwave
brain-scrambling radiation to cause nausea, disorientation, and fatigue among
the helicopter crews. The Russian brain-scrambler is the same technology
which I first revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 20. The Russians were hoping to
cause the mission to be given up as hopeless without casualties, but the Ameri-
can Commando force reached its first check point, regrouped, and prepared to
continue. So the Cosmospheres turned up their brain-scrambling transmitters to
full power. One helicopter took off but veered off crazily, and sliced into a C-
130 Troop Transport airplane. Two others prepared to take off. But Cosmos-
pheres overhead fired low-power bursts from their Particle Beams, rotor blades
flew off, and the helicopters went nowhere. At that point it was obvious that it
was all over. The raid was aborted, and all energy shifted to efforts to explain
away the disaster to the public. Soon the charred bodies of slain Commandoes
were flown home to Dover Air Force Base, Delaware. It was the second time in
less than two years for Dover to receive bodies from a secret Commando raid
by the United States! The first time they had paid the price for a successful op-
eration in Guyana, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 40; but this time they
died in total defeat.
The Bolsheviks here might still have stoked up a military crisis over Iran, but
the Russians made a chess move to prevent that. On April 28 the individual
known to the public as Cyrus Vance resigned as Secretary of State in protest.
This checkmated the Bolsheviks by making a public issue of any plans to pur-
sue additional military moves.
253
Another headline story in the secret war was the explosion of Mount St. Helens
in Washington State on May 18. This was followed by a second eruption on
May 25, and another major blast this month on June 13. At the same time there
has been a sharp increase in the number of strong earthquakes along the west
coast, especially in California. The first awesome cataclysm on May 18 took
Government scientists by surprise. They did not expect anything so violent to
happen without plenty of warning; but when the mountain blew its top, even the
unfortunate Government geologist on the scene detected no warning signs. He
had only enough time to grab his radio and shout “Vancouver, Vancouver. This
is it.” Then the radio went silent as the blast wave reached him. Up until the
awful surprise of May 18, Government spokesmen were playing down Mount
St. Helens. “No reason to expect much,” they kept saying; but now, after the
fact, they are changing their tune. Now they say that other volcanic mountains
of the Cascade Range also look dangerous.
There are just too many earthquakes going on, among other things. At least a
dozen mountains in the Pacific northwest now look suspicious by some ac-
counts, especially Mt. Rainier, Mt. Baker, Mt. Hood, and most of all Mt. Shasta
in northern California. Mt. Shasta is especially worrisome because it overlooks
a major agricultural center—California’s Central Valley. But it is also worri-
some for other reasons. My friends, what we are seeing are the beginnings of a
geophysical disaster along America’s west coast. Powerful natural forces are
involved, but they are being guided and speeded up by deliberate means. I am
talking about geophysical warfare.
The stage has been set for the events now under way for over three years. I first
reported the presence of Russian nuclear mines in major western dams in
AUDIO LETTER No. 23, and one of the dams I named then was the one on Mt.
Shasta. The following month in AUDIO LETTER No. 24 I reported on Rus-
sia’s preparations for geophysical warfare. It involved triggering awesome
forces around the Pacific rim, known as the Ring of Fire. America’s west coast,
which is strategic both militarily and agriculturally, will be devastated.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 24 I listed the locations of seven (7) undersea hydro-
gen bombs on the ocean floor west of Washington, Oregon, and California. I
can now reveal that these were detonated one by one in early March. Their tidal
wave potential was avoided by firing them individually. Instead they were used
to trigger flows of volcanic magma toward the Cascade Mountain Range.
What nature was already doing slowly, started speeding up. By mid May Mount
St. Helens was approaching the eruption point, but left to itself the mountain
might have released the tremendous pressures inside slowly in one moderate
254
Audio Letter 55
eruption after another. So the Russians made use of the Cosmospheres to make
sure that it exploded all at once with awesome power. Just after 8:30 A.M. on
that Sunday of May 18, a squadron of Cosmospheres started firing at the north
peak of the mountain. They fired their Particle Beams in short pauses, one after
another in succession. The result was a series of machine-gun-like explosions
and flashes around the summit of Mount St. Helens. The mountain started vi-
brating, cracks opened up, the pressure could be contained no longer, and the
mountain exploded. The Particle Beam flashes would have been spectacular if
seen close up, but almost everyone close enough to see them died in the over-
whelming blast that followed. The same technique was used again to release the
second blast on May 25, but that eruption was not as violent, and a few people
who saw the flashes lived to tell about it. On May 26 UPI carried a news item
giving the reactions of two witnesses. One said that the volcano, quote:
“Rocked out all of a sudden. We were awake in a hurry, then the flashes woke
us all the way up. The thunder that went with it would rattle your bones. It was
like a million little explosions, then a big crash.”
My friends, it remains to be seen just how far the geophysical warfare now un-
der way will go; but I can only remind you of the warning I gave last October
1979 in AUDIO LETTER No. 51. The exact words I used then were: “The
Kremlin is debating whether the time has come after all to unleash the great
man-made catastrophe on America’s west coast.”
Topic #3—This topic will be very brief because it’s based on information
which is very sketchy up to now, but it could turn out to be very important so I
want to alert you now without further delay.
The world-wide struggle today is between two ancient and bitter enemies. Both
want to control Russia and thereby to determine the fate of the world. One fac-
tion is that of the atheistic Bolsheviks who seized control of Russia in 1917.
The other faction is a secret native Christian sect in Russia who worked for six
decades to overthrow the Bolsheviks. For years now the new rulers in the
Kremlin have been expelling their old enemies, the old Bolsheviks, from Rus-
sia. And the Bolsheviks from Russia have been flooding mostly here to the
United States, and right under our very noses they are taking away our free-
doms in a sophisticated new Bolshevik revolution!
I have discussed all this before, especially in AUDIO LETTERS 28, 29, and 38.
We are seeing the climax of a larger war of a thousand years. It’s the war be-
tween the Russians and the Khazars, which I described in AUDIO LETTER
No. 50 last fall.
255
In the spring of ‘79 I revealed that a secret Intelligence war of “doubles” had
broken out in Washington. The Bolsheviks here had upset America’s former
rulers, the four Rockefeller Brothers, and were preparing for war. The Russians
responded by intervening directly within our own government. The Bolsheviks
were replacing key American leaders with doubles, and the Russians were re-
placing those with their own doubles. I revealed the war of doubles in AUDIO
LETTER No. 45. The following month I revealed that Russia was deploying a
secret weapon in the war of doubles. They were not human doubles, but genetic
replicas of the people they were replacing. These are biological robots of a type
known as “Organic Robotoids.” They look and act human, but they are not hu-
man. Instead, they are advanced products of genetic engineering.
Less than six months later, in AUDIO LETTER No. 51, I revealed that the Bol-
sheviks here in America were counterattacking with their own type of
biological robots. These are called Synthetic Automatons.
When I first revealed what I did about man-made genetic replicas of human be-
ings, I braced myself against ridicule; and I have been condemned in countless
letters telling me that man cannot create new forms of life. Genetic engineering
was not in the news a year ago, but less than two weeks ago the UNITED
STATES SUPREME COURT handed down a landmark decision. They have
proclaimed that new forms of life created by man can be patented—and, my
friends, there will be a rush to the patent office. At this very moment there are
over 100 patents pending for man-made life forms! If Professor Frankenstein
were alive today he, too, could patent his monster.
The Russians and the Bolsheviks are locked in a continual tug of war using
their genetic replicas. When the White House is occupied by Bolshevik synthet-
ics, American policy reflects the Bolshevik line; but whenever the Russians
manage to replace synthetics with their own robotoids, White House policy is
made in Moscow. The result is a never ending series of policy reversals, which
are mystifying many editorial writers.
A famous example was the United States vote against Israel at the United Na-
tions last March. It was defended for two days, and then suddenly disavowed.
The anti-Israel vote was ordered by Russian robotoids, but two days later the
Bolsheviks eliminated them and used their own synthetics to disavow the vote.
For many months now this hidden tug of war has been rocking the United
States Government, but now there is a chance that the same thing will soon be
happening in the Russian Government as well, because during the past two
months the Bolsheviks here in America have succeeded in penetrating the
256
Audio Letter 55
Kremlin with synthetics. Several top leaders of the Politburo were recently
killed and replaced with Bolshevik synthetics. One of these was the Kremlin’s
strong man, Admiral Gorshkov. The Bolsheviks are using their synthetics in a
new bid to retake control of Russia, but the ruling group in the Kremlin under-
stand what they are up against and they are fighting back. A few weeks ago the
Bolsheviks were on the verge of gaining the upper hand, now though they have
lost their initial advantage of surprise. In addition, the Bolsheviks are appar-
ently having difficulties with the synthetics which they send into the Kremlin.
Several synthetics have disobeyed their Bolshevik programming.
Right now the situation is far from clear, but one thing is certain. An unseen
battle to the death is under way now in the Kremlin, and the outcome will affect
everyone on the face of the earth!
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
It is time now to give you my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER
I’ve tried to give you a bird’s-eye view of events over the past several months.
The bottom line is that the drums of approaching nuclear war are beating louder
and louder. Even more urgently, secret warfare is already under way, and it is
becoming more and more violent.
The explosion of Mount St. Helens last month was brought about by geophysi-
cal warfare. Likewise, the severe weather patterns in the United States over the
past several months have been produced by weather warfare. The Russians are
doing this in retaliation for the giant grain embargo by the Carter Administra-
tion. The Russian weather war against the United States is intended to reduce
our crops. In the Southwest, brutal heat is baking crops and killing cattle; and in
the northern Great Plains grain is dying in a five-state region of severe drought.
Russia’s enemies here are not you and me but the Bolsheviks, who are now in
control of our Government. The Bolsheviks here are also the deadly enemies of
you and me.
In 1917 Christian Russia was dragged down into the hell of Bolshevism
through the dark tunnel of war. Now the Bolsheviks are being expelled from
Russia, so they are trying to do it all over again here in America. They are de-
termined to throw America’s nuclear arsenal at Russia, win or lose, because
either way the Bolsheviks expect to pick up the pieces here in complete Bol-
shevik dictatorship.
My friends, these are dangerous times indeed, but we must not lose heart. If you
are ever tempted to throw up your hands and say, “I can’t do anything,” just
257
think this over. All the weapons of war, all the propaganda, and all the controls
of government have just one purpose. That purpose is to control you. If you
give up and just close your eyes, you are giving them the very thing they want
most. But as long as you keep your eyes open, see the truth as best you can and
hold on to it, you are defeating them. Our Lord Jesus Christ said it long ago:
“You shall know the truth, and the truth shall make you free.”
258
Audio Letter 56
July 30, 1980
Yesterday an “Emergency Session” of the United Nations General Assembly
came to an end. It was treated as a non-event by the controlled major media of
the United States, and many Americans have paid little attention—but it was
only the seventh Emergency Session in the 35-year history of the United Na-
tions!
My friends, the stakes involve NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The Bolsheviks who
now control the United States Government are determined to bring about nu-
clear war with Russia, one way or another; but their most preferred path to war
lies through the Middle East. I first gave details about this nearly five years ago
in AUDIO LETTER No. 6. Since then there have been continual revisions and
up-dates of the planning for war by way of the Middle East. I have kept my lis-
teners abreast of these developments in later AUDIO LETTERS, especially
Nos. 22, 28, 37, and 46.
Ever since late 1977 the Middle East war plan has grown to include Iran as a
central factor, because the main military strategy of the controlled United States
Government is now a “first-strike” strategy; and Iran, nestled against Russia’s
underbelly, is a tempting base for attack against Russia. But the preferred initial
focus of the Middle East war would not be Iran, but Israel.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 50 I reviewed the common roots of the Zionists who
control Israel and the Bolsheviks who now control America. They always work
together, hand in glove, because they are derived from the same source. That
ancient source was the mis-named “Kingdom of the Jews,” the Khazar King-
dom, which existed a thousand years ago in what is now southern Russia. The
Bolsheviks and Zionists are identical in their goals and tactics—except for one
thing. The Zionist dream is for eventual world domination from Jerusalem,
whereas the Bolsheviks want to control their former homeland of Russia and
rule the world from there. But the Bolsheviks have largely lost the power they
gained in Russia in 1917, and they are now using the United States as their
main power base.
259
The Bolshevik-controlled United States is virtually the lone sponsor of Israel.

In return, Israel performs many favors for America’s rulers, especially in mili-
tary and covert spy matters.
The United Nations Emergency Session which just ended amounted to a refer-
endum by the world against Israel. For years the Begin Government of Israel
has been pressing ahead in a relentless program of acts designed to inflame the
anger of Israel’s Arab neighbors. While protesting loudly that she only wants to
be left alone in peace, Israel has been systematically doing the things that can
only lead to war—and it is a war which can very quickly engulf the entire
world. That is why a majority of the members of the United Nations were wor-
ried enough to petition for an Emergency Session; and after the six-day debate
was over, 112 nations lined up together against Israel. They declared Israel’s
settlements in the occupied Arab territories illegal, and demanded that Israel
start pulling out before November 15 of this year. Their common position was
summed up by Guinea’s United Nations ambassador in the words: “The process
of war must come to an end.” Israel’s ambassador at the United Nations tried to
paint the whole debate as a meaningless gesture, even though the United Na-
tions created Israel in the first place. And following the Zionist lead, the
Bolshevik-dominated major media here in America treated it as a non-event!
The fact is, my friends, that Israel actions are fast bringing the Middle East to
the threshold of war. War fever is rising, and it is being reflected by the ther-
mometer of war, the price of gold. Last January 21, 1980, gold traded at an all-
time high of $875 per ounce; and as I revealed that month in AUDIO LETTER
No. 53, a secret nuclear first-strike operation was then being attempted against
Russia. It failed, and gold prices dropped off for several months. But now war
danger is rising again.
The Bolsheviks here are becoming increasingly desperate in their war plans
against Russia. If we as a people are ever going to act to save ourselves from
final ruin, NOW is the time we must begin. The stakes are: life and death, peace
or war; but the key to our own effective action is not military. It lies with the
thermometer of war, GOLD.
Topic #1—IAN FLEMING AND THE FT. KNOX GOLD SCANDAL
Topic #2—NARROWING OPTIONS IN THE BOLSHEVIK PLAN FOR

NUCLEAR WAR
260
Audio Letter 56
Topic #3—STEP ONE IN WHAT YOU CAN DO.
Topic #1—Not many years ago millions were fascinated by the fictional ex-
ploits of an imaginary British spy. His name was James Bond, and he was the
creation of the late British author Ian Fleming. It was Fleming more than any-
one else who created the image of the modern “super spy.” All the Fleming spy
stories had two major characteristics in common that made them stand out. For
one thing, every story was about a world-shaking situation which was kept se-
cret from the public. The other common ingredient was always a dazzling
display of secret high technologies of every description—things unknown to the
public. These two unique features of his stories eventually catapulted Ian Flem-
ing into world-wide fame. He was the undisputed leader in his field. As always
happens many others tried to copy him, and spy stories were all around us in
the late 60’s. But he always remained one of a kind. Try as they might, none of
his imitators could ever match his work. It was as though he had a secret advan-
tage, a secret weapon of his own—and, my friends, he did!
In writing his stories, Ian Fleming was drawing upon his own secret weapon.
That weapon was knowledge. Fleming had been a high-ranking officer of Brit-
ain’s crack Intelligence agency called MI-5. It was the British who practically
invented and perfected the modern concept of Intelligence, and to this day Brit-
ish Intelligence remains the equal of any in the world.
When Fleming left Her Majesty’s Secret Service to become a writer, he was
severely limited in what he could publish. He was bound by the restrictions of
the British “Official Secrets Act.” Under that Act, Fleming would have been
liable for punishment for revealing any official secret without authorization.
And so Ian Fleming, the former British Intelligence officer, became what is
known as a “fictionalizer”—that is, he started with factual knowledge but rear-
ranged and modified it in order to create startling stories of fiction. He was
always extremely careful about how he did this. He always knew that he was
skirting the fringes of the Official Secrets Act. He could not afford to make a
mistake, because it would have meant prison for him and possible forfeiture of
pension rights; and so he always altered every situation, every secret technol-
ogy, and every personality enough to avoid revealing actual secrets. It was a
long and meticulous process both to protect himself and to make each final
story readable. For that reason Fleming completed a new James Bond novel
only about once a year. If it had all been imagination, as many people believe,
he would have been capable of producing a new book every few months, mak-
ing himself far richer. But because his stories were all rooted in fact, secret fact,
he did not dare speed up and run the risk of making a mistake.
261
Ian Fleming had two purposes in writing his famous series of spy novels. One
purpose, of course, was to earn a very comfortable living; but beyond that he
was also trying to subtly open the eyes of the reading public by the medium of
fiction. Because of the Official Secrets Act he could not publish the facts that
he knew as fact without modification, so he did what he felt was the next best
thing, and that was to use his stories to open our minds to at least think in terms
which were otherwise hidden from us. Fleming truly believed that this was
something which somehow had to be done, because knowing what he knew he
was not an optimistic man.
More than three decades ago he could see that the public was beginning to be
left behind by secret new weapons, new technologies, and new techniques to
enslave us all. A public awakening was the only hope he could see to prevent
eventual disaster, and so beginning in the early 50’s Fleming started writing
exciting fiction in order to hint at secret facts. His plan was “Fictionalize to
open eyes.” By the early 60’s the one-man campaign of Ian Fleming was start-
ing to gather steam. His fictional hero James Bond started gaining popularity in
ever-wider circles; and even though his exploits were understood to be fiction,
people were beginning to think of possibilities which they had never seen be-
fore. James Bond movies were in the works. After years of gradual growth, the
power of Ian Fleming’s fiction was about to explode into a world-wide craze.
Countless millions were on the verge of being encouraged to think unthinkable
thoughts about what goes on in secret. Simply by encouraging people to think
new thoughts for themselves, Ian Fleming was endangering secret plans of very
powerful men—and he almost got away with it because they were slow to real-
ize what he was doing. But just as the James Bond craze was beginning, Ian
Fleming’s plan was brought to an end. Sixteen years ago next month, on August
12, 1964, Ian Fleming died an untimely death at age 56.
By making us think, Ian Fleming had posed a real danger to secret long-range
plans of a powerful few. And even after he was removed from the scene, his
fictional efforts to awaken us could not be stopped overnight. The momentum
of public interest was just too great because he had caught the imagination of
millions upon millions. The James Bond craze could not be stopped, and so the
other choice was to control it. Experts in propaganda and public deception stud-
ied the problem and quickly hit on the solution. Fleming’s plan had been
“Fictionalize to open eyes.” He wanted to make us see possibilities which were
being hidden from us otherwise; but with him out of the way, the new plan be-
came: “Fictionalize to close eyes.” It was a plan to make secrets more secure
than ever by making the truth unbelievable to us, and this technique of blinding
us through fiction has been a major factor on the American scene now for 15
years.
262
Audio Letter 56
A perfect example of all of this took place with a book Fleming published 21
years ago in 1959. It was titled “GOLD FINGER.” The starting point for the
book was knowledge about certain secrets. Fleming knew that there was a long-
range plan to create monetary chaos for private gain and power. He also knew
that a central feature of the plan was to be the secret disappearance of Amer-
ica’s monetary gold hoard at Fort Knox, and he knew that the kingpin of this
international plot was a man with legendary greed for gold. His name: DAVID
ROCKEFELLER. It was a plan that was totally unsuspected by the public. It
was still the Eisenhower era, the heyday of the so-called “almighty dollar.” The
dollar was good as gold, because it was backed by the world’s largest monetary
gold hoard. Fort Knox was thought to be impregnable; and in those days, my
friends, no one dared speak ill of the Four Rockefeller Brothers.
Ian Fleming decided to write a book that would begin to alert people to what
was afoot. He could not tell the whole story, nor tell it as fact because of the
Official Secrets Act; but by fictionalizing he was able to cause people to think
of possibilities which would never have occurred to them otherwise.
For example, in the 50’s it was a rare American who considered even the possi-
bility of monetary turmoil. The dollar was good as gold, and that was that. Why
even think about gold? Individual citizens could not own it except in jewelry.
Wasn’t all the rest of it thought to be sealed up in Fort Knox? Everyone knew
no one could get in there, and so we didn’t even think about it. But in his book
GOLD FINGER, Fleming brought several key thoughts to our minds. He de-
vised a fictional scheme to show that Fort Knox might not be impregnable after
all. He raised the question:
“What would happen to the dollar and other currencies if the Fort Knox gold
were no longer available?” And he proposed the unthinkable thought that
someone, if they were rich enough and greedy enough, might want to get their
hands on America’s gold.
The actual GOLD FINGER story, of course, was fiction; but the basic points
which I have just mentioned were fact. GOLD FINGER was published in 1959;
and barely two years later in 1961, the hemorrhaging of America’s monetary
gold supply began. Agents of David Rockefeller within the United States Gov-
ernment provided a cloak of authority called the “London Gold Pool
Agreement”; and then for seven years until 1968, big Army trucks loaded with
gold bullion rolled out of Fort Knox constantly—and all without a word to the
public!
263
Some of the gold shipments during those seven years were recorded on a list
kept by the United States Mint. Almost without exception the shipments listed
went to the New York Assay Office, where they disappeared without any fur-
ther accounting. As you may recall, the New York Assay Office was the focus
of a scandal in December 1978 involving missing gold. Over 5,000 ounces had
simply disappeared; but that, my friends, was a very small tip of a very large
iceberg, and so the controversy over the missing millions in gold at the New
York Assay Office was quickly smoothed over and covered up. They could not
afford to allow any real investigation which might let the public know the truth.
According to the official list of shipments I mentioned earlier, a large fraction
of America’s monetary gold went to the New York Assay Office in the 60’s.
There it disappeared, never to be seen again.
But, my friends, the real situation was even worse. Long ago my sources gave
me hard evidence of many large gold shipments from Fort Knox which were
not even listed. Five years ago this month in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 I revealed
a specific example of this. It was a shipment on January 20, 1965, in which four
(4) tractor-trailers loaded up at Fort Knox and then headed for railroad tracks
across the river at Jeffersonville, Indiana. My sources provided me with details,
including photographs, of the operation. But the shipment was one of many
which did not show on any official Government list of shipments.
In June 1975, Mr. Edward Durell and my other associates were able to confront
officials of the United States Mint with this example of missing shipments, and
for once the confrontation took place under circumstances in which the Mint
was under great pressure to respond. In the most specific terms the Bureau of
the Mint was asked what was shipped out of Fort Knox in the four tractor-
trailers on January 20, 1965. The written answer dated June 19, 1975 came
from the then Director of the United States Mint, Mrs. Mary Brooks. She con-
firmed that this unlisted shipment amounted to more than one and three-quarter
(1-3/4) million ounces of gold—and, my friends, it was not junk gold melted
down from old coins which were confiscated from Americans in 1934. The
shipment was part of America’s true monetary gold, good delivery gold which
is .995 fine or better. After this admission in writing about an enormous secret
shipment of gold out of Fort Knox, one would have thought that there would be
fireworks, but not so!
My friend Mr. Durell showered the appropriate officials throughout the Gov-
ernment with this evidence of massive fraud at Fort Knox, and he notified the
major media and all of the appropriate leaders in Congress about this evidence.
For reasons which I will explain later in this message, I believe it’s time to call
264
Audio Letter 56
attention to one of these people. He is Senator William Proxmire of Wisconsin,

Chairman of the Senate Banking Committee.
Proxmire loves to parade as a great defender of our financial interests in Wash-

ington. He’s famous for his so-called “Golden Fleece Award.” Proxmire
searches through the Federal Budget with a fine-tooth comb, and he’s always
able to find some project or contract which rightly or wrongly will look ridicu-
lous to the public. He then trots it out, announces how much it costs, and with a
great flourish gives it his Golden Fleece Award. By this and other means Prox-
mire is a master at maintaining his image as a protector of the American
economy.
But if ever a situation deserved the Proxmire Golden Fleece Award, it is the
FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL. The petty examples usually chosen by
Proxmire fleece the American public out of perhaps hundreds of thousands or a
few million dollars. It makes good publicity for Proxmire, but it’s insignificant.
By contrast, the Fort Knox Gold Scandal is fleecing every one of us out of the
shirt on our back. It has undermined the dollar itself, which is on its way to de-
struction. It has set off ever-worsening inflation even while our economy is
stagnating. The Gold Scandal is fleecing us all, but what has Senator William
Proxmire done about that??
Let me tell you what he has, and has not, done. For more than five years Prox-
mire has been among the top American leaders who have been kept informed
about major developments and evidence in the Gold Scandal. He has been
given the evidence I mentioned earlier about the missing shipment from Fort
Knox, as well as other evidence of major discrepancies; but up to now, Prox-
mire has kept his lips sealed about discrepancies about America’s gold
supply—with one exception. That exception took place in December 1978.
Word had leaked out about the 5,000-or so missing ounces of gold at the New
York Assay Office worth over $3,000,000 at today’s prices. As Chairman of the
Senate Banking Committee, Proxmire immediately jumped on the story.
Frowning in disapproval, he proclaimed that this would have to be looked into.
Hearing those words from the champion of the Golden Fleece Award, the pub-
lic relaxed and quickly forgot about it. And almost as quickly, Senator William
Proxmire made sure he forgot about it too. To this day, no real investigation has
ever taken place over the missing gold at the New York Assay Office.
Proxmire’s failure to follow up that $3,000,000 gold discrepancy was bad

enough, but it’s nothing compared to his apparent disinterest in investigating
the truth about the Fort Knox Gold Scandal. The case of the missing Fort Knox
shipment is a case in point. At today’s prices, that one shipment alone was
265
worth more than one billion dollars ($1,000,000,000)—not a mere million but
1000 times a million! And that, in truth, was only one example. There were
many unreported shipments like that. That is why the Treasury figures, which
show a huge remaining American gold hoard, are a fraud—a total fraud. And
that’s why the United States could auction off only a small amount of junk gold
over a period of time and then had to stop. And that’s why the United States
dollar is no longer “as good as gold”; instead, it’s fast becoming worth less than
the paper it’s printed on.
Senator William Proxmire, like many others trusted by the American public,
has been given massive evidence about all of this; but his actions so far have
helped only those who have taken our own gold in order to fleece us of every-
thing we own. Later in this message I will have more to say about Senator
William Proxmire and the Fort Knox Gold Scandal.
But for now I want to finish the story of Ian Fleming’s aborted efforts to alert
the public about things like these. As I already explained, his principle was
“Fictionalize to open eyes”; but after his untimely death in 1964 his stories
were seized upon and warped, especially in movies, for the opposite purpose.
The new purpose became “Fictionalize to CLOSE eyes.”
Nothing could be done to alter and neutralize Fleming’s books once they had
been published, so instead attention was drawn away from the books to the
James Bond movies; and as the movies were in preparation, disinformation
agents were planted on the scene to guide the process. As a result, the James
Bond who emerged on film was a very different character from the one in
Fleming’s novels. The basic story lines remained the same, but in many subtle
ways the psychology was radically changed. The movies retained the adven-
ture, fast action, dazzling secret technologies, and bold plots which Fleming
had pioneered; but by clever use of satirical humor, every James Bond movie
ended up by laughing at itself. Secret weapons were exaggerated or twisted so
as to make them entertaining but also ridiculous; and by filling the movies with
strange characters and never-ending gimmicks, viewers were distracted from
the underlying warnings of the basic plot.
The GOLD FINGER story was a perfect example of all this. Fleming’s original
novel called attention to something which most readers would never have
thought about otherwise. That was the potential relationship between Fort Knox
gold and international monetary chaos, and through his fictional plot he also
planted the idea that the legendary Fort Knox bullion depository might not be
invulnerable after all. But these lessons were rarely, if ever, realized by those
who saw only the movie; instead, the typical viewer walked out of the movie
266
Audio Letter 56
laughing. It was obvious that what he had seen could happen only in fiction,
and from that point onward he was programmed to react with disbelief if he
should ever hear of tampering with Fort Knox gold. Such a thing could only be
fiction—it was just too ridiculous ever to really happen.
This is the attitude I encountered more than seven years ago when I began giv-
ing public warnings about deliberate plans for economic chaos. I myself was
first alerted to the Fort Knox Gold Scandal by none other than British Intelli-
gence in London after completing a secret mission for Queen Elizabeth in
Zaire; and in my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR, I out-
lined the overall plan, including the unseen role of America’s gold. I had one
major advantage which Ian Fleming did not have. The United States does not
yet have an Official Secrets Act like that of Britain, and so I was not forced to
fictionalize. Instead I was able to give the real plans and real names of those
responsible for things to come.
The prototype for Ian Fleming’s GOLD FINGER of two decades ago was none
other than David Rockefeller, and in my book I showed in detail how he played
his kingpin role in the plan to destroy our economy. I described how this was
leading to a collapsing dollar, skyrocketing gold prices, a stagnating economy,
spiraling financial problems for State and local governments, urban unrest, and
eventually NUCLEAR WAR. But when David Rockefeller himself was inter-
viewed about my book, even he resorted to the technique “Fictionalize to close
eyes.” His comment about THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR
was: “Interesting science fiction.”
But, my friends, the truth is always stranger than fiction. Today it is fiction that
we believe, and fact that we don’t believe. Most people still believe the fiction
that David Rockefeller himself is still alive, but he actually died in a secret coup
d’etat nearly a year and a half ago, as I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 43.
What we see today is no longer David Rockefeller but only his image. My
friends, the truth is the truth, no matter what we choose to believe; and what the
late David Rockefeller dismissed as “Interesting science fiction” seven years
ago is coming true today. Yesterday we would not believe. Today we are suf-
fering. Tomorrow it will be too late—if we do not act NOW.
Topic #2—For more than two years now the United States government under
the Bolsheviks has been dragging Americans down the path toward national
suicide in Nuclear War. America’s controlling military strategy today is a ka-
mikaze plan which I first revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 35 for June 1978. If
there should be all-out war between the United States and Russia, the United
States will be at a hopeless military disadvantage.
267
The Russians completely destroyed the rough military balance between East
and West during the closing months of 1977. During those months, as I re-
ported in AUDIO LETTERS No.’s 26 through 29, the Russians deployed their
new secret Space Triad of manned strategic weapons. And since that time the
Russians have had men in Space constantly on a routine basis.
Meanwhile, the United States can do nothing but sit and watch. Our famous
Space Shuttle, already two years behind schedule, just keeps sitting on the
ground instead of flying into space; and the biggest American space spectacular
in the past three years was the alleged “Crash of SKYLAB,” one year ago this
month.
But, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 48, even that episode was a hoax.
SKYLAB had actually been shot down twenty-one months earlier, as I reported
in AUDIO LETTER No. 27.
For more than two years we have been at Russia’s mercy militarily. If the
Kremlin were the real source of nuclear war fever today, the United States
would already lie in smoking ruins. But it hasn’t happened, and the reason it
hasn’t happened is something I’ve been reporting to you now for two and a half
years. Those who formerly controlled the Kremlin, the atheistic Bolsheviks,
control it no more. They have been overthrown and expelled by a secret sect of
native Russian Christians.
The expelled Bolsheviks from Russia have been flocking in droves mainly here
to the United States for a new start. And so, unsuspected by most Americans,
the true relationship between the United States and Russia has been turned up-
side down. The Bolsheviks, who used to rule Russia, now rule the United
States; and now that they are here they are still as vicious and warlike as they
ever were in Russia.
If America were ruled today by reasonable and honest men, concerned for the
welfare of all the people, they would take an objective look at our relations with
Russia. On one hand they would see the military fact that Russia now has the
means to level our country a dozen times over in a matter of minutes. But, on
the other hand, reasonable men would also take stock of the fact that Russia has
not unleashed that awesome capability.
Instead, the Russians have, so far, confined themselves to a piecemeal war of

attrition against our own war-making capacity. Looking at all this, reasonable
men would at least consider the possibility that Russia prefers peace to war.
268
Audio Letter 56
And so our leaders, if they were reasonable and prudent, would at least open up
meaningful talks with the leaders of Russia. They would at least make an hon-
est effort to find out if war with Russia might be avoided without loss of honor.
But my friends, the Bolsheviks are now in control of America’s policies and
they are not reasonable men. They are obsessed with the Satanic frenzy for
power. Their Creed is rule or ruin. They seek only their own personal gain, no
matter what the cost may be to everyone else. They want to start over with a
new and complete Bolshevik dictatorship here in America and from there work
on outward in a new bid for World control. But Russia, controlled by the new
breed in the Kremlin, stands in their way.
The Bolsheviks now entrenched here in America know that they cannot hope to
destroy Russia with America’s inferior military power. This is especially true
because Russia’s rulers, unlike our own, have provided extensive civil defense
preparations to protect their people. But the Bolsheviks will be satisfied if they
can only wound Russia grievously enough to badly disrupt Russia internally.
The Bolsheviks here believe that they will accomplish their purpose if they can
kill as many as 20,000,000 Russians in nuclear war. They are convinced that
nuclear casualties that large will be enough to preoccupy the Russians with
their own internal problems for many years. And that will leave the Bolsheviks
here relatively free to make a fresh start with the smoking remains of the United
States. They will be free to impose their own Bolshevik dictatorship on the
haunted minority of Americans who will survive Nuclear War I.
In order to achieve their goal of killing 20,000,000 Russians, the Bolsheviks

here will have to accept a nuclear war that will kill at least 160,000,000 Ameri-
cans. To you and me a plan like that is insane. But to the Bolsheviks, those odds
are very acceptable because, my friends, in Bolshevik calculations you and I
don’t count. We are expendable. The only losses which do matter to them are
their own and the Bolsheviks believe that their own casualties in Nuclear War I
will be very small, because they plan to choose the moment for war themselves
by triggering a surprise American nuclear first strike against Russia; and be-
cause they will know when war is about to start they will be able to protect
themselves. They plan to use their positions of governmental power to hide in
government war bunkers throughout the United States.
When Nuclear War I erupts, the Bolsheviks here intend to be the main occu-
pants of the 96 secret underground cities of the Federal Relocation Arc. They
will pull down the “Temple” on our heads, while they themselves hide in
safety.
269
There is now a dangerous and destructive war of cat and mouse going on be-
tween Russia’s new rulers and the Bolsheviks here. Each side knows what the
other is up to and their strategies against one another are in a constant state of
flux. The Russians, for their part, know that the Bolsheviks want to throw
America’s nuclear might at Russia in a surprise attack. And as I reported in
AUDIO LETTER No. 53 last January, the hardliners in the Kremlin are now in
the driver’s seat. Unlike the white dove faction who lost influence last October
1979, the hard-liners are convinced that nuclear war is inevitable, and so they
are preparing the Russian people for war with America. But at the same time,
they’re using secret warfare to chip away and reduce America’s economic and
military strength. For example, Russian sabotage is taking a steadily rising toll
of railroad tank cars, chemical plants, refineries, and other military targets.
Have you ever asked yourself why all these so-called derailments involving
chemical tank cars? If it were mere chance, it would often involve box cars, or
coal cars, or flat cars, or automobile carriers, or maybe refrigerated cars full of
milk. But no, to judge by all the supposed rail accidents, you would think that
the trains are hauling nothing but toxic chemicals these days. And then there is
Russia’s expanding campaign of geophysical warfare. One aspect of this in-
volves earthquakes and volcanoes like Mt. St. Helens, as I discussed last month.
Another aspect of geophysical warfare is weather warfare, which is now going

on with a vengeance in the United States. One reason I tried so hard to record
AUDIO LETTER No. 54 last February before I was overcome by my heart at-
tack was to give a warning about weather warfare and food shortages to come.
And this summer, the weather has gone crazy all over the United States. The
Northern Plains are in the grip of a drought worse than anything since the Dust
Bowl of the 30’s. The nationwide heat wave has taken over a thousand lives
and is killing cattle, broiling chickens alive, and wiping out crops. And next,
my friends, we must brace ourselves for hurricanes unlike anything ever seen in
America.
Slowly but surely, the Bolsheviks here are being hemmed in by the Russians.
For the past six months, the Russians have been gradually pulling the fangs of
the Bolshevik dragon. As a result, the Bolsheviks here are gradually putting
more and more of their eggs into fewer and fewer baskets. With their backs to
the wall, the Bolsheviks here are concentrating on actions that go for the head
of Russia. Their attitude is pure offense, even at the expense of neglecting any-
thing of a defensive nature. For example, the Caribbean is now up for grabs.
The United States is paying no attention. Instead the Bolsheviks here are trying
to stir up problems for Russia around her own periphery. The Bolsheviks can’t
find a rope big enough to tie down the Russian Bear. So instead, they’re trying
270
Audio Letter 56
to use a million little threads; and by means of their invasion of the Kremlin
itself with genetic replicas, which I reported last month, the Bolsheviks are try-
ing to unbalance the Kremlin.
I can now report that during April and May the Bolsheviks came very close to
toppling the new leadership in the Kremlin. Within the past several weeks, Rus-
sia’s new rulers have staged a strong comeback, but the battle is still raging;
and all the Bolsheviks really want is a moment of weakness in the Kremlin, be-
cause very soon now they will have enough Minuteman TX traveling missiles
deployed to make possible a first strike against Russia—thus triggering Nuclear
War I.
My friends, some people have asked me why I revealed what I did last month
about America’s secret mobile missile—the Minuteman TX. The answer is that
it is time for us, the American people, to wage preventive warfare. Ours must
be a war of knowledge and truth—a war to prevent war. We need to stop the
secret spiral of warfare by both the Russians and the Bolsheviks here, because
you and I are the ones who are caught in the middle.
Topic #3—Centuries ago the founder of the powerful Rothschild dynasty pro-
claimed a principle which became famous. He said:
“Give me the power to issue a nation’s money, and I care not who writes the
laws.” Since that time the manipulation of money and its relationship to gold
reserves has been a determining factor in world affairs. It has fueled ever wid-
ening struggles for world power. That’s why Henry Ford, Sr. long ago said, and
I quote: “War will not be abolished until its roots are cut, and one of its main
roots is a false money system and the high priests thereof. The youth who can
solve the money question would do more for the world than all the professional
soldiers in history.”
My friends, in my book seven years ago, THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE

DOLLAR, I revealed the basic plan to bring on inflation miseries which we are
all beginning to suffer today. They are leading toward economic catastrophe,
unemployment, dictatorship, and nuclear war. But they are all rooted in eco-
nomics and the control of money, and the deepest root of all is the FORT
KNOX GOLD SCANDAL. So if you truly care about your country and want to
help save it for yourself and for your children, the Fort Knox Gold Scandal is
the place to begin.
In my mail lately I have noticed a dramatic rise in the number of people asking
me: “What can I do?,” and I believe that I know the reason. Years ago the warn-
271
ings I gave about coming economic hardship and nuclear war sounded too re-
mote to worry about; but now the economic problems are pinching all of us
worse and worse by the day, and now the bright skies of yesteryear are giving
way to the gathering storm clouds of nuclear war. Up until now I have generally
resisted giving specific answers to the question of what we can do. There were
many signs that people were asking without really wanting to do anything, and
it simply is not enough to just stand up once, shout, and sit down again to watch
the world go by, or to meet, eat, and retreat.
If you are really serious about wanting to do something, you have to be willing
to stick with it, because America’s enemies, both within and without, have
learned how they can almost always defeat us. All they have to do is to close
their mouths and wait. They just bide their time while we fuss a while then fall
silent and forget about it. Then they go on their own way as if nothing had ever
happened.
The only way to get results is to hang on like a bulldog. You have to keep at it
in spite of one disappointment after another until something breaks loose. You
cannot let them wear you out—instead you have to wear them out. A perfect
example of this is provided by the efforts of my friend Mr. Edward Durell con-
cerning the Fort Knox Gold Scandal.
Six years ago Mr. Durell started in much the same way as you could start now.
He first learned about my charges concerning the denudement of America’s
gold at Fort Knox by reading about them in a newspaper. He had been con-
cerned about the gold backing of the dollar for many years, but my charges
were new to him. He decided to find out for himself whether my charges held
water, so he began a very informal, almost casual way. He inquired of one or
two officials, including his Congressman, whether there was anything to the
story, and it was their responses that caused him to start digging deeper and still
deeper seeking the truth—not because those initial responses confirmed what I
had charged, far from it. Instead Mr. Durell discovered that he was unable to
receive a meaningful, conclusive answer at all about it.
Most Americans today would have just given up at that point. The easy thing to
do is to shrug your shoulders and say, “Well, I tried. I guess they won’t tell me
any more.” But not Mr. Durell. He’s a man who demands answers, and he re-
fuses to be satisfied until he gets them. What’s more, he knows what too many
of us have forgotten—that under the Constitution it is our right, it is our duty to
seek the redress of grievances; and so for every unsatisfactory answer he re-
ceived, Mr. Durell responded by asking more questions of more people. He
kept careful track of his correspondence including telephone calls, letters, tele-
272
Audio Letter 56
grams, and personal meetings. He did not just swallow the replies he got but he
analyzed them. With each official reply he asked himself: “Did this answer my
question? If not, why not? Did they contradict what they have told me in earlier
correspondence? If so, why? Does the story I get from Official A agree with the
story given me by Official B? If not, which is correct?” By confronting people
with their own official answers, or with their silence when they refused to an-
swer, he began driving chinks into the armor; and because of his determined
persistence, he long ago began catching them in mistakes—serious mistakes.
For six years now he has kept it up, and now through his own efforts Mr. Durell
has compiled his own file of extremely damaging evidence about Fort Knox.
By these methods Mr. Durell long ago became an authority in his own right
about the Fort Knox Gold Scandal, and he did it simply by refusing to give up.
He has contacted numerous members of Congress, officials of the Departments
of Treasury and Justice, and many others up to and including two Presidents—
Ford and the alleged Carter. For his efforts he has received everything from
stony silence to outright provable lies. He has worked long and hard for six
years; and now if there were an honest, public investigation into the Fort Knox
affair, his files might well lead to the imprisonment of some of the most power-
ful men in America!
The Watergate scandal was child’s play compared with the covered-up Fort
Knox Gold Scandal.
This brings me to the reason for my directing your attention to Senator William
Proxmire, as I did in Topic #1. He’s Chairman of the powerful Senate Banking
Committee, and in that capacity he holds a position of prime responsibility and
public trust to carry out an honest, thorough, and public investigation of the
Fort Knox Gold Scandal. And so, my friends, I would strongly suggest that the
starting point be the evidence about the huge missing shipment of gold from
Fort Knox on January 20, 1965.
For five years now Senator Proxmire has ignored the evidence given him about
that shipment, which was omitted from official Treasury records. At today’s
gold prices, this shipment would have been worth more than a billion dollars
($1,000,000,000)—one thousand million dollars! But more importantly, that
missing shipment was only one of many which took place from Fort Knox ac-
cording to my confidential information. It was only one episode in the overall
program to make America gold poor; and so the missing gold shipment of
January 20, 1965 points at the very heart of the causes for our crumbling econ-
omy today. But to this day, Senator William Proxmire has not lifted a finger to
launch a Fort Knox investigation. I want to make it clear, however, that I have
273
no evidence that Proxmire himself is involved in the illegal gold removals from
Fort Knox, but I can prove that he has consistently ignored large amounts of
strong evidence of catastrophic fraud surrounding Fort Knox. He’s made a
name for himself by handing out Golden Fleece Awards for petty matters—but
he has ignored the Gold Scandal, which is fleecing the entire American people!
Up to now, Senator Proxmire has been seriously derelict in his duty to investi-
gate publicly and honestly the Fort Knox Gold Scandal. But what matters most
now is not Proxmire but the SCANDAL itself. IT MUST BE EXPOSED if
America is to be saved. It’s that simple, my friends; and so I’m about to give
you “Step One” in my answer to those of you who have been asking me, “What
can I do?” I emphasize that this is only the first step. If you choose to take it,
my friends, then many more steps can follow; but I must also give you this
clear warning: If you will not take this first step, nothing else can follow!! In
the name of freedom, we must be heard. We must begin a concerted campaign
to open up an honest, public investigation of the Fort Knox Gold Scandal, and
we should all join together in directing our energies at Senator William Prox-
mire. It is his Committee which has the prime responsibility to carry out the
necessary public investigation.
Our goal is not to attack Proxmire but to bring about the investigation of Fort
Knox. To do that, Proxmire will have to have public support—just as General
Brown depended upon public support in the Underwater Missile Crisis four
years ago. And so regardless of his inaction up to now, we must let Senator
Proxmire know that he will have our support for a Fort Knox investigation. It is
not his head that we want—it is the TRUTH about Fort Knox. Let us “open up”
Fort Knox!
You may send letters, Mailgrams or telegrams to:
Senator William Proxmire
Senate Office Bldg., Wash., D.C.
If you want your message to be read and to have an impact, you must do three
things:
1. Make it legible. If your handwriting is good, a handwritten letter is fine; oth-

erwise it’s better to type.
2. Keep it short. If you write a long rambling letter it will just go into the trash
basket.
274
Audio Letter 56
3. Be specific. Tell Senator Proxmire clearly, in your own words, what you
want from him.
If I were writing a letter to Senator Proxmire about this, I would say something
like the following:
“Dear Senator Proxmire. I’m writing to request your urgent attention to a vital
matter that falls within your jurisdiction as Chairman of the Senate Banking
Committee. I’m speaking of the allegations of Dr. Beter about massive fraud
involving the United States gold supplies at Fort Knox.
Looking at our crumbling economy I’m inclined to believe Dr. Beter’s charges
that America has secretly become gold poor. Our economic problems today are
exactly those which Dr. Beter has warned about for years, and yet I have never
seen any effort by your Committee to prove him wrong.
I would like to believe your reputation as a defender of the public financial in-
terest in Washington, so I hope that you will launch a full, complete public
investigation of the alleged Fort Knox Gold Scandal without delay. If you will
do so, I assure you of my strong personal support.
As a starting point, let me suggest a piece of evidence which Dr. Beter says you
were provided some five years ago. This was the written admission by the then
Director of the United States Mint that a giant gold shipment from Fort Knox
took place on January 20, 1965, even though the shipment was not shown on
official Treasury listings.
I anxiously await your reply. I am keeping a copy of this message, and plan to
show it, with your reply, to everyone I know.”
What I have just suggested is just to get you started. By all means express your
own thoughts in your own way as much as possible; but whatever you do, be
sure to keep a file for your correspondence about this. When you get his reply,
don’t be discouraged or surprised if it turns out to be an attack on my credibil-
ity, or lip service, or even silence. Just keep in mind that the Director of the
United States Mint contradicted other Treasury documents about the missing
shipment. That discrepancy has never been resolved, so don’t let yourself be
put off easily.
If you receive a reply from Senator Proxmire, you may want to show both your
letter and his to your friends. And to give them more background about it all, let
275
them listen to AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975. That tape contains a great
deal about Fort Knox and it’s a good starting point. Beyond that, you may wish
to follow up with more letters, always keeping a copy for your file. And in the
months to come if I learn that people are taking this first step—and it’s only a
first step—I plan to have more to say. But now it’s up to you, my friends.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
It is time to give you my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I’ve
tried to call your attention to several things. One is the fact that the danger of
all-out war is coming closer and closer to the surface. Once again the Middle
East is heating up as the possible fuse to set off nuclear war. War tensions are
being excited primarily by the deliberate actions of Israel. The situation has be-
come so critical that for only the 7th time in history an “Emergency Session” of
the United Nations has just been held to discuss it.
Meanwhile the Bolsheviks here in the United States Government are being
hemmed in more and more by the secret Russian warfare of attrition. Secret
military projects are still under way here in America, but the economic and in-
dustrial base that supports it all is being whittled away.
A few days ago Mount St. Helens, the most spectacular example yet of Russian
geophysical warfare, erupted again; and as usual, it came as a surprise to all the
authorities. Only the day before, Washington State had started allowing tourists
closer to the volcano because of its seeming stability. And the Russian weather
war against America which I revealed last February is continuing, and Russia’s
geophysical warfare against America is still expanding.
Just two days ago two Russian cobalt bombs which had been planted in deep
caverns in the Midwest were detonated. One was a short distance west of Cin-
cinnati, Ohio; the other was under the northwest corner of the huge Fort Knox
Military Reservation in Kentucky. The result was a strong earthquake called
“extremely rare” by the United States Geological Survey. It registered 5.8 on
the Richter scale, and shook 12 states from Wisconsin to South Carolina. It may
have been rare before the era of geophysical warfare, my friends, but now any-
thing can happen!
My friends, many people have been asking me the question, “What can I do?” I
have given you “Step One” of my answer, which deals with the Fort Knox Gold
Scandal. It is something we can do—if we will. Our goal must be to get back
the monetary gold reserves which have been stolen from us, to restore strength
and confidence to the dollar, and to revive honor and trust in a newly reborn
276
Audio Letter 56
United States Government—because only in that way can we hope to remove

the causes of war which are now so imminent.
277
Audio Letter 57
August 31, 1980
On an August morning 35 years ago, the world we live in suddenly was
changed forever. The day was August 6, 1945. It began shortly after dawn that
summer morning in southwest Japan. Japanese defense forces detected a single
American bomber approaching at high altitude. It was heading for the City of
Hiroshima. Sirens began to wail and Radio Hiroshima told residents to take
cover. The American bomber, a B-29, was droning along six miles high, out of
reach of Japanese Fighters and flak. It flew directly over the city, and on out of
sight. A few minutes later it reappeared, flying back over Hiroshima in the op-
posite direction. Then it was gone. As the “All clear” signal sounded in
Hiroshima, it seemed like just another false alarm like other false alarms before
it.
There were many people in Hiroshima who believed that a real attack would
never come to that city. There were all kinds of rumors that America would
spare Hiroshima for one reason or another. Among other things, there was a
large Christian community in Hiroshima. Even the mayor of Hiroshima was a
Christian. There were those who were convinced that America was being mer-
ciful to Hiroshima for that reason; but less than an hour after the first “All
clear” signal on that sunny August morning, Radio Hiroshima started to broad-
cast another air raid alert. Three more American B-29s were passing over the
city; but before the announcer could finish his words, he and 80,000 of his lis-
teners ceased to exist! They were consumed by a man-made sun in the middle
of the city which boiled upward into a giant mushroom cloud. Afterward the
United States War Department called it a “cosmic bomb.”
Outside the zone of total destruction, Hiroshima was transformed instantly into
a nightmare beyond imagination. The streets were filled with pathetic victims,
whom the Japanese refer to as the “walking dead.” These were people who had
been scorched, irradiated, and dismembered beyond hope but who would take
hours, days, or weeks to die. Men, women, and children staggered around in
agony without comprehension of what had happened to them. Many had sock-
ets without eyes, and bones without flesh in the aftermath of the unearthly heat
wave from the bomb. Countless others had been poisoned by radiation from the
279
blast or the fallout afterward. Within three months 50,000 more people died in
Hiroshima.
Three days later it all happened again—at Nagasaki. Like Hiroshima, Nagasaki
had led a charmed life free from American air attack; and as in Hiroshima, there
were those in Nagasaki who had thought this was an act of mercy by the United
States because Nagasaki was not only a Christian center but the very place
where Christianity had got its start in Japan. But all the illusions evaporated in a
nuclear fireball on August 9, 1945.
Today America is haunted by the quarter-million ghosts of Hiroshima and Na-

gasaki. Thirty-five years ago our country became the first in history to use
atomic warfare, and today it is fast becoming our turn. Our Satanic leaders are
trying to make us forget the human hell of Hiroshima and Nagasaki. Instead,
they’re trying to make nuclear war more thinkable to us. They want to close our
eyes to the reality of nuclear war, because that is the only way in which they
can trick us into accepting it.
The legacy of America’s war against Japan in World War II is also returning to
haunt us in another way. The Japanese attack on Pearl Harbor was brought
about deliberately in order to get America into the war; and now the Bolsheviks
here are turning all of America into a nuclear Pearl Harbor—and for the same
purpose. Today we are all on the front lines!
In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I revealed the plan by which the Bolsheviks here
intend to provoke a Russian nuclear attack. It involves a deliberate false alert
and the use of our secretly deployed Minuteman TX Mobile Missile. If the Bol-
sheviks here succeed in carrying out the plan, the United States as we now
know it will cease to exist. Pearl Harbor USA will die in a thousand Hiroshi-
mas, but the Satanic Bolsheviks here who now control our government will use
our sacrifice for their own personal benefit.
My friends, these are the things that lie ahead for us unless we, the people, take
action to prevent it! Under our CONSTITUTION, this is both our right and our
duty.
Topic #1—AMERICA’S NUCLEAR FIRST-STRIKE PLANS IN THE NEWS
Topic #2—HURRICANE ALLEN AND RUSSIA’S EXPANDING

WEATHER WARFARE
280
Audio Letter 57
Topic #3—“STEP TWO” IN WHAT YOU CAN DO.
Topic #1—Thirty-five years ago this month the age of nuclear warfare ex-
ploded into history at Hiroshima and Nagasaki. It was unleashed by the United
States in a deliberate display of sheer mass destruction and stark terror. What
America did to those two Japanese cities became the basis of America’s entire
doctrine of nuclear strategy. The basic concept was that America would never
shoot first in a nuclear war. Instead we would hold the specter of Hiroshima and
Nagasaki over the head of any would-be attacker. America’s nuclear arsenal
was aimed at Russian cities. Any Russian attack on the United States would
have caused cities all across Russia to vanish quickly in nuclear fireballs.
Knowing that, supposedly the Russians would never attack us. But early this
month, on August 5, a drastic change in America’s nuclear war strategy was
made public. For the very first time ever the United States is officially adopting
what is called a “counter force nuclear strategy.” It has been made official by a
document called “PRESIDENTIAL DIRECTIVE 59.” The Directive states that
America’s prime nuclear targets will no longer be Russian cities. Instead the
prime targets will now be Russia’s military forces and political leadership.
This change in America’s nuclear doctrine is so radical that it is provoking

widespread controversy, especially overseas. Spokesmen here are trying to give
it a sugar-coating so that we, the people, will swallow it easily. The official ex-
cuse for the new strategy is that it is intended to limit and deter nuclear war, and
yet the same Directive demands preparations to fight a prolonged nuclear war—
not just hours, but weeks or months. So what does all this really mean?
My friends, to see the answer you don’t have to be a military expert. All you
have to do is to use plain old common sense. For example, listen to some words
from a Letter to the Editor published in the New York Times just a few days
ago on August 24. Referring to the new American plan to attack Russian mili-
tary installations, the writer says, quote:
“Does that mean that while they destroy us in the cities, our Commanders in
their shelters would then destroy their military installations? Unless this is a
charade to substantiate the production of more missiles, it must mean that the
United States is preparing to start a nuclear war with a first strike.”
It is signed: Kenneth Boss, Brooklyn.
Those few words of simple logic contain more truth than you will ever hear in
the official excuses from Washington. Over two years ago, in AUDIO LETTER
281
No. 36 for July 1978, I first revealed America’s secret shift to a first-strike
strategy. At the time not many people would believe me, but now we are draw-
ing closer and closer to nuclear war itself, day by day, and as we do so the first-
strike strategy of the United States is coming to the surface.
Last February 21, 1980, there was the statement of Defense Department
spokesman Thomas Ross. He shocked reporters by saying that America “might
shoot first” in a nuclear war—and now there is Presidential Directive 59! By
proclaiming America’s shift to a counterforce strategy, it further confirms the
secret intentions to launch a nuclear first strike at Russia. And, my friends,
there is more.
The drastic changes in America’s military posture during the past few years
have coincided with a hidden change in leadership of our country. The Satanic
Bolsheviks who have been overthrown and expelled from Russia have seized
control of America’s government. Now they are dragging us down the road to-
ward a war which will be nuclear suicide for you and me! But as I explained
last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 56, our Bolshevik rulers do not expect to
suffer and die like the rest of us. Instead, they plan to take full advantage of
their first-strike plan for their own benefit. Last month I said, quote:
“Because they will know when war is about to start, they will be able to protect
themselves. They plan to use their positions of governmental power to hide in
government war bunkers throughout the United States.”
Less than two weeks after I recorded those words in AUDIO LETTER No. 56,
“PRESIDENTIAL DIRECTIVE 58” was leaked to the press on August 11. In
the words of the New York Times the following day, quote:
“President Carter has ordered more effective procedures for protecting civilian
and military leaders in event of nuclear war, including plans for the rapid
evacuation of key government personnel from Washington to air-borne and un-
derground command posts.”
My friends, the Directive is concerned with maintaining what is called the

“continuity of government”—their government only. You and I and our chil-
dren are left to fend for ourselves.
Last month I explained that the Bolsheviks here are possessed by only one all-
consuming goal. That goal is to mount a nuclear offense against Russia that will
set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE. They don’t care how badly the United States is
beaten so long as they can wound Russia with at least 20-million dead. With
282
Audio Letter 57
that attitude, matters of a defensive nature are of no interest to the Bolsheviks

here. Likewise tactical weapons which cannot be used to attack Russia are be-
ing given very little attention. A creeping paralysis is slowly crippling
America’s Armed Forces, and our secret Bolshevik rulers could not care less.
Examples of this are all around us.
For example, consider the plight of the Air Force’s premier fighter group at
Langley Air Force Base, Virginia. It’s the First Tactical Fighter Wing with a
tradition of leadership that stretches back to the first World War. They fly
America’s hottest new Air Force Fighter, the F-15, and their motto is “Readi-
ness is our Profession”; but earlier this summer on June 7, the First Tactical
Fighter Wing failed an Air Force readiness test. Of the 66 F-15s on hand, barely
one-third were in condition to be put to use for missions. There simply are not
enough spare parts or skilled maintenance personnel to go around! And else-
where the picture is no brighter; for example, we often hear about America’s
supposed increased commitment to NATO, but readiness of the United States
Air Force in Europe mirrors the situation I just mentioned at Langley. Funding
to pay for flight operations and maintenance has been reduced—not increased.
Instead, the Bolsheviks here are siphoning off every dollar to focus on secret
preparations in their first-strike plan. Meanwhile Air Force units in Europe are
hampered by inadequate spare parts, fewer flight operations, and declining pro-
ficiency of pilots as a result.
The story is much the same among the other Services. There has been heavy
publicity over the past year or two about the problems of the Army, including
the lack of spare parts and skilled maintenance. But the Navy is also in the
same fix, especially in certain areas of naval aviation. The declining readiness
of our non-strategic forces is a direct result of our Bolshevik rulers’ preoccupa-
tion with nuclear-war preparations. Another sign of this is the never-ending
rash of brush fires around Russia’s perimeter.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 53 last January, I described how Russia’s intervention

in Afghanistan was triggered by extensive CIA activity in that country, and to
this day large amounts of aid are being funneled to the rebels in Afghanistan by
the CIA by way of Pakistan and China. As a result, Russia’s involvement there
has been extended far longer than intended, distracting Russia’s leaders and si-
phoning off resources.
In southeast Asia the United States is pouring arms into Thailand, which is
stiffening its stance against Russia’s client state, Vietnam. Red China is receiv-
ing secret shipments of nuclear weapons from America, and just this month
Russia’s western flank has been shaken by the crisis over major strikes in Po-
283
land. As of now the Polish regime seems to have succeeded in defusing the
bomb of possible revolution to the surprise of CIA-supported Labor Unions.
They were hoping to provoke Russian intervention, making Poland a second
Afghanistan, but Russia’s new rulers have outmaneuvered the old Bolsheviks
here. These are some of the many threads which the Bolsheviks are trying to
use to tie down the Russian bear. They want to keep the Kremlin off balance
and preoccupied while they prepare to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 55, I described a major program in the latest Bolshe-
vik plans for an American nuclear first strike, the “Minuteman TX Missile.”
The Minuteman TX, also known as the Traveling Minuteman, is America’s real
mobile ICBM. Behind the smoke screen of controversy over the so-called MX
Mobile Missile, Minuteman TX Missiles are already being deployed. The Bol-
sheviks here intend to use them in connection with an elaborate false nuclear
alert to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE. And they are in a hurry, they can’t wait
ten years to build all those so-called MX launching bases out West. Instead, as I
detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 55, the Minuteman TX system is being as-
sembled fast. It borrows heavily from existing hardware of all kinds, and it’s
being deployed along existing railroad tracks in our northern states.
Barely two weeks after I gave the details in AUDIO LETTER No. 55, you may
have noticed other hints about it in the news. During NBC Nightly News on
television for July 14, 1980, there was a brief segment in which retired General
John Singlaub made some remarks. He took issue with the MX Missile scheme
which we keep hearing about. Instead, he said that the United States could re-
gain superiority over Russia quickly, within two or three years; and what he
proposed in place of the MX was what he termed a Quick-Fix Mobile ICBM
which would not need the elaborate MX bases out West. General Singlaub’s
words that evening would have fit the Minuteman TX except for one thing. The
TX is not two or three years away—it is being deployed right now!
The Bolshevik maneuvers to throw America into nuclear war are complex and
constantly changing, and yet there is one ingredient that continues to figure in
every plan. That ingredient is Iran. I first made public the crucial importance of
Iran for an American first strike at Russia two years ago this month in AUDIO
LETTER No. 37. The particular strategy of attack which I outlined in that tape
has already been attempted this past January 1980, and it ended in failure. But
Iran continues to offer very tempting geographic advantages for any attack
against Russia, and so one way or another Iran has so far been included in every
Bolshevik first-strike plan against Russia that has been devised.
284
Audio Letter 57
The Bolsheviks here know very well that they are working against tremendous
odds militarily. For nearly three years since late 1977, Russia has been in com-
plete control of the military uses of space, and Russia’s Cosmostrategic
umbrella is designed to make nuclear war difficult to start and impossible to
win for any enemy. But our Bolshevik leaders here are determined to have their
nuclear war, one way or another; and because their plan is a suicide plan for the
United States as a whole, they don’t care very much how they do it. So they are
embarked on a series of plans, one after another, to set off a nuclear first strike
against Russia. They intend to just keep it up until something works. But the
Russians are just as determined to thwart each war plan as it is attempted, be-
cause in this way they are gradually pulling the fangs of the Bolshevik dragon.
Even so, the Kremlin leaders are convinced that at some point the Bolsheviks
will succeed in setting off nuclear war.
Our Rulers here have been operating on roughly a three-month cycle in their
first-strike planning—that is, every three months or so they set a new plan in
motion. Each plan is different from the one before, but they all have the same
final objective. That objective is an American nuclear first strike followed by
all-out war with Russia.
The first attempt at an American first strike took place late last January 1980, as
I reported in AUDIO LETTERS 53 and 54. That attempt was based on an up-
dated version of the plan which I made public two years ago in AUDIO
LETTER No. 37. There was no public hint about what was afoot other than a
rapid build-up of nuclear war talk in the news. Russia succeeded in totally shat-
tering the attack, inflicting severe losses on the United States in the process;
and here in the United States the nuclear war talk suddenly went away.
Next came the so-called “Hostage Rescue Mission” into Iran in late April. I
discussed that in AUDIO LETTER No. 55, so we’ll not repeat it here. It was
another total defeat for the United States, and that time it could not be hidden
completely.
The third Bolshevik war plan was to begin with a supposed coup and assassina-
tion attempt on Ayatollah Khomeini in late July, last month. The real Ayatollah
Khomeini was already assassinated long ago, last February 1980, as I reported
in AUDIO LETTER No. 54, but that didn’t matter for the purposes of the Bol-
shevik war plan. Part of the plan called for intense fighting at the United States
Embassy in Tehran, supposedly in a new hostage rescue attempt; but the game
plan called for that to fail in a way that would have aroused American passions
and set the stage for military action.
285
In the July plan, Russian Intelligence agents were able to stop it before it even
started. On July 7, Russia sent a warning to certain members of the Iranian gov-
ernment about the plan for a coup. Three days later on July 10 Iranian
authorities announced that they had foiled a major coup attempt. For several
weeks thereafter, the aftermath of the attempted coup was a story that grew lar-
ger and larger in Iran. Before it ran its course, over 600 people were implicated,
including several high military officers. All kinds of details were published and
broadcast about alleged financing and control from the United States, and some
of the plans involving our hostages were exposed. United States Bolshevik
agents on the scene wanted to make sure that all of this made no impression on
us here in the United States, and so they arranged a diversionary action.
On July 10 the first announcement was made in Iran about the halted plot for a
coup, but most Americans paid far more attention to another announcement
which was made only a few hours later. We were told that one of the hostages,
Richard Queen, was about to be released. We were told that this was a humani-
tarian gesture due to his illness, but that was not the reason for the timing of
Queen’s release! He had been ill for some time. The exact timing of his surprise
release was a CIA ploy—it was solely to draw our attention away from the
other major developments going on inside Iran.
The fourth Bolshevik war plan was scheduled for this October 1980, but that
plan, too, may have been ruined before it could start. Two weeks ago columnist
Jack Anderson tried to publish a series of articles about the October plan. The
White House reacted with the usual angry denials, and many major newspapers
refused to carry the columns he had written about it. In effect, he was censored
by our Bolshevik government! But, my friends, Jack Anderson was basically
right in what he wrote. Plans are being laid for an American invasion of Iran
beginning on a limited scale. Jack Anderson’s only major mistake is his specu-
lation that politics lies behind the attack plan. The real motivation is much
bigger than that—not politics, but nuclear war.
Through every avenue possible, our leaders here are drumming up American
support for their war preparations. To do that they are tapping our pride and
“can-do” spirit by raising false hopes about our military power. And a perfect
example of this is the publicity which began suddenly about 10 days ago con-
cerning our so-called “Stealth Plane.” We’re told that it’s a new type airplane
that is virtually invisible to Russian radar, and so it would be able to sneak un-
detected into Russia in order to attack targets there. The Government
announcement on August 20 about our so-called Stealthcraft has led to con-
fused reactions by many people. On one hand people are encouraged to hear
that we have such a remarkable secret weapon to defend ourselves against Rus-
286
Audio Letter 57
sia, but at the same time many people are wondering: If it’s so secret, why is
the Government suddenly talking about it??
My friends, the Government is releasing information about the Stealthcraft be-

cause they know it no longer matters. They found out early this year that it is of
no use against Russia. The public statements about the Stealthcraft have men-
tioned the fact that it has an unusual shape with rounded surfaces that can help
evade radar, but they have not mentioned that the unusual shape has another
purpose. That purpose is to enable the craft to perform properly when it is trav-
eling under water instead of in the air. The Stealthcraft, my friends, is also
known by another name. It is a “Submersible Aircraft,” also known as a “Sub-
craft.” The Government has just announced that it has been tested secretly for
the past two years, but I made it public two years ago this month in AUDIO
LETTER No. 37 because I believe you had a right to know. In AUDIO
LETTER No. 37 I described how Subcraft were to be used in America’s first
strike against Russia, triggering nuclear war. And last January 1980 in AUDIO
LETTER No. 53 I described what happened when our leaders here tried to carry
out that plan. The Subcraft can evade radar, infrared detection, and other con-
ventional means of sensing, but they are sitting ducks for Russia’s master secret
weapon, which I revealed long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. That weapon is
“Psychoenergetic Range Finding” or PRF, which cannot be evaded or jammed
by any known technique. Last January the squadrons of American Subcraft
with Israeli pilots which tried to attack Russia were tracked by PRF. Russian
Cosmospheres armed with charged Particle Beam weapons positioned them-
selves overhead; and when the order came for the Cosmospheres to begin
firing, the Subcraft all disappeared in blinding columns of fire and steam. And
so the Bolsheviks here know better than to try to use Subcraft, or Stealthcraft if
you prefer, against Russia again. They are useless. As a result, they now have
only one real value left, and that is propaganda value against you and me. They
want us to believe the lie that we are militarily superior to Russia. They are de-
termined to drag us all over the cliff of nuclear suicide. My friends, we are all
on the front lines of NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
Topic #2—When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 56 last month, I referred to

Russia’s expanding campaign of Weather Warfare against the United States. I
first revealed that this was beginning last February 1980 in AUDIO LETTER
No. 54. As I explained then, Russia’s Weather Warfare is in retaliation for
America’s giant grain embargo against Russia. The embargo and other boycott
techniques used lately by the United States against Russia have been imposed
by the Satanic Bolsheviks who now control America’s policies.
287
When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 54 last February, I gave details of a ma-
jor Russian breakthrough in weather control. It’s a technique by which major
storm systems can be created artificially at sea, then the storms can be guided to
specific target areas, and the technique enables rain to be either withheld or re-
leased in torrents at will. I gave details about this new Russian weather control
technique in the final portion of AUDIO LETTER No. 54. That is the portion
which had to be released as an Emergency Transcript because of my heart at-
tack. I was convinced that it was an urgent matter for you to know about this
new threat of weather control; and sure enough, during the six months since
then, Russia has used this new technique to make drastic changes in our
weather. But to judge from my mail, some of my listeners do not seem to have
read the Transcript carefully. That may have been due to their own immediate
worry over my serious illness at that time; I don’t know. In any case, I believe a
few moments of review are in order, because Weather Warfare is leading to-
ward food shortages as well as other problems, and you cannot protect yourself
unless you understand why America’s weather is going crazy.
I cannot repeat everything I tried to tell you last February, but let me just re-
mind you of some important points. One is that the first test of Russia’s new
artificial storm technique took place last October 22, 1979 over the South At-
lantic. It began with a mammoth double flash, which was spotted by accident
by an old American Vela satellite. When word began to leak out about it, the
Bolsheviks here in the Government launched a disinformation campaign to con-
fuse everyone. They began by announcing the false date of September 22, and
for a while they stirred up falsified accounts that it had been a South African or
Israeli A-bomb test. Meanwhile, White House and other special study groups
were created supposedly to try to figure it out. Last month, in mid July, the
conclusions of the White House group, the Defense Intelligence Agency, and
the Naval Research Laboratory were made public, and they all disagree. Some
say it had to be a nuclear blast; others, that it could not have been—and the
public remains in the dark. But in the Emergency Transcript portion of AUDIO
LETTER No. 54 last February, I told you what the double flash really was. It
was created by a twin Particle Beam blast from Russian weapons on the Moon.
It was exactly the same double flash phenomenon that I first reported in
AUDIO LETTER No. 29 for December 1977. The result was what I reported to
you last February. To use the same words that I used then, quote:
“Tremendous quantities of sea water in the target zone flashed instantly into
superheated steam. The hot water vapor and surrounding hot air started rising
fast toward the stratosphere. Cooler air started racing into the target zone to fill
the vacuum. The inward rushing winds began to swirl due to the earth’s rota-
tion, and the barometric pressure began dropping in the target zone. Within
288
Audio Letter 57
minutes the atmosphere above the target zone was a spiraling chimney of tum-
bling, rising air and water vapor. The world’s first totally man-made storm cell
was being born over the South Atlantic.”
I then continued with details about the methods used by the groups of Cosmos-
pheres in order to control the storm cell from that point onward. I described
how electron beams are used in order to keep the water vapor airborne instead
of forming into rain.
This basic technique has been used in order to interfere with natural cloud pro-
duction this summer in the United States. The result has been an extended
drought and killer heat wave over much of our country. And now the food
shortages which I tried to warn you about six months ago are beginning to cast
their shadow. America’s spring wheat and corn crops have suffered major re-
ductions, and other crops have suffered too. The effects are already beginning
to show up in higher prices at your supermarket. And now, the specter of water
shortage is growing worse by the day in some areas.
But the most dramatic Russian Weather War attack so far began just a few days
after I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 56 last month, and it made use of the
very techniques I detailed last February, scaled up and intensified. When I re-
corded AUDIO LETTER No. 56 on July 30, I referred to Russia’s expanding
Weather Warfare, and I gave a warning that, quote: “Next, my friends, we must
brace ourselves for hurricanes unlike anything ever seen before in America.”
As I said those words, Russian weather-control weapons were at work in the

Atlantic Ocean east of the Caribbean. Taking advantage of favorable condi-
tions, they were setting off tropical storm “Allen,” the first of the season. Four
days later, August 3, it began creeping into the news. It had just grown into
“Hurricane Allen” and was growing fast. That night it pounded across the Is-
land of Barbados with 125-mile winds. Then it changed course just in time for
the center to miss Saint Lucia. Even so eight people lay dead as it pounded off
into the Caribbean. By August 5, Hurricane Allen was making headlines as the
“Hurricane of the Century.”
As it made its way across the open waters of the Caribbean, it was already
packing 160-mile winds, and still growing. By the next day it was rated a
“Category 5” hurricane, the worst there is. Peak winds were 170 miles per hour;
and Puerto Rico, 250 miles away, was receiving gusts up to 70 miles per hour.
Hurricane Allen was a killer hurricane, rated the most dangerous ever to strike
the eastern Caribbean; but for the first several days most forecasters in the
United States were confident that there was no threat to our own coast line. It
289
looked like it was heading for southern Mexico or Central America—but, in

fact, Russian Cosmospheres were steering the storm. They were shooting for
the narrow gap between Mexico’s Yucatan Peninsula and Cuba’s west coast.
Up to that point, the hurricane’s path through the Caribbean was chosen for the
least contact possible with land, for two reasons. For one thing, the Russians
wanted to minimize the number of unintended victims and damage, but even
more they wanted to conserve maximum force in the hurricane for the ultimate
target—our own Gulf coast! This is why Hurricane Allen kept mystifying
weather forecasters with its unexpected twists and turns. The only place in the
Caribbean where Hurricane Allen swerved toward major land masses was in the
vicinity of southeastern Cuba. The hurricane’s eye had been heading straight
for Jamaica, but at the last minute it turned and went between Jamaica and
southwest Haiti. It pounded our naval base at Guantanamo Bay in southeast
Cuba, and then moved further out to sea again. It bruised the tip of Mexico’s
Yucatan Peninsula but avoided populated areas.
Then it entered the Gulf of Mexico. Building up again, the “Hurricane of the
Century” headed for the south Texas coast. The killer storm, with nearly 100
dead in its wake, headed straight for Brownsville. But the Russians were not
interested in Brownsville, and they halted the storm while the center was still
more than 90 miles off shore. Once again America’s weather forecasters
watched with mouths agape as another prediction fell apart. Hurricane Allen
ignored Brownsville and started northward. Up to this point the Russian attack-
plan using Hurricane Allen was right on track; but from this point onward, it
started falling apart.
The Russians were hoping to strike three targets along the Gulf coast with the
same hurricane. The intended targets were the Houston/Galveston area, then
New Orleans, and finally Mobile, Alabama. This was to be done by keeping the
eye of the hurricane at sea. The Cosmospheres were to guide the hurricane
along the coast of the Houston area, then inward toward land to do as much
damage as possible. Then they were instructed to pull the hurricane back out to
sea to rebuild it before it could collapse over land. With its power rebuilt, the
plan was to move on to New Orleans, repeat the process, and so on.
But Hurricane Allen was by far the largest storm system which the Russian
weather warriors have attempted to control; and when they turned the storm
northward at Brownsville, they started miscalculating. They were trying to
make Hurricane Allen go against very powerful natural forces, and they tried to
do it too fast. Cosmospheres over the Gulf of Mexico generated proton clouds
in the atmosphere at three points. These points were south of Houston, and
290
Audio Letter 57
south and east of the Louisiana coast. As I described in AUDIO LETTER No.
54, proton clouds are used to steer a storm system, but this time the Russians
made a bad miscalculation in spacing their proton clouds. The storm did start
northward toward Houston as planned and on the way did some damage to
Corpus Christi, Texas, but the greatest effect of the proton clouds was not as
planned. They badly disrupted the circulation of winds around the hurricane. As
a result, the whole storm rapidly fell apart.
Thanks to the Russian miscalculation, the killer “Hurricane of the Century,”

Hurricane Allen, ended in anticlimax. But, my friends, the Russian weather
warriors have learned from this mistake, just as they have learned from past
mistakes. Artificial storms—rainstorms, hurricanes, or blizzards—are now a
powerful weapon in Russia’s arsenal, and the kamikaze war plans of our own
Bolshevik rulers are causing these weather weapons to be used against you and
me.
Topic #3—Last month I reported to you that more and more people are asking
me, “What can I do?” I responded by giving you “Step One” of my answer. As
I told you then, it is only the very first step. Many more will have to follow if
there is to be any hope for our country. The old adage is still true that “the jour-
ney of a thousand miles begins with a single step”; and, my friends, we have a
very long way to go.
I said last month that I would have more to say about what we can do—on one
condition. That condition depended on YOU. I said that I would tell you more
if, and only if, I received evidence that many of you are taking action; and I’m
glad to report that up to now many of you are responding wholeheartedly in this
campaign to try to save our land. For that reason I’m about to tell you what we
can and we MUST DO next; because I emphasize again, we will accomplish
absolutely nothing unless we stick with it. We have to embark on a campaign in
which we refuse to be defeated, and it has to be a campaign that grows bigger
and stronger—day by day, week by week. Numbers count; every single one of
you counts! You count, and so do your neighbors and friends. The stakes are
nothing less than FREEDOM and SURVIVAL itself.
I cannot in good conscience raise any false hopes about what we are doing. We
have already waited far too long for there to be any guarantee of success; but if
we do not act, we will guarantee failure! Knowing that there is action which
you can take, you cannot avoid making a decision about what to do about it. If
you just put it off, or can’t make up your mind, that is a decision not to act; and
if you decide not to act, then you are casting your vote against America.
291
If you do not act, you are voting for economic disaster, for Satanic Bolshevik
DICTATORSHIP, and for America’s destruction in NUCLEAR WAR ONE;
because those are the things which are almost upon us unless we, THE
PEOPLE, do our CONSTITUTIONAL DUTY to stop it. But if you are joining
those who are taking action, then you are casting your vote for America. By
demanding the truth about our nation’s gold reserves, you are voting for eco-
nomic survival, for freedom, and for prevention of nuclear war.
I believe that the time has come for all of us to do what is right simply because
it is right.
Last month I explained that our campaign to SAVE AMERICA must begin
with our economy. Specifically, we must begin by bringing about a truthful ac-
counting of what has happened to our country’s monetary gold reserves,
because the most basic of all our economic woes is our collapsing dollar; and it
is collapsing because, contrary to official Treasury statements, our gold is
gone!! Only a few small dregs of highly impure gold are left. It’s like the so-
called “Gold Medallions” which went on sale by the United States Government
on July 15. These medallions are much lower in gold content than the advertis-
ing leads one to believe; and to make matters even worse, many of the
medallions were botched during the alloying process. As a result, there is less
gold near the rim than there is in the center of the medallion. Even the natives
in the bush in Africa know that if the money is corrupt, the government is cor-
rupt.
If we want to survive economically, politically, and militarily, we must clean

out the corruption in our land, and the starting point to do that is to GET BACK
OUR GOLD RESERVES and so return to an honest dollar.
Last month in “Step One” about what you can do, I urged each one of you to
write to Senator William Proxmire of Wisconsin. I suggested that you urge him
to open up a full public investigation of the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL.
As a starting point, I referred to the giant secret shipment of gold which left
Fort Knox on January 20, 1965—the very day Lyndon Johnson was inaugu-
rated President!! Many of you have sent me copies of the letters you have sent
to Senator Proxmire since hearing my tape last month, so I’m now going to out-
line my suggestions for “Step Two” in what you can do.
We must continue to concentrate on Senator Proxmire, but we need to do other

things too. If you have not yet taken “Step One” which I outlined last month,
PLEASE DO IT NOW! Join with the rest of us in this campaign. We cannot
stand still, my friends—either we go forward OR we fall backward and fail.
292
Audio Letter 57
“Step Two” in what you can do can be divided into three parts. Each one is
something which is well within your power to do, and each one is important.
First, I want to give you access to more information which you can use as your
ammunition in this battle;
Second, I want to suggest that you use this information in follow-up correspon-
dence with Senator Proxmire;
Third, I want to point out how you can use the same information to start spread-
ing the word to other people you know.
Let me begin with the matter of additional information about our gold reserves.
This is printed material which you can use both to educate yourself and to alert
your friends. First, my friend Mr. Edward Durell has published two (2) pam-
phlets which I would recommend as a starting point. One is titled: “52
UNANSWERED QUESTIONS REGARDING THE ALLEGED GOLD
RESERVES OF THE UNITED STATES.”
The other is the transcript of a speech by Mr. Durell titled: “HOW THE
UNITED STATES LOST ITS GOLD RESERVES.”
Both pamphlets give many facts, figures, names, and dates. Mr. Durell has
agreed to make available a supply of these two pamphlets for distribution,
without charge, from my national headquarters here in Washington. Anyone in
the United States may obtain these two pamphlets by sending a large self-
addressed envelope, bearing proper postage, to my office. Be sure to send a
business-size No. 10 envelope (not something smaller), and apply 28 cents
postage. It will also speed things up if you will mark your envelope with the
word “PAMPHLETS” in the lower left corner. Send it to me, Dr. Beter, Suite
5092, 1629 K St. NW, Washington, DC 20006
My listeners outside the United States may receive the pair of pamphlets by
sending your name and address plus $2.00 to cover Air Mail postage and han-
dling.
There is also another place where you may now obtain additional information,
and that is from a Congressman—DR. RON PAUL of Texas. On July 30, 1980,
the day I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 56, Congressman Paul rose to speak
in Congress. His purpose was to introduce a bill designated:
293
HR 7874, THE MONETARY FREEDOM ACT.
The bill contains eight separate titles, but the first is the most important of all.
Here is how Congressman Paul explained it before the House of Representa-
tives, and I now quote:
“Title I requires the Secretary of the Treasury to perform a full assay, inventory,
and audit of the gold reserves of the United States. This thorough study is to be
completed within six (6) months of the passage of the bill, and double-checked
by the General Accounting Office. The results of the study are to be sent to
Congress so that the representatives of the people will learn, for the first time in
almost thirty years, the true status of our gold reserves. The Congress will, in
turn, release the information to the American people.
Although present law requires an annual inventory of our gold reserves, the law
is not being complied with, and only a small portion of the reserves are audited
each year. As any businessman knows, that is no way to conduct an inventory,
and this Bill would correct that deficiency. Such a complete audit, inventory,
and assay would lay to rest the persistent rumors that gold is missing from our
national stockpile, and that the gold we have is of inferior quality.”
(End of quotation from Congressman Paul’s remarks.)
My friends, by introducing “The Monetary Freedom Act,” Congressman Dr.

Ron Paul has displayed courage that is rare indeed in Congress today. I strongly
suggest that you write to Congressman Paul and request a copy of his bill, HR
7874; and while you are at it, be sure to express your appreciation and support
for his efforts. The address is:
Representative Ron Paul

House Office Bldg., Washington, D.C.
It will cost you only a few minutes time and a few cents in postage to obtain
your copies of “The Monetary Freedom Act” and Mr. Durell’s pamphlets; and
for that small price you will be rewarded with information that is powerful am-
munition for you to use.
The next question is: “How do you use it?” The answer is that knowledge like
this will be useful to you again and again. But for now, I suggest that you make
use of these materials in two ways: One is for follow-up in your correspondence
with Senator Proxmire, the other is in spreading the word among your friends
and neighbors.
294
Audio Letter 57
In your follow-up with Senator Proxmire, it’s time to write him again now
whether or not he answered you last month. If he has answered you, by all
means express your appreciation and take account of whatever he said. But as I
warned you last month, beware of attempts to just brush you off, which are
standard practice here in Washington today!
Up to now, not one of the many people who have reported writing to Proxmire
has reported receiving a reply from him. If that is the case with you, let him
know that ignoring you will not make you go away. In any case, I suggest that
you call Senator Proxmire’s attention to the Bill just introduced in the House of
Representatives by Congressman Paul. You might ask him why it takes a junior
Congressman to ask for the truth about our gold reserves instead of Proxmire—
the champion of the “Golden Fleece Award.” Urge him to contact his counter-
part in the House, Congressman Henry Reuss, Chairman of the House Banking
Committee. Both Proxmire and Reuss are from Wisconsin, so why should they
not talk to one another?
Urge Senator Proxmire to take the lead in a Joint Congressional Investigation.

Once you have written your follow-up letter to Senator Proxmire, I urge you to
start sharing all this with your friends and neighbors. They’re not likely to hear
one word about it in the news, so I suggest that you begin by showing them
Congressman Paul’s “Monetary Freedom Act.” Call their attention to what he
said about the gold inventory LAW not being complied with for nearly 30 years
regarding our gold reserves. Once they realize that this is a matter which has
been put before Congress, they’re likely to be more receptive to learning more
about our plight. Of course you will find that many people will just close their
eyes; but for those who are interested, show them what is at stake in the Gold
Scandal—that is, our ECONOMIC SURVIVAL! And if you can, ask them to
write to Senator Proxmire too. They don’t have to be convinced that our gold is
gone. All that matters is that they agree that we, the people, have a right to
know, to learn the truth.
My friends, I have suggested guidelines for three things you can do as parts of
“Step Two” in “WHAT YOU CAN DO”: (1) Arm yourself with more informa-
tion, (2) Follow up with Senator Proxmire, (3) Start spreading the word to
others. It may sound like a lot, listening to it all at once, but just take it at one
step at a time, at your own pace. Just do one thing at a time, BUT KEEP AT IT!
That’s what matters.
Ultimately our goal is very simple: Either the gold is there—OR—it is not
there, and so the Fort Knox Bullion Depository will have to be opened up once
295
again. It must be an honest inspection, unlike the carefully staged peep show of
September 1974. It must include the crucial CENTRAL CORE VAULT, whose
existence was never mentioned to the September 1974 visitors. That presents a
problem, my friends, because the Central Core Vault is contaminated with Plu-
tonium 239, as I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 5; but somehow it must be
done because if it is not done, we will continue down the path to
THERMONUCLEAR WAR!
It is now time to give you my “Last Minute Summary.” Suffice it to say that we
are drawing closer and closer to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. All-out war between
the United States and Russia will be set off by the United States by means of a
first strike. The closer we come to war itself, the closer these things are coming
to the surface in the News! Only this month this was reflected in two major pol-
icy announcements by the United States. One is America’s unprecedented shift
to a “counter-force nuclear strategy” against Russia—a first-strike nuclear pos-
ture. And along with that policy is its twin brother calling for better protection
of certain governmental leaders in case of war. Our Bolshevik rulers are prepar-
ing to protect themselves while they sacrifice us on the altar of Satanic power.
I’ve tried to urge you to see for yourselves where we are heading, to stop and
think of the true consequences of following our leaders into war, and to offer
you some alternatives—some things that you can do yourself in an effort to turn
the tide before disaster strikes. There’s no guarantee of success if we do act, my
friends; but if we do NOT act, there is a guarantee that OUR COUNTRY WILL
DIE SOON in NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
296
Audio Letter 58
September 30, 1980
The fall of 1980 is turning out to be a season of re-runs. Television shows
which were stale the first time around are being shown again, thanks to the ac-
tors’ strike in Hollywood. And the worst acts of all are those of our so-called
Presidential Candidates.
Administrations come and go, my friends, but the more they legislate, the more
the country goes to the dogs. Millions of Americans are out of work, but infla-
tion refuses to quit. Interest rates are heading up again, so say “Good-bye” to
that new home. Our auto industry is on the ropes, our cities are decaying, our
armed forces are falling apart, and at the center of it all our dollar is shrinking
out of existence. The dollar is no longer “good as gold” because our gold is
gone; and as long as it stays gone, all the campaign promises in the world can-
not save the United States economy. The forces who stole our gold are bringing
down America’s economy, and now they are using our own gold to bring down
war around our heads.
My friends, it’s time to lift our eyes from idle campaign promises to cast our
vote for America before it is too late. It’s time for us, the American people, to
use the gold weapon ourselves. It’s time for us to vote for the TRUTH by bring-
ing about a public investigation of the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL
because only in that way can we hope to save our economy from utter ruin, and
only in that way can we seize a weapon big enough to stop those who are drag-
ging us all into the insanity of NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
Topic #1—AMERICAN GOLD AND THE IRAQ-IRAN WAR
Topic #2—RUSSIA’S FIRST STRIKE AGAINST A TITAN-2 MISSILE
Topic #3—“STEP THREE” IN WHAT YOU CAN DO.
297
Topic #1—The world we live in today, my friends, seems more and more like a
roller coaster. Only a short month ago we were hearing about the worldwide oil
glut. There were predictions that it could easily take one or two years for the oil
surplus to fade away, but rosy projections like those always seem to set the
stage for trouble. This month of September got off to a bad start as the dollar
fell to the lowest level in five years on Money Markets world-wide. Something
ominous was in the wind. You and I were not told about it, but a new crisis was
brewing between Iran and Iraq.
On September 9 Great Britain shut down its Embassy in Tehran, saying it was
becoming too dangerous. Iraq and Iran were squabbling over their border, and
the dispute was heating up. Iraqi troops invaded northwestern Iran seizing some
90 square miles of Iranian territory. Then on September 17 after the fact, Iraq
tore up the 1975 Border Treaty with Iran. Next the air war erupted between the
two countries. On September 22 Iraq and Iran bombed each other’s air fields,
and the very next day two OPEC nations, Iraq and Iran, began destroying each
other’s oil installations. The headline in the Washington Post for September 24,
1980 said it all: “IRAN BOMBS BAGHDAD. FULL SCALE WAR ERUPTS.”
The present fighting between Iraq and Iran was started by Iraq. For many years
we’ve heard about the status of Iraq as a Russian client state; and with the war
now under way, we are always reminded of this by the controlled major media
of the United States. But what is not reported to you and me, my friends, is
Russia’s reaction to Iraq’s latest actions. The Russians have sent very blunt
warnings to Iraq that they are not pleased, and have shut off arms shipments to
Iraq. The Russians are saying basically: “We gave you arms to defend yourself
against Israel—not to invade Iran.”
During roughly the past year and a half little noticed changes have been taking
place in Iraq. Those changes have been orchestrated in parallel with those in
neighboring Iran. Iraq’s new strong man, Saddam Hussein, came to power in a
bloody coup d’etat. At the time all eyes were on Iran instead, but now thou-
sands of Iranian military personnel from the Shah’s former regime are now in
Iraq. They are fighting on the side of Iraq, hoping to regain power in Iran by
military means.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 52 last November 1979, I described how and why
agents of the Rockefeller cartel brought to ruin the late Shah of Iran. The Is-
lamic revolution of Ayatollah Khomeini was secretly helped along as a
maneuver to oust the Shah. The Ayatollah was ushered into power by forces
which he did not understand; but as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 52,
those forces plan to undo it all. What I told you then was, quote:
298
Audio Letter 58
“They plan to martyr the entire Khomeini government as they set off thermonu-
clear war.” The real Ayatollah Khomeini himself was assassinated last February
1980, as I reported that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 54, but he was replaced
with a “double” to maintain the image of the Ayatollah as an enemy—someone
for the Americans to hate.
Now by way of Iraq, pressure is being put on Iran. The ultimate goal is to make
the present government of Iran disintegrate in chaos, but you can expect many
twists and turns along the way.
Like Iran, Iraq is only being used as a part of a larger plan. There may well be
double-crosses within double-crosses. Almost anything can happen, but watch
for efforts to lure Russia into the Persian Gulf, just as she was lured into Af-
ghanistan.
The main forces which have brought about the Iraqi attack on Iran are not those
of the United States government itself. Instead, the situation in Iraq right now is
dominated by the old Rockefeller oil interests. These are headed and tightly co-
ordinated by John J. McCloy and his associates.
Since the spring of 1979 I have reported that the Rockefeller cartel as a whole is
now headless and beginning to crumble, but that is not yet true of the oil com-
panies within the cartel. They still intend to complete their long-range plan to
recapture undisputed domination over Iran, and they are working closely with
their private Israeli counterparts here and abroad to accomplish this. Their de-
struction of the Shah’s regime was only the first half of their plan. The second
half is to get rid of the interim government now in Iran, the so-called Khomeini
regime. They want to destabilize the situation in Iran and take advantage of the
chaos that follows. When the smoke clears, “Big Oil” plans again to own Iran
lock, stock, and barrel; and at the same time the Bolshevik secret government
here plans to take advantage of the same events to bring us closer to nuclear
war.
Ever since 1914, war after war has been fought over oil. Governments have
been destroyed, others created, and still others subverted; and whenever there is
war for oil, gold is always the trigger. Gold is such an important weapon of war
that in early 1968 the Joint Chiefs of Staff became very alarmed over the deple-
tion of America’s gold supply. They visited their then President Lyndon
Johnson in the White House. In an angry confrontation they demanded that
Johnson not reduce the gold stock still remaining because it was needed for
purposes of war.
299
The Rockefeller interests, now under the control of John J. McCloy and associ-
ates, arranged earlier this year for eight billion dollars ($8,000,000,000)—that’s
eight thousand million dollars—in gold to be paid to the leader of Iraq, Saddam
Hussein. A very special private underground warehouse in Zurich was used in
this transfer of gold. This gold was an outright bribe. It was to persuade Iraq to
attack Iran. Eight billion dollars, my friends, is a lot of money, but it was a
cheap price for the Rockefeller oil cartel, and for two reasons:
First, the gold which was used to bribe Iraq to start the war was part of the gold
which was stolen from you and me! The bulk of the gold taken from America’s
stockpiles was flown to Europe on multinational corporate jets. So, my friends,
that $8-billion in gold did not cost the oil companies anything except some jet
fuel, but it cost you and me part of our monetary gold, and it has been used to
start a war for which you and I will pay even more.
Eight billion dollars in gold was a cheap price for the oil companies for another
reason too. If their plans are successful, the Rockefeller oil group will get back
complete control over Iran’s oil and other natural resources, and they won’t
have to pay those untold billions in oil royalties to their new Iranian lackeys.
As I explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 52, the time came when the oil compa-
nies could no longer control their former puppet, the Shah—so out he went.
They could also not control for long the real Ayatollah Khomeini—so he was
killed. But if their war on Iran by way of Iraq succeeds in its ultimate purpose,
the Rockefeller oil companies will once again constitute the Iranian state.
The oil interests under John J. McCloy are playing ball with the invisible Bol-
shevik government here in the United States. For the moment, they both want
the same thing in Iran—that is, instability and turmoil—so they are working
hand in glove to create an explosion in the Persian Gulf. But the oil companies
could end up finding that even they have been used by the Bolshevik secret
government here in the United States; because if the Bolsheviks have their way,
all-out war will come before the oil cartel can consolidate their gains in Iran.
Last month I revealed that the Bolsheviks here are following roughly a three-
month cycle in triggering new war plans. The coming month of October 1980 is
another critical month in that timetable; and sure enough, right on schedule, the
Iraq-Iran war is boiling over. The United States Naval Fleet in the Indian Ocean
is now being bolstered by units from our Mediterranean Fleet. At the same
time, the United States is trying to get Australia, France (which is very reti-
cent), and Great Britain to join in with their navies as well. At the same time,
300
Audio Letter 58
our Bolshevik Administration is sending four AWACS airborne battle control

airplanes to Saudi Arabia. Cargo planes and several hundred support personnel
are also on the way. The public excuse is that this is to keep open the critical
Strait of Hormuz to keep the oil tankers moving; but, my friends, it may well
lead instead to an oil cut-off, and that will produce not only higher oil prices but
also a “national emergency” here in the United States as we shift step by step
onto a war footing.
Topic #2—Three years ago today on September 30, 1977, I recorded AUDIO
LETTER No. 26. In that tape I reported that the most decisive battle of the 20th
Century had just taken place in space. It was the “BATTLE OF THE
HARVEST MOON,” September 27, 1977. It was history’s first true battle in
space, and in a stunning upset the United States was defeated by the Soviet Un-
ion. From that day onward, Russia began evicting the United States from the
military use of space. The true military balance between East and West was
turned upside down. Since that time the United States has been dealing from
weakness on the world stage. But our secret Bolshevik government is unwilling
to abandon its secret plans for world domination; and so out of weakness Amer-
ica has shifted to a first-strike nuclear strategy against Russia. Lately this
dramatic shift in America’s military posture has started coming to the surface in
the news. For example, last month “Presidential Directives” 58 and 59 were
made public. One Directive, No. 59, officially commits the United States to a
first-strike nuclear posture known as “Counterforce Targeting” of our missiles.
The other Directive, No. 58, is to step up preparations for our Leaders to hide in
safe war bunkers just before they set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE. And what
about you and me and our children? We are supposed to just wait patiently until
the air raid sirens start blaring all around us.
Our shift to a first-strike nuclear posture actually began over two years ago in
secret. I first reported this change in AUDIO LETTER No. 36 for July 1978;
and the following month in AUDIO LETTER No. 37 I gave details of the secret
first-strike plans then being prepared. In AUDIO LETTER No. 37 I reported
that America’s secret plans for a first strike were producing a response in kind
by the Kremlin. The Russians had learned about the plans of our own secret
government for a first strike and so they were planning to turn the tables. By
allowing the United States to start the process, the Russians were planning to
obtain an excuse for their own first strike against us, but I can now report that
the Russian first-strike strategy has changed in very important ways. My
friends, it is already under way!
On both sides the strategic plans for NUCLEAR WAR ONE are in a constant
state of flux; and as it happens, the changes on both sides during the past two
301
years can be illustrated with a single weapon. That weapon is America’s giant
Titan-2 Missile. The Titan-2 is an old missile. It began to be deployed some 18
years ago in 1962. It is a liquid fuel rocket unlike our newer Minutemen which
use solid fuel. It is a maintenance headache, and we do not have a large number
of them, my friends. Only 54 were deployed originally.
But the Titan-2 has one advantage which has become very important to our
Bolshevik secret government. That advantage is sheer size. It has a pay load
capability, called throw-weight by the military, which is many times larger than
that of a Minuteman. That gives the Titan-2 a special value for modification to
new missions which were not originally planned.
Some two years ago one of these major modification programs was carried out
on Titan-2 Missiles. As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 37, they have been
modified for fractional orbital bombardment. Normally American missiles are
aimed over the North Pole at Russia, but that is no longer the case with the Ti-
tan-2s. When war begins, the Titans will be launched in many different
directions, and they will not follow the normal ballistic trajectory of a standard
ICBM; instead, they will accelerate all the way to orbital speed. They will then
race around the globe toward Russia. They will approach Russia from all direc-
tions, not just from the north; and they will arrive at twice the speed of other
missiles. As they approach their targets, the warheads will retrofire out of orbit.
From there they will rain destruction on their Russian targets—at least that is
the plan.
American military planners believe that they can succeed in getting at least a
few of the Titan-2s launched in spite of Russia’s Cosmospheres on patrol over-
head. They also believe that the short flight time of the Titans will keep them
safe from Russia’s manned-killer satellites, the Cosmos Interceptors.
Finally, the secret planners here believe that the Russians will find terminal de-
fense impossible. The Titan warheads will simply arrive from too many
directions for effective anti-missile defense, but last February 1980 I reported
that Russia does plan to have an effective last-ditch defense to shoot down any
incoming ICBMs. The Russians began work on it in June 1978, two months
before I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 37. It is a “Flying Anti-Ballistic Mis-
sile System.” It is made up of Charged Particle Beam Weapons carried by
Russia’s supersonic transport, the TU-144. The TU-144s were suddenly re-
moved from service without explanation in June 1978, and now I can report to
you that the TU-144 Flying Anti-Missile System is fully operational in Russia.
302
Audio Letter 58
Meanwhile America’s fleet of Titan-2s is beginning to dwindle. On August 24,

1978, an accident, supposedly, crippled a freshly modified Titan-2 at Rock,
Kansas. It made headlines with a massive leak which sent poisonous reddish-
brown fumes towering into the sky. The huge missile was ruined. Scratch
one—53 left.
Now, my friends, the Titan-2s are being modified again. This time only the
warhead is involved. They are still programmed for fractional orbital bom-
bardment, which requires use of a smaller warhead than normal, but now
compact new generation warheads are being installed on the Titan-2s. Each
packs a 24-megaton wallop—that’s over 1000 times more powerful than the
Hiroshima A-bomb! But the most deadly feature of the new Titan-2 warheads is
their cobalt jacket. The Titan-2 warhead is a doomsday weapon designed to
create vast amounts of deadly radiation over wide areas for a generation.
The Bolsheviks here are well aware of Russia’s vast Civil Defense setup. They
know that unlike the United States, Russia’s rulers have tried to insure that as
many Russians as possible will survive a nuclear attack; but the Bolsheviks
here plan to make those preparations useless. Even if the Russians stay under-
ground for a year, or two years, or five years, eventually they will have to come
out of their shelters; and if they do so after an American cobalt bomb attack,
they will still die. And so one way or another, the Russians intend to make dou-
bly sure that no Titan-2 succeeds in bombarding Russia.
For nearly three years I have reported that Russia’s levitating weapons plat-
forms, the Cosmospheres, can blast our missiles in their silos; and this month
on September 19 that is exactly what was done! The target was a Titan-2 in its
silo near Damascus, Arkansas. The Russians were sending a message to our
Bolshevik secret government. Their war of attrition against America’s war-
making capability is now being stepped up. The Russians are now embarking
on their own new version of a first strike—one target at a time. Russian Intelli-
gence learned several months ago about the plan to retrofit the Titan-2s with
cobalt doomsday warheads. The decision was made to destroy one of these
retro-fitted missiles in its silo at the first favorable opportunity.
The Titans are notorious for their leaks during maintenance. It was decided that
the first major leak of a retro-fitted Titan-2 would be used as a cover for the
Russian strike. On Thursday September 18 the Russians got the chance that
they were waiting for. Around 6:45 that evening a retro-fitted Titan-2 with a
cobalt doomsday warhead was being worked on in its silo near Damascus, Ar-
kansas. Suddenly, we are told, an accident took place which has no parallel
since the Titan-2s became operational 18 years ago. Supposedly a wrench was
303
dropped, knocking a hole in the side of the missile. In any case, the Russians
had the leak they wanted to provide a cover for what they were about to do.
For more than eight hours Air Force personnel worked steadily but without
great urgency to try to fix the leak. Meanwhile the silo door remained closed to
avoid attracting attention. The main worry at the time was not an explosion but
toxicity of the fumes. As Air Force Secretary Hans Mark testified to Congress
on September 24, quote: “The technical experts did not expect any explosion at
all.” As one crew after another entered and left the Titan-2 silo in protective
suits, a Russian Cosmosphere was floating high above in the stratosphere. They
waited until after most of the nearby residents had been warned and evacuated.
Then at 3:01 A.M. the Cosmosphere crew received the order to open fire. Their
Charged Particle Beam weapon had for hours been aimed and ready, locked
onto the center of the huge silo door. The door, made of concrete and steel and
weighing 740 tons, was designed to withstand a near-miss of a 10-megaton H-
bomb; but it was no match for the Charged Particle Beam. In a fraction of a
second the Beam blew a hole through the silo door. As the door buckled and
twisted, the Beam created a tremendous shock wave inside the silo. The fragile
outer shell of the missile instantly was crushed like an egg shell. The fuel and
oxidizer tanks ruptured in a thousand places, and the propellants ran together.
As long as they are kept apart the fuel and oxidizer of the Titan-2 offer very lit-
tle danger of explosion; but they are of a type called hypergolic propellants—
that is, the moment they contact each other they ignite—and that is what hap-
pened in the missile silo. Huge amounts mixed instantly as the missile crumpled
inward. The result was a tremendous explosion. It threw the already ruined silo
door all over the countryside, and the mighty Titan-2 launched its doomsday
warhead not into Russia but into the Arkansas pasture a few hundred feet away.
And so, my friends, there were really two explosions at the Titan-2 missile silo.
First was the explosion of part of the atoms of the silo door itself when it was
hit by the Particle Beam, and that in turn triggered the second explosion—that
of the missile itself in the silo. Several eye witnesses described this double blast
in various ways; but the clearest description was given by two injured Air Force
personnel—Sergeants Michael Hansen and Archie James. Their statements in a
September 21 news conference were reported the next day in the New York
Times. The Times said, quote:
“The two men said that they were about 100 feet from the missile silo when the
first of two explosions occurred. They agreed that there had been one smaller
explosion first, which knocked them to the ground, before a much larger explo-
sion with monstrous force.”
304
Audio Letter 58
After the explosion, the Air Force mystified everyone with its nervousness
about the warhead. After all, everyone knows an ICBM carries a nuclear war-
head, so why not admit it? Now, my friends, you know why. They were
desperately afraid that there might be a ‘slip of the tongue’ by someone about
the new doomsday cobalt warhead of the Titan-2, and so strict orders were
given to say nothing at all about it. For our Titan-2 Missile Fleet the score is
now: scratch two, 52 to go. The Russians are hoping to bring about a shutdown
of the Titan Missile force by means of public outcry if possible; but if not, they
intend to make sure in other ways that not one is ever launched at Russia. The
Titan-2 with its new 24-megaton cobalt warhead is a first-strike weapon of our
Secret Government.
But the Russians too, are making use of cobalt bombs in their first-strike strat-
egy against the United States. The Russian cobalt bombs are a totally different
design—not for use in the atmosphere but under ground and under water to
generate earthquakes.
Two months ago on July 28 an earthquake took place in the Midwest that shook
12 states. Geologists in that area were mystified, saying that it seemed like an
impossible earthquake. There are no known faults in the area where it was cen-
tered not far from Fort Knox, Kentucky, but in AUDIO LETTER No. 56 I
reported how Russia brought about that seemingly impossible earthquake using
two underground cobalt bombs.
Last month this Bolshevik Administration announced that Russia’s leadership is

now a No. 1 target in its first-strike posture, and Russia is responding in kind,
my friends. The real headquarters of America’s secret government is not here in
Washington, D.C., but in New York City, and now feverish preparations are
under way to create an impossible earthquake in New York City as part of Rus-
sia’s new first-strike campaign against the United States!
Topic #3—When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 57 last month, I mentioned

that I had not yet received any reports of replies by Senator Proxmire to your
letters; but since that time many of you have let me know that he has answered
you, and many of you have sent me copies of the letters that he sent you.
My friends, in my two previous tapes I cautioned you to beware of any attempts

to just brush you off. If you have never written to anyone in Congress before,
you may have felt that you got a very responsive reply from Senator Proxmire.
If so, I suggest that you stop the tape at this point and restart it with your letter
from Senator Proxmire in hand. Please follow along word for word. I’m about
305
to read to you what you are likely to have received. If your letter differs from
what I am about to read, by all means please send me a copy.
First: The date at the top is likely to be August 27, September 4, or September
9. Other dates are also possible, but large batches were sent out on those dates.
“Dear (so and so):
Thanks so much for your recent letter concerning the allegations initiated by
Dr. Peter Beter concerning massive gold thefts from the United States Treasury
at Fort Knox, especially an unrecorded shipment which occurred in 1965.
While this precious metal is no longer needed to back up our currency, I can
certainly appreciate your concern in this issue.
Similar concerns were expressed in 1974 at which time former Treasury Secre-
tary Simon invited all members of Congress to participate in a personal
inspection of the reserves held at Fort Knox. Several members joined in the tour
at that time. In addition at the request of the Congress, the General Accounting
Office and the Treasury also completed an audit of the gold reserves. The Gen-
eral Accounting Office is an investigative arm of the Congress as you may
know, and participates in the yearly audits of the Treasury’s gold reserves.
As to the situation which took place in 1965 concerning the missing shipment
of gold, I am asking the Treasury’s Inspector General to give me a complete
report. Once I have this information, I will be in a better position to determine
whether any future action is warranted.
I appreciate your interest in this important matter.
Sincerely, William Proxmire, Chairman.”
The signature, which looks for all the world like a personal signature, is “Bill
Proxmire.” It looks pretty good, doesn’t it? The tone is friendly, and it looks
like a personal letter and that is what you are supposed to believe it is; but, of
course, if your letter coincided with the one I just read, you know now that it
was not a personal letter. It’s just one of many identical letters churned out like
popcorn by a computer-controlled typewriter. Even the signature, which looks
so real, is made by a special signature-duplicating machine. If you have a
neighbor who also received a letter, put one on top of the other and hold them
up to the light and you will find that the computerized typing is identical; and
you will also discover that the signatures are identical, unlike real signatures.
306
Audio Letter 58
They may be in slightly different positions on the two letters, but by moving
them around you will be able to make the two signatures coincide.
My friends, the computerized letter is used by Senators and Congressmen today

for several reasons. For one thing, of course, it saves work. For another, it
makes constituents feel good thinking they have received a personal reply, but
most of all it helps Senators and Congressmen avoid involving themselves in
many issues. When you receive a personal letter from a busy Senator or Con-
gressman you may wonder, “Am I the only one who wrote about this?” Most
people, if they think that, will just give up; and so the computerized letter is de-
signed to encourage you to feel isolated. Notice that the letter I just read you
from Senator Proxmire sounds as if he is answering you alone. He avoids men-
tioning that many others have written to him about the same thing, but you
should know that in Congress every letter is considered to represent at least 500
people.
Now I invite you to look more closely at the actual content of Senator Prox-
mire’s computerized letter to you. It’s filled with red flags.
First, in paragraph 1 is his statement that gold is no longer needed to back up

the dollar. That is red flag No. 1. It goes against common sense, history, and
daily news about gold prices and the dollar. Senator Proxmire is parroting the
old Rockefeller line which was used years ago to calm us, to deceive us, while
they phased gold out of Fort Knox and into their own pockets.
The second paragraph is worded to convey the impression that all this has been
looked into and found to be untrue. But read it carefully, my friends. You will
discover more red flags.
For example: He mentions the so-called “tour” of the Fort Knox Bullion De-
pository in 1974, but a tour is not an “inventory,” and not one of the visitors to
Fort Knox in September 1974 was a specialist in gold. What is more, the visi-
tors were not even told about, much less shown, the actual gold vault itself!
This is a huge maximum security vault which occupies the central portion of
the Depository building and extends well below ground. Instead, the visitors
were allowed to enter only one small jail-cell-like compartment to look at some
reddish-tinted alleged gold bars. In AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975 I
gave details about all this. The Fort Knox tour of 1974 cited by Senator Prox-
mire was just a peep show amounting to a total fraud.
Then he refers to the so-called “audit” of our gold reserves by the General Ac-
counting Office and the Treasury. Another red flag, my friends, because an
307
audit is not a physical inventory or count of the gold itself. An audit is only an
examination of the books; and from the very beginning my charge has been that
those books are fraudulent and therefore useless. And to make matters worse,
the Audit Committee consisted of 13 Treasury personnel with only two (2)
GAO personnel tagging along to make it look good. I described that entire epi-
sode in detail in my AUDIO BOOK talking tape entitled “THE FORT KNOX
GOLD SCANDAL...AND WHAT IT MEANS TO YOU” of March 1975.
Paragraph 3 of the Proxmire computer letter is a tradition in Congress today.

It’s called “Pass the buck.” But he does not even pass it to an objective agency!
For example, he could have referred it to the General Accounting Office; at
least the GAO is an arm of Congress itself, as Proxmire himself mentions. But
NO, you wrote to Proxmire about the Treasury’s failure to account for a gold
shipment worth over $8-billion today. And whom does he ask to look into it?—
why the Treasury itself!
Actually the only thing resembling concrete action mentioned in the letter is
Proxmire’s request for a report from the Treasury’s Inspector General. So it
seems appropriate to take a few minutes to tell you about Proxmire’s previous
experience with the Treasury Inspector General. The occasion was the scandal
that erupted in December 1978 over missing gold at the New York Assay Of-
fice. As you may recall, there were news reports at the time that some 5,200
ounces of gold could not be accounted for. The story was brought to light only
because of the determined efforts of a dedicated group of employees at the New
York Assay Office. These employees known as the “Whistle Blowers” tried for
years to seek redress for corrupt practices there among the top management.
They contacted various officials within the Treasury, the Justice Department,
Congress (including Senator Proxmire), and the press. For their efforts, some of
them received severe retribution through their jobs, demotions, and so on; but
against all odds they succeeded in bringing to light the matter of the missing
gold. Then, as now, Proxmire turned to the Treasury itself for a report on the
possible misbehavior of a Treasury operation—the New York Assay Office;
and on December 19, 1978, Deputy Secretary of the Treasury Robert Carswell
wrote to Senator Proxmire and said, quote:
“I must now inform you that there have been significant irregularities in Ac-
counting and Management procedures in the New York Assay Office that
appear to go back a number of years.”
Carswell added, quote:
308
Audio Letter 58
“The full truth may never be known because of the inadequate records kept
over the years.”
In other words, my friends, the records at the New York Assay Office were un-
reliable, just like the records at Fort Knox.
In his letter to Proxmire, Carswell also mentioned that the Treasury’s new In-
spector General had been assigned to the Assay Office case. The office of
Inspector General was a new office, created only three months earlier; and ac-
cording to the Carswell letter to Proxmire, the first investigation handed to the
Treasury Inspector General was that of the New York Assay Office. And so the
Treasury’s Inspector General began his career in that post with a case of miss-
ing gold.
Now, according to his computer letter to you, Proxmire has asked him to look
into another case of missing gold—the 1965 missing shipment from Fort Knox.
The Treasury Inspector General took charge of a group of agents detailed from
the Secret Service, which is another branch of the Treasury! Then he directed a
so-called investigation of the missing gold at the New York Assay Office
which, by his own words, quote “consisted of interviews” plus a review of se-
curity and procedures. No sworn testimony, just interviews; and oddly enough
no one confessed to any criminal activity or theft. So on May 11, 1979, the
Treasury Inspector General closed the files on his “investigation” of the New
York Assay Office.
He wrote a memorandum that day to Deputy Treasury Secretary Carswell

summarizing the results of this great investigation. With one exception (a man
who had already been sent to jail), he said, quote: “No evidence has been de-
veloped that any personnel were involved in the theft of gold and silver from
the New York Assay Office.” That one exception is not discussed, but you
might find it revealing. It was an employee who was caught trying to carry a
bar of gold out the door inside a rolled-up newspaper. The reason he was
caught, my friends, was that the gold bar slipped out of the newspaper and fell
on the floor.
The so-called investigation of the Treasury Inspector General also succeeded in

deciding that less gold was missing than originally reported. What we heard in
news reports was 5,200 ounces; but by the time the Treasury Inspector General
got through, he had whittled that down to a mere 4,100 ounces. He also for-
warded the sanitized Treasury report on itself to the Justice Department for their
determination. Not surprisingly, the Justice Department wrote back that, quot-
ing the Inspector General’s memorandum again:
309
“There is no evidence in the present record that any employee of the New York
Assay Office personally benefitted from the practices described in the report.”
And the Justice Department is said to have declined prosecution due to, quote
“the absence of any motive of personal gain relating to the settlement proce-
dures.”
There was never another peep out of Senator William Proxmire about the
strange goings-on at the New York Assay Office. Apparently he was well satis-
fied by the self-serving Treasury investigation of itself, so much so that now he
is passing the buck to exactly the same office of the Treasury in the matter of
the 1965 missing shipment of gold from Fort Knox.
My friends, I never told you that what we are trying to do would be easy. I do
believe that it can be done if we will stick with it no matter what; but now you
have a small taste of what we are up against. In the case of the missing gold at
the New York Assay Office, Senator Proxmire acted as if he just did not want
to know, so he relied on the Treasury to investigate itself through its office of
Inspector General. Now in the case of the missing gold shipment from Fort
Knox, his initial response reflected in his computer letters to you was the same.
My friends, from what I have said so far you may be thinking that I’m about to
say, “Forget Senator Proxmire. We have to try something else.” But that is not
what I’m saying at all. There is more to the story, and a glimmer of hope that
Senator Proxmire can be persuaded to take meaningful action; but I do believe
that you must have a realistic understanding of the situation if we are to suc-
ceed. To that end, I think a few words are in order about Senator Proxmire’s
public background.
E. William Proxmire got his start in politics long ago after he married into the
Rockefeller family. He ran as a Democrat for Governor of Wisconsin in 1952,
‘54, and ‘56 and lost each time.
But his big chance came in a Special Senatorial Election on August 27, 1957. It
was Proxmire, my friends, who filled the Senate vacancy of the late Senator
Joseph McCarthy. Proxmire was re-elected in 1958 and has been in the Senate
ever since.
Throughout his Senate career, Proxmire has been deeply involved in the most
powerful committees of Congress dealing with banking, currency, housing—in
310
Audio Letter 58
other words, our economy. Whatever has happened during those years, Prox-
mire was there.
In 1961 the so-called “London Gold Pool Agreement” was set up. It was an in-
formal agreement that was never authorized by Congress—I repeat, NEVER
AUTHORIZED BY CONGRESS; and under that agreement, our gold started
flowing out of the United States in a hemorrhage that lasted nearly 7 years. One
courageous Congressman, Frank Chelf of Kentucky, spoke repeatedly on the
floor of Congress about what was happening to our gold. In AUDIO LETTER
No. 2 for July 1975, I read to you his sworn statement about the secret ship-
ments of gold out of Fort Knox during those years. But throughout the halls of
Congress the warning words of Congressman Frank Chelf were totally ignored,
and Senator William Proxmire was among those who were there—but paid no
attention! And so we should not be surprised if we encounter resistance by
Senator Proxmire to leading a public investigation of our gold reserves.
Long ago he became entangled with the special interests of the Rockefeller
group, who in turn spirited away our gold; and Proxmire was there, in Con-
gress, when our gold was taken, so he could be accused of malfeasance for
neglecting to take any action up to now to protect our gold. Under the circum-
stances, Proxmire may well look upon a public investigation of our missing
gold as a “can of worms” for him. But, my friends, we do not want Proxmire’s
hide, WE WANT HIS HELP. He is in the best possible position to do it—if he
will; and there is an inkling that perhaps he can be persuaded to take action.
On September 5 my friend Mr. Edward Durell wrote to Senator Proxmire urg-

ing him to take up the investigation of our nation’s gold supplies. Mr. Durell
has done this many times before, and has been met with a stone wall!! But this
time, this time, Mr. Durell wrote in the wake of your barrage of letters; and on
September 11 Proxmire sent this reply, and I now quote:
“Dear Mr. Durell:
I have your letter regarding an unreported shipment of gold which occurred at

Fort Knox in 1965 and the possibility that there may have been similar unre-
ported incidents. While, as you know, the United States is no longer on the
Gold Standard, I can appreciate your concern in this issue. I have already asked
the Treasury Department’s Inspector General to look into the matter and give
me a complete report. In view of your correspondence, however, I am also ask-
ing the Justice Department and the General Accounting Office to also
investigate the situation you outline. The General Accounting Office is an in-
311
vestigative arm of the United States Congress. Once I have this information I
will be in a better position to determine whether any future action is warranted.
Sincerely, William Proxmire, Chairman”
My friends, this is still a long way short of agreeing to what we have re-
quested—that is, a PUBLIC INVESTIGATION by Proxmire’s Committee—
but it is a step in the right direction, so it’s up to us to redouble our efforts.
We have to make it clear that there are many of us, that we are not going to go
away, that we will not be satisfied with anything less than a public investigation
by his Committee, and that he will have our complete support. To do that, I
urge that you again contact Senator Proxmire and get everyone else to do so
that you possibly can. And if you are willing to spend a few dollars, I urge you
to use a MAILGRAM this time for greater impact. All you have to do is to call
Western Union and they will charge it to your telephone bill. A long message is
not necessary, but I suggest that you tell Senator Proxmire you want action—
not just comforting form letters. Tell him that you want a public, Congressional
investigation of our gold supplies by his Committee, which has jurisdiction—
not more cover-ups by the Executive Branch; and repeat your pledge of firm
support if he will open the investigation which you request.
I also have a second suggestion this month which I think would mean more to
you after I tell you the following:
The secret gold shipment from Fort Knox on January 20, 1965, took place the
very day Lyndon Johnson was inaugurated President, as I reported last month;
and I can now reveal, my friends, that this shipment did not end up at the New
York Assay Office. It wound up, instead, in a ranch in Mexico owned jointly by
President and Mrs. Johnson!! And President Johnson arranged for the Treasury
Department to give Mrs. Johnson a Special License to deal in gold bullion as a
private citizen. Yet, at that time, you and I could not even own gold except in
jewelry.
The Fort Knox Gold Scandal of today was predictable long ago for those with
eyes to see. The famous prophet of the 1929 Stock Market Crash, Roger Ward
Babson, gave a clear warning of things to come while the Fort Knox Bullion
Depository was still being built. There was an article about his warnings in the
Literary Digest for August 29, 1936. The article described Babson’s objections
in the words, quote:
312
Audio Letter 58
“By dumping most of America’s gold hoard into a steel and concrete strong box
in the mountain fortress at Fort Knox, Kentucky, Uncle Sam is putting too
many of his eggs in one basket.”
Two very relevant questions posed by Babson were also mentioned:
(1) Is not the United States as liable to have internal revolution as to be attacked
by foreign nations? And
(2) Are not gold and commodities much safer distributed among millions of
people than stored in Russian fashion under the control of politicians?
The article quoted Babson as he thundered, quote:
“To secure control of nearly one-half the world’s total gold supply requires
only securing control of the White House. The key to these great vaults is hang-
ing on the wall of the President’s private office.”
With those prophetic words of 44 years ago in mind, I now offer you my sec-
ond suggestion for this month: We need to use every avenue available to begin
to make others aware that there is a question about our gold reserves, and so I
suggest that you write a brief letter to the Editor to every newspaper, large and
small, in your area. Don’t try to say a lot, just open up the thought that we
ought to think about our gold reserves as we prepare to elect a president. Here
is a sample of what I mean, to get you started:
“LETTER TO THE EDITOR:
All the presidential candidates this year are talking about our troubled economy
in the old conventional terms, but conventional economic cures don’t seem to
be working. Could it be that the illness is not conventional??
Congressional legislation HR-7874 is now pending to look into persistent ru-

mors that our monetary gold to back up the dollar is depleted or gone. If so, no
wonder the dollar is shrinking and gold prices mushrooming. When we go to
the polls maybe we ought to keep in mind that whoever we vote for will have
the keys to all our gold—that is, if there is any left.”
You may succeed in getting only one letter published, or none at all; but all of
us working together have to think of ourselves as scattering seed. A lot of our
313
letters to editors, just like seed, will fall on barren land; but if even one letter
does get published, it can begin to alert thousands of newspaper readers. So
please do it now, my friends. There is no time to be wasted.
Now it’s time to give you my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER
I’ve tried to show you a little more clearly the connection between gold and
war. Our own gold, which has been stolen from us, is being used to drag you
and me into war! So we must seize the gold weapon ourselves and turn it
around. By breaking open the GOLD SCANDAL, we must wage preventive
war—a WAR OF TRUTH—in order to prevent a war of missiles, bombs, parti-
cle beam weapons, and clashing armies.
What happened to the Titan-2 Missile which exploded in its silo earlier this
month serves to illustrate the stakes in our preventive war. The secret Bolshevik
government of the United States has transformed the Titan-2 into a first-strike
doomsday weapon against Russia; but the Titan-2 at Damascus, Arkansas, was
itself the victim of a Russian first strike! For the first time the Russians have
now demonstrated the ability of their Cosmospheres to destroy our ICBMs in
their silos. Day by day we come closer and closer to the outbreak of all-out
thermonuclear war!
The Secret Rulers of the United States and the rulers of Russia are both em-
barked on their own separate and very different first-strike strategies. The
Bolsheviks here want to achieve a first strike against Russia that will set off all-
out war. The Russians, on the other hand, want to achieve the opposite. They
want to make all-out war impossible by destroying America’s ability to fight.
And so, my friends, the Bolsheviks here keep struggling to prepare for a single
massive blow at Russia, even though America will be destroyed. And to pre-
vent the massive American first strike, the Russians are conducting a campaign
of localized first strikes. One day a Mount St. Helens explodes, another day a
Titan Missile explodes, and on another day soon a major city may seem to ex-
plode in a seemingly impossible earthquake.
No matter who wins the first-strike tug of war, the Russians or the Bolsheviks
here, America loses. And, my friends, you and I are America, so it is up to you
and me to defend our great land and ourselves. No one else is going to do it for
us, but our forefathers left us a CONSTITUTION which grants us the freedom,
the power, and the responsibility to do the job; and if our Lord Jesus Christ
wills it, we will succeed.
Two months ago I began giving you my answers to the question many of you
had started asking me: “What can I do?” Many of the things we need to do re-
314
Audio Letter 58
quire little money but time, dedication, and perseverance. Even so we must not
deceive ourselves. Freedom does not always come for “free.” The challenge we
face today is no less than what our forefathers faced 200 years ago; so if we
want to prevail in this struggle, we can do no less than they did. As they ex-
pressed it in concluding the Declaration of Independence:
“...with a firm reliance on the Protection of Divine Providence, we mutually

pledge to each other our Lives, our Fortunes, and our sacred Honor.”
315
Audio Letter 59
October 31, 1980
Earlier this month millions of baseball fans were preoccupied with the World
Series. The World Series is always great fun with plenty of excitement and sus-
pense right to the end; and even if your team loses, it’s not so bad. There’s
always next year.
Now you and I are caught up in a “world series” of a different sort. Ours is a
series of battles to determine what sort of world we will leave to our children,
and there will be no rematch next year! If we strike out now, the game is over,
so we need to keep swinging until we finally hit that home run we need in order
to win.
Topic #1—THE IRAN HOSTAGE RELEASE PLAN FOR WAR
Topic #2—SENATOR WILLIAM PROXMIRE AND “ACTION STEP 4”
Topic #3—“ACTION STEP 5” ON A NEW BATTLE FRONT.
Topic #1—During this month of October 1980 three issues have dominated the
news here in the United States. One has been the continuing war between Iraq
and Iran. That has been overshadowed in turn by sudden new rumors about a
possible release of our hostages in Iran. And the third issue, riding the waves of
other events, has been the up-coming election. These three on-going news sto-
ries are all related, and in turn they all reflect a fierce struggle behind the scenes
among three (3) different power groups.
One group is that of the Satanic Bolsheviks who now control the United States
government. Another group is that of the Rockefeller Oil Cartel now under the
control of John J. McCloy. And the third power center is in the Soviet Union
whose rulers today are in a battle to the death against the Satanic Bolsheviks.
The primary actors right now are the Bolsheviks and the McCloy Oil Group. It
is they who have done most of the maneuvering in the Iraq-Iran war, in the hos-
317
tage release rumors, and in the election build-up. But in all three areas, Russian
agents have been joining the fray too. Wherever possible they are trying to in-
terfere with Bolshevik plans even if that helps Big Oil temporarily.
For most Americans, the rumors about a possible hostage release have become
a central issue in recent days. It seems to have sprung from the Iraq-Iran war
and talk of trading spare parts to Iran for the hostages. And the prospects for a
hostage release are also being watched for their effect on our national election.
And so after nearly one year, the Iran hostages are again on center stage. And
now as then, my friends, the real stakes in the Iran hostage issue involve the
danger of thermonuclear war.
Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 58 I explained how the Iraq-Iran war was
triggered. It involved a huge bribe to Iraq engineered by the Rockefeller Oil
Cartel, and it was paid in gold—$8,000,000,000 worth of gold! This was part of
the very gold which was stolen years ago from the United States Treasury De-
positories. The goal of Big Oil is the one I explained last month. They want to
finish what they started by their overthrow of the late Shah of Iran. They want
to retake control over Iran with its oil riches on new and more profitable terms,
and to do that they want to topple the so-called Khomeini regime one way or
another. The war with Iraq is supposed to begin that process, but Iran is not the
only arena in which the crumbling Rockefeller Cartel is trying to reassert itself.
It’s happening also right here in the United States. All of the old faces from the
heyday of Rockefeller power under the Nixon Administration are clustered to-
gether right now under the Republican banner. The ghost of Nelson Rockefeller
is grasping for the White House once again. Meanwhile the Bolsheviks who
have seized control of the United States government have no intention of letting
go, and the easiest way for them to retain control is simply to keep the same
faces on the scene. And so the Bolsheviks here are doing everything they can to
prevent a change in the White House.
Last month I reported that the Rockefeller Big Oil Group had worked hand in
glove with this Bolshevik government in the Iraq-Iran war. But here at home,
the two are rivals. Last month I said that Big Oil was only setting itself up for
double-cross by the Bolsheviks; and sure enough, this month the Bolshevik
double-cross began to materialize in the form of a sudden new hostage release
plan. By means of this one ploy, the Bolsheviks in the United States Govern-
ment were hoping to pull the rug out from under the Rockefeller Oil Group,
both in the Persian Gulf and in the election here.
318
Audio Letter 59
On October 6 the Republican campaign announced the formation of a Special

Advisory group. The group was said to be for the purpose of watching for and
planning against a so-called “October surprise.” It was feared that something
was about to happen to upset the apple cart just before the election. The very
next day, October 7, their fears began to be realized. An independent presiden-
tial candidate, Barry Commoner, announced that he had received a hostage
release proposal from Iran. It was turned over to the State Department, and
there began to be flurries of excitement. On October 9 the hostage story
warmed up some more. That day State Department spokesmen stated that they
were in contact with the hostages. Referring to the top ranking hostage, Bruce
Langdon, the spokesmen said, quote: “We are in contact on a regular basis.”
The next item to build anticipation over the hostages came from Norway. Nor-
way, like Iran, is in the front lines of the Bolshevik planning for a nuclear first
strike at Russia. I reported that long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 37; and on
October 10 a newspaper in Oslo, Norway helped to move along this latest Bol-
shevik ploy. The Norwegian newspaper quoted former Iranian Foreign Minister
Ghotbzadeh as saying that Iran should release the hostages immediately. In the
United States the excitement built up another notch.
For the next week or so the Iran hostage release rumors were allowed to simmer
for a while. Then on October 17 Iran’s Prime Minister Rajai provided the next
excuse for heightened rumors. He appeared before the United Nations Security
Council where he bitterly attacked the United States for helping Iraq in the war,
but that was downplayed in the news compared to other remarks Rajai made in
a news conference a day later. Under pressure of the war with Iraq, Iran seem-
ingly was looking for a way out of the hostage crisis.
The rush of rumors turned into a torrent after that, and on Wednesday October
22 NBC Nightly News carried a sensational report. It was said that there had
been a “breakthrough” in the negotiation over the hostages. Supposedly the Ira-
nian Parliament was almost certain to set conditions for the hostage release
during debate on Sunday, October 26, and that could be followed by the actual
release of the hostages as early as the next day.
Up to that point the Bolshevik planners had everything going their way. By
their calculations, the release of hostages on that schedule would have guaran-
teed re-election of this Bolshevik Administration, because the entire week
preceding the election would have been filled with news of the hostages. There
would have been the drama of the release itself, then for days stories of some of
the hostages coming home, others going to intermediate stopovers for medical
treatment. Stories of reunions, interviews of former hostages and their families,
319
special news reports to rehash it all. And, my friends, if it had all gone as
planned there would have been euphoria here on election day 1980. Millions of
formerly undecided voters would have been caught up in the emotion of the
moment, and the Bolsheviks were certain that they would pull the lever marked
“Jimmy Carter” in the voting booth. It did not matter that cynicism would set in
later over the timing of the release. By then, the election would have been over
and the deed would have been done. That was the Bolshevik plan of the United
States Government, but once again Russian agents are trying to intervene in an
effort to unravel these Bolshevik plans.
From the very beginning the hostage situation in Iran has been under Bolshevik
control, as I first revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 52. But the Bolsheviks do
not exercise complete control over Iran, because the Russians have also suc-
ceeded in establishing an important level of influence in Iran nearly a year ago.
In the present situation, Bolshevik agents in Iran tried to stampede the Iranian
Parliament into the quick action they wanted. But Russian agents succeeded in
at least slowing down the stampede, and the Bolshevik timing was delayed. So
now even if the release of the hostages does take place in one form or another,
the effect on our election is less predictable. A last minute release could even
have a backlash effect on voters due to cynicism, and so the election is now up
for grabs. It could easily go contrary to Bolshevik wishes. If it does, that will be
a setback for the Bolsheviks, mainly in terms of delay. They will be forced to
re-establish control over any new administration. That will cost the Bolsheviks
a little bit of valuable time in their frenzy to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE,
and that is exactly why the Russians want a change of administration simply to
slow down the Bolsheviks.
But I mentioned earlier that the hostage release ploy of the Bolsheviks was set
in motion for two (2) purposes. One was to undermine the grab for the White
House by the Rockefeller Big Oil Group under the name of Ronald Reagan.
That purpose depended strongly on timing, and so has probably been ruined;
but the other purpose of a hostage release at this time is still on track. It is part
of the latest Bolshevik scenario to lead up to a nuclear first strike against Rus-
sia.
The first step in this latest war plan was to set off the Iraq-Iran war, as I men-
tioned last month. The Rockefeller Big Oil Group did this, thinking they were
starting the downfall of the Khomeini regime; but the Bolsheviks here used it
for another purpose instead. Basically the Bolshevik United States Government
is saying to Iran: “Release the hostages and we will give you military help
against Iraq,” which is backed by Big Oil; and to get ready, a sizeable Am-
phibious Attack Force of United States Marines is on the way. The Force
320
Audio Letter 59
includes a helicopter carrier, landing craft, and some 1,800 Marines. It passed
through the Suez Canal very quietly on October 27 heading for the Persian
Gulf. The tactics keep changing but the strategy is always the same.
Lately our fears have been stoked up over Russian designs on the Middle East
and Persian Gulf. First Russia was given a black eye by its past ties with Iraq
when Iraq invaded Iran. Now we are hearing about Russian overtures to Iran by
supplying certain war needs. And in the midst of it all is the hostage release
ploy. The Bolsheviks here are trying to set the stage for a massive American
military return to Iran. If the plan succeeds, it will be as I described it long ago
in AUDIO LETTER No. 37, and I quote:
“The American public will demand that it is time to stand up to Russia, and
with full public support American troops and weapons will pour into Iran. From
that point onward the outbreak of NUCLEAR WAR ONE will be all but impos-
sible for the public to follow by way of the so-called news.”
(End of my quotation from AUDIO LETTER No. 37.)
The Russians know what is afoot and they are trying to ruin the plan. In this
case, that means trying to spoil the hostage release negotiations altogether. Up
to now Russian agents in Iran have succeeded in spoiling the timing of a hos-
tage release, and they are still at work as I say these words on October 31,
hoping to prevent the hostages from being released at this time. If they succeed,
it will be the fourth time during 1980 that nuclear war has been averted. Even
so, the Bolsheviks who have taken over our government never rest.
By the time you hear this, the election will be past and the matter of the hos-
tages may have been decided, but the Bolsheviks already have another serious
crisis building up in Poland. For two years now the Bolsheviks have been trying
to create an explosion in Poland. The first plan was the one for a Pope’s Revo-
lution, as it would have been known. I described that plan in detail in AUDIO
LETTER No. 42; but just as in the present hostage release ploy, timing was
critical to the Pope’s Revolution plan; and the Russians were able to spoil the
plan by changing the timing of the Pope’s visit to Poland. But now the Bolshe-
viks have a new weapon of destruction in Poland. It is the so-called
“Independent Trade Union” movement. It has been given the old Bolshevik
name “Solidarity,” but its real purpose is not solidarity but division, turmoil,
and revolution.
Two months ago the new rulers in the Kremlin defused the confrontations then
brewing by approving major concessions to the strikers. Now many of the Pol-
321
ish workers want to take a breather to consolidate their gains, but the Bolshe-
viks did not create the new Labor movement for that purpose. Instead there are
new and bigger demands, spreading agitation, and threats of a new major strike.
So now Poland’s borders with Russia, East Germany, and Czechoslovakia are
slowly being sealed off. Large concentrations of Russian troops are now poised
along the border in Russia and East Germany. The Polish workers, having been
used as pawns, may soon lose everything; but those who have used them, the
Bolsheviks, may well get everything they want—revolution, strife, and blood-
shed. If that happens, my friends, it may be the last straw for the leaders in the
Kremlin.
Last month I reported that Russia had begun making feverish preparations to be
able to decimate New York City by means of geophysical warfare. I can now
report that these preparations also extend in more limited form northward into
New England.
There is a little known but major fault that runs along the east coast, partly off-
shore, partly on land, and Russian cobalt bombs for earthquake generation have
now been planted in eight (8) areas along this fault in the Northeast. These loca-
tions respectively are: south of Providence, Rhode Island; south of Norwich,
Connecticut; several near Hartford, Connecticut; near New Haven, Connecticut;
south of Springfield, Massachusetts; and near Northampton and New Bedford,
Massachusetts. But it is still New York City that is now subject to the greatest
devastation by far. The reason, as I explained last month, is that New York is
the headquarters city of the Bolsheviks here in America. Right now the Bolshe-
viks are trying to see to it that Russia has her hands full due to revolution in
Poland; but if that happens, the Bolsheviks here will also have their hands full.
They may well find themselves picking through the smoking rubble of that ru-
ined headquarters city because, my friends, at last report there are now 85
earthquake-producing cobalt bombs buried beneath the waters around New
York City.
Topic #2—For several months now I have been offering you my step by step
answers to the question, “What can I do?” I began doing this because more and
more of you were asking me to do it. You had started telling me that you were
no longer satisfied just to watch and listen as our crises multiply; instead the
time has come for action—now or never.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 56 last July I said that what we must do is to wage
PREVENTIVE war. Ours is a war of truth to head off nuclear war. Our strategy
is to take away the gold weapon which our enemies within are using against us;
and by revealing the truth about the theft of America’s gold supplies, the gold
322
Audio Letter 59
weapon will become our very own. This is the only way, my friends, we can
seize a weapon big enough to halt our betrayal into national suicide.
The first battle front in our preventive war is our campaign directed at Senator
William Proxmire, and we must continue what we have started along those
lines. But up to now Senator Proxmire has been conspicuous by his failure to
take meaningful action, so this month we are about to open up a second front in
our preventive war. It lies totally outside Proxmire’s control yet could also in-
crease the pressure for him to act. I will go into all that in Topic #3, but for now
I want to concentrate on our direct campaign with Senator Proxmire.
For more than two months now many of you have been showering Senator
Proxmire with letters. As I have suggested, you have demanded that he open up
a full, public investigation of America’s gold reserves. Ultimately there will
have to be a complete physical inventory of our gold, if there is any left. My
friends, in any campaign like this, every effort is always made to make you feel
isolated; but if you think you are alone in your concern about our missing gold,
think again. To give you an example of what I mean, I have an important letter
to read to you. It was written to Senator Proxmire early this month on October
2. The writer is a very astute businessman in Proxmire’s home state of Wiscon-
sin. What’s more, he’s a man who knows Proxmire socially; but wait until you
hear what he thinks about the situation. He sent a copy of his letter to my dear
friend Mr. Edward Durell. He gave permission to make it public if desired, and
Mr. Durell provided me with a copy. I will now read it to you:
“Dear Bill,
Mr. Edward Durell, a close friend of mine, has sent me a copy of his letter to
you of September 5, 1980. The crux of the letter asks that you demand an in-
ventory of the nation’s gold reserves. I have written to you on this subject
myself more than once. The reluctance of the Treasury Department to provide a
sensible answer to this basic and simple question appears to indicate that the
present real value of the Treasury’s gold reserve might represent the ultimate
‘Golden Fleece.’
The inventory practices which the Treasury is currently using would not be ac-
cepted by any public accounting firm nor by any corporate management I know
of. It is elementary that the nation know what its gold reserve is; and the fact
that no action is taken to take a physical inventory, as would be required by
generally accepted accounting standards, makes the United States Gold Reserve
an open question around the world. I have personally heard this question raised
323
by financial people in both London and Zurich, and of course many times in the
United States.
As Chairman of the Senate Banking Committee, this is certainly one of your

responsibilities. It seems strange that you do not take a determined action on
this question which is so much more important than the many other incidents of
waste which you have pursued with vigor.
Sincerely, “
and there follows the signature of the writer.
My friends, the letter I’ve just read to you represents the thinking of more and
more highly informed business and financial people, so don’t let anyone bluff
you into thinking otherwise.
Now let me return to your own letter-writing campaign. By now you should
have received at least one reply from Senator Proxmire. Some of you have re-
ceived two replies by now. The first wave of letters to Proxmire in August
produced a computerized form letter, which I quoted last month. Proxmire be-
gan sending that letter to people in late August. In the letter Proxmire passed
the buck to the Treasury itself.
Supposedly he asked the Treasury’s Inspector General for a report about a spe-
cific missing shipment of gold. This was the mystery shipment of January 20,
1965 from Fort Knox. It was a shipment worth more than a billion dollars—
1000 million dollars—at today’s prices; and it was admitted in writing five
years ago by Mrs. Mary Brooks, then Director of the United States Mint. Yet it
was listed nowhere on the official Treasury listing of shipments from Fort
Knox.
Now the time has come to ask a new question, my friends, and that is: “What-
ever happened to that promised report by the Treasury Inspector General?”
After all, you’ve been writing to Senator Proxmire since mid August. I hope
that you’ve been keeping a file of all your correspondence to and from Senator
Proxmire, because now it’s time to write your most important letter yet to Sena-
tor Proxmire; and if you can refer back to the date of your first letter, it will
increase the impact of this letter. If you have not been keeping a file as I urged
you to do, then just do the best you can on this letter; but please do start now to
keep a file in a folder or in a manila envelope. As time goes on, this will be-
come more and more important.
324
Audio Letter 59
By the way, if you have not written before but want to write this time, by all
means please do so. Make whatever changes you need to in the model letter I’m
about to suggest, to fit your own situation, and send your letter to:
Senator William Proxmire
Senate Office Bldg., Washington, D.C.
Now here’s what I suggest as a starting point for your newest letter to Senator
Proxmire:
“Dear Senator Proxmire,
For several months now I’ve been writing to you to urge that you open a full,
public investigation of America’s gold supplies. I first wrote you about this ur-
gent matter on (date so and so). In reply you promised as a first step to obtain a
report about one matter from the Treasury Inspector General. This matter was
the missing gold shipment on January 20, 1965 from Fort Knox.
I have also written you more recently on this over-all subject, but up to now
your replies continue to say that you have requested a report, not that you have
received one; so I now ask:
‘Have you received the report you said you requested from the Treasury Inspec-
tor General over two months ago? If so, then I request that I be furnished a copy
promptly. But if not, then why not after so long a time? If it takes over two
months for the Treasury to figure out what happened to a billion dollars worth
of gold, then something is very wrong. And something is also very wrong if
you are content to accept silence about so vital a matter.’
Once again, I urge you to open up a full, public investigation into the condition
of America’s gold supplies without further delay. And more and more of my
friends and neighbors are beginning to agree—that is the message of the addi-
tional signatures at the end of this letter.”
After signing your letter, then get everyone else you can to add their signature
below yours, just signatures of anyone who agrees that your question deserves
an answer. Even if only two or three friends will add their signatures below
yours, it will help. Every name counts. Use your influence. Before, Proxmire
was receiving letters; now he will begin to see petitions, petitions, and more
petitions. And, my friends, so will other certain very important people!
325
After you have collected all the signatures you can, please make a generous
supply of photo copies before mailing the original to Proxmire, because copies
of this latest letter to Senator Proxmire will be a weapon you can begin using
for other purposes, and we will use them right away as we open up the second
front in our Preventive War to SAVE AMERICA.
Topic #3—As you probably know, America’s currency is not issued by the
Treasury but by the “Federal Reserve System.” If you look at a dollar bill you
will see the words: “Federal Reserve Note.” In banking terms, a Note is an
I.O.U.—a promise to pay something; and it’s the Federal Reserve System, not
the United States Government itself, that issues these I.O.U.s which we use as
currency. They’re printed by the United States Government Mint for the Fed-
eral Reserve System for a small fee. In effect, the United States Mint, a branch
of the Treasury Department, serves as a mere print shop for the Federal Reserve
System.
Many people assume that the Federal Reserve System is a Government agency,
which IT IS NOT. It is purely a privately-owned Central Banking System!
What I’ve just said is essential to understand. It’s the key to our opening up the
Second Front in our Preventive War to Save America. So before I go on, I want
to say a few more words about the purely private nature of the so-called “Fed-
eral Reserve System.” I realize that for some of you what I will say will be
review. You’ve already studied the Federal Reserve System yourself and know
that it is a private corporation, but my mail indicates that many of my newer
listeners are not aware of this.
It’s not surprising that so many people believe the Federal Reserve System to
be a Government agency. From its very beginning in 1913, the Federal Reserve
has always presented a false governmental image. To begin with, its creation in
1913 required an act of Congress; but that was not because Congress was au-
thorizing a new Government agency. Instead, it was because Congress was
abdicating its CONSTITUTIONAL duty to create and issue the nation’s
money! In effect, Congress gave a Federal Corporate Charter to the new pri-
vately-owned Central Banking System. In turn, that system was given the name
“Federal Reserve System.”
There were many Americans in those days who were bitterly opposed to the
creation of a private Central Bank. They believed that the creation and control
of our money should be left in the hands of the Government—not a private cor-
poration. Others believed that private control of our money would not be so bad
if it were dispersed. What these critics opposed was concentrating our money
control in just one bank.
326
Audio Letter 59
To silence these critics, the architects of the new private Central Bank for
America did two (2) things. The first had to do with the Board of Directors of
the System as a whole, which they call a “Board of Governors” because it
sounds better. They agree to allow the Chairman of the Board to be a presiden-
tial appointee; and just for good measure, they agree to let the appointment be
subject to confirmation by Congress. The other maneuver by the Federal Re-
serve architects of 1913 was to abandon the idea of a single Central Bank.
Instead they created a system of 12 banks scattered across the United States.
That gave the image of a diffusion of control over America’s money; but actu-
ally that, too, was only for show purposes to silence the critics. All of the real
action in the Federal Reserve System takes place within the Federal Reserve
Bank of New York. The other 11 Regional banks just follow the lead of the
New York Bank. They have power but rarely use it, and so in effect the Federal
Reserve Bank of New York is the real Central Bank of the United States.
The governmental cloak that seems to surround the Federal Reserve System is
actually very thin, but it’s enough to mislead most people, because they do not
look close enough. For example, people often assume that the word “Federal” is
a sign that the Federal Reserve System is a government agency; but as Abraham
Lincoln once said in a famous court case: “A flower does not become a rose
just because I call it a rose.” And the Federal Reserve System is not a govern-
ment agency just because of its name. If you will look around you, you will see
many private companies that use the word “Federal” in their names. For exam-
ple, there is even an air freight company called “Federal Express,” but of course
Federal Express is not a government agency. It’s a private company, with pri-
vate stockholders.
The real criterion as to whether an entity is public or private is that of owner-

ship; and by that criterion the 12 Federal Reserve Banks are totally and
unmistakably private corporations. They issue stock like any other private cor-
poration; and, my friends, the United States Government does not own one
penny’s worth of Federal Reserve stock. Even the buildings which house the
Federal Reserve Banks and the land which they occupy are privately owned.
They pay local real estate taxes thereon. That is even true of the building here in
Washington where the Federal Reserve Board of Governors meet. Employees
are not governed by Civil Service rules like the Government employees. The
President of the United States rubber-stamps each new Federal Reserve Board
Chairman as if he were a public official; but the minute he is confirmed, the
Chairman of the Federal Reserve Board passes through private doors, and be-
hind those doors the private Federal Reserve System does exactly as it pleases,
issuing or withholding money and credit at will.
327
Federal Reserve stock is issued only to banks, which in turn are controlled by
other powerful private interests. Banks which own this stock are called “Mem-
ber Banks.” Your own bank may be a member. If it is, your bank has paid
money into the Federal Reserve in two forms. One form is ownership of Fed-
eral Reserve stock. This bears interest in the form of dividends of only 6%. But
also, your bank is required to turn over a certain percentage of its own deposits
to the Federal Reserve Bank in your district. Those deposits, called “Reserve
deposits,” bear no interest to your bank. Even so, Member Banks of the Federal
Reserve System do receive certain services and advantages from membership,
but they are also burdened and restricted in important ways. As a result, more
and more banks have been withdrawing as members of the Federal Reserve
System. Smaller banks especially have been pulling out for a breath of fresh air.
Like any monopoly threatened with competition, the Federal Reserve money
monopoly panicked. The “Fed” generally ignores Congress except when faced
with trouble.
When trouble does flare up, the “Fed” always runs to Congress for help. Most
of all, they count upon a favorable hearing from the Banking Committees of the
Senate and House; and the Wisconsin twins—Senator William Proxmire and
Congressman Henry Reuss—never fail to oblige. And so earlier this year, Con-
gress passed a new law to rescue the Federal Reserve—a sort of a Union shop
for banks. It requires even non-member banks to place interest-free deposits
with the Federal Reserve System. What is more, it creates a bureaucratic
nightmare for all small banks. As usual, the little guy is being squeezed out in
favor of big money. The alleged excuse for this new Act is that it’s needed to
promote financial soundness of our nation’s banking system.
The argument is very simple. Supposedly, the new law is to help guarantee the
safety of the underlying assets of your bank. Your bank is now forced to place a
fraction of its assets in the Regional Federal Reserve Bank. Your bank cannot
use those funds, and so we are told it cannot lose them.
But now, my friends, consider this. The Federal Reserve Banks are themselves
claiming to have assets they do not have—gold assets. So your bank stands to
lose everything that it deposits in the Federal Reserve Bank. And, of course, if
your bank loses everything, so do you! You have the option of either making or
not making deposits to your bank, but your banker no longer has any such op-
tion. He is forced to be a depositor to the Federal Reserve Bank in your region,
and the Federal Reserve Bank does not have part of the assets it claims to have;
because, my friends, the monetary gold hoard of the United States is not owned
by the United States Treasury. Instead, title to the gold has belonged to the Fed-
328
Audio Letter 59
eral Reserve System since 1934. The Treasury is only the custodian while the
Federal Reserve Banks are the title owners, and they are now owners of gold
that is long gone. They are claiming assets that do not exist.
Every Saturday the New York Times publishes the abbreviated, unaudited fi-
nancial statement of the Federal Reserve System. Almost all of the assets boil
down to nothing but paper, with one major exception. That is the item titled
“Gold Stock.” The current value listed is slightly over $11,000,000,000—that is
11,000 million dollars, but that is at the meaningless official price of gold, a
little over $40 per ounce. The real value at current market prices is closer to
$200,000,000,000. That is the Federal Reserve “Gold Stock” so called. It is by
far the biggest asset of the Federal Reserve Banks on paper. The quantity held
by each bank varies, but all 12 Regional Banks own portions of that Gold
Stock.
My friends, America’s monetary gold hoard is often referred to as the Treas-

ury’s gold, but that is not correct. The Federal Reserve Banks have title to the
gold through their Gold Stock. The Treasury only acts as a depository or custo-
dian for the gold. For example: The famous United States Bullion Depository at
Fort Knox is really just a giant safety deposit box. The owner of the gold is the
depositor, the Federal Reserve System.
For my listeners in business, financial and banking circles, I feel I should drive
this point home in one more way. You can see what I am saying if you will
simply compare the Balance Sheets of the Treasury and the Federal Reserve
System. First look at the Federal Reserve Balance Sheet. On the Asset side you
will see the Gold Stock item, formerly called “Gold Certificates.” To be con-
crete, for example, on October 22, 1980, the Gold Stock value was listed as
$11,165,000,000. Now look at the Treasury Balance Sheet for that day. You
will find the same figure, but on the Liability side. So the Federal Reserve is a
creditor with regard to the gold, and the Treasury is a debtor—that is, the Fed-
eral Reserve is the depositor of the gold while the Treasury is only the
custodian.
My friends, I realize that all this may be rather involved, but also it is vitally
important because the facts I have been discussing provide the basis for our
second avenue of action to try to SAVE AMERICA. I want to make these de-
tails available to you so that you can refer back to them from time to time; but
let me recap the basic points to remember:
First, and very important. The Federal Reserve System is a private Central
Banking System. It is not an agency of the United States Government.
329
Second: The owner of America’s monetary gold hoard since 1934 has been the
Federal Reserve System; and the gold, carried as “Gold Stock,” is by far the
largest asset claimed by the Federal Reserve Banks.
Third: The United States Treasury does not own this alleged monetary gold.
Instead, the Treasury acts only as a custodian for the Federal Reserve gold.
My friends, the soundness of America’s entire banking system is now tied di-
rectly to the Federal Reserve System, and the Federal Reserve is counting assets
that it does not have—gold assets. The gold has been spirited away from Fort
Knox and other Treasury Bullion depositories.
It is in your financial interest to make sure that your bank deposits are safe. It is
in the interest of your banker to make sure that his deposits with the “Fed” are
safe; and all other things being equal, it’s in the interest of the “Fed” to make
sure that its giant gold deposits with the Treasury are safe and sound.
So I am now ready to suggest what we can start doing through the banking sys-
tem itself. To begin with, please go to your bank to obtain some information.
The information you need concerns the Federal Reserve Bank which serves
your region. There are 12 Federal Reserve Banks located respectively in: New
York, Boston, Philadelphia, Richmond, Atlanta, Cleveland, Chicago, Minnea-
polis, St. Louis, Kansas City, Dallas, and San Francisco. Find out which one of
these is the one which banks in your Region deal with, and find out its address.
In addition, find out the name of the President of that Federal Reserve Bank and
the names of every one on the Board of Directors.
My friends, you will no doubt have to speak to a bank officer to obtain all this
information, and that’s good. Speak to the highest officer you can in your bank,
because when you ask for all those details about the Federal Reserve Bank in
your Region you’re likely to raise some eyebrows. Hardly anyone ever comes
in with a question like this. If he asks why you want the information, tell him
you intend to write some letters and will be glad to give him a copy. Make it
clear though that you are not writing the Federal Reserve to complain about
your own bank. You should have no difficulty in getting the address of your
Regional Federal Reserve Bank and the names of its President and Directors. In
the unlikely event, my friends, that you do encounter any resistance, just keep
in mind that you have a legal right to this information. As a depositor, you are a
creditor of your bank, which in turn is a creditor of the Federal Reserve Bank;
and both you and your bank have the right to seek assurances that your money
is safe.
330
Audio Letter 59
Once you have this information, what you should do next depends on where
you are. If your banking Region is served by any Federal Reserve Bank except
the NEW YORK Federal Reserve Bank, then it is time to write some more let-
ters. But the New York Federal Reserve Bank is a special case. If that is the one
which serves your Region, do not write any letters at this time. WRITE NO
LETTERS TO THE NEW YORK FEDERAL RESERVE BANK—just hold on
to the information you have obtained about its address and Directors.
Now here is what to do if your Region is served by any of the other eleven (11)
Federal Reserve Banks which I listed earlier. I urge you to write a letter to the
President of the Federal Reserve Bank and also to each of its Directors. I realize
this is a lot of work, my friends, but nothing less than our survival is at stake.
We cannot cut corners. Every letter should be typed or written separately in or-
der to have a personal impact, but it’s all right to use the same wording to the
President and each of the Directors.
To get you started, here’s the outline of what I suggest you write. As in the past,
feel free to modify the wording to fit your own concerns and your own way of
expressing things. That will help to personalize and vary the letters they will be
receiving. Other listeners, after all, will be writing to them too; but whatever
you do be sure to refer to Senator Proxmire, as you will hear in a moment. Ad-
dress each letter to:
President, or Director
Federal Reserve Bank (of whatever city) at the Federal Reserve Bank address.
“Dear (so and so):
I am writing to you because of my declining confidence in the banking system

of the United States. I am one of a growing number of people with similar con-
cerns. As a key official in the banking life of our nation, my hope is that you
will take action to help restore confidence before it is too late.
To illustrate my growing concerns, I’m enclosing a photo copy of a letter which

I sent recently to Senator William Proxmire. As Chairman of the Senate Bank-
ing Committee, Senator Proxmire should be able to reassure the public about
banking matters, but my correspondence with Senator Proxmire for several
months has had the opposite effect. Instead of reassuring me, Senator Prox-
mire’s replies to serious questions are alarming me; and as I discuss this with
all my friends and neighbors, they too are becoming more and more worried.
331
Since Senator Proxmire is only managing to reduce confidence in our banks by

his behavior, I believe that I should turn to you for help. If elected representa-
tives will not do their duty, perhaps responsible banking officials will.
My basic concern is one which I believe you, as a Federal Reserve official,

should share. I believe that the United States Treasury has been negligent or
even worse in acting as custodian of the Federal Reserve gold. Like many other
people, I am convinced that it is time for a physical inventory of the gold stocks
in Federal Depositories. There may be little or no gold left at all. If the Treasury
has defaulted on its obligation to protect the Federal Reserve gold, we are in
deep trouble indeed as a nation; and the Federal Reserve System is counting
assets listed as gold stocks which do not exist.
As a concerned citizen and bank depositor, I appeal to you for help. I respect-
fully urge you to use your authority to press for a physical inventory of the
Federal Reserve gold in Treasury vaults. There is no other way to stop the
spreading doubts about America’s entire banking system.”
(End of letter, followed of course by your signature.)
My friends, now you know why I suggested that you make a supply of good
photo copies of your next letter to Senator Proxmire. You will want to enclose a
photo copy of your Proxmire letter with each letter to a Federal Reserve Presi-
dent and Director. By doing this, my friends, we can accomplish two things at
once. For one thing, Federal Reserve System officials all across America may
become a little perturbed at Senator Proxmire. They will not be pleased to hear
that Proxmire is alarming you and others by his behavior. If even one Federal
Reserve official should write a note of displeasure to Proxmire, it will have its
impact.
But aside from Proxmire himself, we are beginning to open up a whole new
avenue of action through the banks. For one thing, action could take place
through the Federal Reserve System itself to inventory the gold because, as I
explained earlier, 11 of the 12 banks were originally intended for show, but
they do have power. The New York Federal Reserve Bank is now tightly con-
trolled by the Bolsheviks who want to destroy America, but the other 11 Banks
are another matter. Their Directors are indoctrinated basically to follow the lead
of New York. For the most part they are not given the inside track about the
most secret plans, and so they could decide to flex their muscles in ways con-
trary to the wishes of the New York Bank. Specifically, they could decide that a
gold inventory is a good idea, and they could help make it happen, my friends.
332
Audio Letter 59
At still another level, be sure to give your banker copies of your latest letter to
Proxmire and to the Regional Federal Reserve President and Directors; because
your banker, like you, has a tremendous stake in all of this. And even the
American Bankers Association should press the Federal Reserve System to
look into this question. They should demand that the 12 Regional Bank Presi-
dents raise this question with the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve
System here in Washington.
My friends, I realize that all this is hard to digest at one hearing, so I urge you
to listen to it over and over again if you need to until it all begins to sink in; be-
cause this is only the beginning of our battle on a powerful new Second Front,
and the key to it all is the private corporation known as the “Federal Reserve
System.”
Now it’s time to give you my last minute summary. In this AUDIO LETTER
I’ve tried to alert you to some of the latest battle fronts which are involved in
the secret war now raging. During this month of October 1980 there have been
all kinds of rumors that our hostages in Iran may soon be released. In Topic #1,
I reported to you how this came about, and why. It was set in motion partly for
reasons related to our national election four days from now. But even more im-
portantly, the release of our hostages right now is intended to be one step on the
path to nuclear war. The Russians know this and want to avoid becoming the
targets of a Bolshevik-triggered American first strike, and so Russian agents in
Iran are trying hard to stop the preparations for a release of our hostages at this
time. But even if this crisis should fizzle out, others are being set in motion to
take its place. One of these is already on the horizon in Poland. If full scale
revolution should erupt there, the Russians are prepared to retaliate by means of
geophysical warfare.
The true capital city of the Bolsheviks—New York City—may very well suffer
a massive earthquake. According to my last minute reports, other geophysical
warfare preparations are also continuing. In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I de-
scribed how Russian geophysical warfare techniques triggered the explosion of
Mount St. Helens last May. The final step in the process involved a squadron of
Cosmospheres firing their Charged Particle Beam weapons from overhead. And
as of October 26, squadrons of four (4) Cosmospheres each were on station
over several volcanic mountains of the Northwest. These are: Mount St. Helens,
Mount Adams, Glacier Peak, and Mount Rainier. There is also a single Cos-
mosphere, purely for observation, stationed high above Mount Hood.
My friends, the warring factions of the Bolsheviks, Big Oil, and the Russians
are bringing us closer and closer to open all-out war. They are attacking and
333
counterattacking on many fronts; and if you want to stop our downward slide
into catastrophe, we too must take action on many fronts.
The TRUTH is a powerful weapon, and we must use it in every way we can.
Month by month I am trying to bring avenues for action to your attention; and
because more and more of you are taking action, I believe there is a glimmer of
hope for America. Last month, for example, many of you did succeed in getting
LETTERS TO THE EDITOR published. Even the Washington Star published
one of them and gave it the headline “WHERE IS OUR GOLD?”
What we are trying to do together, my friends, can be learned in only one way
and that is by doing it. I know it is not easy, but so far I believe you are doing a
magnificent job, and I thank you.
334
Audio Letter 60
November 30, 1980
Four days ago the New York Daily News published an interesting article about
a coming motion picture. It’s called “The Formula,” and deals with an interna-
tional oil conspiracy. And even before seeing the picture, Mobil Oil is reported
to be acting very nervous. Supposedly, Mobil is threatening to sue the movie
maker, MGM, if Mobil is mentioned in any way. Somehow the whole situation
seems to symbolize our situation today. The movie is about oil companies hid-
ing the truth, and at least one real life oil company would apparently like to
hide the movie.
“Big Oil” always operates behind a wall of secrecy, deception, and stealth; and
in the election just passed, Big Oil has succeeded for the moment in its grab for
the White House. And so a temporary change of style is brewing in American
politics. The Bolsheviks who have been in power favor active propaganda to
mislead us. By contrast, Big Oil generally prefers to tell us nothing at all. So, as
the so-called Reagan Administration takes over, we will tend to have a “Say
nothing” government for a while. But whether our government is controlled
behind the scenes by Big Oil or by the Bolsheviks, you and I lose because they
all operate “in the dark” where they cannot be watched. We are living in an age
of stealth, and it is leading toward disaster for us all.
Topic #1—THE GREAT ELECTION SURPRISE OF 1980
Topic #2—THE PLANNED COLLAPSE OF AMERICA’S BANKING

SYSTEM
Topic #3—THE NEW AGE OF WARFARE BY STEALTH.
Topic #1—For weeks now Washington has been buzzing about the great elec-
tion surprise of 1980. Right up to the last minute all the Opinion Polls were
saying the same thing—“Too close to call.” But when the television networks
began their election night coverage, they told a radically different story. Fifteen
335
minutes after the polls closed on the East Coast, NBC declared the entity
Ronald Reagan the winner. On the West Coast, polls were still open but voters
began drifting away. Even more shocking, the alleged President Carter himself
conceded defeat less than two hours later. West Coast polls still had an hour to
go at that point, but many remaining voters just gave up. By then, it was fast
becoming clear that voting machines nation-wide had registered a landslide in
the name of Ronald Reagan. It was an unprecedented state of affairs. The Re-
publican landslide apparently was enormous, and yet we are told it was a
complete surprise. On all sides, political analysts are still rubbing their eyes in
disbelief. They’re trying out all kinds of excuses to explain why the polls were
wrong. “Maybe the pocketbook issue did it,” they say; or “Maybe all those un-
decided voters before the election were really closet Conservatives”; or then
again, “Maybe it was just a plain old protest vote”; or, “Would you believe it
was Billy Carter maybe?”
My friends, last month I reported that there was one issue that could help defeat
the present Bolshevik Administration. That was the breakdown of the hostage
release ploy just before the election, and it may be that many voters were af-
fected in that way that I mentioned last month. But the apparently surprise
landslide was brought about by entirely different means.
My friends, it was not the Opinion Polls that were wrong this time. It was the
tally of votes on Election Day. To bring home what I am about to tell you, I
would like to tell you a personal story. It’s a story of my own race for the gov-
ernorship of my home state of West Virginia 12 years ago.
The idea that I run for Governor came from a political leader in West Virginia. I
was then in my sixth year as Legal Counsel to the United States Export-Import
Bank here in Washington. I had been appointed to that position in 1961 by
President Kennedy, and apparently there were those who remembered my ef-
forts in helping Kennedy win in West Virginia in 1960. In any case, I decided
to accept the suggestion. On May 1, 1967, I resigned from the Export-Import
Bank and returned to my native State of West Virginia. For the next year I car-
ried out an exhausting grass-roots campaign throughout the state. My wife Lilly
and I went everywhere and spoke to everyone, or so it seemed. There was not a
county we missed and there was hardly a hand that I had not pressed, and from
every indication my campaign was going very well. Then one night two weeks
before the election, the telephone rang. When I picked up the telephone, a voice
said, “This is (so and so).” I asked what I could do for him, and he replied:
“Well, you’d like to have your votes counted, wouldn’t you?” Still half asleep I
said, “Of course. What are you talking about?” His answer was: “Well, you
know politics is a business. You’d like to have your votes counted, wouldn’t
336
Audio Letter 60
you?” By that time I was wide awake. I replied that there were plenty of county
officials and precinct workers to take care of the vote counting. Then I asked
him what he was driving at. He said, “Well, in those precincts which have ma-
chines you have to make sure your votes are counted. Don’t you understand?
This is just how it’s done. If you want your votes counted, it’ll cost you
$250,000.” I was flabbergasted and said I would not pay a cent;
I didn’t do things like that. At that point the caller said, “Well, it looks like we
can’t do any business then,” and hung up. After putting the telephone down I
just sat there astonished. My wife Lilly said, “What was that?” and I told her:
“We just lost the election.”
My friends, in the counties and precincts where old-fashioned paper ballots

were used, I did receive votes; but without exception in every location where
voting machines were used, I received no votes. Not one single vote!
That seemed incredible to me at the time, but I had no evidence—nothing but a

telephone call which I could not prove. Then about two weeks after the election
I received a phone call from a Baptist minister. He was asking to meet me be-
cause something important had come to his attention, so the next day I met the
minister in a town near Beckley, West Virginia. He had another man with him.
The good minister told me that the man with him had asked him (the minister)
to forgive him for something he had done to me. The minister had replied that it
was not up to him to forgive the man, but up to Mr. Beter. So I asked the minis-
ter’s friend what it was that he had done to me, and he said: “Mr. Beter, I fixed
the voting machines against you.” Then he blurted out the whole thing.
He said that he was known as a repair man for these machines, but he explained
that when he went to the factory school in another state, he was also taught
other things. He was taught how to adjust the machinery to record whatever is
wanted. For example, voters who pulled the lever for me thought that they were
voting for me; but inside the machine, the machine was adjusted to transfer the
vote to another pre-selected candidate. I could hardly believe my ears. Over a
year of grass-rooting the state down the drain!! And all because of a specialized
slot machine known as a Voting Machine. I asked him why he did such a thing.
He answered, “For the money, Mr. Beter. I really need the money.” Then he
added that he was not the only one, that there were others all over the country
doing the same thing. Then he broke down and cried. He said he wanted me to
know and to decide if I wanted to forgive him. Really I felt no revenge, only
sorrow for him; and I knew what poverty could do to a person. By this time all
three of us were in tears. I placed my hand on his shoulder and said that I did
forgive him.
337
Later I went to the Frauds section of the United States Department of Justice
here in Washington. They told me that a Governor’s race was merely a local
matter so the federal government could not investigate. I also looked into other
avenues for possible redress, through the courts; but throughout the United
States there have been many cases taken to court over election rigging, and in
the end the courts always do nothing. So ended my governorship race in West
Virginia in 1968.
I learned the hard way that politics has become a “business.” In every presiden-
tial election since voting machines have been used, there have been charges of
voting fraud in certain states. Sometimes more votes are counted than there are
registered voters. There are people nicknamed “The Lever Brothers” in West
Virginia who go around and pull the levers before the actual voting begins.
There are others who tamper with the machines in their warehouses before they
are delivered to the polling places, and there are corrupt officials who know all
these things but keep their mouth shut for fear or for money.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 1 I reviewed some of the background of voting ma-

chines. My friends, this is very important. Voting machines are not regulated in
any way. They were developed from slot machines, and they were controlled at
first by organized crime. But then long ago, they were absorbed into the hands
of the Rockefeller Cartel, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 1. And in the
secret struggle over the election, which I reported last month, voting machines
were the decisive secret weapon. For the moment they have carried the day for
the Rockefeller Oil Cartel.
As the voting began on November 4, 1980, the entity President Carter was in
Plains, Georgia to vote. Reporters on the scene said later that he almost broke
down and cried as he spoke to townspeople, because the outcome was already
known before the voting began. That is also the reason for the unprecedented
concession an hour before West Coast polls closed. Word had reached the
White House only the day before about what was going to happen. There was
massive “fixing” of voting machines in nine states—New York, New Jersey,
Pennsylvania, Florida, Ohio, Illinois, Michigan, Texas, and California. The ma-
chines were also “fixed” but on a less complete scale in Indiana and Missouri.
In addition, there was selective “fixing” of machines in key districts of more
than 20 other states. It was all over before it started.
The Opinion Polls beforehand were actually far more accurate than the voting
tallies on Election Day. Opinion Polls can be “fixed” too, but in this case they
were not. All the Polls found a general apathy about the candidates, dissatisfac-
338
Audio Letter 60
tion with all of them; and that apathy was reflected by the low turn-out on Elec-
tion Day. In spite of good weather nation-wide, the turn-out was the lowest in
30 years. That spells apathy, my friends, and apathy does not create landslides.
Instead, apathy about candidates leads to a “flip the coin” attitude: Heads, it is
candidate “A”; Tails, it’s candidate “B.” Both candidates, or in this case both
major candidates, just about split the vote; so apathy leads to a very close race,
just as the Polls predicted; but thanks to fixable voting machines, a landslide
was created out of thin air. Last month I reported some of the factors pointing
to a last minute election surprise. As I explained then, it’s a mild setback for the
Bolsheviks here. Right now Big Oil is preparing to run the country with a free
hand. The figurehead called Reagan is being programmed to behave like a new
Eisenhower, delegating everything to agents of Big Oil. But the Bolsheviks
here are working fast. They’re in a hurry to seize control of the so-called
Reagan Team themselves. Once that happens, the so-called Reagan era may end
abruptly. The Reagan image is tailored to fit the Corporate Socialist plans of
Big Oil, so the Bolsheviks will prefer a new face, a new figurehead to program
their own way; and so some day sooner than you think we Americans may be in
for a shock. We will be told that the entity President Reagan has met with an
unfortunate accident, or a sudden fatal illness. Then we will be seeing a new
face, saying new things. The face will seem to be that of George Bush speaking
from Washington, but his words will come straight from Bolshevik headquar-
ters in New York City—and that, my friends, will be the last and greatest
surprise in the stolen election of 1980.
Topic #2—Last month I gave you suggestions for an awful lot to do. I offered
you not one, but two major steps in our ACTION plan to SAVE AMERICA.
“Action Step #4,” you will recall, involves another letter to Senator William
Proxmire, and it’s the most important so far in spite of the election results be-
cause this Proxmire letter is an important weapon as we open up the Second
Front in our battle. In “Action Step #5” I outlined how we can do this. We’re
going to the very heart of America’s banking system, the privately-owned
FEDERAL RESERVE SYSTEM.
This month, my friends, I want to give you a breather. It’s vitally important that
you follow through on the things I suggested last month, so I want to make sure
that you have enough time to do all those things. The letters which I have urged
you to write to the Federal Reserve System are more important than you can
imagine, so in spite of the holidays, I ask you: “Please, write those letters as
soon as possible.” Nothing less than our survival as a nation is at stake.
Let me mention one footnote to my suggestions of last month. If you should

have any trouble getting the names of the Federal Reserve officials from your
339
bank, don’t give up. You can call the Federal Reserve Bank in your region and
ask for the Library. Ask the Librarian for the names of the President, the offi-
cers, and all the Directors. Several listeners have already done this and got the
names without any difficulty. Beyond this I would make no new suggestions for
what you can do this month, but I do want to take a few moments to remind you
where we are heading IF we do not act.
We are once again watching interest rates explode like bombs on the American
economy, and on all sides we’re hearing about the disastrous effects which are
coming in automobiles, construction, and business in general. Already it ap-
pears that Chrysler might go under; and when financial analysts mention this,
they say in the same breath a forbidden word—DEPRESSION. But, my friends,
interest rates are not the only way in which America’s major banks are leading
us into a depression with inflation.
America’s banking system itself is becoming shakier by the day. The seeds of
trouble have been there for many years now. They are all related to the grand
design to destroy our money and our economy. It’s the same grand design
which involved the theft of America’s monetary gold supply, but the process
began speeding up nearly two years ago in early 1979. That was when the Bol-
sheviks here staged their hidden coup d’etat against the Rockefellers. In
AUDIO LETTER No. 44 for March 1979, I gave my listeners an early warning
about this process. I explained how the stage was being set for a collapse of
America’s entire banking system, and I revealed that the failure of the giant
Chase Manhattan Bank may well trigger it all. For various reasons many people
considered my warning about the banks just too incredible to believe at that
time. But just like the coming nuclear war, the coming bank collapse is now
coming closer to the surface; and as it does so, danger signals are inevitably
showing up here and there.
For example, Fortune magazine recently said, and I quote:
“There can be no doubt that banking is entering a period of crisis. In one way or
another the industry’s troubles could lead to the passing of many banks, perhaps
including some of the biggest and most prestigious.” And four months ago, at
the end of July 1980, the Christian Science Monitor carried two “Page 1” re-
ports about the situation. They focused attention on the disastrous new Act
which I told you about last month, the so-called “Monetary Control Act of
1980.” It pointed out that the Act has drastically reduced the ratio of insurance
reserves to savings. There is now only about a penny to back up every dollar
you have in a bank or Savings & Loan savings account. The collapse of just a
few large banks could wipe out the whole Savings Insurance system; and if that
340
Audio Letter 60
happens, my friends, collapsing confidence will bring down America’s entire

banking system. The second special article in the Monitor contained a hint at
something even more basic. It said, quote: “The sleeper monetary provisions of
the Act continue to nag at gold and precious metals-oriented Conservatives.
They see the danger that the ‘Fed’ and Administration facing a possible bank
crash at some point might throw the doors open to hyper inflation of the United
States economy.”
My friends, those are exactly the stakes I was warning you about last month.
There is no gold to back up the Federal Reserve I.O.U.s which we use as
money. The Federal Reserve System is claiming assets which do not exist.
Those who have conspired to destroy our money have planned all along to
bring on a bank crash. They want the banks to collapse when the time is ripe,
but they don’t want you to know what is happening. They dare not let you
know the truth about our missing gold, and so certain key Treasury and Federal
Reserve officials are meeting right now to plan a counterattack against our
“Preventive War of Truth.” As always, their plan is to use the big lie; and as
you know, they were liars from the beginning, and they are liars now. It is a lie,
my friends, that the Treasury today holds 270,000,000 ounces of Federal Re-
serve gold in its vaults. That’s what Treasury and Federal Reserve books show,
but those books are a complete fraud, a lie; and more and more people are hav-
ing doubts about it. But there’s an old psychological trick that is about to be
used on us all. That trick is: If people start to suspect a lie, make the lie even
bigger. Most people are taken completely off guard by this technique. If a lie
becomes big enough, people think it has to be the truth. No one, we think,
would have enough nerve to tell a lie that big.
So here is the trick that is now being planned. Right now our gold reserves are
officially valued at the old official price of $42.22 per ounce. That’s the price
reflected in the gold stock listings by the Treasury and Federal Reserve balance
sheets which I discussed last month. But watch for the nonexistent gold re-
serves to be revalued at current market prices. In terms of dollars, our fictitious
gold reserves will suddenly look 15 or 20 times bigger. The plan is also to capi-
talize on talk in Congress about returning to the Gold Standard. First, the
controlled major media will publicize talk about the Gold Standard idea; then
will come the spectacular gold re-valuation publicity stunt. Finally, any return
to a true Gold Standard will quietly be squashed, because we don’t really have
all that gold. Instead, they are trying to devise some trick which will require
only a token amount of gold. What that will be has not yet been decided, but the
net result will be powerful propaganda to impress people to believe the big lie
about America’s alleged giant gold hoard.
341
My friends, many people would rather put their head in the sand about our
missing gold. They would rather not know the awful truth. That is exactly why
the big lie will work with so many people. But that is like having cancer and not
wanting to be told about it, because the United States dollar has terminal cancer
and it will die soon if the truth about our missing gold remains hidden.
Sometimes my enemies argue that the truth about our missing gold should not
be revealed. According to their argument, exposure of the truth about our miss-
ing gold will itself bring down our economy; but, my friends, that argument
says that a lie is better than the truth. And it is wrong, dead wrong; and here’s
why: If the scandal of America’s missing gold breaks into the open, it can well
set the stage for international action to prevent disaster. There could be an im-
mediate international monetary conference to resolve the crisis. The hidden
power of the Bolsheviks here who are bent on disaster would be broken by the
gold scandal; so the conference could put an end to the disastrous system of
floating currencies now in effect. Instead, they could establish a new system of
fixed yet flexible rates of exchange which would be stable. At the same time,
the conference should fix interest rates on an international basis. That would
tend to stop the world-wide interest rate war now going on to attract hot money
from one country to another.
With the pressure off interest rates, inflation could be controlled and industry
could revive. Inflation is international in scope; and because the gold scandal
here is international in scope, it could be investigated on an international basis.
There would be a real chance of tracking down our gold and tracking down the
people who have done this to us.
Meanwhile there could be a kind of Marshall Plan in reverse to save the United
States dollar. To tide us over the crisis, foreign Central Banks could lend us
some gold for international transactions. “Why should they bother to do that?”
you ask. Very simple. Our trading partners have hundreds of billions of dollars
in their hands. If the dollar goes, so do their own economies. So it is in their
own self interest to take international action to save the dollar.
But, my friends, all that can happen only—and I repeat only—if the gold scan-
dal breaks before the coming bank crash, because that is the only way to set our
monetary affairs free of the grasp of the Bolsheviks here. If they can keep the
gold scandal under cover for just a little longer, they will get their way. They
will win; and, my friends, you and I will lose everything.
Topic #3—Several months ago there were big headlines about a supposed new
American secret weapon. It’s called the “Stealthplane.” The weapon which is
342
Audio Letter 60
actually involved is a specialized hybrid machine called a “Subcraft.” It’s the

same weapon that I made public two years earlier in AUDIO LETTER No. 37;
and early this year, January 1980, the Bolsheviks here tried to use it against
Russia. The result was a disaster, as I reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 53
and 54. So now the spectacular sounding Stealthplane has become just a public-
ity tool to make nuclear war sound less suicidal.
To judge by all the recent publicity, one would think that stealth is a radical
new concept in warfare; but stealth, trickery, deception, and surprise have been
the prime ingredients in military strategy since ancient times. And today, my
friends, we live in an age of stealth—stealth in politics, stealth in economics,
and above all stealth in weaponry in warfare. During the past six years or so I
have made public many secret developments in weapons and warfare. I re-
vealed the secrets of both Russia and the United States because I believe you
need to know, and knowledge is power.
A secret war is raging right now, and already you and I are suffering the conse-
quences; and if it is not stopped, it will soon explode into all-out thermonuclear
war. There’s only one way to stop the deadly cycle of war now under way. That
way is to put an end to stealth and trickery, and replace it with the TRUTH—
the truth about America’s gold scandal, the truth about stealing of elections
with unregulated voting machines, and the truth about a whole new age of se-
cret weapons which are unknown to the public. The new age of stealth in
warfare is everywhere today. It makes up a complete spectrum from deep be-
neath the sea to outer space.
To begin with, consider Submarines. From the very beginning submarines have
always been weapons of stealth. Their outstanding advantage has always been
their ability to escape detection. The modern age of nuclear submarines was
inaugurated by the United States in 1954; and it was America that conceived a
ballistic missile submarine, first launched in 1959. Today our leaders still reas-
sure us that American submarines remain second to none. They have to admit
that Russia has several times more “subs” than we do, but they gloss over that
with stories that Russian subs are noisy, or leaky, or their crews are not very
smart. So, in effect, they tell us, “Don’t worry. We can handle a submarine war
with Russia.” There was a time when quality was in our favor, but that time is
long gone. Today the United States is losing badly in the secret war to control
the world’s oceans.
New generations of Russian submarines are entering a new era of their own.
For example, there are the new Oscar Class Cruise Missile Submarines. These
can launch Cruise Missiles to attack our Aircraft Carriers and other surface
343
ships. They can do this while still submerged, far beyond the horizon. And
there are the new Alpha Class Attack Submarines which are without parallel in
the world. Submariners always say that a submarine’s worst enemy is another
submarine, and Russia’s new Alpha Subs are the worst enemy yet to our subs.
Unlike the United States, Russia has mastered the use of titanium for submarine
construction. And unlike America, Russia has big supplies of titanium for use
in all kinds of new technologies—and Russia no longer sells titanium to the
United States. So the new Alpha Subs have double hulls of titanium, and they
are now the deepest diving, fastest operational submarines on earth. It’s speed
has been estimated in the West at 45 knots; but, my friends, it is actually well
over 60 knots! In most situations it can actually outrun America’s best torpedo,
the Mark 48; and it can dive almost a mile deep to escape attack and slip away
under complex ocean currents.
But the biggest shock so far in Russia’s submarine program took place earlier
this fall of 1980. It’s a submarine launched from a shipyard near Archangel on
the White Sea. When Western Intelligence officials got their first look at it they
could hardly believe their eyes. Traditionally submarines have been known as
boats rather than ships because of their relative smallness, but not this subma-
rine. It’s a giant, a ballistic missile submarine about the size of an American
World War II Aircraft Carrier. Western Intelligence officials are mystified as to
why it is so large, but I can reveal the reason to you right now. The giant new
Russian submarine, code named “Typhoon,” is another “first.” It’s the world’s
first ballistic missile submarine with a re-load capability. It can empty all 20 of
its ballistic missile tubes at a target in war, then it can re-load the tubes with 20
more missiles carried aboard. So, if need be, Russia’s Typhoon Sub can mount
two nuclear attacks. Like the Alpha Subs, Russia’s awesome new Typhoon has
a titanium hull. It’s not as fast as the sleek Alpha Sub but very fast even so, and
it can dive extremely deep.
Meanwhile, what does the United States have to answer all that? The answer is
America’s new Trident Missile Sub. It carries 24 missiles, compared to the Ty-
phoon’s 40. It’s slower and cannot dive nearly as deep with its non-titanium
hull, and it’s also three years behind schedule and still slipping—and there are
several reasons for that, some of which have been mentioned in the news lately.
But one major reason for our crumbling Trident Submarine program is not in
the news—it’s the widespread use of narcotics among Trident shipyard work-
ers! Many workers are not involved, but many are; and as a result, there is a
tremendous turnover in personnel. Another result is defective welds and mis-
takes in critical piping. When the mistakes are found they have to be done over,
sometimes more than once. And, my friends, absolutely nothing is being done
about it.
344
Audio Letter 60
The other side of the coin in undersea warfare is Anti-Submarine Warfare, or

ASW. Lately we have heard brave stories that there have recently been ASW
breakthroughs by the United States. These are based on extremely complex
computerized sonar-listening networks; but as I first revealed some time ago,
all new Russian submarines produce artificial noises in normal operation.
That’s why the new Alpha Subs are thought to be so noisy—the noise is delib-
erate. When war comes, the noise-makers called “Cavitators” will be retracted.
The American sonar nets will listen in vain for the familiar noises. Instead, Al-
pha Subs and others will swim at high speed toward America whisper quiet;
and as they do so, the Russian subs will strike as submarines always strike, by
stealth.
The true condition of America’s Antisubmarine Warfare was summed up in the

New York Times last month on October 5. A senior American naval officer
was quoted as saying: “To find a submarine you need to know where to look.
Otherwise you’ll have to use a large share of your antisubmarine resources just
to find and kill one submarine, and in wartime that is not practical. You’re bet-
ter off waiting for him to attack.” He explained that then we could more easily
detect the sub; but he added that a ballistic missile sub could fire its missiles
before being caught, quote: “so it probably doesn’t matter.”
My friends, it would still be a standoff in submarines if Russia had the same

problem we do in finding subs; but they don’t. Five years ago in 1975 the head
of the Russian Navy announced a breakthrough in ASW, and it was not a bluff.
He was talking about Psychoenergetic Range Finding, or PRF. I first reported
on Russia’s PRF in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. It was the key to Russia’s de-
struction of American Subcraft early this year, and Russian manned space
satellites use PRF to keep track continuously on all United States submarines.
When war comes, the positions of our own submarines will be relayed to Rus-
sian Attack Submarines. This will be done by means of the world-wide
Submarine Communication System, which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No.
16. Russian Attack Submarines, including the new Alphas, will be vectored in
toward our own Ballistic Missile Subs. Our own subs, older and slower, will be
caught by surprise and unable to escape. And without warning, Russian nuclear
torpedoes will destroy our Ballistic Missile Submarines.
When I mentioned Russia’s world-wide Submarine Communication System in

AUDIO LETTER No. 16, a crisis was under way. It was the Underwater Mis-
sile Crisis of 1976. At that time the Russian Navy was planting underwater
missiles within our own territorial waters, and they were using submarines to do
it. The missiles involved were small, short-range missiles with nuclear war-
345
heads. Once planted, these missiles can be launched from their own underwater
resting places by satellite command, and they were planted very close to their
coastal targets. The result would be zero warning time for an underwater mis-
sile attack. The missiles were planted in bays and coves along America’s
shoreline by a special type of submarine. This was the Missile-planting Mini-
Sub which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 16. I mentioned in that tape
that, quote: “These special submarines are very difficult for our undersea sonar
detection nets to pick up because the hull is treated in such a way that it absorbs
sonar signals instead of reflecting them.”
Four years later we hear an echo of this concept in the so-called Stealthplane.
For aircraft, the treatment is to absorb radar instead of sonar, but otherwise it’s
the same idea. Russia was planting underwater missiles along our shores by
stealth, and our own leaders were responding with equal secrecy instead of
warning you. When I made these things public over four years ago, certain
newsletter writers and others went into a frenzy. For whatever reason they did
their best to tell their readers not to listen about the missiles. They tried to say
that waterproof missiles lurking under water are impossible. Likewise they
pooh-poohed the very idea of sonar-absorbing submarines.
But today we are four years closer to NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and the closer
catastrophe looms over us, the more it casts its shadow. The New York Times
article of last month which I mentioned earlier is a good example. It mentioned,
quote: “Soviet subs are usually coated with a material that absorbs sonar im-
pulses.” And as for the underwater missiles, listen to some words from a recent
letter “To the Editor.” It was published on September 25, 1980 in the Washing-
ton Star. The writer is Captain John E. Draim, formerly program manager of the
Navy’s project “Hydra.” He says, quote: “We can easily waterproof missiles
such as MX, and launch them from a vertical floating position. The United
States Navy’s project Hydra demonstrated this launch technique with test mis-
siles of ICBM size in the early 1960’s.” And a further quote: “A Hydra-type
missile can also be floated up from a submerged submarine to the surface and
launched from there, the technique used for Soviet SLBMs.”
In light of these words recently published, what I first reported in the summer
of 1976 becomes almost routine. The things I reported then were well known to
be feasible in Intelligence circles; but out of the sheer ignorance, if nothing else,
certain Newsletters and organizations wanted people to ignore my warnings.
Fortunately large numbers of my listeners did not ignore those warnings. They
applied heavy pressure to the Joint Chiefs of Staff as I suggested, and action
was taken for a while to defuse the crisis.
346
Audio Letter 60
In the letter “To the Editor” I just quoted by Captain Draim, the reference to
ICBM-size missiles is interesting, because a few months after I reported on
Russia’s underwater missiles, I learned about our own.
America’s underwater missiles are radically different from those of Russia. I

first revealed them in AUDIO LETTER No. 20 for January 1977. Unlike the
Russian missiles which are small, America’s underwater missiles are huge.
They are giant waterproofed ICBMs deployed on the ocean floor, but they share
one thing in common with those of Russia. America’s secret fleet of underwater
missiles were deployed by stealth. It was done in a supersecret operation known
as “Operation Desk Top,” and in the spring of 1978 Operation Desk Top was
reactivated off America’s east coast. America’s secret government told you
nothing about these hush-hush preparations for war; instead, they said they
were drilling for oil! The Baltimore Canyon area of the Continental Shelf was
publicized as if it were an underwater Alaska, full of oil. But before the alleged
oil drilling even began, I told my listeners not to expect any oil bonanza be-
cause they were planting missiles, not searching for oil. And sure enough, after
the missiles were planted, we were told it was all a big flop—no oil of impor-
tance had been found.
These are some of the things going on under the seas of the world; but if we
look up instead of down, the pace of stealth warfare is no less frantic. For ex-
ample, we’ve heard recently about the so-called stealth technique for evading
radar. America’s Cruise Missile is actually a stealth weapon intended to sneak
into Russia underneath radar. But ever since radar was invented by the British
in World War II, counter measures against it have been of interest. It started
with the dropping of metallic chaff into the air by attacking bombers. That
blinded the crude radar of those days. Then the radars were improved to see
through the chaff, so next came Electronic Countermeasures, or ECM. ECM
gadgets create radar waves of their own in such a way as to cancel out radar re-
flections off the plane. Using ECM, a 10-foot missile can be made to look like a
small bird on radar, and that was accomplished long ago by the mid 60’s. Now
we are suddenly hearing about radar-absorbent coatings and rounded surfaces.
Rounded surfaces tend to diffuse radar waves instead of bouncing them back to
the radar antenna. That makes an aircraft hard to detect until it gets very close.
My friends, those techniques can be applied to some extent to airplanes, but

they are made to order for another type of machine in the air above us. Rounded
surfaces diffuse radar, and the ultimate in a rounded surface is a sphere. As a
result, Russia’s electrogravitic weapons platforms, the Cosmospheres, are natu-
ral stealth weapons. I first revealed Russia’s deployment of Cosmospheres in
late 1977 in AUDIO LETTER No. 29. The first few were used in an attempt at
347
intimidation by Russia. They created giant rumbling air booms along our east
coast and elsewhere; but later as more Cosmospheres were deployed, they
shifted to a stealth-mode of operation.
Normally, Cosmospheres on patrol overhead hover at an altitude of around 100

miles. At that height they are invisible to all normal radar, but on several occa-
sions the Russians have wanted the Cosmospheres to show up on American
radar. It’s one way to send a message in a crisis; and so in tense conditions, the
Cosmospheres are sometimes ordered to descend to low altitudes. Low, for a
Cosmosphere, usually means from 5 to 7 miles up. As they descend, they come
closer and closer to ground-based radar. As a result, they gradually become
visible on radar as they near the ground. If the Cosmospheres are ordered to de-
scend rapidly, the effect on radar is very dramatic. One minute our radar shows
nothing; the next minute, blips appear all over the screen. The Cosmosphere
blips seem to materialize out of nowhere. I first reported low-altitude threats by
Cosmospheres as long ago as AUDIO LETTERS 30 and 32, and they have
happened again several times since then.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 46 I also reported that Russia has a smaller fleet of
second generation Cosmospheres. These can hover like all Cosmospheres, but
their greatest advantage is speed. They are stripped of weapons and operate as
high-speed transports just above the atmosphere. If need be, they can accelerate
all the way to orbital speed; and operating far above the earth as they do, they
are invisible to radar.
At least twice in the past year the Russians have made use of their high-speed
Cosmospheres for satellite snatching. The first occasion was almost a year ago,
on December 11, 1979. It was an American satellite called “Satcom 3” made by
RCA. It had been in orbit for five days without trouble, but suddenly it just dis-
appeared from radar screens and stopped communicating. That was the last we
ever heard from Satcom 3. A Russian high-speed Cosmosphere had cruised up
and matched orbits with it. Then the Cosmosphere cargo bay was opened and
Satcom 3 was pulled inside. When the door was closed, it cut off the signal of
Satcom 3; and as it was gobbled up by the radar-invisible Cosmosphere, Sat-
com 3 seemed to disappear. Last May 9, 1980, it happened again. That time it
was a Japanese satellite, called Agami 2. Like Satcom 3, it just seemed to dis-
appear without a trace. Russia was sending a message to Japan not to play too
cozy with America’s secret war build-up.
When it comes to stealth in space, the Russians are old hands. About three
months ago, on September 1, 1980, a fascinating letter was printed in the
Cleveland Plain Dealer. It was written by A. L. Jones, the director of the Sohio
348
Audio Letter 60
Radio Satellite Tracking Station from 1958 to 1964. He said, quote: “The tech-
nology for making aircraft invisible to radar detection is neither new nor is it
proprietary with the United States Military. In mid summer of 1962, the Soviet
Union made a public announcement that it was launching a Cosmos Earth-
orbiting Satellite which would be invisible to radar detection. The satellite was
successfully launched, and it carried on board a radio transmitter which could
be used to confirm that it was in orbit.” He mentions that NORAD requested
radio-tracking data from the Sohio Station; and continues, quote: “Normally
radio tracking data is not needed by NORAD unless radar and optical methods
prove ineffective. Apparently this was the case. After approximately two
months, the radio transmitter in the satellite ceased to operate, and the space
vehicle became invisible to all methods of tracking.”
My friends, for more than three years now, Russia has controlled the military
use of space. Russia now has many satellites, including manned satellites which
are not even being tracked in the West. For this and other reasons, America’s
military plight has become untenable, and yet the Bolsheviks here are still bent
on nuclear war against Russia! They believe they will survive, as I explained in
AUDIO LETTERS 56 and 57, but they don’t care how many of the rest of us
suffer and die. One way or another they are determined to set off an American
nuclear first strike against Russia.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 last June I revealed one of the keystones of Bol-
shevik nuclear war planning. It is America’s secret mobile missile, the
Minuteman TX, the traveling Minuteman.
TX Missiles are already deployed along existing railroad tracks in our northern
states. Meanwhile the elaborate publicity cover-up for the Minuteman TX pro-
gram is continuing. This includes controversy over the alleged MX Missile, as I
reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 55. And now it also includes stories about a
possible speed-up of the mobile missile program. On November 18 the New
York Times reported that this could include, and I quote:
“making some Minuteman Missiles mobile.” As usual, the news is far behind
the facts.
I can report that the initial deployment of Minuteman TX Missiles is now virtu-
ally completed. Now a second phase is under way. In AUDIO LETTER No. 55
I described the special mobile-launch car that carries each Minuteman TX. Now
one by one each TX car is being joined by a second car. On the outside it looks
just like the TX car, but the missile inside is totally different. The missile in the
349
second car is an Anti-Cosmosphere Missile, or ACM; and it is armed with a

cobalt ionization bomb, which I first described in AUDIO LETTER No. 42.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I described the launch sequence that is being

planned for the TX Missiles, but now something extra will also be taking place.
When the order comes to launch the TX Missiles, the ACM will go into action
first. Without waiting to slow down, the cover will be blasted off the ACM rail-
road car. That will expose the ACM Missile itself resting on its launcher. The
ACM is far smaller than the Minuteman, and its launcher is angled upward
slightly, so the moment the cover flies off, the ACM will be launched. When
the ACM takes off, it will accelerate with 100 times the force of gravity. Less
than one (1) second after launch, the ACM will be traveling more than 1000
miles per hour; and because it takes off almost horizontally, it will be an impos-
sible target for the Cosmosphere overhead to aim at. Less than 10 seconds after
launch, the Cobalt Ionization Bomb will explode in the upper atmosphere. That
is supposed to disable the Cosmospheres briefly, as I described in AUDIO
LETTER No. 42. And with the Cosmospheres neutralized, the Minuteman TX
Missiles themselves will be launched at Russia—at least that is the plan of the
Bolsheviks here.
But Cosmosphere crews have already been given orders intended to nullify the
plan. When the ACM is launched, they will not even try to shoot at it. Instead,
they will start firing their Charged Particle Beam weapons at the Minuteman
TX railroad car. They will have about 10 seconds to destroy it before the Cobalt
Ionization Bombs explode, and that should be more than enough time to vapor-
ize every TX and its locomotive. But by that time the kamikaze nuclear first
strike against Russia may be impossible to stop; and if it is, the consequences
for America will be total destruction. Stealth and secrecy will end in complete
disaster.
My friends, I have nothing more to add at this time as a “Last Minute Sum-
mary.” I hope to record my next AUDIO LETTER, No. 61, around mid January
1981. Until then, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. I wish you all a Merry Christ-
mas and a happy, holy New Year.
Thank you, and may God bless each and every one of you.
350
Audio Letter 61
January 20, 1981
It’s been about a month and a half now since I recorded AUDIO LETTER No.
60 at the end of November. Beginning with this issue No. 61, I plan to record
my AUDIO LETTER on a slightly more flexible schedule. I still plan to record
a message roughly once a month, but from now on I want to tie my schedule
more to events and less to the calendar. After all, the AUDIO LETTER is re-
cording history in the making. Sometimes the end of the month arrives just as a
major story is breaking, either in public or behind closed doors. From now on
when that happens, I may well delay for a few days to give you a more com-
plete story. On other occasions it may work the other way, speeding up my
AUDIO LETTER schedule. All of this will have no effect on your subscription.
You will receive all the issues you paid for no matter when they are released; so
I hope that with a more flexible schedule I will be able to serve you better than
ever before because, my friends, events are building toward a climax.
Since I spoke with you last, the world was shocked, saddened, and angered by a
seemingly senseless murder in New York City. The victim was the former
Beatle and rock star John Lennon. Lennon was fond of saying that a rock star
can say things without being killed for it; and after five years out of the public
eye, Lennon was going back to work—not because he needed the money but
because he had things to say. But the things he had to say this time, my friends,
would have caused trouble for those who are maneuvering us into nuclear war;
and so a former fan of his was turned into a psychologically-programmed as-
sassin. This was done using the techniques I made public over five years ago in
AUDIO LETTER No. 5. And on the eve of his return to public life, John Len-
non was silenced.
My friends, lawless forces are destroying our way of life. They have spawned a
soaring crime rate about which many of you have written to me asking ques-
tions. If you want to understand how these lawless forces affect you personally,
there’s a new book I would like to recommend to you. The author is a highly
respected business consultant, Mr. Fred Muller. His book is titled: “America’s
Coming Nightmare Inflation, Economic Collapse, and Crime Revolution.” The
price is $10.00 postpaid, and you can order it directly from:
351
Fred Muller
P.O. Box 11909, Columbia, SC 29211.
If we sit idly by and let it happen, these forces of lawlessness will sweep away
everything that is dear to us. They are destroying our money and our economy,
robbing us of our hard-won assets. They are making many fear for their own
lives when they walk the streets; they are perverting our laws, and corrupting
our lawmakers; and they are working night and day to betray us into the insan-
ity of nuclear war.
But there is something we can do. Last July 1980 I began answering your ques-
tions about what you can do; and because so many of you have responded with
action, I will continue to tell you more. We are making progress; and if we do
not lose heart, I am convinced that we are going to win.
My three special topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:
Topic #1—THE LEGAL SABOTAGE OF THE REAGAN TRANSITION
Topic #2—THE FORFEITED OPPORTUNITY OF SENATOR WILLIAM

PROXMIRE
Topic #3—THE GOLDEN SWINDLE OF THE FEDERAL RESERVE

BANKS
Topic #1—Two months ago America was buzzing over the great surprise land-
slide in the name of Ronald Reagan. There were all kinds of upbeat promises to
“hit the ground running.” But the transition to a new Administration has actu-
ally done just the opposite. First, the early choices for several Cabinet positions
fell apart. People who had appeared interested suddenly just backed out.
Meanwhile the job of filling lower echelon positions became even worse. In-
stead of “hitting the ground running,” the Transition Team was wading through
a swamp. Weeks ago the Transition Team exhausted its Government money
and had to start asking their corporate friends for donations to stay in business.
Puzzled reporters and columnists have been scratching their heads over it all.
Veteran Washington watchers can tell something is wrong. They can sniff it in
the air. And for public consumption, the so-called “Reagan Team” has tried to
blame it all on the “Ethics in Government Act” of 1978. But, my friends, that is
not the real problem. Something much more far-reaching is involved. The fact
352
Audio Letter 61
is that the new Administration has been virtually locked out by the Bolsheviks
in bureaucratic power here.
The symptoms of this unprecedented situation are growing on all sides. For ex-
ample, a few days ago on January 12, the New York Times carried an article
with the headline: “CAMPAIGN AIDES FOR REAGAN FEAR THEY ARE
LEFT OUT.” The article said, quote:
“The Reagan transition aides now expect to have only about 50 upper-level of-
ficials chosen by the time Mr. Reagan is sworn in on January 20” and this is in
connection with, quote “filling of the 400 jobs considered essential for the con-
trol of the bureaucracy.” In other words, my friends, Reagan aides were saying
that the bureaucracy would still be beyond their control as of today. And one
more very significant quote: “To the Reagan transition staff the current process
of filling the hundreds of jobs below the level of Cabinet officer is perhaps
more important than the filling of the Cabinet positions. The lower level aides,
they said, will be the ones actually carrying out Mr. Reagan’s policies.”
My friends, the power struggle for control of the United States Government is
continuing. I outlined that struggle in AUDIO LETTER No. 59 last October,
and in AUDIO LETTER No. 60 I explained how the Election surprise came
about. But as I mentioned then, that was only a mild setback for the Bolsheviks
entrenched in powerful positions here in Washington.
The real problem which is confronting the alleged Reagan forces is not in the
news. It is a Supreme Court decision which was quietly engineered by the Bol-
sheviks here on March 31, 1980. For the lawyers among my audience, the case
is that of Branti vs. Finkel. The citation is: 445 U.S. 507 (1980).
The case itself was unspectacular at first glance. A newly appointed Public De-
fender in the New York County tried to dismiss two assistants who were
leftovers or holdovers from the other political party; but the assistants filed suit
to keep their jobs. The Supreme Court upheld them in the Branti decision last
March; and in the process, the Court made new law by declaring that the same
principle applies at all government levels, including federal. That general prin-
ciple is that governmental employees cannot be dismissed simply because of
their political affiliation.
The ramifications of this decision are stunning, my friends. They were spelled
out very well in the dissenting opinions under the names of Justices Powell,
Rehnquist, and Stewart. The dissenting opinions are of many pages long and
353
naturally are filled with numerous detailed citations and arguments. But let me
read a few quotations to you which speak for themselves, quote:
“The Court today continues the evisceration of patronage practices.”
And, quote:
“With scarcely a glance at almost 200 years of American political tradition, the
Court further limits the relevance of political affiliation to the selection and re-
tention of public employees. Many public positions previously filled on the
basis of membership in national parties now must be staffed in accordance with
a Constitutionalized Civil Service Standard that will affect the employment
practices of federal, state, and local governments.”
And, quote:
“Today’s decision is an exercise of judicial law-making.”
My friends, almost since the founding of our Republic, America’s political sys-
tem has depended upon patronage. Without patronage, your vote means nothing
at all. This fact is brought out in the dissenting opinion of the Supreme Court
itself in the words, quote:
“Elected officials depend upon appointees who hold similar views to carry out
their policies and administer their programs. Patronage, the right to select key
personnel and to reward a party faithful, serves the public interest by facilitating
the implementation of policies endorsed by the electorate.”
Thanks to the Supreme Court Branti decision, the new Administration is having
to take office with a bureaucracy that is beyond its control. The Bolsheviks en-
trenched in key positions nation-wide at all levels of government are immune to
wholesale firing. Instead, they have to be pried loose one by one based on non-
political arguments. Likewise, new appointees cannot be brought in just be-
cause they are Republicans. The result is a quagmire, a government out of
control. The Corporate Socialists have for the moment succeeded in seizing the
White House under the banner of Ronald Reagan, but it is still the Bolsheviks
who control the Government.
One result will be the opposite of the plans we are hearing for a “hiring freeze.”
There will actually be duplicate hiring under various disguises in order to get
around the entrenched Bolsheviks. That will lead to a mushrooming, inefficient
government, and more government spending, more bureaucracy—not less. And
354
Audio Letter 61
so, thanks to the little-known Branti decision of the Supreme Court, the Bol-
sheviks here still have a stranglehold on the United States government. The new
Administration will try everything to whittle away at their power; but the Bol-
sheviks have no intention of letting themselves be whittled very far. Before that
can happen, they plan to cut short the new Administration under the name of
Ronald Reagan.
THE FORFEITED OPPORTUNITY OF SENATOR WILLIAM PROXMIRE
Topic #2—For nearly six months now many of you have been joining me in a
preventive war of Truth. Ours is a war to turn aside the plans for economic col-
lapse, dictatorship, and thermonuclear war. To do that, we are seizing the chief
weapon of our enemies and turning it against them. That weapon is the GOLD
weapon. Those who have cornered our gold and our money are using it to de-
stroy our way of life; but their giant GOLD weapon is also their Achilles’ heel,
because they have broken laws and they have made mistakes. They have left a
trail. You and I are following that trail to track them down; and if we will keep
at it and not lose heart, I firmly believe that we are going to win.
As you know, we began our action campaign last summer with Senator William
Proxmire. At that time he was Chairman of the powerful Senate Banking
Committee. He will no longer be Chairman in the new Congress because of the
change from Democrat to Republican control of the Senate; but Proxmire will
remain on the Committee and he will continue to exercise a great deal of power,
so I want to bring you up to date on our efforts with him.
If you will recall, there were basically two things which we were asking of
Senator Proxmire. Our main request was that he launch a public, honest inves-
tigation into the true status of America’s alleged gold supplies. We specifically
asked him not to just accept the self-serving words of the Treasury Department.
The time is long over due for proof, not words, so we wanted Senator Proxmire
to press for an impartial, independent, complete physical inventory. Either
America’s gold is there, or it is not there; so I urged you to challenge Senator
Proxmire to prove Dr. Beter wrong. But we did not expect Senator Proxmire to
do all that out of a clear blue sky. Any investigation as large as that must have a
starting point; and so as a preliminary step, we gave him that starting point. We
asked him to look into one very specific matter first. That was the matter of the
missing gold shipment from Fort Knox of January 20, 1965, the very day Lyn-
don Johnson was inaugurated! Any truthful, independent inquiry about that one
shipment alone would raise questions that are far broader in scope, and those
questions would have led into the complete investigation we are asking for.
355
But what has the champion of the “Golden Fleece Award” done up to now?
First, consider the matter of the missing gold shipment which I discussed in
AUDIO LETTER No. 56. Proxmire has yet to launch an independent investiga-
tion of any kind. Instead he started off by doing what we asked him not to do.
He asked for a report by the Treasury’s own Inspector General. Then he wasted
months of precious time in sending computerized brush-off letters in reply to
your letters. Following standard procedure in Washington today, he gave you
nothing but lip service. He kept promising you that as soon as he received the
Treasury report, he would decide what to do next.
My friends, even when Proxmire did receive the worthless Treasury report, he
just sat on it. He was hoping that he could stall you until you lost interest and
went away. Proxmire never made the promised report available until you in-
sisted that he do so around early December. The report of the Treasury’s
Inspector General carries a hand-stamped date of September 30, 1980. It adds
nothing new about the missing shipment; instead it just expands on a 5-year-old
letter of Mrs. Mary Brooks, then Director of the United States Mint. I first made
that letter public in AUDIO LETTER No. 2 for July 1975.
The Brooks letter of 1975 served only to multiply the questions about the miss-
ing Fort Knox gold shipment. And the 1980 report by the Treasury’s Inspector
General only muddied the waters still further. No wonder Senator Proxmire
tried to sit on the report for two months, because it is an unsatisfactory report.
As such it calls for Proxmire to do his duty to dig deeper—and digging deeper
is the one thing Proxmire seems determined not to do.
The missing gold shipment of January 20, 1965 is only one thread in the giant
web of scandal surrounding our missing gold, and Proxmire has stubbornly re-
fused even to take a glance at the giant scandal as a whole. To show you what I
mean, let me remind you of a letter to Proxmire which I quoted in AUDIO
LETTER No. 59 last October. It was written by an acquaintance of Proxmire in
Proxmire’s home state of Wisconsin. As an astute business man, he asked
Proxmire some very penetrating questions. This man has kept my good friend,
Mr. Edward Durell, informed about his correspondence with Proxmire. As a
result, I can give you the sequel to what I reported to you in October. It is very
revealing.
To begin with, Proxmire never answered the letter from his friend which I read
to you. After a few weeks, Proxmire’s friend wrote again. He made it abun-
dantly clear that he expected an answer. And answer Proxmire did.
Proxmire’s letter dated December 3, 1980 begins with the words, quote:
356
Audio Letter 61
“I have no record of having received your earlier letter concerning a physical

inventory of the nation’s gold reserves. I have received a great deal of mail re-
garding this issue, so I do apologize for the oversight.”
By the way, some of you have asked me how many people are joining in our
campaign, so now you have Proxmire’s own words, not just mine, that you
have a lot of company. You are making yourself heard.
But Proxmire spends the rest of the letter giving nothing but excuses for refus-
ing to do his duty. It is little more than a rehash of things you have already
heard, including factual errors. The letter was so bad that his friend wrote again
and picked it apart almost line by line. But for you and me, there’s no point in
wasting any more time on Proxmire right now.
My friends, we gave Senator Proxmire the benefit of the doubt. He has re-
sponded by forfeiting the opportunity to take the lead which could have been
his. Under British common law he would be considered a traitor, so for now we
will just go away and leave him alone. But Proxmire will remain a powerful
member of the Senate Banking Committee. We may have occasion to deal with
him again; but if we do, my friends, it will be on very different terms.
Topic #3—Just after Christmas last month a big article about Fort Knox began
appearing in newspapers nation-wide. Alert listeners all over the United States
have sent me copies. The publicity counterattack against our “preventive war of
TRUTH” has now begun.
The article had three basic points to get across. Two of these were familiar from
countless gold propaganda in the past. One of these old familiar points was a
rehash of the old myth about the impregnability of Fort Knox. The officer in
charge of the Bullion Depository, George B. Wright, was photographed at at-
tention outside the locked gates, and there were quotes from him like: “This is
the most secure facility you will find anywhere. We are continually improving
our security system” and “We have tanks and personnel carriers standing by.”
A second familiar point of the long article was the standard personal attack on
me. My 1974 charges about our missing gold are mentioned, but those are dis-
missed with a yawn, as quote:
“Beter’s farfetched claim.”
357
But the third propaganda trick in the article was new. In AUDIO LETTER No.
60 four weeks earlier I had reported, quote:
“Watch for the non-existent gold reserves to be revalued at current market

prices. In terms of dollars, our fictitious gold reserves will suddenly look 15 or
20 times bigger.”
The Fort Knox newspaper article started the ball rolling. It never mentioned the
old official gold price of $42.22 per ounce which is reflected in Treasury bal-
ance sheets. Instead, it hammers away at the great increase in market prices of
gold, and so our psychological conditioning has now begun. We are being men-
tally set up for the gold revaluation publicity stunt to come.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 59 I discussed the way in which America’s gold re-
serves are listed on Treasury and Federal Reserve balance sheets. I did that in
order to call your attention to a little known but crucial fact. Our gold is often
referred to loosely in the press as the “Treasury’s gold” or the “government’s
gold,” but that is not correct. The gold actually belongs to the Federal Reserve
System. The Treasury only serves as a physical custodian for the Federal Re-
serve gold, and the Treasury and the Federal Reserve balance sheets confirm
that this is the situation. If this sounds like a strange arrangement, you’re right.
It is. But it was set up that way for a reason.
Treasury custody of Federal Reserve gold created a situation of mixed respon-

sibility, and it enabled those lines of responsibility to be blurred wherever
convenient. This made it easier for those who stole our gold to hide what they
had done. Even so they have broken laws and they have left a trail. The legal
evidence is mounting that points to the Treasury Department and the Federal
Reserve Board of Governors here in Washington as co-conspirators. The legal
principle involved is that of a pledge, misapplied in a wrongful and fraudulent
manner. And, my friends, you and I are not the only victims! By and large the
Presidents and Directors of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks have also been
victimized. They have been placed in positions of enormous liability by the ac-
tions of the Board here in Washington, and the evidence so far indicates that
they do not realize what has been done to them.
What I want to do now is to outline the legal case that is taking shape. Laws
have been broken, and some very powerful men are destined for prison! I know
that I have many lawyers among my listeners, and it is as a lawyer that I speak
to you now; but I will also try to make my comments as clear as possible for
everyone. We are being forced to try our case first in the “court of public opin-
358
Audio Letter 61
ion,” and I will conclude this topic with a new suggestion for action for you and
for the Regional Federal Reserve Banks.
On December 3, 1974, then Secretary of the Treasury William Simon testified

before a Subcommittee of the House Banking Committee. The Congressmen
were asking about various details of the Treasury’s announced plans to start
holding “gold auctions.” The auctions were to begin a few weeks later in Janu-
ary 1975. In the course of the questioning, then Congressman John Conlan in
Arizona asked:
“Is the government gold owned by the Federal Reserve or is it owned by the
Treasury but the Federal Reserve has a mortgage-like interest on that gold?”
Simon’s answer included the words, and I quote:
“It is sort of a pledge.”
When Simon said those two words “sort of” he almost let the cat out of the bag.
Fortunately for him, Simon’s slip of the tongue went unnoticed at the time; and
Government witnesses before Congress always have a special privilege. It goes
under the euphemism “correcting for the record”—that is, a Government wit-
ness can revise his oral testimony before it is printed by the Government
Printing Office. So the officially-published version of Simon’s testimony was
sanitized in several places. Among other things, it omits those two incriminat-
ing words “sort of” which Simon said. According to the officially published
version, Simon said to Congressman Conlan, quote:
“Legally, I want to check with my attorney. Yes, it is the same. I thought it was.
It is a pledge.”
Later in the same testimony Conlan asked Simon how the decision is taken to
sell gold. In his replies Simon said he took the decision to the President; but he
also claimed, quote:
“I have the authority to do that.”
Now, my friends, please notice something very important. The then Secretary
of the Treasury, William Simon, was questioned about sales of Federal Reserve
gold, and yet he never once made any mention of obtaining Federal Reserve
permission to do so! Instead he asserted that the Treasury itself can sell the gold
without asking anyone else, not even the President. The only legal basis held
out for this is the claim that the gold is “a pledge.”
359
My friends, please bear with me now. There is an essential legal point here
which has to be made. Those who need to know about it most urgently are the
Officers and Directors of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks, but I will need
your help to bring this about. As I am about to explain, the wool has been
pulled over their eyes as well as ours.
When I use the word “conspiracy,” I’m doing so in the strict legal sense.
A CONSPIRACY is the term which refers to any situation in which two or

more individuals join together to plan and execute a crime; and that is exactly
what the Federal Reserve Board, not the Banks, and the Treasury have done.
The key to it all is the legal concept of a pledge. For nearly 20 years now, the
United States Treasury has been using a pretended authority to sell Federal Re-
serve gold at will. That pretended authority is based upon a claim which has
been made to sound plausible but is totally false. That claim is the Treasury’s
assertion that the Federal Reserve gold is a pledge; or, as Simon really said,
“sort of a pledge.” That is why Simon’s testimony of 1974, which I just quoted,
was sanitized so carefully.
To show you what has been done, first I should define what a pledge is in law.
First I will describe it in legal terminology because this is a legal battleground.
The Officers and Directors of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks will have to
take legal steps if they are to save themselves. But I also want to make sure eve-
ryone understands what is involved, so I will try my best to give you examples
of what I am talking about.
Legally, a PLEDGE is defined as a bailment or transfer of personal property as

a security for some debt or obligation. It is redeemable on certain terms; but if
the Debtor defaults on the contract, the Creditor can sell the property which the
Debtor has turned over to him. In this situation, the debtor is called a pledgor
because he is pledging to pay or repay something. The creditor is called the
pledgee. He holds on to physical possession of the pledgor’s property until the
pledge is satisfied.
For a contract of pledge of property to exist, three elements must be present:
(1) The pledgor must turn over possession of the property to the pledgee;
(2) Title to the property—that is, actual ownership—is retained by the pledgor;
360
Audio Letter 61
(3) and this is essential: There must be a lien of some sort against the property
involved for payment of a debt or performance of an obligation, and that debt or
obligation must be due the pledgee by the pledgor or some other person.
For my fellow attorneys, just a reminder that a contract of pledge is one form of
hypothecation. Hypothecation, of course, is the contractual power of a creditor
over the property of a debtor to cause the property to be sold to satisfy the debt.
“Pledge” applies specifically when the property of the debtor is physically
handed over to the creditor.
Now let me come down to earth and give you an everyday example. Suppose
you needed some money and decided to pawn your gold watch. You go to the
pawnshop and physically turn over your gold watch to the pawnbroker. In re-
turn, the pawnbroker gives you two things: He hands you some money as a
loan, and he also hands you a receipt for your watch. Your pawn receipt gives
you the legal right for some period of time to go back in and redeem your
watch. That is, if you want your watch back, you give the pawnbroker the re-
ceipt plus the money you borrowed plus some interest.
My friends, a pawn transaction like this is a contract of pledge. You are the
debtor because he has loaned you money. He keeps your watch in his posses-
sion as security for your loan. During the redemption period you have the right
to get your watch back if you pay the loan; but if you do not repay the loan by a
certain deadline, you default on your loan. The pawnbroker may then sell your
watch.
Now then, my friends, the United States Treasury claims that a similar ar-
rangement applies to the Federal Reserve gold. The property at issue is
America’s entire monetary gold hoard instead of a gold watch; but they claim
that the same principle applies, that the gold is “a pledge.” In effect, the Treas-
ury thereby claims to be in the position of a giant pawnbroker. By referring to
the gold as “a pledge,” the Treasury has claimed in effect that the Federal Re-
serve System pawned the gold. Can you imagine? Beyond that, the Treasury is
behaving as if the Federal Reserve System had defaulted in some way. The
Treasury has disposed of most all of the Federal Reserve gold, just like a pawn-
broker; and this has been done without even notifying 11 of the 12 Regional
Federal Reserve Banks! The Federal Reserve Board of Governors right here in
Washington knew about it, so did certain people at the New York bank, but
they have left the other 11 Regional Banks in the dark.
My friends, the United States Treasury pretends to have the authority to sell off
the Federal Reserve gold at will. That is what William Simon, who parades to-
361
day as the darling of the Conservatives, said as Treasury Secretary in 1974.

This pretended authority to get rid of our gold is based on the Treasury’s con-
tention that it is “a pledge.” But is it? Or was it ever really a pledge? The
Treasury’s claim does not make it so all by itself. That famous quotation of
Abraham Lincoln applies just as well now as it did in AUDIO LETTER No. 59:
“A flower does not become a rose just because I call it a rose.”
I will now point out some facts which prove that the Treasury’s possession of
the Federal Reserve gold was never on the basis of a pledge.
The Treasury’s pretended authority to sell the gold is completely fraudulent,

and there has been collusion between the Treasury and the Federal Reserve
Board here in Washington. As a result, 11 of the 12 Regional Federal Reserve
Banks have been swindled. They are claiming assets—gold assets—in the mis-
taken belief that those assets still exist.
To trace the true status of the Federal Reserve gold, we need to go back to the
beginning—in 1933 and 1934. On March 4, 1933, Franklin D. Roosevelt was
inaugurated President for his first term. The very next evening just before mid-
night he declared a “National Emergency.” He proclaimed a week-long Bank
Holiday, closing all banks and placing an embargo on gold payments. Then the
Treasury Secretary, William H. Woodin, made a public statement to quiet the
fears of the people. He said, quote:
“It is ridiculous and misleading to say that we have gone off the Gold Standard
any more than we have gone off the Currency Standard. We are definitely on
the Gold Standard. Gold merely cannot be obtained for several days.”
But they always lie, my friends. The Treasury Secretary said it would be just a
few days, but IT WAS 42 YEARS before Americans would regain the right to
own gold, because only four (4) days after he spoke, on March 9, 1933, the
“National Banking Emergency Act” was rushed into law. Under that Act,
American citizens were forced to turn in all of their gold. It was collected by the
Federal Reserve System at the old bargain price of $20.67 per ounce.
Despite those soothing words of the Treasury Secretary only days before,
America was off the Gold Standard. The Act also authorized the Treasury Sec-
retary to instruct the Federal Reserve to deliver its gold into possession of the
Treasury. The Treasury Secretary did issue those instructions on January 17,
1934, but the 1933 Law did not take title of the gold away from the Federal Re-
serve. It only required that it be physically held by the Treasury for
362
Audio Letter 61
safekeeping. Finally, the “Gold Reserve Act” of 1934 was passed on January 30
of that year. Section 2-A of the Act says, quote:
“Upon the approval of this Act, all right, title, and interest in every claim of the
Federal Reserve Board of every Federal Reserve Bank and of every Federal Re-
serve Agent in and to any and all gold coin and gold bullion shall pass to and
are hereby vested in the United States.”
My friends, that sounds ironclad, doesn’t it? It sounds as if the Treasury took
over ownership of the gold from the Federal Reserve, but the fact is that it was
only a pretended transfer.
On January 24, 1934, six (6) days before the Act was passed, one brave Con-
gressman tried to expose the entire ruse. He was a bitter enemy of the Federal
Reserve System, and on the floor of Congress he gave a speech that revealed
exactly what was afoot. Describing the provisions of the Act for the gold trans-
fer, then Congressman Louis T. McFadden said, quote:
“It provides that the United States Government shall give the Federal Reserve
Board and the Federal Reserve Banks new Gold Certificates to the full value of
the loot. The Gold Certificates will give the Federal Reserve Board and the
Federal Reserve Banks legal title to the gold, and the United States Treasury
will be nothing more than its physical custodian. The Secretary of the Treasury
will give the Federal Reserve Banks gold for their new Gold Certificates when-
ever they ask for it. It is a fraudulent transfer.”
The situation McFadden described is exactly what happened. The Federal Re-
serve System owns the gold through its Gold Certificates, the Treasury only
acts as physical custodian; and this arrangement has, in legal terms, been con-
firmed, ratified, and condoned by the Federal Reserve and Treasury balance
sheets for 46 years. It is the fact, no matter what the words of the 1934 Act may
seem to say; and law, my friends, deals with the questions of fact, not just as-
sertions.
Now let me return to the present-day claim of the Treasury that it holds the
Federal Reserve gold as “a pledge.” That claim is in direct contradiction to the
Treasury’s own balance sheets. As I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 59, the
Treasury is a debtor with regard to the gold, while the Federal Reserve is the
creditor; but if it were a pledge, as claimed by the Treasury, the reverse would
be true. The Treasury is trying to turn day into night, and night into day, simply
by calling it “a pledge.”
363
That raises two questions, my friends.
(1) What pretended authority was the basis of Simon’s 1974 claim that the gold
is “sort of a pledge”?
(2) How could the Treasury get away with this fraud?
The answer to the first question is a June 30, 1961 Act of Congress, the “Old
Series Currency Adjustment Act.” The citation is: 31 USC 912. The Treasury
misled Congress in 1961 with the excuse that it was to enable the retirement of
a variety of old obsolete currencies including certain Gold Certificates used as
currencies, but nowhere did the Act define the term “Gold Certificates.” The
real but unstated purpose of the Act was to provide a pretended authority to
dispose of Federal Reserve gold. In fact, gold began leaving the country under
the “London Gold Pool Agreement” only three (3) months later. By virtue of
that Act, the Treasury pretends that the gold became what Simon called “sort of
a pledge.” The Treasury claims a right that it does not legally have to convert
the gold to its own use and give the Federal Reserve System nothing but paper
money or bookkeeping credits in exchange. In this way, the Federal Reserve
Banks have been swindled out of their gold bullion.
That brings me to the second question. That is: How could the Treasury get
away with it? The answer involves collusion by the Federal Reserve Board of
Governors here in Washington.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 59 I suggested that you write to the President and Di-
rectors of the Federal Reserve Bank in your Region. I suggested that you urge
them to press for an independent, reliable, physical inventory of the Federal Re-
serve gold in Treasury vaults. Based on the replies of which you have sent me
copies, a very significant pattern has emerged. I do not include the New York
bank in what I am about to say, but the responding Chairmen and Presidents of
the other 11 Regional Banks have said basically two things:
No. 1—Not one single Chairman or President of a Regional Federal Reserve

Bank says he has ever seen the gold or had it inventoried. Instead to a man, they
are all relying totally on the assurances of the Treasury and their own Federal
Reserve Board here in Washington.
No. 2—Not one single reply reflects a correct understanding of his own enor-
mous legal liability involving the gold. Every indication is that they were never
properly informed that they were taking on this responsibility.
364
Audio Letter 61
My friends, I know this sounds astonishing, but the correspondence demonstrat-

ing these two points is just too overwhelming to ignore. Let me just read you a
few quotes to show you what I mean.
From the Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta, President William F.
Ford wrote, quote:
“As you may know, I have no jurisdiction over the stock of gold at Fort Knox.
However I have discussed the issues that you raise with my colleagues at the
Federal Reserve Board in Washington.”
From the Federal Reserve Bank of Boston, President Frank E.
Morris wrote, quote:
“I have never had reason to doubt that the gold stock and shipments have been
properly accounted for.”
From the Federal Reserve Bank of Kansas City, President Roger Guffey wrote,
quote:
“I did not perform a physical count of all assets of the Bank at the time I be-
came president, nor have I conducted a physical inventory of the nation’s gold
stock held by the United States Treasury Department.
As I am sure you are aware, the nation’s gold reserves are no longer held by the
Federal Reserve System but rather the title and custody is held by the United
States Treasury as a result of the ‘Gold Reserve Act of 1934.’”
From the Federal Reserve Bank of Philadelphia, Chairman John W.
Eckman wrote, quote:
“While the 12 Reserve Banks and their Directors have a degree of local auton-
omy, the questions you and Mr. Durell ask and the actions you request are more
logically in the province of the Board of Governors.”
From the Federal Reserve Bank of Dallas, President Ernest T.
Baughman wrote to my good friend, Mr. Edward Durell, quote:
365
“With respect to the gold which underlies the Gold Certificates held by the
Federal Reserve Banks, I have made no effort to eyeball that gold. I am pre-
pared with no reservations whatever to accept the representations of those
government officials responsible for the gold that they do in fact have it.”
And from the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond, President Robert P. Black
wrote, quote:
“I would like to emphasize as strongly as I know how that neither the Federal
Reserve System nor the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond has custody or
control of the gold stock of the United States.”
Then he quotes the gold legislation of 1933 and 1934 which I discussed for you
earlier, and he concludes on that basis that, quote:
“It seems clear to me that this legislation removes from the Federal Reserve
System any responsibility for the custody and control of the gold stock of the
United States.”
My friends, it is little wonder that the Chairmen and Presidents of the Regional
Federal Reserve Banks are so dangerously misinformed. Their own legal re-
sponsibility for the gold is based not on custody but on ownership. And as I
have already established in detail for you, that ownership is not open to dispute.
It is reflected in the Gold Certificates owned by the Federal Reserve Banks, but
here is the shocker: The 12 Regional Banks do not have those Certificates, even
though they are shown on their respective balance sheets as “Gold Certificate
Accounts.”
Where did all those certificates go? Here is the answer. I quote now from a let-
ter dated January 9, 1981 to my good friend Mr. Durell. It was written by
Robert P. Black, President of the Federal Reserve Bank of Richmond, quote:
“I am unable to send you a copy of the certificate you requested. The ‘Gold
Certificate Account’ shown on the balance sheets of the Federal Reserve Banks
is managed by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System in Wash-
ington, D.C. Amounts in this account are allocated to the 12 Federal Reserve
Banks by the Board of Governors.”
My friends, I speak again now as a lawyer. In any conspiracy to commit a

crime, the circle of conspirators is always kept as small as possible. The fewer
the people involved, the less the risk of exposure, and that is exactly the pattern
that is emerging now.
366
Audio Letter 61
By every evidence up to now, the officers and directors of 11 of the 12 Re-

gional Federal Reserve Banks are not party to the gold conspiracy. They are
dangerously misinformed, but they appear to be acting in good faith. It is they
who will be faced with enormous fines, prison terms, and ruined lives when the
Scandal breaks; and yet they appear to be blissfully unaware of their great dan-
ger. And that, my friends, is the second telltale sign in all great conspiracies—
the conspirators always make sure that there will be someone else handy to take
the blame!
For example, when the CIA, on orders, assassinated President John F. Kennedy,
they made sure a “patsy” named Lee Harvey Oswald was on hand; and they
also made sure he was silenced before he could raise too many doubts. Like-
wise, the conspirators within the Treasury and the Federal Reserve Board of
Governors have made sure that they, too, will have their scapegoats. Those
scapegoats are to be the officers and directors of the Regional Federal Reserve
Banks. Ignorance of the law is no excuse; so when the Gold Scandal breaks, as
it will, they will be bundled off to prison to satisfy the rage of the American
public—that is, my friends, unless they take action now to save themselves.
During the past six weeks or so they have been put on legal notice for the first
time ever about the missing Federal Reserve gold—so they can break free of
the web of intrigue if they will. They can do this by taking the initiative to bring
about an independent, conclusive, physical inventory of the gold. By doing that,
they can free themselves of any taint of suspicion; but if they choose not to act,
my friends, they will only be sealing their own fate because they are now on
legal notice. And if they choose inaction, they will make themselves accessories
after the fact in the biggest scandal in American history—the GOLD
SCANDAL. The choice is up to them!
My friends, it’s up to us—you and me—to alert the Federal Reserve Bank offi-
cials to these things, and so I will be sending a copy of this tape to the President
of each Federal Reserve Bank by Registered Mail. I need for you to back me up
with your letters.
I am about to read you a sample letter to get you started. Please, write a letter
like this to the President of the Federal Reserve Bank in your Region. I told you
how to get the address in AUDIO LETTER No. 59.
Send the original to the President of the Federal Reserve Bank, and send a copy
to each one of the other Directors. A photo copy will do; and as always, be sure
to keep a copy for your own file.
367
Now here’s the sample letter I suggest. Feel free to use your own words, but
please do not cut corners. WE MUST HAVE ACTION—AND SOON, because
time is fast running out:
“Dear Mr. (so and so):
I am writing to you again because of my continuing deep concern over the loss
of our gold reserves. Thank you for your earlier reply; but I am concerned that
you do not appear to be aware of certain extremely large legal responsibilities
on your part. In a recent cassette tape, Dr. Beter has given a legal discussion of
these responsibilities on your part. Dr. Beter speaks as a lawyer and a former
Counsel to the United States Export-Import Bank, the largest governmental
bank in the Western world. Therefore I do not believe that you can safely afford
to ignore his legal briefing of your responsibilities regarding the gold.
Dr. Beter has notified his listeners that he is sending a copy of this cassette
tape—AUDIO LETTER No. 61—to you by Registered Mail. It will take you
and the other Directors of your bank just one hour to hear what he has to say. I
cannot urge you strongly enough to do just that.
After you hear Dr. Beter’s tape, I believe you will agree with me that you
should take steps to protect your own personal interests. To that end, I urge you
to demand immediate action by the Federal Reserve Board of Governors to ar-
range an independent, conclusive, physical inventory of the gold in Treasury
vaults. As you will hear Dr. Beter explain, you do have the authority to bring
this about.
Please insist that the committee which oversees the inventory include the Presi-
dent or another Director from each one of the Regional Reserve Banks. You
dare not delegate this duty to anyone else, including even the Federal Reserve
Board of Governors. Your own personal vital interests are at stake!
If you will do this, it can only have one of two possible outcomes, both good.
One possibility is that the inventory will prove that all the gold is there, and Dr.
Beter is wrong. That would lay to rest seven years of unanswered questions
which have undermined confidence in America’s banking system.
The only other possibility would be to prove that much, if not all, of the gold is
missing. In that case, you will be taking the first step toward correcting the real
causes of our crumbling economy, and you will have removed yourself from
any taint of suspicion.
368
Audio Letter 61
Either the gold is there—OR—it is not there. Dr. Beter is not afraid to learn the
truth. Are you?”
—Followed by your signature.
My friends, once again I’m asking you to go to work. Please get your letter and
copies off to the Federal Reserve Bank in your Region right away. As I said
before, I hold out no hope for the New York bank, but the other 11 Regional
Banks appear to be a real ray of hope; and if they will do their duty and use
their latent powers, they can save themselves while doing a great service to
America.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
Now it is time for just a few final words as my “Last Minute Summary.”
Today, January 20, 1981, is Inauguration Day. To all outward appearances, a

new Administration has begun; but thanks to the obscure, recent Branti decision
of the Supreme Court, the change is only on the surface. The real battle to con-
trol the United States Government continues unabated.
My friends, these things cannot be allowed to continue. It is up to you and me

to do our Constitutional duty to save our land.
369
Audio Letter 62
February 28, 1981
Last month I mentioned that I plan to record my AUDIO LETTER on a slightly
more flexible schedule. In preparing the first topic of my report to you this
month, I have taken advantage of this increased flexibility.
For several months now I’ve been compiling information about a major new
story, and just within the past few days I’ve been able to confirm some key fi-
nal details about it. So thanks to waiting a few extra days, I’m now able to give
you a much more complete report about it. The story, my friends, is that of the
space shuttle COLUMBIA now being prepared for launch at Cape Canaveral.
This month I am also able to report some encouraging progress with certain Di-
rectors of the Regional Federal Reserve Banks. It is only a beginning but, my
friends, I am convinced we are going to win.
Topic #1—THE SECRET MILITARY MISSION OF THE SPACE SHUTTLE

COLUMBIA
Topic #2—THE NEW FERMENT OF GROWING WAR TENSIONS
Topic #3—GOLD SWINDLES BY THE MODERN DAY

MONEYCHANGERS
Topic #1—One day just over three months ago America’s Manned Space Pro-
gram suddenly started showing signs of life. The day was November 24, 1980,
and that was the day when the space shuttle Columbia was rolled out into pub-
lic at the Kennedy Space Center in Florida. It was the first public appearance by
the shuttle in almost two years. The shuttle arrived at Cape Canaveral two years
ago next month, March 1979. From then until last November 1980 the shuttle
Columbia remained in hiding in a metal cocoon called the “Orbiter Processing
Facility,” but on November 24 suddenly the cocoon opened up and out rolled
the space shuttle.
371
The space shuttle Columbia made only a short trip that day. It was towed about
300 yards to the nearby Vehicle Assembly Building, where it disappeared once
again, but we were told that this was only the beginning of a much longer jour-
ney. For the first time in nearly six years the United States was committing
itself in public to a manned mission into space. The roll-out of the Columbia on
November 24 took many people by surprise.
America’s Space Shuttle Program is a full three years behind schedule. Ever
since late 1977 we’ve heard about nothing but problems, delays, and more
problems with the space shuttle. Last November 19, 1980, a former director of
the Apollo Moon Program seemed to summarize it all in disgust. Dr. George
Low said in a speech in Chicago, quote:
“Today I wonder whether we could start another Apollo, much less accomplish
it.”
But only five days after Dr. Low said those words, the surprise roll-out of the
shuttle Columbia took place. For three years the Space Shuttle Program was
seemingly placed on hold, yet now the countdown is under way, and there is an
air of urgency about it. Corners are being cut, safety precautions are being
shortchanged, unheard of risks are being taken; and when reporters ask why
these things are being done, they receive only double talk instead of answers.
The space shuttle is the most complex American spacecraft ever built. There are
more things to go wrong than ever before, and the entire future of America’s
Manned Space Program depends on the shuttle. In fact, within a few years we
are told that the shuttle will be launching practically all American satellites.
As far as space is concerned, America has put all of its eggs in one basket—the
Space Shuttle. With so much at stake, my friends, the old NASA would have
proceeded step by step with great care. In the old days each problem had to be
solved before moving on to the next phase of a space program; and as a final
test, every new American manned spacecraft made its first trip or two into
space without astronauts aboard. That was simply to make sure that there would
be no unexpected problems before having astronauts risk their lives. But, my
friends, that was the old NASA. Those who are calling the shots in America’s
Space Program today are a different breed. Our Space Program has become just
one more tool of the Bolsheviks here, and they are interested in only one
thing—getting ready for thermonuclear war—and so a wartime rush mentality
is dominating the shuttle launch preparations right now at Cape Canaveral. This
is to be the shuttle’s very first trip into space—and yet it will be a manned mis-
sion! We’re told that the shuttle is designed to make at least 100 trips into space
372
Audio Letter 62
and back, and yet NASA says it cannot spare one or two preliminary shuttle
launches in order to check it out. NASA refuses even to consider beginning
with a manned suborbital launch like the early manned Mercury shots in 1961.
Instead, the very first launch of the shuttle Columbia is to take it all the way
into orbit.
My friends, this plan is filled with glaring examples of haste. There seems to be
no regard for the safety of the astronauts who will fly it. For example, consider
the radically new rocket engines of the space shuttle. There are three main en-
gines called SSMEs by NASA. These engines have never flown into space
before; in fact, they had never even been fired altogether until just eight days
ago. On that day, February 20, the three engines were fired for only 20 seconds
on the pad at Cape Canaveral. NASA did not run the risk of running them
longer even though these engines are supposed to be reusable launch after
launch. Instead, based on a mere twenty-second test, NASA will have two as-
tronauts risk their lives on the engines; and in the actual launch into space, the
engines will not run for just 20 seconds—they must operate for nine minutes!
NASA is now gambling that the three fresh engines on Columbia will last long
enough to get into orbit. But the shuttle engines are only one example of
NASA’s unexplained haste because if Columbia does reach orbit, the next
question is: Can it return? My friends, the answer is: NASA does not know.
By now you have probably heard or read about the radically new Thermal Pro-
tection System of the space shuttle. All of our previous spacecraft had heat
shields which carried away heat by burning away during re-entry; therefore
they could only be used once. But the shuttle is supposed to be re-usable over
and over, so it requires a different kind of heat shield. It is a lightweight ce-
ramic, broken up into more than 30,000 small pieces called “tiles.”
For at least two years now we have been hearing stories about problems with
the tiles. It began when the shuttle Columbia arrived at Cape Canaveral in
March 1979 on the back of a jumbo jet. Many tiles had been lost or damaged
during the flight and the Columbia looked like it had smallpox. Soon after that
we started hearing about tiles being tested, removed, replaced, re-tested, and so
on. Part of the controversy over the tiles is real. There are legitimate arguments
among many space engineers whether the tiles will succeed or fail. Those ques-
tions will finally be answered one way or another only when and if the shuttle
Columbia drops out of orbit to return to earth. But for the Bolsheviks who now
control America’s Space Program, the arguments over the tiles are only a tool.
The tile controversy made a perfect cover story to explain away the 3-year
grounding of the space shuttle. The real reason is that America has been virtu-
373
ally locked out of military space missions since late 1977. As recently as Au-
gust 1977 it had looked as if the United States would soon be eclipsing Russia
with new space exploits. That month the first free-flight tests of the space shut-
tle took place. A shuttle was carried aloft aboard a jumbo jet, then cut loose and
guided to earth by astronauts. The test went perfectly. The era of the space shut-
tle was about to dawn, or so it seemed.
Meanwhile Russia’s space program seemed completely silent, but everything

turned upside-down the following month, September 1977. Russia began de-
ploying her secretly-developed Charged Particle Beam weapon in space, and on
September 27, 1977, history’s first true space battle took place, the BATTLE
OF THE HARVEST MOON. I reported it that month in AUDIO LETTER No.
26. In a stunning upset, Russia smashed America’s secret military control of
space.
Two days later, Russia’s Manned Space Program suddenly came to life. Russia
launched the Salyut-6 Space Station on September 29, 1977; and from that day
to this, there has been a steady stream of Russian cosmonauts into space and
back. Even cosmonauts from seven (7) other countries have been whisked into
space by Russian rockets. There have even been cosmonauts in orbit from Cuba
and Vietnam. Meanwhile, American astronauts have been able to do nothing
but grind their teeth and watch.
The Bolsheviks here, my friends, have been waiting and watching for a moment
of weakness among their enemies—the secret new rulers of Russia. The Bol-
sheviks want to regain their former positions of power in Russia; but for years
now, Russia’s new rulers have been expelling the Bolsheviks, who have flocked
mostly here to the United States. When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 55 last
June 1980, I reported that a moment of weakness was developing in the Krem-
lin. Bolshevik forces had succeeded in penetrating the Kremlin. They were
wreaking havoc among Russia’s top leadership. At the same time, Russia’s ex-
pulsion of Bolsheviks slowed to a trickle. Immigration from Russia was at its
lowest level in years during the second half of 1980. So the decision was made
last July to go ahead with a space shuttle mission.
For the first time in three years there appeared to be a chance of slipping
through Russia’s space blockade. Even so any American attempt to launch a
manned military mission into space will be very risky. It dare not be attempted
until a mission is ready that is worth the risk. The Bolsheviks are now ready
with that mission. It is the secret pay load now in the cargo bay of the space
shuttle Columbia. It was developed in association with the supersecret “Na-
374
Audio Letter 62
tional Reconnaissance Office” whose very existence is regarded as secret in

Government circles.
When Russia began her surprise space offensive in September 1977, she did so
by destroying an American Spy Satellite on September 20. A week later, Amer-
ica’s secret Moon Base was put out of action, which freed Russia’s hands to
pour into space. In the months that followed, Russia gradually knocked out all
of our Spy and Early Warning satellites, one by one. When I recorded AUDIO
LETTER No. 33 seven months later, I reported that Russia had finished the job.
Since that time, April 1978, America has had no Spy satellites on continuous
duty over Russia. Several spy satellites have been launched since then but each
one has been knocked out quickly. Not one has lasted for as long as one week!
But these brief spy satellite missions have alerted the Bolsheviks here to one
thing—that is, there are major changes taking place among the potential war-
time targets in Russia. Some known targets from the past are becoming less
important, while other new targets have been detected.
Last June in AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I outlined the secret plan for an Ameri-
can nuclear first strike against Russia. That plan relies on missiles, including
America’s secret mobile missile, the Minuteman TX, and it cannot succeed
without up-to-date information on the targets in Russia.
As I will outline in Topic #2, the Bolsheviks here are once again doing all they
can to get set for nuclear war, so they are desperate for new, up-to-date recon-
naissance data from Russia. In other words, they must have an operational spy
satellite which can survive in orbit for a while, and the Bolsheviks here now
believe they have developed that kind of satellite. Eventually they know that
Russia’s orbital fleet of manned Cosmos Interceptors will succeed in destroying
it; but before they can do so, military planners here believe the satellite will be
able to radio back enough information to work with. And so, my friends, the
first flight of America’s space shuttle, the Columbia, is to be a secret military
mission. It’s purpose is to prepare for war. That is why there is such a frantic
effort to rush to launch with unproven hardware, and that is why the very first
mission will be manned, instead of an unmanned test shot. It has to be manned
because of the secret cargo it is carrying in its huge cargo bay.
When the shuttle reaches orbit, if it reaches orbit, astronauts will be required to
deploy the military satellite inside. The satellite is basically a spy satellite, but it
is also much more. In order to do its job, it is designed to fend off Russian
space weapons for as long as possible. As a result, it will be nothing less than a
robot battle station in space. In space terminology, it is a “hardened satellite”
375
able to withstand an attack without being easily destroyed. It is also equipped

with active defenses, meaning it can shoot back.
Right now the components of the satellite are crammed into the cargo bay of
the shuttle Columbia. They were already there when the Columbia was rolled
out last November. Once in orbit, the job of the astronauts, John Young and
Robert Crippen, will be to assemble it and get it operating, and fast.
Once it is assembled and floating in space, the satellite will look like a giant
rotating tin can perhaps 30 feet long and 20 feet in diameter; but on closer in-
spection it would seem to be made more like a wooden barrel except that the
barrel staves are all made of a whitish metal, tungsten. Several of these metal
sections can be retracted on automatic command, making the satellite look like
a shiny barrel with a few staves missing. Inside the outermost tungsten barrel is
another smaller barrel; and inside that is a still smaller barrel. Finally, at the
very center is the heart of the satellite itself. The tungsten barrels are separated
from one another by a foot or more of space. There is also considerable space
between the innermost barrel and the core satellite. The tungsten barrels consti-
tute the passive defense of the satellite. If a Charged Particle Beam blast strikes
the outermost barrel, it will vaporize a spot on the barrel; but in the process it
will absorb energy and diffuse the beam. In theory, that will greatly reduce the
damage done to the second barrel and do no damage at all to the innermost bar-
rel. Tungsten has the highest melting point of any metal, so this system of
particle beam shields is expected to last through a number of battles.
The three-layer tungsten shield system is also instrumented. When a blast

strikes it, the blast pattern will be sensed as an initial indication of where the
attack is coming from. A computer in the core satellite will then activate a se-
cret new target acquisition system called LADAR, meaning laser direction and
ranging. The movable barrel stave sections of the rotating tungsten shields will
be opened up. LADAR will peek out through the openings as they rotate past in
ultra-fast scanning.
In the black void of space, LADAR is expected to be much more efficient than
radar, picking up the Russian attacker quickly; and the moment it does, the
American robot battle station will open fire. When it does so, it will pose a ma-
jor threat even to a Russian Cosmos Interceptor because, my friends, the
American satellite will be armed with a giant carbon dioxide gas dynamic laser.
It is a more compact version of the laser which has been successfully tested
aboard a modified KC-135 jet tanker. It produces intense infrared radiation with
a power of over one megawatt—that is 1,000,000 watts. What can a one mega-
watt laser do? Let me give you an idea. An industrial 10,000-watt laser can
376
Audio Letter 62
slice through a one-inch thick steel plate in a matter of seconds. The satellite
laser is 100 times that powerful. It is not as powerful as a Russian Charged Par-
ticle Beam, but it is powerful enough to cripple or destroy a Russian attacker—
that is, my friends, if the space shuttle Columbia makes it into orbit and if
Young and Crippen succeed in deploying the satellite. But will they?
In the past I have given many details about the clever deceptions which have
surrounded our Space Program. But, my friends, the deceptions of the past were
child’s play compared to what we are about to witness, because the Bolsheviks
here must get their robot battle station into orbit without letting you know about
it; and whether they succeed or fail, they must try to maintain the appearance of
success. As I mentioned earlier, everything is riding on the space shuttle, so I
will now describe the plan for the coming flight of the Columbia. I will describe
what you will see if the plan works, and I will also describe what will really be
taking place, which is far different.
According to the latest schedule, the Columbia is intended to lift off on a sunny
morning in mid April 1981. Millions will watch on television as Young and
Crippen roar upward into the sky and into orbit. Then the scene will shift to the
standard coverage of Young and Crippen in their cockpit, and for a little over
two days the coverage will continue off and on. There will be cockpit scenes,
scenes in Mission Control, and so on; and there will be some seemingly unex-
pected problems, nothing serious but just enough to add a touch of spice to it
all. It will look for all the world like the real thing. Television viewers will have
no suspicion that they are only watching excerpts from numerous simulations of
the flight. In its cover-up of the SKYLAB fiasco, NASA learned well the tech-
niques of deception.
Meanwhile there will be no television coverage at all of the real flight except
for the initial lift-off. Instead, when Young and Crippen reach orbit, they will
go to work fast. They will depressurize the cabin, open the cargo hatch, and
move the robot spy satellite components away from the Columbia. They will
also remove a Gemini-type two-man space capsule from the Columbia cargo
bay. After moving these things several hundred yards away from the Columbia,
the two astronauts will close the cargo bay by remote control. They will ma-
neuver down underneath the Columbia for a quick visual inspection of the
condition of the thermal tiles; but the urgency of setting up the robot satellite
will leave no time for any attempt to repair any tiles. If the astronauts were to
do that, they would lose precious time both in setting up the satellite and in
making good their own escape in the Gemini capsule. This, my friends, is why
NASA has refused to include a tile repair kit on the first shuttle mission. As
NASA administrator Robert Frosch said in a recent news conference, quote:
377
“I felt in the end that it would be likely to increase risk, perhaps not risk with
regard to the tile system but risk with regard to the safety of the whole flight.”
After the briefest of inspections, the astronauts will turn over control of the Co-
lumbia to NASA Houston with the words:
“Okay for retrofire.” Then they will float away from the Columbia and set to
work quickly on assembling the robot spy satellite. It is expected that they will
complete the job within three to four orbits. As soon as the robot satellite is as-
sembled and operating, Young and Crippen will board their Gemini-type space
capsule. If all goes according to plan, they will drop out of orbit and splash
down in the Pacific Ocean. It will only be the evening of the same day they
took off, but on television the falsified NASA coverage will still be showing
tapes of Young and Crippen in the simulated cockpit of the Columbia. Young
and Crippen are planned to be picked up at sea after their secret splashdown.
From there they are to be transported to Edwards Air Force Base in California
to await further events.
Meanwhile about 12 hours after the launch from Cape Canaveral, Houston will
send a retrofire signal to the unmanned Columbia. The shuttle’s engines will
fire. Somewhere over the Indian Ocean the space shuttle will enter the atmos-
phere. It will be the first complete test of the shuttle’s thermal tiles. If they
work, Columbia will survive re-entry. Then at lower altitude, piloting of the
Columbia will be taken over by remote control. If all goes well, the Columbia
will touch down in the great sandy desert of western Australia.
If all goes according to plan, all these things will take place during the first day
of the supposed 54-hour mission of Young and Crippen. Then for the final act
of the charade, we will be told on television that the Columbia is re-entering
over the Pacific Ocean; and finally, lo and behold the space shuttle will glide
into view. Everyone will watch in fascination as the shuttle dips lower and
lower over Edwards Air Force Base, California. Finally it will touch down on
the dry lake bed and gradually brake to a stop, and out will climb Young and
Crippen. Everyone will assume that they are climbing out of the Columbia; but,
my friends, they will actually be climbing out of a different shuttle named the
ENTERPRISE. It was the Enterprise which we saw in those landing tests in
August 1977, and it will again be the Enterprise which we will see making an-
other landing soon. It will be retouched to look like it came from space, but it
will be a fraud.
378
Audio Letter 62
My friends, that is the plan as it now stands, but there may well be some big
surprises. The Bolsheviks here have devised a robot battle station to spy on
Russia and defend itself against Russian space weapons, but it is designed pri-
marily with Cosmos Interceptors in mind. And while American designers have
been devising ways to counter the Cosmos Interceptors, Russian technology has
also been advancing.
The secret military mission of the space shuttle Columbia is a desperate gam-
ble. If it succeeds, it will bring the world much closer to thermonuclear war. If
it fails, we may well be witnessing America’s final manned mission into Space.
Topic #2—In AUDIO LETTER® No. 59 last October I reported that the Bol-
sheviks here were trying to set up a new strategy to bring on NUCLEAR WAR
ONE. They had been foiled repeatedly in their attempts to trigger a war by
means of our hostages in Iran, so they were devising a new plan which was to
be set in motion after releasing the hostages. When voting machines registered
a surprise landslide in the name of Ronald Reagan last November, it set a dead-
line for arranging a hostage release. That deadline was Inauguration Day,
January 20, last month. Otherwise the Bolsheviks were in danger of losing con-
trol of the Iran crisis which they themselves had created, and so at the very last
minute our hostages were released last month.
Contrary to the original plans of the Bolsheviks here and in Iran, our hostages
came home alive; but now new maneuvers are under way to bring on war. Bol-
shevik agents are stirring up Poland in never ending strikes and turmoil. Having
failed in their Pope’s Revolution plan of two years ago, they’re trying to make
Poland explode in a different way.
Meanwhile, to keep Russia’s new rulers off balance, another crisis has been
created in our own hemisphere—El Salvador. CIA operatives are stirring up
both sides in the civil war there in order to have something to blame on Cuba.
As always, the Russians are reacting strongly to the implied new American
threats against Cuba, so El Salvador is serving its purpose as a tool to stoke up
tensions between Russia and the United States.
The El Salvador crisis contains echoes of “Operation Guyana” two years ago.
Now, as then, Russia is being encouraged to worry about Cuba as a diversion-
ary tactic; and just as happened in Guyana, human lives are being sacrificed
purely to attract attention.
Public attention was first riveted on Guyana by the Port Kaituma Airport mas-
sacre, and not long ago public attention was focused on El Salvador by the
379
murder of four religious workers. All this is to help catch Russia off guard later
on when the arena of conflict shifts once again to the Persian Gulf area.
Once again secret plans are being laid to create conflict between Israel and
Saudi Arabia. For that purpose the United States has just announced that it will
sell offensive armaments for Saudi Arabia’s F-15 Fighter Bombers, and at the
same time there are planted reports that the Saudis favor a jihad (a Moslem holy
war) to retake Jerusalem. Right now all of this is going on quietly. It is not
highlighted in our controlled major media. But the preparations are under way
now for a Persian Gulf explosion later this year of 1981.
When that takes place, the plan is to focus all eyes once again on Iran. At a
critical moment the shaky Iranian government will be brought down. Suddenly
that will leave Russian forces on the north and American forces on the south,
with a vacuum in between; and almost over night the stage will be set for a nu-
clear confrontation.
As a preliminary step, the plan is also to declare a “National Economic Emer-

gency” here in the United States. That will trigger the emergency powers of the
President; and while we will be told that it is all to fight inflation, it will actu-
ally be to prepare for nuclear war!
My friends, if all this is to be stopped, we must go to the source of the Satanic

power. That power is MONEY POWER, wrongly used. It is the power of the
modern day moneychangers in our land, so it is to them that I now direct your
attention.
Topic #3—When our Lord Jesus Christ walked the earth nearly 2000 years ago,
He did many miraculous things. He healed the sick, He fed the hungry, He
loved the unloved. In short, He went about doing good. Most of the time our
Lord astonished everyone with His patience. When He taught He found that
people did not pay attention, and so He had to teach them the same lesson over
and over again, and yet He never once grew angry with anyone who was seek-
ing to learn. Even so, He also told His disciples, “Do you think that I have come
to bring peace? No, not peace, but a sword.” He explained that there must be a
division between those who are for God and those who are against God. And as
gentle as He was with the weak, He displayed a fiery anger with those who
were swollen up with arrogant power; and one time the anger of our Lord Jesus
Christ exploded into violence. That one occasion, my friends, was when He
confronted the moneychangers in the temple.
380
Audio Letter 62
The temple moneychangers possessed a money monopoly. Everyone who came

to worship presented offerings to the priests; and to buy something to offer,
they had to use a special temple money, so called. The temple money was not
really money at all. It was only a kind of scrip with no intrinsic value. But eve-
ryone who came to worship, from the richest to the poorest, had to turn in good
coins of gold, silver, and copper to buy the scrip. That was the only way that
they could buy a sheep, or a ram, or a dove to offer to the priest. The money-
changers really performed no useful function at all; but thanks to their money
monopoly, they extracted tremendous profits from everyone else. When Jesus
saw all this, He became enraged. The moneychangers were so corrupt that they
were standing in the way of worship itself in order to make money, so Jesus
wasted no time trying to reason with them. Instead, He seized a whip and went
after them. He drove away the moneychangers, He knocked over their counting
tables; and seizing their bags of money obtained by a form of theft, He ripped
them open and spilled them out.
My friends, today it is you and I who are at the mercy of the moneychangers.
We, too, have been forced to give up real money made of silver and gold. In-
stead, we are forced by the Federal Reserve money monopoly to deal in Federal
Reserve IOUs—nothing but paper scrip! And in return, the arrogant money-
changers of today, the Bolsheviks, are trying to take everything from us. They
are eating up our savings by creating inflation through interest rates, which cre-
ate no new wealth. They are using their money power to betray us into nuclear
war, and they are even trying to destroy the Christian faith itself by constantly
working to pervert our religious practices. Like the moneychangers of old, hat-
ers of our Lord Jesus Christ are once again sitting in the temple.
Almost from the moment our Republic was founded, the moneychangers started
trying to seize control of America’s money. First the idea was called the “Bank
of the United States.” Such a bank did exist for a while with a charter granted
by Congress, but on July 10, 1832, President Andrew Jackson put a stop to the
central bank idea for a while. Congress had passed the bill to give a new 20-
year charter to a “Bank of the United States.”
Jackson vetoed the bill with the words:
“Every monopoly and all exclusive privileges are granted at the expense of the
public, which ought to receive a fair equivalent.”
In other words, Jackson was insisting that the public be treated fairly.
381
But, my friends, the moneychangers never give up. In 1913 they finally got
what they wanted. It is called the FEDERAL RESERVE SYSTEM. Nowadays
few people know the story of how the Federal Reserve System came into exis-
tence. Suffice it to say that it took only a few of the international bankers to do
it, without great fanfare. One man more than any other was the father of the
Federal Reserve in its present form. As the proceedings of the Academy of Po-
litical Science of Columbia University put it, quote:
“The Federal Reserve Act will be associated in history with the name of Paul
M. Warburg.”
In order for Warburg and his associates to quietly get this legislation past Con-
gress, he had to overcome one objection. That major objection was to the
creation of only one central bank, which would obviously be a monopoly. War-
burg got around that by conceiving the 12-bank Federal Reserve System; but
when a Senator asked him how he would maintain control of 12 banks instead
of the single bank he favored, Warburg answered, quote:
“It is a little bit complicated, which objection, however, can be overcome in an

administrative way.”
In other words, my friends, he could short-circuit the 12-bank system and do

what he wanted a central bank to do by administrative techniques. And that is
what has been done in the situation over our missing gold.
The real central bank is the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, and the admin-
istrative arm of that central bank is actually the “Board of Governors” here in
Washington. The New York Bank, the Board of Governors, and agents within
the United States Treasury Department all work hand in glove. It is they who
constitute the modern day moneychangers in our land.
In all of this, the other 11 Regional Federal Reserve Banks just go along for the
ride. They do possess latent powers of their own, but thanks to Warburg’s “ad-
ministrative techniques” they’re always indoctrinated not to exercise those
powers. Instead, the 11 Regional Banks outside New York are treated like chil-
dren by the moneychangers in New York and Washington. They are given big
buildings, fancy offices, impressive stationery, fat salaries, numerous advisors,
and impressive titles; but they are always told in effect, “Leave all the thinking
to us big boys.” Year in and year out the Regional Federal Reserve Banks, all
except New York, are kept in the dark, so last month in AUDIO LETTER No.
61 I tried to light a candle in that darkness.
382
Audio Letter 62
All of the Federal Reserve Banks share in the responsibility for safeguarding
our gold. The Presidents and Directors of all the Banks are now on legal notice
concerning those responsibilities, so from now on they will have no excuse. Ei-
ther they are for us OR they are against us—they must make a choice. They do
hold power, and those who hold power must be held accountable with the con-
sequences of its exercise.
The question we have posed is very simple and very basic:
EITHER AMERICA’S GOLD IS THERE or IT IS NOT THERE. We want an

indisputable physical inventory to find out once and for all, so we have ap-
pealed to the Regional Federal Reserve Banks to wake up, to flex their muscles
for once, and to bring about an inventory.
My friends, I want to thank all of you who followed through on what I asked
you to do last month, and I want to let you know the results so far.
Up to now the Federal Reserve System is continuing to maintain its false outer
appearance of unruffled unity; but behind that facade, little cracks are beginning
to open up. It’s true, many of the Regional Bank Directors have so far been un-
able to open their minds to the truth, but there are some important exceptions.
One high official of one Regional Federal Reserve Bank is being very coopera-
tive up to now. Very quietly he is providing us with important information. He
has not yet gone so far as to demand an inventory, but he is responding with an
open mind. At one other Regional Bank a high official has signaled to us that
he is seriously concerned, but up to now he is still sitting on the fence. Beyond
that, I have also received reliable reports that scattered around the country a
number of Regional Federal Reserve Directors are troubled. Until last month
they had never been given one hint of their own legal responsibilities regarding
the gold.
My friends, all this is at least an encouraging start, but it is clear that they are
going to take more convincing. We should not be surprised at that nor discour-
aged by it. Many of these men have been associated with the Federal Reserve
System for many years. Human nature being what it is, they naturally find it
hard to accept the fact that the wool has been pulled over their eyes. Typically,
these are highly educated men, they are not stupid. They will have to swallow
their pride in many cases if they are to see how thoroughly they have been
fooled and used.
Over the past six or seven years I’ve made public many facts which these men
should consider for their own good, but rather than go back over any of those
383
again, I want to report three new ones. The discrepancies surrounding our gold
supplies just go on and on, my friends.
First, let me refer to the Treasury Inspector General’s report to Senator William
Proxmire dated last September 30, 1980. This so-called report came about be-
cause of your letters to Senator Proxmire. The subject was the missing gold
shipment from Fort Knox of January 20, 1965, which I have discussed in past
AUDIO LETTERS. The shipment amounted to over one and three-quarter
MILLION ounces of gold worth around a billion dollars at today’s prices, yet it
was omitted from official Treasury shipment listings.
Recently this feeble excuse for a report has been cited by the Federal Reserve
Board of Governors. For example on February 2, 1981, Theodore E. Allison,
secretary of the Board of Governors, wrote to the president of the Philadelphia
Bank, Mr. Edward G. Boehne. Boehne had written to the Board of Governors in
response to your inquiries; and with their letter of reply, the Board enclosed the
Treasury Inspector General’s report! My friends, I have mentioned before that
this report is totally unsatisfactory. It is a fraud and a farce, yet now the money-
changers of the Board of Governors are falling back on that report as one way
to calm down the Regional Banks. So I think it is appropriate to give you just
one example of the glaring errors sprinkled throughout the report. I also want to
do this because some of you have asked me to say more about it.
If you have a copy of the Treasury Inspector General’s report, please look on
page 2. The third paragraph refers to the missing shipment of January 20, 1965.
It says very impressively, quote:
“This shipment was receipted for on Treasury Department Form TUS-12b—

Receipt for Forwarding Depository, Voucher No. 65-1—on January 22, 1965,
by John P. Bath, an employee of the New York Assay Office.”
Sounds cut and dried, doesn’t it? Sorry, my friends, it so happens that the New
York Assay Office had no permanent employee named John P. Bath on January
22, 1965; so if the Receipt quoted by the Treasury Inspector General exists at
all, it means absolutely nothing. It is fraudulent! That is the kind of report
which Senator William Proxmire was so eager and happy to settle for, and that
is the kind of report which the Federal Reserve Board of Governors now uses to
soothe the Regional Banks. If the Regional Federal Reserve Banks want to
swallow that, then shame on them.
Now let me give you a second example—another major discrepancy in the re-
cords of the Treasury Department and the Federal Reserve Board of Governors.
384
Audio Letter 62
I have spoken before about the so-called “London Gold Pool” which operated
between 1961 and 1968. This is the official cloak of authority which was used
during that period to explain the hemorrhage of gold out of Fort Knox. Accord-
ing to official Treasury records, some 219.5 MILLION ounces of gold left Fort
Knox. Of that amount, supposedly a little over 9-million ounces went to the
New York Federal Reserve Bank. The other 210-million ounces were suppos-
edly destined for the London Gold Pool. But now let me give you the
conflicting statements of former Treasury Secretary William Simon. On May 4,
1976, he wrote to then Congressman John Conlan of Arizona. Conlan had re-
quested some better answers from Simon than he had given previously to
questions about our missing gold. Simon spent over two months constructing a
reply to Conlan’s February 26, 1976 letter. Simon sent Conlan a two-page letter
plus an eight-page memorandum trying to refute the charges. At one point in
the memorandum Simon says, quote:
“The statement which alleges that the shipments of gold to London for the Lon-
don Gold Pool arrangement were used as a cover for secret losses of United
States gold simply isn’t true.”
And yet, just four sentences later, Simon says, quote:
“When the arrangement was terminated by the Washington agreement of March

1968, the United States had made net sales to the Pool during its period of op-
eration totaling 45.2-million ounces.”
Now let’s compare two numbers side by side, my friends. First is Simon’s
number. As Secretary of the Treasury he said that the United States sent only
about 45-million ounces of gold net to the London Gold Pool, but Treasury re-
cords give a different number. At least 210-million ounces disappeared from
Fort Knox alone during that period. If only 45-million ounces went to the Gold
Pool, as Simon said in writing, what happened to all the rest? Two hundred ten
million (210-million) minus 45-million leaves 165-million ounces of gold from
Fort Knox unaccounted for! Yet, I repeat, the only excuse ever given for the
Fort Knox gold hemorrhage was the London Gold Pool. My friends, that unac-
counted-for gold is Federal Reserve gold belonging to the American people. As
I detailed last month, the Federal Reserve title to the gold is beyond legal dis-
pute. Every Officer and every Director of every Regional Federal Reserve Bank
shares a legal responsibility if that gold is missing, and if they do not investi-
gate. The incredible discrepancy I have just revealed is in black and white in
Treasury statements. Do the Regional Banks dare to close their eyes to it? If so,
God help us all.
385
Now let me report just one more mystery to you about our gold. This one did
not take place years ago, but just this month—February 1981. Last month our
hostages were finally released from Iran. Most of the last-minute settlements
involved banking matters. Most of all, Iran demanded that 1.6-million ounces
of gold be returned. According to all the news reports, the return of Iran’s gold
was arranged by cable transactions between the Federal Reserve System and the
Bank of England. Supposedly, Iran’s 1.6-million ounces of gold was safe and
sound at the New York Federal Reserve Bank. By a system of banking credits,
this amount of gold was reportedly credited to Britain’s gold stock here in
America, then the Bank of England turned over an equivalent amount of gold
into Iran’s custody in London. We were told that no gold actually left America
in this transaction. But, my friends, that is a lie. Simply put, Britain’s bankers
do not trust us. The Bank of England secretly demanded that Iran’s 1.6-million
ounces of good delivery gold be physically sent to London; and so on February
7, just three weeks ago, there was a secret gold shipment to London by air. It
came to about 1.6-million ounces, but it did not come from the New York Fed-
eral Reserve Bank! It was not Iran’s gold. Instead, the shipment was made from
the New York Assay Office. Dregs of junk gold from Fort Knox were scraped
together, then it was rushed to London in secret.
My friends, this raises a very serious question. If Iran’s gold still existed at the
New York Bank, why was that not sent to London? Why was the New York
Assay Office given a panic refining job to scrape together the gold? In any case,
the gold that went to London was not Iranian gold—it was Federal Reserve
gold, part of the small amount still left in this country. It was taken from the
dregs of junk gold removed from Fort Knox for auctions in the recent past. As I
reported more than five years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 5, any gold left in
Fort Knox is radioactive. It has been contaminated by plutonium super poison
stored in the Gold Vault by the CIA in the late 60’s. Recently a leading Swiss
bank refused to take delivery of Fort Knox gold purchased at a gold auction.
Their tests proved that the gold was indeed radioactive; so the Bank of England
should test the gold which they just received very carefully.
The secret gold shipment of February 7 further depleted what little is left of the
Federal Reserve gold. It took place with the knowledge and collusion of the
Federal Reserve Board of Governors and the New York Bank; but once again,
the other 11 Regional Banks have been taken for a ride. It may well be that they
do not even know about this latest disappearance of their gold. If not, they have
once again been used by the moneychangers who control them.
My friends, there are mountains of evidence that our gold reserves are not as
claimed, but will the Regional Federal Reserve Bankers wake up in time? Will
386
Audio Letter 62
they take action to save both themselves and our country? If they do not act,
what lies ahead may well be foreshadowed in these words written to a commer-
cial banker by one of my listeners: “More and more of my friends and people I
know are withdrawing all their funds held in banks, then dealing in cash, silver,
gold, and barter systems for their transactions. Banks and bankers, through not
serving the true interests of the people, are losing any useful place in society.”
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
Now it is time for my “Last Minute Summary.”
As I say these words, the space shuttle COLUMBIA is being readied for a des-
perate secret military mission. Once again powerful forces here in the United
States are bent on war, NUCLEAR WAR. Our own money has been taken
away from us in order to finance preparations for warfare that will destroy us.
The evil which is being planned for us all has one root. That root is a Satanic
and perverted MONEY POWER. If we are serious about saving our land, we
must pull up that root. We must do as our Lord Jesus Christ Himself did long
ago. We must drive out the moneychangers, and restore honor and honesty to
our land.
387
Audio Letter 63
April 1, 1981
For two days now, news here in the United States has been dominated by the
presidential assassination attempt Monday afternoon. The entity Ronald Reagan
emerged from the Hilton Hotel waving and smiling at the press and bystanders.
Then half a dozen or more shots rang out in rapid fire. The President, reportedly
hit once, was thrown into his limousine, which sped off. Also hit were a Secret
Service agent, a Washington policeman, and White House Press Secretary
James Brady with a bullet through the brain. It all happened at 2:25 P.M. EST,
March 30, 1981.
By the time people were coming home from work and tuning in to the continu-
ing news coverage, it was already beginning to look cut and dried. A lone
assassin, we were quickly assured, an oddball of some kind. Certainly no hint
of a conspiracy; but, my friends, it is always the early reports that contain the
truth.
In the early moments after an episode like this, the unseen censorship of our
controlled news media does not function so effectively. It is only after the story
is told and retold that the untidy gems of truth are weeded out. In those early
moments there were a number of puzzles which went unexplained and
unmentioned later on. The most significant of these was a report on NBC tele-
vision by NBC reporter Judy Woodruff. She was a close eyewitness, and said,
quote:
“I was probably one-car length and a half away from the President’s limousine
when the shots were fired. People immediately hit the ground, and I noticed
there were some shots fired from an overhanging, from a sidewalk that was
above where the President’s car was.”
Then she continued with other comments.
My friends, those words of NBC’s Judy Woodruff can only mean that there
were at least two gunmen.
389
By now every American must have seen the televised assassination attempt for
himself over and over again, and the arrested suspect was not the one described
by Judy Woodruff. He was not the one firing from an overhanging structure or
sidewalk above the President’s car. Instead, he was on a street level close to the
TV cameras and reporters. Just eight seconds after she spoke the words I just
quoted, Judy Woodruff was cut off in the middle of her report, and since that
moment there has been no more talk about the assassin firing from above the
President—that is, not by the reporters.
There have been related comments by several different medical spokesmen in-
terviewed on television. They spoke of a downward shot which just grazed the
President’s chest but was deflected into his body when it struck a rib; and last
night NBC Nightly News even showed a diagram to this effect; but no one is
daring to ask the logical question: “How could a bullet fired by the suspect we
saw have struck the President from above?”
You saw it all for yourself, my friends. The President was not bending over
when he was hit, but standing straight. The only thing that does explain the bul-
let from above is what Judy Woodruff reported just once on NBC television.
I’m sorry to say that the warnings which I made public in AUDIO LETTERS
Nos. 60 and 61 are starting to be fulfilled already. The Bolsheviks here appar-
ently failed this time to cut short the new Administration. But this is only a
reprieve, my friends. They are obsessed with the determination to retake total
control of the United States Government.
Meanwhile, the Bolsheviks here are continuing to flex their muscles in other
ways. In particular, they are hard at work to condition our minds to become
more belligerent toward Russia, even though we will be committing mass sui-
cide.
The next major step in this plan is a four-part mini-series to begin Sunday April
5 on ABC television. The series titled “MASADA” was filmed in Israel at a
cost of $20,000,000. It’s a story of more than 900 Jews who rebelled against
ancient Rome and held out for years against impossible odds. Then, faced with
the inevitable Roman victory, the Jews of Masada supposedly committed mass
suicide rather than be captured.
Ancient Masada, my friends, was the model for the Guyana kibbutz of Jim
Jones. At Jonestown just as at Masada, more than 900 men, women, and chil-
dren were supposed to have committed mass suicide rather than surrender to the
imagined enemies of Jim Jones—but it was actually mass murder, not mass sui-
390
Audio Letter 64
cide. As I explained in AUDIO LETTER No. 40, Guyana is intended by the

Bolsheviks to be the model for the United States. They want us to develop a
Masada complex, because they want us to commit mass suicide in a war we
know we cannot win—all to benefit the Bolsheviks alone.
Topic #1—FIRST-STRIKE PLANNING BY AMERICA AND RUSSIA
Topic #2—THE ECONOMIC ROAD TO DICTATORSHIP IN AMERICA
Topic #3—YOUR DECISION TO FLEE OR TO FIGHT.
Topic #1—As I say these words, a great tragedy is unfolding slowly in Poland.
Less than a year ago a new workers’ union called “Solidarity” started gaining
power in Poland. It appeared to hold out the promise of a better life for Poles.
Instead, the Solidarity union has consistently moved Poland to the brink of cri-
sis after crisis. Each crisis has been more dangerous than the one before it.
Now, Poland is moving closer to confrontation with Russia which it cannot
possibly win.
What Solidarity is doing in Poland is to taunt the Russian Bear. The moment
one crisis is averted, another is set in motion in a relentless campaign of labor
turmoil. By its actions, Solidarity is telling Russia, “If you do not intervene
militarily, we will take Poland away from you. After Poland, we will break off
Hungary, Czechoslovakia, and even East Germany, and then turn them all into
enemies on your doorstep.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 59 last October I gave a warning that this was the true
purpose of the Solidarity union in Poland. Solidarity did not spring up sponta-
neously from the working masses of Poland itself. Instead, it is financed and
controlled by the Bolsheviks here in the United States and abroad. The secret
purpose of Solidarity is not to serve Poland’s workers but to use them. Poland is
being forged into another Guyana to be sacrificed on the altar of Satanic Bol-
shevik power. Already Poland’s economy is faltering due to the recurring
strikes and turmoil. Food shortages, a favorite Bolshevik weapon, are growing
steadily worse; and now the prospect of military intervention is looming ever
closer.
Twenty-five years ago Hungary erupted in revolution, and Polish workers ri-
oted. Russia wasted no time in putting down those outbursts by force, yet the
United States Government did nothing at all except to wring its hands for public
391
consumption because in those days the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance was

in full swing.
The contrast between then and now could hardly be more dramatic, my friends.
It is hard to say which nation’s behavior has changed more—that of Russia or
of America. By comparison to a quarter century ago, Russia has moved towards
patience and tolerance. First, in full compliance with the Helsinki Accord, Pol-
ish workers were allowed to form their own union independent of government
control—in the old Bolshevik days that would have been unheard of in itself.
Then, nearly a year of turmoil and crisis has been allowed to pass without mili-
tary action by Russia. Instead there have been government concessions and
even a change of government in Poland, all to defuse labor crises. From any
objective viewpoint, all of this adds up to far more tolerant behavior by Russia
than 25 years ago.
And yet, what is America’s response compared to 1956? The answer is that the
United States is now reacting to a lesser provocation with greater belligerence!
In recent days the United States has issued public warnings to Russia which are
so blunt as to make Russia lose face if she does not act. Like the Polish Solidar-
ity union itself, the United States is goading and taunting the Russian Bear. So
Russia has moved toward moderation, while America has moved toward bellig-
erence.
The public itself is now beginning to see for itself the collapse of the Rockefel-
ler-Soviet alliance, which began coming apart in 1976—five years ago. The
split began with the still secret underwater missile crisis in the summer of that
year. The four Rockefeller Brothers tried desperately to patch things up, but
Russia finished severing the alliance in September 1977. Russia began the mas-
sive deployment of a whole new generation of manned space weapons—her
unique Space Triad; and, in the process, America’s secret military control of
space was broken.
All of this was tied directly to drastic changes taking place within the ruling
circles of Russia. I have detailed all of this in the course of many past AUDIO
LETTER reports. Today it is no longer Russia, but the United States which is
dying from the cancer of Bolshevism. The old Bolsheviks, who used to control
Russia, have been overthrown and expelled from Russia by the hundreds of
thousands, and now they are replacing the Rockefeller cartel as the most power-
ful faction in America.
392
Audio Letter 64
Meanwhile, having overthrown the Satanic Bolsheviks, Russia’s secret new

Christian rulers are struggling to revive the spiritual roots of Russia. Step by
step they are reopening churches, welcoming legal shipments of Bibles into
Russia, and allowing religious broadcasts into Russia without jamming so long
as they are non-political. But eradicating the deep scars of 60 years of Bolshe-
vism is a long and complex task. It requires a complete overhaul of the
economic and cultural life of a vast nation.
The overthrown Bolsheviks have no intention of letting the secret new Kremlin
rulers finish the job. Instead, they are obsessed with a frenzy to bring Russia to
her knees once again. In order to do that the Bolsheviks are using their new ac-
tive power base here in the United States. Step by step they are maneuvering
America toward an all-out war against Russia. In the summer of 1978 I reported
that America was secretly shifting to a first-strike nuclear strategy. That is the
only way by which the lopsided military superiority of Russia can be offset to
some degree. At that time, Russia too was making preparations to be able to
mount a first strike if need be; but for about two years now the Russian first-
strike planning has been on a back burner. Instead the Russian Kremlin shifted
its emphasis to intervention directly within the United States government. Rus-
sia’s decision to do this followed the assassination of Nelson Rockefeller in late
January 1979. The Bolsheviks here were launching an all-out coup d’etat at the
highest levels of power in America. They were moving fast with plans for a
Middle East war to erupt that same spring. That, in turn, was to lead to
NUCLEAR WAR ONE. To prevent that, the Kremlin engaged the Bolsheviks
in a no-holds-barred Intelligence war, a war of “doubles” here in Washington.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 46 I revealed Russia’s secret weapon in the war of

doubles, her “robotoids.” These entities look and act human, but they are not
human—they are simply man-made products of highly advanced genetic engi-
neering. When I made public what I did about the robotoids, I was met by
widespread disbelief. Genetic engineering was not in the news then and did not
start making headlines until at least a year later; and so many of my listeners
simply closed their minds, declared that such a thing was impossible, and
turned away. But lately I’m being asked more and more about this very subject,
these genetic replicas of human beings. With all the publicity in recent months
about genetic engineering, it is hardly any wonder.
What sounded impossible and taboo less than two years ago is now being
hinted at in the daily news. For example, the New York Times carried a big ar-
ticle just one week ago, on March 24, about so-called “gene machines.” In the
light of what I first reported in May 1979, some words from the article are
393
worth quoting because all this has a direct bearing on a historical turning point
which has just taken place. The Times’ article begins with the words, quote:
“Some day there will probably be a library containing all the genetic informa-
tion needed to create a complete human being. This idea, alarming to some,
enticing to others, is no longer entirely a flight of science fantasy. New tech-
niques and automated machines are enormously increasing scientists’ ability to
spell out the message of heredity in living cells, to put together their own artifi-
cial messages in the universal genetic code, and to analyze in complete detail
the proteins on which all life depends. New instruments promise to compress
into days or hours painstaking research that used to occupy weeks, months, or
years.”
My friends, there was nothing at all like this in the news two years ago. These
words were published only last week in the New York Times; but if you will
compare those words with what I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 46, I be-
lieve it will speak for itself. And always keep in mind what you already know
yourself:
Whatever is made public is always many years behind the latest secret devel-
opments.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 51 I revealed that the Bolsheviks also had begun de-
ploying genetic replicas called “synthetics.” A new kind of guerilla war began
at that point, unsuspected by the public, pitting Russian robotoids against Bol-
shevik synthetics. To the many who are asking about the latest in this unseen
tug of war, my comments are unchanged from AUDIO LETTER No. 55. The
situation continues to change daily, both here and in Russia, so I can only urge
you to keep this in mind as you see events unfold. You will continue to see in-
stances of strange behavior by high public officials along with flip-flops and U-
turns in policy, both domestic and foreign. These are the inevitable byproducts
of the continuing secret war of genetic doubles.
Another result of this secret war is even more serious. It has to do with the his-
torical turning point which we have just passed. A few minutes ago I mentioned
that the Kremlin’s contingency planning for a nuclear first strike was put on the
shelf about two years ago, but now I must report to you that those plans are no
longer on the shelf. They are being revived and updated for use in the highest
priority.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 last June I reported that the Bolsheviks were mak-
ing an all-out attack to retake control of the Kremlin. They were using every
394
Audio Letter 64
weapon at their disposal, including synthetics. For a while the Bolsheviks were
on the verge of success. Russia’s new ruling group were wounded badly, and
many were killed. It all took place without any notice to the public. But without
explanation, Russia’s expulsion of Bolsheviks slowed to a trickle in mid 1980,
and that is how it remained throughout the second half of 1980.
As of now, Russia’s new rulers appear to have beaten back the Bolshevik on-
slaught on the Kremlin. Two months ago, in mid January, Russia abruptly
resumed the wholesale expulsion of Bolsheviks. But the battle still is not over,
there is still turmoil in the Kremlin, and earlier this month the Bolshevik tide
out of Russia was cut back once again. Russia’s new rulers have just had a very
close call.
In the meantime, new war preparations have been rushing ahead here in the
United States. A whole new grand strategy to bring on nuclear war is now being
set in motion. Many details of this vast new plan still remain to be worked out,
and also the Bolsheviks are having to work around the limited power now exer-
cised by the crumbling Rockefeller cartel. Even so, the broad outlines of the
new war strategy are already clearly defined. The new Bolshevik road to
NUCLEAR WAR ONE consists of five parallel tracks. They are moving down
all five tracks at once, advancing on five fronts.
These five tracks are:
Track 1—Keep the Russians off balance by means of internal turmoil, Track
2—Get the American people ready for war, Track 3—A limited but crucial
American military return to space, Track 4—Continued expansion of offensive
weaponry for a nuclear war, and Track 5—The creation of unprecedented mul-
tiple crises in the world.
I have already told you a little about Track 1 of the plan—that is, fomenting
internal problems in Russia.
As for Track 2, I mentioned a little about the psychological programming of

America for war in my introduction. Our preparation for war, economically and
politically, deserves further comment, and I will do just that in my second topic.
Track 3 of the Bolshevik war path revolves around the Space Shuttle Program.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 62 I revealed the secret military mission of the shuttle
Columbia, scheduled for launch early this month. Its purpose is to place a laser-
armed, hardened spy satellite in orbit. If it succeeds, it will be the first time in
three years that the United States has had a spy satellite on duty for any length
395
of time. Russia has destroyed all the others. I also revealed in my last report that
the space shuttle spectacular scheduled to begin shortly will actually involve
two shuttles, not just one. I can now report that the plan is to carry out four (4)
military missions like this. This can be done even if a shuttle is lost on every
mission because, my friends, there are five (5) space shuttles already in exis-
tence. Only two of these have ever been seen in public—the Enterprise in 1977,
and the Columbia now at Cape Canaveral. The other three are being kept out of
sight.
Under Track 4 of the war plan, offensive weapons of all kinds are being read-
ied—some secret, some not. At one extreme are the secret weapons. One of
these is the secretly deployed American mobile ICBM, the Minuteman TX
which I first made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 55. Another is the fleet of 52
remaining Titan-2 Missiles armed with giant cobalt doomsday warheads, as I
reported last September. At the opposite extreme are the publicly-known strate-
gic weapons. They, too, are being readied, no matter how obsolete they have
become. For example, last month on February 8 the Strategic Air Command
carried out its largest air operation since World War II. SAC threw everything it
had into the exercise. Hundreds of weary old B-52s groaned into the air along
with assorted FB-111s and tankers. When war comes, the Bolsheviks know that
very few will get through to their targets, and none will return. But they will be
thrown into the conflict anyway, just for nuisance value. The Bolshevik attitude
is:
Every little bit helps.
All these things are important, my friends; but Track 5 of the plan may be the
most important of all. That is the part of the plan calling for multiple crises. It is
through these crises that the Bolsheviks expect to achieve what they have been
denied up to now—a foolproof trigger for a Nuclear War One. They plan to
confront the Russians with so many potential avenues to war that the Russians
cannot cover them all. Because of this plan, the whole world will soon be seeth-
ing with strife and turmoil. We will no longer see merely one crisis after
another—instead, it will be two, three, four, five major crises in the world all at
the same time.
Even now it is beginning to happen. Right now there are simultaneous crises in
El Salvador and in Poland—one threatens Russia’s client state Cuba, while the
other threatens Russia itself. And in the months to come there will be more, in-
volving the Middle East, the Persian Gulf, Red China, and Australia.
396
Audio Letter 64
All five tracks in the emerging Bolshevik war path converge about mid 1982.
By then they expect to have America on a war footing, as I will explain further
in my second topic. All four space shuttle missions are planned to be completed
by then. The offensive weapons now in the works will be ready, and by then the
world will be in a caldron of crises made to order for setting off nuclear war
suddenly and without warning. Just as crises in the Balkans triggered World
War I, a world in crisis will trigger NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
Russian Intelligence has already informed the Kremlin about the new grand
plan of the Bolsheviks here. Russia’s rulers have considered that information in
the light of their own deadly struggle to retain control of Russia’s government
during the past year, and they have come to a decision: The time has come for
Russia to resume preparations for their own first strike against the United
States!
In January 1980 I revealed that the hardliners were once again in control in the
Kremlin. They believe nuclear war is inevitable, that the Bolsheviks will keep
trying until they bring it about. In their view, the only realistic approach is to
prepare to win the inevitable conflict with minimum casualties to Russia. In ad-
dition, their planning is aimed at minimizing casualties and irreversible
environmental damage to planet Earth.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 38 I described what the Russian rulers call their
“cosmic perspective.” They are looking ahead to the day when planet Earth it-
self will be the headquarters of the Interplanetary Russian Empire.
If the Bolsheviks here succeed in striking first, the earth will be poisoned with
deadly radiation and radioactive fallout world-wide; yet the Bolsheviks them-
selves will largely escape the fate which they will bring down upon the rest of
us, because by picking the moment for war they will be able to hide safe and
sound in expensive Government war bunkers!
But Russia’s rulers have no intention of letting that happen. They now intend to
strike first. They plan to destroy American missiles in their silos and thereby
prevent their old-style nuclear warheads from contaminating the earth. Instead,
the Russians intend to fight the entire war with their new-age weapons which
produce no fallout. There will be geophysical warfare, shattered reservoirs and
dams, neutron bombs, and particle beam blasts from Cosmospheres overhead
and from the moon! In short order the United States as we know it will be no
more.
397
But our agony will be for us alone—there will be no fallout to plague the rest of
the world. Within the United States, rural areas and small towns without mili-
tary or other federal installations will be spared. If the Russians follow through
on this plan, rural areas will be relatively safe in the initial attack. Even so, the
fate that now awaits our nation beggars description. We have allowed the Sa-
tanic Bolsheviks to live among us, to warp our ideals, and to corrupt our nation.
We have not resisted their intrigues to get us into war; so, now, plans are being
made by Russia to exterminate the Bolsheviks here—and when that happens,
my friends, tens of millions of us will also die with them.
Topic #2—Last week on March 26 a new presidential council was created by a

presidential Executive Order. It’s called the PRESIDENT’S COUNCIL ON
INTEGRITY AND EFFICIENCY. The Council will have 23 members. This
will include officials from the Office of Management and Budget (OMB), the
FBI, the Justice Department, the General Accounting Office of Congress, and
representatives of certain Cabinet Secretaries. It will also include 16 Inspectors
General assigned to various government departments.
The post of Inspector General is itself a new one. It was created by Congress in
1978. It was the Treasury Inspector General who sent a useless report concern-
ing Fort Knox to Senator William Proxmire last September 30, 1980. I have
discussed that report for you in previous AUDIO LETTERS recently. It gave
the superficial impression of an investigation to protect the public interest, but
its only real function was to help keep the lid on the covered-up GOLD
SCANDAL.
Likewise we are told that the new Council on Integrity and Efficiency is being
created to root out waste, fraud, and inefficiency in government. We’re sup-
posed to believe that it will be the Government’s way of keeping watch on
itself; but, my friends, this is nothing more than sugar-coating for dictatorship.
It is taken straight from the pages of the secret new Constitution for America
which I first made public in 1975. We are witnessing the creation of what the
secret new Constitution calls “the Watchkeeping Service.” The so-called
Watchkeeping Service would be headed by an official designated the “Watch-
keeper.” The Watchkeeper, my friends, corresponds to the Chairman of the new
Council on Integrity and Efficiency, Edwin Harper.
The secret new Constitution specifies, quote:
“With the assistance of an appropriate staff, the Watchkeeper shall gather and
organize information concerning the adequacy, competence, and integrity of
governmental agencies and their personnel.”
398
Audio Letter 64
Further on, the new Constitution adds that to carry out the purposes of the
Watchkeeping Service, quote:
“Personnel may be appointed, investigations made, witnesses examined, post

audits made, and information required.”
If you are one of those who demanded a copy of the Treasury Inspector Gen-
eral’s report to Senator Proxmire, the words I just read from the secret new
Constitution should sound very relevant. These things are exactly what the so-
called Inspector Generals pretend to do; and in describing the new Council on
Integrity and Efficiency, White House spokesmen said that the Council will
have the job of developing, quote:
“A corps of well-trained and highly skilled auditors and investigators.”
My friends, I first made public the secret new Constitution for America in my
AUDIO BOOK talking tape No. 4 in July 1975. Shortly after that I also re-
leased a pamphlet containing the entire text of the secret new Constitution. That
is what I was reading from a few moments ago. As I detailed in my special
AUDIO BOOK tape, it is an elaborate prescription for Corporate Socialist Dic-
tatorship here in America.
When I first made the secret new Constitution public in 1975, the late Nelson
Rockefeller, then as Vice-President, was hoping to bring it into being all at
once. At the same time, he expected to make himself President of the new dis-
guised dictatorship for nine years. And, if Sara Jane Moore had not missed
when she shot at then President Gerald Ford, Rockefeller might have suc-
ceeded; but by the grace of God it did not turn out that way.
So instead, Nelson’s late brother John D. Rockefeller III spearheaded an alter-

nate plan. In full-page ads all across America, a “Manifesto of Change” was
published. It proclaimed a so-called “Bicentennial Era” from 1976 to 1989. It
was said that it took 13 years from the beginning of the American Revolution to
the final emergence of America’s new government 200 years ago; and so they
said they would give themselves that long again, if need be, to once again revo-
lutionize America’s government.
Most people have long since forgotten all about the Bicentennial and its ob-
scure declarations of change to come; but step by step, gradually, the Secret
Constitution is already being implemented all around us. It was set in motion by
the Corporate Socialist Rockefeller cartel, and ever since the November 1980
399
election, the crumbling Rockefeller machine has been trying to push it ahead.
Even the loud cries of governmental deregulation are not what they appear to
be. They are actually intended to pave the way for the so-called “corporate au-
thorities” spelled out in the secret new Constitution. These would enable “big
business” to function free of government restraint and yet exercise life-and-
death power over all small businessmen.
It was all set in motion by the four Rockefeller Brothers in their heyday, but
two years ago the Brothers were secretly removed by the Bolsheviks, and now
the Bolsheviks themselves are turning part of these corporate socialist plans
against the Rockefeller cartel. An example was the Supreme Court Branti deci-
sion which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 61. Because of that decision, the
new Administration here in Washington has already started reappointing some
of the Inspectors General who were Carter holdovers, so it is a very mixed bag
right now.
The regrouped Rockefeller forces under John J. McCloy are slowly gaining
power; but as I reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 60 and 61 for November
and January, the Bolsheviks intend to cut short the so-called Reagan Admini-
stration. Two days ago outside the Washington Hilton Hotel here, it almost
happened already. As it turned out, the Reagan Administration was not halted
that time, but there will be some slowdown in the plans of the Rockefeller car-
tel. Meanwhile the Bolsheviks here will redouble their efforts to retake total
control of the United States Government.
Meanwhile, the United States is being shut down to get ready for war. Money is
being diverted from all kinds of programs with the excuse that they are wasteful
and inflationary. But the funds are being dumped instead into the most wasteful
and inflationary use of all—massive funding for unproductive weapons to fight
a needless and hopeless war! In spite of all the political rhetoric about fighting
inflation, it will grow steadily worse. One cosmetic measure after another will
be announced but they will not work, my friends, because they are not supposed
to work.
Finally the time will be ripe for dramatic action. The President will announce to
the nation that the situation is desperate. He will say that the time has come for
tough action, and millions of Americans will agree; and with that, he will de-
clare a NATIONAL ECONOMIC EMERGENCY. It will be like August 1971
all over again. President Nixon declared an “Economic Emergency” supposedly
to fight inflation. There were dramatic actions for cosmetic effect, including
Wage and Price Controls; but the most important action was hardly noticed.
Nixon closed the GOLD window for international settlements. It was actually a
400
Audio Letter 64
secret declaration of war against the dollar, disguised to look like the opposite.
It set off the stagflation era with inflation far worse than what had gone before.
Once again we will be told that a National Economic Emergency is being de-
clared in order to fight inflation; and, just as before, there will be dramatic
measures for psychological impact; but in the end, the result will again be just
to make matters worse.
As of now, the plans are being laid to declare the National Economic Emer-
gency toward the end of this year 1981. The most dramatic part of the plan has
to do with the $100.00 bill. In that connection, our psychological programming
for things to come is already beginning by way of the so-called “news.” Right
now we are hearing more and more about the old theory that the money supply
is the key to inflation. Those who subscribe to this money supply theory are
called “monetarists.”
Monetarist theory no longer holds water, as I explained eight years ago in my

book “THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR.” In this age of multi-
national corporations, other forces are far more important than the money
supply, but the new Administration is packed with monetarists. They are hint-
ing that if only we could restrain the money supply, inflation would dampen
down.
In a seemingly unrelated vein, lately we are hearing a great deal about the tons
of cash being used by organized crime. A recent story on the CBS television
program “60 Minutes” was an example of this. The story dealt with the oceans
of $100.00 bills flowing through Miami banks these days. There are so many
that they are not counted, they are weighed. The program showed $100.00 bills
being bundled and stacked for storage and shipment to other banks by the Fed-
eral Reserve branch bank in Miami. The point of the program was that much of
this money was drug money. Banks are taking in enormous amounts of cash,
mostly in $100.00 bills, in areas where organized crime is heavy. Yet in other
areas, cash is scarce. If you don’t believe that, just go to your bank and try to
withdraw $1000 or $2000 in cash, if you have that much in an account. In many
areas you will be refused; the bank will tell you that you will have to wait until
the cash will become available.
In this and other ways, my friends, the $100.00 bill will gradually be turned into
a straw man to be knocked down in the coming Economic Emergency. When
the Economic Emergency is declared, the presidential Executive Order will de-
clare the $100.00 bill illegal tender. Everyone holding $100.00 bills will be
given a short time to redeem them. The redemption period currently planned
401
will be three (3) days. After that, the $100.00 bill will be repudiated by the
United States. If you are still holding any after that, you will simply be out of
luck.
To redeem your $100.00 bills, you will be required to go to your own bank, one
where you have an account. No bank will be required to redeem bills for non-
depositors unless you will sign an affidavit that you have no accounts in any
other bank. When you turn in your $100.00 bills at the bank, you’ll be required
by presidential Executive Order to give your name, address, and Social Security
number. If you turn in more than a certain small amount, perhaps $500.00, you
will also be required to sign an affidavit stating where you got them. Up to that
same small amount, the bank will redeem your $100.00 bills in cash of smaller
denominations. Any amount beyond that will be redeemed only as a deposit to
your account at any one time.
All of this will come as a complete shock to the American people. The only ad-
vance notice of the $100.00 bill repudiation will go to foreign central banks. A
mere 24 hours before the Emergency declaration, they will be informed about
it. The vast quantities of $100.00 bills abroad will be subject to the same brief
redemption period as here in the United States.
America’s repudiation of the $100 bill will be portrayed as a tough attack on

inflation and on crime as well. The disclosure provisions will be said to be de-
signed to reveal holders of concealed wealth, including criminals. More
importantly, the elimination of the $100.00 bill will supposedly help bring the
money supply under control—and with it, inflation!
Hundred-dollar bills now constitute about one-third of the total dollar value of
all United States currency in circulation here and abroad. Under the plan, many
will be redeemed as bank deposits—that is, bookkeeping entries. Those can be
watched and controlled far more easily than cash. We will even be told that the
supposed anti-crime angle will have an anti-inflation bonus. Criminals holding
large hoards of $100.00 bills may decide never to turn them in and thereby re-
veal themselves, and that will result in an actual drop in the money supply. The
monetarists will assure us that this will be like poking a pin into the swollen
balloon of inflation. The presidential Executive Order declaring the emergency
will also proclaim a “Bank Holiday” of several days. This will be for the pur-
pose of preparing the banks for the redemption rush to follow. When the banks
reopen, the actual redemption period to turn in your $100.00 bills will begin.
The emergency proclamation will also close the nation’s Stock Markets for a
similar period. Two excuses will be given for this. One is that the Administra-
402
Audio Letter 64
tion will want Wall Street to absorb the news in an orderly manner without any
chance of panic. The other excuse will be that large amounts of crime-related
$100 bills are being laundered through the Stock Exchange. The cutoff of those
cash transactions will come as a shock to Wall Street.
As a psychological ploy, it will be a master stroke. It will seem to say that

America has finally gotten serious about its inflation. The dollar will temporar-
ily become stronger abroad, and the price of gold will plummet. Speculators
with inside information will sell gold short ahead of time; then, after the price
drops, they will buy up the gold again. The psychological shock of the $100.00
bill ploy will soon wear off, and then gold prices will head upward again on the
crest of new crises.
For all its dramatic impact, the repudiation of the $100 bill will have no lasting
effect on inflation. It will be defended by the monetarists as justified by their
money supply theories, but it will actually attack nothing but the symptoms of
inflation.
If inflation is really to be cured, it must be by going to its CAUSES, and that

cannot be done without tackling the scandal of America’s missing gold re-
serves.
Even so, the elimination of the $100.00 bill will have a lasting effect in another
way. It will begin to condition Americans to the idea that there is nothing sa-
cred about the currency we are accustomed to using. Only a little further down
the road, the process will be completed by replacing our shriveling dollars with
a new currency. But even that will be only a way station on the way to the final
destination of a cashless society.
The final dream of the money monopoly masters is to reduce everything to

credit entries processed by computers. If they can achieve that, then they will
achieve total control over the money supply; and they believe they will also
achieve total control over you and me. At long last we will all be their slaves.
The declaration of Economic Emergency will also have another purpose. It will
secretly activate the Emergency powers of the President for wartime measures.
America will start moving more quickly onto a war footing. The bureaucracy of
wartime controls will start cranking up, all in the name of “fighting inflation”;
and having been terrorized by the Government into turning in our $100.00 bills,
as we did our gold in 1933, we Americans will start developing a wartime men-
tality. It will take place at a subconscious level. Most of us will be unable to
define why we somehow feel uneasy; but without being told a word, Americans
403
will feel the ghostly pre-war echoes of the 1930’s. The $100.00 bill episode will
also leave many of us feeling helpless to resist the seemingly almighty Gov-
ernment. The message will be burned into our minds: Obey or else. We will be
on the road to War, and we will also be on the road to Dictatorship here in
America!
YOUR DECISION TO FLEE OR TO FIGHT
Topic #3—My friends, these are the things which are now being planned for us.
It is real, it is happening. If you still don’t believe it, just think again about
those moments outside the Washington Hilton Hotel two days ago. Assassina-
tion politics and suicidal war preparations have got to stop. We have arrived at
this point along an economic road; so to stop it we, too, must fight back with
economic weapons.
The one economic weapon which is big enough to do the job is the FORT
KNOX GOLD SCANDAL. That is what I explained in AUDIO LETTER No.
56 last summer when I first began giving you my answers to the question:
“What can I do?” Lately a few of my listeners seem to be losing sight of this, so
I think I should say it again: If we want to do something about our headlong
rush into disaster, the FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL is the way to do it. If
we just get bored and walk away from it, my friends, it’s all over! We will have
forfeited America’s last chance.
Perhaps there are some among you who are growing weary of our “Preventive
War of Truth.” That is why I was so reluctant ever to begin the process of giv-
ing you my answers to the question:
“What can I do?” When I began doing this in AUDIO LETTER No. 56 last
summer, I emphasized as strongly as I could that we will have to stick with it if
we want to win; but in our speeded up world today, scandals are like water
poured over sand—they make a big splash for a moment, but they hardly sink
in before they are gone.
Many people get bored, they are forgetful, they lose interest quickly; and be-
cause all this is so true, our enemies always know they can get away with
anything. All they have to do is wait a little while and we will oblige them by
forgetting about it, whatever it was. If there are some who feel this way, it
would be best for them to turn back now and go no further. Better to flee the
coming catastrophe now, before it happens, than to end up later as a pathetic
refugee from a devastated America. To those who feel they must make that
choice, I can only say: Go, and may God be with you.
404
Audio Letter 64
But large numbers of you are still saying in your letters:
“What is the next step? What is the next action we can take?” To all of you I
say: “May we now redouble our ‘Preventive War of Truth.’”
It’s time for us to draw our second wind, because the longer we persist without
giving up, the more dismayed our enemies will become.
In Topic #2 I discussed the creation of the President’s new Council on Integrity

and Efficiency. I also revealed its unadmitted source—the secret new Constitu-
tion for Dictatorship in America. But like other recent Presidents, the current
occupant of the Oval Office is an actor, doing as he is programmed to do. In the
past, other Presidents have later expressed deep regrets for taking actions which
they did not understand at the time:
Woodrow Wilson publicly regretted signing the bill creating the Federal Re-
serve System.
Harry Truman regretted his creation of the CIA, as he said in public shortly af-
ter the assassination of President Kennedy in Dallas.
And at the end of his presidency, Dwight Eisenhower gave a warning against
the military industrial complex which had dominated his public life.
So there could be a ray of hope in connection with the new Council on Integrity
and Efficiency. Just after signing the Executive Order to create it, the entity
President Reagan said, quote:
“We are going to follow every lead, root out every incompetent, and prosecute
every crook we find who is cheating the people of this nation.”
My friends, if the President really meant those words, then we should take him
up on it. If he did not mean them, then we should call his bluff, because the
only thing more dangerous than a declared enemy is a false friend. Either way,
you have a right to petition the President for redress of grievances.
So, my friends, here’s what I suggest.
The President promised to, quote: “...prosecute every crook we find who is
cheating the people of this nation.” And we, the people, have been cheated out
of practically our entire monetary GOLD supply. A hundred years ago thou-
405
sands of hard-working prospectors scraped together that gold, one or two hard
ounces at a time; but a few manicured international bankers and their bureau-
crats were able to “mine” all that gold out of Treasury depositories without
even soiling their hands!
The President also promised, quote: “We are going to follow every lead...” If he
means those words, then he should be eager to do what neither Senator Prox-
mire nor the Federal Reserve Banks have been willing to do up to now. He
should be anxious to follow the many leads which have already come to light
over our stolen GOLD.
My friends, we should bombard the White House with MAILGRAMS—not

letters, not post cards, but Mailgrams—the more the better from you, your
friends, your neighbors, your relatives. It will cost you some money to send
Mailgrams, but the stakes are enormous. This is one of those moments when
half-measures or penny-pinching will cost us dearly, very dearly!
WE MUST HAVE IMPACT.
To send your Mailgram, simply call Western Union and say that you want to
send a MAILGRAM to President Reagan, then dictate your message. Here is a
sample to get you started:
“Dear President Reagan:
When you created your new Council on Integrity and Efficiency recently, you
made some comments which I heartily applaud. You promised to follow every
lead in rooting out those who are cheating the people of this nation. I would like
to believe that you truly meant those words, and so would all my friends and
neighbors. Therefore I want to call your urgent attention to some very glaring
leads which need to be followed. They point toward disastrous cheating of the
American public by certain individuals in government. I am referring to the
mounting evidence that large amounts of America’s alleged gold stockpiles
have been illegally disposed of.
In a cassette tape commentary last month, Dr. Beter made public two Treasury
documents which contradict each other. Both documents pertain to the London
Gold Pool shipments of the 1960’s but there is a discrepancy of 165-million
ounces between them. At current prices that is over eighty-billion dollars, far
more than the budget cuts you are now proposing. If any lead deserves to be
followed, surely this one does. You can do that easily, Mr. President, since Dr.
Beter’s Washington office is located close to the White House. Dr. Beter has
406
Audio Letter 64
promised to keep his listeners informed of your response, and I will inform eve-
ryone else I know in turn.”
End of Mailgram, followed by your name and address.
My friends, time is growing shorter and shorter. We must know who is FOR us,
the people of America; and who is AGAINST us. Senator Proxmire has shown
that he is not for us; the Presidents and Directors of the Regional Federal Re-
serve Banks are gradually doing the same thing by not acting; so now it is the
President’s turn. Let us pray that his response will be different, but either way
we will know.
Now it’s time to give you my “Last Minute Summary.” Two days ago an at-
tempt was made to cut short the new Administration under the name of Ronald
Reagan but the attempt failed, giving us a reprieve from an immediate return to
total Bolshevik control of the Government. Even so, America is being shut
down for war. A “Declaration of Economic Emergency” is being planned for
late this year that will include repudiation of the $100.00 bill. At the same time
the machinery of Dictatorship is slowly taking shape all around us. And now,
plans are once again being laid—not only here but also in Russia—for a first
strike in all-out nuclear war!
My friends, there is only one way to stop all this—that is to expose those re-
sponsible before America is put to the sword. The Sword of our Lord Jesus
Christ is the TRUTH; and if we will only use this weapon of the Truth, we will
find that it is more powerful than all the other weapons conceived by man.
407
Audio Letter 64
April 27, 1981
“T minus 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4...We’ve gone for main engine start. We have main
engine start.” (Engine noise takes over for some two seconds) “...liftoff of
America’s first Space Shuttle, and the Shuttle has cleared the tower.” (Then
again the roaring noise on the AUDIO LETTER tape.)
And that’s how it all began, my friends, just two weeks ago—Sunday, April 12,
1981. After years of delay, America’s first attempt to launch a space shuttle into
orbit had finally begun.
In days gone by, the voice of “Mission Control” has always been a familiar
hallmark of American manned flights into space. In the early days, beginning
with “PROJECT MERCURY,” the voice was that of Col. John (Shorty) Pow-
ers. Later, during the “APOLLO” program there were other voices; but
regardless of who it was, that familiar voice of “Mission Control” would always
stay with us throughout each space flight—that is, until this time. This time the
voice of Mission Control, up until the moment of launch, was that of NASA
spokesman Hugh Harris. The last words Harris spoke as the voice of Mission
Control were the words you just heard: “The Shuttle has cleared the tower.”
Television cameras followed the Shuttle as it climbed higher and higher on a

column of steam and smoke. For another 30 seconds or so, we were allowed to
hear the slowly fading roar of the Shuttle’s rocket engines. Then the sounds
from Mission Control abruptly changed. Exactly 45 seconds after lift-off, “live”
audio from Mission Control was terminated. In its place NASA began feeding
the radio and television networks an elaborate tape recording, which had been
prepared far ahead of time by NASA. The change-over from “live” audio to the
NASA tape recording sounded like this: (First, loud roaring for 10 seconds,
abruptly fading, then into a steadily increasing-in-loudness humming-roaring
for some 10 seconds.) “4-34...?” “Roger.” (More of the roaring sound.)
Just 45 seconds after lift-off, the falsified NASA coverage of the flight of the
“Columbia” began. We were still able to see the Columbia by way of long-
distance television cameras for another minute and a half, but the sounds we
409
were hearing were no longer “live.” They were the sounds of the special NASA
tape recording. For the first minute or so of the tape recording, we heard noth-
ing but the sound effects simulating conversation between the Shuttle and
NASA-Houston. Then, for the first time, we heard the anonymous new voice of
Mission Control. It was no longer the familiar live voice of Hugh Harris, but
the recorded voice of someone else. For added realism, the new voice was inter-
rupted in turn by the recorded voice of the alleged capsule communicator
Daniel Brandenstein. It sounded like this: (first a high-pitched screech followed
by) “One minute 45 seconds, coming up on go-go-go.” “Columbia, you’re
negative seats.” “That call-up says that, Columbia, the altitude is too high for
ejection seat use.”
By that point the shuttle Columbia was more than 20 miles high, and climbing
fast. Everything was going according to plan so far, so the things we were hear-
ing on the tape recording corresponded to what we were seeing. We could still
see the Shuttle on our TV sets, but it had dwindled to nothing more than three
bright spots dancing in the distant sky.
The last thing that you and I were able to see and verify for ourselves about the
Shuttle was the separation of those two giant solid-rocket boosters. A little over
two minutes after liftoff, we were able to watch the boosters, two burning bright
spots, break off to each side. That left only the single tiny flame of the Shuttle
itself, gradually fading into invisibility. Several seconds later the NASA tape
recording caught up with what we had already seen, and said the boosters had
separated. Moments later the tiny bright dot of the Shuttle faded from our
screens. It was too far away for the television cameras to follow any longer. We
had had our last look at the real space shuttle Columbia!
In AUDIO LETTER No. 62 two months ago, I gave an advance alert about the
secret military mission of the space shuttle Columbia. At that time I made pub-
lic what the mission was really all about. I was also able to reveal what to
expect in the falsified NASA coverage of the mission.
The falsified coverage was designed to accomplish two purposes. First, to com-
pletely hide the military nature of the mission; and second, to make sure the
mission looked like a total success, no matter what might happen in secret. As I
detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 62, the Bolsheviks here in the federal gov-
ernment are depending heavily on the Space Shuttle Program to get ready for a
nuclear war against Russia.
The falsified NASA coverage of the mission of the space shuttle Columbia was
carried out exactly according to plan. I revealed this plan two months ago.
410
Audio Letter 64
There were the standard brief cockpit scenes made by techniques which I will
describe later. Just to make it look good, it was spiced up by telling us that a
few non-critical tiles had fallen off. Otherwise we were told over and over how
perfectly the Columbia was performing.
Four days ago on April 23, a news conference about the flight was held in
Houston, Texas, by the alleged two astronauts, John Young and Robert Crip-
pen. The entity called John Young summed up the flight in words that were
more meaningful than most people suspected. Referring to the falsified flight
which we followed on television, he called it, quote: “...even better than nor-
mal.” And so it was, my friends. The Bolsheviks who now control NASA bent
over backwards to paint the image of an abnormally perfect shuttle flight.
Meanwhile the actual Shuttle mission, which was carried out in secret, did not
go according to plan. After the Shuttle disappeared from our television screens,
the flight continued for barely four more minutes before disaster struck. The
Columbia never even reached earth orbit!
My friends, I believe you have both the right and the need to know what hap-
pened to the space shuttle Columbia two weeks ago. I believe you deserve to
know, in detail, how and why the truth was hidden from you. The stakes in-
volve nothing less than the very survival of our land and our way of life.
Topic #1—THE ADVANCE PREPARATIONS FOR THE SPACE SHUTTLE

MISSION
Topic #2—THE ABORTED FLIGHT OF THE SPACE SHUTTLE

“COLUMBIA”
Topic #3—THE NASA COVERUP OF THE “COLUMBIA” DISASTER.
Topic #1—There is an old saying that “Seeing is believing.” For that reason,
television has become the No. 1 tool of deception in America today. Through
television we are made to see things we do not understand so that we will be-
lieve things that are not true. If television were used honestly and
constructively, television could be a great force for good. Instead, it’s used con-
tinually to hoax, deceive, and mislead us. Video-taping makes events which
took place weeks or months ago look as if they were taking place “live” right
before our eyes. Computer editing enables scenes to be spliced together to cre-
ate completely artificial images that look real. Special effects of all kinds enable
these television hoaxes to be very convincing indeed.
411
Two years ago I described one major television hoax in detail in AUDIO
LETTER No. 44. That hoax involved no less than the NBC television news
program “Meet the Press.” Now we have been treated to another great televi-
sion hoax, and this one was the granddaddy of them all. In terms of sheer
deception, this was the “Meet the Press” hoax, “Guyana,” and SKYLAB all
rolled into one. This was the hoax coverage of the first flight of the space shut-
tle Columbia.
To begin with, we were led to believe that until two weeks ago no space shuttle
had ever left the earth’s atmosphere and gone into space. We were also led to
believe that the very first space flight by a shuttle had to be an orbital flight,
instead of something less extreme. To make matters still worse, NASA swore
up and down that this very first flight, pushing the Shuttle to its limits, just had
to have men aboard. At one point even John Young himself was quoted to this
effect very widely in the controlled major media. For example, two months ago
on February 15, the New York Times carried a big article about the Shuttle.
Quoting from the article: “Mr. Young said, to have conducted an unmanned
orbital flight of the Shuttle first would have added perhaps $500,000,000 to
project costs, and meant another year’s delay.” Statements like that were
cooked up purely to explain away the many things that did not add up about the
announced plans for the Columbia’s flight. Many people believe these explana-
tions, but they were just a litany of lies.
For example, time after time during the television coverage of the alleged flight
this month, John Young’s earlier statement was totally contradicted. Authorita-
tive spokesmen pointed out over and over that the astronauts control the Shuttle
by telling computers aboard the Shuttle what they want. The computers then do
all the actual activation and control of the Shuttle—and, in an emergency, the
Shuttle can fly itself into orbit, re-enter, and even land itself without help from
the pilots. So much for all those lies NASA told us about an unmanned first
flight being impossible.
The real reason astronauts were aboard the first orbital flight was the one I re-
vealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 62. It was a military mission, and the
astronauts had to be aboard to carry it out. NASA told us that the flight this
month was only a test flight with the cargo bay practically empty. But the cargo
bay of the Columbia was not empty. It carried a laser-armed Spy Satellite
equipped with special shields to protect it against Russian space weapons. “But
wait a minute,” you say. “They showed us live pictures from space and you
could see that the bay was empty.” No, my friends, not “live” pictures but video
tapes. The pictures with the doors closed were taken inside a training mock-up
412
Audio Letter 64
of the shuttle that is carried inside a specially modified Boeing 747. The pic-
tures with the doors open were taken on the ground inside a darkened hangar.
Then these scenes were combined by video tape editing techniques with video
tapes of the earth taken from orbit years ago. The final product was what you
saw on television. It was not what it appeared to be, but “seeing is believing.”
My friends, the next time you see a replay of those scenes with the Shuttle
doors open, supposedly in space, there is a telltale clue to look for. Look at the
shadows visible inside the open cargo bay. Shadows in space tend to be sharp
and harsh because there is no air to soften and diffuse them. The shadows we
saw in the video tapes on television were softer because they were not made in
space. Also, look at the angle of the shadows. The earth is shown floating
straight overhead, and it is all in daylight. Look at the slant of the shadows in-
side the open cargo bay, then ask yourself: “Where is the light coming from to
make shadows like that?”
The impossible shadows which we saw in the Shuttle bay video tapes are just
one small example of the many discrepancies in the NASA hoax. More to the
point, NASA has pretended that the Columbia flight this month was the very
first shuttle flight into space. We are supposed to believe that the only previous
shuttle operations were a few gliding tests launched from mid air by another
modified 747. Nothing could be more ridiculous or more untrue.
There is one very obvious question about the Space Shuttle Program which
NASA has always managed to side step. Somehow no one ever quite dares to
ask it. The question is: Why wasn’t the space shuttle “Enterprise” the first to be
sent into orbit? After all, the Enterprise made its public debut nearly four years
ago in the summer of 1977.
To all outward appearances, the Enterprise looks almost identical to its sister
ship, the Columbia. The differences between the two are so subtle that you
would never notice them unless you knew exactly what to look for. The engines
of the Enterprise look just like the engines of the Columbia. The Enterprise is
also covered with the same system of thermal tiles as the Columbia, so again,
the question is: Why wasn’t the Enterprise sent into orbit long ago? Why did
NASA wait three years and more to launch the Columbia instead? The answer,
my friends, is that the Enterprise was designed to be a training ship for shuttle
astronauts. It is not meant for orbital flight. Instead, it is specially equipped to
make shorter, suborbital flights into space. In effect, it can do everything short
of going into earth orbit. It can climb to orbital altitudes as high as 125 miles
before dropping back to earth. This enables astronauts to practice working in
weightlessness for up to five and one-half minutes at a time. It also allows as-
413
tronauts to practice landing the shuttle, slowing down from speeds of around
5,000 miles per hour.
The Enterprise is exactly like its sister ships in the crew compartment and
cockpit. What makes the Enterprise radically different is the cargo bay area.
The Enterprise cannot carry cargo because the bay area is taken up by rocket
fuel tanks. The tanks of the Enterprise can hold well over 100,000 pounds of
rocket fuel when fully loaded. To make a suborbital hop into space, the Enter-
prise is perched on top of a modified Boeing 747 known as the “Launch
Aircraft.” Inside the 747 there are technicians with instruments and support
equipment for the shuttle. The shuttle Enterprise is loaded with rocket fuel, and
then the 747 takes off. At an altitude of around 40,000 feet, the shuttle is
launched. The launch techniques are derived from the old days of the X-15 Re-
search Airplane and others before it. The Enterprise is released from its mounts,
rises up, and then falls back behind the 747. As soon as it is clear of the 747, the
Enterprise starts its rocket engines and zooms upward at a steep angle. After a
minute or so the rockets shut off, and the Enterprise is left to coast upward to its
peak altitude and then drop back toward earth. From the moment the engines
shut off until the shuttle begins re-entering the atmosphere five or six minutes
later, the astronauts inside are weightless.
Astronauts Young and Crippen made more than half a dozen training flights
like this aboard the Enterprise before they lifted off aboard the Columbia at
Cape Canaveral. That is why they were so ready to go all the way into orbit.
They had already done everything else that was necessary to work their way up
to it. Of course, other training was necessary to work their way up to those sub-
orbital flights aboard the Enterprise. For one thing, they spent many hours in
the detailed replica of the shuttle which is housed inside a modified Boeing
747. The “Flying Mock-Up,” as it is called, is a simulator designed to acquaint
astronauts with shuttle operation as realistically as possible. One of its advan-
tages is that it can even provide periods of weightlessness of up to about 45
seconds. The 747 pilot does this by flying a precise arc through the air called a
“parabolic trajectory.” It’s an old technique developed a quarter century ago to
help astronauts get accustomed to weightlessness.
All of these things and more were originally conceived and developed for
purely technical reasons, but they are being kept secret from you because the
Bolsheviks who now control NASA have turned them into tools of deception
against you and me. Lately, publicity about the Space Shuttle Program has been
focused on three geographic locations. One is the launch site for orbital mis-
sions, Cape Canaveral, Florida. Another is Edwards Air Force Base, California.
414
Audio Letter 64
The third is that old stand-by, the NASA Manned Space Flight Center in Hous-
ton, Texas.
As always, we are being distracted from paying serious attention to the one area
that is most important of all. It is the missing link, the true nerve center of the
entire Space Shuttle Program. My friends, I’m talking about the White Sands
Missile Range in southern New Mexico.
Most people today rarely give a second thought to White Sands. Few people
remember that White Sands is where America’s Space Program got its start af-
ter World War II. Captured German V-2 rockets were taken to White Sands to
be studied and test fired. After the V-2s, there were American rockets, the
Navy’s Viking series, and others. They were launched, rocketed upward into
the fringes of space, and came back to earth—all within the boundaries of the
vast White Sands Missile Range. One time a missile got out of control, veered
south, and almost destroyed a small Mexican town when it crashed to earth; but
that incident was a dramatic exception to the normal situation. Most of the time,
no one outside White Sands even knew when rockets were launched. Recently
the public has been made aware of the vast wide-open spaces that constitute
Edwards Air Force Base in California. For comparison, White Sands is so huge
that it would hold nearly 100 Edwards Air Force Bases!
White Sands, my friends, is the training base for space shuttle pilots; and since
late 1977 it has also become much more.
It is the geographic key to the secret military missions which are now the cen-
tral focus of the Space Shuttle Program. The Shuttle Program today is being
managed in a way that is far different from the original plans. In August 1977
we were shown early gliding tests of the training shuttle Enterprise. The plan of
NASA was to drum up public support for the Shuttle Program, just as they had
done a decade earlier in the Moon Program.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 26 I detailed how the Apollo Program, the biggest
military program in American history, was disguised as a peaceful scientific
venture. In the same way, the original plan was to bathe the military Shuttle
Program in the glare of deceptive publicity. In the process we would have
learned about the suborbital space capability of the Enterprise. Even the crucial
White Sands would have received more publicity.
What changed it all was the secret “Battle of the Harvest Moon” in space Sep-
tember 27, 1977. This secret space battle, which I made public that month in
AUDIO LETTER No. 26, took place barely one month after the first gliding
415
tests of the space shuttle Enterprise. Russia’s military take-over of space was
under way!
Only the next month, October 1977, a newly operational Russian Cosmos Inter-
ceptor shot down SKYLAB. SKYLAB, along with its crew of five American
astronauts secretly aboard, died in a giant fireball over the United States. I re-
ported on SKYLAB’s fate that month in AUDIO LETTER No. 27, and also
revealed that NASA was initiating a prolonged cover-up of what had happened.
NASA wanted everyone to forget about that mysterious headline-making fire-
ball, so they pretended that SKYLAB was still in orbit but sinking
unexpectedly. NASA used stories about the space shuttle as part of their
SKYLAB cover-up. They pretended that perhaps the shuttle would come along
in time to save SKYLAB. As I reported then, that was a double lie by NASA.
First, SKYLAB could never be saved because it had already been destroyed.
Second, the United States was in no position at that time to launch the shuttle or
anything else of a military nature into space. Russia was deploying her secret
new Space Triad of advanced manned space weapons.
America’s previous military control of space had been totally shattered by Rus-
sia. Our military base on the moon had been put out of action in the “Battle of
the Harvest Moon.” Russian Cosmos Interceptors had started sweeping the
skies clear of American Spy Satellites, and Russian hovering electrogravitic
weapons platforms, the Cosmospheres, were making headlines by creating
enormous air booms along the East Coast and elsewhere. All of these things
took place just as America’s Space Shuttle Program was getting off the ground.
The result was a complete reorganization of the Shuttle Program. The old plans
to bathe it in continuous publicity were thrown out. The Bolsheviks here, who
have replaced the Rockefeller cartel in many areas of power, cast a net of se-
crecy over all these new military plans. We were never told about many of the
capabilities of the training shuttle Enterprise, and we were never told about the
many things which are going on at White Sands in the military Shuttle Pro-
gram. By keeping these things secret from us, the Bolsheviks here have placed
themselves in a powerful position to deceive us.
We have never been told about the modified NASA 747 which carries a com-
plete replica of the crew quarters and cargo bay of a shuttle. Therefore we are
unaware that this airplane, originally intended for training, has become a Bol-
shevik tool of deception against us. When we saw video tapes of astronauts in
the simulated Shuttle cockpit, we naturally thought it was the real thing. Seeing
a notebook float in mid air for a few seconds next to the astronauts, we were
supposed to think: “They are weightless because they are in orbit.” We were
416
Audio Letter 64
given no clue that these moments of weightlessness had taken place months
earlier in a 747 flying a controlled arc through the air. Likewise, we were
shown one or two episodes of the astronauts moving around the cabin, obvi-
ously weightless for up to three or four minutes. What we were not told is that
these scenes had been video-taped months earlier during suborbital space hops
by the training shuttle Enterprise.
Many of my listeners have called or written with the same observation about
the first of these episodes shown the day of the launch. We heard the alleged
“live” conversation of Young and Crippen, and yet, in the television picture,
they were not moving their lips. They had merely posed for the camera during a
suborbital flight months earlier, and they recorded the sound track we heard
only days before the launch.
While NASA may have fooled you and me about the Space Shuttle, they did
not fool the new rulers of Russia. They learned last fall what the flight of the
Columbia was really all about; and, my friends, when the Columbia was
launched two weeks ago, the Russians were ready and waiting!
Topic #2—A month before the shuttle “Columbia” blasted off from Cape Ca-
naveral, the two astronauts who were to ride in it held a news conference in
Houston. The day was March 9, 1981. Astronaut Robert Crippen caught the at-
tention of the reporters when he said:
“I think the odds, with the way we’ve designed the mission right now, are that
we will probably come home early.”
Then he added, quote:
“As far as John and I are concerned, if we get up and get down, it’s a success.”
Those words of astronaut Crippen about a short mission were more accurate
than most people realized.
The real mission plan, which I had already made public in AUDIO LETTER
No. 62, was for a short mission. The astronauts were supposed to get into orbit
and deploy the military satellite from the Columbia’s cargo bay very quickly,
then they were to return to Earth—not aboard the Shuttle but in a special re-
entry capsule. Two days later they were supposed to land the disguised shuttle
“Enterprise” at Edwards Air Force Base as the final act in the falsified drama
staged for our benefit.
417
In AUDIO LETTER No. 62 I described the military purpose of the mission in

detail. For the first time in three years the Pentagon was hoping to get a Spy
Satellite into orbit that could not be shot down immediately by Russia. I also
outlined important features of the flight plan which had been conceived for the
Columbia. Now I want to give you more details about that and tell you how it
turned out because, my friends, the Bolsheviks here in the Government are now
planning to try it again with a second shuttle flight presently scheduled for the
fall of this year 1981.
Knowing what happened this time, I believe you will be far better prepared to
see through it all next time. If you can think back to American space launches
of the past, you may have noticed something very unusual about the launch of
the Columbia. In the past, manned space launches from Cape Canaveral have
always been made toward the southeast, toward the equator, but not this time.
The Columbia was launched to the northeast, away from the equator. The rea-
son for this, my friends, was the secret space reconnaissance mission of the
Columbia.
In its public news releases, NASA told everyone that Columbia was launched
into a 44-degree orbit—that is, it would never go further north or south than 44
degrees above and below the equator. But the actual orbit chosen for the Co-
lumbia was a 69-degree orbit. A 69-degree orbit was chosen because it would
take the Columbia, and the Spy Satellite inside it, all the way north to the Arctic
Circle and beyond. That is the kind of orbit that is necessary if a spy satellite is
to fly reconnaissance over Russia.
The northeast launch of the Columbia was done in order to enable the Spy Sat-
ellite to start gathering data over Russia only minutes after the Columbia
reached orbit. These days time is of the essence in any attempt to spy on Russia.
Every American spy satellite launched at Russia during the past three years has
been blinded or shot down before gathering much data.
The secret flight plan for the Columbia was completely different from what
NASA claimed in public. The plan called for Columbia to be launched on an
initial northeast course in the general direction of Bermuda, then roughly 2-1/2
minutes after launch, Columbia was to begin an unorthodox course change—a
wide sweeping turn into the north. This unprecedented curving launch was in-
tended as an evasive maneuver. Planners of the Columbia mission believed this
would enable Columbia to sneak past any Russian Cosmospheres that might be
waiting overhead. Still accelerating on its curving course, the Columbia was
supposed to pass about 100 miles east of Cape Hatteras, North Carolina.
Roughly 200 miles east of Washington, D.C., the Shuttle’s main engines were
418
Audio Letter 64
to cut off. After coasting in silence for a few seconds, the fuel tank was sched-
uled to cut loose as the Columbia passed 100 miles east of New Jersey. For the
next two minutes the Shuttle and its fuel tank were to be coasting onward past
the east tip of Long Island, over Boston, and onward toward Maine. During that
time the Shuttle was supposed to maneuver away from the fuel tank, using
small maneuvering jets. Finally, just as the Columbia passed over New Bruns-
wick, Canada, the flight plan called for the orbital maneuvering engines to be
fired. Somewhere over the Labrador Sea, flying upside-down, the Columbia
was scheduled to reach earth orbit. As soon as it did so, the flight plan called
for astronauts Young and Crippen to go to work fast. In less than 10 minutes
time they were supposed to open up the cargo bay doors and turn on the sensors
of the Spy Satellite resting inside. As they did these things, the Columbia was
to be racing over the south tip of Greenland, out over the middle of the Den-
mark Strait between Greenland and Iceland, above the Arctic Circle, and then
dipping back southward toward northern Norway, Finland, and Russia. Accord-
ing to the flight plan, the Columbia was scheduled to cross the Russian border
just south of the strategic Kola Peninsula. The time: a mere 22 minutes, 42 sec-
onds, after lift-off from Cape Canaveral. At that moment initial reconnaissance
over Russia was to be under way. The Spy Satellite inside the cargo bay, even
though not yet deployed, would have had a perfect view downward through the
open doors of the upside-down Shuttle.
The Columbia was intended to fly over a course across Russia that began just
west of the strategic White Sea in extreme northwestern Russia. From there the
planned course of the Columbia was to take it southeastward over some 2500
miles of strategic Russian territory. During the first minute alone, the Satellite
was expected to see parts of the highly sensitive Kola Peninsula, the White Sea,
including the super secret submarine yards at Archangel and the Plesetsk Cos-
modrome. The Shuttle was also to pass near Kazan, one of the bases of Russia’s
flying ABM system. This system, as I revealed a year ago in AUDIO LETTER
No. 54, uses charged particle beams carried by supersonic TU-144 transports.
Toward the end of the first pass over Russia the Spy Satellite was expected to
gather data on two more of Russia’s four Cosmodromes—those of Baikonur
and Tyura-Tam. In between, numerous other war targets were also to come un-
der scrutiny. The Spy Satellite in the Columbia’s cargo bay was expected to see
all that during its very first pass over Russian territory. It would all take only 8-
1/2 minutes! Then the Columbia would have crossed the border with Afghani-
stan, heading toward India. Barely 10 minutes later, the Spy Satellite was to be
radioing its data down to the American receivers at Diego Garcia in the Indian
Ocean.
419
That was the plan, my friends. The Bolshevik military planners here were con-
fident that their Spy Satellite would get at least this planned first look at Russia.
They were sure that Columbia’s curving launch and the short time involved
would prevent Russia from thwarting the mission. Columbia took off from
Cape Canaveral at 7:00 A.M. Eastern Time, that Sunday morning. By 7:23 Co-
lumbia was expected to be over Russia already. By 7:31 Columbia was
expected to be leaving Russian skies, and by 7:45 that Sunday morning the
military planners expected to have their first reconnaissance data from Russia.
The plan sounded plausible, my friends, but the Bolsheviks here are falling vic-
tim to the very Intelligence gap which they themselves created in America years
ago. Russian Intelligence agents were able to learn the general outlines of the
Columbia mission plan some six months ago. Fully one month before the public
roll-out of the Columbia at Cape Canaveral last November, the Russian Space
Command was studying the problem. There was no question about one thing:
The Columbia’s mission could not be allowed to succeed. Given even a shred
of up-to-date reconnaissance data, the Bolsheviks in America are determined to
set off nuclear war. Even so, there was a question about the best way to spoil
the Shuttle mission. Several possibilities were considered, including sabotage or
simply blasting the Columbia out of the sky. All were rejected because they
shared one weakness. Each alternative would halt one shuttle mission, but it
would not stop the Shuttle Program as a whole, and Russia’s goal is to com-
pletely shut down the Space Shuttle Program.
At last they hit upon the solution. What was needed was a Space Age version of
the famous U-2 incident of two decades ago. In the waning days of the Eisen-
hower Administration, Russia had publicly accused the United States of
invading its air space with spy flights. That was before the era of Spy Satellites,
and invading other countries’ air space was a serious charge in the eyes of the
world. American spokesmen tried to defuse the growing furor while carefully
avoiding a definitive denial of the charges; but the Russians kept it up. Finally
President Eisenhower became so exasperated that he flatly denied, in public,
that America was flying spy planes over Russia. That was exactly what the
Russians were waiting for. The Russians promptly did what American Intelli-
gence specialists thought they could not do—they shot down a high-flying U-2
on a flight over Russia. The name of the CIA pilot, the late Francis Gary Pow-
ers, filled the headlines world-wide overnight. The Russians had made a liar of
the President of the United States! A summit had been scheduled between
President Eisenhower and Nikita Khrushchev, but the Russians icily called it
off.
420
Audio Letter 64
The Russian Space Command proposed to the Kremlin that the shuttle Colum-
bia be made the focus of a similar incident. All that was necessary was that the
Columbia be made to crash land in Russia reasonably intact. Having protested
continuously about the military nature of the Shuttle Program, Russia would be
able to stun the world by proving it. They would put the crashed Shuttle on
public display together with its nuclear-powered, laser-firing Spy Satellite. The
Kremlin liked the plan, and agreed to it. To further emphasize the parallels with
the 1960 U-2 incident, Russia has recently proposed a summit with the United
States. The plan was to withdraw the summit proposal in protest after shooting
down the Columbia.
The Russian Space Command went to work several months ago to get ready.
They were faced with a tall order to bring down the Columbia on Russian terri-
tory without totally destroying it. As recently as a year ago it would have been
an impossible task, but now Russia has a new space tool to do the job. It is a
third version of the Russian levitating weapons platform, the Cosmosphere.
They are called “Super Heavies” by the Russian Space Command.
The Russian Super Heavy Cosmospheres are still considered experimental.

Even so, the Russians have already built seven of them. They are mammoth
machines, the largest flying machines ever built. In terms of volume, they are
even bigger than the biggest zeppelins of the 1930’s. They can carry a pay load
of more than 50 tons, far more than our own space shuttle; and they are
equipped with powerful electromagnetic propulsion which can take the Cos-
mosphere all the way to orbital speed. In short, my friends, the jumbo
Cosmosphere is Russia’s space shuttle. It is still experimental, but it is operat-
ing already.
In order to carry out their attack on the space shuttle Columbia, Russia’s entire
fleet of seven jumbo Cosmospheres were made ready. Five were outfitted with
special grappling equipment to enable them to seize a very large object in
space. The other two were outfitted with neutron particle beam weapons. These
weapons are the same type as were used in the “Battle of the Harvest Moon” in
September 1977.
At 7:00 A.M. Sunday morning, April 12, the rocket engines of the space shuttle
Columbia roared to life. Moments later the giant solid boosters were fired, and
the Columbia took off fast. As it climbed, it rolled around and started leaning
into its flight path toward space. As we watched on our television sets, it rap-
idly dwindled off into the northeast. We watched as the solid boosters separated
and peeled away to each side. Moments later the Columbia vanished from the
screen.
421
The television scene shifted to the alleged Mission Control in Houston. It was
the old familiar scene with rows of Mission Controllers intent on their consoles.
Up in front the NASA computer-controlled map started tracing the alleged
course of the Columbia. According to the map, Columbia was heading out over
the Atlantic toward Bermuda; but at that moment, free of the solid boosters, Co-
lumbia was already starting its long sweeping curve to the north. One-hundred-
fifty miles east of Charleston, South Carolina, Russia’s fleet of 7 jumbo Cos-
mospheres were hovering high over the ocean. As the space shuttle approached
on its elaborate curving path, the Cosmospheres started speeding up to intercept
it. The Shuttle was already flying upside-down with the huge fuel tank on top.
The two Cosmospheres armed with neutron beams closed in on the Columbia
from below and slightly behind, where they could not be seen by Young and
Crippen. The other five jumbo Cosmospheres with their grappling equipment
flew in formation above and well behind the fuel tank to be out of the line of
fire. The Cosmospheres paced the Shuttle until it reached a predetermined alti-
tude and speed.
Then the armed Cosmospheres opened up with their neutron beams. Firing at
point-blank range, each Cosmosphere fired just two bursts from its beam
weapon. The first salvo flooded the cockpit area and an area near the engines in
the rear. Young and Crippen died instantly, the neutron radiation having totally
disrupted all activity of their nervous systems, brains, eyes, and hearts. At the
same time the Shuttle’s engines shut down. A fraction of a second later, the
second salvo flooded neutron radiation into the nose and an area beneath the
cargo bay. These shots were calculated to derange and shut down the Colum-
bia’s flight computers—that is, all the computers except one. The Russians
wanted the backup computer to take over and do its job—that is, make an
emergency automatic re-entry and crash landing in Russia. They anticipated
that it would do so because the backup computer is heavily shielded against ra-
diation. The shielding is a material more efficient than lead. It is gold! The
Russians expected that the “Gold Computer,” as it is known in certain circles,
would take over after the engines shut down. Sure enough, within 10 seconds
after the engines shut down, the fuel tank, still a third full, was automatically
cast loose. The Gold Computer was now flying the Shuttle. The five jumbo
Cosmospheres with grappling equipment fastened onto the fuel tank. Then, us-
ing their powerful electromagnetic propulsion, they veered away with the tank.
From its northeasterly course, the tank was swerved around over the North At-
lantic in a great arc until it was heading southeast instead. The Cosmospheres
then accelerated to orbital speed and cast the fuel tank loose.
422
Audio Letter 64
Three years ago the first Cosmospheres had sent a message by way of enor-
mous air booms along America’s East Coast. Now Russia’s newest
Cosmospheres were using the Shuttle fuel tank to send a chilling new message
to America’s Bolshevik war planners.
Meanwhile the armed Cosmospheres followed the Columbia itself. Having had
its engines shut down prematurely, the Columbia was well below orbital speed.
Instead it was following a ballistic path, just like an ICBM, into the heart of
Russia. It looked as though the Russian plan was going to work, but then the
unexpected happened!
One of Columbia’s deranged computers apparently started working again. The

brief shut-down had thrown it out of synchronization with the Gold Computer,
so the two computers apparently did not communicate with one another. As the
Columbia passed over the border of Russia, it was flying right-side-up instead
of upside-down under control of the Gold Computer. But the other computer
opened up the cargo bay doors right on schedule. As the Shuttle began to re-
enter over Russia, hot air flooded the cargo bay. Heat sensors in the Spy Satel-
lite detected the heat build-up, which was programmed into the Satellite’s
computer as a sign of “attack damage.” Finally, the temperature built up to a
critical point, activating a self-destruct circuit in the Satellite. The Spy Satellite
exploded, blowing the Columbia apart.
The Russians had hoped for a crash landing in recognizable form. Instead, the
Columbia ended up in wreckage strewn along a line some 85 miles long in cen-
tral Russia southeast of the City of Kazan. As it turned out, neither the
Bolsheviks here nor the Russians got what they wanted. The Bolsheviks did not
get their reconnaissance data, and the Russians did not get a recognizable space
shuttle to show the world. That leaves the stage set for another “try” by both
sides later this year.
Topic #3—Sunday, April 12, 1981, was the 20th anniversary of the first
manned flight into space. It was the anniversary of the first orbital flight by a
Russian cosmonaut, Yuri Gagarin. It was also a day of total disarray among the
Bolshevik masters of America’s Space Shuttle Program.
Less than eight minutes after launch that Sunday morning they knew something
had happened to the Columbia. You and I were still hearing the sound effects of
a seemingly successful flight, courtesy of the NASA tape recording from Hous-
ton. But the military controllers at White Sands, who were following the real
flight, were hearing nothing at all. Columbia had suddenly gone totally silent.
423
At 7:45 A.M. the news got worse. Columbia had failed to arrive over the Indian
Ocean on schedule.
Before the morning was out, there was still more bad news. NORAD was track-
ing the fuel tank of the Shuttle. It was not supposed to be in orbit at all—but
there it was, in an orbit that looked impossible.
That evening, Sunday April 12, the Shuttle’s fuel tank re-entered over the Gulf
of Mexico just south of Louisiana. The tank had ruptured but there was still a
sizeable amount of liquid hydrogen and oxygen inside. When the tank re-
entered it heated up and set off an enormous explosion, creating a giant cloud at
the fringes of space. Gold plating, which is used extensively in the shuttle fuel
tank because of its heat transfer properties, was vaporized and scattered through
the cloud. The result was the same as when gold is added in tiny quantities to
stained window glass—a brilliant pinkish-red color. The giant pink cloud, with
chunks of the ruined fuel tank flashing in the sun, created headlines as it passed
to the northeast over Louisiana and Mississippi. Meanwhile, Government
spokesmen tried to pooh-pooh it all as, quote “a natural phenomenon.”
The Bolsheviks here still are not quite sure what happened to the Columbia, but
they do know that as far as Space is concerned, the Shuttle Program is their
only hope. They have three more orbital shuttles hidden away at White Sands,
and they intend to launch them all no matter what the odds may be, so the
NASA cover-up of the Columbia disaster went right on according to plan.
Two years ago I first revealed the existence of man-made genetic replicas of
human beings. I was widely disbelieved and condemned at the time, just as I
knew I would be. But they do exist, and once again they have been pressed into
service before our eyes.
Tuesday morning, April 14, genetic replicas called “Synthetics” of the late as-
tronauts John Young and Robert Crippen were readied at White Sands. They
were programmed to take a computerized ride on the training shuttle “Enter-
prise.” The Young and Crippen entities boarded the Enterprise, which was
mounted on top of the launch 747. After rocket fuel was loaded for the shuttle,
the 747 took off and headed west, avoiding commercial air traffic. The launch
747 headed out over the Pacific until it was several hundred miles west of Los
Angeles.
Then it turned back toward the east toward the California coast. On television
we were told that the non-existent Columbia was re-entering from orbit. Mean-
while the “Enterprise,” re-labeled “Columbia,” cut loose from the 747 and fired
424
Audio Letter 64
its rockets. It sped up to a speed of nearly 6,000 miles per hour, then we
watched it as it made that dramatic race in from the sea to a precise computer
landing at Edwards Air Force Base. It was all timed to agree as closely as pos-
sible with the official NASA timetable.
Even so, a technical mistake was made that morning and as a result we were
told that the Shuttle would land six minutes early. My friends, in space flight,
six minutes might as well be a year. Six minutes in orbit corresponds to nearly a
2,000 mile error in the location of the Shuttle, but on TV nobody bothered to
question it. They all just smiled and said, “Isn’t it a lovely day to watch the
Shuttle.”
After the dramatic Shuttle landing, former astronaut Gene Cernan expressed
surprise on ABC television. He said the Shuttle simply did not look scorched
enough for a ship that had re-entered from orbit. Likewise, when the synthetics
called Young and Crippen emerged, they did not act like men who had been
weightless for two days. Instead they bounded down the access steps and
pranced around with restless energy, but no one questioned it. After all, we had
seen the Shuttle landing for ourselves; and as that old saying goes, “Seeing is
believing.”
Now it’s time for my Last Minute Summary.
My friends, the score in America’s Space Shuttle Program is now “One down
and three to go.” Three more shuttles like the Columbia are waiting their turn in
the desert at White Sands. Each will have the name “Columbia” painted on its
side. The real Columbia is now dead, along with its crew; but thanks to these
mechanical clones, the Columbia will live again in the public eye.
I have given you as many details as time will allow about the Columbia disaster
and its cover-up by NASA. The point of it all is not whether Russia is ahead or
America is ahead in the Space race. The point is that we are being deceived. We
are being given a false sense of security and a false sense of confidence. We are
being led like sheep to slaughter into nuclear war and Bolshevik dictatorship.
If we choose to believe their lies, then they will succeed, they will destroy our
way of life, and enslave the few of us who survive their war. OR, we can learn
to do as our Lord Jesus Christ taught us to do long ago. We can learn to look for
the truth, cherish the truth, and believe the Truth. If we do that, my friends, then
we will always be free.
425
426
Audio Letter 65
June 6, 1981
Wednesday afternoon May 13 was a beautiful sunny afternoon in Rome. At the
Vatican thousands of people were gathered in St. Peter’s Square. They were
waiting for the regular Wednesday afternoon audience by the man known to the
world as Pope John Paul II. Right on time he made his appearance. As usual, he
was standing in a special jeep-like vehicle, waving to the crowd as the vehicle
drove slowly around the Square. Inside the walls of the Vatican that afternoon it
was a scene of peace and cheer. It was as if the insane rush of a troubled world
had been locked outside for a few precious moments. Filled with a sea of smil-
ing faces, St. Peter’s Square seemed immune from the presence of evil.
Suddenly the illusion was shattered. There was the sound of gun fire, and the
man known as the Pope crumpled and fell. As the crowd looked on in disbelief,
the papal vehicle sped up and rushed out of St. Peter’s Square. In a matter of
moments the scene of tranquility had been transformed into one of tragedy.
Gone were all the smiles; and in their place, tears. For days afterward people
the world over were asking just one question:
“Why would anyone shoot the Pope?”
My friends, the answer to that question will never be revealed by the controlled
major media. The Vatican has become just one more battleground in the secret
war now raging world-wide. The stakes involve the fate of over 700,000,000
Roman Catholics—one-sixth of the human race.
The man accused of the shooting reportedly said right away that he had acted
alone. As an excuse he said he was protesting against the turmoil in Afghani-
stan and El Salvador. Then there were reports, especially here in the United
States, that perhaps he was tied in with the Palestinians in some way. One story
followed another in rapid succession. Meanwhile the Italian police quickly
found many clues that the would-be assassin Mehmet Agca could not have
acted alone. All the evidence pointed clearly to a conspiracy. In Europe con-
spiracies are known and recognized to be a fact of life and so they are not pooh-
poohed when they are discovered, but here in America it is different. We’re
treated like gullible children and taught that the legal word “conspiracy” is a
427
No-No. We must never think that greedy, powerful men would ever work to-
gether to carry out their plans.
My friends, there’s a very good reason why we are never allowed to think seri-
ously about conspiracies. The reason is that a very small elite number of people
are trying to control all the rest of us. There are an awful lot of us, and only a
few of them. The only way they can corral us and herd us around like sheep is
to keep us ignorant of what they are doing. Keeping you ignorant is the very
essence of their power. That, my friends, is why plots and conspiracies of all
kinds are kept secret, and that’s why the biggest conspiracy of all is the con-
spiracy of SILENCE. It’s a conspiracy to keep you and me in the dark so that
the forces of darkness can continue unhampered. The one thing they fear most
is the TRUTH, known and understood by the people, because the Truth is the
Sword of our Lord Jesus Christ.
My friends, I live to know the truth, to understand the truth, and to speak the
truth. I want to do my part so that the truth will continue to have a life of its
own throughout our universe. I believe there is nothing more important than to
look for the truth, and keep an open mind to receive it, because without the
Truth people perish.
Topic #1—THE POPE, THE PRESIDENT, AND ASSASSINATION

POLITICS
Topic #2—THE AFTERMATH OF THE SHUTTLE “COLUMBIA”

DISASTER
Topic #3—MOUNTING WORLD CRISES AND “ACCIDENTAL”

NUCLEAR WAR.
Topic #1—In August 1978 the Cardinals of the Roman Catholic Church were
called into conclave at the Vatican. Pope Paul VI had died earlier that month,
and the Cardinals faced the task of choosing his successor—a new pope. From
all around the world the Cardinals converged on Rome for the papal conclave.
As they did so, the news was filled with speculation about the presumed leading
candidates for the papacy. Many were convinced that the conclave would be a
long one; instead, it turned out to be one of the shortest papal conclaves in his-
tory. Voting by the Cardinals began on August 26, 1978, and that very same
day there was white smoke from the Vatican. The Catholic Church had a new
pope.
428
Audio Letter 65
Vatican watchers were astonished at the speed of the papal election. They were
even more astonished by the identity of the new pope. He was not one of the
acknowledged front runners but a complete outsider to the Vatican power struc-
ture. The little known Cardinal Luciani of Venice had become pope—Pope
John Paul I. The following day, August 27, 1978, I recorded my AUDIO
LETTER No. 37. In that report I gave a warning about the true significance of
the stunning surprise at the Vatican.
The atheistic Bolsheviks, who have lost their former power in Russia, will stop
at nothing in their frenzy to regain that power. To that end, the Bolsheviks were
launching a ruthless campaign to seize control of a tremendous weapon, the
Roman Catholic Church. The Bolshevik goal was, and still is, to turn some
700,000,000 Catholics actively anti-Russian.
For the next few weeks there was no visible hint about the secret conspiracy
which I had reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 37. Instead, Pope John Paul I
quickly endeared himself to millions as the “smiling Pope.” Then came the
shock of September 28, 1978.
After a mere 33 days we were told that Pope John Paul I had died, suddenly and
unexpectedly, and the man who succeeded him 2-1/2 weeks later was another
surprise. He was the first non-Italian pope in 455 years and the first Slavic pope
ever. He was from bitterly anti-Soviet Poland, and his reputation was that of a
man who stands up to the Soviets. On October 16, 1978, the former Cardinal
Wojtyla of Poland became known as Pope John Paul II.
The Bolshevik intrigues and maneuvering in the Vatican continued right on

track. By late 1978 more and more of the pronouncements issued in the name of
Pope John Paul II were anti-Soviet in tone. The public signs of rapid change in
the Vatican were dramatic. Meanwhile behind closed doors, the forces at work
were far more sinister and revolutionary than most people could ever imagine. I
reported on these developments in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 39, 41, and 42.
The Vatican, my friends, had become the setting for assassination politics in the
spiritual warfare between East and West. It had begun with the surprise election
of Cardinal Luciani as Pope John Paul I in August 1978. He had been thrust
into the papacy by forces of which he was not even aware—Bolshevik forces.
They intended to use him for transitional purposes to begin the anti-Soviet
transformation of the Church, but he had turned out to be hard to manipulate
into saying and doing what the Bolsheviks wanted, so the Bolshevik agents in
429
the Vatican cut short the interim papacy of Pope John Paul I by assassinating
him.
When the next pope was selected, the Bolsheviks made certain that his image
was made to order for their purposes. When Cardinal Wojtyla of Poland be-
came Pope John Paul II, it was only his image that the Bolsheviks wanted. The
man himself was strong-minded and independent. He also had plans for restruc-
turing the Vatican in ways that the Bolsheviks could not afford. To make sure
that Pope John Paul II never carried out those plans, the Bolsheviks once again
resorted to assassination. The preparations had been made far ahead of time,
and they were carried out without a hitch. In mid November 1978, Pope John
Paul II, the most visible pope in history, virtually dropped out of sight for a
while. As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 41, he was being poisoned, and
on November 20, 1978, he succumbed.
Immediately he was replaced by a “Bolshevik look-alike,” an actor; and the

very next day the Vatican announced that the Pope had re-appointed all of the
top officials in the Vatican hierarchy known as the Curia. The Vatican restruc-
turing, which had been planned by the late real Pope John Paul II, was snuffed
out. The Bolshevik actor-Pope then proceeded to make maximum use of the
anti-Russian image of the man he had replaced. Doing exactly as he was told,
he was stoking up bitter feelings toward Russia in heavily Catholic Eastern
Europe; and most of all these bitter feelings were being encouraged in Poland,
the most heavily Catholic of all.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 42 I was able to make public where all this was in-
tended to lead. The Bolsheviks were trying to make Poland explode against
Russia in an uprising to be known as the “Pope’s Revolution.” It was to be trig-
gered during a papal visit to Poland in May 1979. The actor-Pope himself was
to provide the spark for revolution in a way which he himself was not being
told. At a critical emotional moment during his coming trip to Poland, the actor-
Pope was to be assassinated.
When I made the details of the plan public in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, the
momentum toward a Pope’s Revolution was building fast; but if there is one
thing the Russians do not intend to allow, it is a Bolshevik revolution in Poland.
Having learned of the “Pope’s Revolution” plan, the Kremlin directed Poland’s
leaders to take all possible steps to minimize the risk. Poland even announced
that foreign journalists entering Poland to cover the Pope’s visit would have to
pay very high fees for the privilege. Meanwhile Russian Intelligence operatives
went to work to undo the plan altogether.
430
Audio Letter 65
In AUDIO LETTER No. 46 I reported that Russia had finally succeeded in

stopping the “Pope’s Revolution” plot. In early May 1979 the Bolshevik actor-
Pope was eliminated and replaced by a Russian actor, another “double.” Imme-
diately the Vatican announced that it would agree to a one-month delay in the
papal visit to Poland, as requested by the Polish government. In that way, a cru-
cial emotional stimulus for revolution was eliminated.
As I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 42, the original timing of the papal visit
for St. Stanislaus Day had been essential to the plot. With the threat of revolu-
tion averted, Poland then dropped its earlier demands for high fees by visiting
journalists. A month later the Russian actor-Pope known to the world as Pope
John Paul II visited Poland without mishap.
The Bolshevik plan for a “Pope’s Revolution” in Poland two years ago was
thwarted by the Russians, but the Bolsheviks never give up in their agitation for
revolution and war. Soon they were at work on Poland through another avenue,
the so-called “Solidarity” labor movement, and at the same time the Bolsheviks
have never given up on their dream of seizing control of the Roman Catholic
Church.
For the past two years the Catholic Church has been moving quietly in the op-
posite direction to that desired by the Bolsheviks. The man known as Pope John
Paul II has initiated overtures toward eventual reunification of the Roman
Catholic and Eastern Orthodox churches. If that were to happen in the present
circumstances, it would be an unmitigated disaster for the Bolsheviks. Catholics
in the West and Russian Orthodox believers in the East would consider them-
selves “spiritual brothers” instead of enemies. Worse yet for the Bolsheviks, a
papal visit to Russia has been in the works very quietly in the Vatican. The Bol-
sheviks are determined to prevent that from happening; and, as usual, the
Bolsheviks turned to one of their favorite political techniques—assassination.
Early last month the Russian actor-Pope celebrated a special mass for new
Swiss Guards. As if in a premonition, he warned them that they might be faced
with giving their lives in their role as his protectors. A scant week later, inside
the walls of the Vatican, he was cut down by the bullets of a professional killer.
This time he survived; but as I said before, my friends, the Bolsheviks never
give up.
My friends, we are once again plunging into an era of assassination politics. For
Americans, the shooting in the Vatican on May 13 created a sense of deja vu.
We had seen it all before as recently as six weeks earlier right here in our own
land. It all looked horribly familiar—and no wonder. The Satanic forces re-
sponsible for the shooting of the actor-Pope are the same ones who were behind
431
the shooting of the President. These dark forces, as I have said many times, are
the Bolsheviks. Having lost control of Russia, they now have a stranglehold on
America’s government instead.
When news of the Pope’s shooting reached Washington, reporters asked for
reactions from the White House. The resulting national television news reports
that evening were very strange. We were shown only a “still photograph” of the
President with the alleged quote: “I will pray for him.” By contrast, we were
then shown the Vice-President talking with reporters on the White House lawn
about the tragedy in Rome. We saw and heard seemingly heartfelt words of an-
guish at such brutal and senseless violence. It was the Vice-President, not the
President, whom we saw expressing the feelings most Americans wanted to
hear.
This is just one example, my friends, of a subtle but important pattern in our
news these days. A sophisticated program of psychological conditioning is now
under way directed at you and me. It is a disarming soft-sell, but it is also using
powerful subliminal techniques to insure success. It’s a program to build up the
George Bush image in our minds while letting the Ronald Reagan image slowly
recede. We’re being prepared to accept it easily when the so-called Reagan era
comes to an abrupt end soon!
What’s happening now is a preliminary phase in the plan which I first reported
just after the election last November 1980. In AUDIO LETTER No. 60 I gave a
warning that we would soon be told that the President had met with, quote: “an
unfortunate accident, or a sudden fatal illness.” Then we would see a change in
the policies of the White House built around the image of George Bush.
Just over two months ago on March 30 this plan of the Bolsheviks here almost
succeeded on the first attempt. Outside the Washington Hilton Hotel the entity
President Reagan was led into an ambush, about which I will have more to say
in a few moments. It was intended to cut down the President on the spot, just as
several others were cut down. The assassination attempt did not succeed in that
goal, but it was a partial success even so, because from that day onward the im-
age of George Bush has been shining brighter and brighter in the public eye.
First, the period of hospital confinement of the President was exploited. It was
an opportunity to show off a restrained, statesmanlike image on the part of the
Vice-President. This image-building began immediately during the first hours
after the shooting. First, the entity known as General Alexander Haig rushed
into the White House briefing room and seized the podium. His voice quivering
with intensity, he announced, “I am in charge here.” It was a virtuoso perform-
432
Audio Letter 65
ance, an act calculated perfectly to create headlines, furrowed brows, and a

source of jokes for comedians. Stories of a power tug of war between Haig and
Bush automatically focused attention on the Vice-President in a favorable light.
In contrast to the Haig outburst, the Bush entity acted humble and deferential.
News reports said Bush refused even to sit in the President’s seat in Cabinet
meetings. The Bush image grew as a model of judgment and restraint. As the
President recovered, public opinion polls were taken to judge what effect the
shooting had on people. They found a dramatic rise in people’s favorable rating
of the President; but for the Vice-President the improvement was astronomi-
cal—from 31% to 69% favorable in just a few weeks, according to NBC.
As I say these words, the subtle image-making is continuing. On Memorial Day

almost two weeks ago it was not the President we saw in news reports laying a
wreath at the Tomb of the Unknown, but the Vice-President. And that same
evening the entity Bush popped up again. Millions tuned into a Bob Hope Spe-
cial that evening, and the closing act was none other than the Vice-President. It
was prime time exposure of the supposedly non-political kind that is most valu-
able of all in politics. Those who are building the image of George Bush before
us by way of news guidelines are setting us up for things to come.
What happened last March 30 outside the Washington Hilton was a warning,
and we should not ignore it. It all began that day when the entity President
Reagan emerged from the special VIP exit of the Hilton. The VIP exit is around
the corner from the rest of the hotel. The hotel itself is many stories high, but
the VIP entrance is set into a stone wall only about 15 feet high. At the top of
the wall is a handrail with a walkway and trees behind it. In other words, the
VIP exit from the Hilton comes out under a small park-like area. The exit itself
is unmarked except for a concrete canopy extending out to the curving drive-
way. A good photograph of the scene appeared on page 30 of People magazine
for April 13, 1981.
My friends, the whole idea behind the Hilton’s VIP entrance is to provide secu-
rity for important visitors. The natural and prudent thing from the security
standpoint would have been to park the presidential limousine directly opposite
the door at the end of the short canopy. That way there would have been only a
few short steps from the door to the limousine. And that is how things are done
by highly trained security forces. But, my friends, everything was done differ-
ently on March 30. Someone had arranged for the President to walk into a
classic ambush.
The limousine was not parked at the curb next to the VIP exit. Instead, it was
parked at least 20 feet farther away to the left as the presidential party walked
433
outside. The car was parked opposite a rounded corner in the stone wall, which
curves away from the street. Back around that corner waiting to see the Presi-
dent stood the press and various onlookers, including allegedly John Hinckley,
Jr.; and just behind and above them there were the numerous windows and bal-
conies of the hotel itself. I have been informed by certain professionals whose
business is the protection of VIPs that the pattern in all this is unmistakable.
The President walked into the perfect setup for assassination—a cross fire. As
he approached the limousine, the President became an easy target from two di-
rections at once—one direction was the sidewalk above the overhanging
canopy of the VIP exit, the other direction was from behind and above the press
and onlookers, which included John Hinckley.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I quoted an early NBC television news report by

Judy Woodruff. She had been with the presidential party inside the hotel and
had walked out the exit. She had not rounded the corner to the area where
Hinckley and the cameras were waiting, so she could not have seen Hinckley.
That’s clear both from her own eyewitness account on NBC and from replays
of the video tapes; yet she said, quote: “I noticed there were some shots fired
from an overhanging, from a sidewalk that was above where the President’s car
was.” If you will look at the photograph in People magazine, which I mentioned
earlier, you’ll see very clearly the area that Judy Woodruff was describing. It’s
not the area where Hinckley was.
As for Hinckley himself, we are supposed to believe he did it all by himself.

Always it’s a “lone assassin,” always he’s portrayed as “a nut,” and always
there’s a note left behind conveniently by the otherwise nutty assailant to avoid
loose ends. We are also supposed to believe that Hinckley squeezed off six (6)
shots in only two (2) seconds and hit four (4) targets in that time. We’re not
supposed to think about the fact that every time a pistol is fired, even a small
caliber pistol, it kicks. It deflects upward, spoiling the aim briefly.
If that were not enough, we’re supposed to forget about the bystander who
jumped on Hinckley as soon as he started firing.
Alfred Antonucci, a carpenter’s union official from Cleveland, had arrived too
late for the President’s speech, so he waited outside for a glimpse of the Presi-
dent. He was standing right next to Hinckley. On April 13 Antonucci was
interviewed on ABC’s “Good Morning, America” by David Hartman. Hartman
mentioned the alleged six shots by Hinckley, and Antonucci said, quote: “Well,
let me say this. He fired the first shot; and whether it was the second, the split
second of the second, I was on top of him to break the aim.” Then on May 1 the
434
Audio Letter 65
New York Daily News published an interview of Antonucci. Antonucci is

quoted as saying, quote:
“I hit him on the back of the neck as hard as I could; and his gun, which he held
with two hands aimed right at Reagan, came down. He kept shooting with one
hand. I was told later by high authorities that four of the six shots hit the side-
walk.”
My friends, we saw for ourselves on television the scuffle to subdue Hinckley

as soon as he started shooting. Mr. Antonucci’s story fits perfectly with what
we saw ourselves, but we’re supposed to ignore what we saw and just believe
the official story that Hinckley fired six very accurate shots. Now, suppose we
do a little simple counting. On TV we saw four (4) men wounded—that’s at
least four bullets. Four (4) bullets also hit the sidewalk, thanks to Mr. Antonu-
cci; that brings the total to at least eight, and from other reports at least two
more bullets hit the limousine. That’s a total of at least 10 bullets that we know
of. Hinckley’s revolver, my friends, was only a six-shooter.
Those who plotted the assassination attempt on March 30 are pulling all kinds
of strings to cover up the truth. A perfect example of this was Time magazine
for April 13, 1981. The lies began with the cover itself. It’s a painting, not a
photograph, depicting the moment of the President’s wounding. It shows the
President viewed across the roof of the limousine—left arm raised, grimacing
in pain. It is accurate except for one thing. You will see what is wrong with the
Time cover if you will compare it with the photograph I mentioned in People
magazine. On the cover of Time the stone wall is drawn as if it were a tall
building. There’s no hint of the overhanging sidewalk from which NBC’s Judy
Woodruff said shots were fired.
My friends, we’re living today in an “Alice in Wonderland” world. We’re sup-

posed to believe three impossible things before breakfast, if that is what the
controlled major media report to us. Only those who are determined to search
for the truth will be able to see it in the days ahead.
Topic #2—On Tuesday evening April 28 millions of Americans tuned in their

TV sets to watch the entity President Reagan address Congress. The speech was
to build support for the Administration’s Budget, but most people were inter-
ested for a different reason. It was the first speech by the President since the
assassination attempt nearly a month earlier. Many people were too absorbed in
the dramatic re-appearance of a wounded president to pay much attention to
anything else. No one cared very much that the space shuttle “Columbia” sup-
posedly arrived back in Florida that day, nor did many people give a second
435
thought to the fact that it was a full week overdue. After all, as far as the public
was concerned, the Columbia was a great success. We had seen it for ourselves
on television.
Based on one space shuttle flight, we are being told on all sides that we are
once again on top in space. We are told that now we are five, ten years ahead of
those poor dumb Russians. It would be nice if all those things were true, but
unfortunately they are not true. In AUDIO LETTER No. 62 I was able to make
public ahead of time the real mission of the Columbia, which was Military! I
described the plan for us to see the Columbia lift off from Florida, but to see a
different shuttle, the “Enterprise,” land two days later in California.
Meanwhile the Columbia was to have carried out a secret military mission un-
seen by you. The deception built into the original flight plan was bad enough;
but as it turned out, the flight of the Columbia ended very quickly in
DISASTER; and you and I were supposed to believe otherwise. The secret dis-
aster of the space shuttle Columbia and the television hoax which we were
shown to hide it were events of great importance. That is why I devoted my en-
tire AUDIO LETTER No. 64 to giving you the details. The space shuttle
“Columbia” is no more!
The shuttle which we saw landing at Edwards Air Force Base in California was
the training shuttle “Enterprise.” It had simply been relabeled with the name
“Columbia” on its side. When the shuttle landed in California on April 14 we
were initially told that it would be flown to Florida just a few days later; but as
the days went by, the shuttle just stayed there. NASA cooked up one excuse
after another to explain away the delays to the public.
Meanwhile, frantic meetings were going on involving key joint military and
NASA personnel. Things had not gone according to plan, and they were not
sure what to do. One faction insisted that NASA should go ahead according to
the original plan. That plan called for a switch in shuttles between California
and Florida. On Day One a modified “747” would take off from Edwards Air
Force Base, California, with the shuttle “Enterprise” riding piggyback. News
cameras would be on hand to record the take-off. The Enterprise would then be
flown to its home base at White Sands, New Mexico. Meanwhile the public
would be told that the “747” with the shuttle had made an over-night stopover.
Then on Day Two another modified “747” carrying a different shuttle would
take off from White Sands and fly to Florida. Once again reporters would be on
hand to watch the landing at Cape Canaveral. The new shuttle, of course, would
have the name “Columbia” on the side just as the Enterprise does. In that way
the training shuttle Enterprise was to be returned to home base and a fresh or-
436
Audio Letter 65
bital-rated shuttle sent to Florida. The switch would be made without the public
suspecting a thing.
In meetings behind closed doors about the situation, others protested that it
would be foolish to go ahead as originally planned without more information. It
was obvious that somehow the Russians had destroyed the Columbia, but the
question was: “How?” The military shuttle planning group agreed that they
needed the answer to that question, otherwise there would be no way to devise
countermeasures to give the next shuttle flight a better chance. Finally it was
agreed all around that the first urgent need was to buy time, so NASA spokes-
men were told to give the press a series of stalling stories about the post-flight
shuttle procedures in California. Meanwhile every available avenue of Intelli-
gence world-wide was pressed to come up with an answer to that crucial
question: “What happened to the space shuttle Columbia?”
Day by day we saw brief news reports about the post-flight checkout of the
space shuttle at Edwards Air Force Base. The shuttle was lifted onto the back of
the “747” but the take-off kept being pushed back one day after another. The
military shuttle planning group was drawing a blank from their Intelligence
sweep about the Columbia. The shuttle stayed on the ground in California a
week longer than originally planned, and still no answer came about the Co-
lumbia. NASA ran out of excuses for further stalling without raising
unwelcome questions. The secret shuttle planning team was still in no position
to prepare for a second orbital mission, and yet appearances have to be main-
tained.
The United States Government is crowing loudly about the supposed stunning
success of the shuttle because it is the only hope left for America in space. The
space shuttle is the only program other than Defense which has been given in-
creased funding by the so-called Reagan Adminstration.
Before the shuttle Enterprise left California aboard its “747,” the shuttle plan-
ning group had to make a decision: Should they, or should they not, make the
planned switch between shuttles at White Sands. There are three more orbital-
rated shuttles at White Sands, and a specific mission has been planned for each
one. One of the planners summed up the dilemma in the words, and I quote:
“How can we send an orbital bird to the Cape? STS-2, 3, and 4 may require ma-
jor modifications in order to get past the Russians. We won’t know what those
modifications are until we get the missing feed-back on STS-1. I say send the
Enterprise. We can keep it sub-orbital by faking an abort—shut down one en-
gine before press-to-MECO and let Enterprise return to Kennedy. That will
437
keep Enterprise out of danger from Ivan. It will also keep the ball rolling while
giving us more time to set up a successful orbital shot.”
Someone else asked:
“What about the public relations impact? One thing we don’t need is to abort a
mission this early in the program.”
The reply was:
“Would you rather lose another orbital bird to Ivan? Besides, if we do it right,
we could end up with even more public support. You know what I mean—the
idea that the shuttle is safe even if something does go wrong, and so on.”
There was a long silence, followed by more discussion, but finally the sugges-
tion was adopted. On Monday April 27 the “747” bearing the shuttle Enterprise
took off from Edwards Air Force Base, California. The following day we saw
the same shuttle, the training shuttle Enterprise, landing in Florida. There was
no switch.
The secret shuttle planners are still feeling their way. The plan could be
changed, but as of now it will be the training shuttle Enterprise that rolls out to
the launch pad at Cape Canaveral later this summer. It will look just like the
Columbia did before its April launch, mated to a giant fuel tank and huge solid-
rocket boosters.
NASA is presently shooting for the very early launch date of September 30,
1981. According to the present plan the launch is to proceed smoothly for the
first few minutes. Unlike the Columbia, the Enterprise will not veer north to-
ward the kind of orbit forbidden by Russia. Then, one engine will shut down
prematurely. It will be earlier in the flight than the point at which contact with
Columbia was lost last April. Then, as we are still watching on television, the
Enterprise will return for its alleged “emergency” landing at Kennedy. By now
the Enterprise has made so many computerized landings that NASA has confi-
dence that the landing will be made safely.
There will be an uproar about the aborted space flight, but it will not last long.
Aided by the controlled major media, NASA will convince most Americans
that the safe outcome of the supposed “emergency” is what counts. It will be
said that this just proves how reliable the shuttle really is. By staging an aborted
shuttle mission this fall of 1981, the joint military and NASA shuttle team will
be buying time. They will not he expected to launch another mission until early
438
Audio Letter 65
1982. By then they are hoping to have learned what they must do to get past the
Russians into space.
Topic #3—When news of the presidential assassination attempt here in Wash-

ington flashed around the world last March 30, it triggered an old concern in
many minds. America was caught in a vulnerable moment. Would some other
country try to take advantage in some way? Most of all, would Russia decide to
invade Poland? At that time headlines were telling us that an invasion might be
imminent. As it turned out then, our worries were unfounded. Russia had made
no move toward Poland; instead, they were in the process of cooling down the
latest “Solidarity” labor crisis. Likewise other nations around the world gener-
ally acted with restraint following news of the shooting—that is, all the world’s
nations except one. The lone exception was Israel.
The timing could not have been more precise, my friends, if it had been planned
in advance. As the first shocking bulletins of the shooting flashed across Amer-
ica, Israeli war planes were starting their engines. As White House spokesmen
were gathering to brief the press, Israeli fighter bombers were gathering over
Lebanon.
Through the afternoon and evening we Americans huddled around our televi-
sion sets for the latest word from George Washington University Hospital.
Meanwhile Lebanese villagers were huddling in basements and bombed-out
shelters as Israeli missiles and bombs exploded all around them. On the BBC
World Service and other short-wave radio news reports around the world, the
sudden new Israeli raids on Lebanon that day were big news. Not so here in
America. News of the presidential shooting and its aftermath drowned out eve-
rything else. It was not until Syrian troops began making moves in response to
the Israeli raids that Lebanon began to enter our consciousness here. Day by
day the Israelis and Syrians lashed out at one another more and more, directly
and through surrogates in Lebanon.
On April 28 Israeli jets shot down two Syrian helicopters over Lebanon. It was
big news overseas. Here in the United States though it was overshadowed by
the presidential speech to Congress that evening. It was not until the following
day, April 29, that the Lebanon crisis received top billing in America’s con-
trolled major media. The Syrians had moved Russian SAM-6 anti-aircraft
missiles into the Bekaa valley of Lebanon. This was Syria’s answer to Israel’s
downing of two of her helicopters the day before over Zahle. Thus the Middle
East missile crisis was born.
439
Another mounting crisis is the growing feud between the United States and Ja-
pan. Lately it seems as if Washington can’t do anything right towards the
Japanese. On the morning of April 10, 1981, the first attempt to launch the
space shuttle “Columbia” took place at Cape Canaveral. It ended in failure due
to a computer problem, but it was the top story that day here in America. It all
but drowned out the news story that was No. 1 that day in Japan.
The previous day, an American submarine had sunk a small Japanese freighter,
supposedly by ramming it. Then the submarine had left the scene without mak-
ing any attempt to rescue survivors. Worse yet, the United States had not even
admitted the incident to Japanese authorities until 36 hours later. In the weeks
that have passed since the incident took place, the episode has raised more and
more questions in Japanese minds. The United States Navy issued a report
about it which differs drastically from the testimony of the 13 Japanese survi-
vors. The Navy report even puts the location of the collision 3-1/2 miles away
from where it actually happened. The Japanese want to know WHY.
To this and many other puzzling questions about the incident, the Japanese are
demanding answers, but they are not getting those answers. The supposedly ac-
cidental sinking of the Japanese freighter was only the opening gun in the
Washington-Tokyo feud. Since then Japan has been rocked by one shock after
another at the hands of the United States. American naval vessels have sailed
through Japanese fishing fleets, cutting fishing nets to ribbons. Suddenly there
are revelations that American ships with nuclear weapons aboard have been us-
ing Japanese ports regularly in secret. Secretary of State Haig canceled a visit to
Japan. Even the visit of Prime Minister Suzuki to Washington recently back-
fired on him. He agreed to language in a joint communique that led to
accusations in Japan that Suzuki was making a secret military alliance with the
United States. The irony of it all is that Suzuki’s troubles are due to the fact that
he is resisting any such military alliance.
The Bolsheviks here in America want Japan to re-arm, to become the police-
man of the Western Pacific. Suzuki’s predecessor, Prime Minister Ohira, was
ready to go along with America’s Bolsheviks despite stern warnings from Rus-
sia not to. Then Ohira died suddenly a year ago, and Suzuki replaced him.
Suzuki does not want to re-arm Japan, and so America’s Bolsheviks want him
out of office. Japan has endured all kinds of shocks in recent months, but they
all have one common denominator. They all have involved loss of face for Ja-
pan as a whole and especially for Prime Minister Suzuki.
In Asia, loss of face is a very serious matter. By using it as a political weapon,

America’s Bolsheviks believe they can bring down the Suzuki government.
440
Audio Letter 65
Whoever follows Suzuki will have to talk “peace” for domestic consumption,
but he will have to prepare for war if he is to get along with Washington.
Elsewhere in Asia, Red China and Vietnam have supposedly recently engaged
in very heavy border fighting with many casualties. Meanwhile the so-called
Reagan Administration is preparing to declare openly that it will sell America’s
most sophisticated weapons to Red China. The United States Government, my
friends, has gone insane from the cancer of Bolshevism, and is leading America
from folly to greater folly.
In Europe, too, there is turmoil at the hands of Bolshevik agents. The govern-
ment of Italy has just been brought down in a tremendous scandal involving a
massive conspiracy of many of the country’s leading citizens. In West Ger-
many, Chancellor Helmut Schmidt is under fire from forces who want to undo
the balance he has struck between East and West. And in France the Bolsheviks
won a tremendous victory in the election last month. Until now, France has en-
joyed a special relationship with Russia as well as with the West. The
relationship has been one of trust built up laboriously beginning with the late
President Charles de Gaulle; but the new French president, Mitterrand, is work-
ing as fast as possible to change that. Mitterrand will try to bring France into
the anti-Russian camp, headed by the Bolsheviks here in America.
My friends, crises large and small are multiplying all around us, and by and
large they are not accidental. They are part of the deliberate war build-up strat-
egy of the Bolsheviks here, which I made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 63.
By turning the world into a caldron of crises, they are setting the stage for
NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The whole world is becoming like the uneasy Balkans
just before World War I.
World War I was set off seemingly by accident by the assassination of Arch-
duke Ferdinand of Austria by a terrorist. Today, we are once again in the era of
terrorism, assassination, and turmoil. Like World War I, NUCLEAR WAR
ONE will erupt suddenly from an unexpected spark, seemingly by accident. But
World War I was brought about deliberately, my friends, and the same will be
true of NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
All of this is not lost on the new rulers of Russia. Russia’s rulers are convinced
that it is only a matter of time until all-out war breaks out between the United
States and Russia, so the Russians are continuing to whittle away at America’s
ability to damage Russia.
441
When the space shuttle “Columbia” took off on its ill-fated flight last April 12,
a fleet of special airplanes were aloft to help track it. The United States was de-
pending heavily on its fleet of advanced range instrumentation aircraft. These
are flying radar and communication stations known as “Droop Snoots” for their
huge bulbous nose. This special airplane is a modified military Boeing 707 des-
ignated EC-135N. When they are not involved in space shots, the EC-135N’s
also have many other uses, including the tracking of Russian satellites. There
are only a few EC-135N’s, so they are all important. When the space shuttle
“Columbia” took off last April, there were only eight of them.
The Space Shuttle Program is an indispensable key to the current war plans of
the Bolsheviks here, and the EC-135N’s are crucial to the Shuttle Program. On
May 6, 1981, an EC-135N nicknamed the “Boss Hog” took off from its base at
Wright-Patterson Air Force Base, Ohio. It headed east on what was to be a rou-
tine training flight. As the modified “707” flew eastward, it was heading for an
unexpected rendezvous. Hovering high over the rolling hills of western Mary-
land, a lone Cosmosphere was waiting for the Boss Hog. At 10:51 A.M. Eastern
Time the pilot of the jet radioed the words “Flight level 290” to flight control-
lers on the ground. The plane was at 29,000 feet. Moments later the
Cosmosphere fired its Charged Particle Beam weapon downward at the jet
plane passing miles below it. The beam blasted a hole through the top of the
fuselage and another out through the bottom. Explosive decompression emptied
the cabin of its air. The blast also set off a secondary explosion of some kind,
turning the jet into a ball of flames. At the same time control cables through the
tail were destroyed, and the jet turned violently nose down. Instead of gliding to
a crash many miles away, the ruined airplane dropped like a rock, almost
straight down. Radar traffic controllers were startled to see the plane disappear
suddenly from their screens. It was all over before they even knew anything had
happened. On the ground, eye witnesses heard a boom-boom-boom, and mo-
ments later a giant ball of fire came screaming downward out of the clouds. For
10 more minutes small pieces of debris from the plane kept settling earthward
for miles around.
In any air disaster as violent as this one, the investigation usually extends over a
period of months—but not this time, my friends. On Friday May 29, just over
three weeks after the crash, the Air Force quietly announced that its investiga-
tion was already over. They knew what had blown their radar plane out of the
air, but they also declared that for the time being the results will not be made
public.
While the Air Force was still reeling from the crash of the EC-135N, it became
the Navy’s turn. Once again Russia’s target was a highly sophisticated elec-
442
Audio Letter 65
tronic warfare jet. The plane involved was an EA-6B Prowler based on the nu-
clear supercarrier USS Nimitz.
On the night of Tuesday May 26, the Nimitz was engaged in night-landing ex-
ercises just off the East Coast. Carrier landings are always dangerous, and night
landings especially so; but the EA-6B has a special advantage. It is equipped
with an Automatic Carrier Landing System to permit safe landings even in con-
ditions of zero visibility. Partly as a result, the Prowlers are known as some of
the safest of all carrier aircraft; but on that night of May 26 one of Russia’s new
Jumbo Cosmospheres was hovering high above the Nimitz. It was one of the
two which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 64 armed with a Neutron Parti-
cle Beam. As an EA-6B approached the Nimitz to land, the Cosmosphere
waited. At a critical moment of the final approach, the Cosmosphere fired. The
invisible neutron beam instantly killed the crew of three and temporarily de-
ranged the airplane’s electronic systems. Being suddenly without guidance, the
jet veered to the right and crashed into a deck full of airplanes. The toll: 14
dead, 48 injured, and 20 aircraft destroyed or damaged. It was the Navy’s worst
flight-deck disaster since 1953.
Day by day, my friends, the stakes are steadily increasing. The closer we get to
all-out war, the more incidents like this we will see; yet, somehow, we seem
oblivious to the real cause. Our leaders are telling us that we have to act
“tough” to keep the peace. Meanwhile our supposedly “tough” actions are lead-
ing to the exact opposite of peace—NUCLEAR WAR ONE!
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
Now it’s time for my Last Minute Summary.
My friends, these days we hear constantly about something called National Se-
curity. What does that mean to you? Can there be any such thing as National
Security without National Survival? If not, then our national security hangs by a
thread, because our national survival is in dire jeopardy. Our leaders keep tell-
ing us that the threat to our security is Russia. Then, while we are not looking,
they turn right around and taunt the Russian Bear. I have a last minute report to
pass on to you in this very vein.
As you know, the supercarrier Nimitz entered port only very briefly after the
fiery crash of the EA-6B. It entered port on May 28 and left again just two days
later, May 30. The official story was that it was heading for the Caribbean for
continued exercises.
443
I must now report to you that the Nimitz was ordered to the north, not to the
south. In a drastic departure from normal procedure, an American carrier group
has been ordered into the Norwegian and Barents Seas, right on the doorstep of
Russia. This deployment is expected to be brief, but it is very dangerous. It is
an insane act of bravado by the Bolsheviks here, like walking up to a bully and
knocking the chip off his shoulder. Probably the Nimitz will get away with it,
this time; but one of these days we will cross that invisible line in the dust—and
the world will be at war!
My friends, what is called National Security today is a lie. The more we spend
on national security, the less secure we become. True security can be built only
on the foundation of mutual trust and mutual respect, and those things in turn
can be built only on the TRUTH. Those who secretly control America’s destiny
today cannot stand the truth. They are the enemies of our Lord Jesus Christ, and
as He said long ago: They were liars from the beginning.
We must seek the Truth, cherish the Truth, and pass on the Truth to others.
Only in that way can we break free of the Satanic power that now grips Amer-
ica.
444
Audio Letter 66
July 11, 1981
A few days ago on June 29, 1981, the Supreme Court ruled in effect that the
United States is now in a state of war. That is the real meaning of the Court’s 7
to 2 decision in the case of former CIA agent Philip Agee. The Court declared
that the Government can revoke the passport of a person who discloses secrets
about American spying overseas. The decision was bottomed on the Govern-
ment’s right to restrict public speech or press stories about the movement of
American troops or sailing dates of American ships.
My friends, this governmental power to restrict free speech has always applied
only during wartime, so a state of war has now been officially recognized—not
by our sleeping Congress but by the Supreme Court of the United States. And
what kind of war is it? It’s a secret war, my friends. The Agee decision hands
important new powers to the United States Government to help in closing down
America for the nuclear holocaust to come. By the time this secret war erupts
into the open, America will already be on a complete war footing!
The secret war which has just been quietly acknowledged by the Supreme
Court has been raging now for five years. It began in the summer of 1976 with
a crisis which to this day has never yet been made public officially, the Under-
water Missile Crisis. Since then, the secret war has expanded into pre-war
nuclear sabotage of the United States, secret space warfare, an Intelligence war-
fare involving techniques which sound unbelievable to many people. Many
skirmishes in the secret war have been kept out of the news. Others have been
impossible to hide completely, so instead they have been explained away in
various ways by Government spokesmen and the “kept” media. But these
things, my friends, are becoming harder and harder to hide because we are inch-
ing closer and closer to the brink of all-out war; and as we do so, the incidents
are becoming more frequent, more violent, and causing more casualties.
In my AUDIO LETTER reports to you over the years I have detailed many of
these developments as they have happened. I believe you have a right to know
because it’s your life and your country that is at stake. For that reason I must
now reveal the greatest tragedy yet in the secret war.
445
My friends, the greatest naval disaster since World War II has now befallen the
United States. As yet there’s no hint of this disaster in the news. Part of the rea-
son is that the Pentagon is not yet totally sure what happened. In addition, a
frantic effort is under way to construct a believable cover story which will save
the Pentagon officials from mass dismissals and disgrace. Their secret war
games caused the disaster.
Whenever the cover story is decided upon and released, the plan is to pretend
that the disaster has freshly happened at that time. That will be a lie. The final
act in this twin naval catastrophe took place, ironically, on American Independ-
ence Day, July 4, 1981. Not one, but two, United States naval vessels have been
destroyed in the secret catastrophe. I will not give the names of these naval ves-
sels right now out of respect for the next of kin of their crews. It’s only right to
let the next of kin be notified before the names of the vessels are made public.
For the same reason, I will not divulge the types of vessels involved at this
time; but I can tell you that two different types of naval combatants were in-
volved in the double tragedy.
The remains of the two American naval vessels are resting on the bottom of the
Norwegian Sea between Iceland and Norway. The navigational coordinates of
the larger ship are: 68 degrees, 56 minutes, 24 seconds North 1 degree, 6 min-
utes, 40 seconds East.
The smaller vessel is to the east of that in two pieces, one piece about 30 miles
away, the other some 40 miles beyond that. My friends, I cannot say how long
the Pentagon will keep quiet about this tragedy. One thing is for sure, though.
They will keep quiet for as long as they can.
Only a few months ago on April 9, an American submarine sank a Japanese

tanker, supposedly by ramming it. And what did the United States Government
do? The submarine departed without any effort to save the survivors as the ship
sank. Then the United States Government did not even report the incident to
Japan for a day and a half. It was only because the Japanese knew themselves
about the sinking that the United States admitted it. Even then, the Navy issued
a report about the incident that is full of holes. But this time, my friends, both
vessels which have been sunk are United States vessels, so there is no telling
how long the silence will last.
We are now on a timetable for NUCLEAR WAR ONE that is aiming for mid-
1982, about one year from now. Whether that timetable will be speeded up or
slowed down by events, I cannot predict; but I will continue for as long as I can
446
Audio Letter 66
to let you know what you need to know in order to understand our headlong
rush toward war.
Topic #1—THE ISRAELI PRACTICE RAID FOR NUCLEAR

ARMAGEDDON
Topic #2—AMERICA’S “LAUNCH ON WARNING” PLAN” FOR

NUCLEAR SUICIDE
Topic #3—WHAT YOU CAN DO DURING AMERICA’S FINAL DAYS.
Topic #1—To the north and west of the Persian Gulf there lies a land whose
ancient origins are lost in the mists of time. It’s the land between the rivers Ti-
gris and Euphrates, the cradle of civilization. Tradition has it that the Garden of
Eden was in this area, and in fact the Book of Genesis even mentions the Eu-
phrates as one of its boundaries. Later we’re told that the tower of Babel was
located in the same area, spawning the ancient historical City of Babylon.
Elsewhere in that same area, the famous City of Ninevah also rose and flour-
ished, becoming the center of the Assyrian empire. All those things took place
long before the birth of our Lord Jesus Christ, but centuries after His coming
the glory of the land between the rivers rose again. Those were the days of the
Muslim Saracen empire of the caliphs. By around 800 A.D. the empire of Ca-
liph Haroun al Raschid was huge. It encompassed all of Arabia, Persia, Egypt,
Syria, North Africa, and parts of what is now southern Russia.
The home of the Saracen empire was that same rich land between the Tigris and
Euphrates, and the jewel at its very center was a magnificent city. The capital
city of the ancient caliphs was built from scratch for that purpose starting in 762
A.D., and what a city it was. By all accounts, the court of the caliphs was the
most magnificent the world has ever seen. The palace was so huge that more
than 80,000 servants lived and worked within it. Gold, silver, and precious
stones were turned into ornaments of unparalleled beauty by craftsmen edu-
cated in the highly advanced science of the day. In the Hall of Audience there
stood a famous tree of gold, and on the branches of the tree, says tradition, there
were perched birds of gold and silver studded with precious stones. The birds
were music boxes and they fluttered their mechanical wings as they poured
forth intricate songs. Outside the palace, the city was arranged in expanding
circles with a system of three walls at the outer boundary. The city quickly be-
came a world center of commerce, science, literature, and art. The city, my
447
friends, was ancient Baghdad, the city of “The Thousand and One Arabian
Nights.”
The splendor of old Baghdad made it a tempting prize for other less civilized
peoples who heard of it. It was not long before ancient Baghdad became a focal
point of warfare, involving especially the Mongols and Turks. Rapacious greed
destroyed much of the beauty which had once been the hallmark of Baghdad.
Constant warfare took its toll, and over the centuries the Saracen empire de-
cayed in culture and power. The ancient irrigation systems were destroyed, and
what was once a Garden of Eden began to turn into a wasteland. In 1516 Bagh-
dad fell permanently to the Turks, and the once magnificent Saracen empire
faded into the sands of a man-made desert.
The Baghdad of today is a far cry from that fabled city of old. Modern Bagh-
dad, Iraq, lies on the east bank of the Tigris across the river from the ruins of
the ancient city. Even so, the Baghdad of today does have certain things in
common with the Baghdad of old. Modern Baghdad is struggling once again to
become a city of science, culture, and power; and like the ancient city, modern
Baghdad is faced with a powerful enemy who wants to destroy it.
Last month on Sunday June 7 an aerial strike force of 14 warplanes started their
jet engines in the country that calls itself Israel. Eight of them were American
F-16s loaded with one-ton bombs. The other six were American F-15s, air su-
periority fighters to fly along and protect the F-16s from any possible
defenders. After the planes took off, they refueled from an aerial tanker for the
long war flight they were about to make.
For days beforehand, the Israeli planes had been flying training exercises de-
signed to look like the early part of the real raid. As a result, when the war raid
was launched on that Sunday last month, it looked at first like just another drill.
To maintain the surprise, the Israeli strike force thundered eastward over Jordan
at high altitude, mimicking Jordanian Air Force procedures. Next, the Israeli
fighter bombers raced into and across northwest Saudi Arabia. Following secret
orders from the Pentagon, the American-manned AWACS radar plane patrol-
ling over Saudi Arabia did not report the Israeli intrusion into Saudi air space.
Thanks to this pre-planned cooperation by the United States, the fate of the Is-
raeli target in Baghdad was sealed.
The Israeli F-15s and 16s streaked across the Syrian desert of Iraq on the deck
below Iraqi radar. As they neared Baghdad, they appeared to rise from nowhere
out of the Iraqi countryside as they climbed to begin the attack. At 6:30 P.M.
Baghdad time, a hail of one-ton bombs began raining down on the Iraqi nuclear
448
Audio Letter 66
reactor which was under construction. Within a matter of minutes the reactor
facility lay in smoking ruins.
The Israeli bombing raid into Iraq was a momentous event, the kind of thing we
expect to hear about immediately through our electronic news media. Instead,
the world remained ignorant of the raid for another full day. Iraq imposed a
news blackout about it at first for military reasons. The raid had come without
warning or provocation, and the Iraqis were not sure what else Israel might be
about to do. The United States Government knew about the raid beforehand;
but true to form these days, the United States said nothing to the world about
what it knew. It was left to Israel itself to publicly announce the raid, which it
did in triumphant glowing terms.
Around the world the reaction was revulsion, shock, and condemnation—and
no wonder. For one thing, Israel is trying to justify its act of war in arrogantly
self-righteous terms. Israel complains that Iraq was building a reactor—but
wants everyone to forget her own nuclear capability which is already opera-
tional! Israel has always refused to sign the Nuclear Non-Proliferation Treaty,
which Iraq has signed. The Iraqi nuclear facility has been inspected regularly by
the International Atomic Energy Agency during its construction phase when
any violations would be hard to hide; but Israel, which has never once submit-
ted to international inspection, bombed the plant anyway.
Beyond these matters of international law and simple justice, Israel has also
opened Pandora’s box in more ways than one. For one thing, Israel has broken
an unwritten taboo against attacks of any kind against nuclear facilities. Now
the nuclear power plants of the world have been made fair game! Military, pa-
ramilitary, or terrorist attacks on nuclear power plants will no longer be
unthinkable, thanks to the Israeli raid into Iraq; and, my friends, this includes
the 72 nuclear power plants now operating right here in the United States! By
secretly going along with the Israeli raid, the United States Pentagon is sowing
the seeds of nuclear terrorism in our own land.
Most important of all, the Israeli raid on Iraq’s nuclear plant was a dry run for a
far more important raid. I’m referring to the coming Israeli limited nuclear at-
tack on Saudi Arabia’s oil fields. The nuclear destruction of Saudi Arabia’s oil
fields is far from a new idea, as my older listeners already know. I first reported
that this was in the works nearly six years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 6. At
that time the plan revolved around the so-called “Sinai accord” involving
Egypt, Israel, and the United States. Two hundred or so Americans were in the
Sinai under that agreement, and they were intended to become the focus of an
incident to set off war in the area. The actual attack on Saudi oil fields was to
449
be carried out using Cobra helicopter gunships with special air-to-ground

atomic missiles.
As I detailed at the time, the plan was part of the ongoing joint plan between the
long-time Rulers of the United States and the Soviet Union for world domina-
tion. As originally conceived, the plan called for a nuclear capping of Saudi oil
fields sometime in 1976. It was not carried out at that time because the secret
alliance between the United States and Russia started coming apart in 1976.
The old Rockefeller allies in Russia, the Bolsheviks, were being quietly over-
thrown there. In their place a new ruling group were taking over. Russia’s new
rulers hate the Bolsheviks and have been expelling them from Russia in great
numbers; and because America’s then Secret Rulers, the Rockefellers, had sup-
ported Bolshevik rule in Russia from 1917, Russia’s new rulers were taking
defensive actions. The result was the still secret Underwater Missile Crisis
which I reported in the summer of 1976. The collapse of the Rockefeller-Soviet
alliance during 1976 and 1977 brought a reprieve for Saudi Arabia. Now Amer-
ica’s Bolshevik government has carried over the plan to destroy Saudi oil fields.
The plan has been continuously updated and revised for maximum strategic
value in the new international situation. I’ve given reports periodically in my
AUDIO LETTERS about the evolving status of this war plan.
For three years now the secret plan for Saudi Arabia’s nuclear doom has been
integrated into a new master strategy for a nuclear war. Behind closed doors,
America’s Bolshevik military planners have secretly shifted to a first-strike nu-
clear strategy against Russia. When the Saudi oil fields are capped off in the
Israeli nuclear raid, it is intended to set in motion a chain of events.
Those events are to culminate in NUCLEAR WAR ONE with America striking
first at Russia.
I first reported the broad outlines of this radical new war plan in AUDIO
LETTER No. 37 for August 1978. I reported that the first step was to be a sup-
posedly surprise agreement between Israel and Egypt the following month at
Camp David. The Camp David hoax went off without a hitch, and the following
spring the Egyptian-Israeli treaty was signed in Washington. It was called a
“peace” treaty, but its real purpose was to set the stage for war!
My friends, the so-called Egyptian-Israeli peace treaty is just a new, more

elaborate version of the Sinai accord of six years ago. The Sinai accord was
held together by American technicians in the Sinai. Likewise, now the Egyp-
tian-Israeli treaty is leading toward a primarily American military force in the
Sinai Peninsula due to start April 1982.
450
Audio Letter 66
Now, as then, the purpose is to provide a pretext to drag the United States di-
rectly into a Middle East war. From there the conflict is to spread into all-out
war! In order to carry out the coming limited nuclear attack on Saudi Arabia,
world opinion must be prepared in advance as much as possible. The idea of
actually using nuclear weapons must be made less unthinkable to us, and Israel
must be provided some excuse for calling Saudi Arabia a deadly threat. In both
of these areas, rapid progress is now being made!
To make an atomic raid more thinkable when it takes place, Israel has been us-
ing the old technique of “gradualism.” For years Israeli war planes have been
striking into Lebanon. For a while there were feeble protests from Washington,
for public consumption, that Israel might be misusing her American weapons.
Israel replied that she was attacking a vital threat, the PLO, and just kept it up.
After a while the novelty wore off and most of us began to just accept it.
Next, the Israelis raised the threshold of psychological pain a notch higher. In
clear and direct violation of agreements with the Pentagon, Israeli aircraft
started dropping cluster bombs on Lebanon. Lebanese villagers—men, women,
and children—were maimed, dismembered, and killed. When we first heard
about it, it sounded inexcusable to many, but after a short while we forgot about
our outrage and went on to other things.
Once again the United States Government was careful to do nothing. We had
learned to accept something a little worse than before in warfare. Step by step
the Israeli violations of international law and of agreements with the United
States have become bolder and bolder. Each time the United States Government
has given lip service to law, morality, and a momentary concern of the Ameri-
can public; but each time Israel has been given the green light again with hardly
a pause.
It was only a matter of weeks ago that the Israeli Air Force shot down two Syr-
ian helicopters over Lebanon using American-made aircraft. The result was a
new crisis over Syrian antiaircraft missiles. With that crisis still unresolved, Is-
rael has now destroyed a nuclear reactor in Iraq, and all the while the United
States Government continues to let Israel have its own way because, my
friends, Israel is doing exactly what the Bolshevik military planners here want
done!
Having accepted Israel’s destruction of a nuclear reactor, it’s only a short step
beyond to accept the use of battlefield nuclear weapons.
451
That still leaves the matter of setting up Saudi Arabia as a credible threat to Is-
rael. The United States is taking care of that problem while pretending to do the
Saudis a favor. Early next year Saudi Arabia is to start taking delivery of a fleet
of F-15 Fighters equivalent in many ways to those of Israel. On top of that, the
sale of five AWACS radar surveillance planes to Saudi Arabia is being consid-
ered. The secret purpose of these arms deals with Saudi Arabia is the exact
opposite of what is claimed. The United States claims that it wants to improve
Saudi Arabia’s national security, presumably against Russia; but, my friends,
the real purpose is to give Israel the excuse it needs for a pre-emptive attack on
Saudi Arabia.
The model for Israel’s attack to come against Saudi Arabia was the attack last
month against Iraq. Israel claimed that the Iraqi reactor was going to be used
some day against Israel. On that basis, Israel described its pre-emptive surprise
attack on Iraq as a defensive action. It was even said that Israel had saved lives
by carrying out the surgical attack before the facility was completed.
Much the same things will be said and done when the time comes for Israel to
attack the Saudi oil fields. The Israelis will act more and more frightened that a
Saudi Arabia armed with modern F-15s will some day use them against Israel.
As proof, they will quote out of context past Saudi calls for a Muslim jihad to
gain control of Jerusalem; and to justify the pre-emptive nature of the raid, the
Israelis will insist that they were forced to strike before or shortly after delivery
of the AWACS radar planes. As in the case of the Iraqi nuclear plant, Israel will
characterize the Saudi raid as having been designed to spare as many lives as
possible. The raid will not strike at heavy population centers but at the oil
fields. In this way the Israelis will say that they have eliminated the financial
basis of the alleged threat to Israel.
My friends, when I first began reporting on the plan to cap off Saudi Arabia’s
oil wells in an Israeli nuclear raid, many people found it unthinkable. That was
five and six years ago. Something called “detente” was still the official line.
Nuclear war between the United States and Russia sounded too farfetched at
that time for most people to even pay attention. And as for Israel bombing
Saudi oil fields, even the Saudis themselves could not believe it when they were
informed of the plan.
How quickly times change! People no longer scoff at the idea that nuclear war
is approaching between Russia and America. And now, even the Israeli plan to
bomb the Saudi oil fields is finally beginning to surface. Last month on June
12, only five days after the Israeli raid into Iraq, the New York Daily News car-
ried an article about “Israel’s oil weapon.” The article begins:
452
Audio Letter 66
“Israel has an oil weapon too, one just as powerful as the threat of an embargo
by Saudi Arabia or any other Arab state. Israel can bomb the wells.”
Further on, an aide to Israeli Prime Minister Begin is quoted as saying:
“The Saudis can cut off oil to the West, and so can we.”
When Israel decides to bomb the Saudi wells, it will do so in the same way as it
bombed the Iraqi nuclear plant. Israel will use its newest and best American jet
fighter bombers against Saudi Arabia, just as it did against Iraq. The raid will
be launched with absolutely no advance warning, just as was done against Iraq;
and just as happened to Iraq, the Israelis will make maximum use of deception
in the raid itself.
For some two years now, the Israeli Air Force has been carrying out mock air
raids on northwestern Saudi Arabia. Every so often Israeli F-15 fighter bombers
swoop in unexpectedly across the Saudi border from the Gulf of Aqaba. As of-
ten as not, they carry out a simulated attack on the Saudi Air Base at Tabuk.
The frustrated Saudis are falling into a trap by reacting exactly as expected.
They are crying out for their own F-15s so that Israel will be unable to continue
these brazen overflights. What the Saudis have so far refused to accept is that
this is all a ruse, a deceptive trick.
One day in 1982, perhaps sooner, Israel plans to launch the real raid. At first, it
will look like just another of those mock attacks on the Saudi Air Base; but
when the Israeli jets pass over the Base, they will not turn back as in the past!
Instead, they will thunder overhead in a straight line toward the Persian Gulf.
Disappearing into the undefended interior of Saudi Arabia, they will disperse to
elude further detection. As in the case of last month’s raid into Iraq, the Ameri-
can-manned AWACS plane will conveniently fail to locate the Israeli attackers
in time. Within two hours, nuclear fireballs will cap off the Saudi oil wells. The
world will be in a state of shock, the industrial heart of Europe and Japan will
be crippled; but this will be only the beginning.
Bolshevik America will finally be able to put its gasoline rationing plan into
operation. The country will be put on a wartime basis, our youth will be drafted,
and our country will be made to accept this first open act of nuclear warfare
since World War II.
453
Israel has paved the way for all this with its destruction of the Iraqi nuclear re-
actor. With its attack on the ancient Garden of Eden, Israel has begun leading
the world into “the valley of the shadow of death.”
Topic #2—During the past several months I’ve been trying to call attention to a
major new trend in current world events. The world is splintering, splitting up
into factions which are all squabbling with one another. The whole world is be-
coming like the Balkans before World War I, a caldron of crises, seething and
bubbling hotter and hotter. We are beginning to see not just one crisis at a time
but several crises all at once. In AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I gave a warning to
watch for this trend to speed up. Our world is being divided and Balkanized de-
liberately by the Bolsheviks who now control the United States Government.
In 1914 World War I erupted suddenly, seemingly by accident, out of the un-
stable ferment of crises in the Balkans. Likewise NUCLEAR WAR ONE is
intended to erupt soon out of the spreading chaos of world-wide crises. My
friends, World War I was not accidental; it was only made to appear that way.
Likewise NUCLEAR WAR ONE will not be accidental, but we are being con-
ditioned to think it is accidental when it happens.
Most Americans today when we think about global war think about World War
II, not World War I. We tend to think about the repeated appeasement of Hitler
during the 30’s by Britain and France; and we recall that it all ended in the most
destructive war in history, World War II. The so-called Reagan Administration
is taking advantage of these costly historical memories by saying in effect “No
more appeasement.” Hearing that, millions of Americans cheer in agreement.
Meanwhile, under the guise of non-appeasement, the United States is actually
pursuing a policy of confrontation. We are told with a Hollywood smile that we
must act “tough” to keep the peace. Then we go beyond that, acting not just
tough but belligerent in ways designed to move us toward war.
Long ago President Teddy Roosevelt said, “Walk softly but carry a big stick.”
Instead, the alleged Reagan Administration is swaggering like a bully with
nothing but a chip on its shoulder. The Reagan-style government rhetoric is
slanted toward our memories of World War II. As a result, most Americans are
prevented from thinking about the more important lessons of World War I.
But the Balkanization of our world today is not lost on everyone. There are be-
ginning to be worried Establishment voices talking about it. An example was a
recent article in that old Establishment publication Foreign Affairs. In this arti-
cle the author expressed worry over the United States’ attitude these days of not
even talking to the Russians. It says this leaves us, quote: “...in a situation
454
Audio Letter 66
where the risk of war is higher because of the danger of miscalculation by each
side. You could stumble into war almost like 1914. The Reagan Administration
model is Munich. I think that’s wrong. The correct model is 1914.” My friends,
that’s exactly what I reported several months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 63
except for one thing. The environment for miscalculation is not accidental, but
deliberate. It’s an old Bolshevik axiom that “In chaos there’s opportunity.”
Others, too, are breaking with past behavior to express unprecedented concern.
For example: Harvard economist John Kenneth Galbraith spoke recently in
commencement ceremonies at Johns Hopkins University. As reported in the
Washington Star for May 30, 1981, Galbraith lashed out at, quote:
“Those who say that we have to accept the risk of nuclear war to protect our
democratic system.”
Galbraith said that to do that is to risk destruction of that very system. He

pointed out that the highly sophisticated and deeply integrated modern eco-
nomic system cannot survive the shock of a nuclear exchange.
Another example of those now worrying in public is New York Times colum-
nist James Reston. In his column date-lined June 23, 1981, Reston discussed
what he called the Administration’s misconduct of foreign policy. He pointed
out that American government officials seem to be going in all directions at
once yet all in the general direction of confrontation with Russia; and he says,
quote: “The troubling thing about all of this is that nobody really knows what it
means.” He expresses puzzlement over the Administration’s public confirma-
tion of Intelligence arrangements with Red China which can only serve to
provoke Russia. Finally he concludes, quote:
“This is becoming a danger to the Administration; and if it keeps on goading

the Soviet Bear, even a threat to the peace.”
My friends, why have these and so many other voices trusted by the public been
so silent until so late in the game? Where were they five and six years ago?
When my AUDIO LETTER reports were documenting the secret Rockefeller-
Soviet alliance and its collapse, why did they speak only of detente? The an-
swer in some cases, my friends, is that half a decade ago America’s ruling
circles were still in bed with the Soviet Union. The Rockefeller cartel thought it
controlled Russia through the Bolshevik rulers of Russia. Today everything has
changed. The Bolsheviks have been overthrown at the highest levels of power
in Russia. Flocking here to the United States for a new start, the Bolsheviks in
turn have wrestled power away from the Rockefeller cartel.
455
In the so-called national election last November 1980, the crumbling Rockefel-
ler oil cartel made a desperate bid to retake control of the United States
Government. In AUDIO LETTER No. 59 last October I reported that the cartel
had re-grouped under the direction of John J. McCloy. Using the figurehead
known as Ronald Reagan, Big Oil tried to oust the Bolsheviks. They wanted to
get America back onto the track of their own Corporate Socialist Dictatorship.
The McCloy-dominated forces of Big Oil did succeed in their great surprise
landslide in the election itself, but the actual transfer of governmental power
was another matter.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 61 last January I reported that the obscure Branti deci-
sion of the Supreme Court would stand in the way. Sure enough, to this day
large numbers of critical government positions are still unfilled or staffed by
Bolshevik holdovers. The McCloy group are getting their way in some areas
but not in foreign policy. America’s foreign policy is still under total Bolshevik
control. These are the facts, my friends, behind the unusual expressions of
alarm by those normally silent Establishment voices. I have been told confiden-
tially by extremely well informed sources that the so-called Reagan
Administration has jumped the tracks. It’s out of their control; and now, none
other than John J. McCloy himself has been quoted publicly in exactly these
same terms.
Earlier I quoted from James Reston’s New York Times column of June 23. The
most significant statement in the entire column was the following, and I quote:
“John J. McCloy, former head of the World Bank and former United States
High Commissioner in Berlin, was down here this week saying what he thought
as usual about the conduct of American foreign policy. Mr. Mc Cloy thinks that
an administration whose success he favors has gone off the track.”
McCloy and his fellow members of the Rockefeller Establishment have no love
for the independent-minded Russians who now control the Kremlin; but unlike
the Bolsheviks here, they do think it is to our advantage to at least keep talking.
Recently a faithful listener of mine who is concerned about the need for arms
control wrote an influential American industrialist who is also a former ambas-
sador to Russia. He wrote back that it would be dangerous and unwise to simply
trust the Russians in whatever they say except, quote:
“If what is to be trusted is carefully written out and agreed upon mutually, then
I think one can trust them to observe the agreement.”
456
Audio Letter 66
I might mention that this agrees with my own personal experience during my
years with the United States Export-Import Bank. The Russians and their War-
saw Pact partners are always hard bargainers. They do not regard you as sincere
or to be taken seriously unless you will bargain hard and long; but once an
agreement is reached, they always observe it scrupulously. The problem is, to
bargain with the Russians you have to know what you want. If you want to
genuinely control nuclear arms, you will have to bargain toward that objective;
and genuine arms control is the last thing that would occur to America’s present
Bolshevik-dominated government.
On June 22 the President’s nominee to head the “Arms Control and Disarma-
ment Agency” practically said as much. In Senate testimony, Eugene V.
Rostow said, quote:
“It may be that a brilliant light will strike our officials, but I don’t know anyone
who knows what it is yet that we want to negotiate about.”
In the same testimony Rostow also said that the United States will not be ready
to start strategic weapons talks with Russia until March 1982. He lumped in not
only the SALT talks but also the issue of nuclear missiles in Europe. On June
29, 1981, the entity President Brezhnev said, quote:
“We are ready to sit down at the negotiating table on that issue even tomorrow,
if you like; but talks have not begun yet because of the United States’ attitude.”
The Russians have also said that they would halt deployment of their European
theater nuclear weapons during the talks if America would do the same. How-
ever, this is not a pre-condition to talks, contrary to some reports in the United
States.
When Eugene Rostow mentioned that the United States needs nine (9) more
months to get ready for arms negotiations, it was a slip of the tongue. Later he
had to recant about it to the astonished Senators on the Foreign Relations
Committee, saying he would not delay SALT negotiations. The nine-month
preparation time stated by Rostow has nothing to do with any coming arms con-
trol initiatives. After all, Rostow himself said no one even has any arms control
ideas to talk about. Instead, Rostow was referring accidentally to the nuclear
war preparations now under way.
Bolshevik military planners here now expect that by March 1982 essential nu-
clear first-strike preparations will be completed in the United States. At that
457
point, with the weapons already in place, we can pretend to talk; but as we talk,
we will also be setting in motion the events which are to lead to NUCLEAR
WAR ONE. The nine-month interval mentioned by Eugene Rostow is based
primarily on two military programs. One is the Space Shuttle Program, the
other is America’s secret mobile missile program which is going on under the
cover of the bogus “MX” project. I reported on the basic outlines of both of
these programs in the past, so I will simply update those reports now.
First, about the Space Shuttle Program. Last month I reported that NASA plans
to intentionally abort the upcoming shuttle launch in September. The shuttle
presently at Cape Canaveral is not the “Columbia,” which was destroyed in the
unsuccessful mission last April. I gave the details about that and the television
hoax to hide the disaster in AUDIO LETTER No. 64. The shuttle which we will
see lifting off from Cape Canaveral this fall will be the training shuttle “Enter-
prise” although, of course, it has been re-labeled Columbia. The Enterprise is
the same shuttle that we saw landing in California after the real Columbia had
already been destroyed. The flight this fall is intended to keep up appearances
while the secret military shuttle team figure out how to get past the Russians
into orbit. One way or another they believe that a successful shuttle flight will
be able to provide essential reconnaissance over Russia by the spring of 1982.
The other major factor is the Minuteman TX Mobile Missile deployment. I first
reported on this secret program just over a year ago in AUDIO LETTER No.
55. In AUDIO LETTER No. 60 last November, I gave an important update
concerning the Anti-Cosmosphere Missiles which are being deployed along
with TX missiles. I can now report that these Anti-Cosmosphere Missiles, or
ACMs, are becoming an essential key to the Bolshevik war plan. It is by means
of the ACMs that the Bolsheviks plan to set off what will seem to be “acciden-
tal” nuclear war.
To review for a moment, my friends, the Minuteman TX is a completely secret

mobile missile program. For public consumption, the Pentagon is pretending to
be concentrating on something called the MX. The MX, we’re told, will be big
and powerful, each carrying 10 nuclear warheads; and to hide it from the Rus-
sians, we’re told that it will be mobile.
Over the years, one basing scheme after another has been talked about for the
MX. About six weeks ago, on May 27, Henry Bradsher of the Washington Star
listed some of the MX basing systems that have been proposed, quote:
“...orbital basing; shallow underwater submarine basing; floating missiles in the

ocean; attaching them to the ocean bottom; mounting them on in land waterway
458
Audio Letter 66
barges and on ocean-going ships; aerial launching from special seaplanes, spe-
cial land-based planes, new short-airfield planes, new vertical takeoff planes
and dirigibles; putting thousands of smaller missiles in fixed silos; moving only
the warhead and guidance systems among multiple missile fuel bodies.”
My friends, work is going on to develop a larger ICBM under the MX program,

but that work is being used as a decoy and to provide a funding channel for
America’s real mobile missile, the Minuteman TX. The Pentagon wants to
make sure that everyone focuses their attention on the MX decoy program. The
best way to get people’s attention, you know, is to make them angry, so that’s
what the Pentagon has done. The Air Force is pretending to fight tooth and nail
for a patently ridiculous basing system—the infamous race tracks in Utah and
Nevada; and sure enough, people are up in arms over the MX—farmers, ranch-
ers, environmentalists, anti-nuclear activists—you name it. The MX decoy
system is drawing all the fire like the lightning rod it is meant to be.
Thanks to the orchestrated MX controversy our real mobile missile, the Min-
uteman TX, is being completely overlooked. Unlike the giant MX, the TX is
relatively small. It’s being deployed in the one way which should be most obvi-
ous of all. It is the one way never mentioned in connection with the MX
because the Pentagon does not want us to think of it. The Minuteman TX mis-
siles are being deployed on America’s railroads! They’re moved around
constantly, often right under our very noses. In AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I gave
a description of the unique railroad cars which house the TX missiles. Months
later some of my listeners began sending me photographs of them, and several
months ago I released a special bulletin containing these photographs.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 60 I described the ACM missiles which are beginning
to accompany the TX missiles as they are shuttled around. The ACM is basi-
cally like an ABM missile, built to take off with blinding speed. Each is armed
with a cobalt ionization bomb. When they explode at the upper fringes of the
atmosphere, the Bolsheviks here believe they will interfere temporarily with
any Russian Cosmospheres hovering overhead. Before the Cosmospheres can
recover, the TX missiles will be launched at Russia in a nuclear first strike. In
AUDIO LETTER No. 55 I explained that the nerve-racking false nuclear alerts
by NORAD were actually deliberate tests by Bolshevik agents. They want to
make sure that they can bring about a supposedly accidental first strike against
Russia that cannot be countermanded in Washington.
Early this year of 1981 the Bolsheviks here concluded that the best way to do
this is to shift the United States onto a “launch on warning” stance. Up until
recently the United States Nuclear Forces have required a positive order from
459
the President before launching a nuclear attack. In theory that’s still true, but in
practice it’s being changed quietly. Our Strategic Forces are being re-
programmed to launch an all-out attack on Russia under either of two condi-
tions.
The basic instruction is to await a positive command from Washington, but a

super secret new instruction tells Nuclear Forces they need not wait for a posi-
tive launch order under one extraordinary condition. This extraordinary
condition is defined as, quote:
“Widespread loss of C-3 connectivity due to EMP.”
EMP stands for “Electromagnetic Pulse,” a phenomenon associated with nu-

clear blasts at the fringes of the atmosphere or near space. In the early 1960’s it
was discovered by nuclear testing that EMP can overload and disable all kinds
of electrical equipment, even power lines. It is known that today EMP would
virtually wipe out the command, control, and communication system of the
United States called C-3 by the Pentagon. The Bolshevik military planners here
are turning this vulnerability to their own advantage. Through the appropriate
avenues they are arguing:
“Suppose the Soviet Union preceded an attack on the United States by using
EMP to wipe out our communications. They could set off a single H-bomb 250
miles over Omaha, Nebraska. All of our communications from Maine to Cali-
fornia, plus parts of Canada and Mexico, would be fried by EMP. Afterward the
President would have no way to get word to our ICBM crews, bomber crews, or
submarines to retaliate. The Russians could hit us,” say the Bolsheviks, “and we
would not hit back.”
Using this argument as an excuse, Bolshevik military planners here are dis-
seminating new secret orders to our Nuclear Forces.
These orders say that should there be an EMP episode that cuts off communica-
tions, that is to be taken as proof in itself, per se, that we are under nuclear
attack!
Under the new “Launch on Warning” posture of our Armed Forces, they will
not wait for any further orders. Obeying the secret new standing orders, all of
our ICBMs, bombers, and missile submarines will launch all-out retaliation on
Russia—that is, they will believe they are retaliating; but what they will actu-
ally be doing is mounting a nuclear first strike against Russia.
460
Audio Letter 66
When the Bolsheviks here are ready for it to happen, they will launch the Anti-
Cosmosphere Missiles which now accompany the mobile Minuteman TX mis-
siles. The ACMs will race to the fringes of space over America and explode
their cobalt ionization bombs. When that happens, it will do more than just in-
terfere with the Cosmospheres—it will also create a violent EMP episode. All
communications to centralized authority will be cut off, and our Nuclear Forces
will believe it is due to a Russian attack. There will be no time and no way to
double-check, and so United States Forces will attack Russia. The Bolsheviks
here will have set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE, and they will make it look as if it
all happened by accident!
WHAT YOU CAN DO DURING AMERICA’S FINAL DAYS.
Topic #3—One year ago this month I began responding to a question I was be-
ing asked at that time by many people. The question was, “What can I do?” I
did so reluctantly for the reasons I gave at the time, and yet I also did so hope-
fully. I felt that if that many people really wanted to take action, there might
really be a chance. I explained why, in my opinion, there was only one weapon
that could possibly save America from our headlong plunge toward nuclear
war. That weapon is the Truth. In particular, it is the truth about the covered-up
Fort Knox Gold Scandal that could stop our internal enemies in their tracks. I
started giving suggestions month by month for what YOU could do. We began
with Senator William Proxmire, then Chairman of the Senate Banking Commit-
tee. Later on we directed our efforts and attention to the privately owned
Federal Reserve System, which holds legal title to America’s missing gold. Fi-
nally we gave the entity President Reagan the chance to do his duty to look into
the matter.
I believe the time has come to give you an honest accounting of where we
stand. My friends, we have given every possible opportunity to those who have
the appropriate authority and responsibility to investigate honestly. And what
have they done? Has a single official of the United States Government, or of the
Federal Reserve Corporation, or of Congress taken the people’s side? NO.
Without exception they have all come down on the side of keeping the lid on
the facts about our missing gold. Without exception they’re saying in effect that
they don’t care about the destruction of our hard-earned dollars and our econ-
omy. They don’t care that you cannot make ends meet. They do not care that
America’s economic collapse is paving the way for dictatorship and war. They
care only about keeping themselves on what they believe will be the winning
side, and they have proven by their actions that they believe those who stole our
gold will be the winning side. Senator William Proxmire, aided by the so-called
Inspector General of the Treasury Department, steadfastly refused to investi-
461
gate. The Federal Reserve Corporation has also closed ranks to keep out the
light of truth. For a while a few months ago, certain high officials of the Re-
gional Federal Reserve Banks were being surprisingly cooperative. Now all that
has been put to a stop. Several officials have resigned. All the rest have gone
silent as stone.
On June 22, 1981, my friend Mr. Edward Durell sent a certified letter to every
single Federal Reserve System Director in the United States. In that letter he
warned each Director of his or her individual legal responsibility relative to the
nation’s missing gold reserves. Based on various legal precedents, each one is
legally liable if any of the gold is missing, and yet not a single one has dared to
break through the wall of silence which has now been imposed.
And then, there’s the President! The entity known as Ronald Reagan gives
beautiful lip service to the idea that any governmental abuses should be rooted
out. So three months ago I invited you to send Mailgrams to him, urging him or
his representatives to look into the Gold Scandal. For starters, we urged him to
investigate the discrepancy of 165,000,000 ounces between different statements
of the Treasury itself on our gold supplies. My friends, I have never heard one
peep out of the White House in reply. And, so far as I know, no one who sent a
Mailgram even had it acknowledged.
My friends, there can be no more appeals to authority except to the authority of

our Lord Jesus Christ, Who is above all. Time is running out. By this time next
year NUCLEAR WAR ONE could be upon us, so I urge those of you who still
want to take action to do it right where you are. Use your files of correspon-
dence to share what you have learned with others if they are interested. Let the
power of the Truth do its work in spite of the corruption in high places, and let
your own knowledge of the truth about current events help you decide wisely in
taking care of your own family needs.
Now it’s time for my Last Minute Summary. My friends, time is fast running
out for the United States of America. Timetables can never be firm, but the
Bolsheviks here are now shooting for around mid-1982 to set off NUCLEAR
WAR ONE. Even now a great naval disaster has befallen the United States be-
cause of their maneuverings.
My friends, a Day of Judgment is coming soon for America. Americans by the

millions are going along with the Satanic ideas of the Bolsheviks here. We are
filling up a cup of wrath for ourselves, and soon we will drink it.
462
Audio Letter 66
463
Audio Letter 67
August 25, 1981
Twenty years ago on August 14, 1961, the world was shocked by the news
from the divided city of Berlin. For years East Germans had been flocking to
the West by crossing from East to West Berlin. That flood was about to be
stopped. A wall was being built to divide the two halves of the city. We
watched in utter disbelief as the Berlin Wall was built 20 years ago; but, my
friends, we learned very little.
Today new walls are being built to contain a people, but the people are asleep
and do not see the walls. Once again an entire people are being divided—not by
physical walls but by unseen divisions among their leaders. The country, my
friends, is the United States, and the people are you and me.
The most important walls of any dictatorship are not those built with hands but
those of the mind and heart. When walls are built that rob a people of informa-
tion, they become vulnerable; and when walls of hatred shut out the ability to
think, a people cease to be free. Slowly but surely free channels of information
in America are being snuffed out in important places.
This month on August 7 the Washington Star newspaper died after 128 years of
publication. In past AUDIO LETTERS I have frequently quoted the Star for
just one reason. It was a far better newspaper than the Washington Post. It was
more objective, better written, and in many cases simply more honest. Now
Washington, D.C., supposedly the capital of the Western world, is left with
only one newspaper; and that one is, at times, the handmaiden of the Govern-
ment, living on Government handouts and CIA connections. The Post was not
always that way, but today that’s all that is left in Washington—in effect, the
people have been frozen out.
With quietness and stealth, the United States Government is taking on the over-
tones of two opposing forces at once—Fascism and Bolshevism. The United
States Government is torn within by a gigantic power struggle. Which group
will win is impossible to predict at this time, but both power factions have one
465
thing in common—they both want to build the walls of dictatorship around you
and me.
Topic #1—THE UNEXPECTED REBIRTH OF AN AMERICAN GOLD

STANDARD
Topic #2—THE EMERGENCE OF THE JEWISH QUESTION IN AMERICA
Topic #3—THE LIBYAN DOGFIGHT AND HIDDEN NAVAL WAR

GAMES.
Topic #1—The entity President Reagan is fond of saying in speeches, quote: “I

was a Democrat longer than I have been a Republican.” Likewise, his past he-
roes of the White House Oval Office are more often Democrat than Republican.
And the hero we hear about most often of all from our actor president is Frank-
lin D. Roosevelt. From the beginning, the so-called Reagan Administration has
been modeled along lines pioneered by FDR in the 1930’s. Like FDR, the pre-
sent administration tried to hit the ground running with big changes in federal
policies. Now, as then, the Executive Branch of the Government is claiming a
public mandate to flatten Congressional opposition like a steam roller; and even
though they look different today, the real issues now are once again the same as
they were in the 1930’s. Those issues are: the crumbling economy, approaching
war, and the political future of the United States.
On the domestic level, 1981 is trembling with the hollow echoes of 1933, and
yet there is also one major difference today. In 1933 there was just one major
power behind the throne, so to speak, dominating the United States Govern-
ment. Today, in 1981, there are two powerful factions who are challenging each
other for governmental control. An enormous power struggle is going on be-
hind closed doors which has afflicted the United States Government with
schizophrenia. Policy-making has turned into a series of skirmishes between
these two power groups. As a result, the Government zigs and zags, this way
and that. Top officials, such as the Secretaries of State and Defense, are always
in a public tug of war. It all reflects the great power struggle behind closed
doors.
On one side are the Corporate Socialists of the Rockefeller Cartel. Back in the
days of FDR five decades ago this was mainly an oil cartel. From there it grew
and diversified into a world-wide Corporate Socialist empire made up of multi-
national corporations.
466
Audio Letter 67
On the other side of the current power struggle in America are the State Social-
ists, the Bolsheviks. Like the Rockefeller Cartel, the Bolsheviks have
“collectivism” as their ultimate goal—that is, both groups want to concentrate
all wealth and power in a few hands—namely, their own. But the Bolsheviks
want to do it in a different way.
The Corporate Socialists of the Rockefeller Cartel want their own giant corpo-
rations to be the real masters of society. By contrast, the Bolshevik State
Socialists want the Government to be all-powerful. Through the Government,
the Bolsheviks want to control the means of production directly through nation-
alized industries.
For decades, from 1917 until very recently, these two collectivist forces had
their own separate power bases. Rockefeller Corporate Socialism held sway in
America, while the State Socialist Bolsheviks controlled the Soviet Union. The
two sides came in contact only on an international basis, and under those condi-
tions they operated as secret allies. But over the past five years everything has
changed. In 1976 the Bolsheviks were finally pried loose from control of the
Kremlin by a determined band of native Russians. Their achievement was the
result of six decades of tireless struggle, but it came as a shock both to the Bol-
sheviks in Russia and to the Rockefeller forces here. The Kremlin’s new
masters want no part of the international intrigues formerly carried out in tan-
dem with the United States. They also want no part of the Bolsheviks. The
Bolsheviks are being run out of Russia, so they are trying to use the United
States as their new power base. This situation has brought the Bolsheviks into
direct competition with the Rockefeller Cartel for power over the United
States—and the world!
In late 1977 I reported that a quiet new Bolshevik revolution was getting under
way here in America with the help of the Rockefeller Cartel. It was a desperate
attempt by these two groups, formerly international allies, to join forces on the
domestic level. At that time both the Rockefellers and the overthrown Bolshe-
viks from Russia were preoccupied with staving off Russia’s new rulers. It was
a classic case of that old famous principle: “The enemy of my enemy is my
friend.”
What the Rockefeller Cartel has learned instead is that sometimes my enemy’s
enemy is also my enemy. In early 1979 the Bolsheviks here launched an all-out
drive to seize total control away from the Rockefellers. They did not quite suc-
ceed, as I detailed in past AUDIO LETTERS, but the Rockefeller Cartel was
grievously wounded. For more than two years now the behavior of the United
467
States has reflected one basic fact—that is: no one is clearly, decisively in
charge. Instead, the struggle continues.
In February 1979 I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 43 that, quote:
“Soon the inevitable internal conflict here in the United States will be getting
under way. On one side there are the Corporate Socialists of the now headless
Rockefeller Cartel. On the other, there are the Bolshevik State Socialists.”
My friends, it is this very internal conflict which is now showing itself daily in
the behavior of the so-called Reagan Administration.
I can now reveal that the Rockefeller Cartel, which was almost out for the count
two years ago, has made a surprising come-back in strength. As of now, the
Bolsheviks here continue to dominate America’s foreign policy through their
effective control of our military forces. But in the economic and political are-
nas, it is the Rockefeller Cartel that now seems to have the edge. My friends,
they intend to use that edge in some stunning stratagems intended to rebuild
their own power. The power struggle here is starting to turn into a race against
time. The Rockefeller group lacks the power to simply finish off the Bolshe-
viks, and the reverse is also true, so each faction is gearing up to make the
maximum use of its own areas of strength. In this Topic and Topic #2, I will
describe an economic and political one-two punch being prepared by the
Rockefeller interests. If these things can be done fast enough, the Corporate So-
cialists believe they can blast the Bolsheviks here right out of the water; but as I
will describe in Topic #3, the Bolsheviks here have no intention of giving the
Cartel that much time. Before they can be stopped, the Bolsheviks intend to
reach their own goal—NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
The economic surprise which I am about to make public will come as a shock
to most Americans, and yet it has already been foreshadowed by plans which I
have previously reported on two occasions:
First, there was the plan for a gold revaluation publicity stunt which I reported
last November 1980 in AUDIO LETTER No. 60. America’s alleged gold re-
serves are listed on Treasury and Federal Reserve balance sheets at the old
official price of $42.22 per ounce. As you and I know, they do not in fact have
a great deal of the gold which is listed. Those balance sheets are fraudulent. But
the plan which I reported last November was for our non-existent gold reserves
to be revalued at current market prices. On paper, that would make our gold
supplies look ten times bigger in dollar terms at current prices. The whole idea
of the plan was to reinforce the false perception that America has a huge gold
468
Audio Letter 67
hoard. A few weeks later the gold revaluation gimmick started to surface. For
the first time in many years a major article about the Fort Knox Bullion Deposi-
tory was published. Through syndication it was published all across the United
States as well as many other countries. As I reviewed in AUDIO LETTER No.
61, the article referred throughout only to the market price of the gold. The old
official price was totally ignored.
The next element in the plan for an economic shock is the one which I first re-
ported last April in AUDIO LETTER No. 63. That item had to do not with gold
but with our currency itself. I am referring to the plan to do away with the $100
bill.
When I first reported on the plan to eliminate the $100 bill, I received heavy
mail about it. People were stunned. But I can report to you that the plan is still
on track; in fact, since I first made the plan public in AUDIO LETTER No. 63,
at least one bill has been introduced in Congress to do as I described. In
AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I also invited you to send Mailgrams to the entity
President Reagan about our missing gold. Specifically, I urged you to challenge
him to look into the discrepancy of 165-million ounces in the Treasury’s own
figures. Recently I mentioned that I had never heard a single word directly out
of the White House in response, and that’s still true. However I have now re-
ceived copies of the letter which a number of you received. I thank you for
sending them, and I feel I should take a moment to comment about them.
In every case that I have seen, the response to your Mailgram consisted of a let-
ter from the Treasury Department. The letter begins, quote: “On behalf of
President Reagan, thank you for your letter concerning an audit of the United
States gold stock.” The letter then describes a so-called Gold Audit which is
alleged to have been under way since 1975 on the installment plan. Enclosed
with the letter is a copy of the latest report on this alleged gold audit.
My first comment is that this letter and enclosure in no way answered the ques-
tion you posed in your Mailgrams. That question had to do with a glaring
discrepancy of 165-million ounces of gold between two Treasury documents.
Nowhere does the Treasury letter even refer to that discrepancy, much less at-
tempt to explain it. So Fact No. 1 is: Neither the President nor the Treasury
Department gave you the courtesy of an answer to your question. Instead they
tried to distract you by talking about something else. That something else, of
course, is the alleged continuing audit of the gold. Too much could be said
about that to go into details here. It’s enough to say that the so-called recurring
10-year audit is a totally fraudulent arrangement using a different set of college
students each summer for a few weeks time moving the same stock of junk gold
469
in Cell No. 33 back and forth each summer. It is intended to perpetuate the bo-
gus audit which was carried out just after the so-called “Gold Inspection Tour”
of Fort Knox in 1974. If you want to know more details, I refer you to my
AUDIO BOOK talking tape recorded in March 1975. Its title is: “THE FORT
KNOX GOLD SCANDAL AND WHAT IT MEANS TO YOU.”
The point I want to make is that the alleged Reagan Administration is only pre-
tending to look for real cures to our economic problems. They are not listening
to you, and they will not give a forum to anyone intending to reveal the truth
about our gold supplies. Instead, the gold revaluation and $100 bill elimination
are to be parts of an economic power play. My friends, our would-be modern
day FDR, the entity President Reagan, is planning to stun the world soon. He
will do it by putting America back on to what will appear to be the gold stan-
dard.
Late last year Congress passed a law requiring that a federal commission be
created to study the role of gold in our monetary system. But federal commis-
sions are never set up in an uncontrolled or open-ended fashion. No surprises
are ever wanted or allowed from a federal commission. Instead, the Govern-
ment first decides what conclusions it wants to hear from the commission, then
the commission is set up in such a way as to guarantee that the commission will
recommend whatever is desired.
That is what has been done with the “Federal Gold Commission.” Congress de-
creed last year that it be set up in time to produce its report by October 7 of this
year; but after the new Administration took office last January, the Treasury
Department kept putting off creation of the Gold Commission.
It did not come into being until June 22, and the first meeting of the Federal
Gold Commission was not held until just last month on July 16. It was held be-
hind closed doors with no public observers, no witnesses to testify, and with no
minutes kept. As with all federal commissions that matter, the Federal Gold
Commission is a “closed shop.” It consists of four (4) Congressmen, three (3)
Senators, three (3) members of the Federal Reserve Board of Governors in
Washington, two (2) White House advisers, and four (4) nominally public
members. The Chairman is none other than the Treasury Secretary himself; and
to shepherd the group in the desired direction, the Executive Director for the
study is another insider, Dr. Anna Schwartz.
The small contingent of four so-called “public” members of the Gold Commis-
sion were hand-picked for their known views about gold. Anyone who might
have made real waves was carefully excluded from consideration. My friend
470
Audio Letter 67
Mr. Edward Durell is a prominent example of this. Mr. Durell offered to serve
on the Federal Gold Commission entirely at his own expense. He would have
brought with him massive documentation and more than a decade of intensive
activity in the realm of our gold reserve. He would have brought true expertise
about gold to the Federal Gold Commission. His appointment to the Commis-
sion was highly recommended to the alleged Reagan Administration by
business leaders and even a few Congressmen, but he was firmly rejected be-
cause he knows too much!
Now that the hand-picked Federal Gold Commission is safely in being, it’s
supposed to make up quickly for lost time. Congress may be asked to extend
the deadline to January 1, 1982, but even that would leave little time for making
any serious study of America’s monetary future. Fortunately for the Gold
Commission members, its conclusions have already been preordained. Even
Congressman Ron Paul, a member of the Commission, is to be used with or
without his knowledge to achieve these ends.
Whenever the Federal Gold Commission issues its report, its recommendations
are to set the stage for dramatic action by the President. Sometime in early 1982
two things will be done at the same time. One will be to abolish the old official
price of gold, $42.22 per ounce, and let the gold price “float.” The other part of
the announcement will be that Congress will be asked to restore gold backing
for the dollar. It will be a 20% gold backing, as currently planned, based on the
market price of gold. In effect, the dollar and gold will “float” together in inter-
national markets; but for domestic purposes, it will be claimed that this is a new
gold standard which will restore stability to the dollar. For the first time since
1968 there will be a governor or a brake on the supply of dollars.
My friends, this will be only a pseudo gold standard, not a real one. You and I
will not be able to walk into a bank and exchange a dollar bill for gold. Like-
wise, the international gold window which President Nixon closed 10 years ago
this month will not be reopened. The effects of the Reagan pseudo gold stan-
dard will only be temporary, lasting only a year or two, and even that assumes
that there is no war in the meantime, and yet it will be a master stroke. For a
while it will alter the perception of the dollar. It will appear to be a powerful
attack on inflation here in America. That perception will be reinforced by the
elimination of the $100 bill on a separate occasion. Even though it will not be a
true gold standard, its effect through the market place will be dramatic.
In relation to the currencies of Europe and Japan, it will seem to make the dol-
lar much more valuable to be bought and held, but don’t be fooled! For a while
it will seem that the heyday of the so-called almighty dollar has returned once
471
again. My friends, this will be an illusion, because the enormous damage done
by inflation over the past 10 years will not be undone. It will only be arrested
temporarily.
For the average working man and woman it may provide at most a temporary
breather, no more than that. But for the Corporate Socialists of the Rockefeller
Cartel who are engineering it, the pseudo gold standard will be a bonanza. Huge
United States multinational corporations have issued hundreds of millions of
dollars of debt instruments in Europe in recent years. They did this when the
dollar was weak, with the debt payable in Swiss francs, West German marks,
and other currencies which were strong then. But now, as these debts come due,
the dollar is being made strong again. This maneuver will allow those debts to
be repaid in Europe or elsewhere in currencies which are artificially cheap. In
this and other ways it all translates into enormous profits for the Rockefeller
multinational corporations.
At the same time, the privately owned and controlled Federal Reserve Corpora-
tion has been creating record-high interest rates in this country. That is creating
vast opportunities here for the Corporate Socialists in two ways:
First, Federal Reserve policies are creating a depressionary effect on American

industry and business. Basic industries like steel, automobiles, and housing are
being forced to lay off workers; bankruptcies are spreading; real estate, includ-
ing farm land, is lost by owners no longer able to pay their debts; and
businesses large and small are becoming vulnerable to takeover. It’s a time ripe
for mergers as the giants swallow up their smaller rivals—merge or die.
Besides creating this vulnerability to takeover, Federal Reserve policies are also
pulling in the money to big member banks to take advantage of the situation.
So-called “hot money” from other countries is flowing into the United States in
order to take advantage of the high interest rates here. That money in turn is
recycled through the big banks to finance mergers and take-overs by the fa-
vored few giants. All of this will be reinforced by the so-called gold standard
now being hatched by the Corporate Socialists.
At the same time, the Bolshevik influence within the Federal Reserve and other
critical financial areas has been reduced in recent months. The Rockefeller Car-
tel is calling most of the shots at the present time in the economic realm. This is
reflected in recent subtle shifts by the Federal Reserve Corporation with regard
to struggling banks. The Bolsheviks here want to bring down the giant banks
which have long been a major source of Rockefeller power. But now the Fed-
eral Reserve Corporation is positioning itself to bail out any big banks
472
Audio Letter 67
endangered by defaults on giant loans to foreign nations. And a few days ago
the “Fed” also announced that it will provide relatively low-interest loans to
Savings & Loans that are in trouble.
The economic landscape is changing constantly, thanks to the in-fighting be-

tween the State Socialist Bolsheviks and the Corporate Socialist Rockefeller
Cartel. There will continue to be surprises which neither I nor anyone else can
predict, but as of now it is still the Rockefeller Cartel that is primarily getting
its way on the economic front in America. Even governmental policies are fa-
voring the Cartel as far as economics is concerned.
Through the economic route, the Corporate Socialists are working fast to gather
power away from the Government and into their own hands domestically. They
are working feverishly to make a reality of many parts of the secret new Consti-
tution for America which I first made public in 1975. Under their secret new
Constitution, all industry would be controlled by the so-called authorities made
up of the giants of industry. Governmental regulation would be done away
with, just as the alleged Reagan Administration is trying to do right now. Small
businesses would exist only at the pleasure of the big, subject to licenses limit-
ing their activity. In short, the real economic power of the country would lie in
the hands of the Corporate Socialists by mergers and other means. That is what
is taking place right now.
My friends, many of the maneuvers now being attempted by the Rockefeller

Cartel are derived from plans conceived long ago, but they are being executed
today in an environment which was not foreseen. Today, the Corporate Social-
ists of the Rockefeller Cartel are in a battle to the death against the Bolsheviks
here. The Rockefeller group are trying to gather economic power to gigantic
proportions here very quickly. If they do succeed in their drive for unchallenged
economic power here in America, that will be the first big punch against the
Bolsheviks by the Cartel. It will lead directly into their second blow at the Bol-
sheviks, which will be in the political arena.
Economic power translates into political clout; and if the Rockefeller group
have their way, their political blow-to-come against the Bolsheviks here will be
decisive. As I will describe in Topic #2, it is a Sunday punch designed to com-
pletely smash Bolshevik power here. If the Corporate Socialists are successful,
America will be torn by internal convulsions far worse than the Civil War; but
if they do not succeed, the Bolsheviks believe no one can stop their own plans
for domination of America, and eventually the world.
473
Topic #2—Last month on Friday, July 17, White House news reporters readied
themselves for an announcement. The United States had decided to lift its brief
embargo on delivery of F-16 Jet Fighter Bombers to the country which calls
itself Israel. Reporters were tipped off that a formal presidential announcement
could be expected shortly.
The F-16 embargo had been imposed less than six weeks earlier in the wake of
Israel’s destruction of Iraq’s nuclear reactor. The embargo had been so brief as
to have no real effect on Israel; but as I detailed last month in AUDIO LETTER
No. 66, it was not intended to have any real meaning. Like every other Ameri-
can protest against Israel in the past 33 years, the brief F-16 embargo was only
for public consumption. It was a cosmetic move purely for the sake of appear-
ances. By July 17 the fickle mind of the American public had moved on to
other things, just as it always does. And so the F-16s were about to be released
to Israel.
The expected announcement never came that day, instead there was a new
shock from the Middle East. The Israeli Air Force launched all-out bombing
raids on civilian targets throughout southern Lebanon. The big bridge over the
Litani River was attacked, causing heavy damage and killing many people. The
oil pipeline from Saudi Arabia, which all of Lebanon depended upon for gaso-
line and other fuels, was attacked and blown up. As reported by the BBC, but
not on American television, Israeli jets bombed every single major town
throughout southern Lebanon; and Beirut, poor Beirut—wave after wave of Is-
raeli war planes thundered over that city, which used to be the peaceful pearl of
the Middle East. American-made jets with Star of David insignia rained a holo-
caust of devastation on heavily populated civilian communities. The pilots,
many with United States and Israeli dual citizenship, were practicing genocide
on the defenseless Lebanese civilians. As the smoke cleared and the moans of
anguish faded away, the dimensions of Lebanon’s agony horrified the world. In
that one raid some 300 Lebanese were killed, 800 more injured, and thousands
left homeless. Over a two-week period some 450 died in southern Lebanon.
During that same period six Israelis were killed in alleged PLO raids.
The White House, which today is a divided house, behaved as if it had been
caught off base. Then the embargo on jets to Israel was extended again. The
United States pretended to be upset, and Israel pretended to be hurt.
Meanwhile there were words of alarm from an unaccustomed direction. Voices

who are normally raised in support of Israel were beginning to say in effect:
What’s going on here? An example was an article in the New York Times for
July 23, 1981.
474
Audio Letter 67
It described, quote:
“Widespread distress among American Jews over the increased fighting in the
Middle East, including the Israeli bombing of Beirut.”
According to the article, one influential Jewish leader condemned the raid as,
quote:
“Utterly without redeeming social or strategic value and in absolute violation of

community standards.”
Another reportedly worried that actions like these represent a danger to Jews
themselves. Others appear bewildered, not sure what to think. One rabbi report-
edly summed it up in the words, quote:
“I still don’t think we have all the facts about why Israel did what it did.”
My friends, those words are not far from the truth. The fact is that most Ameri-
cans, including most American Jews, are not being given the facts. The fact is
that today an interlocked military junta is controlling the military actions of
both the United States and Israel!
America’s military policies today are not in the best interests of most Ameri-
cans. In exactly the same way, Israel’s military policies are not in the best
interests of most Jews.
More than six decades ago a galaxy of prominent patriotic American Jews tried
to prevent the creation of a Zionist state in Palestine. The Zionist plan to set up
a new nation to be named “Israel” was, in their view, a cruel and tragic hoax.
For one thing, in those days Zionism as a political movement encompassed

fewer than five per cent (5%) of American Jews; and yet the small Zionist mi-
nority were claiming to speak for all Jews. Beyond that, the anti-Zionist Jews
declared that the promises of the Zionists were not only false promises but pre-
scriptions for tragedy.
Israel, said the Zionists, would be the national home for the Jews, a place of
ingathering, of safety, and of rest. In reply, the anti-Zionist Jews showed that
the so-called nation of Israel could never live up to Zionist claims. They
showed that the nation to be named “Israel” could never serve as home to more
than a small minority of the Jews of the world, and they predicted that the only
475
real accomplishment of Zionist Israel would be never-ending conflict, ever-

expanding bloodshed, and tragedy after tragedy.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 49 two years ago, I called attention to the prophetic
warnings of the anti-Zionist American Jews. Today, two generations later, very
few Americans, Jew or otherwise, are even aware of those warnings; but it is
those warnings, not the rosy promises of the Zionists, which are coming true
before our eyes.
As a place of ingathering for the Jews, the nation which calls itself Israel has
been a hopeless failure. Today, 33 years after its founding, the entire population
of Jews in Israel remains less than that of New York City alone.
From 1969 to 1979 it’s reported that more than 500,000 Jews have left Israel
for the United States, and today over 2,500 a month are leaving for the United
States. In a nation of only a few million, that is a hemorrhage of catastrophic
proportions.
And where are all the Zionist promises of a national home where Jews can live
in tranquil security? During the past 33 years, has any other nation on earth
been in conflict with its neighbors more consistently and constantly than Israel?
Despite these and other facts, the Zionist image of Israel is the one which has
been successfully planted in many minds. Even in major media news reports
these days it is often acknowledged that the Israeli Lobby in Washington is a
formidable force.
Today, that power is built upon several foundations. There are four major
groupings in the United States which can always be counted upon to support
Israel in any situation:
(1) One group, of course, are the outright Zionists in America. They always
echo the Israeli line, be it right or wrong.
(2) Then there are the Political Conservatives. Even when they may be privately
irritated by specific Israeli actions, they remain supportive. They believe that,
come what may, Israel is America’s bastion against Russia in the Middle East.
An American Jewish businessman known for his support of Israel, Mr. Meyer
Berger, expressed it this way on the ABC television news program “Nightline”
for July 22, quote: “We believe that Israel is an inevitable partner of the United
States. It’s America’s unsinkable carrier in the Middle East.”
476
Audio Letter 67
(3) The third group, a very large group, is that of the Fundamentalist Christians.
They have been persuaded that this is the real Israel, the reborn Israel of the Bi-
ble. This impression is one which has been fostered deliberately by the Zionists
from the very beginning. The Khazar roots of modern Israel, which I detailed in
AUDIO LETTER No. 50, are generally unknown to many Fundamentalist
Christians.
(4) Finally, there are politicians in important swing states. Wherever there is a
rough balance between Democrats and Republicans, they tend to cancel each
other out. That leaves the Zionist minority with the power to swing votes either
way. Through money and political organization, they make sure that the politi-
cians who win elections are beholden to them. These four major groups form
the acknowledged support for Israel—the Zionists, the Conservatives, the Fun-
damentalist Christians, and beholden politicians.
(5) But there is one other group, and it is the most important group of all. That
group consists of what the professionals refer to as the “Little Jews.” The small
minority of self-proclaimed “Big Jews”—that is, the active Zionist leadership
here—work on the emotions of all the rest. They do their best to keep all Jews
scared, and therefore herded together defensively. The so-called “Big Jews”
talk incessantly about the holocaust, making sure that fears and doubts never
die. By means of emotionalism, the small Zionist minority have been able to
persuade most Jews that Israel is somehow their cause.
It is the Jews of America themselves who most of all are the unwitting victims
of Zionism. It is they who are becoming uneasy as they watch Israel throwing
off all restraints in warfare. And, my friends, it is they, the broad mass of Jews
in America, who will soon begin to suffer for the actions of the Zionists.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 50 I discussed in detail the relationship between the

two political forces known as Zionism and Bolshevism. Both were forged into
living entities in the crucible of World War I. Both have common roots which
claim to be Jewish but are not; and today both of these political forces use the
community of all Jews as a cover for their own activities. The Bolsheviks, with
headquarters now in America, work hand in glove with their Zionist brothers
who control Israel. Their joint goal is absolute domination of the entire world.
In Topic #1 I discussed the deadly competition now underway here in the

United States between the Bolsheviks and the Rockefeller Cartel. Against all
odds, the Rockefeller group is succeeding in regaining total control in many
economic areas; and the economic power which I discussed in Topic #1 is in-
tended to translate quickly into political power. If the Rockefeller interests have
477
their way, America is on the road to Fascism. Their pattern for America is that
of Hitler’s Germany. That is their alternative which they are now pitting against
the drive toward Marxist dictatorship here by the Bolsheviks.
In my very first AUDIO LETTER report of June 1975, I described how Adolf
Hitler was brought to power in Germany. It was done through the power of gi-
ant industries secretly controlled by the Rockefeller combine. The
governmental structure set up by Hitler was Fascism, in which big industry was
a privileged partner of government. Today the Corporate Socialists are working
feverishly to repeat that pattern, only more so, right here in the United States!
This time they intend for their corporate empire to be so powerful as to be be-
yond control by the government; and through their own agents within
government, they plan to have their own way against the Bolsheviks.
Already the so-called Reagan Administration is beginning to show its Fascist

colors in domestic affairs. Anti-trust laws have effectively been shelved. In-
stead, the United States Attorney General has given a clear green light for all-
out corporate mergers and acquisitions. Meanwhile the Administration is rap-
idly building the walls to contain us all within the prison which America is to
become!! Under the guise of immigration control, more and more detention
centers are opening up. Likewise the issue of prison overcrowding has been
made into an overnight excuse for an enormous prison-building program. When
the time comes, they will all be ready for their intended use as
CONCENTRATION CAMPS!
The Rockefeller Corporate Socialists here are looking forward to rounding up

and silencing their opposition. In doing that they believe they will ultimately be
helped by the Bolsheviks and Zionists themselves. The Rockefellers have al-
ways made a practice of studying the psychological profiles of their enemies;
and in studying the Bolshevik/Zionist mentality, they have found an Achilles’
heel—a fatal weakness. That weakness, my friends, lies in the exercise of
power itself. Whenever they have a free rein, the Bolsheviks and Zionists al-
ways go too far. Many years ago one of these people confided to a very close
friend of mine, quote:
“We’re becoming extremely powerful, so powerful that it is a danger to us. The

more power we acquire, the closer we come to the surface. We have left a trail;
and as we come closer to the surface, the danger is that some day someone will
start following that trail. And yet we cannot stop; we will continue to gather
more power, coming ever closer to the surface until we destroy ourselves with
our power.”
478
Audio Letter 67
The Rockefeller group believe that it is starting to happen now. In Israel the Zi-
onists are casting off all restraints in warfare, creating revulsion world-wide in
the process.
And here in America the Bolsheviks are riding higher and higher. On all sides
the self-proclaimed “Big Jews” are beginning to flaunt their power instead of
using it surreptitiously. In the news media, in entertainment, in education, in
government, on all sides it is beginning to happen. In all positions of power
here in America, Jews are becoming conspicuous by their numbers. Up to now,
this is still a phenomenon which millions of Americans are telling themselves
they do not see. We never hesitate to count up the other ethnic groups we see in
powerful positions—be they Japanese-Americans, Chicanos, Blacks, or what-
ever; but many Americans are made to feel vaguely anti-Semitic if they dare to
count up Jews in the same way. Millions of others do see it but talk about it
only in their parlors or country clubs.
But among the Jews themselves, a few muffled alarms are beginning to sound
here and there. A few are beginning to sense the danger of an anti-Jew backlash
from the mushrooming visibility of Jews in powerful places. For example, the
late Washington Star of May 28 published an article by a top official of the
American Jewish Congress. Its title was: “UNEASY EYE ON THE ANTI-
SEMITIC FRINGE.” As one basis of his worry, he pointed out that Jews,
quote:
“...hold public office in numbers disproportionate to their percentage in the

population.”
My friends, what it comes down to is this: The Bolshevik/Zionist elements here

in America have acquired so much power that they are starting to go too far.
They are beginning to surface in spite of themselves, and the Rockefeller Cartel
intends to use this mistake to destroy them. The present Administration will be
forced to turn increasingly Fascist on the domestic front; and as the echoes of
Adolf Hitler grow louder and louder, there will be a rebirth of what used to be
called “The Jewish Question.”
It all brings back memories of a day in Detroit, 1943, my friends. I was in

charge of sending and receiving cryptographic messages for the late Colonel
Charles King, a protege of General “Hap” Arnold.
One day a family of Jewish friends of mine invited me to their home. It was a
Jewish holiday, and I was to share their holiday dinner with them. They were a
family of refugees from Germany and I was fascinated to hear about their ex-
479
periences. Finally I asked: “Why did the German government go after the
Jews?” The man looked at me and then looked down at his plate as he an-
swered. There was pain in his voice as he said quietly:
“I was only a Little Jew, in business. I was a good Jew. Lots of us were, but it
was the ‘Big Jews’ who got us in all this trouble. They just went too far.”
“What do you mean ‘They went too far’?” I asked; and he said:
“They had taken over all the reins of power in Germany. There was nothing
they did not control. So now the good apples have to suffer with the bad.” Then
he added: “You know, it is several years now since I came to America. In all
that time you are the first person who ever asked me why the German govern-
ment went after the Jews. So, now you know why.”
Topic #3—A few days ago, on August 17, reporters were called together for an
announcement by Secretary of State Alexander Haig. He announced that the
United States was lifting its embargo on all war planes for that country called
Israel. It was a green light for 14 F-16s and 2 F-15s to be sent to Israel without
further delay. It was only one month to the day after the Israeli bombing of Bei-
rut.
Lebanon is still reeling from that disaster. In percentage terms, 300 dead in tiny
Lebanon is equivalent to 24,000 dead in the United States. Had a disaster
claimed that many lives here in a short month ago, it would still be the only
thing that mattered to countless Americans. But it happened in Lebanon, not
America; and so it created hardly a ripple when the United States told Israel, in
effect: “Here are some more planes so you can do it again.”
In releasing the war planes, the United States did not even express an opinion
about whether Israel’s use of the planes is proper. In answer to a reporter’s
question, Haig said that the causes of the embargo had been adequately re-
solved. But those empty words can never raise the dead in Lebanon nor silence
the sobs of those who mourn for them.
The release of the war planes to Israel this month is just a continuation of the
pattern I discussed last month. The interlocked military juntas of the United
States and Israel are in a hurry. They have a hammer lock on military affairs,
and they are using it to the hilt. They are pressing forward toward their goal of
thermonuclear war between the United States and Russia as fast as they can. If
they can succeed soon enough, they will cut short the stratagems of the Rocke-
feller Cartel which I described in Topics #1 and #2.
480
Audio Letter 67
Events themselves are showing how great is the rush to prepare for war. On
August 17 the American war planes were released to Israel. The very next day,
late on August 18, United States time, American war planes were making new
headlines. A pair of Libyan SU-22 jets were lured into a brief dogfight with
American F-14s. The SU-22s are primarily ground-support aircraft. They are no
match for air superiority Fighters like the F-14. The dogfight was over almost
as soon as it began. Both Libyan jets were shot down, crashing into the sea in
the Gulf of Sidra.
The United States has trumpeted loudly about the success of this air combat.
Supposedly it is to tell the world that we mean business; but in many capitals
from Europe to the Persian Gulf the message is being read in other ways. In
Europe many leaders are nervously saying that Uncle Sam is behaving like a
trigger-happy cowboy. And six oil-exporting nations of the Persian Gulf are
saying that this proves that America has no intention of dealing fairly with the
Arabs.
By shooting down Libyan jets in an artificial confrontation, the United States is

also shooting down any new peace prospects for the Middle East. Beyond that,
my friends, the Libyan dogfight episode was also staged for more obscure pur-
poses of military deception. Right now stories about the Libyan dogfight are
being constantly rehashed to keep our attention on the Mediterranean. Mean-
while, the real action is taking place elsewhere. Even the stories you have heard
about the dogfight itself are part of a gigantic naval “shell game.” The pilots
who shot down the Libyan jets are not the ones identified publicly by the Pen-
tagon; and, my friends, the planes which shot down the Libyan jets did not
come from the USS Nimitz!
While all eyes are on the Mediterranean, the real naval action is taking place to
the north and west. On July 14 the largest Allied naval war games since World
War II got under way. These exercises involve 13 nations, 120,000 troops, 250
ships, and more than 1,000 aircraft. This tremendous exercise called “OCEAN
VENTURE 81” is to continue until the end of October. It will include air as-
saults, anti-submarine warfare, bombing raids, even mock battles between
aircraft carrier battle groups. Most important of all, many of these war games
will intrude into areas traditionally considered to be in Russia’s sphere of op-
eration! These massive exercises, my friends, will include not only the North
Atlantic but the Baltic and Norwegian Seas.
The naval war games now underway in the Atlantic are built around America’s
new belligerent strategy against Russia. That strategy was spelled out in an in-
481
terview by the Chicago Sun Times two months ago on Sunday, June 21. The
person interviewed was the Secretary of the Navy, John Lehman, Jr. Lehman
spelled out America’s increasing dependence upon aircraft carriers. To make
use of those carriers, the article describes the Lehman naval strategy as, quote:
“an offensive one.” Lehman says that our Navy should be able and ready to bot-
tle up the Russian Navy in such places as, quote: “the Sea of Japan, Barents
Sea, and other coastal waters.” Lehman also gives prominent attention to (quot-
ing the article again): “protecting NATO’s northern flank in the Norwegian
Sea.”
My friends, those are the areas into which the massive Allied exercises are
scheduled to intrude! It is a radical departure from past American naval policy.
In the words of John Paul Jones, it is deliberately sailing “in harm’s way.” This
is exactly the belligerent new American naval policy which I first made public
in AUDIO LETTER No. 65, two months ago.
My friends, the Bolsheviks here are working faster and faster on more and more
fronts to prepare for war. Two weeks ago it was announced that America would
start assembling its neutron bombs. That announcement is far behind the reality
because they have been in production secretly for many months! The only real
purpose of the neutron bomb announcement was political. It’s just another way
for the Administration to show off the chip on its shoulder. Like shooting down
a pair of Libyan jets, it’s a way of saying: “We are ready and eager for war.”
Most Americans would disagree if we were told the truth; but we are not told
the truth, and so we continue down the path to war.
Now the way is being paved to bring back the Draft. Draft registration is al-
ready in effect, and now it is being given teeth by publicizing federal
prosecution of those who do not register. Beyond that, the Government is dust-
ing off the old Bolshevik gimmick of posting public “SIGN UP” notices. The
idea is to create resentment among those who have registered against those who
have not. The net result—get neighbors to spy on neighbors.
Meanwhile we are being told that the manpower problem is the worst one fac-
ing the military. At the same time we are seeing falsified public opinion polls
which say that more and more Americans now favor the Draft. Under a Decla-
ration of a National Emergency, it will soon return. It remains to be seen who
will win the hidden struggle between the Rockefeller Cartel and the Bolsheviks
here. Only one thing is clear: regardless of which one wins, my friends, you and
I lose!
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
482
Audio Letter 67
Now it’s time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I’ve
tried to alert you to the hidden power struggle for control of the United States.
On one side are the Corporate Socialists of the Rockefeller Cartel—the Fas-
cists. They are trying to gather power away from the Government by economic
means. Then, using that power, they intend to use the old “Jewish Question,” so
called, to throw a political knockout punch at their Bolshevik rivals.
On the other side, the State Socialist Bolsheviks are using their control of
America’s military as their key weapon. They have already declared war
against Russia, and now they are trying to drag America into that war, a ther-
monuclear war! They are trying to do it too fast to be stopped by the
maneuverings of the Rockefeller Cartel.
Caught in the middle is the double-minded Reagan Administration. The White

House is a house divided against itself—first pulled this way, then that way by
the conflicting forces behind closed doors. Neither the Fascists nor the Bolshe-
viks in our country can save you—only YOU can save yourself with the help of
our Lord Jesus Christ. He taught us long ago that a house divided against itself
cannot stand. The collapse, when it comes, will be awesome indeed.
483
Audio Letter 68
September 30, 1981
One day last month an awkward-looking machine in deep space listened pa-
tiently for radio signals from Earth. The machine had left the earth some four
years earlier, and it will never return. But the machine, a space robot, felt no
loneliness. It was doing the job it had been built to do. After plunging along
through the vast reaches of deep space, it was heading for a dramatic rendez-
vous. Finally, the space robot detected the radio signals it had been waiting for.
As the signals came crackling through space from earth, they were very faint.
They had taken nearly an hour and a half to arrive due to the astronomical dis-
tance involved. Even so, the space robot recognized the radio commands and
obeyed them. It awakened, flexed its mechanical arms and opened its television
eyes, and it radioed back to Earth that it was ready for its awesome rendezvous
in space.
In Pasadena, California, the Jet Propulsion Laboratory announced to reporters

that all was well. VOYAGER II was operating perfectly as it approached that
spectacular planet of rings, Saturn. And equally important, VOYAGER II was
right on course. It had been racing through space for four years, and was nearly
a billion miles away. That’s over ten times the distance from Earth to the Sun,
and yet VOYAGER II was only three seconds off schedule after its four-year
journey.
As the VOYAGER II space robot approached Saturn, it started speeding up. On

August 25 VOYAGER II came within 63,000 miles of Saturn itself. That’s only
about one-fourth the distance from the earth to the Moon. As it did so, it was
traveling three times as fast as the alleged Space Shuttle in orbit. Then
VOYAGER II raced outward again, passing through the mysterious rings as it
went.
For days as VOYAGER II approached Saturn, flew past it, and then left Saturn
behind, we got to see full-color pictures of what it saw. Once again scientists
and non-scientists alike wanted to know: might there be other life out there?
The roiling, angry atmosphere of Saturn itself appeared to say, “No life here.”
At least no life that you and I can imagine.
485
Then we saw pictures of the moons of Saturn. Scientists were puzzled and
amazed by the surprises they saw. Each moon is different from the others, and
yet as far as the question of “life” is concerned, it seems that they are all the
same—cold, frozen worlds and fragments of worlds, worlds covered with cra-
ters like the scars of a celestial smallpox; broken worlds having one impossible
giant crater on one side and covered with shatter lines everywhere else.
As far as “life” is concerned, Saturn turned out to be another Jupiter. Even if

some of the building blocks of life are present here and there, no independent
life seems to have gotten started there. Up to now, man’s search of the Solar
System seems to have turned up the same answer everywhere concerning “life.”
Mars looks as if it may have held life long ago; but if so, apparently something
destroyed it. Venus is a rich planet in many ways; but due to its heat and other
factors, the richness of Venus apparently does not include native life. As for
Mercury, the innermost planet, the prospects look even more dim. Mercury is
so close to the sun that it is believed there could be rivers of lead on the sun-
ward side.
As I say these words, VOYAGER II is once again plunging through the track-
less void of deep space. Next stop, Uranus—five years from now. If
VOYAGER II survives that solitary journey, it may teach us still more.
But we don’t need to wait that long to start drawing conclusions about our own
space ship, Earth. My friends, our beautiful planet Earth is unique in our solar
system. It’s just the right size to hold the atmosphere we need to breathe and to
retain the water we need to drink, and it’s just the right distance from the sun.
Much farther away, and our planet would become too cold; much closer, and it
would become too hot. As it is, everything we need for life is present in a God-
given balance. The other planets of our solar system are fascinating, spectacu-
lar, and perhaps even useful to man some day; but there is no other planet so
useful, so beautiful, and so spectacular as the blue planet, planet Earth.
Today, men obsessed by greed and lust for power are threatening to destroy
what God created for you and me here on earth. They are playing games of war
with biological and chemical weapons, nuclear weapons, and genetic engineer-
ing. They are contaminating our world with hazardous wastes to satisfy their
own selfish desires. The present-day pilots of spaceship Earth are flying us all
on a collision course with catastrophe. If they are not stopped, we have already
seen our future through the robot eyes of VOYAGER II. The good Earth, our
God-given home, will end up as a dead and broken world.
486
Audio Letter 68
Topic #1—THE REAGAN-BEGIN AXIS AND EXPANDING WORLD

CRISES
Topic #2—DELIBERATE DELAYS IN THE SPACE SHUTTLE LAUNCH
Topic #3—THE REAGAN BUDGET AND CORRUPT ECONOMIC PLANS.
Topic #1—Earlier this month, on September 10, a two-day summit meeting be-
tween the United States and Israel ended here in Washington. Afterward, the
entities Reagan and Begin gushed with words of mutual praise. It was as if the
recent Israeli air warfare on Iraq and Lebanon had never happened. There was
not a whisper to suggest that Washington was asking Israel to show any re-
straint in the future. Instead, there were glowing words about a major new
enlargement of the strategic relationship between the United States and Israel!
Officially, this new military relationship will focus on three major areas:
One area of collaboration will be the stockpiling of American war materiel in

Israel. Supposedly this will include everything from medical supplies to tanks
and other weapons for the so-called Rapid Deployment Force. The stockpiling
of American weapons in Israel is being presented to the public as if it were a
new development, but the fact is that this has been going on in secret for years.
I first reported about this in my AUDIO LETTERS as long as six years ago in
the autumn of 1975. In AUDIO LETTER No. 6, especially, I reported the
stockpiling of American weapons, including battlefield nuclear weapons, in Is-
rael. They were there as part of the long-range preparations for the coming
limited nuclear strike by Israel against the Saudi Arabian oil fields. Today, six
years later, those plans are coming closer and closer to being carried out.
The second major area of American and Israeli cooperation announced this
month involves joint strategic planning and sharing of Intelligence. Here again,
the public is being told that this will be something new, while in reality it is al-
ready established practice. When Israel destroyed the Iraqi nuclear plant last
June with American F-16s, it was only part of a larger joint strategy. Likewise,
the Reagan Administration plan to sell AWACS radar planes to Saudi Arabia
has the secret approval of Israel. It is intended to help give Israel the pretext, the
excuse it needs, for attacking the Saudi oil fields. I have reported in detail about
these joint strategic plans by Israel and the United States in recent tapes. Like-
wise, I’ve reported in the past about other aspects of this ongoing joint military
planning.
487
My friends, there is nothing new about it at all. The Reagan-Begin team also
proclaimed the initiation of a third major area of military cooperation. We’re
told that the military forces of the United States and Israel will start holding
joint exercises and war games. As with the rest of the package deal, we’re sup-
posed to believe that this is something new; but the fact is that far more than
practice exercises have been carried out already by Israel and the United
States—not mere exercises but actual joint military operations have taken place
several times in recent years.
Up to now, all these joint military operations have been covert; all have been
totally hidden from public view except one. That one exception was
“OPERATION GUYANA” in November 1978. That case was unique because a
headline-making event was used as a cover for the secret military operation it-
self. We were not allowed to hear any news reports about the secret American-
Israeli Commando raid into Guyana that month. Our Government had never
admitted that there was a Russian missile base there, and so we were not told
about it when that base was destroyed; but we did see the stomach-turning
event which was staged first in order to make the Commando raid possible—
the Jonestown massacre!
A few days ago the only American trial in connection with the Guyana tragedy
ended in mistrial. Larry Layton, a former member of the Jim Jones cult, had
been seized upon as a scapegoat; but Layton was no more than a bit player on
the Guyana stage, and his trial ended with a hopelessly deadlocked jury.
Meanwhile, the real culprits at Jonestown have gone scot-free because the real
criminals, my friends, are the members of the secret joint military junta of the
United States and Israel.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 67 last month, I called attention to this joint military
junta and its growing power, and now the outcome of the Reagan-Begin meet-
ing this month has given public confirmation of this junta’s existence. The
broad strategic relationship between the United States and Israel is not new as
claimed.
What is new is that the joint Bolshevik-Zionist junta is increasingly going pub-
lic. As their power grows, they are flaunting that power more and more. It is
just one more symptom of the Bolshevik-Zionist mentality I discussed last
month. Once they acquire power, these people always go too far. The Reagan-
Begin Axis is at the very center of an expanding whirlpool of world crises.
World trouble spots are continuing to multiply. The Bolshevik strategy to pre-
488
Audio Letter 68
pare the world for war, which I revealed last spring in AUDIO LETTER No.
63, is having its effect. Slowly but surely the whole world is being sucked up
into the swirling vortex of tension and conflict; and at the very center, the
Reagan-Begin Axis is stirring the pot faster and faster. The growing storm of
world conflict right now is centered in the Middle East. In the eye of the storm
sits Israel. Moving outward from Israel in any direction there is growing tur-
moil.
First, look to the north at Lebanon. After Begin left Washington this month, the
Israelis wasted no time in once again heating up their running battle with the
PLO. On September 17, a scant week after the Reagan-Begin meeting, there
were two large bomb explosions in northern and southern Lebanon. As usual,
PLO guerrillas were supposed to be the targets; but also, as usual, those who
were actually killed by the Israeli blasts were mostly civilians, including many
women and children. Those two bombings killed over 40 people and injured
over 100.
Their intended purpose was to provoke retaliatory raids against Israel by the
PLO so that the Israeli government can shout about their enemy being the PLO
menace; but the PLO has not yet obliged the Israelis by striking back. The Is-
raelis are in a hurry to whip up new war tensions, so there have been more
Israeli bombings in Lebanon in recent days, and they will continue. The Israelis
intend to goad the PLO however long it takes to provoke a counterattack. Then,
when that happens, the resulting Israeli casualties will be big news in Israel and
America. Prime Minister Begin will be seen speaking self-righteously of the
unacceptable threat that continues to come from the PLO, and he will make
sure to mention Saudi Arabia as the real culprit for bank-rolling the PLO. In
this way, my friends, Israeli terrorism in Lebanon is actually being aimed at
Saudi Arabia!
Lately the Israeli government has been talking about a permanent solution to
the alleged problem of PLO raids against Israel. It started two months ago after
an alleged PLO attack killed and injured several Israelis. Begin announced that
Israel was going to put a stop to these raids, quote: “once and for all.” A few
days later the Israeli Air Force horrified the world by its all-out bombing of
Beirut and all of southern Lebanon. Now the Israelis are goading the PLO into
striking again; and if they do, the Israeli government will say, in effect, that hit-
ting guerilla bases in Lebanon will never provide the permanent solution
desired. Instead, Begin’s accusing finger will point more and more at Saudi
Arabia. My friends, it’s all part of the build-up to the planned limited nuclear
strike by Israel on the Saudi oil fields.
489
Meanwhile the Reagan end of the Reagan-Begin Axis is hard at work on the
planned AWACS radar plane sale to Saudi Arabia. That’s intended to be just
one more nail in Saudi Arabia’s coffin by making Saudi Arabia look like a di-
rect threat to Israel. As it stands right now, there’s a chance that the AWACS
sale will not be approved by Congress. This is a result of the hidden power
struggle now dividing the United States Government. But even if AWACS does
not go through, the Reagan-Begin team have an ace in the hole. Britain has al-
ready promised to fill the breach if the AWACS deal falls through. If not
AWACS, then the Saudis can buy a similar British plane called “Nimrod”; and
for purposes of giving Israel a pretext for attack, Nimrod will serve very well
indeed.
In addition to Saudi Arabia, Syria is being drawn into the web of Israeli war
plans by way of Lebanon. We Americans often forget that Syria, unlike Israel,
has a legal right to be in Lebanon. The Lebanese government invited Syria into
Lebanon to put a halt to fighting between the rightists and leftists of Lebanon
itself. The Syrians are there as the main body of an Arab peace-keeping force;
and, my friends, the Syrians have not been asked to leave. By contrast, Israel
possesses no legal right whatsoever to conduct military operations of any kind
in Lebanon—but to those who rule Israel, might makes right. Lebanon is weak
and Israel is strong, so the Israelis consider it their right to attack real or imag-
ined enemies at will in Lebanon.
Late last April, Israeli jets shot down two Syrian helicopters. The Syrians, who,
I repeat, are in Lebanon legally, responded by bringing anti-aircraft missiles
into that area of Lebanon. The Israelis, who had no right to be there in the first
place, immediately cried “foul.” A crisis erupted over the Syrian SAM missiles.
For over three months now, the crisis over the Syrian missiles has been dor-
mant. Israel has been busying itself in other ways. It has destroyed the Iraqi
nuclear plant and carried out genocide raids against the residents of Beirut. In
the meantime, the Syrian anti-aircraft missiles have not injured Israel. But now
the Israelis are ready to stoke up trouble with Syria again, and so just in the past
few days the entity Begin has abruptly revived the Syrian missile issue. He is
saying that they must be removed without delay. Otherwise, says Begin, Israel
will not be responsible for the consequences. Can you imagine?
If Syria can somehow be drawn into the vortex of Middle East war tensions, it
will help bring NUCLEAR WAR ONE one step closer. Syria is a client state of
Russia with the closest ties to Russia of any Arab state. The Syrian SAM mis-
siles in Lebanon are Russian-made. Should the Begin government engineer a
military confrontation with Syria, Russia could not ignore it.
490
Audio Letter 68
And then there is Egypt. The entity known as President Sadat is being pro-
grammed now to self-destruct. In recent weeks he has suddenly shed the
modern image which had been cultivated for Western eyes. Instead, now there
is Sadat’s crackdown on all opposition. It is his crackdown on religious opposi-
tion that has made most of the headlines, but there is more involved too; for
example: special security police are now being planted on the university cam-
puses of Egypt to squash any student protests against Sadat. For the moment,
these tactics may appear to make Sadat’s grip on his country more secure, but
the longer-term effect will be the opposite. Like the late Shah of Iran, the entity
Sadat will be undone by all these repressive tactics. It is only a matter of time
before “assassination politics” puts an end to the Sadat era in Egypt.
The end of Sadat, or the entity known as Sadat, will also spell the end of the
Camp David peace accords, so called. Other Arab leaders, including influential
leaders in Egypt itself, are against the Camp David approach. The events now
taking place in Egypt are setting the stage for collapse of the so-called Egyp-
tian-Israeli Peace Treaty. As I detailed long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 44,
that was always the intention of those in the United States and Israel who
brought about the treaty. As a former CIA operative revealed to me in this con-
nection, quote:
“To have a war, you first have to have a peace treaty. Then break the treaty, and
presto—WAR.”
Already the contrived era of good feeling between Israel and Egypt is begin-
ning to suffer. Earlier this month on September 12 Egypt canceled a scheduled
visit to Egypt by Israeli military officers. The reason: Israel’s Defense Minister
had said in public that Sadat will not be around long!
Under the terms of the Egyptian-Israeli treaty, Israel is scheduled to complete

its withdrawal from the Sinai next April 1982. In the process, two large Israeli
Air Bases in the Sinai will also pass into Egyptian hands—that is, if the treaty
provisions are carried out. The demise of Sadat, or even a weakening of the pre-
sent Egyptian government, may provide Israel with sufficient pretext not to
withdraw. At the same time, plans are also being laid again to trigger a major
incident in the Sinai. This was part of the plan I first made public six years ago,
and it’s once again part of the plan now.
Lebanon, Syria, Iraq, Saudi Arabia, Egypt—all these nearby Arab neighbors of
Israel are in the front lines of the Reagan-Begin war maneuvering, but the
whirlpool expands outward from there. When Israeli battlefield atomic weapons
491
cap off Saudi Arabia’s oil fields, it will send shock waves through the industri-
alized world. It will cripple the industrial heart of Europe, it will provide the
excuse for gas rationing here in the United States as our country secretly shifts
onto a war footing, and it will increase the strategic importance of oil-rich Iran
just across the Persian Gulf.
Under the so-called Khomeini regime, Iran is producing far less oil than its ca-
pacity. With Saudi Arabia gone, substandard production from Iran will seem
intolerable to the world. On top of that, the Reagan Administration will remind
us of Iran’s geographic location. Nestled along the strategic underbelly of Rus-
sia, we will be told that Iran is in danger. But to the Bolshevik military junta in
America, Iran’s real attraction is offensive in nature. Because of its location,
Iran is an ideal base from which to attack Russia.
It’s no accident, my friends, that Iran is now heading down the road to civil
war! For the past several months, top members of the Moslem ruling circles in
Iran have been the targets of assassination, including several major bombing
incidents.
The process now under way in Iran is the one I warned about two years ago in
AUDIO LETTER No. 52. In that report I detailed how the Khomeini govern-
ment came to power in the first place. It was helped along by forces of which it
was not even aware—Bolshevik forces. In AUDIO LETTER No. 52 I stated
that, quote: “They plan to martyr the entire Khomeini government as they set
off thermonuclear war.” And that’s what’s going on now, my friends. The first
to be martyred was the real Ayatollah Khomeini himself in February 1980. I
reported his death and replacement by a “double” in AUDIO LETTER No. 54.
Now, the rest of his regime is being cut down for purposes of war.
Elsewhere around the world, the war plans of the Bolshevik-Zionist military
junta are also moving forward. On the surface, many of these other world ten-
sions have no apparent connection with the ferment in the Middle East and
Persian Gulf; but behind closed doors, there are connections! What links them
all together is the MASTER PLAN which is to bring nuclear war out of a world
in crisis.
A prominent example of this is Poland. A few weeks ago the so-called Solidar-
ity Labor Union celebrated its first anniversary in Poland. Last year I reported
that Solidarity had been created by the Bolsheviks for the purpose of bringing
on war. As I explained then, Solidarity’s true purpose is not to serve the work-
ers of Poland but to use them. The whole purpose of Solidarity is to create as
much trouble as possible for Russia including, if possible, revolution.
492
Audio Letter 68
During the year that has passed, Solidarity has behaved exactly as I told you it
would act. Solidarity never rests for a moment to consolidate its gains. Instead,
the moment one set of demands are satisfied by the Polish government, new
and even greater demands are put forth by Solidarity. The workers who form
the backbone of Solidarity’s power have not been given a moment to taste the
fruits of success. Instead, there have only been strikes, protests, more strikes,
strife and turmoil. As a result, the vulnerable economy of Poland has been
thrown into a tailspin; and now, having helped to create Poland’s worsening
economic problems, Solidarity’s leaders are demanding greater power to con-
trol the economy.
To see how extreme Solidarity has been in its behavior over the past year, just
compare it with the labor unions in the West.
We are used to unions that bargain, make contracts, and then abide by them for
some agreed period. No union in America, for example, would even dream of
demanding a new contract with greater demands every few weeks. But that, my
friends, is exactly what Solidarity has been doing in Poland. In recent AUDIO
LETTER reports, I’ve mentioned that the Bolsheviks and Zionists are shooting
for war to break out around mid-1982. Events in the Middle East are being
pushed along on that timetable, and so are those in Poland. By next summer at
the latest the Bolsheviks are convinced that Russia will have to act against Soli-
darity. The resulting bloodshed will be just one more spark to help ignite
NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
All around the world the Bolshevik caldron of crises is bubbling hotter and hot-
ter. United States rhetoric against Castro’s Cuba is heating up once again. El
Salvador is simmering with new turmoil, and half a world away tensions are
growing between Pakistan and India. The Reagan Administration is promising
F-16s to Pakistan. In lightning response, Russia has already delivered superfast
MiG-25s to India; and one day, my friends, India will stun the world by inviting
Russian soldiers into India!
The objective of the Reagan-Begin Axis is to stir up the whole world for war;
and, my friends, they are succeeding.
Topic #2—According to the schedule announced by NASA several months ago,

today was supposed to be the launch day for America’s second space shuttle
flight. But once again the space shuttle has suddenly started encountering new
delays.
493
The first delay was announced several weeks ago when the shuttle was rolled
out to the launch pad at Cape Canaveral, Florida. The roll-out took place on
August 31, five days behind schedule. NASA spokesmen said that the launch
date was being moved back from September 30 to October 9. “No big deal,”
they said, “just a few minor bugs to be worked out.” For the next few weeks,
occasional news reports from the Kennedy Space Center continued to assure us
that all was well with the shuttle.
Then came September 22, and suddenly everything changed. We were told that
just past midnight the previous night an accident had occurred on the launch
pad. Supposedly the mishap took place while the control rockets in the nose of
the space shuttle were being fueled up. NASA spokesmen said that nitrogen
tetroxide oxidizer was spilled on the outside of the shuttle, affecting several
hundred of the critical thermal tiles. Those life-and-death tiles, my friends, are
stuck to the shuttle with glue, and it was said that 60 or 70 of them fell off after
the leak took place. In addition, perhaps 250 more tiles would have to be re-
moved to check them for damage.
Suddenly the October 9 launch date went out the window. As of now, NASA
says that the launch will probably take place in late October or early November.
But, my friends, don’t hold your breath waiting for that. These last-minute de-
lays of the second space shuttle launch are the result of important divisions
within the Space Shuttle Program. If those divisions and arguments are not re-
solved soon, there will be still more delays.
To understand what is happening right now at Cape Canaveral, it’s necessary to

remember what has happened up to now with the space shuttle. To begin with,
it’s essential to understand that the space shuttle is a military program wearing a
civilian disguise. All kinds of potentially fascinating and valuable scientific
space missions have been scrapped by NASA. Everything is being cut to the
bone except the Space Shuttle Program. Right now, NASA is trying to cancel a
once-in-a-lifetime opportunity to intercept and study Halley’s comet in 1986;
but at the same time NASA is also talking about building a fifth space shuttle
just to have a spare on hand. The reason the space shuttle is so crucial is that it
is America’s only hope for regaining military use of space.
Up until four years ago this month the United States had a secret military stran-
glehold on space; but in September 1977 the Soviet Union began a surprise
offensive in space to change all that, and change it they did! The decisive turn-
ing point came on September 27, 1977. On that day the secret American
military Moon Base in Copernicus Crater was put out of action. That was the
outcome of history’s first true space battle, the “Battle of the Harvest Moon.” It
494
Audio Letter 68
was a battle of beam weapons and it took place in secret, and yet it was the
most decisive battle of the 20th Century because from that moment on, my
friends, Russia began seizing total control of the military use of space!
When those secret events took place four years ago, the Space Shuttle Program
froze in its tracks. The hard-liners then in control of the Kremlin had slammed
shut the military door to space. Soon we started hearing excuse after excuse for
delays in the space shuttle. Especially, there were all those stories about prob-
lems with the thermal tiles of the shuttle. Years passed, and the shuttle stayed
grounded. Meanwhile America’s military capability in space withered. In Octo-
ber 1977 SKYLAB was shot down by a Russian Cosmos Interceptor. SKYLAB
had been a vital way station in America’s secretly continuing Moon Program.
By destroying it, Russia made sure that America’s eviction from the moon was
permanent.
Meanwhile, the Russians themselves began landing on the moon without public
fanfare. For nearly four years now, Russian beam weapons have been stationed
on the moon, pointed at the Earth!
When the Russians shot down SKYLAB, they did so over the United States.
The result was a giant fireball breaking up into pieces. It was seen in half a
dozen states from Texas to Missouri. NASA waited a week or so for headlines
about the mysterious fireball to die down, then it began a long drawn out cover-
up of the SKYLAB debacle. NASA pretended that SKYLAB was unexpectedly
sinking from orbit, and just for good measure they also pretended that the space
shuttle might be able to save SKYLAB. It all sounded good to an unsuspecting
public; but the shuttle stayed grounded, and at last NASA pretended that
SKYLAB had crashed half a world away over the Indian Ocean.
In addition to SKYLAB, the United States lost its space reconnaissance capa-
bilities to Russian Cosmos Interceptors. By the spring of 1978, the United
States no longer had any spy or early-warning satellites gathering information
over Russia! From time to time since then, spy satellites have been launched by
the United States. Some of these have succeeded in gathering Intelligence
briefly over other areas of the world; but as soon as they pass over the Soviet
Union, they are always destroyed. As a result, the United States no longer has
up-to-date reconnaissance data on the Soviet Union!
Without reconnaissance data, my friends, all the weapons in the world are next
to useless. America’s military planners know well enough where Russia’s cities
are and where critical military installations were four years ago; but without
fresh reconnaissance, they have no way of knowing about new targets which
495
might now be more important. On top of that, Russia is now deploying anti-
missile defenses based on beam weapons. Without fresh reconnaissance data,
there would be little hope of getting American missiles through those defenses;
and so over the past four years reconnaissance has become the No. 1 strategic
problem of the United States. There are plenty of other problems too, because
we have nothing equivalent to Russia’s Space Triad of weapons. But without
reconnaissance, even the weapons we do have are of little use.
The Bolshevik military planners here are determined to launch a nuclear first
strike against Russia, come what may! I have reported many details about that
in the past, and will not go into it again right now; but with that in mind, they
have been doing everything they can think of to solve the critical reconnais-
sance problem.
One of their earliest and most desperate ideas was one which took place in
April 1978. I reported the details in AUDIO LETTER No. 33. The American
CIA, working closely with its counterpart the Korean CIA, arranged for a civil-
ian airliner to be used for Intelligence gathering. That was the case of Korean
Airlines flight 902. You may recall it took off from Europe for the United
States, but flew into northern Russia instead. It was secretly equipped with spe-
cial photographic and electronic Intelligence gear, and flew into some of the
most sensitive airspace in all of Russia. In effect, the unsuspecting passengers
were used as hostages to discourage the Russians from shooting it down right
away. Eventually Russian Fighters did bring it down, but only after consider-
able Intelligence had been obtained and transmitted.
The Korean air liner ploy was successful as a stopgap trick, but reconnaissance
data can hardly be obtained that way as a routine practice, and so for the past
three years we’ve been hearing more and more about reconnaissance aircraft.
Supposedly these were made almost obsolete for most strategic purposes by spy
satellites, but now they are once again in the news because we don’t have spy
satellites on continuous duty any more.
One reconnaissance airplane we hear more and more about these days is the
SR-71 Blackbird. The latest SR-71 incident took place on August 26 when
North Korea supposedly tried to shoot one down. And then there is that famous
predecessor of the SR-71, the U-2. It was a U-2 that was flown by the late
Francis Gary Powers when he was shot down over Russia 21 years ago. You
might think that the U-2 was ready for the history books in this age of alleged
spy satellites, but No. Now the U-2 is back, all dressed up and modernized with
the new designation TR-1, and its job now, as always, is reconnaissance.
496
Audio Letter 68
If we still had all those reconnaissance satellites in the sky, reconnaissance air-
craft would be less important. Naturally the Bolsheviks here try not to let you
suspect the truth about our missing satellites, but every now and then there are
hints about the truth in the news. For example, only yesterday the Defense De-
partment released a new 99-page propaganda booklet titled “SOVIET
MILITARY POWER.” It purports to give the public previously top secret in-
formation about the military build-up in Russia, and yet the booklet contains
only sketches—no satellite photos. Why? Because the Defense Department
does not have any up-to-date satellite photos of Russia. Our spy satellites are
long gone.
Up to now the secret Bolshevik military planners here have been making do
with inferior methods of reconnaissance. But before they set off NUCLEAR
WAR ONE, they want better reconnaissance data on Russia. They have only
one tool that offers any hope of doing the job, and that is the space shuttle.
We’ve been told by NASA that there are to be four initial test flights of the
space shuttle “Columbia.” After those are completed, perhaps as early as Sep-
tember 1982, the shuttle will be declared operational. But the fact is, my
friends, that these first four flights are being used for secret military purposes.
The stakes are so high that the secret military shuttle planning team is prepared
to lose a shuttle on each flight if need be. Before the “Columbia” lifted off from
Cape Canaveral last April, three more identical orbiters were already in exis-
tence. They are hidden away in a remote hangar at White Sands Missile Range
in New Mexico.
The primary goal of the secret military shuttle flights is the one I detailed in
AUDIO LETTER No. 62. They are trying to use the space shuttle to orbit a so-
phisticated new spy satellite to fly over Russia. It’s an armored laser-firing
satellite designed to survive attacks by Russian space weapons long enough to
radio back reconnaissance data. After that, the Bolsheviks here will be ready to
set off the American nuclear first strike against Russia.
In order to carry out reconnaissance over Russia, a spy satellite has to fly far to
the north. That kind of orbit is far different from that which is publicly claimed
for the space shuttle. As a result, a shuttle returning to Earth after deploying a
spy satellite is unable to land at the advertised time and place. Instead, the shut-
tle we see taking off from Florida is scheduled to land out of our sight at a
secret location in western Australia—that is, if it survives the flight. Mean-
while, a different shuttle, the training shuttle “Enterprise,” is shown on TV
landing right on schedule at Edwards Air Force Base.
497
When the “Columbia” blasted off from Florida last April, it was attacked and
destroyed by Russian space weapons, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 64.
But the training shuttle “Enterprise,” re-labeled “Columbia,” thrilled the public
by racing in from the sea and landing in California. The covered exit vehicle
was wheeled up, and it was made to appear that astronauts Young and Crippen
walked out. The public perception was maintained that the mission had been a
success, but it was actually a catastrophe even worse than the Bolsheviks here
had thought possible.
The military shuttle planners were thrown into disarray over what to do next. In
AUDIO LETTER No. 65 three months ago I described their disagreements and
what they finally decided to do. After delaying for a week or so, they sent the
training shuttle “Enterprise” to Florida in order to buy some time. It is the “En-
terprise,” a training shuttle not intended for orbital flight, that is now on the pad
at the Kennedy Space Center.
When the secret military shuttle team sent the “Enterprise” to Florida, they
were planning to use it in an intentionally aborted launch—that is, their plan
has been to launch the “Enterprise,” then let one of its engines shut down early.
That would lead to a return of the “Enterprise” to Cape Canaveral only minutes
after its take off. By staging this show, the shuttle planners were expecting to
keep the program alive in the public eye. Meanwhile they would use the time to
make modifications to the next shuttle mission plan to give it a better chance of
success.
As it stands now, the shuttle “Enterprise” is still programmed for an artificial

abort shortly after take off. But the arguments among the shuttle planners,
which I reported last June, have multiplied during the summer. Several mem-
bers of the group are getting very cold feet over the deliberate abort plan.
They’re saying: “Suppose something we don’t plan causes real damage to the
Enterprise. Suppose Ivan decides to blow it out of the sky even though it is still
in camera range. We have to have the Enterprise for the public return segment
after each mission. What if we lose it?”
Other shuttle planners are expressing a completely different worry. This second
group is not worried about the Russians shooting down the “Enterprise” be-
cause it will pose no threat to Russia. What they are worried about is the public
relations impact of an aborted take off. It has even been suggested that a full
orbital launch of the “Enterprise” ought to be considered. The “Enterprise”
could not do anything once it got into orbit because the cargo bay is occupied
by special fuel tanks, but the viewing public would never know that, thanks to
the simulation films which could be broadcast; and as for re-entry, the “Enter-
498
Audio Letter 68
prise” is covered with the same system of thermal tiles as the standard shuttles.
The first group says that that plan is not good because those tiles still have
never been proven in full-fledged re-entry from orbit. The “Columbia” was
supposed to do that last April but it never got that far. The “Enterprise” might
get past the Russians only to disintegrate on re-entry; and that, say the worriers,
would be impossible to hide. It would stop the program.
Out of all those arguments and others like them, only one consensus has
emerged. The only purpose of sending the “Enterprise” to Florida was to buy
time. Meanwhile one of the three secret shuttles at White Sands is now being
modified for the next mission. All NASA cares about doing now is to continue
to buy time with the “Enterprise” for a while longer. Then somehow it will have
to be returned to White Sands and the new shuttle will have to be brought to the
Cape. And so, for the moment at least, the “Enterprise” is being used to buy
time through launch delays instead of an aborted launch.
For three years stories about the thermal tiles of the shuttle were used as an ex-
cuse for the prolonged grounding of the “Columbia.” Now, NASA is trying
once again to buy time; and once again an alleged problem with the thermal
tiles is being used to explain away delay. We’re told that there was a rocket fuel
leak in the dead of night, and so the tiles came off. Only when NASA is sure
what to do next will the latest tile fiasco quietly go away.
Topic #3—Two days ago the week began with bad news from the Stock Ex-
changes of the world. Investors abroad were convinced that stocks on Wall
Street were about to take a plunge and they were trying to get out ahead of that.
When the Markets opened later in New York, at first they did drop fast. But the
Stock Market manipulators here are not quite ready yet for a full-fledged Stock
Market crash, so the New York Markets abruptly turned around and headed up.
By the end of the trading day, the manipulators had driven the market up to an
over-all gain for the day. A world-wide Stock Market panic was postponed on
Monday. Even so, the experience has given public proof of the instability of the
stock market today.
Two years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 51 I gave a detailed warning of the
parallels between the stock market today and that of 1929. The stock market
has been crashing downward in slow motion in terms of real value for years
now, and soon the stock market roller coaster will jump the tracks and down it
will go!
One of the strong similarities between today and 1929 is the role being played
by the private Federal Reserve Corporation. Now, as then, the Federal Reserve
499
is deliberately ruining the economy through contraction of money and credit.

The excuse given is the alleged fight against inflation. We’re told that interest
rates have to be high because inflation is high, but there is a glaring discrepancy
in that explanation for current Federal Reserve policies. According to official
Government figures, the inflation rate is now around 10%. Based on all past
experience, that would mean interest rates should also be around 10%—about
equal to inflation; but instead, the “Fed” has pushed interest rates up to a 20%
range, double the official inflation rate! The fact is, my friends, that Govern-
ment figures on real inflation are lies, and so are the Federal Reserve’s excuses
for legalized usury.
Last month I described the real purpose of current Federal Reserve policies.
Business here is being deliberately weakened and made ripe for take-over. The
only businesses which are not being hurt are those of the Rockefeller Cartel,
which are interlocked with the Federal Reserve Corporation. The Corporate
Fascists here are waging economic war to gain power against the State Bolshe-
viks in the Government, so don’t look for any relief. Federal Reserve Chairman
Paul Volcker testified before Congress late last month that astronomical interest
rates will continue for years. Most small businesses cannot possibly earn the
20% profit and more that is required to pay such exorbitant interest, and so they
will simply die. Meanwhile, Rockefeller Cartel agents within the divided
United States Government are pressing ahead fast with another facet of their
plan.
Last month I gave an alert to watch for an alleged new gold standard to be pro-
posed soon by the so-called Reagan Administration. Sure enough, within the
past few weeks, talk of a gold standard has started mushrooming all around us.
Suddenly “Letters to the Editor” are being published on this topic which would
have been ignored a few years ago. Even the entity Vice-President Bush is talk-
ing about returning to a gold standard. And Business Week has just published a
cover story in its September 21 edition entitled, quote: “A Return To The Gold
Standard—Why Reagan might try it, How it would be done, How it might
work.”
So far the bogus gold standard plan is right on track. As I detailed last month, it
would not be a real gold standard at all. It’s only a gimmick to influence public
perceptions about the dollar and to silence new questions about our missing
gold. It’s being designed to look good, but it’s just another corrupt and cruel
trick.
My friends, corruption has become the only way our leaders know. The long-
suffering American people always give the benefit of the doubt to every new
500
Audio Letter 68
president, and it’s always in vain. The same is true of Congress today—the
more they legislate, the more the country “goes to the dogs”; but while they are
in office we try to tell ourselves that surely they must be doing some things in
our interest. Years later, after it is too late, of course, sometimes we learn a little
bit of the truth. A book comes out documenting the large number of bribes
taken by a former president, or a former Congressman is indicted for Income
Tax evasion; but we always tell ourselves: “Surely it is different this time.” We
want to believe in our leaders; and so we rationalize away the lies, the double
dealing, and the corruption we see for as long as possible. Our leaders know
this is how we think, and they use it against us.
The entity President Reagan says we must put our economic house in order.
Based on that excuse, domestic programs of all kinds are being cut down with a
meat ax regardless of merit. Spending on warfare leaves nothing for welfare,
and yet most foreign aid is going on untouched! The only exception to that is
aid to truly needy countries in the Third World. They have no usefulness to the
urgent plans for nuclear war, and so they are finding themselves “out in the
cold”; but foreign aid to help prepare for war goes right on without letup.
Most sacrosanct of all foreign aid programs are the annual billions in aid to Is-
rael. Over the past 33 years the United States has given over 100-billion dollars
($100,000,000,000) in aid to Israel. Those very same dollars—our tax money—
come right back to Capitol Hill and American multinational corporations.
American tax dollars flow like water through Israeli hands into Congressional
wallets, giving the Israeli Lobby its clout! American foreign aid dollars to Israel
are also used to buy American-made weapons of war. Those weapons will one
day drag you and me into America’s final war—NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
If our leaders were serious about straightening out our economy, there are many
things they could do. To begin with, they should start telling the truth for a
change, instead of heaping lies on more lies. Instead of a falsified gold stan-
dard, the scandal over our missing gold should be exposed! As I explained in
AUDIO LETTER No. 60, this could be done in connection with an interna-
tional economic conference in a way that would save the world’s economy.
The Administration’s meat ax approach to domestic programs should also be

scrapped. Yes, my friends, many domestic programs are controversial—some
of them deserve to be; but let’s put first things first.
Before we take a meat ax to domestic aid, why don’t we start with foreign
aid—alias Congressional aid. At least a dollar spent in domestic programs
501
keeps circulating within our own economy; but those squandered on foreign aid
do our economy, as a whole, no good.
And as for Congress, if a meat ax should be wielded anywhere, that is where!

More and more we’re hearing about employees of all kinds of companies ac-
cepting wage cuts to help save their companies. Meanwhile our spend-thrift
Congress has just voted itself the right to line its pockets even more than in the
past!
I say:
Chop all federal salaries in half, starting with Congress. We cannot afford to let
them fiddle any more while our economy burns.
It’s time, my friends, to hold their feet to the fire.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
tried to sound a warning that time is growing short—economically, politically,
and militarily. Men of ill will and corrupt minds are piloting our world on a col-
lision course with disaster.
As Americans await the next space shuttle launch, a greater countdown is un-
derway for spaceship Earth. One day in January 1986, the Voyager II spacecraft
is scheduled to be approaching the giant mystery planet Uranus. Voyager will
be preparing to send a bonanza of pictures and scientific data to Earth. But by
then, will anyone be listening to Voyager here on Earth? The answer can be
Yes, my friends, if the truth of our Lord Jesus Christ becomes the guiding light
for our troubled world. We must learn to build, instead of destroy; we must
learn peace, instead of war, through universal neutrality and noble competition,
instead of conquest and intrigue. If we do not learn these things, there may be
only silence on Earth by that winter of 1986. Nine years after its launch from
the blue pearl of planet Earth, Voyager II could be radioing signals to a deaf,
gray tomb of a world. That will leave Voyager itself carrying the final sounds
of Earth on a platinum record as it drifts alone forever outward to the stars.
502
Audio Letter 69
November 8, 1981
A few days ago on the morning of November 4, the eyes of the world were on
Cape Canaveral, Florida. An American space shuttle sat poised for launch on
Pad 39-A, the home of America’s moon flights a decade ago. According to
NASA, the shuttle was scheduled for launch at 7:30 that morning. What we
were watching, my friends, was another NASA publicity hoax. NASA had no
intention of actually launching the shuttle that day.
The shuttle now at Cape Canaveral is not the “Columbia” as claimed—it is the
training shuttle “Enterprise,” as I reported last June in AUDIO LETTER® No.
65. It is there for only one reason: to help NASA buy time. It was the Enter-
prise, not the Columbia, that we saw making that dramatic landing in California
last April. Most Americans are unaware that the Columbia was destroyed in
space after it took off from Cape Canaveral.
NASA is continuing to buy time while secret modifications of the next space
shuttle are underway at White Sands, New Mexico, and so right now we’re see-
ing hoaxes like the aborted countdown on November 4. As I mentioned a
moment ago, NASA had no intention of allowing an actual launch earlier this
week. What they did want was an exciting countdown to sustain public interest
and explain away the next delay.
The key to the NASA publicity show was the master countdown computer
called the “Automatic Sequencer.” It was deliberately programmed to delay the
countdown at T minus 9 minutes and then to stop it completely just 31 seconds
before launch. With those arrangements made, NASA forged ahead with its
pretended launch preparations. For several days ahead of time, NASA spokes-
men solemnly said that the weather would have to be almost perfect at launch
time. The reason, we were told over and over, was that the shuttle might have to
abort its take-off and glide back to land at Cape Canaveral. That is exactly the
plan which I made public last June in AUDIO LETTER No. 65.
The military shuttle planners are still actively considering a deliberately aborted
launch soon, and they want to prepare us in case they carry it out. But on No-
503
vember 4 the launch preparations were only make-believe, and so NASA

pressed ahead with the countdown with only lip service to the worsening
weather. The countdown went without a hitch to the “T minus 9 minutes” mark
and then stopped for a final planned “Hold.” We were told that this was the de-
cision point when Launch Control would either go ahead or “scrub.” Newsmen
craned their necks at the worsening clouds and shook their heads. It began to
rain on spectators 10 miles from the launch pad; then the rain reached the VIP
stand, twice as close to the shuttle; next, rain started pelting TV reporters at
their forward outposts, closest of all to the launch pad. Surely, they said, NASA
would have to scrub the launch; but to NASA Launch Control, only the count-
down itself mattered that day. They knew there could be no launch because the
countdown computer had been programmed to prevent it, and so the an-
nouncement from NASA surprised many. The decision was to go ahead for a
launch. The final 9 minutes of the countdown were used to help lay the founda-
tion for things to come.
First, the countdown computer refused to resume the count at T minus 9 min-
utes. Shortly NASA announced that it was merely a computer programming
problem. Moments later the count began. Everything went smoothly until T mi-
nus 31 seconds. Then the count stopped again. Once again, said NASA, it was a
programming goof. The shuttle itself was fine, we were told, but the computer
had not been given the right instructions.
By that point, my friends, it was a critical point in the count, so close to launch.
The shuttle fuel tanks had been sealed up, ready to go; the shuttle had been cut
loose from its ground links and was trembling with power, ready to go. All
kinds of things had to be shut down, cooled off, reset, and recycled for another
try.
For the next two hours or so television reports concentrated on how crucial
computers are to the shuttle. They ended up making one basic point, and that is:
even if the shuttle itself is in perfect condition, a mistake in programming its
computers can cause the unexpected to happen. This, my friends, is NASA’s
way of getting us ready to accept it if they do carry out a so-called “Return-to-
landing-site abort.” They will say afterward that it was all caused by a computer
programming problem. They will emphasize that the shuttle itself performed
perfectly, and so the shuttle project should not be interfered with. Finally when
they are ready for the third shuttle launch, they will assure us that the computer
problems have all been solved. This, my friends, was the true purpose of the
November 4 shuttle countdown hoax. They have now paved the way for an
aborted take-off soon if they choose to carry out the plan I made public in
AUDIO LETTER No. 65.
504
Audio Letter 69
Having accomplished that much, the NASA launch team finally scrubbed the
November 4 launch with a different excuse. We’re being told that the hydraulic
power units, called APUs, need an oil and filter change; and with that story,
NASA is once again buying more time. Using one excuse after another, NASA
has succeeded so far in slipping the next shuttle launch, time after time, without
arousing public suspicion. It’s now almost seven months since the first shuttle
launch on April 12, 1981. Even so, these delays cannot continue indefinitely.
The countdown for the space shuttle program is only part of a far greater count-
down—the countdown toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE!
Earlier this year of 1981 I revealed that the American Bolsheviks here are try-
ing to follow a definite timetable in their war plans. That timetable calls for the
war sequence to begin around mid-1982. A chain of events will begin that is to
culminate finally in NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
My friends, up to now they are still on that timetable. Mid-1982 is less than a
year away now, and so regardless of the low chances of success, the military
space shuttle team will have to try a launch soon. Whatever they try will be a
desperate gamble in light of Russia’s overwhelming military power in space.
But time is slipping away for the space shuttle. The choice is gradually becom-
ing: either use it or lose it.
The State Socialists here, the American Bolsheviks who now control America’s
military policies, are in a frenzy to throw America’s nuclear arsenal at Russia.
During recent weeks this military frenzy has been manifesting itself in many
ways. These range from the so-called Reagan Administration decision on the
MX missile and B-1 Bomber to shocking statements about “limited nuclear
war.” At the same time, America’s economy is being dragged down into an in-
flationary depression to set the stage for DICTATORSHIP! And most ominous
of all, my friends, a specific act has taken place since my last AUDIO LETTER
report that has lit one of the fuses for war!
In a number of recent tapes I’ve discussed the similarity between the multiply-
ing crises of today and those that led up to World War I. Those crises set the
stage, but a specific incident acted as the trigger that led to war. That event, my
friends, was the unexpected assassination of a key political figure. It happened
in 1914, and now in 1981 it has happened again.
Topic #1—THE SADAT ASSASSINATION FOR NUCLEAR WAR ONE
505
Topic #2—THE REAGAN ADMINISTRATION PROGRAM TO

POLANDIZE AMERICA
Topic #3—THE MX DECISION AND AMERICA’S FIRST-STRIKE

POSTURE.
Topic #1—Assassination politics can be counted on always to strike without

warning. One fateful day it struck in a capital city not far from the Mediterra-
nean Sea. The day began without a hint of what was about to happen. The
Mediterranean sun was bright and warm, the sort of day that is perfect for pic-
nics and parades. An unusual leader was scheduled to be seen in public
appearances on that fateful day. He was a strong-minded man, not universally
admired but certainly an attention-getter. For his public appearances that day he
was all decked out with a full complement of medals to enhance his image.
He was a controversial man, and his policies were stirring up heated debate. He
had staked out a course in foreign policy that set him apart from others in his
region. There were many who did not like his ideas. Throughout the region in
which this unusual man lived, deep divisions were threatening to explode into
violence. The central problem had to do with a disenfranchised minority who
were scattered through parts of the several nations. This minority group were
the victims of great power maneuvering that had changed the map a generation
earlier. They had been left without the national identity they craved, and scat-
tered through parts of several nations.
For decades the people of this disenfranchised minority had been struggling to
regain their rights, and slowly but surely they were growing more powerful.
These facts weighed heavily in the mind of the controversial leader on that
bright, sunny day. He was convinced that the course which he was promoting
was the right one. He was involved in negotiations that could lead to a form of
regional autonomy for the disenfranchised minority. They would be given this
autonomy within the nations where they lived. His public appearances on that
sunny day were intended to underscore his determination to continue down his
chosen course. It was only a matter of time, he thought, until his own diplo-
matic ideas brought lasting peace to his troubled region and honor to himself.
That was this man’s dream, my friends, but the dream ended abruptly as a
nightmare. In the warmth of the bright Mediterranean sun, the chilling shock of
assassination politics suddenly intervened. There was a hail of gunfire; and this
man who had staked out such an independent course lay dead.
506
Audio Letter 69
The assassination was followed immediately by questions piled on more ques-

tions. “How big was the conspiracy?” The answer at first appeared to be only a
handful, perhaps four or five men. Later there were hints that it might have been
much bigger than that. “What about the suspicious behavior of the neighboring
government toward the assassinated leader?” The evidence was conflicting
about that. And, “Why had effective protection been so completely lacking for
such an important leader?” To this day, my friends, that question remains a
mystery.
It is often said that history repeats itself; and so it does, my friends, if only we
can learn to see it.
I have just described not just one historical event, but two. One of these events
was the assassination of the entity known as President Anwar Sadat of Egypt
last month on October 6. The other event, which fits exactly the same descrip-
tion, was an assassination which took place 67 years ago. I am referring to the
assassination of Archduke Franz Ferdinand of Austria on June 28, 1914. The
assassination last month took place in the Egyptian capital city of Cairo, some
100 miles south of the Mediterranean coast. The victim was the entity President
Sadat. Over the past half decade Sadat had become highly controversial and
isolated in the Arab world. The reason for this was his involvement with Israel
by way of the so-called Camp David Accords.
The great problem in the Middle East today is, of course, that of the Palestini-
ans. They are the disenfranchised minority of today, victims of the great power
map-making which created Israel a generation ago. The Palestinians, largely
dispossessed from their former homeland, are today scattered like orphans
throughout several nations; but they have never lost their determination to re-
gain their rights and their national identity, and slowly but surely they are
growing more powerful. Most Arab leaders today support these Palestinian as-
pirations in undiluted form, but four years ago Sadat broke ranks with his Arab
brothers by his unilateral overtures toward Israel. From that time onward Sadat
became identified with a sort of halfway solution to the Palestinian problem.
That solution is called “autonomy.”
These days we hear frequently about so-called autonomy talks between Egypt
and Israel. To you and me thousands of miles away from the scene, the concept
of Regional Autonomy for the Palestinians may sound pretty good, but to the
Palestinians themselves it is no solution at all. They see it as nothing more than
a way to lock them into their present homeless status for all time; and, my
friends, they are exactly right about that. After all, the Palestinians themselves
507
are not even party to the so-called autonomy talks which are to decide their fate.
So this was the situation last month on October 6:
The Middle East, seething with unresolved tensions from great power map-
making of a generation earlier; a disenfranchised minority struggling to re-
establish their national identity; and a single unorthodox leader seeking a half-
way solution based on so-called Regional Autonomy for the minority.
It sounds like a situation unique to our age; but, my friends, it is not unique. In
important ways it is almost a carbon copy of the situation that exploded into
World War I.
In 1914 the hot spot of the world was not the Middle East, but the Balkan Pen-
insula. The disenfranchised minority of that day were not the Palestinians but
the grouping of peoples known collectively as the Yugoslavs. Yugoslavia as we
know it today did not exist in 1914. Instead, the map of the region was a patch-
work of names like Serbia, Bosnia, and Herzegovina. Scattered throughout the
region were the interrelated Yugoslav peoples. They had been robbed of their
power and identity a generation earlier, and they wanted it back.
For several years before the outbreak of World War I, these tensions led repeat-
edly to outbreaks of fighting in the Balkans. Into this dangerous situation
stepped Archduke Franz Ferdinand, heir to the throne of Austria of the Austro-
Hungarian empire. He was afraid the Balkan situation could lead to a breakup
of his empire, and so he proposed a halfway solution to pacify the Yugoslavs
while preserving the status quo. His plan for this disenfranchised minority was
called “Regional Autonomy.” It was virtually a prototype for the so-called
autonomy plan we hear about today for the Palestinians. The Yugoslavs were
no more pleased with the so-called autonomy idea in 1914 than the Palestinians
are today in 1981. It was a situation made to order to set the stage for assassina-
tion. That was true in 1914, and it was true again in 1981, barely a month ago.
The two assassinations differed in detail, but in overall pattern they were much
the same. Archduke Ferdinand appeared in an open car wearing the medals and
trappings of royalty. Sadat appeared at a parade dressed in the medals and trap-
pings of the military. Both were shot to death without the assassins being
interfered with by security personnel until too late. Both were killed in capital
cities near the Mediterranean—Archduke Ferdinand in the provincial capital of
Sarajevo, Bosnia; Sadat, in Cairo, Egypt. Both assassinations were followed
immediately by suspicions directed against a neighboring state. In the case of
Sadat, the suspicions were aimed at neighboring Libya; in the case of Archduke
508
Audio Letter 69
Ferdinand, it was Serbia that drew accusations; and those accusations, my

friends, initiated a process that led directly to World War I.
If all these things were not enough, there is one other crucial similarity today
with the situation in 1914. On the eve of World War I there were two great
power blocs opposing one another in Europe. One was called the Triple En-
tente, consisting of Britain, France, and czarist Russia; the other was the Triple
Alliance, made up of Germany, Austria-Hungary, and Italy. These two great
power blocs were something new and dangerous in continental politics. They
were permanent alliances instead of the temporary special purpose alliances of
the past. They were the legacy of balance-of-power politics from the era of
Bismarck and Disraeli. The two blocs were so evenly matched that it was
thought that they would keep the peace, but they both shared a common weak
spot. That weak spot was the Balkan Peninsula. In themselves, the Balkans
were minor players on the world stage; but there were treaties between the Bal-
kan mini-states and the great powers. It was through those ties that the great
powers were pulled into what became World War I.
Today, my friends, we live once again in an era when two great power blocs
have been facing each other for decades. One is centered on Russia, and the
other on the United States, together with their allies. For example: in Europe
itself, NATO stands eyeball to eyeball with the Warsaw Pact year in, year out.
Today it is far worse than in 1914. It is more complicated, and secret alliances
are now being forged. And just as 1914 had its weak spot in the Balkans, the
1981 weak spot is the Middle East together with the Persian Gulf.
In 1914 the assassination of Archduke Franz Ferdinand came as a shock to the

world. It was the trigger that started a chain of events that culminated in World
War I. Austria-Hungary accused Serbia of complicity in the assassination and
issued a harsh ultimatum. Little Serbia responded by appealing to Russia for
protection, and Russia agreed to provide it. Austria-Hungary declared war on
Serbia; Russia started mobilizing. Austria-Hungary appealed to its ally Ger-
many, which promptly declared war on Russia. Germany asked Russia’s ally
France to stay out of it, but the French were evasive. Germany then declared
war on France, and prepared to march through Belgium to attack France. Brit-
ain gave a warning to Germany not to violate Belgium’s neutrality. The
Germans started marching anyway. Britain declared war on Germany. The
situation kept on snowballing like this until all of Europe was aflame with war.
It was a war from which there could emerge no winners except for unseen pow-
erful forces behind the scenes, but those forces had succeeded in setting off the
unwinnable war for their own selfish ends—and they started it all with a sur-
prise assassination!
509
When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 68 on September 30, I gave a warning

that the entity Sadat was being set up for assassination. The State Socialists (or
American Bolsheviks) here are trying to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE by
means of techniques similar to those which led to World War I 67 years ago,
and the time had come at last to use Sadat to help further the plan for war.
Contrary to appearances, the late President Anwar Sadat did not initiate nego-
tiations with Israel four years ago on his own initiative. Instead, he had been
turned into an involuntary puppet of the United States and Israel! I first re-
vealed what had been done to Sadat four years ago this month in AUDIO
LETTER No. 28.
Up until the spring of 1977, Anwar Sadat had always rejected the idea of direct
negotiations with Israel. In April of that year, Sadat visited Washington for
talks with the then President Carter. When reporters asked whether he would
consider direct negotiations with Israel, Sadat again dismissed the idea as too
drastic. Yet a little more than six months later Sadat electrified the world with
his sudden peace initiative and visit to Israel. In AUDIO LETTER No. 28 I re-
ported what had happened to Sadat to so radically change his thinking. Sadat
had been subjected to the psychological programming techniques which are se-
cretly in use by the United States and other Intelligence agencies. He was
programmed with an irresistible compulsion to go against all of his past think-
ing and deal directly with Israel. The bottom line was what I reported four years
ago. To repeat what I reported then, quote:
“The Sadat peace initiative to Israel is supposed to be, unknown to Sadat him-
self, the first step toward war.”
Last month the Sadat image was put to its final use by the secret joint military
junta of the United States Pentagon and Israel. The assassination in Cairo ended
the Sadat era and, at the same time, it started the countdown toward collapse of
the Egyptian-Israeli Peace Treaty on the way to war! Within hours of the assas-
sination, Israeli leaders began expressing doubts whether the peace will survive
without Sadat; and they said that this could cause a re-appraisal of the plan for
Israel to complete its withdrawal from the Sinai on schedule next spring.
When Archduke Franz Ferdinand was assassinated in June of 1914, it led very
quickly to the outbreak of war. The war was getting underway by early August,
a scant six weeks after the assassination. Today the same unseen forces and
their principals are at work, but the situation is more complicated. As a result it
510
Audio Letter 69
would be a mistake to expect the same timetables to apply, but the hollow ech-
oes of 1914 are growing louder and louder in the Middle East today.
For the moment, the complex maneuvers of the American Bolshevik-Zionist

junta of the United States and Israel are shifting to other areas than Egypt. On
one hand we are hearing more and more about Libya. We’re gradually being
conditioned to the idea that the Libyan strong man, Khadafy, is a madman who
might do just about anything. This, my friends, is just another ingredient which
is being prepared to be thrown into the American Bolshevik-Zionist war cal-
dron. When the right moment arrives, Khadafy can be programmed to do
something seemingly insane to help bring on war.
As long ago as 1974, I reported over radio station WMCA in New York that
Libya is under the United States CIA control. Khadafy and his henchmen had
been brought to the United States and trained by the CIA to carry out a coup
d’etat. Khadafy then went back, carried out the coup, and installed himself as
Libya’s new leader. He also installed the CIA as his indispensable helper.
These, my friends, are the facts behind the shocking recent reports of American
involvement in Libya.
But more important than Libya is Saudi Arabia. When I recorded AUDIO
LETTER No. 68 on September 30, it seemed that the crucial AWACS deal with
Saudi Arabia was in trouble; but I reported that Israel secretly wanted the
AWACS deal to be approved. This is part of the plan to set up Saudi Arabia to
look like a credible threat to Israel. That will give Israel the excuse it needs to
carry out a limited nuclear strike on the Saudi oil fields.
My friends, the decisive turning point in the AWACS debate was the assassina-
tion of Anwar Sadat. From that day onward, undecided United States Senators
started coming down in favor of the AWACS deal. Some key Senators even
changed from being against it to being for it, and said the Sadat assassination
had changed their minds. On October 28 the AWACS sale to Saudi Arabia was
approved by the United States Senate. It was the “point of no return” for the
Middle East! The peace overtures of the late Anwar Sadat have served their in-
tended purpose. These peace overtures have started the world down the road to
thermonuclear war!
Topic #2—Two days ago there was a new flood of bad economic news out of
Washington. Official unemployment figures jumped from 7-1/2% to 8% in Oc-
tober, just one month’s time. The deep slumps in housing and autos are getting
deeper, and the Reagan promise of a balanced federal budget by 1984 has now
been officially abandoned. At the same time, Government figures show that
511
more and more people are going deeper and deeper into debt. Even as the econ-
omy slows down, galloping inflation is continuing to make it harder to make
ends meet.
Meanwhile, the privately-owned Federal Reserve Corporation is maintaining

the high interest rates that are strangling the economy. It has been only a few
short weeks since America’s recession was first admitted at all by the President.
The entity President Reagan startled reporters by saying the country is in a mild
recession. Then other Government spokesmen softened the blow, calling it a
“flat period.” Now these casual-sounding early admissions are being replaced
by reports that grow worse by the day. America’s economy is turning sour too
fast for reassuring smiles and empty phrases to hide it any longer.
If you want to understand what is really happening to the United States econ-
omy, you must keep your eyes on the basics. There are two critical sectors of
the economy which are the keys to bringing about prosperity or depression.
Those sectors are: Automobiles and Housing. Both are in deep trouble now; and
as they go down, they are pulling down our whole economy with them.
The techniques which were used to bring on the Great Depression of the 1930’s
are once again being used now. Six years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 5 I
talked briefly about the wise German professor who taught me finance, bank-
ing, and economics. In the 1920’s this man had been consulted by the
Rockefeller interests, who claimed that they wanted to know how to deflate in-
flation; but once he had shown them how it could be done, they misused his
information to create the Great Depression instead!
This German economist confided many things to me, and one was:
how economies are manipulated. He showed me how the key sectors of Hous-
ing and Automobiles can be used to bring down a whole economy; and three
years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 41 I gave an early warning that this process
was being set in motion. As I reported then, General Motors betrayed its ad-
vance knowledge of the plan for a new American depression on November 7,
1978. On that day, GM slashed its dividend rates in half on GM stock. GM’s
action three years ago took the Stock Market by surprise because auto sales had
been good; but since that time interest rates have climbed into the “loan shark”
range, and both automobiles and housing have hit upon hard times. A few days
ago it was announced that auto sales in the United States have slumped to their
lowest level in 23 years.
512
Audio Letter 69
The last time things were this bad we were in the severe recession of 1957 to
1958. But, my friends, you haven’t seen anything yet!
Housing is no better off. Incredible interest rates combined with unchecked in-
flation in basic prices have cut housing sales of all kinds to a trickle. When you
hear those monthly statistics about deepening unemployment, my friends, keep
in mind that they are only a symptom of what is happening.
General unemployment is following down the same path that is being taken in
housing and autos. In many metropolitan areas, unemployment in construction
trades has already reached 20% and is still increasing. Likewise, lay-offs are
steadily increasing the unemployment rate in autos. Lost jobs in those two sec-
tors mean other businesses will slow down too. And so general unemployment
can do nothing but get worse as things stand right now. Millions of American
working people are growing nervous as they see what is happening. Many are
especially worried because they sense a fundamental shift taking place in the
Government’s attitude toward Labor.
Several weeks ago these worries were expressed in the so-called “Solidarity
Day Rally” of a quarter million people right here in Washington. This time the
Rally was peaceful; but I must report that forces are now at work that are
threatening to erupt in violent riots, both here in Washington and in other major
cities soon. One catalyst for these riots is likely to be the abrupt cancellation of
benefits for the needy. The problem is not so much what is being done as the
way it is being done. Instead of phasing out these programs in a way that would
give a period of adjustment, they are just being lopped off. Many people are
being made to feel that they are being cast onto the trash heap. Resentment and
desperation are building. At the same time, shortages are coming in America.
These shortages will come to include food, sooner than most of us imagine.
One of the favorite political weapons of the Bolsheviks has always been hun-
ger, because it is so powerful. They used it long ago in Russia. They are using it
today in Poland, and they will use it tomorrow right here in the United States!
Widespread hunger can be brought about in America even if there is no lack of
agricultural production.
In that respect, the situation has changed dramatically during the past year be-
cause, my friends, the Soviet Union has called off its program of weather
modification to reduce our crops. If you will recall, the Bolshevik-dominated
former Carter Administration declared a grain embargo against Russia in Janu-
ary of 1980. The following month I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 54 that
the Kremlin was retaliating by means of massive modification of America’s
513
weather. For the next four months I was not able to give monthly updates on the
situation because I was recovering from a near-fatal heart attack; but by the
time I resumed my AUDIO LETTER series in June 1980, the weather had be-
come big news here in America. Vast growing areas of the United States were
in the grip of a scorching drought that was both unexpected and very severe.
The Russians made sure that they got their point across to our peanut farmer
president then in office. For the first time on record the Deep South peanut crop
failed in 1980. It was destroyed by the weather.
The United States grain embargo against Russia had been a Bolshevik attempt
to use the-hunger weapon on an international scale, but it backfired. The Rus-
sians tightened their belts a notch but suffered little. Instead, it was the United
States that was on the brink of an era of hunger due to crop failure, and it would
have taken place in ways that could have caused real trouble for our own Un-
seen Rulers. They want to impose hunger on you and me but only on their own
timetable as a way to control us. And so six months ago the grain embargo
against Russia was ended. As a result, America’s weather returned to normal
during the summer of 1981 just passed. The drought-stricken areas of a year
ago have in many cases received drenching rains to restore their productivity.
As I said earlier, the immediate threat of hunger in America is no longer due to
crop failure caused by Russian weather modification. Instead, when hunger
strikes, it may well be brought about by a sudden disruption of our food distri-
bution system.
Today we live in an age of agribusiness with production of most of our food

stuffs concentrated in a few prime areas. The greatest concentration of all is in
California, which produces from 40% to 50% of many of our fruits and vegeta-
bles. Other agricultural states specialize in other parts of our food supply—
grains, meats, etc. What ties the whole country together so that we all have food
to eat is transportation. There is a motto that says “America’s needs move by
truck.” Nowhere is that more true than it is for our food supply. Supermarkets
nation-wide carry only about a 3-day supply of food on their shelves. They
have to be re-stocked continuously by a steady stream of trucks.
Trucks, my friends, depend upon petroleum supplies in order to keep moving.

Once the Saudi oil fields are capped off by the Israeli nuclear strike, there will
be a sudden cutoff of much of our oil. If the plan is carried out successfully, it
will mean gas rationing and restricted movement for us all. It will also mean
serious disruptions in food distribution.
A while ago I mentioned the recent Washington rally under the name “Solidar-
ity Day.” In a way, that was an ironic name to choose. It makes one think of the
514
Audio Letter 69
so-called Solidarity Labor Union in Poland. In Poland the Solidarity Union is a

tool of the American Bolsheviks who are trying to destroy the economy for
purposes of revolution and war. Here in America, the American Bolsheviks are
also trying to destroy the economy—and for similar reasons. But here, they are
trying to do it through the Government itself. As America’s economy continues
to deteriorate, the battle continues in the secret power struggle to control the
United States Government.
The two factions in this power struggle are the State Bolsheviks and the Corpo-
rate Fascists, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 67. Lately this struggle is
surfacing in public skirmishes. The latest example is the flap over the White
House “guerilla campaign” against Secretary of State Alexander Haig. Mean-
while the destruction of our economy is continuing. Our country is being
Polandized—that is, America is being weakened economically to set the stage
for war, just as is being done to Poland.
America’s economic destruction is being orchestrated by the money managers

of the Federal Reserve Corporation and Treasury Department. But to maintain
the pretense of trying to help our economy, the plan for a bogus new gold stan-
dard for our currency or Treasury Bonds is still moving ahead quietly. I can
report that the Federal Gold Commission has now had its life quietly extended
by Congress until March 31, 1982. The Gold Standard ploy is intended to look
good, but it is a sham. How can an alleged Gold Standard mean anything if the
alleged gold reserves do not exist? After all, when President Nixon closed the
gold window in 1971, it was because America’s gold reserves had been secretly
depleted! Nixon’s Treasury Secretary at the time was John Connally, and he has
now gone public with strong opposition to the Gold Standard idea—and his
reason is simple. Last month the New York Times for October 19 quoted Con-
nally as saying:
“We don’t have the gold.”
Wherever you look, there are nothing but questions about the true status of
America’s gold supplies. For example: three years ago the major media for
once created a sensation about the New York Assay Office. They reported, cor-
rectly, that some 5,000 ounces of gold were missing—gone without a trace!
Well, my friends, the major media ought to go back and check again with their
sources. For the fiscal year ended September 30, 1981, there is still more gold
missing at the New York Assay Office! Supposedly there was a tightening of
security and procedures there after the scandal three years ago—at least that’s
what the Treasury Department told the public. But for this past year alone, an-
other 3,163 ounces of gold have vanished.
515
Yes, my friends, America is being Polandized. Just as Poland is the victim of

deliberate economic turmoil, so are we. The objective in Poland is to bring on
social upheaval, bloodshed, and the prelude to war. And that is also the objec-
tive right here in the United States. When unemployment and hunger riots
materialize, they will trigger the secret military “OPERATION GARDEN
PLOT” which I first reported in the summer of 1975. It is all part of the plan for
a National Emergency to come on the way to NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
Topic #3—Early last month on October 2, the entity President Reagan an-
nounced his long-awaited decision on the MX Missile Program. For the past
several years we’ve been hearing about the MX and all kinds of possible mobile
basing for it. We’ve been told that the MX will have to be mobile in order to
survive a Russian nuclear attack.
Having heard this for years, a lot of people were shocked when they heard the
Reagan decision on the MX. He declared that the famous MX race track system
out West will not be built after all. Instead, they will simply be used to replace
aging Titan missiles when deployment begins in 1986. At least that is the an-
nounced plan for the first 36 MX missiles. The President said, in effect, that he
doesn’t yet know what to do with the rest of the MXs that will be built. That is
so even though the Reagan Administration plans to build only a hundred of
them—half as many as previously planned.
Many people who closely follow defense matters were stunned by the an-
nouncement. “Whatever happened to the mobile missile idea,” they wondered.
My friends, the answer is still what I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 55 in
June 1980. America’s real mobile missile is not the MX at all but a smaller,
completely secret missile. It’s called the “Minuteman TX,” and it is being de-
ployed now on America’s railroads! Each TX missile is transported in a special
car with a barn-like peaked roof.
A number of my listeners have seen and photographed Minuteman TX missile

cars since I described them in my June 1980 report. About six months ago I re-
leased a special bulletin which presents two of these photographs. In AUDIO
LETTER No. 55 I explained that the publicity surrounding the so-called MX
program was only a cover for the secret TX mobile missile program. Recently I
reported that the TX missile deployment is scheduled to be completed by next
spring, around six months from now. Now that the program is nearing comple-
tion, the MX mobile missile cover story has just about run its course. That’s
why the Reagan Administration is now dropping its pretenses that the MX will
be mobile.
516
Audio Letter 69
Controversy will continue to swirl around the MX program, but the idea of a
mobile missile is now changing in official public statements. Now that the
Minuteman TX system is becoming an accomplished fact, we are beginning to
hear trial balloons to get us used to the idea. For example, Senator John Glenn
appeared on the CBS television program “Face the Nation” last month on Oc-
tober 18. Senator Glenn said that the Department of Defense ought to deploy a
smaller mobile missile than the MX. He proposed putting them in trailers on the
nation’s roads, traveling all around the country. The system he described was
almost identical to the secret TX, the traveling Minuteman, which I made pub-
lic 17 months ago. There was only one important difference in what Senator
Glenn described. He carefully avoided talking about railroads but instead talked
about truck trailers. If he had mentioned railroads, he would have “let the cat
out of the bag” because railroads are how the secret TX missiles are actually
deployed.
The deep secrecy surrounding the Minuteman TX program springs from the
fact that it is not a defensive weapon. America’s secret military planners plan to
use it in a nuclear first strike against Russia. On top of that, the TX missiles in
our midst are placing all of us on the front lines for a nuclear attack. Today we
are all in the trenches!
Up to now the major media have maintained a news blackout on my charges to

this effect, but one magazine has now had the courage to publish my charges
together with TX missile car photographs. The magazine is called COMBAT
READY. My charges are published in an article titled: “IS THE MX A
SHOOT-FIRST WEAPON?” It is in the January 1982 issue which just went on
sale nation-wide.
I first reported that America was secretly shifting to a first-strike nuclear policy
against Russia in the summer of 1978. At the time, many people found that idea
unbelievable; but now, as war itself draws closer, the first-strike posture of the
United States is becoming more and more obvious.
Soon after the Reagan MX decision was announced last month, its first-strike
implications were spelled out in the New York Times by Herbert Scoville, Jr.
Scoville, a former Deputy Director of the CIA, wrote an article which begins
with the words, quote:
“President Reagan’s decision on the MX missile signals that the United States
is now firmly and publicly embarked on a first-strike strategic nuclear policy.
This is a prescription for a nuclear disaster—a disaster unparalleled in the his-
517
tory of mankind.”
Scoville points out that the MX as advertised makes sense only as a first-strike
weapon. For one thing, the MX is alleged to be an anti-ICBM weapon, but the
only way the MX could destroy Russian ICBMs sitting on the ground would be
if the Russians had not fired them yet. In other words, we would have to shoot
first. Scoville points out that the “shoot first” idea becomes even more neces-
sary in light of the decision to put them in old Titan silos. The Defense
Department itself says that Russia’s largest missiles, quote: “are capable of de-
stroying any known fixed target with high probability.” In other words, the
Titan silos cannot be hardened enough to protect them from Russian missiles,
so the only way the MX could be used would be to shoot first.
If all Americans were aware of authoritative statements of alarm like this one,
perhaps disaster could be averted; but most people these days never hear such
warnings. If we are lucky and alert, we may see it once in a newspaper; but it is
soon washed away by the never ending flood of lies from Washington. Most of
us remain oblivious to the danger, and so we raise not a word in protest as our
leaders sell us down the river to disaster!
Even so, the secret first-strike preparations of the United States are not entirely
without opposition. The plan is known within the walls of the Kremlin, and
Russia’s leaders are at work on several fronts. For one thing, they are continu-
ing the campaign of attrition against America’s war-making capacity which
they started several years ago. One day a railroad train derails and several
chemical tank cars, bound for a defense plant, explode. Another day an unex-
plained explosion wipes a small weapons laboratory off the face of the earth.
Next, a rash of military plane crashes takes place. The pattern keeps changing
constantly so that it cannot be identified, but it is there and it has its effect!
What the Kremlin hopes for most in its campaign of attrition is that America’s
war plans will somehow be deterred altogether. That is their hope, but it is not
what they actually expect. Of all people on earth, Russia’s present-day leaders
know the Bolshevik mind. So long as the Bolsheviks here continue to determine
American military policy, the Russians are convinced that war is inevitable; and
so with their ongoing campaign of attrition, they are trying to limit the damage
that can be done to Russia.
From time to time the Russians carry out something spectacular in their double
campaign of deterrence and attrition. As I say these words, an incident has just
ended that had deterrence as its main purpose. I’m referring to the celebrated
518
Audio Letter 69
case of the Soviet submarine which ran aground in supersensitive restricted

Swedish waters.
Three weeks ago Defense Secretary Caspar Weinberger became the first
American Defense Secretary ever to visit Sweden. He spent four days there.
The Bolsheviks here want to entangle Sweden and all of the North countries in
their war plans. The Russians are equally determined to prevent that, so it was
decided that Sweden should be encouraged to think twice before involving
themselves militarily with the United States.
Two submarines were dispatched to the Swedish coast. Both were instructed to
use their sonar-defeating equipment to penetrate the Swedish coastal defense
zone. Next, one was to play “cat and mouse” with Swedish anti-submarine
forces; the other one was to let itself be discovered deliberately, deep inside one
of Sweden’s most sensitive naval zones. This is how the case of Soviet Subma-
rine 137 came about.
It has been portrayed as an embarrassment for Russia, but it was really the op-
posite. The Russian Sub Commander maneuvered his boat so deeply into tricky,
heavily defended waters as to make it painfully obvious that it was no accident.
Then, in a demonstration of the wry Russian sense of humor, he carefully
nudged his boat onto some rocks and just waited to be discovered. After a
while, the “sub” was discovered—not by the Swedish Navy but by a fishing
boat! At the purely professional military level, it would be hard to imagine any-
thing more embarrassing for the Swedish Navy, or more sobering. Just to make
sure though, the other Russian “sub” started through its paces as soon as Sub
137 had been found on the rocks. The second “sub,” deep within Swedish terri-
torial waters, de-activated its sonar-defeating equipment and then prowled
around as noisily as possible until a Swedish Anti-submarine Warfare Task
Group arrived. The Swedes were all set to start dropping depth charges on the
seemingly trapped “sub.” Then the sonar-defeating equipment was turned on
again and the “sub” simply vanished.
Taken all together, the total experience was a downright scary one for the
Swedish Navy. The Russians allowed the Swedes to save face in the public eye;
but it was the Swedes, not the Russians, who heaved a sigh of relief when So-
viet Submarine 137 returned to international waters two days ago. The Russians
are hoping the Swedes will not involve themselves in America’s suicidal first-
strike posture; but, my friends, they will!
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
519
Now it’s time for my LAST MINUTE SUMMARY. As I say these words, an
American space shuttle is once again being prepared for launch. We’re told that
it is the shuttle “Columbia,” but that shuttle was destroyed by Russia last April.
Instead, it is the training shuttle “Enterprise,” relabeled Columbia, that now sits
on the pad at Cape Canaveral.
According to my latest information, NASA still plans to carry out an aborted

mission of some type. It may be an aborted take-off as I first reported last June,
or it may be an abbreviated orbital mission; but in any event, the lives of the
astronauts are in very grave danger!
Whatever NASA does, it will be a desperate gamble. They are trying to keep up
public appearances so that their military space shuttle plans will not be halted;
but Russian Cosmospheres are once again on patrol along the Cape Canaveral
launch corridor. This shuttle is carrying no military payload, so perhaps they
may not interfere—PERHAPS. No matter what happens when the space shuttle
takes off, one thing is certain: the Government will not tell you and me the truth
about it. The space shuttle could be a tool for peace, but our Leaders are trying
to use it instead to prepare for war—nuclear war!
Like the Sadat assassination, the MX missile decision, and America’s worsen-
ing economy, the Space Shuttle Program is launching us into disaster!
What we lack most of all these days is the truth. Our Rulers have built their
power on lies. So long as we accept those lies, we remain within their power to
use and destroy us. They walk in darkness, and they try to keep us in the dark.
The only way to break free, the ONLY WAY, is to SEEK AND CHERISH
THE “TRUTH.” The light of the Truth takes away the power of darkness and
lies. The Truth is the Sword of our Lord Jesus Christ, and with it mankind can
yet be free and live in peace. The choice, my friends, is up to you and me.
520
Audio Letter 70
December 27, 1981
Two days ago my family and I joined millions of other Christians world-wide
in celebrating the birth of our Lord Jesus Christ. It was a day of family togeth-
erness, of worship, and of joy. That’s how it is for those to whom our Lord
Jesus Christ is the whole reason for Christmas; and yet, in our modern world,
the holiday called “Christmas” means different things to different people. To
some it’s just an excuse to give and receive gifts without any deeper meaning.
To others, the Christmas season is mainly a chance to make money from the
bonanza of gift buying. And, yes, there are some among us to whom Christmas
is a sad time—parents who cannot afford any gifts for their children, children
who have no parents, lonely shut-ins to whom no one brings a word of Christ-
mas cheer. All of us know about these things. They are the facts of life.
Christmas, like the rest of life, is largely what we make of it; and, my friends, in
our modern world there are evil forces who have learned to use the holiday sea-
son to do us harm. It has happened before, many times. Those who bear us ill
will know they can always count on us to be preoccupied and vulnerable during
the holiday season.
This began to be used against us as long ago as 1913. That year the United
States Congress ostensibly passed the legislation creating the FEDERAL
RESERVE SYSTEM. There was intense opposition to this unConstitutional
privately-owned central banking system, but no matter. Those who wanted it
simply waited until just before Christmas. Most Congressmen had gone home,
including most of the opponents to the plan within Congress. The public at
large neither knew nor cared about obscure financial legislation at that moment.
Everyone was too busy thinking about Santa Claus, parties, and Christmas din-
ner to come. And so as its Christmas gift to America in 1913, a small group of
men—less than a legal quorum in Congress—slipped through the Federal Re-
serve Act! Ever since that time the United States economy has suffered
continuously from that Christmastime act of betrayal.
In military affairs, too, the Christmas holiday season is always a dangerous

time. That is when we are most likely to have our guard down, vulnerable to
521
surprise attack. On December 6, 1941, thousands of American Servicemen at-

tended pre-Christmas parties in and around Honolulu, Hawaii. Everything was
peaceful, and life was good. There were no military alerts and all was calm. Af-
ter all, it was almost Christmas. But the following morning, Sunday morning
December 7, 1941, more than 2000 of those Servicemen lost their lives. From
that day onward the name “Pearl Harbor” has been seared forever into the mind
of every American.
Yes, my friends, that’s how it’s been time after time in the past, and that’s how
it’s been once again during the holiday season of 1981. We are especially vul-
nerable this time because our usual holiday preoccupation has been
compounded by mounting economic worries. During this holiday season, my
friends, not one but three major crises have been set in motion. All three are
helping to bring the world one step closer to NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
Topic #1—THE CHRISTMAS CRISES FOR NUCLEAR WAR ONE
Topic #2—THE AMERICAN SPACE SHUTTLE FAILURE NO. 2
Topic #3—A NEW SCANDAL OVER AMERICA’S DISAPPEARING

GOLD.
Topic #1—During the holiday season of 1981 from around Thanksgiving until
now, three major crises have besieged us. First, there were all those stories
about the alleged Libyan “hit men” bent on assassinating top leaders of the
United States Government; Second, there was the military crackdown in Po-
land; and Third, as soon as world eyes were riveted on Poland, came Israel’s
illegal annexation of the Syrian Golan Heights.
On the surface these three crises may appear to be unrelated; but they are all
closely related, my friends, and they are not what they appear to be. Each is a
consequence of the complex secret war plan of the joint military junta of the
United States and Israel!
Ever since early spring of this year 1981 I’ve been reporting on this war plan.
It’s the brain child of the American Bolsheviks and their Zionist cohorts in Is-
rael. Briefly stated, the plan is to engulf the world in a swirling caldron of crises
so widespread that it will be impossible to prevent nuclear war.
522
Audio Letter 70
The conflicts are intended to gradually escalate until the time is ripe. Then an
American nuclear first strike will be launched against Russia. Nuclear war will
break out in such a way that it will appear to be accidental. America’s nuclear
forces will not realize that they are firing the first shots of nuclear war. Instead,
they will be given false information that will trigger all-out retaliation against a
non-existent Russian attack! I have given many details about all this in earlier
AUDIO LETTER reports.
The prelude to all-out nuclear war is planned to include war in the Middle East.
In the joint war plan of the American Bolsheviks and the Israeli military plan-
ners, the Middle East war is the responsibility of Israel. In AUDIO LETTER
No. 68 I called attention to the way in which this is making Israel the eye of a
growing hurricane of violence.
The storm of crises is continuing to grow outward. Close to Israel, the top prior-
ity is to do everything possible to destroy the Camp David Peace Accords, so
called. That’s why the entity known as President Sadat of Egypt was assassi-
nated on October 6. Likewise the Camp David Accords were the real target in
the Golan Heights annexation. I’ll come back to that later on.
Moving farther out from Israel, the whirlpool of trouble has now engulfed
Libya to the west and Poland to the north. Soon we’ll see new flare-ups of ma-
jor trouble to the east of Israel in Iran, and to the south of Israel in Saudi
Arabia.
LIBYA—CRISIS NO. 1
The first of the three Christmas crises to erupt was the one over Libya. Actually
the first trial balloons about possible Libyan assassination teams were floated in
early November; but it was not until around Thanksgiving, the beginning of the
holiday season in America, that Libya suddenly became the lead story in
American news reports. By early December we were being told that a group of
three to six “hit men” were thought to be in the United States. It was claimed
that they were gunning for the President and several other top Government offi-
cials. We were told that the threat was expected to be greatest up until
Christmas, and there was a big display of increased security for possible targets.
Up to now, the alleged Libyan assassination threat has not been carried out; but,
my friends, that does not mean that the Libyan crisis is over. In my last AUDIO
LETTER No. 69 I reported that Libya’s Colonel Khadafy could be programmed
to behave like a madman. That’s exactly what is being done right now. You’ll
be hearing more about the Libyan crisis in the days to come. When you do, be
523
sure to keep your eye on the ball. Supposedly Khadafy wants revenge against
the United States. He wants revenge for the two Libyan jets which were shot
down last August, supposedly by jets from the supercarrier U.S.S. Nimitz.
My friends, the controlled major media are delivering a clever dose of psycho-
logical conditioning to us all. What they seem to be telling us is: Watch out for
a possible assassination of top American officials; but at the subconscious level,
they are slipping in other major ideas. One idea is: Watch out for Libyan re-
venge of some kind for the Nimitz episode of last August. With revenge as the
excuse, Libya’s Khadafy can be programmed to do almost anything and what-
ever it is, it will be big and it will help push us closer to nuclear war.
As I say these words, Libya has been pushed into the background in most
American minds. The Libyan crisis has not run its course, but it has been up-
staged by a seemingly greater crisis—the military crackdown in Poland.
POLAND—CRISIS NO. 2
For three years now the old Bolsheviks from Russia, who now control Amer-
ica’s military policies, have been trying to trigger revolution in Poland. They
first attempted to do this by subverting the Roman Catholic Church. In AUDIO
LETTER No. 37 in August 1978 I gave a warning that there would shortly be
turmoil in the Vatican. An attempt was about to be made to turn the Catholic
Church strongly anti-Russian in its policies. Barely a month later the newly
elected pope, John Paul I, died unexpectedly. He had been murdered, as I re-
ported in AUDIO LETTER No. 39. His replacement, who became known as
Pope John Paul II, was the first non-Italian pope in 455 years, and he came
from troubled Poland. The Bolsheviks within the Vatican who engineered his
election wanted only his potentially anti-Russian image, not the man himself;
and so he, too, was done away with by poisoning and replaced by a “double” on
November 21, 1978. The new “actor pope” then began issuing a steady stream
of stiff statements against alleged Russian repression of Poland.
In January 1979 I reported that the plan of the American Bolsheviks to use their
power in the Vatican was moving fast. That month in AUDIO LETTER No. 42
I gave the details of the Bolshevik plan to set off what would be known as the
“Pope’s Revolution” in Poland. The key to that plan was to be a visit by the ac-
tor pope to Poland the following May. The highly emotional 900th anniversary
of St. Stanislaus’ martyrdom was to be used as the perfect occasion to set off
revolution. The Russian and Polish authorities were able to head off the Pope’s
Revolution plan almost at the last minute. Russian Intelligence was able to re-
place the Bolshevik actor pope with their own “double.” Immediately the
524
Audio Letter 70
Vatican agreed to a one-month postponement in the papal trip. That eliminated

the emotionally-charged atmosphere of the original date, and the trip went off
without a hitch.
Having had their Vatican intrigues foiled for the moment, the Bolshevik plan-
ners here in America started down a different route. Their agents within Poland
started agitation for an independent labor union to be known as SOLIDARITY.
In the old days when the Bolsheviks themselves controlled both Russia and Po-
land, an independent labor union would have been unthinkable; but things have
changed and are still changing in Russia and in Poland. Solidarity was granted a
charter by the Polish government in August 1980. The Bolsheviks here in
America had hoped that the demand for a union charter would, in itself, lead to
confrontation with the Polish government. When that did not happen, Solidarity
then began a relentless drive of demands, strikes, and more demands without
letup.
Well over a year ago I gave a warning that Solidarity had only one purpose; and
that purpose, contrary to claims, was not to serve the Solidarity rank and file
but to use them. Solidarity was created for the purpose of making conditions
steadily worse in Poland until an unavoidable confrontation was created with
the government. This month it finally happened.
On December 12 the Solidarity ruling council called for a nation-wide referen-

dum by January 15. It was to decide, in effect, whether the present government
of Poland would be allowed to continue at all; and the head of Solidarity, Lech
Walesa, was quoted as saying: “I now favor confrontation with the govern-
ment.” In effect, Solidarity had dared the government to either clamp down or
cease to exist. Barely 24 hours later martial law was declared in Poland.
Here in the United States news reports and official statements are making the
Polish situation look as bad as possible even though it’s actually easing right
now.
Overemphasis/Dramatization—Poland-Lebanon Comparison
In important ways, my friends, the present situation in Poland reminds me of

what happened in Lebanon back in 1958. As you may recall, there was a flare-
up of trouble at that time which appeared to threaten the pro-Western govern-
ment there. President Eisenhower ended up sending in the United States
Marines at the height of the crisis. The 1958 Lebanon crisis was big news here
in America. News reports here conveyed the impression of a major crisis with
widespread violence and the very fate of Lebanon hanging in the balance. Mar-
525
tial law was declared in Lebanon, just as it was two weeks ago in Poland; and
just like Poland today, Lebanon in 1958 was under a dusk-to-dawn curfew.
Based on the major media news reports here, most Americans were led to be-
lieve that the 1958 Lebanon crisis was a virtual reign of terror; but, my friends,
that impression was far from the truth. It was the result of deliberate over-
dramatization by the media. Yes, there was a crisis of sorts, that much was true,
but the grain of truth was all but lost among the scare tactics and the reports by
the controlled major media here in the United States. I think it’s worth taking a
few moments to describe what really happened in Lebanon in 1958 and how a
false picture of it all was painted by the American media because today the
same kind of overdramatization is taking place in the reports about Poland; and
if we Americans fall for it, we will be dragged one step closer to NUCLEAR
WAR ONE.
My own involvement in the 1958 Lebanon crisis began shortly before any
fighting had broken out. I was in private legal practice here in Washington at
the time but I had become involved in Intelligence work many years before.
From time to time I was called upon to undertake Intelligence activities, making
use of my civilian status as a cover.
The Lebanon crisis was one of those times. I was contacted by an operative of
the CIA and told that an imminent crisis was brewing in Lebanon. I was given a
briefing on the situation to the extent that the operative had been able to piece it
together. There were indications that a full-fledged civil war was a possibility.
The United States Government wanted to prevent that partly because of the
very major investments in Lebanon by American business and banking inter-
ests. The operative had approached me because I knew Lebanon. I had been
there before.
My mission was to go there and find some way to defuse the crisis. By the time
I arrived there, tensions were building between the two opposing Lebanese fac-
tions. The basic disagreement between them had to do with Egypt’s then
President Nasser. Nasser wanted the Arab world to unify and throw off all ves-
tiges of Western colonialism. To do that he had turned east for help, to Russia.
Nasser’s appeals to his Arab brothers were very powerful. In Lebanon this led
to conflict between a pro-Nasser faction and an anti-Nasser group who pre-
ferred the status quo. It was a conflict between minorities. Most of the people of
Lebanon were not actively involved on either side. Even so it did carry the
seeds of real trouble if allowed to get out of hand.
526
Audio Letter 70
The conflict consisted mostly of kidnappings, both real and rumored; sabotag-
ing of roads with oil and nails; and threats and counterthreats arising out of old
family feuds. There were also a few scattered snipers, and some rumors of tor-
ture but those were never proven to have taken place. No pitched battles took
place. The real problem was a growing atmosphere of fear and distrust.
Lebanon has never maintained a standing army of any significance. For that
reason, Lebanon’s then President Chamoun appealed to the United States for
help in keeping order in Lebanon. President Eisenhower responded by sending
in the Marines.
Since I was already in Lebanon by then, I went down to the beach to watch the
landing. The landing by the Marines was totally without opposition and entirely
peaceful. In fact, as Marines waded ashore they were greeted on the beach by
young peddlers hawking Coca-Cola; but for the public consumption back home
here in America, scenes like that were edited out from television and photo-
graphic news coverage. Instead, the situation was dramatized. United States
news agency photographers and TV crews got groups of Marines to pose in
dramatic menacing gestures. They pointed their guns at imaginary enemies, and
in some cases even fired them to please the media crews. Civilians stood
around on the beach watching it all after being shooed away from camera range.
Some took out cameras to take snapshots of the goings-on but were brusquely
told that their cameras would be confiscated if they took any pictures.
I was staying at the AUB Club, and one evening after that I was having dinner.
As I was enjoying my kibbeh I became aware of an unusual conversation be-
tween two men at the next table. One was a reporter for the Associated Press,
the other was his editor—that is, his boss. The reporter had written a story
about the situation in Lebanon, and the AP editor was telling him how he
wanted it changed. He went through it line by line from start to finish. As I
eavesdropped I could tell that the reporter’s original story had been accurate
and truthful. For example, he reported that the only menace which the Marines
had encountered so far was diarrhea until they learned not to drink the water.
He also described how the Marines were spending a lot of their time on the
beach sunbathing, reading novels, and eyeing the beautiful girls in bikinis. And,
my friends, that’s how it really was. I saw it for myself. But the editor was not
happy with that truthful news story. Instead, he was instructing the reporter on
how to rewrite it to give a different version by using dramatic words. He struck
out words, he deleted sentences, he changed words, inserted phrases, rewrote
paragraphs. By the time he was finished, the editor had twisted the reporter’s
story into one that painted a picture of violence, torture, and a warlike atmos-
phere that did not exist.
527
Having seen and heard these media distortions in progress, I went on about my
business. In the end, the Lebanon crisis was resolved very simply by dollar di-
plomacy. By disbursing $15-million dollars among the leaders of the so-called
warring factions, the United States Government snuffed out the conflict. As one
factional leader told me after the settlement agreement had been reached, quote:
“For another $15-million dollars I would start another war.”
When I got back home from Lebanon I was astonished to learn that my rela-
tives and friends had been worried sick about me. They didn’t know the details
of my trip but they knew I had gone to Lebanon for some reason and they had
feared for my life. When I read the newspaper clippings which they had saved
for me, I could see why. The media had indeed painted a totally false picture of
the Lebanon situation. The American major media had deliberately distorted
their reports, even telling outright lies in order to overdramatize.
My friends, the same thing is going on right now in the reports here in America
on the Polish situation. The controlled major media, working hand in glove
with our Bolshevik government, are seizing like vultures on every scrap of
negative news—every ugly rumor that they can dredge up, every unconfirmed
statement, speculation, and outright lies by the Bolsheviks here—all this in or-
der to create the impression here in America of an extreme crisis and inhumane
oppression in Poland. The American Bolsheviks are trying to goad Russia into
invading Poland. Meanwhile they are so frustrated that they are trying to con-
vince us that we ought to consider martial law as the same thing as a Russian
invasion. Can you imagine?
Tough talk by the Reagan entity is making matters worse and scaring non-
Bolshevik government officials here in Washington; and night after night on the
news we hear a drumbeat of Poland, Russia, Poland, Russia, Poland, Russia.
We’re being brainwashed for war, my friends; and as in all brainwashing, facts
do not matter. It is only the impact that counts and the perception!
All of this is not to say that the situation in Poland is not grave or that there is
no crisis there. Of course there is a crisis. When the so-called Solidarity union
was created in Poland over a year ago, I reported that its entire purpose was to
bring on a crisis like this; and the Bolsheviks here who helped to create Solidar-
ity in Poland are using the crisis to help further set the stage for thermonuclear
war against Russia.
The present situation in Poland seems to have been stopped short of outright
revolution for the moment; but a revolution is essential in order to bring on
528
Audio Letter 70
Russian intervention which, in turn, will be one of the pretexts for war to come.
And so the Bolsheviks here are once again at work within the Vatican, and now
control it! If the American Bolsheviks get their way, a new version of the
Pope’s Revolution plan is on the horizon in Poland. Already the Pope and Po-
land are linked daily in the news.
GOLAN HEIGHTS ANNEXATION—CRISIS NO. 3
The news of martial law in Poland reached the West early Sunday December
13. The very next day the Begin government in Israel launched the third
Christmas crisis. On that day the Israeli government announced its surprise de-
cision to annex the Golan Heights.
The Golan Heights lie along the northeast corner of Israel’s border with Syria,
and are Syrian territory. They’ve been occupied by Israeli troops ever since the
1967 war and more recently by Israeli civilian settlements, but under every rule
of international law the Golan Heights area belongs to Syria. As always, the
Begin government defended its actions in arrogantly self-righteous terms as it
made a mockery of the rule of law!
World-wide the reaction was universal condemnation of Israel, and within Is-
rael itself there was also bitter criticism.
Then on December 18 the United States announced that it was suspending

(quote) “indefinitely” the allegedly new strategic cooperation agreement with
Israel. In response Israel canceled altogether the new agreement with America.
By mutual agreement behind closed doors, the United States and Israel are
striking an arm’s-length pose in public. This is to free Israel’s hands to act
without restraint later on.
Earlier this week former Israeli Prime Minister Rabin summed it up with the
words, quote:
“Annexing the Golan Heights is the beginning of the end of Camp David.”
Rabin resigned as Prime Minister on April 7, 1977, because he wanted no part

of the war plans then being developed.
The joint war plan of the American Bolsheviks and the Zionists in Israel is still
on track, my friends. They are shooting for Middle East war to break out before
the end of summer 1982! From there, step by step they plan to make the con-
flict escalate with other crises continuing to multiply world-wide. It may take
529
many more months after that, but they are confident that they will reach their
final goal—thermonuclear war by the United States against Russia. That, my
friends, is what the Christmas crises of this holiday season are really all about.
Topic #2—When I recorded AUDIO LETTER® No. 69 early last month on

November 8, America was waiting for the second space shuttle mission to be
launched. NASA was telling the public that a mission of 5-1/2 days was
planned; but I reported that the real plan was for an abbreviated flight. One pos-
sibility still being considered was the aborted take-off plan which I had first
revealed five months earlier in AUDIO LETTER No. 65; but in my LAST
MINUTE comments last month I reported that another plan had also surfaced
consisting of an abbreviated orbital mission. Four days later just after 10:00
A.M. November 12 the second space shuttle launch took place from Cape Ca-
naveral, Florida, and that afternoon just seven hours after launch it was
announced that the flight was going to be cut short. The secret plan for an ab-
breviated mission was under way. As an excuse NASA pretended that a faulty
fuel cell was responsible.
My friends, the abbreviated space shuttle mission of last month was the legacy
of the total disaster which engulfed the first shuttle flight last April. Last April
and again last month we saw and heard no part of the real shuttle flight except
the Florida take-off. The shuttle Columbia disaster last April was so crushing
and the NASA cover-up so elaborate that I devoted my entire AUDIO LETTER
No. 64 to that topic. The same theatrical techniques that were used to fool the
public last April were used again last month so I’ll not go into all of that again,
but I do want you to know what the military shuttle team tried to do last month
and how it turned out.
Last April we watched the shuttle “Columbia” take off from Florida—but it
was a different shuttle called the “Enterprise” which landed in California. The
Enterprise had been re-labeled Columbia for purposes of deception.
The Enterprise was a very special shuttle, unlike the Columbia or the three
other shuttles which secretly exist. The Enterprise was a training shuttle with its
cargo bay filled with rocket fuel tanks. Launched from the top of an airborne
747, the Enterprise was able to make short suborbital flights into space, but due
to its fuel tanks it could carry no payload in its cargo bay.
In the wake of the secret space shuttle disaster last April, the military shuttle
planners sent the “Enterprise” to Florida, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No.
65. Originally they were simply trying to buy time. But time is going by fast
because the American Bolsheviks are on an accelerated timetable to bring on
530
Audio Letter 70
war! Arguments broke out among the military shuttle planners over the original
plan to throw away a launch just to keep up appearances. A scheme was finally
cooked up to use the Enterprise itself last month for a military mission.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 69 I reported that a pretended computer problem

would be an important factor in the deliberately shortened second shuttle flight.
Sure enough, the evening before the launch there was a sudden flurry of activity
at Cape Canaveral. Supposedly a data processing module aboard the shuttle—
that is, part of its computer system—was misbehaving. We were told that a re-
placement was flown in, and we saw workmen rushing to install something
aboard the shuttle. It was all going on literally at the last minute, just before the
large external tanks started being loaded with rocket fuel.
My friends, the last-minute rush at Pad 39-A that evening of November 11 was
not to load a computer module as we were told. Instead, special photo recon-
naissance equipment was installed in the rear deck of the crew compartment. It
was arranged to look out of the two overhead windows. The Enterprise was un-
able to carry a spy satellite in its cargo bay, as I mentioned earlier, so instead
the Enterprise itself was turned into a spy satellite. The makeshift spy apparatus
installed in the crew compartment rear deck was not as good as that of a regular
spy satellite, but the military planners here are desperate.
It will soon be four years since Russia finished destroying all of America’s spy
satellites with her fleet of Killer Satellites. The military shuttle team were hop-
ing to use “surprise” last month in order to get at least a little bit of
reconnaissance over Russia. It was hoped that the Russians would consider the
Enterprise to be no threat since it could not carry anything in its cargo bay.
NASA also did everything it could to convince the Russians that a non-
threatening orbit would be used last month. Finally, the launch time was shifted
by about 2-1/2 hours on the morning of November 12. That was intended to
make it hard for any Russian Cosmos Interceptors to readjust their orbits to at-
tack the Enterprise.
This last item, my friends, reflects a deadly Intelligence error being made by the
United States military shuttle planning team. They know about Russia’s orbital
cosmos interceptors, the Killer Satellites. They also know about the first gen-
eration cosmospheres, Russia’s Levitating Weapons Platforms. Both were first
deployed about four years ago. The American planners know that the space
shuttle can outrun the first-generation Cosmospheres, therefore they believe
that the orbiting cosmos interceptors are the main threat to the shuttle.
531
What they do not know so far is that Russia now has a small fleet of semi-
experimental second-generation cosmospheres. Last April there were seven in
operation. Now there are at least eight. These new cosmospheres called “Super
Heavies” or “Jumbos” can outrun and outlift our space shuttle. The Russians
gave NASA a very spectacular hint about their existence last April, as I detailed
in AUDIO LETTER No. 64.
There are some in America’s Intelligence community who have correctly inter-
preted what happened, but the Bolsheviks here who control America’s military
space program are refusing to believe it. They are explaining away the frag-
ments of Intelligence about the new Russian Jumbo cosmospheres and thereby
guaranteeing their own failure.
When the “Enterprise,” relabeled Columbia, took off from Florida last month
there were no human pilots aboard. It was a suicide mission. The Enterprise fol-
lowed an evasive, curving launch, just as the Columbia did last April. It headed
far to the north toward a near polar orbit. When it passed over Russia the Enter-
prise was to be upside down with its spy camera staring downward through the
crew compartment windows. Five Jumbo cosmospheres were on hand and kept
pace with the shuttle as it climbed toward orbit; but when they notified Moscow
of the course it was taking, they were told not to fire. Instead the Russian Bal-
listic Missile Defense Forces were alerted. The Russians know war is coming
and they decided to use the approach of the shuttle as a test drill.
Nearly two years ago I reported that Russia was preparing to deploy a new anti-
ballistic missile system. It’s based on charged particle beam weapons fired from
modified supersonic TU-144 Jet Transports. On November 12 a squadron of
TU-144s were scrambled to intercept and shoot down the Enterprise. The
Jumbo cosmospheres continued pacing the shuttle from a distance as a backup
if the TU-144s should fail—but they did not fail. The Enterprise swept down-
ward from the north across the strategic Kola Peninsula. As it crossed over the
White Sea the big jets began firing upward with their beam weapons at the
shuttle far above. The third beam blast tore through the midsection of the shut-
tle and it broke in half just behind the crew compartment and disintegrated.
Here in the United States NASA went ahead with its made-for-television space
movies and followed the pre-planned script for a shortened mission. They knew
within an hour after launch that the Enterprise had been destroyed. Having
learned about Russia’s plans last April to create an international incident with a
crashed shuttle, they wanted to complete the flight in the world’s eyes quickly.
532
Audio Letter 70
The shuttle landing at Edwards Air Force Base, California, on November 14

was a replay of the show we saw last April. And when I say “replay,” my
friends, I mean it literally. Those long distance telephoto shots of the shuttle
swooping in from the stratosphere were the same ones that we saw last April.
NASA merely fed video tapes of the long distance scenes from last April to the
networks and added a fresh narrative to them. The only part of the landing that
was live last month was the terminal portion which could be seen from the
ground. The shuttle we saw land, my friends, was one of the secret new shuttles
from White Sands. It had been carried aloft by the launch 747 aircraft, boosted
to a modest speed and altitude by a pair of solid fuel booster rockets and then
swooped down to delight the crowd.
As of now, NASA claims to be planning the third shuttle flight for March 1982,
just three months from now. And, my friends, this time the launch may well
take place on schedule or close to it. The embarrassing quandary of what to do
with the Enterprise is now over with.
Now a new shuttle, the third we have seen with the name “Columbia” on it, is
at Cape Canaveral. Its cargo bay awaits a new secret military pay load. My
friends, this shuttle has been modified. It is armed for battle in space, but the
Bolshevik military planners here refuse to understand what they are really up
against—and so at Cape Canaveral another tragedy is now in the making!
Topic #3—For eight years now the powers that be here in America have kept a
blackout on the covered up FORT KNOX GOLD SCANDAL in our allegedly
free press, but outside the United States there is a new upsurge of journalistic
interest in what has happened to our gold. Unlike the controlled American ma-
jor media, some foreign reporters have started asking questions again, and some
of them don’t like the answers they are getting from the United States Treasury
Department.
Earlier this month in its December 15, 1981 issue, a nationally circulated tab-
loid called The Globe published a cover story about our missing gold. It was
titled appropriately “66-BILLION DOLLARS IN GOLD GONE FROM FORT
KNOX.”
The Globe appears on newsstands and supermarkets and drug stores all over the
United States but its editorial control lies outside the American blackout, in
Canada. And just two weeks ago on Sunday December 13 an even harder-
hitting article was published in England in The Sunday Express of London. It
was titled: “UNITED STATES PROBES FORT KNOX ROBBERY.” The arti-
cle, written by correspondent David Markham, begins, quote:
533
“The American Gold Commission in Washington will this week begin an ex-
amination of Treasury documents to decide whether 7000 tons of gold, enough
to fill 300 lorries, has been stolen from Fort Knox, the world’s biggest and most
protected bullion store.”
The article then reviews the basic charges which I have made together with my
friend Mr. Edward Durell, and it mentions that the Treasury is trying to refute
our charges by providing certain documents to the Gold Commission. The arti-
cle then zeros in on the question of the missing 165-million ounces of Fort
Knox gold that I reported on in the spring of this year. If you will recall, I urged
all my listeners to send Mailgrams to the entity President Reagan last spring
demanding that this be looked into immediately. Based on glaring conflicts
among the Treasury’s own documents, this staggering amount of gold disap-
peared without a trace from 1961 to 1971.
Those of you who did as I asked last spring received your own evidence that
this Administration, like those before it, is sitting on the Gold Scandal. They’re
continuing to cover it up, and the replies you received did not answer the ques-
tion of the missing 165-million ounces of Fort Knox gold.
The London Sunday Express article which I mentioned a moment ago focused
in on that awesome amount of missing gold. They asked the Treasury Depart-
ment to explain it, and now listen to the incredible reply they received. Quoting
once again from the article:
“At the Treasury Department in Washington Jerry Nisenson, Deputy Director

of Gold Market Activities said: ‘We have investigated the claims of Dr. Beter
and his supporters and we contend that the gold was not stolen. There is no
cover-up. They have misinterpreted our books. The gold was being refined into
better quality gold and those ounces just went up the chimney.’”
My friends, if anyone swallows that explanation then I give up. Three hundred
(300) truckloads of gold went up the chimney?? If it did, then enough gold dust
should have settled out of the air to gold-plate New York City.
The United States Treasury Department is continuing its cover-up of what The
London Sunday Express article says, quote:
“would amount to the biggest theft in criminal history.”
534
Audio Letter 70
My friends, they are lying, and because they are lying the Fort Knox Gold
Scandal refuses to die. One might think that the forces behind the ransacking of
Fort Knox might want to lay low for a while under the circumstances; but No.
Those who stole the Fort Knox gold have so far been powerful enough to keep
it under wraps. They are so arrogant that they believe they can never be
stopped, and so they are now compounding the felony with a new Fort Knox-
style gold theft! It’s going on right now as I say these words. The target this
time is the United States Treasury Assay Office in New York City. The New
York Assay Office is the Treasury’s second largest depository for gold. Having
successfully robbed Fort Knox, which is the biggest depository, the New York
Assay Office is next in line.
In late October rumors circulated briefly in New York City that the so-called
Reagan Administration plans to close the Assay Office. For that reason, the ru-
mors said that the gold there might be moved out and taken to the West Point
Depository up the Hudson River from New York. An article about it was pub-
lished in the New York Daily News for October 27, 1981. Treasury officials
immediately denied it all, saying no shipments of gold out of the New York As-
say Office were imminent. But as usual, my friends, they lied.
At 10:00 P.M. Saturday night November 7, 1981, a secret meeting got under
way at the New York Assay Office. Those present included: Donna Pope, Di-
rector of the Mint; Dr. Alan Goldman, Deputy Director of the Mint; James
Edwards, Officer in Charge at the West Point Depository; New York Assay Of-
fice employees, and others. The entire group remained at the Assay Office
overnight. Then at 5:00 A.M. the following Sunday morning, November 8, they
departed. They were accompanying the first secret shipment of gold out of the
New York Assay Office ‘reportedly’ bound for the West Point Depository. The
shipment consisted of four (4) truckloads totaling 2.18-million ounces. Ship-
ments have been continuing like this ever since. Every shipment leaves in the
dead of night in elaborate secrecy. Everyone at the Assay Office who knows
about the shipments has been sworn to secrecy about them. Meanwhile the gold
stock there is being depleted rapidly—four (4) tractor-trailer loads at a time. I
can report that shipments of four truckloads each left the New York Assay Of-
fice on December 10 and December 11. The combined total amounted to 144
skids with 80 bars each, or over 11,500 bars totaling over 4-1/2 million ounces.
Additional shipments of four truckloads each were scheduled for December 17
and 20 according to my latest information. There is a mad rush to complete all
shipments before the end of the year! New York Assay Office employees who
see all this going on are being given the excuse that this is being done, quote
“for security reasons”; but that, my friends, is ridiculous.
535
In spite of the security problems at the Assay Office which I have discussed in
the past, security at West Point is vastly inferior. The West Point Depository
was never designed for gold bullion safekeeping. It’s mainly for the storage of
pennies. It’s not designed as a fortress like the New York Assay Office. There’s
no high-security gold vault at West Point. There are no iron gates, no bars, no
military guards; and unlike the New York Assay Office which is situated in
Lower Manhattan, the West Point Depository is isolated, totally isolated. Any-
thing could go on there and no one would know.
The point is this, my friends: the gold is supposedly being moved secretly to a
location without adequate storage facilities and with very low security. In other
words, it’s being made easy to steal; and, my friends, I have already received
preliminary reports that some of this gold has already begun going to places
other than the West Point Depository!
Meanwhile, day by day the economic news becomes more gloomy. America’s
economy, once the strongest in the world, is coming apart at the seams. The
United States dollar, once as good as gold, is shriveling before our very eyes. In
pretended response our leaders are giving us nothing but theories, rhetoric, po-
litical grandstanding, and hypocrisy. They continue to paper over and cover up
the root causes of our economic woes.
Up to now the so-called Reagan Administration has been guilty mainly of hid-
ing the past thefts of America’s gold, but now they are compounding their guilt.
A major new gold theft scandal is brewing at the New York Assay Office. The
entity known as Ronald Reagan pretends to be upset over alleged mistreatment
of the Polish people and yet he is mistreating his own people in many ways!
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
Now it’s time for my Last Minute Summary. My friends, the Christmas crises
involving Libya, Poland, and the Israeli annexation of Syria’s Golan Heights
have nudged us one step closer to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. War preparations
continue apace involving the space shuttle and many other secret developments.
Events are speeding up. Under the circumstances, I have some comments to
make about the future of my AUDIO LETTER Intelligence report series.
As you know, I initiated my AUDIO LETTER as a monthly report on cassette

tape six and a half years ago in June 1975. Almost two years ago, in February
1980, my tape reports were interrupted by a near fatal heart attack. By the grace
of God I recovered enough to resume my AUDIO LETTER reports four months
later in June 1980. Since that time my health has continued to improve and to-
536
Audio Letter 70
day I feel that it is essentially back to normal, and yet you have probably no-
ticed that these days I am no longer recording the AUDIO LETTER on a truly
monthly basis. This is not because I am physically unable to do it; instead, it’s
because the events taking place behind closed doors have repeatedly been de-
layed in coming to fruition. Rather than give you a partial report, I have waited
to give you the full story; but now, as we draw closer and closer to war, events
are speeding up.
Some of you have asked me to release reports more often. Many of you have
also indicated your interest in receiving some type of printed report, and I can-
not ignore the fact that due to the current recession more and more people who
are interested feel that they can no longer afford a cassette tape. At the same
time we, too, are being squeezed by ever-increasing costs in this stagflation era.
I have given considerable thought to how to meet these emerging needs and I
believe the time has come for a new phase in my AUDIO LETTER Intelligence
report program.
In this new phase, my cassette tape reports will continue on a less frequent basis
and they will be joined by a completely new printed newsletter which will be
more frequent and less expensive. To be more specific, here’s what I propose to
do:
First—My basic AUDIO LETTER cassette tape reports will continue but on a
less frequent basis. My present plan is to record AUDIO LETTER No. 71 next
month, January 1982, and then quarterly after that—that is, every three months.
When I record each AUDIO LETTER tape I will try to concentrate on broad
perspectives and major basic new Intelligence.
Second—For the first time ever I now hope to inaugurate a brief printed news-
letter soon, to be known as the “AUDIO LETTER UPDATE.” My hope is to
issue the printed UPDATE report every two weeks except when I record a tape,
and two holidays per year—that is, there will be 20 printed UPDATE issues per
year. My printed UPDATE newsletter will be exactly what the name implies—
a fast update on fast-breaking events behind closed doors.
Most of the basic background you need in order to understand coming events
has already been presented in my 70 AUDIO LETTER tapes plus several
AUDIO BOOK tapes. With events now speeding up, my printed UPDATE
newsletter will refer you back to this information which is already available;
and on that basis it will bring you up to date on the latest developments.
537
Subscription prices for the new printed UPDATE newsletter will come to less
than $10.00 for three months at this time in the United States and Canada.
There will also be greatly reduced prices for multiple copies of any issue. Many
of you have told me that you want this so that you can help spread the truth to
others more quickly.
You’ll be able to subscribe in any one of three ways:
(1) You can subscribe to my AUDIO LETTER tape alone if you wish, receiv-
ing it quarterly after No. 71;
(2) Or you may subscribe to the reduced-cost printed UPDATE newsletter only,
receiving it every two weeks with six (6) exceptions throughout the year;
(3) Or you may subscribe to both, which I recommend if you can afford it. Inci-
dentally, the combined price of both subscriptions—tape plus printed UPDATE
newsletter—will be about the same as the tape alone in the past.
For those who have paid-up subscriptions to my AUDIO LETTER beyond No.
71, naturally we will make equitable arrangements to accommodate you.
My friends, our business office will be in touch with you about the details con-
cerning your subscription after I record AUDIO LETTER No. 71 next month,
but for now I wanted you to know my thinking and give you a chance to re-
spond. After a great deal of thought and consultation with my associates, I
believe that this new step may be necessary. In this way I believe I can serve
your needs as you have expressed them to me. Also, I believe this is a way to
help you to keep up with the increasing pace of life-and-death events.
Let me hear any thoughts you may have about this new plan right away by card
or letter. I want to know your reactions before I announce my final decision
about it next month in AUDIO LETTER No. 71. To make sure I get your mes-
sages as quickly as possible, please send your cards and letters to me at our
business office in Maryland. The address is: P.O. Box 276 Savage, Maryland
Zip 20763. You may enclose your thoughts to me with renewal or other orders,
but please be sure to use a separate piece of paper.
My friends, events are speeding up, and those events are leading toward
NUCLEAR WAR ONE, but my hope and prayer is that in the coming year you
and I can work together to help give the Truth of our Lord Jesus Christ a chance
in our troubled world. If we will do that, then we will all be doing our part to
help make 1982 a happy, holy, and peaceful New Year.
538
Audio Letter 70
Until the next time, God willing, this is Dr. Beter. Thank you, and may God
bless each and every one of you.
539
Audio Letter 71
January 29, 1982
On the afternoon of Wednesday January 13 there was a rare blizzard here in
Washington, D.C. Government offices and businesses closed up early to allow
workers to head home. As commuters fought their way through the worsening
snowstorm, the nation’s capital turned into one giant traffic jam. The worst
jams of all were on the bridges that led across the Potomac River to the nearby
suburbs in Virginia. Motorists inched across the snow-swept bridges in bumper-
to-bumper traffic.
Only a few hundred feet above the jam-packed bridges, jet airliners were climb-
ing into the swirling snowstorm. The planes were taking off from National
Airport nestled next to the River just south of the heart of Washington. Follow-
ing required procedures, the jets were twisting and turning to stay over the
Potomac River as they climbed.
Suddenly drivers on the twin 14th Street bridges, closest of all to the Airport,
looked up in horror. A blue, green, and white jet liner came screaming down
out of the blizzard. There was a deafening roar; a smashing of metal that shook
the bridge; a giant splash that shattered the smooth ice on the Potomac; then for
a shocked moment, silence; then pandemonium as people poured out of their
stalled cars. On the bridge there was a grizzly scene of wrecked cars. A 50-foot
span of the bridge railing was gone, and in the river below the shattered remains
of the jet liner were fast sinking out of sight. Soon special news bulletins were
flashing across the country. An Air Florida Boeing 737, Flight 90 to Tampa,
Florida, had crashed on take-off from Washington’s National Airport!
In the immediate aftermath of the tragedy, news reports focused on the heart-
rending human interest aspects of the crash. Time after time we have seen tele-
vision scenes of the make-shift rescue efforts. Few will soon forget those
numbing scenes of a precious few survivors being fished out of the icy Potomac
River. Millions were inspired by the heroism of a bystander who risked his own
life by swimming out to rescue a drowning woman. And, my friends, our Lord
Jesus Christ Himself will reward the greatest hero of all that day. He was the
crash survivor who time after time passed the rescue ring to others and then
541
perished himself. He was the man to whom the entity President Reagan referred
the following day in a New York City speech. Speaking as he was in the true
Bolshevik-Zionist capital of the United States, our alleged president misquoted
our Lord Jesus Christ in the words “Greater glory has no man.” Surely the man
who gave his life that others might live deserves a better epitaph than a politi-
cian’s preoccupation with glory. What our Lord Jesus Christ really said was:
“Greater love hath no man than this, that a man lay down his life for his
friends.” That is what our Lord Himself did nearly 2000 years ago, and that is
what the man in the water did after the crash of the Air Florida Flight 90.
My friends, the very human tragedy of the crash of Flight 90 is important all by
itself; but if we are to have any hope of avoiding even greater tragedies that are
looming ahead, we must look beyond the human-interest stories. We need the
answers to some important questions such as: Why was there a plane crash at
all that day? Why that plane? And what made it crash?
We are being led to believe that we are being given answers to those questions;
but the true answers, my friends, are far different from what you have heard up
to now!
The crash of Air Florida Flight 90 was a terrible tragedy, but it was also more
than that. It was also intended as a warning to certain powerful circles here in
the United States, and as such it was not an isolated incident but part of a much
larger pattern now taking shape.
For some five years now a secret war has been underway between the present
rulers of Russia and those of the United States. The secret war has waxed and
waned, and now it’s heating up once again. In the ongoing secret war it is now
Russia that is taking the offensive. Having put out the fuse on the Poland time
bomb at least for the moment, the Kremlin is now counterattacking against their
Bolshevik enemies here. Russia’s secret new rulers are trying to send a message
to the Bolsheviks, who have seized power here in America. The message is:
WAR DOES NOT PAY. The Russians are delivering this warning message in
many ways which are totally unsuspected by most of the public.
My friends, the Russians are once again unleashing geophysical warfare against
the United States and against some of our allies. One aspect of this geophysical
onslaught is weather warfare. The crash of Air Florida Flight 90 was brought
about in the midst of largely manmade severe weather. The Russians are also
firing warning shots across America’s bow by means of another geophysical
warfare weapon—artificial earthquakes. The Russians are also readying them-
selves for attack on another front—the economy of America and the West. This
542
Audio Letter 71
month, January 1982, the Kremlin has scored a stunning economic coup. Be-
fore the year is out the entire economy of the United States will be vulnerable to
a total collapse at Russia’s hands!
In this AUDIO LETTER I want to give you the details about the new Russian
offensive now underway. Also, I plan to resume reporting each month by
means of the AUDIO LETTER tape series. Based on the response of my com-
ments in AUDIO LETTER No. 70 last month, I believe this is the best way I
can serve you after all at this time. I will say more about that in my “Last Min-
ute Summary.”
Topic #1—THE “SIBERIAN EXPRESS” AND RENEWED RUSSIAN

GEOPHYSICAL WARFARE
Topic #2—RUSSIA’S SECRET ECONOMIC COUP IN DOLLAR ASSETS
Topic #3—THE SHIFTING ALLIANCES FOR NUCLEAR WAR ONE
Topic #1—In his famous Liberty or Death speech of March 1775, Patrick
Henry said some words that have taken on new meaning in our modern age. He
said, quote:
“Gentlemen may cry, peace, peace; but there is no peace. The war is actually
begun! The next gale that sweeps from the north will bring to our ears the clash
of resounding arms!”
Today, voices in Washington talk of keeping the peace; but today, even more
than in Patrick Henry’s day, the cries of “peace” are a sham. A secret war is un-
derway, and this month unprecedented gales have swept in from the north as
part of that secret war.
For the United States as a whole, January 1982 has been the most severe in his-
tory. Records for low temperatures have been broken by wide margins in
countless places from the Canadian border to Florida. There has been blizzard
piled on blizzard to paralyze even the northern states who are accustomed to
snow, and in vast areas of the southern United States there have been histori-
cally unprecedented blasts of sub-zero arctic air. Snowstorms, sleetstorms,
freezing rain, bitter cold—that has been the story for the eastern two-thirds of
the United States this January.
543
Meanwhile, the west coast has primarily faced a different problem—spells of

incredible rainstorms causing giant mud slides and many deaths. And caught in
between, the Rocky Mountain states have had their own unique problems.
There have been violent windstorms with winds in some areas more powerful
than most hurricanes. Only a few days ago winds reached an awesome 140
miles per hour in northern Colorado.
The National Weather Service of the United States has come up with a popular
nickname for the repeated invasions of arctic air this winter. They are calling it
the “Siberian Express,” and with good reason. Northern Siberia in the Soviet
Union is one of the coldest regions on the face of the earth. That is exactly
where the supercooled air has been coming from to spill all across North Amer-
ica; and, my friends, it has been directed here by weather modification
techniques!
Russia’s basic weapons for massive weather modification are still as I reported
nearly two years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 54. The Russians used two legs
of their secret space triad of manned strategic weapons. One leg is their fleet of
Cosmospheres which levitate in the Earth’s electromagnetic field. Using their
beam weapons they are able to guide storm systems by altering the electrical
charges in the upper atmosphere. And to set off certain types of storms, the
Russians use another leg of their secret space triad—that is, their complex of
Moon bases. The enormously powerful particle beam weapons on the moon can
be fired into the ocean to set off storms. Squadrons of Cosmospheres then take
advantage of natural weather forces to build up and guide these artificial
storms. I described the process in detail in AUDIO LETTER No. 54 so will not
repeat it again now.
As I revealed at that time, the Russians began using these new weather war
techniques against the United States that month, February 1980. The Kremlin
was counterattacking against the Carter Administration grain embargo against
Russia. The Bolsheviks here were trying to use their old favorite weapon, hun-
ger, against the Russia they used to control. Russia’s new rulers responded with
weather control designed to reduce our crops; and in February 1980 that took
the form of incredible rainstorms lashing agricultural areas of southern Califor-
nia and Arizona. The Carter Administration grain embargo continued through
the summer of 1980, and so did Russian weather modification.
Much to the surprise of long-range weather forecasters here, the summer of

1980 set records for drought and blistering heat. Crops died for lack of rain and
excessive heat; thousands of cattle died for the same reasons. In the Southwest
millions of chickens fried on their feet under the blistering heat wave; water
544
Audio Letter 71
shortages started multiplying nation-wide; and to drive the point home to our
then peanut farmer president, the peanut crop failed—something previously un-
heard of.
The Bolsheviks here still continued the grain embargo through the end of 1980.
There was about to be a change of administration, and the new administration
was expected to end the embargo; but just to make sure, the Russians kept up
the pressure. In January 1981, just one year ago, a strange cold wave hit the
United States. As the late Washington Star reported on January 13, 1981, quote:
“Siberian cold spread a record freeze across the Southeast today, dipping deep
into Florida where citrus and vegetable growers fought to save their crops
against the worst winter onslaught of the century.” That day it was announced
that 25% of Florida’s citrus crops had been killed by the freeze. The freeze had
also killed up to half of America’s supply of certain vegetables. If that news
report of a year ago has a familiar ring to it, my friends, it certainly ought to.
The strange river of arctic air that froze America’s east coast and damaged Flor-
ida’s crops one year ago this month was a product of Russian weather
modification. It was a limited taste of what could be done. It was a warning to
America’s rulers that they were courting disaster with their campaign of hunger
against Russia. Three months later the grain embargo against Russia was lifted.
In response, Russian weather war against America was terminated; and last
summer, the summer of 1981, returned to normal in terms of weather.
That is how it stood until mid-December. Then came martial law in Poland; and
by then the American Bolsheviks, who did not initially control the so-called
Reagan Administration, had regained power here in Washington. Right away
the entity President Reagan started talking about sanctions against Russia, just
as his predecessor had done over Afghanistan; and once again the new admini-
stration started saying that a new grain embargo should be considered against
Russia. This time, said the President, steps should be taken to make the em-
bargo airtight. That was enough for Russia’s new rulers. They know about the
efforts by the Reagan-Begin Axis to bring on war, and they are convinced that
the time to talk is growing very short. They are convinced that war is inevitable
between Russia and Russia’s recently expelled masters, the Bolsheviks, who
are now here in America. So in late December the Politburo agreed that the
time had come to take the offensive against the United States.
The Russian weather offensive began with a rainstorm attack against the west
coast. Using the techniques I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 54, Cosmos-
pheres were deployed partly offshore and partly inland. Those offshore,
deployed in quadrangles of four Cosmospheres each, used defocused electron
beams to set up negatively-charged vapor clouds. Inland, some distance from
545
the coast, duos of two Cosmospheres each loaded the atmosphere with posi-
tively-charged protons from defocused beam weapons. This resulted in the
movement of vast quantities of water to target areas for release as rain. The
rainstorm attack formation was set up to bring varying amounts of rainfall to
most of the west coast, especially California; but the area chosen as the primary
target was a 200-mile stretch centered on San Francisco. Their reason for se-
lecting San Francisco is very simple. Russia’s new ruling group regard the
United States as degenerate, and the most degenerate of all west coast cities in
their view is San Francisco. For several days beginning on January 5, the region
around San Francisco was drenched by unrelenting torrents of rain. It continued
until San Francisco was isolated, cut off by flood waters; and in the Santa Cruz
area south of San Francisco half a mountain side collapsed carrying with it
houses, cars and more than 20 victims. By the weekend the rainstorm attack
was tapering off.
The next weather attack was brewing in the form of a vast wave of arctic air—
the first Siberian Express was on the way. The technique used for the Siberian
Express is a new variation on the Cosmosphere techniques of AUDIO LETTER
No. 54. The Russians have now learned how to take a huge air mass from one
place in the world and transport it to another area of the planet:
First, the Russians deployed a large number of Cosmospheres, 17 squadrons in

all, over northeastern Siberia. The area covered ranged from about 105 to 170
degrees East Longitude, and Latitudes from 65 degrees northward to the Arctic
Ocean. These Cosmospheres used defocused electron beams over a period of
days to give a strong negative charge to the whole frigid air mass. The Siberian
air temperature ranged from 60 to 70 degrees below zero.
Next, a series of Cosmosphere squadrons were deployed at intervals of roughly

1000 miles across the North Pacific toward America. These Cosmosphere
squadrons, like beads on a necklace, followed a line from a point north of Japan
to the vicinity of Eureka, northern California. The Cosmospheres in this trans-
Pacific line formed the tracks for the Siberian Express air mass to follow.
Hovering at the fringes of space, they pumped out vast quantities of positive
protons to attract the Siberian air mass toward America. The negatively-charged
Siberian air was attracted eastward and also higher than normal where it moved
relatively unaffected by lower atmosphere weather patterns.
On weather maps the Siberian air masses are drawn as if they are flowing down
horizontally from Canada, but the Siberian air actually arrives by a different
route. It is pulled in over northwestern North America above the other weather;
then from the Continental Divide eastward, Cosmospheres pull it down to flood
546
Audio Letter 71
the land with supercold air. In other words, it spills all over North America
primarily from above, not by the normal horizontal path. The Siberian air
reaches here so fast by this manmade route that it does not warm up as much as
it would otherwise. The result: bone-chilling weather that has many weather-
men scratching their heads. And as a by-product of this technique, violent
windstorms are created around the edges of the downward-spilling Siberian air.
These are especially intense along the Rocky Mountains.
The first Siberian Express cold wave was timed carefully. Earlier I mentioned
the January 13, 1981 reports of a freeze that destroyed part of Florida’s crops.
This year the news on January 13, one year later to the day, a killer freeze had
once again just hit Florida, only this time it was far worse. Last January damage
amounted to some $230-million, but this time as much as 84% of the Florida
citrus and vegetable crops froze for losses of over a billion dollars.
The news of Florida’s staggering crop losses came on Wednesday January 13.
That same afternoon an Air Florida Boeing 737 tried to take off from National
Airport here in Washington. It was the ill-fated Flight 90 bound for Tampa,
Florida. Flight 90 and many others were delayed that afternoon because of the
snowstorm. The main runway, which runs north and south, was closed for over
an hour while the snow was cleaned off. Meanwhile Flight 90 and other planes
boarded their passengers and waited at the terminal. As they waited, ground
crews sprayed a kind of antifreeze solution on the planes. A surviving passen-
ger of Flight 90, himself a pilot, was quoted two days later in the Washington
Post in the words: “They were de-icing the aircraft continuously.” Finally word
came from the control tower that the runway was ready. Jet liners started pull-
ing away from the terminal, lining up to taxi out to the runway. It was still
snowing but reportedly it was a cold dry snow, much less likely to cause icing
than sleet or freezing rain. Later one of the pilots of another plane said he
thought he had seen ice on the Air Florida jet. Other pilots, though, said they
had seen no ice at all on it.
As Flight 90 waited its turn, 18 other airplanes took off without any apparent
difficulty—one was a 737 like the Air Florida jet belonging to another air line.
Unlike Flight 90, it was carrying a full load of passengers. It took off without
incident, but the Air Florida jet was destined to be less fortunate! Unknown to
the other passengers there were five important military personnel aboard. They
were members of a Special Laser Warfare Task Force assigned to the home of
the so-called Rapid Deployment Force in Florida. That is the military force, my
friends, which is undergoing highly secret preparations for the coming Middle
East war. Having engaged in meetings at the Pentagon, the men were returning
to their home base in Florida.
547
At last the Air Florida 737 took its position at the end of the runway. As it did
so, it was being tracked by a Russian Cosmosphere hovering high above the
Airport in the midst of storm clouds; it was armed with a neutron beam weapon.
At 3:59 PM the jet started its take-off roll down the runway. The Cosmosphere
waited until the jet was about half way down the runway and moving over 100
miles per hour. Then the invisible neutron beam was fired down through the
snow at the cockpit of the jet liner. In AUDIO LETTER 64 I described the ef-
fects which are produced by an intense blast of neutron radiation. It disrupts all
electrical activity. That includes the electrical activity of the human body in-
cluding the brain, the eyes, the nervous system, and the heart. When the beam
was fired at the Air Florida jet, it was expected that the pilot and copilot would
be instantly rendered unconscious or killed. That would have left the jet still
accelerating, perhaps drifting off the runway, and finally leaving the boundaries
of the small airport to plunge into the river. It would have been a very strange
crash and one very hard for Government officials here to explain away to the
public—but the Russians miscalculated. Individuals vary considerably in their
resistance to neutron radiation effects, and apparently someone in the cockpit
retained some shred of consciousness.
I cannot tell you what went on in the cockpit, but I can tell you what the plane
did. The jet continued down the runway instead of drifting off. There was also
an effort to apply the brakes, yet the engines kept going full blast. The plane
started shuddering, but the brakes could not prevent the plane from continuing
to accelerate slowly. The plane reached full take-off speed as it ran out of run-
way and rotated upward into a climb. At that point it’s believed that whoever
was at the controls may have finally blacked out. The plane was pointing up-
ward far too steeply and started mushing through the air instead of climbing
normally. No pilot or copilot would have let that continue, and yet it was never
corrected. Equally startling, the landing gear was never pulled up. Normally the
gear is lifted immediately after take-off to help streamline the plane. That
would be even more urgent if a pilot were having troubles with ice, as has been
alleged, or if a crash landing were imminent. But when the Air Florida jet
dropped out of the snowy sky that afternoon, it was still nose up and gear down,
and from brake release to impact there was never a Mayday call from Flight 90.
Five days later a Russian Cosmosphere triggered another spectacular plane

crash to continue driving home the warning to our leaders. The pride of the Air
Force, the aerial demonstration team called “The Thunderbirds,” were practic-
ing near Indian Springs Air Force Base, Nevada. They were practicing a
maneuver known as “Line Abreast Loop” in which the four T-38 jets swoop
down in a steep dive and then pull up close to the ground. It is not considered
548
Audio Letter 71
the most difficult of the Thunderbirds’ maneuvers but it does call for close co-
ordination. The leader concentrates on getting the loop just right, the other three
concentrate on following the leader precisely. That afternoon over the Nevada
desert a Cosmosphere was waiting. As the four jets screamed earthward, the
Cosmosphere waited until they neared the ground. Then the neutron beam was
fired at the cockpit of the lead plane, incapacitating the pilot. The lead plane
plowed into the desert and the other three, following the leader, did the same.
Meanwhile by that time the nation was in the grip of the second Siberian Ex-
press supercold wave. And, my friends, Russia’s geophysical warfare campaign
includes other things besides the weather.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 59, 15 months ago, I reported that Russian earth-
quake-generating cobalt bombs had been planted in the Northeast. They are
concentrated most heavily around New York City; but as I reported then, also
extend northeast into New England. Since that time additional earthquake gen-
erators have been planted, and this month they have been used twice. On the
morning of January 9 an earthquake measured at 5.9 on the Richter scale was
set off in eastern Canada near Maine. It was the worst New England earthquake
in 127 years. Nine days later, a second earthquake was set off, this time in New
Hampshire.
If there should be another earthquake soon in the Northeast, don’t be surprised

if it is even closer to New York City. The Russians are on the offensive, and
our war-crazy Rulers are refusing to heed these warnings.
Topic #2—This year of 1982 has started out with bad news on the economic
front. Inflation is said to have slackened off slightly; but as every householder
knows, it has not gone away by any means. Only a short decade ago President
Nixon declared a “National Emergency” when official inflation rates reached
only 7 to 8%. If anyone had told you then that 10% inflation was on the way,
you probably would not have believed it; yet today we are supposed to be “re-
lieved” when inflation drops to that level.
As bad as inflation is, another worry is pushing it into the background in the
minds of millions of Americans. The No. 1 worry now is that of losing one’s
job—and no wonder. Early this month it was announced that unemployment, as
officially calculated, reached 8.9% in December. Among blue-collar workers
who actually produce the nation’s goods, it is even worse. More than one out of
eight is out of work. Unemployment is worst of all in the auto industry. Offi-
cially, nearly 22% of all auto workers ended December without a job.
549
The auto industry, my friends, is not just in a recession; it’s in a depression. The
same is true of housing and construction. And as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER
No. 69, these two sectors are the keys to throwing America’s entire economy
into a DEPRESSION. We are descending deeper and deeper into the mire of
economic stagflation—that is, high inflation with high unemployment.
There’s nothing accidental about it, my friends. It’s being orchestrated by pow-
erful forces who are bent on seizing more power, and the plans were laid long
ago! That’s why I was able to give details in advance about our present woes
eight years ago in my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR.
For example, American business today is being strangled by a credit crunch, the
so-called tight money policy of the privately-owned Federal Reserve Corpora-
tion. The tight money and high interest rates, we are told, are the bitter
medicine we must take in order to cure inflation. As a result, small and me-
dium-size industries which welcomed inflation just a few short years ago are
now in distress because of it. The situation now is the one I tried to warn
against eight years ago. On page 83 of my book I expressed it this way, and I
quote:
“...in the early stages of stagflation, those industries in debt are able to pay off
their indebtedness with cheap dollars. But, in the later stages, these same indus-
tries are apt to experience a scarcity of capital...”
The White House and Capitol Hill are well aware that millions of us are hurting
badly from the worsening economic conditions; and so to make political hay,
they are all pointing fingers at one another and proclaiming themselves to be
our champions. Meanwhile, what have they done concretely to deal with the
situation? Why, of course, they are helping themselves!
Only a few days ago the Internal Revenue Service announced a tremendous
new windfall tax break for members of Congress. The new rules, which were
ordered by Congress, virtually exempt Congressmen and Senators from paying
any federal income tax. While the rest of us struggle to make ends meet, Con-
gress has once again made sure that its members do not share our plight.
Workers who have given up big chunks of their pay lately in order to save their
companies must still pay up to Uncle Sam—but not your Senator or Congress-
man! I suggest you remember that the next time you see any member of
Congress crying crocodile tears about your economic woes.
And what about the Federal Reserve Board which is responsible for setting the
high interest rates that are choking our economy? Might the nation’s private
550
Audio Letter 71
central banking system relent a bit in view of the frightening upsurge in unem-
ployment?
Federal Reserve Chairman Paul Volcker answered that earlier this week in a
speech in Las Vegas. Speaking to a convention of Home Builders, Volcker said
in effect that the interest rate crunch is doing what it is supposed to do. There-
fore, said Volcker, the Federal Reserve has no intention of lowering interest
rates and loosening up money. But then why should anyone expect anything
else from Paul Volcker? As I detailed in my book eight years ago, Volcker was
one of the prime architects of the long-range plan to ruin the dollar; and I re-
vealed more about Volcker’s role about the coming depression and war in my
very first talking tape in 1974. In that tape I mentioned Volcker’s role as one of
the prime conspirators who helped spirit away America’s gold.
On all sides, my friends, there is corruption, double dealing, lies, conflicts of

interest, and criminality in high places.
Last month I reported that a new phase of the Gold Scandal is underway. It in-
volves the movement of gold from the New York Assay Office to the insecure
West Point Depository. The so-called Reagan Administration is preparing to
close down the New York Assay Office and is giving excuses for it that make
no sense whatsoever. One such excuse is to improve security, but the security at
West Point is even worse than that of the New York Assay Office. Another ex-
cuse for moving the gold is said to be to save money, but hundreds of thousands
of dollars are being squandered at West Point because of the gold transfer. The
only real result of the gold transfer will be to make it easier to steal!
As I reported last month, one of the principals involved in implementing the

plan to shut down the Assay Office was Dr. Alan Goldman. Goldman has been
with the Bureau of the Mint since 1970, and has been its Deputy Director for
some time. The Director, Donna Pope, is a political appointee with little more
than figurehead status; therefore it’s Goldman who has really been running the
Bureau of the Mint—that is, until a few weeks ago.
There has been a very odd new development. Having helped to set the events in
motion for a shutdown of the New York Assay Office, Goldman resigned from
his top job at the Mint on December 22. Reportedly he has accepted a position
in private industry. So, what’s odd about that? Just this: the New York Assay
Office is the only Government-owned facility for refining precious metals in
the country. After it is shut down, the Reagan Administration plan is to contract
out the refining of gold and other precious metals to a private industrial con-
cern. It will be a bonanza for whoever receives the Government refining
551
contract; and Dr. Goldman, who just left the Mint for private industry, just hap-
pens to be an expert in precious metals refining.
The strange circumstances surrounding the plan to close down the New York
Assay Office are raising many questions, and those questions multiply in light
of major concerns over the shutdown plan from another source.
That source, my friends is the United States Navy. Up to now the Assay Office
has played a critical role in the Navy’s silver reclamation program. The Navy
has an ongoing requirement for silver reclamation from many tons of materials
each year. These materials include worn-out batteries, photographic supplies,
and many components of classified systems. The Navy sends these things to the
Assay Office in New York which extracts the silver and returns it to the Navy.
In addition, the silver reclamation program of the Navy generates large amounts
of precious metals by-products. These by-products include not only gold but
rare metals like platinum and iridium, which are much more valuable than gold.
The New York Assay Office does not return these precious metals by-products
to the Navy. Instead they’re returned to the Government’s strategic stockpile of
critical materials or to the Treasury. Either way these precious by-products re-
main in Government hands. The plan to close down the Assay Office has the
Navy up in arms.
Transferring the silver reclamation program into the hands of private industry
will mean that the Government will lose control of those precious metals by-
products! The Navy is convinced that the refining contractor will be in a posi-
tion to pocket large amounts of the by-products. It will be a tremendous
windfall profit for the refining contractor and could even compromise national
security. The so-called Reagan Administration claims to consider national secu-
rity its top priority yet proposes to damage it by the New York Assay Office
shutdown. Yes, a precious metals by-products profit windfall awaits the private
refining contractor. And, my friends, Dr. Alan Goldman, who has just joined
private industry, was the United States Mint’s top specialist in the area of ex-
tracting precious metals by-products.
Besides the Goldman affair, other developments are raising still more questions
about the sudden movement of gold to the isolated West Point Depository. One
of these developments is the change which is taking place in the recommenda-
tion expected soon from the United States Gold Commission.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 67 I detailed the plan which then existed for the Gold
Commission to propose a new pseudo Gold Standard for America, but in recent
weeks that plan has been changed. Instead the Administration wants the Com-
552
Audio Letter 71
mission to recommend only that a new gold coin be minted for its psychologi-
cal value. The earlier pseudo Gold Standard plan would have required that
some gold be on hand, but now the United States Government suddenly needs
to be free to sell gold secretly through intermediaries on the free market. The
reason is a stunning economic coup by Russia.
United States Intelligence operatives first picked up hints that something big
was in the works early last fall. As the information developed, the decision was
made to move the New York Assay Office gold to West Point; and earlier this
month on January 11 the dreaded Russian economic coup began to take place.
What took place that day was a secret financial transaction in Geneva, Switzer-
land—the first of many which cannot be reversed! A deal was struck which will
progressively give the Russian government a decisive economic edge over the
United States. It will give the Soviet Union devastating leverage over the
United States Treasury Department in particular and thus over the economic
fate of this country in general!
When the series of transactions which began this month have been completed, it
will give the Kremlin effective control over America’s economic structure. The
Russians will be in a position to use this unique power in any way they choose.
They can use it to disrupt the economic maneuvers of the great and powerful
forces here, if desired. They can also use it to destroy the investments and as-
sets of every person having a bank account or fund denominated in dollars, or
they can threaten America’s rulers with economic blackmail if America’s secret
war preparations are not stopped. Once the transactions now underway are
completed, those capabilities will be in Russia’s hands!
The transaction of January 11 was a huge gold sale by Russia to certain other
interests. First, Russia had placed billions of dollars worth of gold in escrow
under control of three Geneva banks. Then the buyers of the gold paid for it in
billions of dollars worth of United States Treasury securities—that is, title to
these Treasury instruments of liability was transferred to the Soviet Union. The
sale is to be only the first of many because the gold buyers control vast quanti-
ties of Treasury securities—that is, billions of dollars worth of Treasury Bills,
Notes, and Bonds. These securities bear interest and mature at specified dates.
At the maturity date the holder has the right to turn them in and receive full
payment of the principal from the Treasury Department, but usually that does
not happen. Most big holders of Treasury securities roll them over at the matur-
ity date—that is, the holder exchanges the old note or bond for a new one and
continues collecting interest. But now billions upon billions of dollars worth of
these United States Treasury securities are beginning to move into the hands of
the Russian government; and once they hold a large enough hoard of these
553
Treasury instruments, the Russians can choose not to roll them over. They can
present them to the Treasury Department and say, “Pay up.”
Intelligence circles here in the United States were notified immediately after
consummation of the first deal on January 11. In response certain Government
officials here are trying to undo the agreement by attempting to reduce the mar-
ket price of gold. To that end, gold from what little is left of America’s
decimated stockpile is being secretly sold on the open market through devious
channels; but so far this tactic has had little effect on the gold markets.
In any case, my friends, the agreement has been struck between Russia and cer-
tain Persian Gulf Arabs, and both parties have already resolved that they will
follow through even if the market price of gold drops to zero, because this fi-
nancial transaction is a rare one in the history of the world. It is based primarily
on moral grounds. Both parties believe that the United States has become hope-
lessly degenerate. In their eyes, America is Babylon; and until ‘Babylon’ falls,
the world will never know peace.
As I say these words, the clammy atmosphere of panicky fear is taking hold in
certain financial circles here. The sum total of all outstanding Treasury obliga-
tions—that is, the national debt—now stands at one trillion dollars! The Soviet
Union has now begun acquiring control of a portion of that debt. Top Treasury
officials are beginning to see the specter of calamity looming ahead. Some day
Russia may, in effect, walk into the United States Treasury as if it were a bank
and withdraw her deposits. The strain thus produced could induce other large
holders of Treasury securities to do the same out of fear of weakness in the
Treasury’s position. It could all snowball into the great-granddaddy of all bank
runs, an international run on the Treasury of the United States! The Treasury
could not possibly pay off the trillion-dollar national debt and so the Treasury
would collapse—and with it would go the entire economy of the United States,
and finally of the entire Western world.
Topic #3—Three days ago, on January 26, the entity President Reagan gave his
first “State of the Union” speech. That same day an all-day meeting took place
in Geneva, Switzerland, between the two top diplomats of America and Russia.
Secretary of State Alexander Haig and Russia’s Foreign Minister Andrei Gro-
myko met far longer than expected that day, nearly eight hours in all.
The reasons given publicly for the meeting were intentionally vague; suppos-
edly there was no particular agenda for the meeting—nothing specific to
negotiate, no clear-cut goals to be accomplished. In fact, the main comments
the two sides made to reporters beforehand were about what they intended not
554
Audio Letter 71
to discuss. Haig said he would not talk about any resumption of the SALT talks;
Gromyko said he would not talk about Poland; and at the end of the day, even
the single announced outcome of the discussions was negative. We were told
that any effort to set up an East-West summit between Reagan and Brezhnev
was being put on a back burner.
That’s how the meeting between Haig and Gromyko looked on the surface, but
behind closed doors what went on that day was far different. The meeting took
place only 15 days after Russia concluded her momentous secret financial
transaction, and it was symbolic that both Russia’s financial coup and the Haig-
Gromyko meeting took place in the same city, Geneva.
The meeting of Haig and Gromyko reflects a startling new turning point in in-
ternational relations. To understand what happened, it is essential to realize that
the struggle for world power today is more complex than it appears on the sur-
face. Daily news reports make it appear that it is basically a struggle between
two antagonists—the United States and Russia. Everyone else gets classified as
an American ally, or as a Russian satellite, or as part of the non-aligned Third
World so called. That concept is simple and easy for just about everyone to un-
derstand. It’s the old us vs. them idea. Unfortunately it happens to be wrong.
The fact is that today the struggle for world power is not two-sided, but three-
sided. There are three great power factions at work in the world today, each one
jostling and maneuvering against the other two. I have devoted many past re-
ports to giving you details about these three power factions and their
relationships to one another, but let me just remind you once again who they
are.
POWER FACTION NO. 1 is the Rockefeller cartel, which embraces Big Oil,
Big Banking, and large chunks of Big Business. Until about three years ago the
Rockefeller cartel reigned supreme here in the United States. American gov-
ernment policies were Rockefeller policies, and American wars were
Rockefeller wars.
POWER FACTION NO. 2 is the international Bolshevik and Zionist axis. As I

detailed in AUDIO LETTER Nos. 49 and 50, Bolshevism and Zionism are
closely related and owe their existence partly to Rockefeller help long ago. Af-
ter Bolshevism was imposed on Russia in 1917, a secret alliance was forged
between the Bolsheviks in Russia and the Rockefeller cartel here. For six dec-
ades these two factions orchestrated the actions of the Soviet Union and the
United States for mutual benefit. By pretending to be enemies, they established
a giant pincers movement that was gobbling up the world; but
555
POWER FACTION NO. 3 has completely changed that picture during the past
few years. This third faction is the tightly-knit band of native Russians who
have overthrown the Bolsheviks at the top in Russia. Russia’s new rulers are a
tough sect of Christians who are working from the top down to gradually weed
out all the Bolsheviks in Russia. It’s a Herculean task, but they are more patient
than we in the West. They worked for six decades to seize control of the Krem-
lin and they know better than to become hasty or impatient now. During recent
years the new Kremlin has been expelling the hated Bolsheviks from Russia.
Here in America the Rockefellers made the fatal mistake of welcoming the Bol-
sheviks from Russia. The Bolsheviks can never share power with anyone, and
some three years ago they launched a coup d’etat against the Rockefellers. The
coup began with the murder of Nelson Rockefeller, which was quickly dis-
guised and covered up. Then Russian Intelligence intervened here in
Washington to prevent the Bolsheviks from achieving total success.
Since that time there have been these three factions struggling for power. Here
in America the Rockefeller cartel is fighting a guerilla war against the Bolshe-
viks for control over our country. The Bolsheviks with their Zionist partners in
Israel are feverishly trying to get America into nuclear war against Russia. And
in Russia, the secret new rulers are continuing to root out Bolshevism; and as
they do so, Christianity is beginning to revive in Russia. It’s a long process, but
it’s happening. At the same time the Kremlin is preparing for what they regard
as the inevitable war even as they try to prevent it. So these are the three power
factions now at work.
Here in America the Bolsheviks, transplanted here after their expulsion from
Russia, bent on war against Russia. Also here in America the Rockefeller cartel,
who no longer want war for the reasons I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 67.
They are preoccupied with regaining control over America. And the third fac-
tion, Russia’s new rulers, do not want war for moral reasons.
My friends, the meeting of Haig and Gromyko this week was actually a tough
bargaining session between the Russians and the Rockefeller faction here. For
entirely different reasons, they presently find themselves with some interests in
common! Both are now deadly enemies of the Bolsheviks here—the Rockefel-
lers on a domestic basis, the Russians on an international basis. And for totally
different reasons, both the Rockefeller cartel and the Russians want to prevent
the war which the Bolsheviks are trying to set off.
556
Audio Letter 71
During recent months secret meetings have taken place between the representa-
tives of the Rockefeller cartel and Russia’s ruling group. Those meetings led up
to the Haig-Gromyko meeting this week. My friends, a quid pro quo is now in
the works between the Russians and the Rockefeller cartel. It will be aimed at
their mutual enemy, the Bolsheviks.
Meanwhile, the Bolsheviks here are continuing to line up support for the big
war they intend to ignite soon. At the same time the Russians are equally busy
trying to dissuade other countries from getting involved. These cross currents
are producing some surprising line-ups for war.
Here is how it stands as of now, but keep in mind that further changes are
bound to happen:
On the side of the United States, Red China is the Bolsheviks’ greatest prize up
to now. Due to sheer numbers, Red China can tie down 50 Russian Divisions.
Chinese geography is also crucial, especially Sinkiang Province, for American
bases to attack Russia. Other major allies as of now are Great Britain, Australia,
and New Zealand. New Zealand, by the way, is far more important than one
might expect. The Bolsheviks here are also lining up the North Countries—
Norway, Denmark, and Sweden. Of these, Norway is both the most important
and most deeply committed to the war plan. The United States can also count
on certain Latin American countries, and now also English-speaking Canada.
This last represents a major change over the past three years.
On Russia’s side, the Warsaw Pact is still solid except Poland. Vietnam and
North Korea also remain under Russia’s control, as does Cuba. In addition,
Russia can expect crucial help from India, Mexico, and French-speaking Que-
bec Province, Canada. Where Russia has made the most dramatic progress is in
convincing nominal allies of the United States to turn neutral at the secret level.
Countries in this category include Japan, France, Spain, the Netherlands, and
even Belgium where NATO headquarters is located. But the biggest target of
all in this neutral category is West Germany. The Russians are holding out a
firm promise to Bonn if the West Germans will simply “sit out” any war to
come. The promise, my friends, is the reunification of Germany. That promise
was the secret reason behind the recent historic meeting of the leaders of the
two Germanies, Schmidt and Honecker.
Yes, my friends, the alliances are shifting as we draw closer to NUCLEAR

WAR ONE. Some of these alliances are beginning to work against the Bolshe-
viks here; but as the Bolsheviks see the tide beginning to turn against them,
557
they are only redoubling their frenzy for war. As a result, this new year of 1982
will be dangerous, and it may well also be decisive for the future of the world.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
Now it is time for my “Last Minute Summary.” As you know, last month in
AUDIO LETTER No. 70 I offered to make a major change in the format of my
Intelligence Report program. The revised arrangement would have involved
less frequent tape reports with a new printed newsletter every two weeks. Since
my only purpose in making such a change would be to serve you better, I asked
for your reactions to the plan. Based on the response to AUDIO LETTER No.
70, my friends, my decision is not to proceed with the new printed newsletter
idea. Instead, what I do plan to do is to resume making a tape every month, as I
did before my heart attack two years ago. I want to thank all of you who re-
sponded with your reactions, as I requested last month. I know a few of you
will be disappointed with the way it turned out, but I will do my very best to
serve you even better than in the past. After all, serving you is what the AUDIO
LETTER is all about.
558
Audio Letter 72
February 28, 1982
On the final Sunday evening of last month, January 31, millions of Americans
tuned in their TV sets to watch a special movie on NBC. It was a major produc-
tion shown in two installments on successive nights. The movie was titled
“WORLD WAR III.” Viewers were drawn into a snow-swept world of rugged
terrain supposedly in Alaska. At a lonely outpost of the Distant Early Warning
radar network an unidentified blip appeared on the radar screen. As it did so
one crew member, supposedly a Soviet spy, calmly killed all the others, pre-
venting an alert signal to NORAD. The blip turned out to be a Russian transport
which dropped a team of Arctic Commandoes onto the frozen Alaska wilder-
ness.
As the plot unfolded, it turned out that the Russian Commandoes were there to
sabotage the Alaska oil pipe line. They had been sent to Alaska by Kremlin
hardliners who thought that they could use the sabotage threat to undo an
American grain embargo against Russia. Instead, the plan failed, leading finally
to simultaneous orders by both sides for a nuclear first strike. During those two
evenings of an imaginary build-up to World War III, a surprisingly realistic at-
mosphere was created. There were many technical inaccuracies but they hardly
mattered. What did matter was the emotional impact of the movie, and on that
level it was very effective.
Here in the United States there is a growing fascination with violence, blood-
shed, and war. More and more of our entertainment is built around themes of
hostility and destruction. This trend is visible in sports, in music, in literature, in
motion pictures, and in television. It seems as if we have been too well off for
too long in terms of material things. We have a restless craving for change.
My friends, what seems to be happening now in America was expressed long

ago by the Spanish writer and philosopher Don Miguel de Unamuno. During
the latter part of the 19th Century Unamuno kept a secret and mostly spiritual
diary at his workroom in Salamanca, Spain. His last full entry was made in
January 1902. Seventy years later the diary was discovered and published, first
in Spain and later in an English translation here in America by the Princeton
559
University Press. The Unamuno diary, titled “The Tragic Sense of Life in Men
and Nations,” seems as relevant today as if it were freshly written. Unamuno
wrote, and I quote:
“Men seek peace, they say, but do they really? They are also said to seek lib-
erty. Not at all. They look for peace in time of war, and for war in time of
peace. They seek liberty under tyranny, and tyranny when they are free.”
My friends, these few words of the Spanish philosopher Unamuno seem to de-
scribe America today. There has not been a war on American soil, except for
Pearl Harbor, in the memory of any living American; and we have possessed
freedom for so long that we take it for granted, so now we are blindly following
leaders who are betraying us into the ultimate in both WAR and TYRANNY.
Topic #1—NUCLEAR WAR FEVER AND EXPANDING SECRET

WARFARE
Topic #2—THE THIRD SPACE SHUTTLE CHALLENGE TO RUSSIA
Topic #3—THE SHORTENING TIMETABLE FOR NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
Topic #1—Day by day the pitch of war fever is rising steadily here in the
United States. Every night on the television news turmoil in Central America is
the leading topic.
In El Salvador a government that continuously violates the human rights of its

own people is being propped up by the so-called Reagan Adminstration. The El
Salvador situation contains the seeds of another Vietnam in spite of White
House lies to the contrary. Like the ill-fated South Vietnam, El Salvador is rid-
dled with corruption throughout the government and military. In both cases this
situation resulted from CIA tampering with each country’s power structure.
Two decades ago America started wading into the Vietnam quagmire by way of
secret groups of advisers, so called, unknown to the American public; and today
the same thing is under way in El Salvador. We’re told that there are only a
handful of noncombatant advisers there. That, my friends, is a lie! As of now,
there are already more than 300 Green Berets in El Salvador, with more on the
way.
560
Audio Letter 72
We’re also hearing sharp words from the White House directed at Nicaragua.
Over five years ago I gave a warning about Russia’s rapid progress in gaining
influence there, but at that time America’s rulers were trying to save their
crumbling secret alliance with the Kremlin so they said not a word to the public
about Nicaragua. Today the secret alliance is long gone, so today we are hear-
ing, years late, about Nicaragua.
Overseas, too, the clouds of approaching war are growing darker and darker. In
the Middle East, Israel is threatening a major invasion of Lebanon which could
not fail to lead to war with Syria. The American Bolshevik-Zionist war whirl-
pool is continuing to spread outward from its source, Israel.
Two months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 70 I gave an alert to watch for new
turmoil in Iran to erupt shortly. Now Iran is back in the news, right on schedule.
There have been new bombings in Tehran, a reminder of the prospects for civil
war there. At the same time we’re hearing reports that the alleged Ayatollah
Khomeini is ill and may die soon. Once again, that is a lie as part of the grand
plan to manipulate us into war. The real Ayatollah Khomeini was killed and
replaced with a “double” two years ago this month, as I reported in AUDIO
LETTER No. 54. When the American Bolshevik war planners here in the
United States are ready to play their Iran card in the war build-up, we’ll be told
that Khomeini has died. United States-connected Bolshevik agents in Iran are
poised and ready to stir up civil war there.
As the situation worsens, we’ll be told that Russia is preparing to turn Iran into
another Afghanistan. Already chief United States arms negotiator, Eugene V.
Rostow, is making statements to help pave the way for all this. Lately he has
been quoted to the effect that Russia can be expected to “test us” (quote) over
Iran. Once again America’s Bolshevik military planners are preparing to use
Iran as one key to their elaborate nuclear first-strike plan against Russia. Their
military strategy is an updated version of the plan I detailed 3-1/2 years ago in
The determination of the American Bolsheviks here to go to war against Russia

is becoming evident in other ways, too.
One arena is that of the supposed nuclear arms reduction talks in Geneva. As a
grandstand play, the entity President Reagan has proposed the so-called “zero
option” to eliminate all nuclear weapons in Europe. It sounds good, but it has
no substance. In the actual negotiations to figure out how to carry out this plan,
the United States has made no practical proposals at all.
561
In response, the Russians have made two counterproposals during recent weeks.
One would begin by freezing nuclear weapons in Europe. That starting point
may not be ideal, my friends, but at least it’s clear-cut and possible to do.
Washington’s response was to ridicule the idea. The other Russian proposal
was made just a few days ago; it’s for both sides to completely halt all manu-
facture and testing of all nuclear weapons as a starting point for general
disarmament. For the moment the White House seems to have been taken off
guard. Soon though you can count on the fact that this idea, too, will be rejected
with some excuse by the United States because, my friends, nuclear disarma-
ment is the last thing our American Bolshevik rulers here want.
Instead, the Government is now publicizing its intentions to prosecute young-

sters who fail to register for the draft! The entity Reagan is talking out of both
sides of his mouth about the draft. He keeps telling us that there is no intention
to actually bring back the draft, but on the other hand we’re now told that any-
one who fails to sign up for the draft may be bundled off to federal prison.
At the same time, Civil Defense has become a hot new topic of promotion by
the so-called Reagan Administration. The agency which is spearheading this
drive is relatively new, having been lifted straight from the pages of the secret
new Constitution for America. It’s called the “Federal Emergency Management
Agency,” or FEMA. FEMA is doing its best to lull us to sleep about the dangers
of nuclear war. The Agency says, for example, that, quote:
“The United States could survive nuclear attack and go on to recovery within a
relatively few years.”
FEMA is planting articles in newspapers nation-wide to drive home this com-

forting lie. These planted articles try to tell us that all we would have to do is to
evacuate our cities, learn a little survival training, and fix up some simple fall-
out shelters and we’ll all do just fine.
My friends, these articles planted by an agency of the federal government are

the worst kind of lies. Just one H-bomb exploding on one major city would
overwhelm all the hospitals of America with grizzly casualties! But our leaders
want you to believe otherwise so that you will follow them into a suicidal war.
Recently George Kennan wrote an article which expressed very well the state of
mind of those who now control America’s military policies. Back in the days of
the secret Rockefeller-Soviet alliance, Kennan was one of the proponents of the
policy of containment of Russia. Now the situation has changed radically, and
562
Audio Letter 72
in the New York Review of Books for January 21, 1982, Kennan wrote an arti-
cle titled “ON NUCLEAR WAR.” Kennan said, quote:
“There is no issue at stake in our political relations with the Soviet Union—no
hope, no fear, nothing to which we aspire, nothing we would like to avoid
which could conceivably be worth a nuclear war.”
And further on he added, quote:
“This entire preoccupation with nuclear war is a form of illness. It is morbid in

the extreme. There is no hope in it—only horror. It can be understood only as
some form of subconscious despair on the part of its devotees, some sort of
death wish, a readiness to commit suicide for fear of death.”
My friends, Kennan could not be more accurate in describing the state of mind
of those who now control America’s military plans—the American Bolsheviks
here. Ever since Russia’s military take-over of space in late 1977, military
planning here in America has taken on a kamikaze mentality. It’s the concept of
‘victory through suicide.’ I gave details about this new suicidal streak in our
military planning in the summer of 1978 in AUDIO LETTER No. 35. It is this
hopelessness that led to America’s shift to a first-strike nuclear strategy against
Russia, which I first reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 36 and 37. The
American Bolsheviks, who now hold the reins of America’s military, are Sa-
tanic and schizophrenic in their thinking. They’re opposed to everything that
our Lord Jesus Christ stands for—Truth, Hope, and Love. They live by lies and
deception, and they are afflicted by utter hopelessness and self-hatred. They do
indeed have a death wish, and they want to take the rest of us with them.
As war fever is building for public consumption, the secret war is continuing to
escalate. Last month I reported on Russia’s renewed geophysical warfare in-
volving especially weather modification and artificial earthquakes. These things
are intended to reduce America’s ability to go to war. Canada, too, is being
drawn into the American Bolshevik war camp, and recently parts of Canada
have suffered such extreme blizzard conditions that a “National Emergency”
was declared. I also reported on two incidents in which Russian Cosmospheres
triggered plane crashes last month. I can now add something very important to
that report.
The rash of strange plane crashes that began with Air Florida Flight 90 on
January 13 involved more than just a general warning from the Kremlin. They
were in direct response to a specific act of secret warfare!
563
For over four years now Russian electrogravitic weapons platforms called
Cosmospheres have been hovering high over the United States. They first an-
nounced their presence by creating giant air booms along the East Coast and
elsewhere. Since that time their numbers have multiplied, and they patrol con-
tinuously over all kinds of American strategic target areas!
When war comes, the American Bolsheviks here plan to shoot down as many
Cosmospheres as possible using high-power lasers. I reported this at least three
years ago in my AUDIO LETTER reports. Until recently, however, it’s been
very hard to detect Cosmospheres floating overhead. They’re invisible to nor-
mal radar except at very close range, but now one of the crash weapons projects
here in the United States has made it easier to detect Cosmospheres and to aim
lasers at them. The new technique called “Computer-Enhanced Infrared” is an
extremely sensitive means of detecting the heat radiation given off by Cosmos-
pheres. It’s known by the acronym CEIR (pronounced seer).
On the evening of January 12, 1982, a complete operational test was carried out
against a Cosmosphere which was patrolling high over central New Jersey.
CEIR was used to aim a ground-based high-power laser at the Cosmosphere,
then the laser was fired. A section of the Cosmosphere erupted into blue-green
flames. As the flames started to spread, the crew accelerated the Cosmosphere
toward the coast. All Cosmosphere crews are under strict orders to make certain
that their craft never fall into non-Russian hands, and they were making for the
sea. The stricken Cosmosphere, trailing blue-green flames, was seen over a
large area of eastern Pennsylvania and central New Jersey. It had been hovering
at an altitude of more than 40 miles, but it came down fast. It’s semirigid shell
started crumpling. It passed over Atlantic City at low altitude and plunged into
the water just a few miles off shore. Many witnesses watched as the remains of
the Cosmosphere burned, floating on the surface of the water for nearly 10
minutes. The whole incident created a sensation in the local region, but official
Government spokesmen have treated it all as a non-event!
This very first downing of a Cosmosphere created shock waves in the Kremlin.
It was decided very quickly that a clear message should be sent to the Pentagon
that they would pay dearly if the incident should be repeated. The Russians
knew that a laser had shot down their Cosmosphere, so the very next day an Air
Florida flight with laser warfare specialists aboard was caused to crash here in
Washington.
Then came a string of crashes and near-crashes—all of them supposedly unex-

plainable. All four Air Force Thunderbird demonstration jets were made to
crash, as I explained last month. A Boeing 737 in California dropped far below
564
Audio Letter 72
its flight path, seemingly without cause, and narrowly missed disaster as it
clipped some power lines. And strangest of all, a Japan Air Lines DC-8 crashed
into Tokyo Bay during the final moments of its landing approach. It was a per-
fect flying day, clear and sunny.
The DC-8 was only 1000 yards from touchdown, flying in a gentle glide. There
were no mechanical problems. Suddenly the pilot acted as if he were dazed.
Reportedly he reached over and reversed thrust on two of the four jet engines.
The big jet nosed downward; it smashed into light stanchions marking the ap-
proach path and crashed into the shallow water. Later, in the hospital, the pilot
said he had blacked out. The co-pilot reportedly said he, too, suddenly felt
woozy, but fought it and remained conscious.
My friends, there’s not time to go into the full details of all of these incidents.
It’s enough to say that in every case, including the Japanese crash, the targets
were chosen to convey a crystal clear warning to certain people. In every case
that I have mentioned, a Russian Cosmosphere used a neutron beam weapon to
bring about these strange results. As I’ve explained before, neutron beams dis-
rupt electronic instruments and also the mental and nervous systems of people.
The Russians are saying to the American Bolshevik Pentagon in effect: “If you
shoot down any more Cosmospheres, there will be no place to hide.”
The secret war is growing more and more intense as we get closer to the out-
break of all-out war! At the same time the alignments of powers great and small
are continuing to shift and settle into place.
Last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 71 I reviewed in some detail the three
main Power Factions in the world today and the relationships among them. One
faction is that of the Rockefeller cartel—the multinational complex of Big Oil,
Big Banking, and Big Business. Another faction is the Bolshevik-Zionist Axis
with headquarters shared between the United States (especially New York City)
and Israel. The third faction is that of the new rulers of Russia who have ex-
pelled most of the Bolsheviks formerly in power there.
Last month I reported that a new operational relationship is in the works be-
tween Russia’s new rulers and the Rockefeller cartel. I can now report that as of
now the emerging quid pro quo falls far short of the secret alliance that used to
exist. Instead, it’s basically an agreement not to damage one another as a matter
of deliberate policy. The prime objective is to free both of them (the Russians
and the Rockefeller cartel) to deal with their mutual enemy, the American Bol-
sheviks who have infiltrated key policy-making government positions here in
Washington. The main area in which the Rockefeller cartel can be helpful to the
565
Russians is in the economic sphere. The American Bolshevik dominated for-

eign policy in the United States is a policy of economic starvation against
Russia and her satellites. The Rockefeller cartel is in the position to partially
blunt these policies by cooperating with Russia in East-West trade.
American Bolshevik economic warfare against the Soviet bloc is most apparent
right now in the plight of Poland. The American Bolsheviks here finally suc-
ceeded in using the Solidarity Labor Union to push Poland into martial law.
Now martial law itself is being used as an excuse to make the Polish people suf-
fer even more at America’s hands. A thinly-disguised food embargo is in place
by the United States against Poland. Even chicken feed is being held back in
order to create disaster for Poland’s own chicken farms. Everything possible is
being done to drive the Polish people to such desperation that open revolt will
erupt.
The collapse of Poland poses a military threat to Russia and is an economic

drain as well. Russia’s new rulers are working with an unwieldy centralized
economy left behind by the expelled Bolsheviks. It cannot be changed over-
night so the Russians are vulnerable to economic warfare. In order to avoid
economic disaster, the Russians are pushing hard for new ways to raise hard
Western currency. Last month I reported on one of these Russian moves—a
major coup in United States Treasury securities; but for the long term the Rus-
sians want to establish more stable and mutually beneficial economic ties with
the West.
The centerpiece of Russia’s economic drive now is the Siberian gas pipe line
for Western Europe. It’s a 25-billion dollar project, the biggest ever between the
Soviet Union and the West.
It will be completed in 1984. The Bolsheviks here are trying to completely stop
the gas pipe line project, but the Rockefeller oil and business cartel is trying to
help the pipe line project go ahead. Earlier this month, on February 17, the
United States Chamber of Commerce, a long-time Rockefeller public relations
organ, went public about the pipe line. It called the Reagan embargo against
pipe line equipment a strategy of economic warfare against Russia. Just last
week the “Joint Economic Committee” of Congress endorsed the pipe line pro-
ject; and in Europe, American multinational oil companies are lining up in
support of the gas pipe line—all of them, that is, except one, Mobil Oil. Unlike
the other members of the Rockefeller Big Oil cartel, Mobil Oil in West Ger-
many has been publicly opposing the gas pipe line.
566
Audio Letter 72
To the Russians the gas pipe line is a matter of economic survival; and with all-
out war on the horizon, the Kremlin has no patience with those who say one
thing and do another. The Russians regard Mobil’s position against the pipe line
as a double cross, in effect siding with the Bolsheviks here in America. Russia’s
rulers decided to give Mobil Oil strong reasons to rethink their position, and
fast!
On Thursday, February 11, the Russian container ship Mekhanik Tarasov de-
parted from a port in Quebec, Canada, bound for Leningrad. It headed northeast
up the St. Lawrence River, then out through the Gulf of St. Lawrence into the
Atlantic. After skirting the south coast of Newfoundland, the Tarasov set course
east by northeast. It’s course was chosen to take it very close to the world’s
largest semisubmersible oil rig, passing it on the south. The rig was the “Ocean
Ranger” operated by Mobil Oil. It was supposedly unsinkable, like the Titanic.
The Tarasov, like many other Russian merchant ships, possessed a military ca-
pability that was not admitted. As it neared the giant oil rig in a mounting
storm, it launched a homing torpedo with a low-yield nuclear warhead toward
the rig. Just before 1:00 A.M. Monday morning February 15 the torpedo
reached its target, one of the giant underwater pontoons. Nuclear explosions
under water are far more confined than those in air, and this one was hidden by
the hurricane-force winds and pounding waves. A hole was blasted in the pon-
toon, and the Ocean Ranger started settling toward that side. The crew gave a
trouble call by radio; half an hour later they reported that they were manning
the lifeboats. But the Japanese-built Ocean Ranger was designed to be the
world’s most unsinkable oil rig! A corner of the upper platform dipped into the
water and than stopped. The rig stayed afloat, listing at a crazy angle. The
roughnecks stopped boarding the lifeboats, hoping the boats would not be
needed after all. Then a Cosmosphere hovering high above the rig took aim at
the corner of the rig which had dipped into the water. A powerful blast from its
charged particle beam weapon blew a hole in the partially-submerged corner.
Immediately the Ocean Ranger heeled over and sank. It went down so fast that
it was too late for lifeboats to be launched successfully, and all hands were lost.
The freighter Tarasov continued on course after sinking the oil rig. The Rus-
sians expected that the freighter would be long gone before anyone figured out
what had happened—but they miscalculated! At around 2:00 P.M. that same
afternoon, Monday February 15, an American Attack Submarine was closing in
on the Tarasov. The “sub” fired a single torpedo at the Tarasov, hitting it broad-
side. Water surged in through a giant hole below the waterline, and the freighter
started sinking. Like the crew of the Cosmosphere that was shot down over
New Jersey last month, the crew of the Tarasov had strict orders to protect the
567
secrets of their ship, and so the Russian captain refused assistance from a
nearby Danish freighter as his ship sank with its secrets.
Apparently, my friends, Mobil Oil got the message. Just two days after the
sinking of the Ocean Ranger, Mobil Oil shut down the other two oil rigs which
had been nearby and towed them ashore.
But our leaders still have not gotten the message. They are still leading us
straight into NUCLEAR WAR ONE!
Topic #2—Early this month on February 5, the entity Vice-President Bush

made himself conspicuous by a trip to Cape Canaveral, Florida. He was photo-
graphed with astronauts inside the European-built orbital science laboratory
called “SPACE LAB.” According to official schedules, SPACE LAB will be
put in orbit by space shuttle in late 1983, about a year and a half from now.
Meanwhile, Bush announced that space shuttle flight No. 3 is now scheduled
for March 22, 1982. Supposedly it’s to last for a full week.
For public consumption, NASA spokesmen are continuing to pretend that the
shuttle is merely carrying out a leisurely series of test flights. We are told that
the Space Shuttle Program is basically a peaceful civilian program in spite of
the all-military crews flying the shuttle. But the peaceful image of the Space
Shuttle Program is a total lie. The fact is that the space shuttle flights now under
way are part of a crash program by the United States to regain a military toe
hold in space.
The United States has been virtually locked out of the military use of space by
Russia since late 1977, as I have reported in detail in the past. Russia’s domina-
tion of space for the past four years and more has been highlighted by
numerous manned space flights. These have even included cosmonauts from
nine other countries besides Russia. Meanwhile the United States went more
than five years without admitting to any manned space flight attempts. The
Russian long-duration space spectaculars in earth orbit have been sufficient to
build Russia’s prestige in the public eye; but as I’ve reported in the past, the
Soviet Space Program involves far more than is being revealed publicly.
Ever since mid-October 1977, the Moon has been a Russian outpost. There are
seven (7) manned long-range particle beam installations on the near side, and at
least one base on the far side. In the past I’ve reported that regular missions are
flown to and from the Moon in order to resupply the bases and rotate crews,
and slowly but surely the Kremlin is inching its way toward breaking the news
about its control of the Moon. Don’t expect them to tell you everything, but
568
Audio Letter 72
they are beginning to drop hints about it. An example appears in the Russian
publication circulated in the United States called “Soviet Life” for this month,
February 1982. On page 33 of the magazine there is a brief one-page feature on
Space. Planted near the beginning of the article are the words, quote:
“Today spaceships shuttle between the Earth and the Moon with greater fre-
quency than did the first voyages to the New World.”
At the top of the page there’s a nighttime photo of a moonship ready to blast off
from a Russian Cosmodrome. Below is a picture of the Earth as seen from
space, and in between is a statement in bold type designed to give another hint
about their moon flights.
It says, quote:
“From a distance of 70,000 kilometers above the Earth, the planet looks peace-
ful and even defenseless. The common goal is to protect our blue and green
home.”
My friends, satellites are not used at altitudes of 70,000 kilometers. The highest
orbit that is generally useful for earth satellites is the geosynchronous orbit for
stationary satellites over the equator. Seventy-thousand kilometers is almost
twice that far from the Earth. The only time when a spacecraft reaches that far
from the Earth is when it is on its way to or from the Moon or another planet.
Russia’s interest in space also extends far beyond military factors. In AUDIO
LETTER No. 38 I described the plans of Russia’s new rulers for the coloniza-
tion of our solar system. Those plans are moving ahead steadily; in fact, at this
very moment not one but two Russian spacecraft are approaching the planet
Venus! They are said to be unmanned; but, my friends, they are manned space-
craft.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 38 I reported that the Russians had settled on Venus,
not Mars, as the first target beyond the Moon for experimental colonization.
They first started landing unmanned craft on Venus some seven (7) years ago,
and they’ve learned some key facts not yet known in the West. Four years ago
the Russians began a series of increasingly long-durationed manned orbital
space flights, which were widely publicized. These were gradually extended to
six months and more to learn how well crews would stand up to interplanetary
space travel. Early last fall these long-duration orbital flights were completed.
The Russians had learned everything they needed to know. Last October 30 and
November 4, 1981, two Russian spaceships blasted off for Venus. Both ships
569
are manned by Russian cosmonauts, and both are preparing to land on Venus as
I say these words.
My friends, the comparison between the space programs of the United States
and Russia today is a study in tragic ironies. We Americans are being told that
the space shuttle is primarily a civilian-oriented project, but it is actually mili-
tary. We’re being told that it is the world’s first reusable spacecraft, but a
shuttle is actually being lost on every flight. We’re being told that the space
shuttle has put us years ahead of Russia, but we have actually slipped years be-
hind. We’re often told that our Rulers want only peaceful activities in space, but
they are shutting down almost the entire civilian scientific space program.
Funding is continuing for one or two peaceful projects which are too visible to
cancel without an uproar, such as the space telescope. But follow-on projects to
explore our solar system are being lopped off and discarded because they con-
tribute nothing to our leaders’ plans for war!
We’re told constantly that the Russians have nothing but war and conquest on
their minds; but it is the Russians, not we Americans, who at this moment have
two teams of spacemen preparing to land on Venus. They’re going there for
reasons which have nothing to do with war. The Russians are exploring the so-
lar system simply because it is there. Russia’s new rulers believe that it is man’s
destiny to move into space. The urge to explore that motivated their Viking an-
cestors of old is alive and well today in the Russian Space Program.
My friends, I believe that same spirit is still strong also among the American
people today. Why else would our leaders have to keep selling the Space Pro-
gram to us as a great adventure? But the Bolsheviks here who now control
America’s Space Program do not care about adventure or exploring the un-
known or inspiring the human spirit. They care only about power, control,
intrigue, revolution, and war; and their plans for war are shaping America’s
Space Shuttle Program.
Twelve days ago, on February 16, the space shuttle was moved out to the
launch pad at Cape Canaveral, five days ahead of schedule. This will be Amer-
ica’s third space shuttle launch, and it is also the third shuttle that is being used.
The first shuttle, the real “Columbia,” was destroyed last April, as I detailed in
AUDIO LETTER No. 64. It was replaced by the training shuttle “Enterprise”
which landed at Edwards Air Force Base and was taken to Florida. The Enter-
prise flight last November was a stopgap measure while a third shuttle could be
extensively modified.
570
Audio Letter 72
The new shuttle now at Cape Canaveral is one of the three secret shuttles from
White Sands that I mentioned in AUDIO LETTER No. 63 last spring. It has
undergone extensive modification since the first space shuttle disaster ten
months ago in April, 1981. It still looks the same as the original Columbia, at
least from a distance, but this shuttle is actually far, far different.
The shuttle now on the pad, my friends, is armed to the teeth! The basic mission
of this third shuttle is the same as that of the first shuttle nearly a year ago. One
year ago today in AUDIO LETTER No. 62 I described in detail what the space
shuttle was supposed to do. Its payload was a heavily armored laser-firing robot
battle station designed for space reconnaissance over Russia. Russian space
weapons finished destroying all of America’s Spy Satellites nearly four years
ago. That means America’s war planners will be shooting almost blind at Rus-
sia if they start a war without somehow acquiring new reconnaissance data. The
space shuttle is trying to solve that problem by getting the new hardened satel-
lite into orbit. That is what the space shuttle flights right now are all about—
attempts at reconnaissance.
After each shuttle takes off from Florida it follows a long, swooping, curved
launch into the north in order to fly over Russia. The American Bolshevik mili-
tary planners here believe that if they can once get their new super-spy satellite
into orbit, it will do the job. They are confident that it can survive any attacks
by Russian space weapons long enough to radio back a large amount of recon-
naissance data; and once they have that, the Pentagon will be ready to take
America to war.
Last spring the “Columbia” was destroyed before the Spy Satellite could be de-
ployed. Likewise the makeshift “Enterprise” mission in November was a
failure, but the military shuttle planners believe it will be a different story with
their shuttle No. 3 now preparing for launch.
In the cargo bay of this shuttle there is a new robot reconnaissance battle station
like the one I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 62. There is also an additional
laser mounted in the forward end of the cargo bay just behind the crew com-
partment. It is a hydrogen fluoride gas dynamic laser mounted vertically, aimed
upward. It is equipped with a swiveling head consisting of mirrors that can aim
the beam around a wide range of angles. The hydrogen fluoride laser in the
cargo bay is intended mainly to protect the shuttle while it climbs toward orbit.
As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 64 last spring, the “Columbia” came un-
der fire shortly before it reached orbit. Intelligence analysts here eventually
571
obtained enough information about what happened to decide on installing the

cargo bay laser.
As the shuttle climbs, the air will grow thinner and thinner, dwindling to almost
nothing long before the rocket engines shut off. At the earliest possible mo-
ment, the modified cargo bay doors, which have no hinges on this shuttle, will
be blown off by special explosive devices. As the cargo bay doors flutter away
from the shuttle, it will leave the upper half of the bay wide open. The cargo
bay laser will be ready to fire from that moment onward. It’s equipped with the
same system called CEIR that I described in Topic #1. Since a laser equipped
this way successfully shot down a Cosmosphere last month, the shuttle planners
believe the shuttle will reach orbit safely. Once in orbit, planners here believe
that the main threat to the shuttle will be Russia’s orbiting Cosmos Interceptors.
These manned killer satellites are responsible for sweeping the skies clear of
American Spy Satellites. In order to deal with that threat, there have been truly
radical modifications to the shuttle.
Whenever the space shuttle is discussed, it’s always emphasized that shuttle
astronauts can work in their shirt sleeves—no need for space suits because rid-
ing in the shuttle is almost like riding in an air liner. Not so this time, my
friends.
When Col. Jack Lousma and Col. C. Gordon Fullerton lift off in this shuttle,
they will be in spacesuits. What’s more, they will be depending on their space-
suits because their crew cabin will not be pressurized. The whole lower front
portion of their ship below the flight deck has been turned into a weapons bay.
As soon as the shuttle reaches orbit, the nose will open up to the vacuum of
space. The nose will fold downward and back somewhat like certain cargo air-
craft whose noses fold upward to load and unload. As soon as the nose opens
up, a complex laser system will emerge. The system has five tubular sections
aimed up, down, to each side, and straight ahead. Each laser tube has a swivel-
ing mirror-head for beam aiming, like that of the cargo bay laser I mentioned
earlier. Once deployed, the Nose Laser System will be able to fire in almost any
direction. The only exception is a narrow corridor to the rear of the shuttle.
The Nose Laser System is described as a nuclear-pumped helium plasma laser

with five resonators. The nuclear power pack can fire any one of the five laser
tubes at a time. It’s not as powerful as the cargo bay laser; but unlike the cargo
bay laser, the Nose Laser System can operate for a long time on an intermittent
basis, and the shuttle planners believe it will be powerful enough to disable the
manned Russian killer satellites.
572
Audio Letter 72
Under the protection of the Nose Laser System, Lousma and Fullerton are to
deploy the robot Spy Satellite. As soon as it is deployed, they are to return to
Earth in a small Gemini-type re-entry capsule. This part of the plan is the same
as I revealed a year ago for the first shuttle flight. Meanwhile, the shuttle will
remain in orbit.
The Nose Laser System is programmed to keep right on zapping any Russian
Cosmos Interceptors that come within range. It will continue doing so until it is
destroyed or the nuclear laser runs down, which could be a very long time. It
will constitute a very dangerous nuisance in space, and the Russians will have
little choice but to destroy it. The American Bolsheviks here hope the Russians
will lose a lot of spaceships and men before they succeed in doing so.
If the military shuttle planners are right in their calculations, the third space
shuttle mission could turn into a battle royal in space. If they are wrong, they
presently plan to try again one more time.
As of now, the fourth space shuttle mission is scheduled for the Fourth of July.
After that, no matter what happens with the space shuttle, they are now plan-
ning to go ahead anyway in setting off NUCLEAR WAR ONE because my
friends, the American Bolsheviks here have scored an Intelligence coup against
Russia.
Topic #3—For nearly a year now I’ve been reporting on the grand strategy of
the American Bolsheviks and their Zionist partners to set off nuclear war. Their
basic plan is an updated version of the one that was successful in setting off
World War I. The prelude to that war involved ever widening, uncontrollable
crises in the Balkans. Likewise today the whole world is being Balkanized by
means of Bolshevik-Zionist intrigues.
Last year I began warning that we would soon be seeing more and more simul-
taneous crises in the world as the fever for war rises. Today these simultaneous
crises are now upon us, right on schedule.
El Salvador and the rest of Central America are aflame with internal upheaval.
Poland is under martial law, while America tries to transform Poland’s troubles
into a complete bloody disaster. In the Middle East not one but several time
bombs are almost ready to go off since spring is coming. These are the things I
was talking about in my advance reports last year.
The Reagan-Begin Axis of Bolsheviks and Zionists intend to manipulate these

crises—and more to come—to pave the way for war. Suddenly certain crises
573
will combine to trigger a chain of events leading to NUCLEAR WAR ONE.

The joint military junta of the United States Pentagon and Israel are working on
a fast timetable for all of this. As I’ve reported in past tapes, they are aiming for
mid-summer 1982, this year, for the final war sequence to begin.
This will involve regional conflicts in the Middle East and elsewhere which
gradually escalate to engulf the superpowers. The whole thing is being set up to
make nuclear war appear unavoidable. At last all-out nuclear war itself will
break out between the United States and Russia. It will be made to appear acci-
dental; but as I have detailed in the past, my friends, NUCLEAR WAR ONE
will actually begin with an American nuclear first strike against Russia!
Up to now, the secret war planners here have been expecting that it would take
many months for the final war build-up to run its course. For example, a
Mideast war might be triggered this summer of 1982, but it could take until the
spring of 1983 for the resulting nuclear war to erupt. That has been their think-
ing until very recently, but a drastic change is now taking place in the secret
war planning under way here in America.
The timetable for NUCLEAR WAR ONE has now been speeded up by many
months. My friends, as of now the new target date for an American nuclear sur-
prise attack on Russia is mid-September 1982! That is little more than six
months from now. The reason for this drastic shortening of the war timetable is
a major Intelligence coup which has been scored by the American Bolsheviks
here.
Two high-ranking Soviet generals have recently been spirited out of Russia and
brought here to Washington. These two men are Bolsheviks whom Russia’s
new non-Bolshevik rulers failed to detect and weed out. In Intelligence par-
lance, they remained as moles in Russia’s military apparatus. Now they have
been brought to America, and they bring with them a wealth of data about Rus-
sia’s current military posture! Thanks to these two former Bolshevik Soviet
generals, the secret war planners here now have enough information to plan a
nuclear strike against Russia. If they can refine that information from data from
space shuttle flights Nos. 3 and 4, so much the better; but if neither of the next
two shuttle flights is successful, the war planners intend to wait no longer. They
want to make use of the Intelligence obtained from the two Soviet generals
while it is still fresh, and so the secret war planners here have now set a dead-
line for themselves of mid-September 1982 to attack Russia!
574
Audio Letter 72
As it stands now, my friends, NUCLEAR WAR ONE could erupt at any time
after space shuttle flight No. 4 this summer and well before the end of Septem-
ber.
My friends, I am telling you these things not to panic you but for the opposite
reason. I want you to be able to understand events for yourselves so that you
can take action to protect yourselves and your families. I cannot emphasize
strongly enough that what I am reporting to you are the plans of MEN. If you
see certain things happening, you will know that these war plans are succeeding
and that war is imminent; if you do not see certain parts of the plan happening
in the news, then you will know that the war plans may have hit a snag of some
kind. In that regard I also want to let you know about the biggest of all possible
snags that may soon trip up the American Bolsheviks here.
For some time now I’ve been reporting on the hidden struggle for power that is
dividing the United States Government. On one side are the American Bolshe-
viks whose chief Government operative today is Secretary of Defense Caspar
Weinberger. On the other side is the Rockefeller cartel whose chief Govern-
mental spokesman is Secretary of State Alexander Haig. Weinberger and Haig
are constantly at each other’s throats in the news. This is only a pale shadow of
their intrigues behind closed doors! Caught in the middle is the puppet entity
President Reagan.
Our puppet president was installed by the Rockefeller cartel but has been
largely under Bolshevik control ever since the assassination attempt last March.
Like a marionette, he dances according to whatever strings are being pulled at
the moment by either side. As of now, America’s military is dominated by the
Bolsheviks here, but that was not always so.
The Rockefeller cartel has been regaining power and is now preparing to try to
regain control over the military here. As long ago as 1963, Rockefeller insiders
set up a contingency plan for an eventual military coup d’etat against a puppe-
tized president. I revealed the existence of the plan five years ago this month in
Early stages of the plan were actually set in motion against then President
Carter, but events later that year caused the plan to be aborted. Now the plan for
a Rockefeller cartel-backed military coup is being set in motion again, and this
time it is a crash program intended to be carried out within a matter of months.
As I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 67, the Rockefeller cartel cannot afford
to let their Bolshevik enemies here succeed in setting off nuclear war, therefore
the military coup d’etat must take place before the American Bolshevik surprise
575
attack against Russia. If possible the coup will be carried out before the fourth
space shuttle flight this summer because war will be possible any time after
that.
The man who is in charge of the military coup preparations is a four-star Army
General. That is unusual because coups are usually carried out by lower-rank
officers; but this time the circumstances are very unusual too. The General in
charge of the coup to come, my friends, is General Alexander Haig, presently
Secretary of State. He is looking forward to the day when he can really say,
quote: “I am in charge here.”
Lately Haig has been on major TV programs almost daily. He has also been
traveling almost continuously to help pave the way for the coup d’etat to be ac-
cepted abroad. Most importantly the Russians were informed of the impending
coup during the Haig-Gromyko talks last month. Part of the new quid pro quo
between the Rockefeller cartel and the Kremlin has to do with the coup being
planned here. The Rockefeller group were afraid that the Kremlin would inter-
pret a military coup as a sign that an attack on Russia would follow quickly.
Haig has assured the Russians that this will be an anti-Bolshevik coup and that
the Bolshevik war plans will be terminated. Gromyko was very dubious in his
talks with Haig. He expressed fears that the whole plan will backfire and cause
the American Bolsheviks in the Pentagon to push the button, but Haig finally
extracted an agreement that the Russians will not interfere with the coup nor
use the opportunity to attack the United States. What is brewing now, my
friends, is really a countercoup.
Three years ago the Rockefeller cartel lost its power over the United States
Government in a Bolshevik coup d’etat. I detailed those events at the time, but
otherwise it was generally hidden from public view. Now the Rockefeller cartel
is trying to take back the power they lost three years ago.
If the military take-over does take place it, too, is likely to be largely hidden in
its details from public view. Only one event in the plan is likely to be visible to
all. That event, my friends, will be the sudden death of the entity known as
President Ronald Reagan. If that happens by the end of summer 1982, no matter
what the official story may be, you will know that the military coup d’etat has
taken place.
On the other hand, should something happen to Secretary of State Haig by that
time, it could well mean that the Bolsheviks have foiled the coup.
576
Audio Letter 72
It is all a race against time, my friends, and the stakes in this race involve noth-
ing less than the very survival of our United States!
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
Now it’s time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I’ve had
no choice but to dwell on the subject of approaching war, NUCLEAR WAR.
Nuclear war fever is conditioning us for war, and hostilities are escalating in the
secret war already under way.
While two manned Russian spacecraft are approaching Venus, America’s Space
Program has dwindled to a last-ditch military stab at space. The war timetable
is being speeded up with nothing in sight but a military coup d’etat to stop it.
The situation we face today, my friends, reminds me of a course in “Military

Justice” which l took in Law School in 1950. It was taught by an Army Gen-
eral. He started the first class with a statement that is still ringing in my ears
today. He said:
“If you remember nothing else from this course, make no mistake about one
thing: The United States of America was born in war, and the United States will
die in war.”
577
Audio Letter 73
March 31, 1982
For the past several days two news stories have been competing for top billing
here in the United States. One is the conflict in El Salvador surrounding na-
tional elections, which were held on Sunday, three days ago. The other is the
third space shuttle mission, which ended yesterday.
On the face of it, these two headline events would seem to have little in com-
mon. The brutal civil war in the jungles of Central America seems part of a
different world from that of America’s newest space ship, but the fact is that
these two news stories are related to one another. El Salvador and the space
shuttle are both involved in the complex program leading up to NUCLEAR
WAR ONE. El Salvador is just one hot spot in the growing caldron of deliber-
ate world crises to bring on war, and the space shuttle is being used for secret
military preparations for war itself.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 72 last month I reported that the war timetable of
America’s Bolshevik planners is being speeded up. If their plans succeed, the
time left before the outbreak of all-out nuclear war is measured in months; and
so far, my friends, their plans are succeeding.
All around the world the flames of crisis are continuing to spread. In Central
America the initial crisis in El Salvador has now expanded to include Nicara-
gua, Honduras, and Guatemala. On the day after space shuttle No. 3 took off
this month, a military coup took place in Guatemala—and we haven’t seen any-
thing yet. Soon we will be hearing of new threats to our life line through the
Panama Canal. And the Carter Administration’s giveaway of the Canal does not
become final for nearly 20 more years. As of now the Canal remains a potential
new Pearl Harbor for us.
Overseas, other crises are also continuing to simmer and spread. In Iran the
plans for a new explosion of turmoil are right on track. New developments in
the Iran-Iraq war are paving the way for this. Another factor, as I have previ-
ously reported, is to be the revelation that Ayatollah Khomeini is dead. Early
this month there were harbingers of things to come in the news, especially
579
overseas. For example, on March 6 the BBC quoted a London Times article
questioning whether Khomeini is still alive. The article expressed suspicions
that fake pictures are now being used showing a “double” for Khomeini.
Another simmering crisis is the contrived flap between the United States and
Libya. For the moment it’s on the back burner, but the Libya crisis is one of the
time bombs which the Bolsheviks here can use to help set off the big war to
come. In that regard, there were two major developments this month which
went almost unnoticed in the news, and they are synchronized perfectly with
the over-all war timetable that I made public last month.
First, on March 3 Libya’s Colonel Qaddafi (Khadafy) drew a line in the dust
against the United States. In Tripoli, the Libyan capital, Qaddafi delivered a
fiery speech to listeners gathered for a rally. He reminded them of the Nimitz
episode last August when two Libyan jets were shot down, and he said, quote:
“If America enters the Gulf of Sidra, war in the full sense of the word will be-
gin between us and them—war with planes, navies, missiles, everything.”
Within two weeks the United States promised, in effect, that it will soon walk
across Qaddafi’s line in the dust. On March 16 Navy Secretary John Lehman
declared that the United States will conduct naval exercises again within the
Gulf of Sidra and we will do so within the next six months. Lehman’s statement
was a virtual promise of war to come. It was reported that day by the BBC, but
went unnoticed here in America!
Crises within the Soviet bloc are also continuing. The war in Afghanistan con-
tinues to drag on, thanks to ongoing heavy involvement by the CIA. Poland,
too, is an explosion waiting to happen. Martial law has removed the spark for
that explosion by jailing the leaders of Solidarity. Solidarity was the main tool
of the American Bolsheviks in trying to set off a revolt in Poland, but soon the
Bolshevik war planners here expect to provide a new spark for revolt in Poland.
Last fall the Bolsheviks here re-established the covert influence within the
Vatican which they held briefly three years ago. Now the Bolsheviks here are
trying to revive their old plan called the Pope’s Revolution to occur in Poland.
I gave the details of the original plan in AUDIO LETTER No. 42. It was built
around a planned papal visit to Poland on a highly emotional occasion, the
900th anniversary of the martyrdom of St. Stanislaus. The original “Pope’s
Revolution” plan was foiled by changing the date of the pope’s visit, but now a
new papal visit to Poland may be in the works. The occasion is the 600th anni-
versary of the Black Madonna, the most revered shrine in Poland. The
580
Audio Letter 73
anniversary takes place this summer, my friends, less than six months from
now.
In addition to the existing crises, new crises are also being stirred up—with
more to come. These will be developing in both East and West. Right now a
major new crisis is building up between two NATO members, Greece and Tur-
key. The new government of Greece wants to extricate itself from the war
maneuverings of the Bolshevik-controlled United States and NATO. Washing-
ton is responding with military blackmail. Turkey’s harsh military dictatorship
has designs on sea and land controlled by Greece—and the United States is
egging them on!
Bulgaria and Romania, Soviet bloc neighbors of Greece and Turkey, are also
targeted for turmoil soon. American Bolshevik agents are hard at work there to
create a serious dispute between these two Warsaw Pact members. If they suc-
ceed, it will be just one more Poland-style headache for Russia’s new anti-
Bolshevik rulers.
The American Bolsheviks here are pressing ahead fast in their efforts to bring
on NUCLEAR WAR ONE. In this they are joined by their Zionist partners in
Israel. In AUDIO LETTER No. 67 I described the joint military junta which
today controls the actions of both the United States and Israel. The Reagan-
Begin axis is moving the world steadily closer to nuclear war. Neither govern-
ment is making the slightest effort to act in the true best interests of its own
citizens! This situation is a secret in both countries. It’s as much a mystery to
most Israelis as it is to most Americans.
In both countries there is growing alarm over the locked step toward war. Here
in America this is taking the form of mounting demands for a nuclear weapons
freeze. In Israel the Begin government is facing repeated “no confidence” votes
over its repressive policies toward Palestinians, but both governments are bent
on war and they expect to bring it about before they can be stopped.
The present Begin government repression in the occupied Arab territories have
been calculated with care. They are intended specifically to shatter the shaky
Middle East peace. For one thing, Israeli repression of Palestinians within their
jurisdiction is intended to stir up PLO activity in southern Lebanon. In addition,
Israel’s suspension of political rights for Arabs in the occupied territories is a
violation of the Camp David accords. Instead of negotiating increased auton-
omy for the Arabs, the Begin government is taking away what little autonomy
they already had. These things are intended to produce a chain reaction of
events—that is: PLO raids on Israel, an Israeli invasion of Lebanon, war be-
581
tween Israel and Syria creating a proxy battle between America and Russia, dis-
integrating peace ties between Israel and Egypt, an incident in the Sinai
involving America’s buffer troops there, ensnarement of Saudi Arabia in the
collapsing peace—on and on, wider and wider, ‘seemingly’ out of control.
All these artificial crises are leading fast toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and
when it comes, the Bolsheviks here plan to be ready. For the first time the space
shuttle has been successful in its secret military mission. Even more impor-
tantly, their most ambitious crash-weapons project is now bearing fruit. My
friends, the United States has developed a new superweapon, as revolutionary
as the atom bomb was four decades ago!
Topic #1—THE NEW PHANTOM WAR PLANES OF THE UNITED

STATES
Topic #2—“PROJECT Z”—THE THREE-PHASE STRATEGY FOR

NUCLEAR WAR ONE
Topic #3—THE FIRST MILITARY SUCCESS OF THE SPACE SHUTTLE
Topic #1—On December 6, 1941, President Franklin D. Roosevelt authorized

the spending of funds to begin a supersecret weapons project. Its goal: to de-
velop a giant bomb so powerful that it would make all lesser weapons obsolete
overnight. It was the beginning of what was later called the “Manhattan Pro-
ject.” The project was intended to develop a bomb to fight a war that did not yet
exist, but the very next day, December 7, 1941, Pearl Harbor took care of that.
Just one day after the A-bomb project began, America was at war—right on
schedule.
The Manhattan Project to develop the atomic bomb was the largest, most com-
plex, and most costly military project in history up to that time, and yet it was
conducted in total secrecy. The money spent on the atom bomb project dwarfed
all other weapons programs, yet it was spent without the knowledge of Con-
gress! Entire new laboratories were built, thousands of people were involved,
and yet fewer than 100 persons knew what the Manhattan Project was all about.
The Manhattan Project was to develop a superweapon, something straight from
the pages of Science Fiction. If most people had been asked they would have
said that an atomic bomb was impossible; but in matters like this, public opin-
ion counts for nothing at all. A small handful of scientists knew that it could be
done. They did the seemingly impossible, and they did it in well under four
582
Audio Letter 73
years! The A-bomb project went from a standing start in December 1941 to the
attack on Hiroshima in August 1945.
My friends, I can now report for the first time that a new program like the Man-
hattan Project has been underway here in the United States. Like the atomic
bomb 40 years ago, the new weapon sounds like something straight from the
pages of Science Fiction. Like the Manhattan Project, the new project has been
carried out in utmost secrecy. Vast amounts of money have been spent on it
without the slightest hint to the public or Congress; and just as happened with
the atomic bomb, the new weapon is intended to make its debut in war itself—
and not before.
I first began reporting that crash weapons projects were being started here in the
United States four years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 33. These projects were
started in response to Russia’s surprise military take-over of space in late 1977.
From time to time since then I have reported on the progress of a number of
these secret programs to prepare for war.
In “Operation Desk Top,” ICBMs have been planted in supposedly invulnerable

locations on the ocean floor. In the secret “Minuteman TX” mobile missile pro-
gram a large number of small ICBMs are now shuttling around the United
States in special railroad cars. Meanwhile the phony MX missile controversy
has been used as a cover for this secret project. Then there is the high-power
Laser Program which has led to a number of laser weapons. And, of course,
there is the Space Shuttle program—a desperate attempt to regain a military toe
hold in space.
While we are shown entertaining space movies on TV by NASA, we are never

shown what is really happening on each flight, never. I have given many details
about these secret weapons programs in past AUDIO LETTER reports. Now I
have obtained urgent information about a crash military program which is
shrouded in the deepest secrecy of all. It is an Air Force project involving tech-
nology which is as revolutionary today as the atomic bomb was forty years ago.
This secret superweapon project is the basis for an entire new nuclear war strat-
egy of the American Bolshevik war planners. It is a renegade program totally
unknown both to the public and to Congress. Even within the military this
weapons program is known only within very limited circles. You, my friends,
will understand the reasons for this extreme secrecy when you hear how it is to
be used in the coming war. I will reveal this master war strategy, code named
“PROJECT Z,” in Topic #2.
583
Ever since the summer of 1980 there have been vague reports in the news about
what is called the Stealth Bomber Program. We’re told that ways are being de-
veloped to make a bomber undetectable by radar. We’re also led to believe that
a Stealth Plane will not be operational until 1991. The fact is, my friends, that
these are only cover stories to hide a far more radical weapons program, and it
will be operational not in far-off 1991 BUT THIS YEAR 1982!
The Stealth program is structured very much like the Minuteman TX program
which I made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 55. In the case of the Minuteman
TX, public attention was focused on the alleged MX missile; and, in fact, work
is underway to develop a missile called MX, but all of that was set up primarily
as a cover for the secret Minuteman TX program. It provided a way to camou-
flage research, development, and manufacturing of the TX. Now that the TX
mobile missile system is virtually deployed on our railroads, the MX is gradu-
ally fading from the scene. The furious debate over all those ridiculous MX
race tracks out West is gone, having served its purpose of distraction. And now
there is talk of cutting out funding for the MX in the 1983 Budget. Can you
imagine?
It’s all very much the same with the Stealth Program. Various companies and
laboratories are experimenting with ways to foil radar. These experiments in-
clude special aerodynamic shapes, coatings, electronic countermeasures, and so
on; but all of this is important mainly as a cover and a funding channel for the
really secret work. One product of the covert Stealth projects was called a
“Submersible Aircraft,” or “Subcraft” for short. I first described Subcraft in
AUDIO LETTER No. 37, August 1978, when they were beginning flight tests.
In January 1980 there was an attempt to actually use them against Russia—with
disastrous results. The first public leaks about the Stealth Program took place
six months later in the summer of 1980. Up to that time nothing better than the
unsuccessful Subcraft had been produced, but now the situation has changed.
The biggest gamble of all in the Stealth Program has involved a scientific leap
forward as dramatic as the atomic bomb, and IT IS SUCCEEDING.
What I am about to reveal may sound impossible to some people. If so, just stop
and think about the things that would have seemed impossible 40 years ago
which we take for granted today: jet airplanes, world-wide television, men on
the Moon, local weather forecasts with satellite pictures of planet Earth, lasers,
photocopy machines, frozen food, and computers.
Think what a giant leap in technology was taken in the Manhattan Project to
develop the atomic bomb 40 years ago. For example, there were no computers
in those days. Even the most advanced scientific calculations had to be done by
584
Audio Letter 73
hand with some help from slide rules, adding machines, and mathematical ta-
bles. By contrast, today you can go to a store and buy a hand calculator that will
outperform anything that was available to the A-bomb Project; and a hand cal-
culator like that is a mere toy compared with the powerful high-speed
computers that are common today. In other areas, too, the technology of the
1980’s is a far cry from that of the 1940’s, so just ask yourself: If we could de-
velop the atom bomb using pencils and slide rules, what might we develop
today using computers? And if it took less than four years with the primitive
tools of the 1940’s, why should a crash program today take any longer?
The most secret branch of the Stealth Program, my friends, is developing air-
craft that are invisible to more than just radar. They are invisible even to the
eye. These invisible Phantom war planes carry special electromagnetic gear.
The equipment includes superconducting magnets which are maintained at
temperatures close to absolute zero. This cryogenic equipment creates an enor-
mously powerful electromagnetic field around the aircraft. The field is designed
according to the principles of Einstein’s “unified field theory.”
Einstein never completely finished his unified field theory, but it has been stud-
ied by numerical techniques using computers. By this brute-force method,
enough has been learned to apply unified field theory to the new Phantom war
planes.
When the invisibility field is turned on, a Phantom war plane is encased in a
sort of electromagnetic bubble. Light that strikes the field from any direction
divides, passes around the plane, comes together again on the other side, and
goes on. The effect is like a boulder in a stream—water flowing towards the
boulder divides, goes around it, and then comes together again on the other
side.
To understand why this makes the plane invisible, stop and think how you see
objects. Suppose you look across the room at a chair. Light bounces off the
chair in a certain pattern, travels through the air and strikes your eyes. Your
eyes then recognize the light pattern as a chair. Now suppose someone walks
between you and the chair. Light bouncing off the chair is stopped by the per-
son who’s in the way so you no longer see the chair, instead you see the person
by reflected light.
Now, my friends, consider a new situation. Suppose that the person were en-
cased in a special bubble like that of a Phantom war plane. He steps between
you and the chair. The light waves from the chair strike the bubble, flow around
him, come together again, and continue to your eyes so you still see the chair.
585
But because of the bubble, no light is reflected back from that person, so you
cannot see him—in other words, he is invisible. He is there all right between
you and the chair, but because of the way the light behaves around his protec-
tive shield you cannot see him. This is basically how the invisibility shield
works on a Phantom war plane. The only difference is that the field is not as
sharply defined as a bubble. It is strong close to the plane and grows weaker
with distance. From a distance the plane is totally invisible when it is air-borne.
A Phantom war plane is invisible to the eye and also to radar. Radar is like light
except for wave length, and behaves the same way when it hits the invisibility
shield—it just divides, flows past the plane, converges on the other side, and
continues onward. It does not bounce back so there is no radar return.
Invisibility is the most striking feature of a Phantom war plane but it is not the
most important. The greatest value of the invisibility field is its protection
against Beam weapons. A Phantom war plane is totally immune to lasers be-
cause a laser beam is just intense light. The invisibility field also gives
protection against Russia’s charged particle beam. Charged particles are far eas-
ier to deflect than light, so the charged particle beam is no match for the light-
deflecting shield.
That leaves only neutral beam weapons. Russia’s neutron beam would penetrate
the invisibility shield, but ways have been found to shield against neutron radia-
tion well enough to make neutron beams ineffective in stopping a Phantom war
plane. That’s especially true because extremely effective shielding is part of the
basic design of a Phantom war plane. Without it the gigantic electromagnetic
field, which produces invisibility, would derange electronic instruments as well
as the crew if it is manned.
So the net result is this, my friends: The new Phantom war plane of the United
States is not detectable by conventional means, and it is believed to be invul-
nerable to all of Russia’s beam weapons. Those beam weapons have been the
keys to Russia’s military superiority since late 1977, so the Phantom war plane
is the ideal weapon to attack Russia.
The Phantom war plane has just one major drawback. In a way it’s greatest
strength is also its greatest weakness. When the invisibility field is turned on,
incoming light waves do not strike the plane; instead, the light flows around the
plane, as I have explained. That is what makes the plane invisible to observers
at a distance, but at the same time the field prevents light waves from the out-
side world from reaching the cockpit of the plane. In other words, the pilot
cannot see anything outside the invisibility field. He is required to fly blind.
586
Audio Letter 73
There is only one technique known in the West by which a Phantom war plane
can be navigated. It’s called “Inertial Guidance,” a technique first invented for
ICBMs a quarter century ago. In Inertial Guidance, a computerized system
keeps track of all the forces and maneuvers experienced by the vehicle. By add-
ing these up over time, the system calculates where it is without reference to the
outside world. For a Phantom war plane, the Inertial Guidance problem is very
difficult. The guidance system must operate for as long as several hours while
the plane flies to its target. That gives lots of time for errors to build up which
would send the plane off course, but the problem has been solved.
New Inertial Guidance technology has been developed using Lasers in place of
the old mechanical gyros used on ICBMs, and so the supersecret Phantom war
plane project has succeeded in producing a new superweapon! It’s as revolu-
tionary today as the atomic bomb was nearly a half century ago. Prototypes are
now flying, and a rush production program is already underway. The secret war
planners here expect to have an operational fleet ready by this summer of 1982.
This is now the pacing item in the short new war timetable which I made public
last month in AUDIO LETTER No. 72.
The secret new fleet of Phantom war planes are the key to a complete new Pen-
tagon war plan, which I will reveal in Topic #2. This is why fresh
reconnaissance data on Russian targets is so critical to the war planning here.
When Phantom war planes take off to attack Russia, they will have to know
ahead of time exactly where the target is. Flying blind on Inertial Guidance,
they cannot look around and change course to find a target.
For a year now the Space Shuttle has been making a desperate attempt to obtain
the needed target information from space. It would be the first new data since
Russia destroyed our Spy Satellites four years ago. The first two Shuttle flights
were not successful in their secret military mission; but as I revealed last
month, the American Bolshevik war planners in the Pentagon have scored an
Intelligence coup against Russia, and now Space Shuttle No. 3 has been suc-
cessful. The war planners here are now obtaining the most crucial target data
needed for a Phantom war plane attack against Russia. As a result, a whole new
war plan is now being prepared for the coming nuclear war.
America’s war strategists are now eager for war because they now believe they
can achieve victory over Russia; but, my friends, their concept of victory does
not include you and me. The secret war strategists here are preparing to sacri-
fice America and most of her people on the altar of WORLD DOMINATION!
587
Topic #2—The radically new Phantom war plane is causing an equally radical
revision of the master war strategy of the United States. Elements of several
past strategies are now being blended together to create a new grand plan. It is
this new grand master strategy which America’s war planners are counting on
to bring them victory in NUCLEAR WAR ONE, and they plan to use the war
plan very soon—by the autumn of this year 1982!
Strategic nuclear war planning here in Washington is now being carried out un-
der the code name “PROJECT Z.” The letter “Z” was chosen because it is the
final letter in the alphabet. The war planners here are confident that this is the
last war plan they will need against Russia. War planning under “PROJECT Z”
is so secret that it’s not being done at the Pentagon itself; instead, an elite group
of war strategists have been assembled at a special war room in downtown
Washington. The war room is hidden away in a building which would never be
suspected for the purpose. It’s practically within the shadow of the White
House!
The elite war planners for NUCLEAR WAR ONE constitute a very small
group. Their job is to think in terms of the big picture. They have at their finger
tips computer terminals with which they can access any information they need
from other Government computers. This includes not only Pentagon data banks
but also the computer files of other Government agencies.
As I say these words, the “PROJECT Z” war planners have already arrived at
the broad outlines for their master war plan. Countless details and refinements
still lie ahead, but the basic strategy is already decided! That strategy is what I
am about to reveal to you.
The “PROJECT Z” strategy for NUCLEAR WAR ONE is a three-phase plan—

that is, the war planners intend for the war to proceed in three distinct phases.
These phases are known as:
Phase 1—Initiation
Phase 2—Attrition, and
Phase 3—Domination.
In past reports I’ve given many details about the process which is to lead up to
the coming war. That process is based on ever-increasing world crises, like
those that led up to World War I. We are now seeing that process in full swing
all around us. Within six months from now these deliberate crises are supposed
to provide the spark to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The “PROJECT Z” war
planners are concerned with the military acts from that initial spark onward.
588
Audio Letter 73
Phase #1 in their plan, the Initiation Phase, will begin with an American sur-
prise attack against Russia. The surprise attack will use the new Phantom war
planes. They will be the key to the outcome of the rest of the war.
Some 3-1/2 years ago, in the summer of 1978, I reported that America was
shifting to a first-strike nuclear strategy against Russia. In AUDIO LETTER
No. 37 I described the prime objective of any such American first strike. It will
be to knock out the Earth bases for Russia’s space triad of strategic weapons. If
that can be done, Russia’s overwhelming military power in space will soon
wither and die. That will leave the United States and Russia on more equal
terms for the rest of the war. When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 37, the
plan was to use a combination of Subcraft and unmanned aircraft called RPVs
for the initial attack. That plan was actually attempted over two years ago, as I
reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 53 and 54. It ended in total failure because
Subcraft and RPVs were no match for Russia’s Cosmospheres with their beam
weapons; but now the new Phantom war planes are almost ready, and the plan
is being revived in updated form.
Phantom war planes are intended to be based in at least three countries on Rus-
sia’s doorstep. These basing areas are: northern Norway; eastern Turkey; and
most critical of all, Sinkiang Province in northwestern China. Already high-
power lasers are being moved into those areas. They are equipped with the new
aiming device called CEIR (pronounced seer), which I described last month.
These lasers have the proven ability to shoot down Cosmospheres. They will be
used to protect the Phantom war planes from destruction on the ground by
Cosmospheres.
The Phantom war planes which will be used are unmanned. They are equipped
with robot pilots which can be programmed to fly each plane to a preassigned
target. Each will be programmed for a one-way trip. The invisible robot-piloted
aircraft will fly through Russian air space, invulnerable to any beam-weapon
attacks. Anti-aircraft missiles fired at them will be unable to hone in on them,
and so the “PROJECT Z” planners believe that the robot Phantom planes will
reach their targets.
Those targets are Russia’s four Cosmodromes for rockets plus several Cosmos-
phere installations in central Siberia. The invisible robot planes will crash like
kamikazes into their targets. Seemingly out of a clear blue sky, all of Russia’s
Space bases will suddenly vanish in thermonuclear fireballs. In addition to Rus-
sia’s Space bases, the Phantom war plane assault will also be directed at one
other category of prime targets. Those are the bases for Russia’s flying Anti-
589
missile System, which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 54. The System
consists of a fleet of TU-144 Supersonic Transports equipped with particle-
beam weapons. They are supposed to provide Russia’s final line of defense
against incoming missile warheads. American Phantom war planes will be pro-
grammed to destroy the TU-144 bases.
Phase #1 of the “PROJECT Z” war plan continues on a very tight timetable. If

the invisible war plane attack succeeds, a furious counterattack by Russia is
guaranteed. “PROJECT Z” calls for the United States to beat Russia to the
punch.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 66 last summer 1981, I revealed the plan by which
America’s entire nuclear arsenal is to be fired at Russia. It will be done by cre-
ating a false indication that America is under nuclear attack. The method which
will be employed is known as “Electromagnetic Pulse” or EMP. EMP is a phe-
nomenon associated with nuclear blasts at the fringes of space. As I reported in
AUDIO LETTER No. 66, our Strategic Forces are being programmed to con-
sider an EMP episode to be positive proof of a Russian attack. Under those
circumstances, they are instructed to counterattack against Russia without wait-
ing for any further orders!
In the “PROJECT Z” timetable, the Phantom war plane explosions in Russia

will be followed moments later by nuclear detonations over North America.
These will be the warheads of American high-speed missiles called ACMs.
They will be launched into the sky from various locations around the United
States to create a violent EMP episode. Our Strategic Nuclear Forces, obeying
orders, will launch what they will believe to be retaliation against Russia.
As the American ACMs are launched into the sky over our heads, still another
event is to be underway. Last month I reported that a Russian Cosmosphere had
been shot down for the first time—in January over New Jersey. In the same
way, high-power lasers located in many places around the United States will be
shooting down as many Cosmospheres as possible. By the time our ICBMs are
launched a few minutes later, it’s expected that many of the threatening Cos-
mospheres overhead will have been destroyed. They will be unable to blast all
of our missiles as they are launched, and many will survive to be on their way
to Russia. Thanks to the initial Phantom war plane attack, Russia’s flying ABM
System will also be out of action. Stripped of all her defenses against missile
attack, the Soviet Union will soon be aflame with a sea of nuclear firestorms.
In the “PROJECT Z” war plan, the arrival of American ICBMs on Russian tar-
gets marks the end of Phase #1 of the war, the Initiation Phase.
590
Audio Letter 73
Next comes Phase #2, the Attrition Phase. During Phase #2, the war planners
here envision extreme damage to both the United States and Russia, with the
war gradually running down. First there will be a rain of Russian missile war-
heads on the United States. There will also be missile attacks on certain other
targets around the world where American Military Forces are located; but the
real destruction will be right here in the United States itself!
The “PROJECT Z” war planners do not expect America, as we know it, to sur-
vive a nuclear exchange. Unlike Russia, the United States has no Civil Defense
worthy of the name, let alone hardened blast shelters; and because of the need
for total surprise in the attack against Russia’s Space bases, the ensuing nuclear
exchanges will come without warning. Vacationers will be on beaches, busi-
nessmen will be making deals, housewives will be in supermarkets, children
will be at play. Suddenly air raid sirens may start to blare, as they did on a
summer day in Hiroshima 36 years ago, but it will be too late. The America we
know and love will die in a thousand Hiroshimas. The war schemers have
planned for all that. While you and I and our children vanish from the face of
the earth, they intend to be riding out the attack they have caused in Govern-
ment war bunkers!
Gradually over a period of many months they expect the conflict between Rus-
sia and the United States to sputter out. Both sides will be exhausted and
ruined, both will lose the capacity to carry the war any further. In Russia, the
wounds will be grievous—up to 50-million dead and millions more injured; but
in the United States the wounds will be mortal. The “PROJECT Z” war plan-
ners have figured it out on their computers. If we are lucky, from 40- to 50-
million Americans may survive at the end of NUCLEAR WAR ONE. All the
rest will have been killed outright in nuclear attacks or will have died of injuries
and disease. NUCLEAR WAR ONE will leave medical care virtually nonexis-
tent in what is left of America.
The American Bolsheviks here intend to ride out the war after setting it off.
They will wait until the stalemate point is reached with both sides unable to
fight any longer. That will mark the end of Phase #2, the Attrition Phase.
Finally, the “PROJECT Z” war plan will move into the third and final phase.
That phase is world domination by the Satanic Bolsheviks who now control the
United States Military. In this final phase, the Bolsheviks here in America will
be taking advantage of secret preparations which began long ago. In AUDIO
LETTER No. 28 I described the two-prong strategy for world domination
which the Four Rockefeller Brothers launched in 1961. One side of this twin
591
strategy required the United States to give the impression that it was growing
steadily weaker, disarming unilaterally; but that was only for public consump-
tion. The secret side of the strategy involved an actual build-up of armaments,
in secret.
When the Bolsheviks here seized power from the Rockefellers, they continued
the stockpiling of secret reserves of armaments world-wide. When NUCLEAR
WAR ONE sputters out into exhausted stalemate, they plan to bring these secret
reserves of military power into the open. Even if the entire populations of the
United States and Russia are gone, that will still leave 95% of the world’s popu-
lation alive. With the world’s only surviving major military force, they believe
world domination will be theirs at last.
Topic #3—Yesterday morning March 30 Space Shuttle Flight #3 officially

ended, one day behind schedule. For the first time we got to see a shuttle land-
ing at the White Sands Missile Range, New Mexico. As I detailed last year in
AUDIO LETTER® No. 64, White Sands is the true nerve center of the Space
Shuttle Program.
This third shuttle flight also chalked up another first, and this one was not visi-
ble on television. For the first time, my friends, a space shuttle has succeeded in
its secret military mission. By doing so, the shuttle has removed one more bar-
rier to nuclear war. The accelerated war planning now under way here in
Washington will be able to proceed even faster, thanks to the Space Shuttle.
The third shuttle mission took place nearly one year after the first flight of April
1981. A comparison between the first and third flights is a study in ironies. Last
April, publicity about the first flight was designed to give the impression that it
was unnaturally perfect. Meanwhile, the secret military mission—which we did
not see—was a disaster. This time on Flight #3, it was the other way around.
From start to finish the publicity emanating from NASA gave the impression
that the shuttle was plagued with problems. NASA wanted to be able to explain
it away if disaster should strike again; but as it turned out, the military mission
in space, hidden from our eyes, was a success.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 72 last month I described what that mission was.
Space Shuttle #3 was supposed to orbit a special new Spy Satellite, which I de-
scribed last year in AUDIO LETTER No. 62. It is hardened against attack from
Russia’s space weapons and armed with a robot-controlled laser that can shoot
back. In addition, the shuttle itself was armed with lasers this time, as I detailed
last month.
592
Audio Letter 73
The public image of a troubled, plagued shuttle flight actually got underway
several days before launch, thanks to the weather. Drenching rainstorms turned
Edwards Air Force Base in California, used for the first two shuttle landings,
into a soggy mess. The tight military schedule of the Shuttle Program required
that the flight take off on schedule anyway, so for public consumption a 23-car
railroad train loaded with equipment was sent from California to New Mexico.
Ostensibly, NASA was setting up a spur-of-the-moment landing site at the
White Sands Missile Range. This was done so that the central role of White
Sands in the Shuttle Program would not be suspected by the public.
Space Shuttle #3 lifted off from Cape Canaveral only an hour behind schedule
on Monday morning March 22. Beginning at the moment of lift-off, NASA
started laying the basis for a cover-up story should the military mission fail.
First we heard the prerecorded voice of Shuttle Commander Jack Lousma say-
ing unexplained white flakes were flying past the windshield. Later, after the
shuttle was out of sight, we were told that one of the power packs called an
APU was malfunctioning. These initial hints of possible trouble had been pre-
recorded for broadcast during the launch—for a reason. There was fear that the
shuttle might be destroyed by Russian space weapons before reaching orbit.
Had that happened, the shuttle managers wanted to be able to initiate a cover-up
which would not reveal the military situation; but as it turned out, the prepara-
tions which I detailed last month were successful. Shuttle #3 did reach orbit
successfully, and a key to success was a radical new maneuver added to the
flight plan.
When Space Shuttle #3 took off last week it headed into the northeast. Long-
distance cameras followed it until the two solid rockets separated and fell away.
Then, as the shuttle disappeared from sight, it started its long sweeping turn into
the north. It was heading toward a near-polar orbit so that it would pass over
Russia. This much of the flight plan was the same as in the past, but this time a
critical new feature was added.
Less than 30 seconds after the shuttle disappeared from TV cameras, the cargo-
bay doors were blasted off. This opened up a field of fire for the defensive laser
at the front of the cargo bay, which I discussed in AUDIO LETTER No. 72.
Then the shuttle and its giant external tanks started rotating slowly in a space-
age version of a barrel roll. In World War II, Fighter pilots made use of the bar-
rel roll to avoid bullets from enemy airplanes. Likewise, the Space Shuttle this
month used a barrel roll to protect itself against possible attack from Russian
Cosmospheres. By rotating like a corkscrew, the shuttle made it impossible for
a Cosmosphere to approach safely from any direction. The barrel-roll maneuver
was a very risky one for the shuttle. The shuttle and tank were never designed
593
with such aerobatics in mind, but calculations showed that it should survive a
slow roll, and it did.
One of the biggest questions about the barrel-roll stunt was what it would do to
the astronauts Lousma and Fullerton. They were required to withstand these
dizzying gyrations for about six minutes. At the same time, the shuttle was still
accelerating with up to three times the force of gravity; and because of the pe-
culiar design of the shuttle and fuel tank, the gyrations were sickening indeed.
Military space doctors knew that at best Lousma and Fullerton would be very
sick for some time after reaching orbit. Their wild, crushing, spinning ride
would end abruptly in weightlessness. That is a combination guaranteed to de-
range the equilibrium of even the toughest astronaut. Nothing remotely like it
had ever been done in space before. Doctors were worried that even if Lousma
and Fullerton survived the mission and returned to earth, there could be perma-
nent damage to their equilibrium.
When Lousma and Fullerton reached orbit, they did indeed become violently
ill. That’s why we heard those reports about nausea striking both men. NASA
wanted to pave the way for a plausible public explanation if they should not
appear well when they returned to earth. At the same time, the shuttle planners
knew perfectly well why they were sick. That is why NASA spokesmen acted
so unconcerned when discussing the space sickness with reporters. When they
called it “motion sickness” (quote), they were making an understatement.
When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 72 last month, I reported that the plan
was for Lousma and Fullerton to begin work immediately upon reaching orbit.
Their extensively modified crew compartment was to be depressurized already,
with the two men depending upon their space suits. This plan had to be modi-
fied slightly when the barrel roll was added to the flight plan.
When the shuttle reached orbit the astronauts were in space suits, but the cabin
was still pressurized. They were allowed several minutes to get from the flight
deck to the Gemini-type escape capsule stored below. Once inside the escape
capsule they depressurized the cabin; then the Nose Laser System deployed
automatically to protect the shuttle against any attacks by Russian space weap-
ons. This allowed Lousma and Fullerton to recover from space sickness inside
the capsule.
For the next 24 hours or so, getting well was their main task. It was a period of
vulnerability of depending on the untried Automatic Laser System for protec-
tion. The shuttle planners wanted to have an excuse ready later should the
shuttle be attacked and destroyed. So the day after the launch we were shown
594
Audio Letter 73
TV pictures of missing tiles on the nose of the shuttle. According to those pic-
tures, my friends, at least a dozen tiles in the black area were lost. If that had
really happened, it would have been cause for great alarm. Later on NASA
spokesmen downplayed it, saying the tiles were noncritical. But there is no such
thing as a noncritical black tile. The black tiles supposedly lost are to withstand
temperatures above 1500 degrees Fahrenheit. Under the tile there is nothing but
a piece of felt called a “strain isolation pad.” It would not last five seconds in
those temperatures, and under the felt is the metal skin of the shuttle. It is made
of aluminum, which loses its strength above 350 degrees. If exposed to 1500-
degree heat by a few missing black tiles, the shuttle could not possibly avoid
severe damage.
The NASA space movies we saw on TV were a prerecorded hoax to provide an

excuse if something went wrong, but it did not. The astronauts recovered, went
to work, and deployed the new military satellite. Meanwhile NASA spokesmen
waved aside the alleged tile problem as minor. It had served its purpose and
was no longer needed.
Throughout the rest of the week we heard about one problem after another.
Supposedly the cargo-bay doors would not close, the toilet would not work,
three out of four communication channels went out, one of the three crucial data
display screens in the cockpit failed. None of these stories were true; all were
devised to provide a cover story for possible problems with the secret mission,
but in the end none of them were needed and so NASA spokesmen just waved
them aside as unimportant.
The secret military mission was a success, so the pretended mission which was
cooked up for TV was declared a success, too.
Late Friday night March 26, Lousma and Fullerton finished deploying the new
Super-Spy Satellite. It had taken longer than planned, but it was done. As I ex-
plained last month, they left their shuttle in orbit. They re-entered their Gemini-
type escape capsule, fired its retrorockets, and dropped out of orbit to an Indian
Ocean splashdown. From there they were flown nonstop to the White Sands
Missile Range, New Mexico.
The shuttle managers took advantage of a sandstorm at White Sands to delay

the public landing for one extra day while the astronauts recuperated. Then yes-
terday morning they boarded one of the two remaining secret shuttles at White
Sands. The shuttle took off from the north end of the immense White Sands
Range, using small solid rockets. Moments before 11:00 A.M. it made its ap-
pearance on TV. It swooped in from the north, dropped down over the
595
mountains, and touched down in a cloud of white dust. Finally after a respect-
able wait, out stepped Lousma and Fullerton, rested and refreshed.
My friends, like every other American I find myself wanting to cheer at the
success of Space Shuttle Flight #3. It was achieved against incredible odds, in
the face of Russia’s overwhelming power in space. Determination, ingenuity,
and sheer boldness carried the day. That is how I am tempted to feel—but then
I have to recall the ultimate purpose of all this. The military shuttle managers
are not doing these things to prevent war, BUT TO PREPARE TO FIGHT
ONE! The success of Space Shuttle #3, my friends, has brought us a giant step
closer to thermonuclear war.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
Now it’s time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I’ve re-
ported on major developments now taking place in our headlong rush into
nuclear war. The United States has developed a new secret superweapon, the
invisible Phantom war plane. Its invulnerability to beam weapons makes it the
centerpiece of a whole new war strategy against Russia. This strategy, code
named “PROJECT Z,” involves an American surprise attack on Russia fol-
lowed by all-out war!
Until now the main weakness of the war plan has been the lack of fresh recon-
naissance data on Russia, but now that problem is rapidly being solved. Last
month I reported a major Intelligence coup against Russia by the war planners
here, and now the success of Space Shuttle #3 is adding to the momentum for
nuclear war.
My friends, for many years now our Lord Jesus Christ has held back the holo-
caust that threatens to engulf us. Time after time we have come to the very
brink, only to be pulled back and spared once again.
Our Lord “is not willing that any should perish,” and He has shown us mercy
over and over. But what have we, as a nation, done in response to that mercy?
Have we mended our ways? Returned to Him? And revived the values that
made America great?
The answer, my friends, is found in the words of the prophet Jeremiah, Chapter
5:
“We have spoken falsely of the LORD, and have said He will do nothing. No
evil will come upon us, nor shall we see sword or famine.
596
Audio Letter 73
Behold, I am bringing upon you a nation from afar, says the LORD. It is an en-
during nation, it is an ancient nation, a nation whose language you do not
know.”
My friends, our Satanic Bolshevik leaders here intend to destroy the ancient,
enduring nation of Russia whose language we do not know. But our Lord Jesus
Christ sees all, and He alone will repay!
597
Audio Letter 74
April 30, 1982
It’s now been almost one month since war broke out in the South Atlantic. On
the surface it seems that it’s only a dispute between Argentina and Great Britain
over the barren, wind-swept Falkland Islands and South Georgia Island. In real-
ity, it’s far more than that.
The so-called Falklands crisis is just the visible tip of a giant military operation.
During this month of April 1982, fierce naval battles have taken place—not
only in the South Atlantic but also in the South Pacific. Up to now most of the
hostilities have been kept under wraps by wartime censorship on all sides. But
as I say these words, the naval war in the Southern Hemisphere is about to
come to the surface.
Beginning today, April 30, a total naval and air blockade of the Falklands by
the Royal Navy has begun. At the same time a counterblockade has been de-
clared by Argentina in the same area.
To be effective, a blockade must be imposed over a period of time, but the

Royal Navy does not have that much time. Winter is coming on in the South
Atlantic, and the British supply lines are overextended. Having come this far,
Her Majesty’s navy cannot simply drop the blockade and sail away in a few
weeks time without drawing blood from Argentina. As a result the British will
be forced to undertake military operations very soon no matter how risky they
may be.
There is also another reason why the Royal Navy now has no choice but to en-
gage the Argentine forces in combat. That reason, my friends, is that the Royal
Navy has already suffered losses in secret combat this month. Up to this mo-
ment there will be no way to explain away the damage which has been
sustained by the British fleet. Only when publicly admitted fighting erupts will
the British dare to admit that they have suffered battle losses. To obtain that
cover story, the British have no choice but to sail into combat; but in doing so,
they will be risking even heavier losses on top of those already sustained. In
short, my friends, Her Majesty’s navy has sailed into a trap.
599
The events now unfolding in the South Atlantic carry strange, ironic echoes of
the past. For weeks now we’ve been hearing countless commentators referring
to the British task force as an “armada” (quote). The British of all people ought
to be very uneasy with that description. The original Spanish Armada 400 years
ago was renowned as a seemingly invincible fighting force, but it came to grief
in a naval disaster so complete that it changed the course of history—and it was
none other than the English navy that destroyed the Spanish Armada.
The original Spanish Armada put to sea in 1588 during the reign of England’s
Queen Elizabeth I. The Armada was an invasion fleet carrying thousands of
crack fighting men to invade England. They were met by the daring sea dogs of
Sir Francis Drake. Drake and his small, fast ships turned the tables on the Span-
ish Armada by changing the rules of battle. The English fleet was equipped
with new longer-range guns, and it stayed upwind and out of reach. From there
the English pounded, smashed, and shattered the big ships of the mighty Ar-
mada. When it was all over, barely half the Spanish fleet was left to limp back
to port. Drake’s defeat of the Spanish Armada was a shock to the world. It
opened the door for England under Queen Elizabeth I to start its expansion into
a truly global empire.
Today, 400 years later, history seems to have come full circle. Queen Elizabeth
II is witnessing the dismantling of the world empire whose heyday began under
Queen Elizabeth I, and now the cultures of England and of Spain are once again
in confrontation. Once again a so-called armada is preparing for invasion, but
this time the armada is British, not Spanish. Four hundred years ago Sir Francis
Drake was the hero of the day; today, the ghost of Francis Drake is once again
on the scene.
The South Atlantic war zone is at the eastern end of the Drake Passage around
the southern tip of South America. The defeat of the Spanish Armada four cen-
turies ago broke the back of Spain’s naval supremacy, and now the defeat of the
new British armada may well break the back of what remains of the once glori-
ous Royal Navy.
Topic #1—THE MILITARY SECRET OF SOUTH GEORGIA ISLAND
Topic #2—THE SECRET NAVAL WAR OF THE SOUTHERN

HEMISPHERE
600
Audio Letter 74
Topic #3—THE ROCKEFELLER FEAR CAMPAIGN AGAINST NUCLEAR

WAR.
Topic #1—When the Falkland Islands crisis began early this month it looked at
first like a tempest in a teapot. For a century and a half since 1833, the Islands
have been controlled by Great Britain. During that entire time, British sover-
eignty over the Falklands has been disputed by Argentina. There have been
countless threats by Argentina to seize the Islands, which it calls the Malvinas,
but the threats have always come to nothing in the past and Britain has never
even gotten very worried about them.
The Islands are four times as distant from Argentina as Cuba is from the United
States, and they are not much of a prize. After 150 years of occupancy, the
Falklands are home to fewer than 2,000 British settlers and a lot of sheep. In
short, the remote Falkland Islands hardly look like something to fight over, and
yet here we are watching another crisis take place. We are watching as war
erupts between Great Britain and Argentina.
The Thatcher government is acting as if it has forgotten all about its usual pre-
occupation with the Soviet threat at NATO’s doorstep. Instead, Britain is
throwing almost everything it’s got at Argentina—aircraft carriers, cruisers, de-
stroyers, submarines, assault ships—you name it. Luxury cruise ships have
even been commissioned and turned into troop carriers overnight. Wave after
wave of additional assault troops have been activated and sent to join the fleet
even after it sailed. Ships and submarines have been pulled off station from
normal NATO duty and sent to reinforce the task force. The initial 40-ship
force has grown steadily over the past several weeks into an armada numbering
over 70. Over two-thirds of the entire Royal Navy has already been deployed to
the South Atlantic off Argentina.
Watching all this, a lot of people are asking: What’s this fight really all about?
The most popular answer suggested in the major media is “oil.” Vast deposits
of oil are known to exist under the continental shelf between Argentina and the
Falklands, but that has been known for nearly 10 years. In no way does it ex-
plain the timing of the sudden military offensive by Argentina this month, and
oil explains even less about the Argentine seizure of South Georgia Island.
South Georgia Island is 800 miles east of the Falklands with no known oil de-
posits anywhere near it; and compared to South Georgia, the Falklands are an
island paradise. South Georgia Island is covered with rugged mountains,
treacherous valleys, glaciers, and semi-permanent snow. Most of it is uninhab-
601
itable. On top of all that, Argentina has absolutely no legal or historical claim to
South Georgia Island. In that respect it stands in sharp contrast to the Falklands.
In the early 1830s the Falklands were occupied for a while by Argentine colo-
nists. In 1833 the British expelled them and took over the Island. For that and
other historical reasons, Argentina argues that the Falklands really belong to
Argentina, not Britain.
But no such argument is possible for South Georgia Island. It has always been
controlled by Britain, never by Argentina or Spain. The Argentine seizure of
South Georgia Island looks even more unreasonable from a military point of
view. Argentina’s leaders are military men and they think in military terms.
They were well aware ahead of time that far-off South Georgia Island could not
possibly be held for long. By seizing it they were setting themselves up to ab-
sorb a military defeat, as the Island was retaken by Britain. So the question is:
Why did Argentina’s military junta bother with the seemingly worthless South
Georgia Island at all?
My friends, the answers to all these questions are military, not political or eco-
nomic. South Georgia Island possesses an enormous military secret. It’s a giant
underground installation buried under the mountains at the northwest end of the
Island. The real reason for the so-called Falkland crisis is this secret installa-
tion, together with two other similar installations which I will describe shortly.
The secret military complexes have been in existence for many years; they are
not new. What is new is the accelerated nuclear war timetable of the American
Bolshevik war planners here in Washington. For the past two months I’ve been
reporting the details of this new war plan to you as quickly as I can obtain and
verify them.
The plan calls for NUCLEAR WAR ONE to erupt by September of this year
1982!! It is this fast-approaching nuclear war threat that caused the so-called
Falklands crisis to erupt now.
What is going on now is a coordinated effort to spoil part of the Bolshevik

grand strategy for the coming nuclear war. The mutual enemies of the Ameri-
can Bolsheviks here—namely, the Rockefeller cartel—and Russia’s new rulers
in the Kremlin are behind the present crisis. They are trying to ruin Phase #3 of
the “PROJECT Z” war plan which I revealed last month. That phase is to be
world domination by the American Bolsheviks after both Russia and the United
States have been destroyed in NUCLEAR WAR ONE. As I mentioned last
602
Audio Letter 74
month, the key to this plan is the existence of secret weapons stockpiles in vari-
ous places around the world.
The American Bolshevik military planners here in America are working with
other Bolshevik agents in key military positions of other countries to set off
war. Having done that, they intend to ride out the nuclear holocaust they have
caused, safe and cozy in Government war bunkers! When the warring nations
finally lie smoldering and exhausted, the Bolsheviks will leave the shattered
remains of their host countries. They will rendezvous at the secret weapons in-
stallations and bring their weapons into the open. They will confront the world
with the only remaining fresh, up-to-date, powerful military force on earth; and
using that military power, they will become the undisputed rulers of the
world—that is, they plan to do all this, and they plan to pave the way for world
domination very soon by setting off NUCLEAR WAR ONE in a matter of
months. The Rockefeller cartel and Russia’s new anti-Bolshevik rulers are
working together in a race against time to try to head off the Bolshevik war
plan.
Last month I mentioned that the Bolsheviks here are benefitting from war
preparations which were started by the Rockefellers long ago. It has only been
about three years since the Rockefellers were dislodged as the prime movers of
the United States Government by the Bolsheviks. Since that time the United
States Government has been a house divided, torn by internal power struggles
between rival Bolshevik and Rockefeller factions. But before that, the United
States had been dominated for decades both economically and politically by the
Four Rockefeller Brothers.
In 1961 the Brothers launched a new long-range plan for world domination. It
was a two-prong strategy, half visible and half secret, which I first described
long ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 28. It was a plan for the United States to arm
to the teeth in secret while appearing to disarm gradually. Without repeating all
the details, the basic idea was grandiose yet simple. By deliberately appearing
weak, the Rockefeller-controlled United States would maneuver itself into a
nuclear war with Russia. Then the secret weapons, including superweapons,
would be unleashed to smash Russia and take over the world.
When they set the grand plan in motion in 1961, the Rockefeller Brothers were
looking ahead to a nuclear war by the late 1970s. Their military analysts con-
cluded very early that the war being planned would have very different effects
on the Northern and Southern Hemispheres. Both superpowers, the United
States and the Soviet Union, are located well up in the Northern Hemisphere; so
are the other full-fledged nuclear powers—Great Britain, France, Red China,
603
and India. By contrast, the strategic targets for nuclear war in the Southern
Hemisphere are relatively few and far between. In other words, it was expected
that the coming nuclear war would be essentially a Northern Hemisphere war.
In an all-out nuclear holocaust it is known that serious radioactive fallout will

gradually spread to affect even areas not initially hit by war. But there are limits
to how far the war clouds can spread. It was discovered long ago that there is
very little mixing between the air of the Northern and Southern Hemispheres. In
the northern half of our planet, cold air from the North Pole works its way
southward towards the equator, then it works its way back to the north as warm
air. A mirror image of this process takes up the southern half of the planet.
Northern and Southern Hemisphere air meet in the equatorial zone, but very
little of the air changes places.
The military conclusion, my friends, is this: the coming nuclear war could ruin
large areas of the Northern Hemisphere for generations to come; but if the cal-
culations are right, the Southern Hemisphere could escape virtually unaffected
by the war. This was music to the ears of the Four Rockefeller Brothers. A
quick look at the globe of the world shows why. The Rockefeller cartel has
dominated Latin America ever since World War II. As I discussed in my very
first monthly AUDIO LETTER, Nelson Rockefeller solidified the cartel grip on
Latin America during the war. He accomplished this as so-called “Coordinator
of Hemispheric Defense” for then-President Franklin D. Roosevelt. So that
takes care of the South American continent and its natural resources.
Then there is the African continent. There, too, Rockefeller control was already
in effect over wide areas of Black Africa, especially south of the equator. All
this was thanks to the efforts of John D. Rockefeller III, as I detailed in AUDIO
LETTER No. 36.
Looking around the globe, the most important remaining land masses from the
standpoint of world domination are Australia and New Zealand. Thanks to
World War II, both were wide open to the Rockefellers.
The Rockefeller Brothers decided to establish secret military installations in the

Southern Hemisphere for use after the coming war. By this means they ex-
pected to become the masters of the surviving southern half of planet Earth
after the Northern Hemisphere war. Then, as the Northern Hemisphere gradu-
ally recovered from the nuclear holocaust, the Rockefeller empire would be
able to pick up the pieces. In this way the third generation Rockefeller Brothers
expected their family dynasty to inherit the Earth.
604
Audio Letter 74
In order to control the Southern Hemisphere militarily after the war, some
means would have to be available to project military power onto any land mass.
For example, revolts against Rockefeller domination would require troops—not
a blast from the beam weapons on the Moon. The most critical factor for post-
war military domination of the world was found to be a navy. A minimum of
two secret naval fleets would be required—one based in the South Atlantic, the
other in the South Pacific. Since the reserve naval fleets were to be kept secret
until after the Northern Hemisphere nuclear war, they could not be built in ex-
isting shipyards. New construction facilities had to be built and they had to be
hidden. To hide an entire shipyard is no small task; they take up a lot of space.
On top of that, it was essential that the ships remain hidden after they were
built. The best way to achieve that was to combine the shipyard and naval base
into one over-all secret installation. Finally, the secret naval installation had to
be invulnerable to nuclear attack; otherwise if its existence were ever discov-
ered prematurely, the secret navy might be wiped out.
The combined requirements for secrecy, space, and protection against attack
were formidable; but one day in 1959, while all these plans were still in the
early stages of development, the answer presented itself. During a so-called
banking trip to Sweden, David Rockefeller was given a tour of a unique hidden
naval port. The port is hollowed out from solid granite cliffs which come right
down to the water. The entrance to the port is a gigantic hole in the side of the
cliff which can be sealed off with enormous steel doors. Inside this big doorway
on the water a huge cavity has been hollowed out to accommodate ships.
The Rockefeller Brothers and their military adviser decided that a bigger, more
secret, better protected version of the Swedish hidden port was just what they
wanted. A survey of candidate sites was then initiated. The site survey covered
coastal areas throughout the Southern Hemisphere. Many areas were rejected
very quickly because the topography was wrong.
Other areas were rejected because they were too close to the equator. Still oth-
ers had to be ruled out because there were too many people living nearby,
making the desired level of secrecy impossible. Finally, it was essential that the
sites chosen for the secret naval installations be totally secure politically.
At last the sites for the secret naval installations were selected. In the South Pa-
cific, extreme southern New Zealand was selected. This is what I was alluding
to in AUDIO LETTER No. 71 three months ago when I called attention to New
Zealand’s extreme importance in the coming war.
605
In order to obtain the necessary space, the secret New Zealand naval installation
had to be divided up into two sites located close together. One is at the extreme
southwest tip of South Island where the mountain range known as the Southern
Alps comes down virtually to the water’s edge. The other part of the installation
is built into the northwest tip of Stewart Island, which is off the tip of South Is-
land. The Stewart Island facility is hollowed out within a rise known as Mt.
Anglem.
The New Zealand location met all the requirements. Ever since World War II
the government of New Zealand has been tied even closer to the United States
than to Great Britain. The location is far from the equator, and the installations
are buried deep under mountains, protected from nuclear attack. They are also
too deep to be reached by particle-beam attacks, and the New Zealand site is
well situated to command the entire South Pacific.
In the South Atlantic an even more perfect site was found. That site, my friends,
is South Georgia Island. It is located perfectly for naval domination of the en-
tire South Atlantic. The tall, rugged mountains provided a perfect location for
the secret installation at the northwest tip of the 100-mile long island. It is con-
trolled by Great Britain whose government, like that of New Zealand, was
willing to cooperate; and South Georgia Island was virtually uninhabited except
for a whaling station on the northeast coast. The whaling station was some 50
miles away from the secret new installation which was being built, but Britain
took no chances. In 1965 the whaling station was closed down. Since that time
there have been no inhabitants on South Georgia Island except for a few dozen
alleged Antarctic scientists.
Construction of the secret naval facilities—two in New Zealand, one on South

Georgia Island—began in the early 1960’s. The techniques were adapted from
those used previously to build other large underground facilities, such as the
NORAD installation inside Cheyenne Mountain, Colorado; however these
techniques were adapted in radically new ways to achieve construction access
directly from the sea instead of overland. In this way, the sheltering mountain
was left undisturbed in appearance both during and after construction.
The cuts in the mountain side which were necessary to let ships in and out were
kept as small as possible and were well camouflaged. Like the Swedish hidden
naval port arrangement, the entrances to the secret installations can be sealed
up. When sealed, the entrance is virtually impossible to detect unless you know
exactly where it is; and unlike most large construction projects, there are no
tailings or piles of leftover rock lying around to attract attention. The man-made
606
Audio Letter 74
caverns which house the secret naval installations are enormous, but all the rock
and debris was disposed of at sea.
Once the secret naval facilities were built, they had to be outfitted for ship con-
struction and docksite storage. The fake disarmament of the United States
during the 1960s contributed greatly to this task. From 1961 to 1968 one man
played a pivotal role in this elaborate Rockefeller scheme. He was then-
Secretary of Defense Robert McNamara. All through the 60’s McNamara pre-
sided over the public paring back of America’s visible military power. This
included the closing down and dismantling of entire shipyards. What we were
not told was where all that shipyard equipment went afterwards. Where it went,
my friends, was to the new secret installations which were being outfitted in
New Zealand and South Georgia Island!
The secret naval installations have been used as duplication facilities to repro-
duce certain ships and submarines designed and built here in the United States.
As Defense Secretary Caspar Weinberger told Congress recently, it is cheaper
to build two ships at a time. That is especially true if the second ship is an exact
duplicate of the first. This has become even more true in recent years through
the use of computerized manufacturing techniques.
The secret naval fleets which have been built at the secret installations are made
up of duplicates—exact duplicates of certain other ships and submarines. They
are all nuclear powered—nuclear “subs”; nuclear cruisers; nuclear destroyers;
and yes, nuclear aircraft carriers, three of them. A secret twin was built for the
U.S.S. Nimitz, for the U.S.S. Eisenhower, and for the newly-launched U.S.S.
Carl Vincent. All have been financed through the gigantic cost overruns, so
called, that we constantly hear about in the Defense Department; and all three
carriers have been provided with a full complement of aircraft whose manufac-
ture was financed the same way!
The ships of the secret American Bolshevik naval fleets are all duplicates of
other nuclear-powered vessels. Even so, the secret naval ships possess one key
difference.
Last month I revealed that the so-called “Stealth Program” has succeeded in
developing a kind of electromagnetic invisibility shield. This technique makes
an object invisible from a distance by distorting light waves in its vicinity.
A whole new fleet of Phantom war-planes are now going into crash production
that use this principle; and, my friends, all of the secret American Bolshevik
navy ships have already been outfitted with similar Stealth-field equipment!
607
The Stealth principle is actually easier to apply to ships than to airplanes be-
cause there is more room for the powerful equipment that generates the field.
After NUCLEAR WAR ONE, the secret Stealth navy of the American Bolshe-
viks would be light years ahead of any other navy left on earth. It would be
perfect for the intended role of world domination. The Rockefellers set it all in
motion long ago, my friends, but three years ago they lost control of the United
States Military. Now it’s the American Bolsheviks who are in control, and they
are bent on war.
These secret naval installations have precipitated what is being called the “Falk-
lands crisis.”
Topic #2—In AUDIO LETTER® No. 73 last month I described “PROJECT

Z,” the new Bolshevik three-phase strategy for NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
An elite group of American Bolshevik military planners here are flushing out
the plan right now at a secret war-room here in Washington. It’s a plan by
which the United States will strike the first nuclear blow, followed by all-out
thermonuclear war with Russia.
Having set off the holocaust, the Bolsheviks here and in certain other countries
plan to rise it out safe in comfortable war bunkers. Finally after NUCLEAR
WAR ONE fizzles out in stalemate, they plan to leave behind the ashes of the
United States and her allies. Activating Phase #3 of their grand strategy, they
plan to unveil their secret weapons, especially their secret naval fleets. With
these they plan to conquer and rule what is left of the world. The United States
as we know it will be dead and gone; but in the eyes of the Bolsheviks them-
selves, this outcome will constitute victory.
Up to now the nuclear war timetable which I first revealed two months ago is
still on track. They are still shooting for nuclear war to begin by September of
this year 1982! Time is fast running out.
The Bolsheviks here are sprinting as fast as they can toward war; but, my
friends, the Bolsheviks are not the only runners in this race. They have two
deadly enemies, both of whom are equally determined to trip up the Bolsheviks.
One enemy of the Bolsheviks here is the Rockefeller cartel; the other enemy is
the new anti-Bolshevik ruling clique in Russia; and now these two mutual ene-
mies of the Bolsheviks are pooling their efforts in certain ways.
608
Audio Letter 74
In AUDIO LETTER No. 71 three months ago I reported that a limited, new
anti-Bolshevik coalition was in the works between the Rockefeller cartel and
the Russians. The January 26 meeting between Haig and Gromyko in Geneva,
Switzerland, was a turning point in the formation of this coalition. It is now a
reality, and is responsible for the so-called “Falkland crisis” now dominating
the headlines. It should be emphasized that this new relationship between the
Rockefeller cartel and Russia falls far short of a true alliance. They have very
major disputes to be settled between them, but for the time being they have
called a truce between themselves to deal with their mutual deadly enemy—the
Bolsheviks here in America.
The first priority of the Russians and the Rockefellers is to slow down the Bol-
shevik preparations for imminent nuclear war. If they can do that, time is on the
side of the Rockefeller cartel in certain political movements which I discussed
last summer in AUDIO LETTER No. 67. A slow-down in the nuclear war time-
table will also give more breathing space for additional anti-Bolshevik actions
to be implemented.
The joint Rockefeller-Russian planners decided by mid-February that military

action against the Bolsheviks was essential very quickly. No other type of ac-
tion had any hope of taking effect fast enough to prevent nuclear war by the end
of this summer.
The exact details of the “PROJECT Z” war plan are not known to either the
Rockefellers or the Russians, but the general outlines are known to be as I de-
scribed last month.
It was decided that military action should be devised that would undermine
Phase #3 of the Bolshevik war plan—that is, the Bolshevik-controlled secret
naval installations and fleets in the Southern Hemisphere should be attacked
and crippled. By working together, the Rockefeller cartel and the Russians were
able to devise an attack plan which neither could have carried out alone. The
Rockefeller group, who built and originally controlled these bases, provided
detailed Intelligence about the best way to attack them. The Russians with their
enormous military machine provided the muscle to actually carry out the attack.
It was essential to devise a scheme that would enable both secret fleets in the
South Atlantic and South Pacific to be attacked. Survival intact of either fleet
would leave the Bolshevik war plan still workable.
Military analysts concluded very quickly that a direct assault on the New Zea-
land facilities was out of the question. There was no combination of
609
commandos, frogmen, or other military force which could possibly keep an at-
tack secret from the outside world. Any attack on the New Zealand bases would
set off the very war which the Rockefellers and Russians want to prevent.
But the situation in the South Atlantic was a different matter. In a way, the
greatest asset of South Georgia Island was also its Achilles’ heel. The extreme
isolation which protected the secrecy of the South Georgia base also made a
covert military assault feasible. The key lay with Argentina and her long-
standing claims to the Falkland Islands.
As I mentioned in Topic #1, the Rockefeller cartel has dominated all of Latin
America for decades. Cartel operatives were sent to Argentina to work out a
deal with the government military junta there. The historic dispute over the
Falkland Islands was to be used to provide a ruse, a military cover, to enable the
South Georgia base to be attacked. The Argentine generals were not told every-
thing about the situation by any means, but they were told enough to make clear
what they were to do.
As an inducement to cooperate, the Argentine leaders were promised handsome

rewards. They were guaranteed that after the shooting was over, the Falkland
Islands would remain in Argentine hands. This guarantee included the promise
of covert military assistance as needed against the Royal Navy. And to bolster
the troubled Argentine economy, it was promised that the Rockefeller cartel
will help develop the immense offshore oil reserves. With these combined
promises of military glory and financial rewards, the Argentine military junta
agreed to the plan.
On March 19 Argentina carried out Act #1 in the joint attack plan. A group of
Argentine scrap-metal merchants, of all things, landed at the abandoned old
whaling station on South Georgia Island. Supposedly they were there to dis-
mantle the old buildings and cart them off to sell. While they were at it they
also raised the Argentine flag over the work-site. The British, always nervous
about South Georgia Island, promptly reacted as expected. The British Antarc-
tic survey ship “Endurance” put 22 Marines ashore. They drove off the scrap
merchants and tore down the Argentine flag.
The incident provided the desired excuse for the Argentine Junta to bring the
simmering 150-year-old Falklands dispute to a boil. From time to time in the
past, Argentina has claimed that South Georgia is part of the Falklands because
it is administered that way by Britain. That argument is very flimsy but it now
came in very handy. It was nothing new to hear this from Argentine leaders, so
there was no hint of what was really afoot.
610
Audio Letter 74
During late March, Argentine military forces started assembling for an assault
on the Falklands. “Nothing new,” thought the British high command. Argentina
has carried out threatening maneuvers in the past many times. It was believed
that they were about to do it again; but on April 2 Argentine forces did the un-
expected. After many past false alarms, this time they actually invaded and
seized the Islands. All Argentine public statements emphasized the long-
standing historical claims to the Falklands themselves; but just for good meas-
ure, the next day a small Argentine force also seized far-off South Georgia
Island. The force was so small that it gave the appearance initially that it was
just a side show from Argentina’s point of view; however, the small contingent
of 22 Royal Marines were overpowered and bundled off the Island along with a
group of 13 alleged scientists. That was the moment of payoff in the joint
Rockefeller-Russian attack plan.
Thanks to the elaborate distraction staged by the Argentine forces, a special

commando team got onto the Island undetected. Based on the detailed Rocke-
feller information about the base, the team moved to a location on the mountain
directly above the cavernous secret base. Special high-speed drilling equipment
was set up by the Rockefeller members of the team while the Russian members
concentrated on military defense. By late that evening, April 3, the military
high command in London finally learned what was really taking place. The se-
cret South Georgia base was under attack by virtually the only means possible.
The joint Rockefeller-Russian team were drilling a shaft down through the
mountain toward the hollowed out cavern inside. It was only a matter of time
until their drill would break through the ceiling of the giant hidden naval base.
Once the hole was made, the next step was obvious. The Rockefeller-Russian
team would put a weapon of some kind through the hole. The best guess was
that it would be a nerve gas.
The shock waves that went through the highest levels of the British government
on the evening of April 3 can hardly be described, my friends. The Thatcher
government, like the so-called Reagan Administration here in America, is Bol-
shevik controlled. That’s why Margaret Thatcher always says, “Me, too” any
time the Reagan Administration says or does anything against Russia. Both
governments are party to the secret nuclear war plan in complete betrayal of the
people of their respective countries, and on the evening of April 3 they sud-
denly discovered that their precious war plan was in deep, deep trouble.
Immediately the Thatcher government started assembling a naval armada to sail

for the South Atlantic. Haste was the order of the day. The drilling on South
Georgia Island was proceeding around the clock. The best estimates were that
611
the drilling would break through into the roof of the naval base in about three
weeks, on or about April 24. If help did not reach South Georgia by then, the
secret installation might be doomed. The forces stationed at the installation it-
self were unable to defend themselves under the circumstances. Their mighty
naval ships were ships in a bottle. They did not dare open the bottle to sail out
to fight because the Russian commandos were armed with tactical and nuclear
weapons. To open the blast-proof entrance doors would be suicide.
On April 5, just two days after South Georgia Island was seized, some 40 naval
ships began moving out of British ports. The same day Lord Carrington was
sacked as Foreign Minister. He was forced to resign, my friends, because he
had assisted the Rockefeller attack plan by downplaying the Argentine attack
preparations.
That same day, April 5, New Zealand, the home of the other secret naval fleet,
broke diplomatic relations with Argentina. The two hidden New Zealand facili-
ties had been placed on “Red Alert.” As a precautionary measure, all
submarines at the twin base were ordered to sea. Several surface ships were al-
ready at sea undergoing “sea trials,” but that still left seven (7) major ships
inside the hidden twin naval base including one of the nuclear aircraft carriers I
mentioned earlier.
On that busy day of April 5, Argentina’s Foreign Minister, Costa Mendez, was
at the United Nations in New York. He was alarmed by the deployment of such
a large part of the Royal Navy. Costa Mendez hurried here to Washington to
seek reassurances from certain officials. He got them!
For the next two weeks or so the news was filled with stories about the alleg-
edly slow movement of the British fleet while negotiations went on. That, my
friends, was only a cover story. The Royal Navy was actually joining up and
moving as rapidly as possible toward South Georgia Island. If the task force
arrived in time to save the secret base, a major battle was likely. The official
stories about “slow movement” of the British armada were intended to give a
cushion of time for that battle. If need be, the fleet would have several days to
retake South Georgia Island, then it could move on to arrive near the Falklands
on the announced schedule. In this way the crucial importance of South Georgia
Island would be hidden and the big secret preserved.
It was initially expected that advance elements of the British fleet would reach
the vicinity of South Georgia Island within two weeks. That would have been
soon enough to attack the joint Rockefeller-Russian commando team and stop
612
Audio Letter 74
the drilling before it was completed. But Russian Cosmospheres and subma-
rines made a shambles of the plan.
Key advance elements of the South Georgia attack contingent left Ascension
Island early April 14, two days before it was announced officially. Shortly after
they did so, they ran into trouble. Russian Cosmospheres and attack submarines
closed in on a single ship which was critical to the planned counterassault on
South Georgia Island. The Cosmospheres bombarded the bridge and combat
information center of the ship with neutron radiation. In moments the ship was
without any command, its communications and radar silenced. Then a Russian
“sub” closed in and quickly finished off this key British ship with torpedoes. It
broke apart with secondary explosions and sank rapidly. So far as is known,
there were no survivors.
This unexpected shock in the mid-Atlantic produced two results, both impor-
tant:
First, it caused a slowdown in the race toward the South Atlantic by the British
armada. The task force had to be regrouped into a configuration better suited for
an enroute defense, but that cost valuable time. Public announcements from
London about the progress of the fleet reflected this slowdown. The timetable
for arrival on battle stations near the Falklands started stretching out longer and
longer. All this bought extra time for the joint commando team on South Geor-
gia Island. The drilling continued.
The other result of the sinking was equally important. Word was flashed to the
South Pacific Stealth navy to prepare for possible action. It was obvious that the
Russian Navy was getting involved in the Atlantic, which meant that the Royal
Navy could be in big trouble. During the dead of night, early April 15, the
seven Stealth ships put to sea from their twin secret bases in southern New Zea-
land. They deployed to a secret operational headquarters area in the Antipodes
Islands, 450 miles southeast of New Zealand. Their electromagnetic shields
were operating to provide protection from attack. These shields make it impos-
sible to communicate with the outside world or even to see it, as I explained last
month; but once they arrived at the Antipodes, the Stealth ships hooked up to
buoys equipped with shielded communication cables to the Island headquarters.
The Antipodes headquarters, in turn, was in constant touch with the South
Georgia base by way of a transoceanic cable around the tip of South America.
The deployment of the available ships of the South Pacific Stealth fleet was ex-
actly what the joint Rockefeller-Russian planners had hoped for. The ships had
been flushed out from their essentially invulnerable hiding place in New Zea-
land!
613
The British ship’s sinking of April 14 was also followed by other events. On
April 15 the Argentine Navy started moving out of port. The same day, Alex-
ander Haig arrived again in Buenos Aires. Supposedly he was there as a
diplomat, but in reality he was there as a General, dealing with Generals. Haig
is the top Governmental operative of the Rockefeller cartel, as I have revealed
in the past. He was making sure that the Argentines did not get cold feet and
back down at that critical moment. Four days later, April 19, Haig left for
Washington. As he boarded his plane, Haig somberly told reporters, “Time is
running out.” And so it was, my friends, for the secret South Georgia base.
The very next day, April 20, the drill broke through into the hollowed-out cav-
ern of the naval base. Bolshevik military analysts in London had not expected
that it could be completed until at least the following weekend. The British fleet
was still out of range.
The weapon which the commando team inserted down through the long hole
was a small, compact Russian neutron bomb. When it was detonated inside the
confines of the huge artificial cave, the effects were devastating. The intense
radiation instantly killed everyone inside the base. Also the heat and blast ef-
fects of the bomb are believed to have damaged all the ships inside sufficiently
to badly disable them.
Meanwhile, Russian Cosmospheres and submarines were converging on the

Stealth ships which were near the Antipodes Islands awaiting orders. From a
distance, the ships were invisible to the eye due to their protective shields,
which also protect against beam-weapon attack; but they were sitting ducks for
the tactics which the Russians employed.
Floating overhead, the Cosmospheres located the seven ships using their Psy-
choenergetic Range-Finding equipment known as PRF. As I have reported in
the past, there is no method known by which PRF can be jammed. The Cos-
mospheres radioed the exact locations of the ships to the attack submarines. The
“subs” were armed with special non-homing, non-nuclear torpedoes designed to
explode on impact. More sophisticated torpedoes would have been thrown off
course or detonated prematurely by the protective shield of each ship; but these
simple torpedoes just cruise right through each invisibility field to strike the
ship and explode. Within 15 minutes after the attack began, all seven Bolshevik
Stealth ships were on their way to the bottom, and with them went their Bol-
shevik Commanders and mercenary crews collected from around the world.
614
Audio Letter 74
The South Pacific action took place just after sunset local time. The time here in
Washington was around 2:00 P.M. April 23. That evening Secretary of State
Haig was seen briefly in public with the new British Foreign Minister, Francis
Pym. Pym was wearing the artificial pseudo-smile which diplomats are taught
always to display in public. But not Haig. Haig was grinning from ear to ear,
and no wonder. The joint Rockefeller-Russian military operation had been a
brilliant success. The secret Bolshevik South Atlantic fleet had been virtually
wiped out, bottled up inside South Georgia Island; and the South Pacific fleet,
while not totally wiped out, had been badly crippled. By working together, the
Rockefeller cartel and the Russians had won the secret naval war of the South-
ern Hemisphere.
Topic #3—As I say these words, news reports give the impression that war is
about to erupt in the South Atlantic, but the real war in the Southern Hemi-
sphere is already over. What we are watching now is the beginning of its
bloody aftermath. That aftermath is the battle for the Falkland Islands. They
have been promised to Argentina as a reward for her role in the secret war.
At this moment the Bolsheviks here in Washington are pressing for a public
announcement that the United States will side with Britain. As soon as that
takes place, military action will heat up fast around the Falklands. Britain has
no choice but to fight. She has already suffered casualties which cannot be ex-
plained without a public battle; but by fighting, the Bolsheviks in Britain are
running the risk of a humiliating and tragic defeat for the Royal Navy.
Meanwhile, the Rockefeller strategists here are now concentrating on a fast-

building, anti-nuclear-war campaign. On all sides now we are hearing about the
so-called “nuclear freeze movement.” There are documentaries, articles, public-
ity of all kinds to sensitize us to the terrors of nuclear war. In recent months,
there have even been referenda popping up on election ballots dealing with the
nuclear war issue. Medical doctors are banding together to warn the public
about what would happen if there were a nuclear war.
We are being told that all this is just popping up spontaneously. We are now 37
years into the nuclear age and nothing like this has ever gained so much mo-
mentum before, yet now we are supposed to believe that millions of Americans
have spontaneously gotten the same ideas at the same time. If you believe that,
my friends, I give up. Movements like this never, and I mean never, develop
without leadership, organization, and money—and plenty of it.
What we are watching is the Rockefeller public relations machine at work. As

I’ve explained in the past, the Rockefeller cartel cannot afford to let a nuclear
615
war take place. If it does, they will lose everything because they are not in a po-
sition to control it. Instead, the deadly enemies of the Rockefeller cartel, the
Bolsheviks here, will win out if there is a war; and so the Rockefeller faction is
now doing everything in its power to prevent a nuclear war.
The present anti-nuclear-war orientation of the Rockefeller cartel creates certain

temporary common interests between them and Russia; but as Russia’s new
rulers know very well, this does not spring from any great moral perspective on
the part of the Rockefeller group. It’s purely a matter of practical necessity right
now for the Rockefellers.
The Russians regard the United States as a house divided, and they are exploit-
ing that division by working in careful ways with the Rockefellers. Their first
priority is to rid the world of the deadly Bolshevik menace of all-out, even sui-
cidal, nuclear war; but once that is done, they know that there will be a day of
reckoning with the Rockefeller cartel some day.
The Rockefeller group is working toward a definite objective with their new
anti-nuclear-war propaganda. That objective is renewed power—and power that
moves them closer to their old dream of WORLD GOVERNMENT. The Bol-
sheviks here have unwittingly provided fertile ground for the powerful new
Rockefeller antiwar campaign. Under Bolshevik control, the so-called Reagan
Administration has become so hawkish that it’s scaring people. The Rockefeller
antiwar campaign is designed to capitalize on that latent fear as a tool of power.
These days the smell of war is in the air. The Falklands crisis is helping to make
that more intense. The Rockefeller propaganda machine is now paving the way
for the argument that surrender of sovereignty is the only way to avoid war. A
new super-United Nations of sorts is now in the works to fill the bill. It will
have teeth! As presently envisioned, the new organization will be based in Ge-
neva, Switzerland. The working name, though this may be changed, is the
“World Nonproliferation Council.” The plan is to bring it into being as the out-
growth of nuclear nonproliferation treaties, but its true purpose will be to use
fear—the fear of war—to control us all.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
Now it’s time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I have
reported on the reasons behind the so-called Falkland Islands crisis. The crisis
erupted because of secret Bolshevik-controlled naval installations in the South-
ern Hemisphere. These have been attacked by joint action of the Rockefeller
cartel and the Russians in an attempt to slow down the nuclear-war timetable.
616
Audio Letter 74
The attacks were successful, but the results remain to be seen. One result,
though, is that the Royal Navy has now been drawn into a trap. Britain’s Water-
loo at sea may well be at hand.
My friends, two factions are struggling for control over our United States—the
Rockefeller cartel and the Bolsheviks. They differ in style but both seek to con-
trol us through fear. If we are ever to rise above their trickery, it must be
through the power of our Lord Jesus Christ, our only hope. As the Scripture
tells us, our Lord “...has not given us the spirit of fear; but of power, of love,
and of a sound mind.” We must learn to wage peace. As our Lord declared long
ago, “Blessed are the peacemakers: for they shall be called sons of God.”
617
Audio Letter 75
May 31, 1982
Here, in the United States, today is a major holiday, Memorial Day. For most of
us it’s a day off from our jobs, a day for picnics or to visit friends and relatives.
The Memorial Day week-end is famous for traffic jams, highway accidents, and
the Indianapolis 500 Auto Race. And Memorial Day is a seasonal turning point,
marking the beginning of the traditional summer vacation season. Most of us
tend to welcome Memorial Day as the gateway to summer, but Memorial Day
also has a more solemn meaning which we sometimes forget. It’s the day we
have set aside to honor the Servicemen who have died fighting for our country.
Memorial Day is a reminder that war has become a stark reality for America
time after time, and each time the cost in human lives has been tragic.
As I look ahead to the summer of 1982 now beginning, it’s with mixed feelings.
Like most other Americans, I’m looking forward to the activities that make the
summer vacation season a time to enjoy; but the summer ahead will also be a
time of increasing danger for America.
The timetable for nuclear war which I made public three months ago in AUDIO
LETTER No. 72 is still in effect, my friends. That timetable calls for
NUCLEAR WAR ONE to erupt by mid-September 1982, barely three months
from now. The American Bolsheviks who now control the United States Penta-
gon are not slowing down in their war preparations. This is true in spite of the
fact that part of their war plan has been crippled, as I detailed last month.
The covert warfare that spawned the so-called Falklands crisis has all but ru-
ined the Pentagon plans for final victory in the coming war; but the Bolshevik
war-planners here have a suicidal streak in their thinking, and they are bent on
war regardless of the consequences.
As I say these words, headlines are growing larger and larger about the Falk-
lands war between Argentina and Britain. Since I spoke to you last month,
heavy losses have been reported on both sides. Argentina has lost her only
cruiser, the General Belgrano, plus several minor vessels and a number of air-
craft. Britain has so far admitted losing five major ships—two destroyers, two
619
frigates, and a container ship full of war materiel. These reports reflect the scale
of the present fighting somewhat but they are incomplete and distorted. As in
every war, the truth has become the first casualty.
Topic #1—THE PENTAGON COUNTDOWN TOWARD NUCLEAR WAR

ONE
Topic #2—THE ECONOMIC ATTACK ON THE UNITED STATES

CONSTITUTION
Topic #3—BILLY GRAHAM VERSUS THE BOLSHEVIK WAR LOBBY.
Topic #1—In AUDIO LETTER No. 73 two months ago I revealed that an en-
tire new nuclear war strategy against Russia is being developed here in
Washington. It is being worked out by an elite military-planning group in ex-
treme secrecy under the code name “PROJECT Z.” It’s a rush project calling
for NUCLEAR WAR ONE itself to begin by September of this year 1982.
Last month I reported that PROJECT Z was continuing to move fast at the se-
cret war-planning room here in downtown Washington. As I stated, the process
of flushing out the basic war plan was already under way. Now, my friends, the
first complete draft of the total PROJECT Z war plan is ready. The plan is es-
sentially completed with nothing left to do but make minor refinements here
and there. And now the existence of this major new United States nuclear war
plan is creeping into the news. Just yesterday, May 30, an article about it ap-
peared for the very first time in the New York Times. The article, by Richard
Halloran, carries the headline, “PENTAGON DRAWS UP FIRST STRATEGY
FOR FIGHTING A LONG NUCLEAR WAR.” The article begins, quote:
“Defense Department policymakers in a new five-year defense plan have ac-

cepted the premise that nuclear conflict with the Soviet Union could be
protracted, and have drawn up their first strategy for fighting such a war.”
The article goes on to mention that the plan is laid out in an unpublished docu-
ment of 125 pages. It’s been drafted for approval by Secretary of Defense
Caspar Weinberger.
My friends, I’ve reported many times now that the United States Pentagon is
controlled by the Bolsheviks who formerly controlled Russia. I’ve also identi-
620
Audio Letter 75
fied Weinberger as the highest visible agent of the Bolsheviks here in the
United States Government today.
The nuclear war plans of the Bolsheviks here are moving fast; but as I have also
reported before, the United States Government today is a house divided. The
Bolsheviks are opposed by their bitter rivals, the Rockefeller cartel. Their top
visible operative in the federal government today is Secretary of State Alexan-
der Haig. The often visible feuding between Haig and Weinberger is only a pale
shadow of this deadly power struggle behind the scenes. Unlike the Bolsheviks
here, the Rockefeller faction do not want nuclear war. In a word, they cannot
afford it. They would lose everything, and so the Rockefeller faction here is
working feverishly to head off the Bolshevik nuclear war plan.
The new anti-Bolshevik rulers of Russia are also against nuclear war. The anti-
Bolshevik, anti-nuclear-war attitudes of the Rockefeller cartel and the Kremlin
has led to a limited coalition between them in recent months. The most spec-
tacular result so far from this Rockefeller-Russian coalition is the Falklands war
now raging between Argentina and Britain. In AUDIO LETTER No. 74 last
month I reported what the Falklands war is all about. It is the visible aftermath
to covert warfare which took place during April. The Rockefeller cartel and the
Russians joined forces to destroy certain major military installations and weap-
ons reserves. These were key ingredients in the final phase of the PROJECT Z
war plan.
The whole operation began at South Georgia Island on April 3. With the help of
Argentina a joint Rockefeller-Russian commando team was able to knock out
the giant hidden naval base there. The base, built during the 1960s, was origi-
nally controlled through the United States Government by the Rockefeller
cartel, but the Bolsheviks here acquired control of the bases about three years
ago when they seized control of the American Pentagon.
Last month I detailed how the attack on the base was carried out. It was con-
tained within a giant man-made cavern hollowed out inside a mountain near the
water. With the camouflaged ship entrances sealed up, the base was bombproof;
but the joint Rockefeller-Russian commando team succeeded in attacking the
base by drilling a shaft through the mountain. Then a compact Russian neutron
bomb was inserted through the shaft and detonated inside the cavernous naval
base. The process took several weeks. The Thatcher government, which like the
United States Pentagon is Bolshevik controlled, dispatched the Royal Navy.
First, it was supposed to dislodge the heavily-armed Rockefeller-Russian mili-
tary force before it could destroy the naval base; then it was to move on to the
Falklands for the publicly-admitted fighting.
621
The Royal Navy arrived several days too late to save the secret base on South
Georgia Island, as I reported last month; but by that time the panicking
Thatcher government had already committed some two-thirds of the Royal
Navy to the South Atlantic. On top of that, at least one British ship had already
been sunk by Russia in connection with the secret South Georgia operation.
That left the Thatcher government with no choice but to engage Argentina in
battle, otherwise it would have been impossible to explain away Britain’s huge
deployment to the South Atlantic, much less the heavy losses which had been
sustained.
When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 74 last month on April 30 the British
blockade of the Falklands was just beginning. Later that day the entity President
Reagan announced that the United States was actively siding with Britain. The
announcement was a victory for the Pentagon war faction. Right away warfare
around the Falklands started heating up fast. On May 1 the British launched
bombing raids against the airport at Port Stanley, and on May 2 a British sub-
marine torpedoed Argentina’s second largest ship, the cruiser General
Belgrano. It sank within 24 hours, leaving a death toll of more than 300 Argen-
tine sailors. The sinking of the Belgrano was expected to demoralize the
Argentines, but instead it enraged them. The Belgrano had been sunk at a time
when it was not threatening the British forces. The Argentines decided it was
time to start playing their ace in the hole against Britain.
Last month I reported that Argentina had been given certain promises in return
for making the secret South Georgia operation possible. One of these was the
promise of covert military assistance by Russia against Britain. Specifically, it
was pledged that the Russians would intervene in parallel with Argentine air
and naval operations in ways designed to even the odds. In this way Argen-
tina’s military leaders can take full credit for both their own and covert Russian
attacks on the British. At the same time, this procedure is designed to keep Rus-
sia’s role in the fighting obscure.
On May 4 the Argentine Air Force decided to put Russia’s promises to the test.
A pair of Fighter bombers headed out over the Atlantic to attack the Royal
Navy. Acting on reconnaissance data provided by Russian Spy Satellites, they
headed straight for the fleet. As the two low-flying Argentine jets appeared on
the horizon, they were picked up by British fleet radar. At the same time, a
Russian Cosmosphere hovering many miles above the fleet took final aim at
one of the ships. The ship was one of Britain’s newest, most modern, most so-
phisticated ships, designed specifically to shield the fleet against air attack. The
ship was a Type-42 guided missile destroyer, H.M.S. Sheffield. Long before the
622
Audio Letter 75
two Argentine jets were close enough to attack, the Cosmosphere fired its
charged particle beam-weapon downward at the ship. The white-hot beam of
subatomic particles blasted through the aluminum superstructure just behind the
bridge near the top of the ship. In a split second the beam seared through layers
of metal downward into the bowels of the ship. The aluminum of the ship itself
was instantly ablaze. The Argentine Fighter pilots witnessed the spectacular
explosion and intense white flames from nearly 20 miles away. They promptly
turned back toward home, having expended no missiles. Bewildered survivors
from the Sheffield later said there had been no warning before the blast.
Argentina’s leaders are being coached by Rockefeller cartel operatives in what

to say publicly about war developments. They claim that a French-made missile
called the Exocet had been used to sink the Sheffield; but to those who know
the characteristics of the Exocet missile, the Sheffield disaster remained a mys-
tery.
The Exocet, my friends, is a type of missile known as a sea-skimmer. It’s de-

signed to skim along just above the water, striking a ship almost at the water
line. File films of the Exocet which have been shown on TV clearly show this
behavior. But the Sheffield was blasted close to the very top of the superstruc-
ture; in fact, that is said to be the reason for the relatively low casualty toll in
the destruction of H.M.S. Sheffield. Had the same blast been aimed low close to
the waterline, the ship probably would have heeled over and sunk fast. Had that
happened, very few of the crew would have escaped.
On the evening of May 4, Admiral Martin Wemyss, former director of the Brit-
ish naval warfare, was interviewed about the Sheffield disaster on ABC
Nightline. Ted Koppel began with the words:
“Admiral Wemyss, how is it that such a modern ship would not have been able
to first of all detect and then destroy that Argentine aircraft?”
Admiral Wemyss answered, quote:
“I think that’s an extremely good question, and I cannot give you a straight an-
swer. In my book, this should not have happened.”
For the next two weeks talks between Argentina and Britain continued with
United Nations Secretary General Perez de Cuellar attempting to mediate.
Meanwhile, the Thatcher government continued to add to the British armada in

the South Atlantic. Even the luxury liner Queen Elizabeth II was comman-
623
deered and turned into a troop ship. It sailed with some 3200 troops aboard on
May 12.
The strategy of the Bolshevik-dominated Thatcher government is very simple,

my friends. They know very well they are sending the Royal Navy into a trap,
but they believe that by multiplying naval strength in the South Atlantic virtu-
ally beyond reason, they will win. They are making the British commitment so
huge compared to that of Argentina that a total Argentine rout of the British
would look unreasonable. It would enable the question of covert Russian aid to
Argentina to be raised openly and credibly, and that could help set off the very
nuclear war which they know Russia is trying to avoid.
Following this brute-force strategy, the Thatcher government has continued to

pour every available ship into the South Atlantic fray. As of now, over 100
British ships are either in the war zone or heading toward it. That’s almost the
entire Royal Navy! The attitude is: for every ship the Russians and Argentine-
ans sink, the Thatcher government will just send two more—anything to make
sure Britain retakes the Falklands because if that is not accomplished, the
Thatcher government will fall and that will be a setback to Bolshevik power in
Britain.
On May 19 the last ditch talks at the United Nations finally collapsed. Britain
was ready at last to invade. After talks ended that evening, it was announced
that the British War Cabinet would meet the following morning. Supposedly
the meeting would decide whether to give the go-ahead for invasion—but it
was all a ruse to help create an element of surprise against Argentina and
against Russia.
The first stage of an elaborate invasion strategy was already going into action.
On the evening of May 19 the British invasion fleet was divided up into two
groups—one group was 150 miles due east of Port Stanley; the other, 100 miles
to the northeast. Shortly before midnight Washington time, both invasion forces
started heading toward shore. Russian Cosmospheres and submarines went into
action working together. Both British assault groups came under fire. At least
two ships critical to the assault were hit and heavily damaged. By 2:00 A.M.
Washington time both assault forces aborted their moves toward the Port
Stanley area. In response, Russian forces disengaged. The Russians believed
they had thwarted the British invasion; but, my friends, they were wrong.
The two large invasion groups threatening Port Stanley the night of May 19
were actually carrying out a diversionary action. British strategists knew that
the Russians had the muscle available to stop any invasion. The only chance of
624
Audio Letter 75
success lay in convincing the Russians that they had stopped the invasion, and
then somehow sneaking troops ashore. So the two large invasion forces of May
19 actually were staging a decoy action! Most of the British invasion troops
were no longer aboard the troop carrier Canberra or the assault ships. Instead,
they had been transferred to other ships which normally are not used for am-
phibious purposes.
On the morning of May 20 the elaborate British deception continued. Up until

the previous day, British statements had been referring to an imminent all-out
invasion, but on the morning of May 20 the statements changed abruptly. Brit-
ish Defense Ministry spokesmen suddenly started saying that the British would
confine themselves to small hit-and-run raids for a while. The Bolshevik mili-
tary planners in London wanted to further convince Russia that the invasion had
been stopped the previous night. It worked.
Small groups of British ships began moving around the Falklands as if to plant
small raiding parties here and there. In the early morning darkness of May 21
one of these small groups of ships moved into the north end of Falkland Sound
between the Islands. Contrary to press reports, the troop ship Canberra was not
among them, nor was an assault ship. Those ships would have tipped off the
Russians monitoring everything from Cosmospheres far above that a major
landing was afoot. Instead, the key ship that moved into San Carlos Bay was
the hospital ship Uganda. Under cover of darkness the Uganda moved close to
shore. British assault troops, crammed like sardines into the Uganda, clambered
down the sides of the ship on rope ladders into motor launches. The launches
ferried the troops a short distance ashore, one group after another. As soon as
they were ashore, the troops had orders to spread out fast. In that way they ren-
dered themselves unsuitable targets for any attack by the Russian
Cosmospheres patrolling miles above. Particle beam-weapons are devastating
against concentrated targets but very inefficient against personnel scattered over
a wide area. By dawn other ships had also disembarked troops in the same
manner. By the time daylight revealed what was really going on, it was too late.
The British invasion of the Falklands was underway. Once the British got
ashore with a sizeable number of troops, Britain’s chances of regaining control
of the Islands started increasing fast. Covert Russian help for the Argentines is
much more feasible at sea and in the air than on land.
In the past 10 days we’ve heard about a number of devastating air attacks by the
Argentines. Up to now the British have admitted losing at least five ships plus
several helicopters and Harrier Jump-jets, but slowly the British ground forces
have been reinforced and started advancing across East Falkland Island towards
Port Stanley. As of today, May 31, British ground forces are said to be closing
625
in on the main Argentine garrison at Port Stanley. The operation is being por-
trayed in the news here as a relatively easy task, but that is far from true.
British casualties in land battle have been far greater than admitted, and at sea
the Royal Navy has taken very heavy losses that are not even hinted at so far in
the news. Many ships have been badly damaged; and all—I repeat, ALL—of
the original contingent of the Sea Harrier Jump-jets have been put out of action.
Both British aircraft carriers, the Hermes and the Invincible, have been ren-
dered incapable of launching jets. The Harriers now operating around the
Falklands are a different type from the sharp-nosed, blue-painted Sea Harriers.
They are painted in green and brown camouflage. My friends, they are United
States Marine Corps Harriers, and they are operating from an American ship!
The things I am revealing here, my friends, are at variance with official stories,
but this is the war you never see. Photos of British amphibious exercises taken
at Ascension Island were passed off as pictures of the Falklands invasion. Brit-
ish Broadcasting Corporation broadcasting facilities on Ascension Island were
taken over weeks ago by British military. Now we hear daily reports from As-
cension Island that are claimed to be originating with the task force. Even more
than usual, the truth has been the first casualty in the Falklands war.
The Bolshevik military planners here and in the Thatcher government in Britain
are trying to find some way to use the Falklands war for their own purposes. Up
to now they still are not slowing down in their fast timetable for NUCLEAR
WAR ONE.
Within a few short weeks there will be a highly visible clue to the status of the
Bolshevik nuclear war schedule. I am referring, my friends, to the upcoming
fourth space shuttle flight. All the space shuttle flights up to now have been
military in nature, as I have detailed in the past. The space shuttle is the Penta-
gon’s only hope to regain a military toe hold in space for the coming war. Now
for the first time it is even being admitted that the next shuttle flight will be
military.
Shuttle flight #4 is presently scheduled for June 27, less than a month from
now. If some excuse is found to delay the flight, it will reflect a slowdown in
the nuclear war plans of the Pentagon; but if Shuttle #4 takes off on schedule, it
will indicate that the Bolsheviks here are still sticking to their September war-
deadline.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 73 I reported that for the first time the shuttle had
been successful in its prime military mission. A hardened laser-armed Super-
626
Audio Letter 75
Spy Satellite was orbited in March to obtain fresh reconnaissance data on Rus-
sia. It’s the first updating of Russian target data since Russia destroyed
America’s Spy Satellites some four years ago. Target data from the new satel-
lite has now been integrated into the PROJECT Z nuclear war plan which I
made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 73.
Now, Space Shuttle #4 is being prepared for a different mission. Under the
PROJECT Z war plan, the coming nuclear war will begin with a surprise nu-
clear attack by American Stealth planes into Russia. They will attempt to knock
out all of Russia’s space bases—four Cosmodromes for rockets plus Cosmos-
phere installations in Siberia. If all goes as planned, all of these installations
will be blown up with H-bombs simultaneously. As soon as that happens, the
rest of America’s nuclear arsenal is to be launched at Russia, as I have de-
scribed before.
But there remains one weak point in the Bolshevik first-strike plan against Rus-
sia. As it stands now, the Bolsheviks here will have to assume that the first
phase of the attack plan has succeeded as of a given time. The reason is that the
United States currently has no means of verifying if the initial Stealth attack has
succeeded. When Russia destroyed America’s Spy Satellites four years ago she
also destroyed our high-flying Early Warning Satellites. That leaves the Bol-
shevik war planners hare without any way to tell if their bombs have exploded
in Russia. Space Shuttle #4 is intended to solve that problem within weeks from
now!
The supersecret Department of Defense pay load is a cryogenic infrared Sensor

System. It’s designed to look down at Russia from geostationary orbit. It will
detect the explosions of American H-bombs in Russia when it happens. The
moment that it flashes a signal confirming the explosions to the Pentagon, the
rest of the American nuclear first-strike against Russia will be set in motion.
In order to do its job, the Air Force infrared Sensor has to be placed in geosta-
tionary orbit. That orbit is over 22,000 miles high over the equator. The shuttle
itself cannot go that high; it can only go to low Earth orbit, perhaps 150 miles
up. To take the Air Force Sensor System the rest of the way, it has to be
mounted on a rocket. The shuttle will carry the whole assembly—Sensor Sys-
tem, rocket, and all—into low Earth orbit. From there the rocket will take the
Sensor System out to the desired location far above the equator.
My friends, as of now the countdown toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE is still

being continued by the Bolshevik war planners in the Pentagon. The Falklands
crisis began as an effort to prevent or delay nuclear war, but it may instead end
627
up helping to set off that very war! If so, America’s fourth space shuttle flight
could turn out to be America’s final manned mission into space.
The Air Force sensor to verify success of America’s coming initial attack on
Russia will eventually be destroyed by Russian space weapons. Before that can
happen, the Bolshevik planners in the Pentagon will try to set off NUCLEAR
WAR ONE.
Topic #2—For two months now the Falklands crisis has dominated the news.
Likewise, the growing threat of nuclear war and mounting anti-nuclear senti-
ment have been making headlines; but for millions of Americans, a different
crisis seems far more important. It is a long-term crisis which has been with us
for many years now. This mounting crisis, my friends, is that of the crumbling
United States economy and the United States dollar.
Just this month, May 1982, there has been all sorts of bad news on the eco-
nomic front. On May 7 the Government announced that unemployment, as
officially calculated, had reached 9.4 per cent, the highest level since the Great
Depression. And just five days later there was another shock—Braniff Airlines
abruptly terminated operations and filed for bankruptcy. It was the first time
ever that a United States trunk airline had failed. Braniff, like more and more
other businesses, was brought down by a mountain of debt. With interest rates
remaining sky high in the midst of a deep recession, more and more companies
simply cannot survive. Production cutbacks, layoffs, and bankruptcies are con-
tinuing to spread, and more and more people are losing their jobs. This
recession is especially cruel because it is an inflationary recession.
We’re now living in the STAGFLATION era which I warned about in my book
THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR nearly ten years ago. The de-
liberate plans which were set in motion long ago to destroy the United States
dollar are now far advanced.
Since 1970 the combined effects of inflation and taxes have cut the purchasing
power of the dollar by 55 per cent. A family of four living on $10,000 in 1970
would need well over $23,000 in 1982 just to stay even, and this historically
unprecedented collapse of the dollar is continuing even as people are thrown
out of work.
For months now the battle over the federal budget has been dragging on, day in,
day out. We’re told constantly that the budget is the key to bringing down the
incredible interest rates that are killing the economy, and yet somehow it seems
that no one can agree about what the budget should be. One budget proposal
628
Audio Letter 75
after another has come up for consideration only to be voted down. First, there
was the Reagan Administration budget which went nowhere. Then all kinds of
alternative budgets started being proposed. There have been Republican budg-
ets, Democrat budgets, Conservative budgets, Liberal budgets, compromise
budgets; and every single budget proposed so far has been voted down. There is
more and more talk that the federal budget process has gone sour, that there is
something fundamentally wrong. On May 28 the entity President Reagan de-
nounced the budget process while he was in Santa Barbara, California, to make
a speech. He said, quote:
“The United States Government’s program for presenting a budget, or arriving

at a budget, is about the most irresponsible, Mickey-Mouse arrangement that
any governmental body has ever practiced. It’s called the ‘President’s Budget’
and yet there is nothing binding about it. It is submitted to the Congress and
they don’t even have to consider it.”
My friends, please note carefully how this criticism by the President was
phrased. I suggest you stop your recorder and play it back again because the
entity Reagan was not just delivering a standard political tongue-lashing at his
political opponents. He was condemning the process itself, and he added, quote:
“I think that some real solid thinking should be given now to a budgeting proc-
ess that befits the great government of a great nation.”
My friends, Reagan’s choice of Santa Barbara, California, for this statement

was symbolic. It so happens that the so-called “solid thinking” he recom-
mended for a new budgeting process has already been done; and as the
President knows very well, that thinking was done in Santa Barbara at a tax-
exempt foundation called the “Center for Study of Democratic Institutions.”
That is where the secret new Constitution for America was written, including
detailed new provisions for the budgeting process!
Seven years ago in 1975 I published a pamphlet in which I reviewed the secret
new Constitution from a legal perspective. The entire text of the new Constitu-
tion is contained in the pamphlet. If you have a copy, you can read about the
proposed new budget process for yourself. It’s all there in black and white. Im-
portant passages to look at include:
ARTICLE IV—THE PLANNING BRANCH, Sections 2, 4, and 7;
ARTICLE V—THE PRESIDENCY, Section 1, and
629
ARTICLE VI-(b)—THE HOUSE OF REPRESENTATIVES, Section 8.
What you will discover if you trace through the budget process described in the
new Constitution is very significant. When all the legal-sounding mumbo
jumbo is stripped away, the whole budget process turns out to be firmly under
the thumb of the President.
For example, Reagan complained in Santa Barbara that the “President’s

Budget,” quote:
“...is submitted to the Congress and they don’t even have to consider it.”
My friends, the secret new Constitution would fix that.
ARTICLE VI-(b), Section 8 begins, quote:
“The House shall consider promptly the annual budget.”
What’s more, the House is given no role in formulating the Budget. If they dare
to object to anything, the Budget goes back to the Planning Board, so called,
controlled by, you guessed it, the President.
The Reagan blast about the budget process is just the latest of an on-going se-
ries of covert moves to pave the way for the new Constitution. What makes this
one more significant is that it is tied in with powerful economic forces which
are intended to speed up the process.
Through months of contrived haggling, the “kept” Congress has been sensitiz-
ing Americans to the budget problem and they have been doing it at a time
when uncertainty over the Budget is being blamed for worsening economic
woes!
Now along comes the President saying that the solution is to change the whole
process.
The growing Budget crisis is also tied in with another major change which the
entity President Reagan has been publicly advocating. That change, my friends,
is the proposed “Balanced Budget Amendment” to our present UNITED
STATES CONSTITUTION.
There is a drive underway right now to call a Constitutional Convention in or-

der to introduce a balanced budget amendment. Already most of the required
630
Audio Letter 75
number of states have ratified the call for such a convention! At the moment, if
just three (3) more states ratify it, a Constitutional Convention will be legally
required to be called. The excuse for calling a Constitutional Convention would
be to introduce the Balanced Budget Amendment. The problem is that once a
convention is called, there’s no way to keep it from turning into a runaway con-
vention, re-writing the entire CONSTITUTION! In fact, that’s exactly how our
present UNITED STATES CONSTITUTION was created. The original idea
was to simply amend the “Articles of Confederation”; but once the Convention
was through, a totally new constitution emerged.
Those who are behind the drive for a new Constitutional Convention now want
the same thing to happen again; and if it does, they have their model for a care-
fully manicured DICTATORSHIP Constitution ready to go!
In the past there have been several other drives like the present one to call a
Constitutional Convention. Each has been built around some pet idea of one
kind or another, but each time the drive has fizzled out. Enough people have
recognized the danger of a runaway Constitutional Convention to prevent its
happening. This time, though, the danger is much greater than ever before be-
cause this time the excuse for the proposed convention is tied directly to
people’s pocketbooks.
We’re being told by various financial spokesmen on television that high interest
rates are responsible for our economic woes, which is a half truth. We are also
told that government deficits are responsible for keeping those disastrous inter-
est rates high. Then we are treated to the spectacle of a government seemingly
unable to decide on a budget. And, finally, whenever a budget is passed, it will
contain the biggest deficits in history—well over one hundred billion dollars.
Against that background, the promise of relief by way of the Balanced Budget
Amendment may prove too tempting to resist. If so, the drive to call a Constitu-
tional Convention will succeed, and in the process we Americans will have sold
our birthright for a mess of pottage!
My friends, all of this may sound almost irrelevant right now in view of the
specter of possible nuclear war by the end of summer, but never forget that the
plans for war are the plans of men, nothing more. Those plans have a way of
going awry in many cases; and in the case of those nuclear war plans, feverish
attempts are underway to make them go awry.
The Bolshevik war planners who control the Pentagon want nuclear war; but
their anti-Bolshevik enemies who now rule Russia don’t want war and are try-
631
ing to prevent it. Likewise, the Rockefeller cartel here in America is in a power
struggle against the Bolsheviks in an attempt to stop the war plan.
If the Rockefeller interests do succeed in regaining control of the United States

Government, they plan to stop the Bolshevik war countdown. But the Rockefel-
ler group are fighting this battle only for themselves, my friends, not for you or
me! It is they who are behind the secret new Constitution and the drive for a
Constitutional Convention. If they succeed in beating the Bolsheviks here, they
intend to capitalize. With their secret new Constitution they plan to bring us
under their domination more completely than ever before.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 72 three months ago I reported that a military coup
d’etat was in gestation here in Washington. This is to be a coup by the Rocke-
feller cartel operatives within the Government against Bolshevik operatives.
The man in charge is a four-star General—Alexander Haig.
Up to now the anti-Bolshevik coup has not been accomplished, but it is gaining
ground. One major gain for the Rockefeller faction occurred last month while
all eyes were on the Falklands crisis. On April 21 it was announced that Admi-
ral Bobby Inman, Deputy Director of the CIA, had “resigned” (quote) effective
immediately. Inman was forced out by the Rockefeller faction. He was replaced
with lightning speed by John McMann, a career professional with the CIA!
It was the Rockefellers who created the CIA long ago as their own private de-
tective agency, and now they are working fast to re-establish the control which
they lost over the CIA three years ago.
The infighting between the Rockefeller and Bolshevik factions within the Gov-
ernment is growing more intense as the war fuse burns shorter and shorter.
President Reagan and Secretary Haig are both under tight security. This sum-
mer of 1982 will be dangerous for them and for America.
Topic #3—On the evening of May 16 millions of Americans tuned their televi-
sion sets to NBC to watch the first installment of a special mini-series. It was a
lavish portrayal of the travels and adventures of Marco Polo. For the next four
nights viewers were treated to a spectacular re-enactment of Marco Polo’s ex-
periences as he traveled to China. Interspersed with those scenes of adventure
and splendor were brief scenes depicting what happened to Marco Polo after he
returned home to Venice. He dared to speak of places he had been and things he
had seen that conflicted with the dogma of the day, and so he was tried for her-
esy.
632
Audio Letter 75
Today in 1982 we like to think of ourselves as too enlightened to close our

minds like the inquisitors of Marco Polo, but the fact is that even today those
who challenge preconceived notions are quickly branded as heretics and the
like. There was a perfect example of this on Sunday morning May 16. Ironi-
cally it was the same day as the beginning of the Marco Polo series. My friends,
I’m referring to the interview of evangelist Dr. Billy Graham on the ABC news
program “This Week with David Brinkley.”
Dr. Graham had just returned to England from participating in a five-day reli-
gious conference in Moscow, Russia, of all places. He was one of more than
400 religious leaders from 80 nations who attended the conference. They were
there at the invitation of the Russian Orthodox Church which sponsored the
Conference. A large fraction of those who attended were Christian leaders such
as Dr. Graham, but there were also many representatives of the world’s other
great religions. They were not there to convert, to compete, or to condemn one
another. Instead it was a rare opportunity for these leaders to form bridges of
mutual understanding, something which is all too often neglected in our world.
It was a religious conference the likes of which the world has not seen for more
than 80 years. The last time anything like this took place was before 1900. It
was held here in America, in Chicago, and it was called “The Parliament of Re-
ligions.” There were some who feared that historic meeting of the minds and
have condemned it ever since. As a result, it has never been repeated here in
America; but I submit, my friends, that those fears were groundless. The Par-
liament of Religions did not destroy Christianity or turn Americans overnight
into Buddhists, Moslems, or Hindus. What it did do was to establish bonds of
understanding and respect for a while where they had been lacking before. My
friends, it is a psychological fact that it is usually hard to hate another person if
you get to know him. That is why any government bent on war tries to dehu-
manize and depersonalize the enemy.
From the turn of the century onward, the United States Government has been
controlled by elements who cherish war as an instrument of policy, so we see
no more Parliaments of Religion here in America.
By contrast, the government of Russia has undergone a drastic transformation

in recent years. Russia’s new rulers are Christians, as I have been reporting for
nearly five years. After an agonizing struggle of six decades, these tough native
Russians have finally gained the upper hand over the Satanic Bolsheviks there.
Over three years ago the growing power of the Kremlin Christians started pro-
ducing startling changes in public. For example, for Easter 1979 Handel’s
“Messiah” was performed in Russia for the very first time since the Bolshevik
633
Revolution! And several months before that, in January 1979, the first legal
shipment of Bibles into Russia since 1917 had taken place. The American Bible
Society had asked the Russian government for permission, and it had been
granted.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 44 over three years ago I issued an appeal to Amer-
ica’s Christian leaders to take a stand for peace before it was too late. What I
suggested was a “Pilgrimage for Peace” to Moscow. It’s purpose would have
been to begin new ties of trust and understanding with the new Christian ruler-
ship of Russia. In that way America’s churchmen had the opportunity to take
the initiative in a concrete way to help head off nuclear catastrophe. The re-
sponse, as I reported later, was pathetic. To the everlasting shame of America’s
Christian community, only a tiny handful of Christian leaders expressed any
interest at all! The Christian leaders of America by and large refused to hold out
the hand of Christian fellowship to their brothers in Russia.
But now, a pilgrimage for peace has been made to Moscow after all. Since
America’s Christian leaders would not bother to take the initiative, those of
Russia did so instead! They invited religious leaders the world over to make a
pilgrimage for peace to Moscow, and they called their five-day assembly the,
quote:
“Conference of Religious Workers for Saving the Sacred Gift of Life from Nu-
clear Catastrophe.”
When Billy Graham and some other Western Christian leaders arrived in Mos-
cow, they soon discovered that it was not as they had been led to expect. Dr.
Graham discovered that there was no attempt to restrict him in his religious
messages. He was also allowed more freedom of movement than he had ex-
pected. On the Saturday evening before the Conference began, Dr. Graham
decided to pay unannounced visits to several Moscow churches. He went to
three different Russian Orthodox Churches and was shocked to find that they
were filled to capacity with worshippers. As he said later in a news conference,
quote:
“You would never get that in Charlotte, North Carolina.”
Dr. Graham made a number of statements about his experiences in Moscow

which all seem to add up to one thing: there is a lot more Christian worship go-
ing on in Russia than he apparently expected and with greater freedom.
634
Audio Letter 75
When Billy Graham returned to the West he must have felt a little like a reli-
gious Marco Polo. He had journeyed to the forbidden East and discovered that
it is not populated by gremlins and horrible beasts. Instead he had come away
with his heart strangely “warmed” (quote). Perhaps he expected that the folks
back home would welcome his unexpected good news. After all, our whole
Christian faith is built on Good News—the Gospel of our LORD Jesus Christ.
But if that is what Billy Graham expected, he was sadly mistaken.
When he returned to the West, he came back not to people eager to hear more
of his good news, but to hostility and condemnation! We’re always told that
Russia is an atheistic country and beyond redemption, and so by definition Billy
Graham’s words about even limited religious freedom in Russia constituted
heresy. He ran into a buzz saw of critics determined to cut him down for saying
a good word about Russia!
It began right away with slanted reports about his statements in the major me-
dia. At one point Dr. Graham mentioned that in Russia his comments had been
reported accurately in the press. By contrast, reports here in the United States
were distorted, and quoted him out of context.
A perfect example of the treatment now being given Dr. Graham was his May
16 interview on ABC’s “This Week with David Brinkley.” It was called an in-
terview, but inquisition would be a better description. Every suggestion that
Christians may be better off in Russia today than in the past was met with hos-
tility. Time after time after time Dr. Graham was interrupted and attacked
before he could even finish making his point, and many of the questions in the
best tradition of heresy trials were designed to declare Graham guilty before he
could even answer!
To take just one example: at one point the ideological writer George F. Will
mentioned an incident in which a peace protestor was subdued by Russian po-
lice. Then he asked—and this is an exact quote:
“Given that evidence that there is no, and is not about to be, any peace move-
ment in the Soviet Union, wasn’t it clear to you from the start that this
propaganda festival to which you were going was used simply to encourage a
unilateral peace pressure and disarmament pressure in the West?”
My friends, a so-called question like that is the tool of a prosecutor, not an ob-
jective reporter. In one breath he claimed that there is no peace movement in
Russia as if it were a fact, accused Dr. Graham of knowingly cooperating in
Soviet propaganda, implied that all the world religious leaders who attended
635
were stooges, and ignored the world-wide representation at the Conference say-
ing it was all aimed at the West. Accusing questions like that were fired at Dr.
Graham throughout the program. The only break in this inquisition came when
Dr. Graham was removed from the discussion for a while—then everyone else
sat around and ripped him up one side and down the other in his absence, for
his ‘heresies.’
In spite of the grossly unfair treatment, Rev. Graham made some very telling
points. He mentioned that many other American Christian leaders were also at
the Moscow Conference and that still others have gone there separately, and he
said there are many, quote:
“...that would hold different viewpoints than what is being expressed here to-
day. I’m a little surprised that we don’t have some of those people.”
Perhaps Dr. Graham’s most telling comment came fairly early in the program;
perhaps it was partly responsible for the frenzied bitterness of some of the at-
tacks on him later in the program.
Rev. Graham said, and I quote:
“Now when people go to China today, for example, they are applauded for go-
ing to China. It’s wonderful to go to China, but there is not as much religious
freedom in China as there is in the Soviet Union.”
My friends, Billy Graham was exactly right in that statement. I have reported
the same thing in my AUDIO LETTER reports. The favorable image now being
given to Red China is purely political and military in its origins. Unfortunately
some church-related groups are being used for these political purposes!
What Dr. Graham may not know is the reason for the violent attacks he has en-
dured lately. My friends, he has run afoul of the American Bolshevik nuclear-
war lobby here. They want to use you and me to do their dirty work for them
against Russia. That is what their nuclear-war plans are all about, and so at all
costs they must not let us know that Christianity is reviving today in Russia.
Even more, they dare not let the American people know that the true leadership
of Russia today is Christian because if we all knew that, my friends, we would
never agree to their plans to destroy Christian Russia in a thermonuclear war.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
636
Audio Letter 75
tried to bring you up to date on the progress of plans to throw America into nu-
clear war against Russia. The countdown by the Bolshevik war planners who
now control the Pentagon is still continuing. Their war plans have been dam-
aged by the Falklands war, but they are trying to turn that conflict to their own
ends.
Meanwhile, the countdown for Space Shuttle Flight #4 with its secret military
pay load is still on schedule. If the mission succeeds, the danger of nuclear war
will increase dramatically.
The summer of 1982, my friends, promises to be a dangerous time for America.

As of now, NUCLEAR WAR ONE could be as little as three months away, but
the Bolsheviks here have enemies who are trying to stop the war-countdown.
Here in the United States the Rockefeller cartel is continuing its power struggle
to take back control of the Government from the Bolsheviks. As part of that
struggle, the preparations for a military coup d’etat led by General Alexander
Haig are making progress. Likewise, the Russians are continuing to try in their
own ways to prevent the war. Unlike the Rockefeller cartel, the Russians are
doing this for moral reasons.
This month, May 1982, religious leaders from around the world gathered in a
religious conference to take a stand for peace. If the conference had been held,
say in Washington, D.C., we would be hearing nothing but praise about it; but it
was held instead in Moscow, Russia, and for that reason alone it has been con-
demned here in the United States. Those who dare to honestly report the
favorable surprises they encountered there are being castigated as heretics. The
most visible of these is Rev. Billy Graham. For describing what he actually saw
and experienced, honestly and without prejudice, he is being crucified on all
sides.
My friends, the same thing will happen to you if you dare to speak up about the
things you know; but if you do not speak up to your friends, to your neighbors,
to your relatives, they may never know why we are heading toward nuclear ca-
tastrophe. So I urge you to speak now, and remember the promise of our LORD
Jesus Christ. He said:
“Blessed are they who are persecuted for righteousness’ sake: for theirs is the
kingdom of heaven.”
637
638
Audio Letter 76
June 30, 1982
On the afternoon of June 25, just five days ago, reporters were summoned to
the White House press room for a sudden major announcement. At around 3:00
P.M. the entity known as President Reagan strode in and walked to the micro-
phone. Then, with an announcement about a minute long, he dropped what
seemed to be a bombshell.
For public consumption he began the announcement with words of praise and
regret, but his face was the face of an executioner. Then he came to the only
words that really mattered (Note: actual voice recorded; reveals tone):
“With great regret I have accepted the resignation of Secretary of State Al

Haig.”
The impression was given that Haig had resigned voluntarily and that its timing
was a great surprise, but that impression was not the truth, my friends. Reagan’s
very next words were (his voice again):
“I am nominating as his successor, and he has accepted, George Shultz, to re-

place him.”
Haig’s ouster had been planned very carefully by insiders close to Reagan. Af-
ter stunning reporters with the announcement about Haig, the President refused
to give any reasons and left without taking questions.
A little later it was announced that Haig himself would make a statement at the
State Department. It was scheduled for 4:00 P.M., but Haig was nearly half an
hour late. He had learned of his ouster only a few hours earlier, around noon.
He had been compelled to compose a letter of resignation and pretend, for pub-
lic consumption, that he had already given it to Reagan; but his late arrival at
the State Department press conference was due to the fact that he was putting
last-minute touches on his public statement.
639
When Haig arrived at the State Department auditorium, he faced an audience of

around 1,000 reporters and department employees. As he was greeted by thun-
derous applause, Haig looked around wide-eyed, as if in a daze. He had been
ordered to keep his entire statement to a maximum of five minutes. He had also
been warned not to accept questions.
We have been told by the controlled major media that Haig resigned as an abra-
sive prima donna, incensed that he was not getting his way; but when Haig took
the microphone that afternoon at the State Department, his demeanor was far
from that of a prima donna—he was instead, a defeated General at the moment
of surrender. The peculiar etiquette that governs this type of situation causes
words to obscure this fact, but his voice and mannerisms were laden with the
unmistakable burden of defeat. He spoke slowly, trying to keep the quaver in
his voice under control. His tones were the lifeless tones of resignation that say,
“I tried, but I failed.”
Haig read the text of his alleged resignation letter to Reagan which he had writ-
ten hurriedly that afternoon. He began by praising the alleged original foreign
policy plans of the Reagan Administration before it was subverted by the Bol-
sheviks here. At one point he could hardly get the words out (Note: actual voice
recorded):
“I believe that we shared a view of America’s role in the world as the leader of
free men and an inspiration for all.”
Then he went on to describe a change of course which has taken place (his
voice again):
“In recent months it has become clear to me that the foreign policy on which we
embarked together was shifting from that careful course which we laid out. Un-
der these circumstances I feel it necessary to request that you accept my
resignation.”
My friends, diplomatic language is often so bland that it tends to make momen-

tous statements sound tame and mild to the public. In recent months American
foreign policy has indeed been moving away from what could be called a “care-
ful course,” just as Haig said.
As I have been reporting, we are on a fast new timetable for nuclear war. Haig
was the top Government operative of the faction which has been trying to pre-
vent the coming war; but, my friends, the anti-war faction has lost, and Haig’s
ouster is the most visible signal that this has happened.
640
Audio Letter 76
In the aftermath of the Haig bombshell, people have been falling all over them-
selves trying to explain it; but the more they talk the farther away from the truth
they get. The closest anyone in the major media has come to the truth was a
statement just 10 minutes after Haig’s appearance at the State Department. At
about 4:40 P.M. Eastern Time June 25, Sam Donaldson of ABC television
News, said, and I quote:
“It may seem strange for people who know General Haig’s background; but the
hard-liners from the standpoint of the Soviet American relations and the hard-
liners when it comes to trying to curb what many people see as excessive vio-
lence by Israel in Lebanon, have won on this one.”
My friends, Sam Donaldson was right about the hard-liners having defeated
Haig, but there’s far more to it than that. The so-called resignation of Alexander
Haig on June 25 was a disaster for the anti-nuclear-war forces here. It is tied to
other events—the end of the Falklands war, the beginning of the Mideast war,
and others; and the timing of Haig’s demise, which seems to mystify the major
media, was dictated by a very specific event. That event, my friends, was the
launch of Space Shuttle Mission #4 now in progress.
Topic #1—THE COLLAPSE OF THE HAIG ANTI-WAR COUP D’ETAT
Topic #2—THE FINAL CRISES TO IGNITE NUCLEAR WAR
Topic #3—THE FINAL SPACE SHUTTLE MISSION FOR WAR.
Topic #1—There is a sad lesson of history that has been repeated more times
than can be counted, from ancient times right down to the present day. The les-
son is that by and large people are incapable of being warned about major
calamities to come. It is human nature to think that the future will not be much
different from the past. If something has not happened before, we find it hard to
believe it can happen at all; and this has never been more true than when an im-
pending calamity is the result of spiritual decay and moral degeneration.
Today we are living under the threat of just such a calamity—ALL-OUT

THERMONUCLEAR WAR!
The threat exists for reasons which are fundamentally moral and spiritual in na-
ture; and if the calamity comes, it will have consequences which are impossible
641
to grasp in advance. As a result, for most of us the threat of nuclear war is one
which we only half believe. We worry when we hear about new crises and we
squirm at the thought of ever-increasing nuclear arsenals. But in the last analy-
sis most of us go right on living our lives as if these things did not exist. Deep
down we tell ourselves, “Surely it can’t really happen.” We tend to think that
our situation today is without parallel in human existence—but that is not true.
We are told that in ancient times a man named Noah was warned in advance
about an equally incomprehensible calamity. He lived in a generation of people
who were filling the land with abominations in total disregard for the Creator
and His laws. Noah was warned that a giant killer flood was coming as a direct
result of these spiritual and moral transgressions. Noah began building an ark;
and he also began warning all his neighbors, as he had been directed by the
Lord.
The building of the ark consumed not just years but decades. All the while
Noah continued to warn the people of his land about what was to come, but the
people were incapable of being warned. They found the idea of a great flood
incomprehensible and unbelievable because it had never happened before; and
besides, they were too busy living their own lives, doing as they pleased. So
they laughed at Noah and his never-ending warnings—until the day it began to
rain! On that day they suddenly knew that the warnings had been true; but it
was too late, and they perished.
My friends, the forced resignation of Alexander Haig five days ago may well be
the first raindrop of the nuclear storm to come. If so, the time has come and
gone for preventing nuclear calamity. Unless something very dramatic takes
place to radically change the situation, it is now only a matter of time—and not
much time at that!
As of now, the Bolshevik war-planners in the Pentagon are still on track with
their plan to set off nuclear war by the middle of September 1982. This is true
even though the intended final phase of their war plan has been crippled, as I
reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 74 two months ago. And as of this moment I
have no information to indicate that they will be stopped.
I realize, my friends, that your decisions about what to do would be far easier if
I could flatly tell you exactly what to expect, and when. I cannot do that be-
cause this is a power struggle on the world stage, and the outcome is yet to be
decided. The best I can do is to keep you informed about the forces involved
and how they are doing against one another. As of this hour—and the hour is
VERY late—the efforts to prevent NUCLEAR WAR ONE appear to be failing.
642
Audio Letter 76
I know that what I am reporting to you is very grave indeed. If you are to derive
any benefit from what I have to report, you must have the assurance that my
Intelligence about these matters is reliable.
Sometimes people ask me for documentation of my reports; but in Intelligence,

documentation of that type is inherently impossible. Instead, a different crite-
rion is normally used for judging the accuracy and reliability of Intelligence
data. That criterion, my friends, is the extent to which advance Intelligence re-
ports are borne out by events. For that reason, in this AUDIO LETTER I will
use direct quotes from a number of my past AUDIO LETTER reports over the
past year or so.
For those of you who have been listeners for some time, this will serve as a re-
minder of what you already know but may have forgotten. For my newer
listeners I hope this will help to establish the reality of the situation very
quickly because, my friends, time is precious.
For some three years now the United States Government has been torn by a bit-
ter power struggle between two opposing factions. One faction consists of
agents of the Rockefeller cartel of Big Oil, Big Business, and Big Banking. Un-
til recently the Government was dominated by the cartel. The other faction is
that of the American Bolsheviks together with the expelled Bolsheviks from
Russia who have flocked here for a new start.
For historical reasons these two power factions, the Rockefeller group and the
Bolsheviks, had always worked together until very recently. The Rockefeller
empire started its climb to power over a century ago with the aid of the Roths-
childs based in England and Europe. Likewise, Bolshevism as a political force
was created by the Rothschilds around the turn of the century. When the time
was ripe for revolution in Russia, Rothschild-spawned Bolshevism was injected
into Russia with Rockefeller help. From then on a secret alliance existed be-
tween the Rockefeller interests and the Bolsheviks on a world-wide basis—but
in the past few years all that has changed.
A new anti-Bolshevik ruling group has taken over in Russia and has expelled
most of the old Bolsheviks there. They have come mainly here, to the United
States, in great swarms in recent years. They were welcomed here with open
arms by their old Rockefeller allies. They re-enforced the long-time American
Bolsheviks who were already here. Then, early in 1979, the Bolsheviks double-
crossed their Rockefeller partners and launched an all-out grab for power.
643
The Bolshevik grab for power over the United States Government began with
the murder of Nelson Rockefeller on January 26, 1979. This was followed by
months of in-fighting behind the scenes including assassinations, resignations,
and disappearances of key people. But true to Bolshevik tradition, it was all car-
ried out in the shadows hidden from the public eye. Then the turmoil escalated
still further as the Intelligence agencies of foreign nations entered the fray. By
the spring of 1979 a full-scale Intelligence war was raging here in America, es-
pecially in Washington. In addition to agents of the Rockefeller cartel and the
Bolsheviks, the Intelligence agencies of Russia, Britain, and Israel were in-
volved. All were trying to maneuver the crisis for their own benefit, and all
were using their most advanced and most secret Intelligence techniques, includ-
ing some that would seem at home in the 21st Century!
These events all took place behind closed doors, hidden from the public eye by
winners and losers alike in each skirmish. In battles at the pinnacle of power,
that is how it is. There is never an appeal to the public, to the police, or to the
courts for it is they who control the courts, the police, and our other institutions.
At the pinnacle of power there is no appeal to higher authority because in their
view there is none. So disputes are settled by the oldest means known to man;
namely, by finding out who has the biggest stick. This is why power struggles
take place in governments, and that is why wars take place between nations. It
is all a struggle for raw power in an arena where no holds are barred.
1979 was a year of strange events, when the so-called Carter Administration
appeared to go crazy on several occasions. At one point the entire Carter Cabi-
net was fired en masse. It sent shock waves around the world until a
reconstituted Cabinet was formed. At another point the entity Carter disap-
peared at Camp David for weeks on end. Meanwhile worried rumors swirled
like a storm through Washington circles.
All of these events were the direct result of the hidden turmoil which I had
made public in my reports months earlier. But for public consumption, these
and other shocks came and went without the truth ever being told officially.
By late 1979 the dust was beginning to settle. The Rockefeller cartel had been
grievously wounded, but it was not destroyed or totally unseated from Govern-
ment influence. The Bolsheviks here had acquired a dominant position over the
United States Government, but their power was complete only in the military
area. For reasons I have detailed in many past reports, the Bolsheviks here were
and are bent on throwing the United States into nuclear war against Russia. To
the Bolsheviks—aliens in our midst—our entire country is nothing but a giant
tool to further their own dreams of world power.
644
Audio Letter 76
Up until the hidden Bolshevik coup d’etat here three years ago, the Rockefeller
cartel too was bent on nuclear war; but now, having lost control of the United
States military, they can no longer afford nuclear war. So now they’ve changed
their tune. On all sides Rockefeller spokesmen are speaking out against the
threat of nuclear war. The Rockefeller public relations machine is the most so-
phisticated in the world. Almost overnight it has stirred up public fears into a
strong anti-nuclear movement. Within the Government itself, Rockefeller cartel
agents have been slowly regaining some of their lost power. As they do so they
are trying to chip away at the Bolshevik plans for nuclear war, which is now
imminent.
The most important of all Rockefeller cartel operatives in the Government, my

friends, was Secretary of State Alexander Haig. Haig owed his presence in the
Administration to the fact that the so-called Reagan Administration was ini-
tially installed by the Rockefeller cartel. But the Bolsheviks here were
determined not to let the Rockefeller group consolidate their gains. On Novem-
ber 30, 1980, just a few weeks after the rigged Reagan landslide, I reported in
AUDIO LETTER No. 60, quote:
“...but the Bolsheviks here are working fast. They are in a hurry to seize control
of the so-called Reagan Team themselves.”
And further on, quote:
“...some day sooner than you think, we Americans may be in for a shock. We
will be told that the entity President Reagan has met with an unfortunate acci-
dent, or a sudden fatal illness.”
Four months later, on March 30, 1981, there was a presidential assassination
attempt at the Washington Hilton Hotel. For public consumption, all stories
quickly converged on the traditional “lone assassin” theory; and just to make
that more believable, a psychologically programmed scapegoat was on hand
firing random shots—John Hinckley, Jr.
There was ample evidence that Hinckley was not alone and could not have fired
the shot that hit the President, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 63. But
never mind, seeing is believing even when it is a lie. Hinckley was conveniently
wrestled to the sidewalk, gun in hand, right next to television cameras. Just
eight days ago a Washington jury shocked the world by finding Hinckley not
guilty by reason of insanity.
645
As it turned out, the shooting did not cause a change of face in the Oval Office.
Even so, it did achieve what the Bolsheviks here wanted. It created a period of
vulnerability which halted the momentum of the new Rockefeller cartel gov-
ernmental programs.
Within a matter of weeks the Bolsheviks here were once again in the driver’s
seat, especially at the Pentagon. Secretary of Defense Caspar Weinberger had
come into office with the new administration, but he was a Bolshevik mole in
the Rockefeller machine. Ever since the Reagan assassination attempt,
Weinberger and Haig have been at each others’ throats because they are on op-
posite sides of the power struggle. Over the past year or so there have been
more and more stories about Haig feuding with other members of the Admini-
stration. This was because Haig was the “point man” in the continuing
Rockefeller cartel struggle to unseat the Bolsheviks here.
That situation started coming to a head early this year of 1982. When I recorded
AUDIO LETTER No. 72 four months ago on February 28, 1982, I reported on
major new developments in the plans of both factions. First I reported that a
drastic speed-up was taking place in the American Bolshevik nuclear war plans.
I stated that, quote:
“...a drastic change is now taking place in the secret war planning here in Amer-
ica. The timetable for NUCLEAR WAR ONE has now been speeded up by
many months. My friends, as of now the new target date for an American nu-
clear surprise attack on Russia is mid-September 1982!”
I also revealed the reason for the speed-up in war plans. It was the result of a
major Intelligence coup against Russia by the American Bolsheviks. Thanks to
this Intelligence breakthrough, the Bolshevik war planners here now have criti-
cal data which was formerly lacking to enable an attack on Russia.
In that same AUDIO LETTER report No. 72 I also revealed the Rockefeller
cartel response to this new turn of events. It was to be a military coup d’etat by
military officers loyal to the Rockefeller group. Here is what I reported four
months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 72, and once again I quote:
“...the Rockefeller cartel cannot afford to let their Bolshevik enemies here suc-
ceed in setting off nuclear war, therefore the military coup d’etat must take
place before the American Bolshevik surprise attack against Russia. If possible,
the coup will be carried out before the fourth space shuttle flight this summer
because war will be possible any time after that.”
646
Audio Letter 76
I also reported that, quoting again:
“The General in charge of the coup to come, my friends, is General Alexander

Haig, presently Secretary of State. He’s looking forward to the day when he can
really say, ‘I am in charge here.’”
(End quote from AUDIO LETTER No. 72)
In these days of managed news, major events often take place with little or no
notice to the public about what is going on. Even so, when those events are big
enough they usually create a visible ripple on the surface that can be seen in
public. In my report four months ago I tried my best to prepare you to read the
ripples produced by the struggle over a coup d’etat. Here is what I reported then
(quoting further from AUDIO LETTER 72):
“If the military take-over does take place it, too, is likely to be largely hidden in
its details from public view. Only one event in the plan is likely to be visible to
all. That event, my friends, will be the sudden death of the entity known as
President Ronald Reagan. If that happens by the end of summer 1982, no matter
what the official story may be, you will know that the military coup d’etat has
taken place.
On the other hand, should something happen to Secretary of State Haig by that
time, it could well mean that the Bolsheviks have foiled the coup. It is all a race
against time, my friends, and the stakes in this race involve nothing less than
the very survival of our United States!”
In my reports since then, I have updated the progress of these intrigues by both
the Rockefeller cartel and the Bolsheviks here.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 73 I revealed the over-all war strategy which the Bol-
shevik war planners here were developing under the code name “PROJECT Z.”
It is a three-phase plan for protracted nuclear war following the American first
strike against Russia. In recent days public hints about this new Pentagon strat-
egy for protracted war have started leaking publicly. Our Bolshevik Defense
Secretary, Caspar Weinberger, was even questioned on television about the new
protracted war plan 10 days ago. Weinberger was interviewed on the Sunday
morning ABC news program “This Week with David Brinkley.” Naturally,
Weinberger denied it all; but, my friends, he lied.
Meanwhile, the Rockefeller cartel has been working feverishly to try to stave
off the nuclear war that will cost them everything. To this end, a limited quid
647
pro quo for anti-war purposes has been forged lately between the cartel and
Russia’s new anti-Bolshevik rulers. The key Rockefeller operative in this move
has been Alexander Haig. He was engaged in three major bargaining sessions
with Russian Foreign Minister Gromyko in nine months. The last of these was a
two-day marathon in New York City just days before Haig’s ouster. Haig’s re-
moval has caused secret agreements between Haig and Gromyko to be shot out
of mid-air.
One major product of the recent Rockefeller-Soviet relationship was the secret
destruction of key Bolshevik-controlled military forces in late April. These
were based in the Southern Hemisphere, which is expected to escape major
damage in NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The operation led to the Falklands War as
its aftermath, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 74. The joint Rockefeller-
Soviet operation, which was highly successful, badly crippled the ability of the
Bolsheviks to carry out Phase #3 of their new war plan. It was expected that
this would slow down the Bolshevik timetable for NUCLEAR WAR ONE; but,
my friends, it hasn’t happened! If the Bolsheviks cannot have total victory, then
they will settle for a smoldering stalemate. They still expect to survive, while
their enemies (the Russians and the Rockefeller cartel) are reduced to ashes.
While the Bolsheviks here and in Britain had their hands full with the Falklands
War, the military coup d’etat here was also gaining ground. Just last month I
reported on a major gain by the Rockefeller group in retaking control of the
CIA from the Bolsheviks; but early this month, June 1982, it all began to un-
ravel.
With the approach of Space Shuttle Mission #4, the deadline for the Haig-led
coup d’etat was near. Security around the entity Reagan was doubled and re-
doubled. When he went to the U.N. to speak on June 17, the New York Daily
News described the (quote) “extraordinary precautions” that were enforced. His
limousine even jumped the sidewalk, driving up right next to the door.
All this was happening as key Haig operatives in the intended coup d’etat were
being eliminated! Out of public view nothing less than a new Bolshevik purge
has swept through the United States Government. It was completed just in time
from the Bolshevik viewpoint. On Friday June 25 Haig was confronted with the
reality of defeat. His anti-war coup d’etat had collapsed just two days before the
launch of Space Shuttle #4!
Topic #2—This month of June 1982 has seen the apparent end of one war and
the beginning of another. The war between Britain and Argentina for the Falk-
land Islands ended, at least for now, on June 14. That day the Argentine
648
Audio Letter 76
garrison at Port Stanley surrendered to the British. Meanwhile, a new war was
already underway in the Middle East. Israel had launched its long-planned all-
out invasion of Lebanon.
The Falkland Islands war had come as a surprise to the master planners of nu-
clear war to come, the Bolsheviks here. The Falklands fighting and the secret
hostilities which preceded it were intended to upset those nuclear war plans, as
I detailed in AUDIO LETTER® No. 74. And so the Bolsheviks, who were fo-
menting violence world-wide, stamped out the unwanted Falklands war as fast
as they could.
The Thatcher Government in Britain, which is Bolshevik controlled, is now left

with a legacy of grievous losses which are being covered up. A major key to the
Thatcher cover-up of the true extent of British losses is the continued posture of
belligerence toward Argentina. It is being said that a sizable British military
presence will be maintained in the South Atlantic. This provides a tailor-made
excuse for the fact that many British ships, sailors, and soldiers will not be
coming home any time soon. The fact that some of them will never return home
can be hidden, and the families affected informed piecemeal, a few at a time. In
this way the Thatcher Government intends to keep the lid on the situation.
Another ingredient in the Thatcher cover-up plan is the at sea repair ship,
STENA INSPECTOR. It was bought from American interests in May and is
now being refitted at the Savannah Shipyard Company in Georgia. Soon it will
head for the South Atlantic to begin patching up many British vessels which
were damaged in the Falklands war. When and if they return to Britain, the true
extent of the damage done to the Royal Navy will have been literally covered
up.
The final outcome of the Falklands war was a setback for the Rockefeller cartel
and their limited partners, the new rulers of Russia. The Rockefeller-Soviet
team won Round No. 1 of the South Atlantic fray, which was the covert warfare
during April. I gave the details in AUDIO LETTER No. 74; but Round No. 2,
the battle for the Falklands themselves, turned out differently. Despite the dam-
age done to the Royal Navy, it was the Rockefeller cartel and the Russians who
were outmaneuvered in the Falklands battle.
It was known that the objective of the joint
Rockefeller-Russian action in the Southern Hemisphere was to upset Bolshevik

nuclear war plans. So the Bolsheviks responded by deliberately over-reacting
militarily. Virtually the entire Royal Navy was dispatched to the South Atlantic.
649
A situation was created in which a British recapture of the Falklands could not
be stopped without setting off nuclear war itself. Finally, a totally unorthodox
landing tactic was used to get British troops ashore, as I detailed last month.
The end result was that the Rockefeller-Russian pledge to the Argentine junta
was impossible to fulfill, at least for now.
The Bolsheviks are hoping that the resulting turmoil now taking place in the
Argentine government will halt Argentina’s rapid move toward Russia. In the
past, Argentina was always staunchly anti-Soviet, but under Russia’s new rul-
ers, a major and growing trade relationship has been building between Russia
and Argentina. The majority of Argentina’s huge exports of meat and grain now
go to Russia, and last month relations between Argentina and Cuba suddenly
started warming up. The Bolsheviks here would like to reverse all this and ul-
timately deny Argentina’s food to Russia. Whether that will happen remains to
be seen.
If NUCLEAR WAR ONE does not erupt first, there are likely to be many sur-
prises down the road in Argentina and Latin America; but as I say these words,
the final war sequence planned by the Bolsheviks is already getting underway.
This is the sequence of brushfire wars and regional crises which are intended to
lead directly into NUCLEAR WAR ONE. This intended final sequence of cri-
ses began this month on June 5. On that day Israeli tanks began moving across
the border into a so-called Christian enclave in southern Lebanon. The follow-
ing day the world learned that Israel was launching an all-out invasion of
Lebanon.
More than a year ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I made public the joint strat-
egy of the Bolsheviks and Zionists to pave the way for nuclear war. It was a
complex five-track plan patterned after the build-up to WORLD WAR I with its
proliferation of pre-war crises. I now quote from AUDIO LETTER No. 63:
“All five tracks in the Bolshevik war path converge about mid-1982. By then
they expect to have America on a war footing. All four Space Shuttle Missions
are planned to be completed by then. The offensive weapons now in the works
will be ready, and by then the world will be a caldron of crises made to order
for setting off nuclear war suddenly and without warning. Just as crises in the
Balkans triggered WORLD WAR I, a world in crisis will trigger NUCLEAR
WAR ONE.”
Mid-1982 has now arrived, my friends, and the Bolshevik maneuvering to drag
the world into war is right on schedule. This month on June 13 the Washington
650
Audio Letter 76
Post published a major article titled: “A WORLD SUDDENLY ASSAULTED

BY GUNFIRE.” It begins, quote:
“By State Department count, three major and eight lesser wars were going on
last week in a world that seems suddenly beset by blazing battles.”
Yes, my friends, it is sudden, but it is not accidental. The Bolsheviks here are
responsible for the fires that are burning world-wide. Their plans laid out more
than a year ago are now reaching fruition. As I have detailed in the past, the
Bolsheviks now headquartered here in America are allied closely with the mili-
tant Zionists in Israel. This situation is as much a mystery to the people of Israel
as it is to the people of America. In both countries the average citizen is getting
worried. In Israel, as in America, the present government is bent on deliberately
raising the level of tension, violence, and nuclear-war danger. In both countries
more and more people are becoming alarmed over the growing danger without
realizing that it is all deliberate.
The government which now rules Israel came to power in a sudden astonishing
change in April 1977. The previous Prime Minister Rabin resigned abruptly. As
always in these situations, a suitable excuse was found for public consumption.
In Rabin’s case, a mini-scandal over insignificant financial matters was fabri-
cated to explain away his departure; but the real reason was what I reported that
month in AUDIO LETTER No. 23. Rabin had learned of secret plans for a ma-
jor Middle East war and wanted no part of it.
Rabin was replaced by a man of very different attitudes. The new Prime Minis-
ter was a man who frightened many but had been thought incapable of seizing
control of the Israeli government. He was known as an extremist, tracing all the
way back to his days as the most wanted of all Israeli terrorists by the British.
The idea that he might actually rule Israel some day had been unthinkable to
many. Suddenly the new ruler of Israel was a man named Menachem Begin!
Begin is representative of the most extreme faction of the political movement

known as “ZIONISM.” The Zionists use religious sounding terminology and
Biblical words to disguise the true nature of their goals, which are Satanic.
Political Zionism is as different from classical Judaism as night is from day.

Like all of the world’s great religions, classical Judaism is based on worship of
the Almighty, and it does so from its own distinct perspective. Judaism empha-
sizes the justice of God; Islam His righteousness and power;
651
Christianity His love; Hinduism His spiritual essence; Buddhism, the peace that
comes only from God. Justice is the hallmark of true Judaism, but it has nothing
at all to do with political Zionism except as a deceptive slogan.
The Jews who have been lured to the land called Israel have gone there by and
large believing the promises of a better life, but what they have gotten instead is
a government which per capita has become the most violent and warlike on
earth. “There is no peace, saith the Lord, for the wicked.” And the Begin Gov-
ernment in Israel is as wicked as the Reagan Government here. Modern Israel is
no longer a threatened underdog, as it constantly pretends. Instead, Israel has
become the world’s third most powerful nation militarily after Russia and the
United States. Using its runaway military might, the Zionist government of Is-
rael is setting the world on fire. It is doing so with the blessing and support of
their American Bolshevik allies!
The agony which is being inflicted on tiny Lebanon, which has never done Is-
rael harm, is beyond description, my friends. Over 10,000 Lebanese civilians
have been slaughtered by the Israelis and over 600,000 made homeless. Even
the sanitized reports on American television cannot entirely hide the wanton
savagery of the Israeli invasion. One report after another shows devastation of
entire city blocks on a scale not seen since WORLD WAR II. On all sides the
reports describe Israeli shelling and dive-bombing of Beirut, Sidon, and other
Lebanese cities with one word—indiscriminate.
My friends, classical Judaism regards man as the crowning glory of God’s crea-
tion. Man is supposed to have been formed in God’s own image. Would God,
the just God of Judaism, have done what Israel has done in Lebanon? Are arro-
gance, bestiality, and genocide in the image of God? Or are they in the image of
Satan instead?
What the Israelis are doing now in Lebanon is claimed to be in retaliation for
provocations by the Palestine Liberation Organization; but the fact is that the
present events are part of the long-range plan to bring on nuclear war. In
AUDIO LETTER No. 70 last December 1981, I reported that, quote:
“The joint war plan of the American Bolsheviks and the Zionists in Israel is still
on track. They are shooting for a Middle East war to break out before the end of
summer 1982.”
It is now the summer of 1982, and the desired Middle East war is raging.
652
Audio Letter 76
In AUDIO LETTER No. 68 I reported the Begin plan was to goad the PLO into
violence. Time after time over the past year or so the Israeli Air Force has
mounted devastating air raids on Lebanon creating widespread devastation and
death. The purpose of these repeated Israeli violations of the cease-fire was to
provoke a highly visible counterattack by the PLO. With that as a pretext, the
Begin Government intended to justify its planned invasion of Lebanon. But the
PLO never did respond in kind to the Israeli goading. Aside from occasional
small raids and shelling incidents, nothing was done that was sufficiently dra-
matic for the intended purpose. Meanwhile, time was running out.
The fast new war timetable required the Middle East war to get underway with-
out further delay, so on June 3 the Begin Government provided its own pretext
for war. That day the Israeli ambassador to Great Britain was gunned down by
an assassin hired by Israel’s own Intelligence agency, the MOSSAD! The Be-
gin Government immediately professed to be outraged, saying this was the last
straw. Two days later the Israeli forces, which had already been massed along
the Lebanese border, invaded.
The unbridled savagery of the Israeli attack has shocked the world. In effect the
nation that calls itself Israel has turned the Palestinians into the new Jews of the
world. They have no home, they are dispersed. They, along with the innocent
victims of their host country Lebanon, are the victims of genocide—a military
holocaust without justice or mercy.
Protests and condemnation of the Israeli behavior in Lebanon are mounting

world-wide. Nowhere is the worry greater than within the Jewish community
itself. In Israel, popular sentiment against the Begin Government is erupted into
widespread demonstrations; and elsewhere around the world many Jews are
also speaking out against the Israeli-inflicted holocaust.
But through it all, my friends, the Reagan-Begin axis of the American Bolshe-
viks and the militant Israeli Zionists continues to function smoothly. In his
United Nations speech of June 17 the entity President Reagan condemned
(quote) “armed aggression.” And to the new Russian pledge not to be the first
to use nuclear weapons in war, Reagan demanded, quote: “deeds, not words.”
But when it comes to Israel, those criteria are never applied. The Begin Gov-
ernment agrees in words to one cease-fire after another, but in “deeds” it breaks
each truce when ready; and Israeli armed aggression has left nearly 20% of the
population of Lebanon homeless. The whole world is shocked and outraged, yet
all this has not provoked even a slap on the wrist for Israel from Washington.
653
My friends, the Satanic Begin Government is now in its sixth year in Israel.
This month, June, is the sixth month of the year. On the fifth day of the month
the Israeli invasion of Lebanon began, and with it abominations of military
desolation.
It all brings to mind the visions of the prophet Ezekiel, Chapter 8. The prophet
says in the first verse that he was shown visions in the sixth year, in the sixth
month, on the fifth day of that month. He was shown abominations spawned in
the Holy Land by people who arrogantly said, “The Lord does not see us.”
The chapter ends in the words:
“Then He said to me, ‘Hast thou seen this, O son of man? Is it a light thing to
the house of Judah that they commit the abominations which they commit here?
For they have filled the land with violence, and have returned to provoke me to
anger; and, lo, they put the branch to their nose. Therefore will I also deal in
fury: mine eye shall not spare, neither will I have pity: and though they cry in
mine ears with a loud voice, yet will I not hear them.’”
Topic #3—Earlier this month on June 18, there was a fascinating announce-
ment from NASA. Two American spacecraft, the most distant man-made
objects in the universe, may be on the verge of a major new discovery. These
two space probes have been racing through space for ten years and nine years
respectively. After all that time they are now nearing the edge of our solar sys-
tem, whose vastness is almost beyond comprehension; and as they do so,
they’re preparing to observe a giant mystery object in the skies.
The mystery object, whatever it is, is thought to lie billions of miles beyond the
outermost known planet Pluto. It is so far away that it has never been observed
by astronomers here on Earth, yet many are sure that there is something out
there. Something, whatever it is, keeps disturbing the criss-crossing orbits of
little Pluto and giant Neptune. The effect even penetrates inward to the monster
planet Uranus. So no one knows what it is or where it is—it may be a tenth
planet, it may be a dark star farther away. It could even be that most chilling of
all celestial objects, a black hole, with gravity so strong light itself cannot es-
cape. No one has seen it, so no one knows.
But now, after a decade of space travel, two American deep-space probes may
be on the verge of giving us the answers. The probes are PIONEER 10 and
PIONEER 11, launched in 1972 and 1973 respectively. They are nuclear-
powered spacecraft designed to escape from our solar system and coast forever
through the void of interstellar space. When they cross the outer boundary of
654
Audio Letter 76
our solar system around 1990, they are expected to be sending back data about
what they find. It should be mankind’s first taste of interstellar space; that is, if
anyone is still listening by then.
Two months ago on April 12, 1982, Aviation Week and Space Technology
magazine devoted its editorial space to a statement by Dr. James A. Van Allen.
Dr. Van Allen is the space scientist who discovered the radiation belts around
the earth that now bear his name—24 years ago. His article is titled
“PIONEER’S UNFUNDED REACH FOR THE STARS.” He listed an aston-
ishing list of major new discoveries made by the Pioneer probes during the past
decade, and he issued an appeal for the program to be saved from imminent de-
struction.
Dr. Van Allen’s article begins with the sad words, quote:
“One of the most incredible features of the fiscal 1983 program of the National
Aeronautics and Space Administration is a premature termination of the deep-
space missions of Pioneer 10 and Pioneer 11. The annual saving is $3,000,000
or 4/10,000ths of the agency’s budget.”
My friends, the so-called Reagan Administration decision to cancel the half-

completed Pioneer Program is incredible, but it’s in character with this Admini-
stration’s entire approach to space and science in general. Anything that will
help the Bolsheviks here prepare to wage war is funded, no matter how much it
costs; but everything that merely adds to the peaceful constructive knowledge
of mankind is being guillotined, no matter how little it costs.
For the past year and a half I’ve been reporting periodically about this develop-
ing situation. America’s Space Program has been systematically whittled away
to leave almost nothing but the Space Shuttle. The Space Shuttle has been
spared only because of its critical importance for military purposes. Over the
past year or so military control of the Shuttle Program has become more and
more blatant. The Bolshevik war planners who now control the United States
military will brook no interference with their nuclear war plans.
The overt military take-over of the Shuttle Program began just over a year ago
in May 1981 following the hidden disaster of the first shuttle flight. The civilian
director of the Shuttle Program, John Yardley, was eased out. Several months
later, in October, 1981, he was officially replaced by an Air Force General,
James Abrahamson. Since that time the Bolshevik warlords have been expand-
ing and consolidating their control over the shuttle and NASA itself.
655
Reorganization has become the order of the day at NASA with military control
becoming more absolute with each change.
In its original concept the Space Shuttle was to be a stepping stone into space
for both civilian and military purposes. It was to be a system that would con-
tinue to grow and be improved over the years by continued development. But
that idea has now gone out the window, thanks to the total take-over of the
Shuttle Program by Bolshevik military managers. To them, even the shuttle is
only a short-term stepping stone to war. They intend to set off NUCLEAR
WAR ONE before any further development of the shuttle could bear fruit; and
so, under Bolshevik military control, NASA is now turning its back on the tra-
ditional mission of advancing the technology of space flight. The entire NASA
emphasis is shifting towards using the Space Shuttle “as is” for the short time
left before war.
The most stunning result of this radical policy change within NASA was an-
nounced about two months ago in April. It involves a man whose name is
practically a synonym for America’s manned space program. This man has
played key roles in the planning and engineering of every single American
manned space program. He was a member of the original PROJECT
MERCURY team. He was deeply involved in the follow-on PROJECT
GEMINI, and a central figure in the PROJECT APOLLO moon program. He
directed the design and implementation of the Mission Control Center in Hous-
ton, and for the past 10 years he has been Director of the Johnson Space Center.
If you have followed America’s manned space program closely over the years
you probably know his name as well as I do. I am talking about Dr. Christopher
Kraft. The Bolshevik warlords here have decreed that NASA’s days of techno-
logical development are now at an end, so one day last April Dr. Christopher
Kraft was told that his services are no longer needed, and he was fired!
As I say these words, my friends, Space Shuttle Mission #4 is underway. This is

the last of the four initial crash military missions to prepare for NUCLEAR
WAR ONE. Each of these first four missions has involved two shuttles, not just
one, as I first reported in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 62 and 63. Each time the
shuttle we see blasting off from Florida follows a path into space that is differ-
ent from the one publicly claimed. As a result, it cannot return to Earth at the
time and place it is supposed to, therefore the two-man crew of each flight re-
turns to Earth in a small Gemini-like space capsule. Then they board a different
shuttle and rocket into view from a distance to land at the advertised time and
place. I’ve given all the details in the past, so I’ll not repeat them now.
656
Audio Letter 76
In the first three space shuttle launches the launch took place into the northeast.
Each time this was the beginning of a long curving launch into the north to a
near-polar orbit to pass over Russia, but this time the shuttle took off in a dif-
ferent direction. It took off due east from Cape Canaveral into something called
a “minimum inclination orbit.” This time it was heading not for the North Pole
but toward the equator. The reason for this has to do with the secret Pentagon
payload. It is a special sensor system designed to give confirmation of the first
phase of the planned American nuclear first strike on Russia! As I reported last
month, quote:
“In order to do its job, the Air Force infrared sensor has to be placed in geosta-
tionary orbit. That orbit is over 22,000 miles high over the equator.”
In television coverage of the launch three days ago, the new flight path was
mentioned briefly but not explained. For example, the trans-Atlantic abort site
this time was Dakar, Senegal, close to the equator. This is a change from the
first three flights in which the trans-Atlantic abort site was Rota, Spain, much
farther north. The shuttle itself cannot go high enough to put the Air Force sen-
sor into its final orbit. Instead, the sensor is perched atop a rocket carried in the
cargo bay.
For engineering reasons, the rocket had to be loaded into the shuttle while it
was standing vertically, not parked horizontally. That’s why, for the first time,
the shuttle was loaded for this flight after it was ready on the launch pad.
NASA spokesmen admitted publicly that this was done, but as always they
never tell you the reason.
Last month I reported that an on-schedule launch of Space Shuttle #4 would

indicate that the Pentagon nuclear war plans are still on schedule. Sunday morn-
ing, June 27, Space Shuttle #4 became the first shuttle ever to take off exactly
on schedule. Not a moment’s delay was permitted, even though a sudden vio-
lent hailstorm the previous day had ruined more than 400 critical heat tiles.
So far this shuttle flight is apparently proceeding as planned. That means, my

friends, that the September deadline for NUCLEAR WAR ONE is still in effect
as of now.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
been forced to be the bearer of bad news. The anti-nuclear-war coup d’etat
657
planned by General Alexander Haig has collapsed. More surprises are possible,
but the time is now very short.
The intended final war sequence has now begun in the Middle East at the hands
of Israel; and Space Shuttle Mission #4, the last one needed for nuclear war, is
now in progress.
My friends, the danger of nuclear war is now the greatest that it has ever been
since the summer of 1976. I cannot tell you for sure whether war will or will
not erupt by September because these war plans are the plans of men and they
are not infallible. What I can tell you for certain is that these days ahead will be
filled with danger!
The Rockefeller cartel has apparently failed in its game plan to stop the Bolshe-
viks here. That leaves the arena of conflict to the Bolsheviks here versus the
rulers of Russia. Two more deadly enemies are impossible to imagine, my
friends. The Bolsheviks here are racing to position themselves for an all-out
attack against Russia. Pre-emptive actions by the Kremlin to prevent that attack
are virtually guaranteed. The results may well shake the world!
658
Audio Letter 77
July 28, 1982
Early this month, on July 6, there was an unusual news report from Russia. That
day an Aeroflot Jet Transport had crashed on take-off from Moscow’s Shere-
metyevo Airport. It was a spectacular flaming crash that killed all 90 persons on
board. What was unusual about this news item was that it was made public so
quickly. Usually plane crashes in Russia are announced more quietly and often
after a delay of hours or even days—but not this time. The Aeroflot flight that
crashed on July 6 was an international flight bound for Africa. Some of the pas-
sengers were students returning to their homes in Sierra Leone and Senegal.
Under the circumstances, Russian authorities had no choice but to release the
news without delay. Within hours it was included in news reports around the
world.
Within hours after the Moscow tragedy, investigators at the scene discovered
that this had been no ordinary plane crash. In the midst of the twisted, smoking
wreckage of what had been the Aeroflot plane, conclusive proof of sabotage
was found. A report about the sabotage was flashed to KGB headquarters at
Dzerzhinsky Square in Moscow. There the report was directed to a special task
group assigned to deal with growing acts of internal disruption in the Soviet
Union.
A mounting campaign to create internal turmoil in Russia is going on, created

by Bolshevik agents there. So far there has been little news about this in the
West, but it’s a real and deepening problem. Within 36 hours the KGB special
task group was able to confirm what had been suspected. The sabotage of the
Aeroflot jet had been carried out by one of the Bolshevik disruption groups
which have been under surveillance in the Moscow area. These groups, like
others all across Russia, are being financed and directed by the Bolsheviks
here—now headquartered in the United States.
The KGB notified the Kremlin of the results of its investigation of the Aeroflot
sabotage early on July 8, just two days after the crash. Those suspected of hav-
ing carried out the sabotage were under arrest, but the question remained: how
to send a message to the Bolsheviks in the United States to cease and desist
659
from similar acts? It does no good to talk to America’s present rulers. Action of
some kind was required, and fast. Various possibilities were discussed and re-
jected for various reasons. Retaliation for the Aeroflot crash had to be designed
to convey a clear message to the American Bolsheviks in terms they under-
stand. The message the Kremlin wanted to send was:
We know what you did to our plane. We have the means to destroy you and the
will to use it if necessary.
For the message to be effective, time was of the essence, and so a “target of op-
portunity” order was given jointly to the KGB and the Russian Space
Command. The KGB was ordered to select an American air liner for destruc-
tion within 24 hours. The criterion for selection was to be a passenger list as
similar as possible to that of the sabotaged Aeroflot plane. The Aeroflot plane
had carried many foreign passengers and a total of 90 persons had been aboard,
therefore the KGB was ordered to select a commercial air liner in the United
States with similar characteristics; that is, there must be at least 90 persons
aboard and an unusually high proportion of foreign passengers. The Russian
Space Command would then have the responsibility of destroying the air liner
on take-off, just like the Aeroflot plane.
KGB agents here in the United States had little difficulty in selecting not one
but several candidate flights. Thanks to America’s cross-connected computer-
ized Air Line Reservation System, the task was relatively easy. The Russian
Space Command was then free to choose whichever flight was most convenient
to attack. As in the past, it was decided to mount the attack using bad weather
as an operational cover.
On the afternoon of July 9 summer rainstorms were moving in patches through

southeastern Louisiana. They were the kind of thunderstorms that build up in
the heat and humidity of scorching summer afternoons. It was an on-again, off-
again rainstorm, locally heavy at times then slacking off to a few sprinkles. At
New Orleans International Airport it continued to be business as usual on that
rain-swept afternoon. Weather conditions like these were a familiar occurrence,
and the airport was equipped to monitor them closely. At around 4:00 P.M. that
afternoon airport sensors detected a condition of disorganized air movement
called “wind shear.” Warnings were broadcast to airplanes in the area so that
they could take it into account. Meanwhile, flight operations continued without
letup. Rain or no rain the weather was still far better than the minimums re-
quired for flight.
660
Audio Letter 77
As the wind shear warning was broadcast to pilots, a number of planes were
preparing to take off. One of these was a Pan American 727, Flight 759 bound
for Las Vegas. The pilot heard the wind-shear warning and decided to take ap-
propriate action to guard against it. The faster a plane is moving the less
vulnerable it is to shear; so when Pan American Flight 759 headed down the
runway, the pilot held the nose down longer than normal. By waiting a few ex-
tra moments, he allowed the 727 to pick up extra speed as a margin of safety.
Then he lifted the nose and the plane jumped off the runway and started climb-
ing. Other planes, some of them smaller and more vulnerable to wind shear than
a 727, took off before and after Pan Am Flight 759. All of them did so without
mishap, but Flight 759 was destined to be less fortunate. This was the third day
after the sabotaged Aeroflot jet had crashed in Moscow. Pan American Flight
759 had the required load of more than 90 persons; it also satisfied the criterion
of an unusually large number of foreign passengers, in excess of 20%; and al-
though Flight 759 was a domestic flight, the plane itself belonged to America’s
international flight air line, Pan American.
The parallels with the sabotaged Aeroflot flight were judged to be more than
adequate; and so as the Pan Am jet rotated upward off the runway, a Russian
Cosmosphere was waiting, hovering in the clouds over the airport. A moment
after the jet left the runway, it was hit by what witnesses described as a (quote)
“bolt of lightning.” What they actually saw, my friends, was a surgical blast
from a Charged Particle Beam Weapon. It was fired down at the jet by the Rus-
sian Cosmosphere hiding in the clouds overhead. It is not surprising that the
witnesses mistook this for a lightning bolt. Whenever charged particle beam
weapons are discussed in public, they are most often described as producing a
sort of man-made lightning bolt; but a charged particle beam only looks like a
lightning bolt. What it does is far more destructive than lightning.
The beam blast was aimed very precisely at the air intake mounted in the tail of
the 727. The blast blew superheated air and debris into the center engine, ruin-
ing it. The fringes of the blast also damaged and interfered with the other two
engines mounted nearby.
As the jet lost power, witnesses saw it stop climbing normally and start mush-
ing along through the air. Less than half a mile from the end of the runway the
plane clipped a tree as it descended toward a crowded residential area. The
doomed jet liner passed right over a woman who later told reporters, “It was
spitting and popping like it couldn’t get the motor running.” Moments later the
dying jet liner was crashing, cartwheeling, and exploding through four blocks
of Kenner, Louisiana. Stunned residents who had been narrowly missed by the
crash looked across the street in horrified disbelief. Where moments before
661
there had been neighbors’ houses, there was now a firestorm. A wall of angry
flames towered 20 stories into the air. All 145 people aboard the plane had per-
ished along with 8 more on the ground.
My friends, the Aeroflot crash in Moscow and the Pan Am crash three days
later in New Orleans were not just tragic accidents. The victims in those trage-
dies were casualties in the secret war between the United States and Russia.
Barring a miracle, all-out war is on the horizon; and if it comes, it will come
suddenly, just as destruction came suddenly to a suburb of New Orleans earlier
this month.
In recent days top leaders of both the United States and Russia have started
speaking openly of war. Both sides are now saying that the United States and
the Soviet Union are already at war, which is true; but the secret warfare which
has been going on for years now is only a pale shadow of things to come.
Topic #1—THE GROWING MOMENTUM TOWARD NUCLEAR WAR

ONE
Topic #2—AMERICA’S DOMESTIC SHIFT ONTO A WAR FOOTING
Topic #3—THE RISING PITCH OF RUSSIAN ANTI-WAR WARNINGS
Topic #1: Economic/NATO Summits
Early last month from June 4 to June 6 the eighth economic summit took place
between the United States and six other leading industrial nations. The summit
was hosted by France with the usual pomp and ceremony. The summit was
supposed to enable a meeting of minds which would result in a more unified
approach to solving the world’s economic problems, but the entity known as
President Reagan went there with different goals in mind. The Bolshevik-
dominated Reagan Administration is preoccupied with thoughts of war and in-
trigue—not with building a better world.
Because of this radical difference in viewpoint, Reagan was out of step with the
other leaders at the summit from start to finish. It was symbolized at the very
beginning when all the leaders were flown to the palace at Versailles in the
blue-and-white French helicopters—all, that is, except President Reagan. He
refused to ride in a French helicopter, arriving instead in his own Marine Corps
chopper. “A matter of security,” someone said. The Reagan obsession with se-
662
Audio Letter 77
curity at Versailles verged on paranoia. For example, he took his own supply of
drinking water to France aboard Air Force 1. Why? Because he just did not
trust French water, even the many kinds of world famous French bottled water.
“Just a matter of security,” someone said.
The French were offended when they heard about Reagan’s boycott of French
water, but what really insulted them was the way he behaved toward the exqui-
site French cuisine at the Versailles Palace. While all the other world leaders
were relaxing and enjoying themselves, Reagan was behaving as if someone
was out to get him. Reagan has two members of the Secret Service who are as-
signed as “food tasters,” like those for royalty of old. He will eat nothing until
they have tasted it first. If the food tasters don’t die, he concludes that the food
is not poisoned and eats it. When the Reagan food tasters invaded the Versailles
Palace kitchens, the chefs were incensed. To question French food is to demean
the very glory of the French Republic. As one indignant chef told reporters,
“Our own president has no food tasters. He trusts French food.”
If the Reagan paranoia displayed at Versailles had been limited to matters of

food and drink, it might have been shrugged off as unimportant; but the fact is
that during the talks themselves, the United States was even more out of line.
Our trading partners said, “Let’s work out a way to bring down high interest
rates which are killing our economies.” The so-called Reagan team replied,
“Let’s cut off trade credits to Russia in order to kill the Russian economy.” The
Europeans said, “We’re vulnerable to economic catastrophe due to our near to-
tal dependence on Middle East and Persian Gulf oil. A war in the region could
cripple us overnight. We must protect ourselves by obtaining a second source of
energy. Therefore we must help build the Siberian pipe line to bring us natural
gas from Russia.”
But the Reagan team replied:
“If you build the pipe line, Russia will benefit too, so don’t build it.”
As the conference broke up, there were reports in the press that the United
States had angered the other nations there. Instead of working to solve our own
problems, the Reagan Administration was interested only in making problems
for Russia.
After the economic summit broke up early last month, the Reagan entourage
continued an extended trip through Europe. On June 9 and 10 a summit of
NATO leaders was held in Bonn, West Germany. In the final closed session of
663
the summit, the entity Reagan gave a summary statement so warlike that it
stunned everyone else into silence.
European diplomats are so worried about what Reagan said that early this
month some of them started telling the press about it. The controlled major me-
dia here in America have carefully avoided highlighting this ominous story. But
just over two weeks ago, on July 11, a syndicated article about it was published
by Newsday.
The article begins, and I quote:
“President Reagan stunned allies at the NATO summit by telling them that as
far as he is concerned the Soviet Union is at war with the United States, Euro-
pean officials said last week. The statement, which came as the President was
summing up his views on the two-day meeting in Bonn, so surprised the other
heads of state that they remained silent, and NATO Secretary General Joseph
Luns immediately adjourned the session according to these officials who were
present at the summit a month ago.”
DEEPENING/MULTIPLYING OF CRISES
My friends, for several years now I’ve been reporting on the secret war that is
raging between the United States and the Soviet Union. Up until now the fact
that war is already underway between the superpowers has never been admitted
by either side. But this is a war that cannot remain secret forever. The momen-
tum is building toward the moment when it will erupt into all-out war,
NUCLEAR WAR ONE; and as that moment draws near, my friends, both sides
are starting to speak of war in clear terms. At the NATO meeting on June 10,
the alleged President Reagan said that the United States and Russia are already
at war. Several weeks later a top Russian leader said much the same thing.
On July 13 Pravda published a speech by the entity Marshal Ustinov, the Soviet
Defense Minister. As I’ve explained in the past, anything attributed to Ustinov
carries a great deal of authority. Ustinov declared that the United States is or-
chestrating a trade, credit, and technological war against the Soviet Union. He
also gave a blunt warning to Washington that a, quote:
“pre-emptive first-strike use of nuclear weapons could not insure an American

victory.”
664
Audio Letter 77
The Ustinov warning reflects the fact that Russia’s new leaders know about the
Reagan Administration plan to launch nuclear war soon, and they are preparing
to defeat the Bolshevik-triggered American first strike if it is carried out.
But the Bolsheviks here are not listening, my friends. As I’ve detailed in the
past, the Bolshevik mentality is Satanic and schizophrenic. Those obsessed by
Bolshevik thinking are totally incapable of persuasion by normal reasoning.
They see shadows, like Reagan with his water jugs and food tasters in France.
They’re out of touch with reality as you and I know it, so they’re plunging right
ahead with their plans for nuclear war.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 63 nearly 16 months ago, I outlined the 5-track plan
of the Bolsheviks here to lead us into nuclear war. As I reported then, all five
tracks were designed to start coming together around mid-1982—in other
words, NOW. And it is happening!
Track 1 of the American Bolshevik war plan called for stirring up as much in-
ternal turmoil as possible in Russia and her satellites. This is intended purely
for distraction to keep Soviet authorities off balance. The most dramatic exam-
ple of the ongoing campaign of internal harassment recently was the July 6
crash of the sabotaged Aeroflot jet in Moscow.
Track 2 of the war plan called for preparing the American people for war. That
part of the war plan has gone much farther than most people realize. We’re be-
coming conditioned to the idea that getting ready for nuclear war is the No. 1
priority of the so-called Reagan Administration.
A government which pretends to be bent on saving money is spending record

amounts for military projects. At the same time the Federal Emergency Man-
agement Agency (FEMA) is vigorously publicizing alleged civil defense plans.
The fact is that neither the new military projects nor the proposed new civil de-
fense measures are expected to bear fruit for the general welfare of the public.
Those things take time, and the Bolsheviks here intend for NUCLEAR WAR
ONE to erupt long before that. The only real purpose of these things is to make
us think in terms of war with Russia—and to safeguard only the American Bol-
sheviks in their private war bunkers.
Track 3 of the Bolshevik plan to prepare for war involves space and in particu-
lar the SPACE SHUTTLE PROGRAM. In AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I reported
that a series of four initial missions were planned for military purposes. The
story was to be fed to the public that these would be test flights. Elaborate
preparations were made ahead of time to provide falsified television coverage
665
of the orbital portion of each flight. This was done by means of advance video
taping. Meanwhile, the actual military activities carried out by the shuttle astro-
nauts would not be seen by the public. As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No.
63, the plan called for all four of these crash military space shuttle missions to
be completed by mid-1982. That time has now arrived, and Space Shuttle #4 is
history, right on time.
When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 76 last month, the fourth space shuttle
mission was in progress. I can now report that its primary mission, which I de-
scribed last month, was successful. The secret Air Force Cryogenic Sensor
System is now in geostationary orbit over the Indian Ocean. It is parked there
waiting to do its job about six weeks from now if the present Pentagon schedule
is maintained. That job, my friends, will be to confirm success of stage No. 1 of
the planned American nuclear first strike against Russia.
I can now report that Space Shuttle #4 also had a secondary mission, which was
not successful. It was piggy-backed onto this mission in hopes of gaining addi-
tional Intelligence over Russia.
The laser-armed robot Spy Satellite which was launched by the third space
shuttle did not last long, my friends. It did survive long enough to provide the
basic new target information the Bolsheviks in the Pentagon wanted, and it also
picked up some unexpected additional information close to Russia’s space
bases. Strange installations of some kind are being built in many places in Rus-
sia, but Russian Cosmos Interceptors succeeded in destroying the super-spy
satellite before it could be reprogrammed to take a closer look at the sites. And
so Space Shuttle #4 was given a piggyback mission.
High-power surveillance equipment was mounted in the rear bay of the crew
compartment to look out through the windows in the top. The arrangement was
very much like what was done in the second shuttle last November 1981.
The shuttle was launched initially into a minimum inclination orbit toward the
equator, as I reported last month. That was done to enable the Air Force sensor
to be launched with its rocket booster into its high equatorial orbit. Then, to
carry out the second mission, a little publicized additional capability of the
space shuttle was used for the first time.
At the insistence of the military, the shuttle was designed with the capability to
change its orbital plane by a large amount. Space Shuttle #4 was initially in an
orbit that went no farther north than Cape Canaveral. In order to do any spying
on Russia, it was necessary to swing much farther north. The shuttle accom-
666
Audio Letter 77
plished this by changing its orbit less than 24 hours after launch. From its initial
28-1/2 degree orbit, the shuttle fired its engines to achieve an orbit that took it
above 40 degrees north. That was enough to take the shuttle over southern Rus-
sia where several of the mysterious new sites are located.
By that point the space shuttle had been converted to nothing more than a giant
awkward spy satellite with lasers for self-defense—but it did not work! As soon
as the shuttle headed north, it was attacked and destroyed by Russian space
weapons, so the Bolshevik war planners here still do not know what the rush-
rush new Russian installations are all about.
Even so, the Bolsheviks here consider the secret mission of Space Shuttle #4 to
be a great success. Their precious attack-confirmation sensor is now in orbit,
pointed at Russia.
The final act in Shuttle Mission #4 was carried out on schedule with great fan-
fare on July Fourth. The final secret duplicate of the Space Shuttle Columbia
swooped in to land at Edwards Air Force Base with the President watching. Af-
terwards the President gave a speech in which he gave lip service to future
support for NASA; but the fact is, my friends, that the Bolsheviks here believe
they have no further need for Space research. They believe the secret military
shuttle program has done its job and that they are now ready for NUCLEAR
WAR ONE. In recognition of this fact, the entity Reagan carried out a military
ceremony at Edwards Air Force Base after the shuttle landed. Major General
James Abrahamson, who seized control of the shuttle for the military, was pro-
moted to Lieutenant General. Abrahamson had nothing at all to do with
developing the space shuttle, but he has guided its secret use in preparing for
war, and for that he was told in effect, “Well done.”
Track 4 in the elaborate Bolshevik plan to lead us into war called for the intro-
duction of certain new offensive nuclear weaponry. That task is now essentially
completed, my friends. The Minuteman TX mobile ICBM missiles, which I
first revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 55, are now deployed; and the Stealth
Phantom warplanes, which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 73, are being
deployed now around Russia’s borders.
Track 5 of the plan called for a sudden mushrooming of simultaneous crises to

provide the spark for war. And it is happening, my friends!
The brutal Israeli invasion of Lebanon last month has dragged on with no solu-
tion in sight. Every time anyone suggests a way out of the crisis, the Begin
government says “No deal” and bombs Beirut again.
667
And now since July 14 the Persian Gulf war between Iran and Iraq is multiply-
ing the instability in the region. Iran’s thrust into Iraq is doing exactly what
Israel wants, throwing the Arab OPEC nations into disarray. The Iranian battle
cry is “On to Jerusalem”; but up to now Jerusalem could not be more pleased.
All this is paving the way for an Israeli limited nuclear strike to destroy Saudi
Arabian oil wells—a secret plan which I first revealed nearly seven (7) years
ago and have updated a number of times since then.
Elsewhere around the world the fires are multiplying. Savage new fighting has
erupted between Somalia and Ethiopia. The war in Afghanistan is heating up,
and in Central America the El Salvador war is now spreading to engulf Hondu-
ras and Nicaragua. So-called right-wing commandos from Honduras—trained,
outfitted, and supplied by the CIA—are intensifying their attacks on Nicaragua.
The United States is using troops and materiel from its Panama Canal base to
help Honduras against Nicaragua. This has now placed the Panama Canal in
dire jeopardy, just as I warned it would be in my book nine years ago.
During August world crises are being planned to multiply and get rapidly
worse. The Pentagon’s target date for nuclear war is still MID-SEPTEMBER,
my friends, and that is just around the corner!
Topic #2—Last week on July 22 the government of France issued what

amounts to a Declaration of Independence against the United States of America.
It consisted of a crisp two-paragraph statement issued in Paris. The statement
ordered all French companies to honor their contracts to help build the Siberian
gas pipe line from Russia to Europe. The French action was taken in angry de-
fiance of the increasingly arrogant dictating to Europe by Washington.
At the seven-nation Economic Summit early last month, the pipe line had been
discussed at length. As usual the United States wanted to force Europe to back
out of the deal. In exasperation the Europeans explained over and over how vi-
tal the pipe line is to them. When the summit ended on June 6 the Europeans
were left believing that the United States would respect their position; but, as
the French say, it had all been a dialogue of the deaf.
On June 18, less than two weeks after the Economic Summit, the entity Presi-
dent Reagan announced new measures to try to scuttle the pipe line. Last
December 1981 he had announced a ban on American companies providing the
equipment for the pipe line. On June 18 he expanded the ban internationally. He
declared that even foreign companies operating in their home countries were
banned from providing pipe-line equipment if they make products under
668
Audio Letter 77
American licenses. It was a move with little or no foundation in International

Law. Instead, it was based on sheer intimidation of our allies.
The French announcement of July 22 was Europe’s answer. First came the an-
nouncement concerning French companies; then, the same day, West German
Chancellor Helmut Schmidt was interviewed on American television. He an-
nounced that France was not alone in her decision. Schmidt said,
“The pipe line will be built; and the British, the French, the Germans and other
Europeans will stick to the agreements which their firms have been making
with the Soviets.”
On French television Foreign Minister Claude Cheysson revealed that a major

rift is taking place between Europe and the United States. Speaking for France
he described what is happening as “a progressive divorce.” He also said, “We
no longer speak the same language.” The feelings he expressed are spreading
fast throughout the leadership of Western Europe. Even Britain, whose present
government is dominated by Bolsheviks in the military sphere, is finding it nec-
essary to side with Europe on the pipe line issue.
My friends, we are now in the final pages of the events I outlined nine years
ago in my book THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR. What I made
public then were deliberate long-range economic and political plans, and the
inevitable consequences of those plans.
The efforts of the Reagan Administration to sabotage the Siberian gas pipe line
project are a direct threat to vital European interests. In response, our long-time
European allies are banding together to protect themselves. Sooner or later it
had to come to this. This is what I meant in my book to the effect that Europe
will no longer by cowed by United States blackmail. The breach now taking
place between the United States and Europe is giving rise to fears of a major
trade war. Those fears are well founded. Quoting from my book starting on
page 102:
“As for America, she will go her own way pushed by the momentum of the
New Imperialism. She will enter the tunnel of the Big Trade War with all of its
self-protective devices. The free trade idea will have gasped its last breath.”
It is happening now, my friends. Just three days ago, for example, an attempt to
work out an agreement between Europe and the United States over steel im-
ports collapsed. America’s obsolescent steel industry is slowly going belly-up
as steel from Europe’s more modern, government-subsidized plants floods our
669
market. Reagan’s response is to further deepen the rift by slapping taxes or in-
creased duties on imports of European products. Developments like these are
the inevitable consequences of forces which were deliberately set in motion
long ago, but they are also being manipulated to further the objectives of the
American Bolsheviks who now dominate the so-called Reagan Administration.
As they lead us down the path to nuclear war, they are also paving the way for
their own total domination of America after the war. As I have detailed in past
reports, they expect to survive the nuclear devastation which they plan to bring
down upon the rest of us.
If the war should get out of control and turn America into a hopeless wasteland,
they’re prepared to leave afterward and start over in the Southern Hemisphere.
But the fact is, my friends, that they think NUCLEAR WAR ONE will be less
disastrous than that.
The Bolsheviks here believe that what is left of America after NUCLEAR
WAR ONE will still be a prize worth having. They expect 40- to 60-million
Americans to survive the war in rural areas and small towns. The major United
States cities will be gone, but so will their unmanageable problems such as ur-
ban decay and runaway crime! America’s vast natural resources will still be
here, ready to be exploited. The Bolsheviks intend to position themselves to be
our taskmasters. They believe that a new Bolshevized America will rise from
the ashes and it will all be theirs to use however they choose.
In all this, my friends, the Bolsheviks here are expecting to repeat what they did
to take over Russia 65 years ago. It was the strain and suffering of World War I
that finally made Russia vulnerable to a Bolshevik take-over. Now, having lost
their control of Russia at the hands of Russia’s new anti-Bolshevik rulers, they
plan to try again here. World War I gave them Russia, and they believe
NUCLEAR WAR ONE will give them America.
To help pave the way for their intended total postwar dictatorship over Amer-
ica, the Bolsheviks here are deliberately isolating us in the world. I’ve already
described how the Reagan Administration is alienating Europe. Likewise, the
White House is also hitting the Japanese where it hurts by banning equipment
for joint Japanese and Russian oil projects. These are in the works in Siberia
and on Sakhalin Island, and would result in important new energy supplies for
Japan.
In Latin America Reagan Administration policy has done enormous damage to

America’s image. In the Falklands war between Britain and Argentina, Ameri-
670
Audio Letter 77
can open support for Britain was carried out in ways that angered all of Latin
America.
In the Middle East the United States is losing its credibility with the Arabs with
its attitude that Israel can do no wrong.
As for Russia and the Soviet bloc, Reagan policies boil down to nothing but fist
shaking and goading. America’s trade war against Russia is designed to turn the
“cold war” into a “hot war.” That is where trade wars always lead. In the 1930s
the United States used oil embargoes and trade boycotts to goad Japan into war,
and the result was Pearl Harbor. And now the United States is using embargoes,
boycotts, and sanctions to pave the way for war with Russia.
My friends, in every way the United States is isolating itself. On July 9 the en-
tity Reagan even announced that the United States will not sign the new “Law
of the Sea” treaty. That treaty took eight years to negotiate and has been signed
by 130 nations. Only four nations so far have said a flat “No” to it—and two of
them are America and Israel.
The self-inflicted isolation of America is deliberate, my friends. It’s part of the

Bolshevik strategy I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 63 to create a sort of
Masada complex here in America—that is, turning in and upon itself. The more
isolated America becomes, the more we will see ourselves as alone in a world
with bitter enemies and no friends!
The Bolsheviks here in America are using the same strategy as their Zionist
partners in Israel. The Yorkshire Post in England summed up the Zionist think-
ing perfectly six months ago in an editorial on January 16, quote:
“The superhawks in the Israeli government want the Israelis to feel unloved,
unwanted, and vulnerable by the world because then it can make it easier for
the government to argue for more security needs to take precedence over every-
thing else.”
That is what is happening in Begin’s Israel, my friends, and that is what is hap-
pening in Reagan’s America. America’s isolation abroad is moving along hand
in hand with measures to clamp down on Americans domestically. Several
things are in the works to hit us in the pocketbook IF the plans for imminent
nuclear war should somehow be delayed. The plan to repudiate the $100 bill,
which I first made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 63, is once again being ex-
amined. Large amounts of counterfeit $100 bills are now being made in Latin
America using American plates formerly used by the CIA in Vietnam. This
671
may be used as the excuse, the cover, to eliminate the $100 bill in a sudden re-
pudiation.
A new WAR POWERS ACT for economic purposes is also moving through
Congress very quietly right now. It would authorize the President to impose
wage and price controls, declare a bank holiday, close the Stock Markets, or
take other measures by declaring a NATIONAL ECONOMIC EMERGENCY.
Under that cover, presidential war powers would also be activated without the
public being aware of it!
The prospect of imminent nuclear war is also tied in to economic matters in

other ways. Six months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 71 I reported that all the
GOLD at the New York Assay Office of the United States Mint was being
moved. It was being taken up the Hudson River to the West Point Depository,
which was not designed for gold bullion storage. The reason given to employ-
ees was that it was for security purposes, even though security at West Point is
inferior to that at the Assay Office. Now I can tell you what finally happened to
that gold.
The gold has been spirited out of the country in preparation for nuclear war
here. It was shipped to Geneva, Switzerland, by way of New Orleans, Louisiana
and France. The shipment was met by Swiss Army Guards in France, and from
there it went by train and then by truck to an underground depository in Ge-
neva. It was signed for in Geneva on May 12, 1982. The custodian of the gold
is a Geneva bank. President Reagan agreed to the entire transfer ahead of time.
My friends, if history is any guide at all, this and other movements of gold are
clear signs that war is expected soon by our so-called leaders. For centuries it
has been customary for leaders of nations who know that war is imminent to
move their gold to Switzerland for safekeeping. Lately not only the West Point
gold but other private gold hoards have been leaving America for Switzerland.
Likewise in Britain, the Rothschilds have lately been transferring their large
gold holdings to Switzerland.
In the case of the West Point gold, there is still one more important fact to re-
port. This gold—gold rightly belonging to you and me, the citizens of
America—has been consigned for the use of the government of Israel!
Israel is using it as collateral to finance continuing arms purchases at a stagger-

ing pace. Israel is secretly arming itself far beyond anything that could
conceivably be needed to fight the Arabs alone, so the question is:
672
Audio Letter 77
Why are all those weapons now being stockpiled in Israel?
The answer is that Israel’s Zionist war lords are expecting to have a bigger foe
in the region soon. They are trying to drag Russia into the Middle East fighting
on the way to nuclear war!
All in all, the economy of the United States is being bled dry. Insatiable spend-
ing on sterile armaments is helping to fuel inflation as our dollars go for guns
instead of butter. At the same time, record federal borrowing is also keeping
interest rates at business-killing levels.
The result is STAGFLATION—a stagnating economy with continuing infla-

tion. If the plans for nuclear war do not cut it short, we are heading into a deep
depression, the likes of which we have never seen before:
A depression with plenty of consumer goods in the stores but great numbers of
people without the money to buy them. Prices will be higher and higher for eve-
rything, with people selling their valuables in order to exist. There will be
people moving in with relatives. Old rooming houses filled by people who can
no longer afford anything better. Families separated as people take any em-
ployment available anywhere. Long lines waiting to apply for government jobs
and a little security.
IF nuclear war is somehow prevented or delayed, these are the things that are
being brought upon us by the policies known as REAGANOMICS. But as it
stands now, my friends, it may all be cut short very soon! America’s domestic
shift to a war footing is underway now, and the secret Pentagon plans for nu-
clear war will soon be in their final weeks.
Topic #3—Early this month on July 6 the Israeli government announced that
American troops would soon be sent to Lebanon if necessary. Hours later the
entity Reagan announced that yes, in principle, he was prepared to send in the
Marines as part of a truce agreement. For public consumption, assurances were
given that this would be done under certain comforting conditions. Supposedly
if the Marines are sent in it will only be temporary to police a truce, not fight,
and only if all sides agree to their presence. It all sounds very safe; but to those
who know the reality of conditions in Lebanon, the proposal to send in Ameri-
can troops has the ring of sheer insanity. That’s about like trying to smother a
fire by dousing it with gasoline. It will be a situation made to order for explo-
sive incidents to widen the war.
673
The following day a letter of warning against sending in the Marines was deliv-
ered to Reagan from Soviet President Brezhnev. It was a cryptic warning
containing no specific threats. In diplomatic language it simply said, “Don’t do
it.”
These days anti-war warnings from Moscow are becoming increasingly urgent
and frequent. On July 7 the Brezhnev warning against sending United States
Marines into Lebanon was issued, and only six days later the Ustinov warning
against an American nuclear first strike was issued which I described in Topic
#1.
Russia’s anti-war warnings include not only words but also deeds. Today’s
Kremlin is run by men who know that words without deeds are useless against
the Bolsheviks. That’s why I gave a warning last month that Russian pre-
emptive measures could be expected to start taking place. Those pre-emptive
measures are underway now, my friends, in the form of warning strikes to send
a message.
The first of these warning strikes took place late last month on Sunday morn-
ing, June 27. Millions of Americans watched the launch of Space Shuttle #4
that morning on television. We watched until the two solid rocket boosters
separated and fell away from the shuttle. Moments later a Jumbo Cosmosphere,
which was pacing the shuttle from a distance, fired two quick blasts at the fal-
ling boosters, which were no longer visible on TV. The Cosmosphere’s beam
weapon blew a hole in the side of each $18,000,000 booster shell. An Air Force
C-130 airplane was tracking the boosters and saw their parachutes open, but
when the spent boosters hit the water they just kept right on going. Thanks to
the holes which had been blown in their sides, they did not float. Recovery
teams watched helplessly as $36,000,000 worth of space hardware sank in sev-
eral thousand feet of water.
Embarrassed NASA officials have tried to explain away the loss of the two
shuttle boosters with the lie that the parachutes did not open. The odds are as-
tronomical against the parachutes failing that way on both boosters, but they
have no other excuse that they dare give the public. Meanwhile, the Russian
message was clear. Had they cared to, the Russians could have destroyed the
shuttle itself on nation-wide television, no less, instead of the boosters.
Next came the Aeroflot crash in Moscow followed by the reprisal on July 9
against the Pan Am jet in New Orleans. Both events were acts of war—the se-
cret war which both sides are beginning to mention in public. The Russian
message to the Bolsheviks here was:
674
Audio Letter 77
“You’re not as secure as you think you are.”
Six days later the Russians reminded the Bolsheviks here of their combined ca-
pabilities in geophysical warfare and widespread sabotage here. In the spring of
1977 I began reporting on a Russian campaign of planting nuclear mines where
they can destroy countless dams around the United States. Those devices are
still there, my friends, waiting for use at the press of a button in Russia; but the
Bolsheviks here believe those weapons are all a big bluff, that today’s anti-war
Russian leaders will never use them. So on July 15 the Kremlin said “Think
again” to the Bolshevik Pentagon. That day northern Colorado was reeling from
incredible rainstorms, the product of Russian weather modification. Dams in
the area were straining to hold back the onslaught of water. Then a low-yield
underwater nuclear mine was detonated at the base of the Lawn Lake Dam. The
dam blew open, and the flood waters rampaged down the canyon and through
the resort town of Estes Park. Afterwards the government tried to cover its
tracks by saying they had been worried about that dam, but the disaster actually
came with absolutely no warning because the dam was ruined instantly by the
Russian mine.
The very next day there was still another Russian warning shot. This time it was
couched in the centuries-old language of naval warfare, updated to the Space
Age. When confrontations take place at sea there are times when a warship will
fire a shot across the bow of another ship. The shot is aimed to barely miss the
ship, whistling past just in front of it. A shot across the bow, my friends, is per-
haps the most unmistakable military message on the face of the earth. It means:
“Halt immediately or you will be destroyed.”
On July 16 a United Air Lines DC-10 took off from Boston bound for Los An-
geles. Among the passengers of the big jet were certain key members of the
Bolshevik ruling group here in America. For a while the flight progressed with-
out incident; but as the jet flew westward at 39,000 feet, a Russian
Cosmosphere was stationing itself to intercept it. The Cosmosphere hovered
several miles off to one side of the jet’s flight path and a few hundred feet
above it. The charged particle beam weapon of the Cosmosphere was aimed
horizontally to fire a shot across the bow of the speeding DC-10. As the jet ap-
proached, the Cosmosphere crew charged up the beam weapon for a maximum
energy blast in the defocused mode. As I revealed long ago in AUDIO
LETTER No. 29, this produces a violent air blast like those heard that winter
along America’s east coast and elsewhere. At precisely the right instant the
Cosmosphere fired its shot across the bow of the oncoming DC-10. The tre-
675
mendous air blast just above the DC-10’s altitude created a huge shock wave of
downward-racing air. An instant later the DC-10 flew into it. Passengers later
told reporters that they had heard a big bang, then the whole plane shook as it
was squashed downward as if by a giant hand.
Everyone not wearing a seat belt was thrown to the ceiling, which is a long way
on a DC-10. Many people were hurt, several seriously; then the episode was
over as quickly as it had started. The jet flew on to Los Angeles without further
incident—but to certain individuals on the plane, the air-borne shot across the
bow was meant as a clear warning! The Russians were saying,
“Halt now in your war plans or you will be destroyed.”
The latest in the series of Russian warning shots took place on July 22. It was
aimed squarely at the weapons specialists among the Bolsheviks here. That day
the first full-range test flight of the Army’s new Pershing-2 missile took place
at Cape Canaveral. The Pershing-2 is the nuclear missile which the Reagan
Administration wants to place in Europe where it can attack Russia. Europe will
be used as a launching pad. A few seconds after the Pershing-2 lifted off from
Cape Canaveral it was bathed in neutron radiation from a Russian Cosmosphere
high above. As I’ve explained in the past, neutron radiation totally deranges all
kinds of electronic equipment. As a result, the Pershing-2’s guidance system
went crazy. The climbing missile flopped over on its side, then started cart-
wheeling through the Florida skies. Seventeen seconds after lift-off, the Range
Safety Officer pushed the self-destruct button and the missile blew up. The
Russian message to the Bolsheviks here was very plain, my friends. The plans
to use missiles to help destroy Russia will not succeed. The attempt to do so
will only rain destruction on America itself.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
Now it’s time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I’ve re-
ported on the growing momentum toward NUCLEAR WAR ONE. All five
tracks of the complex plan of the American Bolsheviks to bring on nuclear war
are coming together on schedule. Here in the United States a shift onto a war
footing is taking place as we are being psychologically conditioned for war to
come. The collapse of General Alexander Haig’s anti-war coup d’etat last
month has left the field of battle to the Bolsheviks here versus the Kremlin, so
the Russians are now mounting a campaign of anti-war warnings in both words
and deeds. All this is going on as leaders of both sides have started saying in
public that America and Russia are already at war.
676
Audio Letter 77
The warning shots fired across America’s bow in recent days are very clear.
The question is:
Will the Bolsheviks here heed these warnings and back away from their nuclear
war plans?
The answer to that, my friends, is being written in blood in war-torn Lebanon!

Tiny Lebanon used to be the Switzerland, the jewel of the Middle East. Beirut
was a beautiful, peaceful city, and a center of trade and finance. The mountains
were dotted with the famous cedars of Lebanon and with serene, picturesque
villages populated by a gentle and friendly people. The valleys of Lebanon, es-
pecially the Bekaa Valley, were indescribably lush with fruits and vegetables.
The Zionists in Israel coveted all of it; and so using the PLO as an excuse, they
have invaded at last. In order to control Lebanon they must first destroy it, and
that is what they are doing. Each new wave of Israeli bombing leaves more
people without homes, more small children maimed, crying, in shock. Israeli-
run concentration camps in south Lebanon are full of prisoners with large
crosses painted on their backs. Food, water, and medical attention have been
denied by the Israelis to many victims of their blitzkrieg, and all the while the
United States Government continues to support the Begin war! Can you imag-
ine?
Three days ago the Palestine Liberation Organization Chief, Yassir Arafat, gave
a signed document to a group of American Congressmen that implies accep-
tance of Israel’s right to exist. Israel dismissed it instantly as a propaganda ploy
and promptly intensified the bombing of Beirut. Likewise, the Bolshevik
Reagan Administration waved aside the Arafat statement as, quote:
“Ridiculous propaganda.”
My friends, if either the United States or Israel seriously wanted to end the
bloodshed, any opportunity to negotiate would be considered. The joint
Reagan-Begin rejection of the Arafat peace overture can only mean one thing:
The Reagan-Begin Axis does not want peace; they want war!
So the days ahead, my friends, will be very dangerous indeed; and as Thomas
Jefferson once said: “I tremble for my country when I reflect that God is just.”
677
Audio Letter 78
August 27, 1982
On the first day of this month of August 1982, a heart-rending symbol of the
Beirut holocaust appeared in newspapers all across America. It was a wire-
service photograph of a nurse in hospital in East Beirut cradling a small seven-
week-old baby in her left arm as she fed it from a bottle. From the tip of the tiny
nose upward the baby’s head was swathed in massive bandages covering eyes
and all. The little shoulders were wrapped in still more bandages. Where there
should have been a pair of infant arms, there was nothing. The baby’s arms had
been blown off by an Israeli artillery shell landing near the Green Line separat-
ing East and West Beirut.
They say a picture is worth a thousand words, but in this case the picture was
worth a thousand sobs. Here was a tiny Lebanese baby, a brand new human life,
ruined before it could even get started. The picture was a poignant object lesson
about the senseless tragedy of war; at least that is how most people probably
reacted when they saw it.
But the reaction of the Begin government in Israel was far different. When the
picture was brought to their attention they wasted not a word on trivial matters
like simple human compassion, sympathy, or regret. Instead they lodged bitter
protests against the wire services and newspapers who had published the photo.
There was great concern over the public relations impact on Israel resulting
from that photograph. Demands were made that retractions be printed about the
Israeli responsibility for the baby’s grievous wounds; but to their credit, wire
services here refused to make any retractions. It had been established very
firmly that Israeli bombardment had caused the tragedy.
To most of us far from the scene, that picture of a tiny baby horribly maimed
for life may appear exceptional. But the fact is that the plight of that child has
been repeated countless times in the Israeli rape of Lebanon.
Recently this was illustrated by the observations of a Presbyterian minister af-

filiated with Princeton Theological Seminary. The minister happened to be in
southern Lebanon when the invasion began on June 5 and remained in Lebanon
679
for several weeks into the war. Recently he described what he witnessed in a
talk in Ohio.
The minister had seen for himself areas where the Israeli onslaught had caused
not hundreds but thousands of deaths, mostly of civilians! He also described the
strenuous Israeli efforts to cover up the extent of the carnage and hide it from
the outside world. In more than one case Israeli bulldozers have even dug pits,
shoveling in piles of bodies and covering them over. But the most nightmarish
scene he described was one where a great number of children had been killed
and maimed. He had come upon the scene when the cleanup had just begun. He
was shown a room piled high with fingers, hands, legs, arms, and other parts of
children’s bodies.
Here in the United States the sheer enormity of the Israeli atrocities in Lebanon
is being censored out. When we hear about disgusted Israeli soldiers leaving the
front and returning to Israel to protest the war, we are unable to fully under-
stand why. But elsewhere around the world the news media are less hampered
by the strait jacket of Zionist and Bolshevik censorship here in the United
States, and what they are reporting is in full agreement with those personal ob-
servations by the Presbyterian minister.
For example, on August 8 the BBC reported the observations of an Interna-

tional Red Cross official about the carnage in Beirut. He said that more than
80% of the casualties in Lebanon were civilians, and he insisted that the killing
and bombing going on in Beirut was much worse than occurred generally dur-
ing World War II. Two days later the BBC carried a report about Relief women
from Europe and New Zealand working in the Beirut battle zone.
They had walked to the Green Line to protest the Israeli siege, which had cut
off food, fuel, and water for West Beirut. One said, “These are the most horrible
conditions I’ve seen in all our relief work around the world.”
And, my friends, the Israelis would not even allow the children in West Beirut
to leave!
Many of the military actions ordered by the Begin government in Lebanon can
only be described as “war crimes.” Men who were Zionist terrorists in the
1940s control what has become the world’s third most powerful military ma-
chine—that of Israel in the 1980s. The result is what we have seen in
Lebanon—STATE TERRORISM. This is military power used according to ter-
rorist doctrine.
680
Audio Letter 78
In normal military doctrine the most successful operations are those which
minimize casualties; but in military terrorism the opposite is the case. Every
effort is made to multiply casualties for their own sake with no distinction be-
tween combatants and civilians. To the terrorist, death is power.
Throughout the siege of Beirut we’ve seen the Israeli doctrine of military terror-
ism at work. On August 13 the Washington Post described the bewilderment
created among Beirut residents by the merciless Israeli attacks. One was quoted
in the words:
“What is the sense of all this killing? What do the Israelis want? Are they
crazy? The Palestinians have said that they are ready to go, so why don’t they
let them? Why do they continue to bomb us like this?”
The answers, my friends, are all found in the doctrine of Military Terrorism
practiced by the Begin government. What they want is total control through to-
tal fear; and to achieve that, death and suffering is intentionally increased as
much as possible. These are the policies of genocide and of true war crimes.
The war crimes committed in Lebanon by the militant Israeli Zionists are terri-
ble to contemplate, my friends; but if we do not stop and think about them, we
will not take seriously the plans for even greater war crimes to come!
The Reagan-Begin axis of Bolsheviks and Zionists are working fast to commit
the ultimate war crime—THERMONUCLEAR WAR. If they succeed, the ag-
ony of Lebanon will pale beside that of America!
As I say these words, the hurry-up plan to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE is still
on schedule. I first made public this short-cut war timetable six months ago in
AUDIO LETTER No. 72. In case it should fail or be delayed, longer-term in-
trigues to bring on nuclear war are also continuing world-wide; but as of this
moment, my friends, the United States Pentagon is still counting down toward
mid-September to set off a surprise nuclear war.
This will be my last opportunity to report to you before “Z-Day”—the war tar-
get date now planned in mid-September.
There is a chance that something dramatic will happen to halt the plan in the
days that are left. I have received late word that the anti-war coup d’etat plans
which I first reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 72 may not be totally dead after
all. The Bolsheviks here did succeed in ousting the key man in that plan, Gen-
eral Alexander Haig, two months ago; but the Bolsheviks here are not certain
that they succeeded in weeding out all of Haig’s men. If not, then anything
681
could happen in the next two weeks. Even so, action to prevent the war remains
a long shot at this late date.
If the Bolsheviks here do succeed in setting off a surprise American nuclear

first strike against Russia, I want you to be as prepared as possible. There will
be absolutely no official warning to the public ahead of time if the plan is at-
tempted, but there are a few important warning signs to watch for in the news. I
want you to know what they are and what they will mean if you see them take
place. I’ll also reveal the exact schedule for “Z-Day” as now planned. My hope
is that by knowing what to look for and when, you’ll be able to save yourself if
the attack is attempted against Russia.
My three topics for this AUDIO LETTER are:
Topic #1—THE SURPRISE HALT TO THE BEIRUT HOLOCAUST
Topic #2—FINAL PENTAGON PLANS FOR SURPRISE NUCLEAR WAR
Topic #3—THE RUSSIAN SURPRISE WEAPON FOR NUCLEAR

DEFENSE
Topic #1—When the Israeli invasion of Lebanon began 12 weeks ago on June
5, it was called “OPERATION PEACE FOR GALILEE.” Israel promised a
nervous world that this would be only a limited operation with limited objec-
tives. The Israelis gave their solemn promise that their armed forces would go
no deeper than 40 kilometers—that is, 25 miles into Lebanon. Within that lim-
ited zone close to Israel the intent was to eliminate all Palestinian fighting
forces. Begin justified the operation in the usual sanctimonious terms, telling
the world that Israel had been forced into doing it. It was the only way, he said,
for Israel to buy peace for its northern provinces.
My friends, from start to finish the so-called “PEACE FOR GALILEE” opera-
tion by Israel has been a tangle of lies. The word “peace” was used to give a
halo to the most genocidal war yet by Israel, and the Biblical-sounding phrase
“Peace for Galilee” was designed to hide the true nature of the campaign as
much as possible—from Christians in particular!
When we Christians hear the word “Galilee” we can’t help thinking of our Lord
Jesus Christ. The very word itself sounds sacred to us so at a subconscious level
we are tempted to feel that we dare not condemn what the Israelis are doing—
and feelings like these are reinforced by Zionist influence exerted through
countless churches here in America!
682
Audio Letter 78
The counterfeit Jews, the Khazar Jews, who control Israel today, spend vast
amounts of money to encourage counterfeit interpretations of the Bible! As a
result, countless millions of well-meaning but misled Christians close their eyes
to Israel’s war crimes, saying: “It’s all in prophecy.”
The Zionist lies about Israel’s operation “PEACE FOR GALILEE” began even
with the officially claimed date of the invasion. The agreed date used by the
major media is June 6 when some Israeli forces went through a United Nations
checkpoint; but the invasion actually began as I pointed out in AUDIO
LETTER No. 76 on June 5, not June 6. It is almost as if by changing the date of
the invasion the Israelis are trying to avoid the prophet Ezekiel’s prophecy of
doom. I quoted from that Biblical prophecy in AUDIO LETTER No. 76. The
Israelis are fond of what they call “creating new facts,” but this is one fact they
cannot change.
To set the record straight once and for all, I now quote as an example from the
New York Daily News for Sunday, June 6, 1982:
“Israeli tanks moved across the border into a Christian enclave in southern
Lebanon yesterday while Israeli warplanes and gun boats pounded suspected
Palestinian positions.”
The date of the paper, my friends, is June 6. The reference to “yesterday” in the
news article means June 5. Invasion of a country is a matter of fact, not words;
and that invasion began with tanks crossing the border on June 5, 1982—the
same day the official invasion order was signed.
The Begin government began its abominations of military desolation in its sixth
year, in the sixth month of the year, on the fifth day of the month. If the Israelis
have incurred the wrath of God as spelled out in Ezekiel 8, it cannot be undone
by lying about the date of the invasion.
The extent of the Israeli lies about the purpose of the Lebanon invasion is al-
most beyond belief. But what is even more disturbing is the extent to which
those lies have been successfully hidden from most Americans. The whole ex-
cuse for invading Lebanon was allegedly to end Palestinian violence against
northern Israel. If you believe there’s even a shred of truth to that, please listen
to the following quotation. It’s taken from an article by columnist Anthony
Lewis published in the New York Times of June 7, 1982. I now quote:
683
“For nine months not a single rocket or shell was fired by PLO gunners into
Israel. When Israeli planes bombed Lebanon on April 21 for the first time since
the truce started, the PLO did not respond. When there was another bombing on
May 9, there was a limited response—about 100 rockets that Israel said caused
no damage or casualties. Then after the massive Israeli bombing last week, the
PLO responded with full-scale barrages. In short, the cease-fire kept the Galilee
safe until Israel bombed Lebanon. The argument that aggressive new military
action was needed to keep the rockets out turns reality upside-down.”
My friends, it all boils down to the fact that the Reagan-Begin axis was deter-
mined to set off war in the Middle East. The timing of the war had nothing to
do with any alleged provocations by the Palestinians. Instead, it was dictated by
the joint plan of the American Bolsheviks and the Israeli Zionists to set off nu-
clear war very soon. That is why the Israeli forces did not even slow down
when they reached their promised limit of 25 miles into Lebanon. The merciless
bombardment and siege of Beirut itself had purposes far different from those
stated. The presence of PLO headquarters there simply provided a convenient
excuse for what was to be the invasion of an Arab capital.
Throughout the Arab world an Israeli invasion of an Arab capital has always
been seen as the ultimate taboo. Had that been the outcome of the siege of Bei-
rut, general war in the Middle East was virtually guaranteed and that would
have created the ideal cover to explain away the surprise eruption of nuclear
war very soon. But, my friends, the Beirut holocaust at the hands of Israel
ended in a surprise.
The Begin government had no intention of allowing negotiations for evacuation

of the PLO to succeed. They kept turning the military screws tighter and tighter
on Beirut while adding more and more demands to be met by the Palestinians.
Each time the PLO confounded the Israelis by accepting demands which they
had been expected to reject. As a result, time after time Reagan envoy Philip
Habib warned the White House that an agreement was becoming unavoidable.
Each time that happened Begin was notified, and the Israeli Air Force started
pounding Beirut again! The result, time after time, was exactly what the Israelis
wanted—a brief derailment of the talks.
The cycle of talks, near agreement, and disruption by Israeli bombing took up
almost the entire first half of this month of August 1982. Foreign newspapers
were filled with editorials condemning the bloodbath in Beirut and demanding
that the United States rein in Israel. It was put more bluntly by the Morning
Star, a British newspaper with Soviet ties. On August 1 the Morning Star de-
684
Audio Letter 78
clared that the United States on its own could end the siege of Beirut immedi-
ately if it cared to do so. But here in Washington the entity President Reagan
and his spokesmen just wrung their hands as if they were powerless to do any-
thing. The carnage in Beirut went right on with a continued green light from
Washington.
Meanwhile there were series of increasingly threatening growls about the Bei-
rut holocaust from the Russian Bear. Russia’s new rulers are as anti-Zionist as
they are anti-Bolshevik, and they make no bones about it. On August 2 the
BBC reported that Russia had condemned Israel as a “barbarian committing
genocide in Lebanon.” On August 3 Moscow Radio charged that the planning
for the take-over of Lebanon had been done by the Defense Department in
Washington. On August 4 the BBC reported increasingly fierce criticism of Is-
rael and the United States by Russia. The next day Russia called for a United
Nations Security Council meeting, and at the meeting the next day described
the Israeli aggression as one of insolence and craziness. The exchanges between
the Russian and the Israeli delegates were some of the bitterest ever seen at the
United Nations!
While all of this was going on in public, the Russians were also flashing warn-
ing signs by way of diplomatic channels. The Kremlin was telling the White
House to call off the dogs in Beirut, but Washington was not listening.
Finally, the Russians decided “Enough was Enough.” In the small hours of
Thursday August 12, the entity President Reagan was awakened out of a sound
sleep. He was told that Soviet President Brezhnev was waiting to speak to him
on the crisis HOT LINE. He was calling from his summer retreat in the Crimea.
When Reagan picked up the phone, Brezhnev’s message was short and blunt.
Reagan listened as the slightly slurred words of an elderly man crackled over
the phone in Russian. Then he turned to the interpreter listening on a parallel
phone. In effect the message was:
Both you and your Zionist partners are deceiving yourselves. In the end we will
not permit a beachhead in Lebanon by your troops. Either you stop the Zionists
now or we will fix them ourselves. What’s more, we know all about your Sep-
tember war plan. Don’t do it.
Reagan, who never makes a decision on his own, could only answer that he
would check into it.
As the Reagan-Brezhnev HOT-LINE conversation took place, dawn was break-

ing over the besieged city of Beirut. It was a dawn that had been shattered by
685
the beginning of the most devastating bombardment yet by the Israelis. Israeli
Fighter Bombers were shrieking overhead, diving toward the city, then pulling
up as they dropped their bombs. Land and sea-based artillery shells were ex-
ploding within the city at a rate of more than one per second!
The reason for the Israeli attack was very simple. A final negotiating session
was scheduled for 4:00 o’clock that afternoon by Reagan envoy Habib and top
Lebanese officials. Habib had warned the White House that unless something
was done, an agreement was a certainty; so to prevent that, the Israelis
unleashed everything they had on Beirut.
The raids went on for 10 hours straight, from 6:00 A.M. until shortly after the
meeting began, and it almost worked, my friends. Lebanese Prime Minister
Chafic Wazzan stormed out of the meeting with Habib in a rage. He declared
that negotiations be suspended indefinitely; and afterwards, speaking of
Reagan’s man Habib, Wazzan said:
“I have told him I cannot carry on, and hold him as well as the United States
responsible for the consequences.”
If that had been the end of it, my friends, the Reagan-Begin axis would have
achieved exactly what they wanted. With the talks broken off indefinitely the
Begin government would have had the excuse it wanted to proceed with its all-
out invasion of Beirut.
The reason it did not end there was the Brezhnev-Reagan HOT-LINE call
which had taken place that morning. The Russians had threatened to “fix” the
Zionists, and suddenly there was evidence that they were preparing to do just
that.
Israeli Air Defense radars in Lebanon, on Israeli ships, and in Israel itself
abruptly picked up a chilling sight. More than 100 unidentified blips material-
ized on radars all over the region. The blips were stationary, several miles up. It
was a sight most radar operators in the area had never seen before; but when the
reports reached Israeli and American Air Defense headquarters, the meaning of
the blips was understood instantly. For the first time in several years the Rus-
sian Space Command was making a massive show of force using its fleet of
Cosmospheres. These electrogravitic weapons platforms normally hover at the
fringes of the atmosphere where they are invisible to radar; but on that after-
noon of August 12 over 100 of them descended straight down to within radar
range over Lebanon and Israel.
686
Audio Letter 78
Bolshevik military Intelligence analysts here in Washington had to make a de-

cision fast as to whether the Russians were bluffing or meant business. Because
of the known anti-war attitude of the present-day Kremlin, Russian shows of
force have not always been taken seriously here, but lately the Russians have
been doing things to change that.
Last month I reported on a whole series of warning shots which the Russians
have fired across America’s bow lately. They have been designed to show that
the Kremlin is prepared to use its vast military power. When that was added to
the Brezhnev HOT LINE call, analysts here got a bad case of sweaty palms. It
was decided that the Beirut invasion plan would have to be aborted. Somehow
the PLO evacuation negotiations had to be started up again.
Suddenly all the excuses that America can’t control Israel went out the window.
Instead, evening news reports on August 12 led off by saying that Reagan was
cracking down on Israel. There were planted stories that Reagan had called Be-
gin and expressed outrage over the massive air raids that day. All of a sudden,
after not lifting a finger for two months to stop the indiscriminate Lebanon
massacre, it seemed Reagan had got religion.
The following day the Lebanese government agreed to resume the suspended
talks over a PLO withdrawal. Suddenly all the previous obstacles seemed to
evaporate. Within days the final agreement was struck. Barely a week later, on
August 21, the first actual evacuation of PLO fighters from Beirut got under-
way, supervised by French troops.
The turnabout by the United States and Israel was so radical and so abrupt that
a scapegoat had to be found to explain it away to the public. For that reason
everyone started pointing fingers at the Israeli Defense Minister Sharon. There
were rumors that he alone was responsible for the insane bombardment of Bei-
rut on August 12. All kinds of stories suddenly surfaced to the effect that
Sharon always was kind of insubordinate and dangerous. It was all his fault, we
were told; but Sharon said it was the fault of the Israeli Cabinet.
My friends, the Russian power play saved Beirut from an invasion; but when
the American Bolsheviks and Israeli Zionists caved in and gave up on the Bei-
rut invasion plan, it was only a retreat, not a surrender. They are still as bent on
nuclear war as ever, and the sooner the better provided they can strike before
Russia does.
In the past I’ve described how the Bolshevik nuclear war planners always make
sure they have available not just one but many possible paths to war. Having
687
been thwarted in their Beirut invasion plan, they simply moved on to the next
contingency plan. That plan involves the United States Marines, who arrived
two days ago in Beirut to supposedly help police the PLO evacuation. The plan
is to stoke up a new crisis by creating an incident in which a number of Marines
will be killed. In order to set the stage for it, the Israeli MOSSAD has already
started creating so-called cease-fire violations which are blamed on the PLO.
Last Sunday on August 22 there were news reports of an Israeli troop bus alleg-
edly attacked by PLO guerrillas. Stories of that type are only to condition us for
the planned incident to come against the United States Marines and Lebanese
leaders.
My friends, we have been told all sorts of lies that Israel’s enemy in its so-
called PEACE FOR GALILEE operation was the PLO, but on August 5 Israeli
Foreign Minister Shamir revealed that the real enemy was Russia. Speaking to a
group of Jewish leaders in New York City Shamir said:
“Lebanon until now was dominated by the PLO and Syria; and behind them the
Soviets,” and he boasted: “Soviet Russia doesn’t play any role now in our
area.”
But a week later Shamir found out differently when the Russian Cosmosphere
threat forced a surprise end to the Beirut holocaust.
Two months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 76 I reported that the Israeli invasion
of Lebanon was only part of the greater plan for nuclear war against Russia.
Now United States Marines have been introduced in Lebanon with a promise
by President Reagan that they will be needed no longer than 30 days.
Before those 30 days are up, my friends, the Bolsheviks here intend to set off
the surprise American nuclear attack against Russia. The countdown clock for
the “PROJECT Z” war plan which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 73 is
still ticking away. All preparations are now being targeted for “Z-Day”—the
day of the planned nuclear attack itself.
My friends, the exact date chosen by the Pentagon for “Z-Day” is:
FRIDAY, SEPTEMBER 17, 1982!
Topic #2—When World War I broke out 68 years ago, world opinion was far
from unanimous about who was right and who was wrong in the conflict. Many
people felt that Austria-Hungary had put up long enough with harassment by
688
Audio Letter 78
the Serbs. After Archduke Franz Ferdinand was assassinated by a Serb in Sara-
jevo on June 28, 1914, Austria-Hungary declared war on Serbia, and many
people applauded. Austria-Hungary had been given a blank check by Germany
to smash the Serbs. People started having second thoughts when they saw the
dispute mushrooming, sucking in nation after nation. Even so, world opinion
continued to maintain a great deal of good will toward Germany and her al-
lies—that is, until the Battle of Louvain (now Leuven), Belgium.
Up until the war, Louvain had been a beautiful, peaceful town, but Louvain had
the misfortune to be caught in the middle between the armies of the Kaiser and
those of the allies. The Germans won the battle by virtually leveling Louvain.
The battle took a gruesome toll among the helpless residents of Louvain. On all
sides Louvain lay in ruins—once beautiful buildings had been reduced to piles
of rubble. The rubble had become a tomb for countless civilians who had died
inside. The debris-choked streets were a mournful scene of the maimed, the be-
reaved, and the confused.
When news about the fate of Louvain reached the outside world, a wave of re-
vulsion swept around the world. Many who had originally sympathized with the
Kaiser’s policies were repelled by such extreme military tactics. In terms of
public opinion, Louvain was the turning point of World War I. It blackened the
image of Germany in a way that could never be undone. My friends, Beirut
could well be the counterpart of Louvain for Israel and her powerful backer, the
United States.
Today, as in 1914, the country that ostensibly started the war benefitted at first
by a large reservoir of good will in the world; but just as Louvain soured public
opinion in World War I, Beirut has shocked the world in 1982. The merciless
brutality and senseless killings by the Israelis in Lebanon has been symbolized
by the siege of Beirut. Israel has been rightly condemned the world over for its
actions in Lebanon; and if the full extent of the agony of Lebanon ever becomes
generally known, Israel’s image will never recover from the shame.
When Austria-Hungary declared war on Serbia in 1914, it set off a chain reac-
tion that snowballed into war among the great powers of that day. Likewise the
Israeli invasion of Lebanon to wipe out the PLO has been calculated to help set
off a chain reaction leading to NUCLEAR WAR ONE. The joint strategy of the
American Bolsheviks and the Israeli Zionists is a replay of the maneuvering
that set off World War I. I’ve given details about that in past reports, especially
in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 63, 66, and 69. If need be, the Bolsheviks and Zion-
ists—that is, the Reagan-Begin axis—are prepared to keep multiplying crises
until America’s nuclear first strike succeeds.
689
In the Middle East the de facto move of PLO headquarters to Syria is setting the
stage for a direct confrontation soon between Israel and Syria. That will create
the most dangerous proxy battle yet between client states of Russia and the
United States. Already Israeli forces are preparing to try to drive out the legally-
present Syrians from Lebanon’s Bekaa Valley. At the same time, Israeli forces
are not withdrawing as the PLO evacuates from West Beirut; instead, they are
heading north! Israeli armored units are already on the outskirts of Tripoli, just
20 miles short of Lebanon’s northern border.
As for Israel’s solemn promises to turn back Lebanon to the Lebanese, nothing
could be a more transparent lie. Thanks to the war, the southern third of Leba-
non, including the Litani River, has now been absorbed into the so-called “Free
Lebanon Zone” controlled by Major Haddad. Haddad is nothing but an Israeli
agent, a shabbas goy doing the dirty work of the Begin government. When and
if the Israelis formally withdraw from Lebanon, they will still continue to con-
trol Haddad’s area including Sidon and Tyre.
And now another Israeli puppet, Mr. Bashir Gemayel, has emerged from the
war rubble as the President-elect of Lebanon. He is nothing more than another
Sadat; and he, too, will meet the same fate as Sadat when Israel is ready!
Looking around the world, my friends, the amount of trouble now being stirred
up by the Bolsheviks and Zionists is almost beyond description. For example,
Bolshevik agents in Poland are stirring up new trouble to ruin government ef-
forts to relax martial law. That keeps the Warsaw regime on the defensive,
unable to appear as anything but a “bad guy.”
Or consider Central America and the Caribbean. Panama is now being destabi-
lized, beginning with the recent surprise resignation, so-called, of Panama’s
president. The plan to create an apparent threat to the Panama Canal is moving
right along.
Meanwhile Congress has recently passed a special Tonkin Gulf-type resolution

aimed at Cuba. It frees Reagan’s hands to take military action against Cuba, just
as the Tonkin Gulf Resolution freed President Johnson to widen the war in
Vietnam.
And then there is Asia where war between India and Pakistan is targeted for
around November 1982!
690
Audio Letter 78
Middle East intrigues and many more world-wide are in the works as a result of
the Bolshevik program to Balkanize the world; but all those intrigues will no
longer be necessary if the “PROJECT Z” short-cut war plan succeeds. Very
soon they plan to set off NUCLEAR WAR ONE as a total surprise—and they
intend to make it look like a gigantic accident!
In AUDIO LETTER No. 73 five months ago I outlined the over-all war plan of
“PROJECT Z,” but as a practical matter the most important thing you need to
know now is how the war is being planned to begin. You need to know what
warning signs to watch for, and when. For that reason I will now describe in
detail how the Pentagon war planners intend to set off the war. Only a few hints
of what is about to happen will be visible in public; but if you see them happen-
ing, you will know what they mean.
The plan for an American nuclear first strike against Russia has been in gesta-
tion for over four years now. I first reported on America’s secret shift toward a
first-strike nuclear strategy in AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 36 and 37. The prime
objective of the initial American nuclear strike is still as I first made public in
AUDIO LETTER No. 37. The objective is to knock out all of Russia’s complex
of Space bases. Those are the logistic life line, the Achilles’ heel of the Russian
space triad of strategic weapons. If the Bolsheviks here can put Russia’s space
triad out of action, Russia will no longer be unconquerable in nuclear war; and
so the initial attack against Russia’s space triad bases is to be followed immedi-
ately by an all-out American nuclear attack!
Bolshevik war planners here, the hard-liners, have been putting together the
pieces of the military machine needed to do the job for years now. I have re-
ported on these various pieces of the over-all military picture over the course of
many past reports. Now all of the factors in the Bolshevik military equation are
coming together as they prepare for imminent nuclear war.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 73 I described the new secret American superweapon

that is the key to the attack plan. It is the Phantom warplane, the most radical
breakthrough achieved by the so-called “Stealth Program.”
Unmanned Phantom warplanes are being deployed now to their attack bases in
northern Norway, eastern Turkey, and Sinkiang Province, China. These bases
are protected from Cosmosphere attack by high-power lasers. The lasers are
equipped with the new supersensitive aiming device known as CEIR (pro-
nounced seer) for “Computer-Enhanced Infrared.” As I reported in AUDIO
LETTER No. 72, a CEIR-equipped laser shot down a Russian Cosmosphere
over New Jersey some seven months ago. Its effectiveness is, therefore, a
691
proven fact; but just to make sure the Russians have not developed a defense
against these special lasers, another Cosmosphere was blasted out of the sky
over the New York City vicinity just three days ago! It created a huge high-
speed fireball, described in the New York Times yesterday as a possible aster-
oid burning up.
When the American Phantom warplanes are launched into Russia on “Z-Day”
they will be swarming toward only six primary and about a dozen secondary
targets. The six primary targets are the Russian Space bases. Four of these are
the rocket bases known as Cosmodromes at Baikonur, Tyura-Tam, Plesetsk,
and Kapustin Yar. The other two Space bases are the sprawling Cosmosphere
facilities at Semipalatinsk and Novosibirsk.
As for the dozen or so secondary targets, these are the complex of Russian fly-
ing ABM bases. The system consists of anti-missile particle beam weapons
carried aboard converted TU-144 Supersonic Transports. The Transports were
mysteriously removed from service in June 1978 for conversion to anti-missile
defense. I reported that this was underway in AUDIO LETTER No. 54. Today
the system is fully operational. The Bolshevik war planners here in the United
States want to knock them all out, if possible, to make the American follow-up
attack more devastating.
Of all these targets, the two which have become most important of all are the
two Cosmosphere bases. The new Russian Superheavy Cosmospheres, which I
first reported on in AUDIO LETTER No. 64, foreshadow the day when rockets
will be obsolete.
If the Cosmosphere bases survive, the Bolshevik war plan is doomed to failure.
There is only one satisfactory geographic location from which to launch a strike
against the Russian Cosmosphere areas. As long ago as AUDIO LETTER No.
37 I revealed that this key location is Sinkiang Province, China. The Bolsheviks
here must have access to Sinkiang Province at all costs. That is why, four
months after I revealed this, the so-called Carter Administration unexpectedly
dumped Taiwan on December 15, 1978. That day Washington suddenly an-
nounced full diplomatic relations with Peking.
With NUCLEAR WAR ONE approaching fast, the Red Chinese once again
used their leverage this month against Taiwan. Peking has been pressuring the
Reagan Administration to publicly commit itself to cutting off all arms sales to
Taiwan. As recently as August 13 Reagan’s alleged final offer was a refusal to
do that; but then the Red Chinese told Washington that if the United States did
not agree, the Chinese would shut down the American Stealth Base in Sinkiang
692
Audio Letter 78
Province. Four days later, on August 17, a joint communique was released in
Peking and Washington. It declared that there is only one China, that Taiwan is
part of it, and that the United States will gradually discontinue arms sales to
Taiwan!
The old Reagan campaign pledge to stand by Taiwan was scrapped in order to
prevent a last-minute hitch in the Stealth attack plan.
According to the Pentagon plan, the unmanned Phantom warplanes will take off
from their various bases at carefully predetermined intervals. Their launch
times will be adjusted in order to make them all arrive at their targets simulta-
neously. As I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 73, these robot bombers will be
flying blind on a one-way trip, like mechanical kamikaze planes. But thanks to
their advanced new-type inertial guidance systems they’re expected to all arrive
right on schedule.
As they fly through Russian air space, they will be invulnerable to detection
either visually or by radar. The light-distorted electromagnetic fields, which I
described in AUDIO LETTER No. 73, will also render Russian beam weapons
useless for defense. Anti-aircraft missiles, even those which follow the heat trail
of a plane, will also be useless. If any missile or jet fighter got close to a Phan-
tom warplane, its electronics would be hopelessly deranged by the Invisibility
Field.
As if all this were not enough, each Phantom warplane will also be following a
pre-programmed zig-zag course into Russia. The Bolsheviks here believe that
this will make any attempt to fire at the Stealth planes with anti-aircraft guns
very ineffective.
All things considered, the “PROJECT Z” war planners are confident that
enough Phantom warplanes will reach their targets to do their job. Converging
from all directions, the invisible robot warplanes will all arrive at their targets at
essentially the same time. Countdown clocks in all the warplanes will be pro-
grammed to reach “zero” at the same instant. When they do, a 24-megaton
hydrogen bomb will explode aboard each and every Phantom warplane.
The attack is planned for nighttime when the Soviet Union is asleep. Around
the space triad bases and TU-144 bases night will turn into day as man-made
stars erupt into life. That will be the moment which an American satellite
parked high over the Indian Ocean has been watching for. It is the Attack Con-
firmation Sensor which I described in AUDIO LETTER No. 75. This was the
mysterious military payload of Space Shuttle #4 placed in geostationary orbit
693
by an auxiliary rocket. When the H-bombs detonate over their targets, the Air
Force satellite will detect the flashes of infrared, ultraviolet, and X-radiation.
Instantly the satellite will flash a signal confirming the attack to listening sta-
tions on Earth. The attack-confirmation signal will confirm that the initial
critical surprise attack by Stealth planes has succeeded.
That will be the signal for all the rest of the “PROJECT Z” nuclear war plan to
go into motion. But, as I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 73, “PROJECT Z”
is a supersecret war plan, unknown to all but a few top leaders of the Military in
America. Therefore the attack-confirmation signal will not be routed through
standard existing channels. Instead the Bolshevik war planners here have cre-
ated a special new Command for the purpose. It’s called the Air Force Space
Command. It is to begin operations officially on September 1, just in time to get
ready for the planned nuclear attack on September 17. The new Space Com-
mand is located in Colorado Springs, Colorado. There it will feed special
information to NORAD headquarters, also located there.
When the Air Force Space Command receives the attack-confirmation signal
from the Indian Ocean satellite, the follow-up attack will begin:
First a coded signal will be flashed to the Minuteman TX Commanders in our

northern tier of states and certain other locations. The Minuteman TX is Amer-
ica’s real mobile missile, now full deployed on our railroads, as I first revealed
in AUDIO LETTER No. 55. In AUDIO LETTER No. 60 I reported that they
are also accompanied by high-speed missiles called ACMs. When the coded
signal arrives from the newly created Space Command, the ACMs will zoom
upward to the fringes of the atmosphere. There they will detonate special cobalt
ionization bombs. The resulting electron storm in the upper atmosphere of the
United States is expected to temporarily disable any Cosmospheres on patrol.
With the Cosmospheres momentarily deranged, the mobile Minuteman TX
missiles will be launched right past them at Russia.
When the American ACMs detonate their bombs high over our own country, it
will also create another effect. It is called “Electromagnetic Pulse” or EMP.
EMP can knock out communications, fry telephone lines, and cause power
blackouts by overloading power transmission lines. In AUDIO LETTER No. 66
I described how the Bolsheviks here plan to use this effect to trigger an all-out
American nuclear strike against Russia. They have been programmed to con-
sider an EMP episode to be evidence in itself that America is under nuclear
attack! America’s entire nuclear triad—missiles, bombers, and submarines—
will then launch a supposed retaliatory strike against Russia. There will be no
need for a normal White House order to attack!
694
Audio Letter 78
There has been no official admission that this is in store for us, of course. Even
so this re-programming of our nuclear forces is now being hinted at by discus-
sion of a new military doctrine. It’s called “Launch Under Attack.” Military
analysts describe it as “warning by loss of warning.” That is exactly the concept
I made public over a year ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 66.
My friends, if all goes according to plan, there will be no warning to the Ameri-
can public by Reagan Administration officials. They are counting on surprise to
make their nuclear surprise attack on Russia successful. They aren’t about to
throw that surprise away by telling you about it first, SO IT WILL BE UP TO
YOU to watch events for yourself and to make your best judgment based on
what you know. I’ve already mentioned some of the visible signs that the plan
is still on track up to now.
There remain two more major signals to watch for in the days ahead. If you see
them you will know that the American nuclear first strike against Russia is
about to be attempted:
First, watch for news of a major nuclear false alarm sometime during the first
half of September. This will mean a full-scale dry run has been carried out in-
volving the brand new Air Force Space Command. By describing the exercise
afterward as a “false nuclear alert,” the war planners will be setting the stage for
an alleged “accidental war.”
The final warning will come as the nuclear attack itself is beginning. My
friends, the present Pentagon schedule calls for the preliminary Phantom war-
plane H-bombs to explode at 3:00 PM E.D.T. Friday, September 17, 1982.
At that time virtually all of Russia will be in darkness. When the Indian Ocean
satellite signal arrives confirming the attack, it will be followed within a minute
or so by the EMP episode I described.
If you’re watching TV or listening to the radio, there will suddenly be horren-

dous static and possibly permanent damage to your receiver. There may also be
a power blackout. Your telephone may go dead. If those things happen, my
friends, don’t wait for any air raid sirens. What’s happening is that the Ameri-
can follow-up nuclear strike against Russia is being launched. Retaliating
missiles from Russia can be expected here soon afterward.
If you are in a prime coastal-target area, the Russian counter-strike will hit your
area within minutes. The Russian short-range underwater-launch missiles which
695
were planted along our shores and the Great Lakes in 1976 and 1977 are still
there! Their short flight time, unfortunately, will leave at most a few minutes to
take cover after the EMP episode.
ICBMs fired from Russia will take approximately 24 minutes to reach targets
near the Canadian border; if you live farther south, it will take several more
minutes.
But if your area happens to be targeted by a Russian submarine-launch missile,

the time could be cut to less than 10 minutes in many cases.
Russia’s Moon Bases and Cosmospheres overhead, both armed with their
charged particle beam weapons, can still do great damage to major cities and
United States military installations, but these cause no fallout.
Topic #3—My friends, if the events I have described take place, it will mean
that the Bolshevik war planners in the Pentagon are going ahead with their at-
tack plan. But that does not mean that it will necessarily succeed. As I say these
words, there’s preliminary Intelligence that the Russians may have a surprise up
their sleeve for the Bolsheviks.
This is actually the second attempt by the Bolsheviks here to set off NUCLEAR
WAR ONE, as my older listeners know. The first attempt in late January 1980
was a disastrous failure. It led indirectly to leaks about the Stealth Program
about six months later. Now they are trying again with better weapons, but in
the meantime Russian weaponry has also kept on advancing! As a result,
there’s no way to predict how the Bolshevik-triggered American first strike will
turn out.
Last month I reported that the Super-Spy Satellite launched by the third Space
Shuttle in March had detected something puzzling in Russia. The puzzle con-
sists of large numbers of small domed installations arranged in rings around
strategic Russian targets. There is a ring of these domes around each Cos-
modrome and around each Cosmosphere Base in particular, but opinion is
divided as to what they are. Some analysts believe they are more or less con-
ventional anti-aircraft batteries with domed enclosures. Others think they are
missile batteries. Still others vote for beam weapons of some kind, either lasers
or particle beams. The only agreement up to now is that they are defensive
weapons of some kind. That is indicated by their arrangement in protective
rings around certain strategic targets.
696
Audio Letter 78
There’s one other guess as to what the domes are. It is a minority opinion so far
which is not accepted by the top American Bolshevik war planners, but my own
information indicates that it is the right guess. Each dome, my friends, contains
a weapon known as a “Rail Gun.” Rail guns have been under study for a num-
ber of years in both Russia and the United States.
A Rail Gun is a kind of super high-speed cannon. The projectile moves down a
track between the pair of long conducting rails. When the gun is fired an in-
credibly powerful electromagnetic field races down the length of the rails
welding them together as it goes. The projectile is forced along ahead of the
fast-moving electromagnetic field, leaving the muzzle with incredible velocity.
Rail gun muzzle velocities of at least 25,000 feet per second have been
achieved. This is faster than the Space Shuttle in Earth orbit!
Here in the United States, Rail Guns are still curiosities. A Rail Gun can only
be fired once because the rails weld themselves together, and the projectile has
to be non-conducting. It can’t be steel or other metal. But to the Russians faced
with the Phantom warplane threat, Rail Guns may be the only answer. The Rus-
sians have the ability to aim Rail Guns at our Phantom warplanes using
Psychoenergetic Range-Finding, which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 42,
and a non-conducting projectile fired at astronomical velocities could penetrate
the Stealth plane’s Invisibility Field.
The use of Rail Guns to defend against the Phantom warplanes will be a nasty
surprise to the Bolsheviks here if they carry out their war plan; but as of now,
the war plan is still on track! As a result, time may well be running out for the
United States of America as we know it.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
Now it’s time for my Last Minute Summary. My friends, in this AUDIO
LETTER I’ve tried to prepare you as fully as possible to recognize the signs of
imminent nuclear war. The anti-war coup d’etat plan of General Alexander
Haig, which I revealed in AUDIO LETTER No. 72, collapsed with his forced
resignation in June. Since that time it has been full speed ahead toward
NUCLEAR WAR ONE.
The rush-rush new war timetable, which I also revealed six months ago in
AUDIO LETTER No. 72, is still on schedule. Target date: September 17,
1982.
697
Just 12 days ago on August 15 the Los Angeles Times broke a bombshell story
about these war plans. The syndicated article revealed that an elaborate secret
new protracted nuclear war plan is now ready. In fact, my friends, this plan is
already operational!
The article says, quote:
“According to a member of the Administration, the plan would contemplate

nuclear warfare for as long as six months.”
The plan also draws attention to the present vulnerability of our military com-
mand, control, and communications system. The article quotes a Reagan staffer
in the words:
“The system might survive 15 minutes of nuclear war.”
My friends, this very vulnerability is the key to the Bolshevik plan to set off the
war by EMP episode I have described. The fear over all this is so great that
three days ago the Pentagon announced extreme measures to try to squelch the
debate. Our Bolshevik Defense Secretary, Caspar Weinberger, has sent out 70
letters to key newspaper editors here and abroad to try to defuse the criticism.
Meanwhile the plan to set off nuclear war soon is still on track.
In the past I have reported that Russia’s new anti-Bolshevik rulers regard
America as Babylon, wallowing in ill-gotten wealth and degeneracy. If the
American Bolsheviks are successful in forcing nuclear war upon the Kremlin,
the fall of Babylon may well be at hand. As the angel of Revelation revealed to
John the Apostle, the cries may soon ring out around the world:
“Alas, alas, that great city Babylon, that mighty city, for in one hour is thy
judgment come.”
698
Audio Letter 79
September 30, 1982
Throughout the Middle Ages the Christians of Central Europe shared a terrible
fear which is all but forgotten today. It was a fear which caused Christian par-
ents to exercise special care over their children at the time of the Jewish holy
day of Passover. Their greatest dread was that their child might be kidnapped
and never seen again because it was widely believed that the Jews practiced
human sacrifice at Passover and that the victims were Christian children. That
ancient blood fear of the Jews by Christians largely died out in the centuries
following the Renaissance. Today most Christians are shocked to learn that any
such belief ever existed.
As for the Jews themselves, there is a rabbinical term that is used to condemn
the ancient Christian blood-fear. It is called “blood libel.” For generations now,
the old issue of blood libel has been essentially a dead one, a thing of the past.
No Jew in his right mind would want it otherwise. To revive the issue of blood
libel is to resurrect ancient fears, unreasoning passions, and mortal danger to
every Jew alive. Yes, most Jews would be better off if they never again heard
about the ancient Christian blood-fear of the Jews; but this month none other
than the Government of Israel has deliberately revived the so-called “blood li-
bel” issue.
Over the weekend of September 17, Israeli forces introduced so-called Chris-
tian militiamen into two Palestinian refugee camps in West Beirut. The result
was a massacre of over a thousand Palestinian civilians, including many
women, children, and elderly people. Word of the massacre reached the outside
world on the evening of Rosh Hashana, the Jewish New Year, September 18.
An outraged world blamed the Begin government for allowing such a heinous
crime to take place.
The Israeli Government’s official reply to the world was a statement issued on
Sunday, September 19. It was published two days later as a full-page adver-
tisement in major American newspapers with the headline “BLOOD LIBEL.”
The statement began with the words, and I quote:
699
“On the New Year Rosh Hashana a blood libel was leveled against the Jewish
State, its government, and the Israeli Defense Forces—otherwise known as the
IDF.”
The statement then continued with a series of statements which only days later
were proven to be total lies. The official Israeli Government statement said the
massacre took place, quote:
“in an area where there was no position of the Israeli Army.”
Yet the very next day after this statement was published, the Israeli Defense
Minister Sharon flatly contradicted it. On September 22 Sharon admitted that
the Israelis not only introduced the Militiamen into the camps but also sup-
ported them with air-borne flares. The official Israeli Government
advertisement also said, quote:
“As soon as the IDF learned of the tragic events, Israeli soldiers put an end to
the slaughter.”
That, too, was a lie, and numerous reports have already surfaced to show that it
was a lie.
The fact is that the Israeli troops had orders to surround and cut off the two Pal-
estinian camps while the Militiamen did the dirty work. From start to finish, top
Israeli officials knew exactly what was going on. They had ordered the entire
operation, and were kept informed of its progress. By calling the accusations
against it “blood libel,” the Begin government acknowledged that the Beirut
massacre was a subhuman act of bloodthirsty evil; but the transparent lies about
it by the Begin government reflect the fact that the charges against it are not
libel, they are the TRUTH!
My friends, it’s no accident that the Beirut massacre was centered around Fri-
day, September 17. In AUDIO LETTER No. 78 last month I reported that
September 17 was scheduled to be a day of nuclear massacre. That was the day
when the supersecret “PROJECT Z” nuclear war plan was to be set off. If all
had gone according to plan, a surprise American nuclear first strike against
Russia was scheduled for that day; but by the grace of our Lord Jesus Christ, all
did not go according to plan. The “PROJECT Z” nuclear strike plan was finally
aborted—for now, that is—around mid-morning September 17. The countdown
clock stopped less than five hours short of NUCLEAR WAR ONE!! The final
decision to abort the strike ended a week of fierce debate at the top levels of the
Reagan-Begin axis of Bolsheviks and Zionists.
700
Audio Letter 79
Meanwhile another war plan has already been set in motion to replace it. The
Beirut massacre which was underway on September 17 is a key ingredient in
the new military intrigues now underway, but the massacre was also motivated
by sheer insane frenzy. It was the blind frenzy of Satanic and demonic forces
who saw their goal of nuclear victory slip away just when it seemed within their
grasp.
Topic #1—THE ABORTED PLAN FOR SURPRISE NUCLEAR WAR
Topic #2—THE BEIRUT MASSACRE FOR WAR TO COME
Topic #3—THE RETURN OF THE “SIBERIA EXPRESS” WEATHER WAR.
Topic #1—When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 78 late last month, I made
public the final Pentagon plans for NUCLEAR WAR ONE to erupt this month,
September 1982. The Pentagon war planners were counting down toward Fri-
day, September 17 to set off nuclear war as a complete surprise; but as the final
days ticked away this month, major snags began to develop in the rush-rush
War Timetable. Finally the decision was made to scrub the planned nuclear first
strike against Russia virtually at the last minute!
As I reported last month, the first “H-Bombs” were to be detonated on key Rus-
sian targets at 3:00 P.M. Eastern Daylight Time on September 17. The order to
scrub the attack went out less than five hours before that—shortly after 10:00
A.M. that morning. When the decision finally came to abort the attack, it was a
“judgment” call; and that judgment was far from popular with some members
of the elite Bolshevik war-planning team in the Pentagon.
The snags which developed this month were very serious but not serious
enough to completely rule out an attempted nuclear strike. As a result, the war-
planning group became splintered into acrimonious debate over what to do. No
one argued in favor of giving up the basic goal of attacking Russia but there
was a sharp division over how best to save the nuclear war plan. Basically the
argument boiled down to two alternatives—whether to postpone the nuclear
strike, or whether to go ahead as planned.
The hotheads insisted that the surprise nuclear attack against Russia should pro-
ceed on schedule on September 17. They argued that in spite of the problems
which had cropped up, delay would only give time for even more obstacles to
701
develop. They also pointed out that their Intelligence on Russian targets will
gradually grow stale with delay. In effect they said, Now is our best chance.
The more conservative faction among the war planners insisted that the hot-
heads were not thinking straight. In their view, the hitches which developed this
month in the war plan were too serious to go ahead now—better to wait and
reschedule the “PROJECT Z” war plan after removing the present obstacles to
success.
The debate began to tip in favor of a postponement one week before the Sep-
tember 17 target date. For that reason, other contingency plans were set in
motion in the Middle East during that final week; but the nuclear-strike plan
remained in effect right down to the wire. In the end, it was an accumulation of
many factors which finally caused the plan to be aborted.
The Bolsheviks here started running into trouble in their rush-rush nuclear war
plan almost as soon as it started early this year of 1982. I first reported that a
short-cut nuclear war strategy was being implemented by the Pentagon seven
months ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 72. At the same time I also reported that
the Rockefeller cartel and the Russians were lining up to try to stop the war
plan. To that end they had agreed to start working together against the Ameri-
can Bolsheviks in certain ways. On top of that, a coup d’etat was brewing here
in Washington to be led by General Alexander Haig, then Secretary of State. In
the seven months since I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 72, world headlines
repeatedly have been filled with the consequences of this three-way struggle.
First came the Falklands War last April, which was not about sheep and settlers
but about secret weapons installations. The secret Pentagon war plan received a
severe blow in that skirmish but the Bolsheviks here soon struck back. In June
they destroyed the Haig coup d’etat. At the same time the brutal Israeli invasion
of Lebanon was underway right on the timetable which I had made public last
year and which Sharon, Defense Minister of Israel, confirmed only this week in
the Knesset. And then there was the fourth Space Shuttle which carried the De-
fense Department payload into orbit to prepare for war.
By mid-summer, leaders of both America and Russia were making statements

that the superpowers were already at war. The Russians started firing warning
shots across America’s bow by way of weather modification, airplane disasters,
and more. Finally last month on August 12 the Russians used sheer intimidation
to thwart the Israeli plan for an incredibly bloody invasion of Beirut. Suddenly
the PLO evacuation talks bore fruit and the evacuation went off without a hitch.
702
Audio Letter 79
It was a serious blow to the joint Bolshevik-Zionist efforts to create an atmos-

phere of mushrooming crisis as a prelude to nuclear war.
For about two weeks the atmosphere of world crisis appeared to almost evapo-
rate, but the Pentagon war clock was still counting down toward September
17—and the Russians knew it. On September 2 the Soviet Union abruptly dis-
connected all direct dial telephone service to and from the West. Instead,
military operators took over. It was an extension of the telephone cutbacks
which had begun months earlier. To the top Pentagon war strategists, the Rus-
sian telephone service cutback of September 2 seemed like small potatoes.
They had bigger things to worry about—namely, a serious turn of events in Red
China.
The previous day, September 1, Communist Party Chairman Hu Yaobang had

dropped a bombshell at the Party Congress in Peking. He declared that China
should no longer ally itself with the United States against Russia; instead Hu
said China should regard both superpowers as equal threats, but at the same
time he included some conciliatory language toward Russia—and, my friends,
high Russian officials will go to China to begin talks in two weeks time at
China’s invitation! By disowning the Sino-American alliance, Hu Yaobang
made it clear that the secret American Stealth attack-base in China was in jeop-
ardy.
That base, located in Red China’s western Sinkiang Province, is essential for
the intended attack on Russia’s two Cosmosphere bases in Siberia. Last month I
reported that this war base was the reason for the joint communique of August
17 by the United States and Red China concerning Taiwan. The communique
commits the United States to discontinue arms deliveries to Taiwan at some
future date, in violation of Reagan’s past pledges! The communique was agreed
to in order to head off a threatened shutdown of the Stealth base by the Chinese,
but it was not enough to satisfy the Chinese.
On September 6 former President Richard Nixon arrived in Peking, adding fur-

ther to the troubles of the Pentagon war planners. Nixon has long been a client
follower of the Rockefeller cartel, as I detailed in my book THE
CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR nearly 10 years ago.
Nixon went to Peking this month as a Rockefeller envoy and one with far more
credibility for the Chinese than anyone the Bolsheviks have. Nixon shocked the
Chinese by confirming what Russian sources had already told them—that the
Stealth base was about to be used in war. Nixon then counseled them not to
shut down the base outright at this time for fear of undesirable reactions by the
703
trigger-happy Pentagon Bolsheviks. Instead, he urged the Chinese to start inter-

fering with operation of the Stealth base by bureaucratic devices. That is one
thing the Chinese are very good at, and they accepted Nixon’s advice.
By September 9 the American Stealth base in Sinkiang Province, China was

effectively out of action. Critical base personnel were tangled up in Chinese red
tape, preventing them from reporting for duty. The Chinese are giving hints to
Washington that all this is due to continued dissatisfaction over Taiwan; but the
real reason, my friends, is that they want no part of nuclear war with Russia!
The Kremlin received word through Rockefeller channels on September 9 that

the Sinkiang Province Stealth base had been effectively neutralized. At that
point the Russians could rest assured that even if the Pentagon went through
with its nuclear-attack plan, Russia’s Cosmospheres would survive. Russia’s
critical space triad of strategic weapons could no longer be destroyed.
STEPS LEADING UP TO THE DESTRUCTION OF THE SHUTTLE #4-

LAUNCHED ATTACK CONFIRMATION SENSOR
The time had come to carry out the most dangerous step in the Kremlin plan to
unravel the Pentagon nuclear-war plan. The time had come to destroy the At-
tack Confirmation Sensor placed in space by the Space Shuttle last June. The
Attack Confirmation Sensor was a special satellite placed in geostationary orbit
over the Indian Ocean by an auxiliary rocket. As I’ve reported before, it was a
cryogenic satellite—that is, it was maintained at supercold temperatures close
to absolute zero. I can now reveal that this was intended to protect the satellite
from detection by Russian space weapons.
For several years now American scientific Intelligence analysts have known
that the Russians have a new technology for target acquisition. The new Rus-
sian technique is not radar nor is it any other conventional means of detecting
and tracking targets. The new Russian technique is deadly accurate; reliable;
and, unlike radar, impossible to jam. Analysts here some time ago convinced
themselves that they had figured out what the new Russian technique is. They
believe it is a Russian version of computer-enhanced infrared detection. This
has now been developed here in the United States and is called CEIR (pro-
nounced seer).
I first reported on this development in AUDIO LETTER No. 72 shortly after a

CEIR-equipped American laser was used to shoot down a Russian Cosmos-
phere. American analysts are convinced that the Russians are using CEIR and
that they had it first; and so when the Air Force Attack Confirmation Sensor
704
Audio Letter 79
was designed, it was given a feature intended to defeat Russian infrared detec-
tors.
All objects warmer than absolute zero emit infrared radiation. The warmer the
object is, the more infrared it emits and the easier it is for computer-enhanced
infrared sensors to detect it. The only way to hide from CEIR is, therefore, to
reduce the temperature as low as possible. That’s why the Air Force Attack
Confirmation Sensor was a cryogenic satellite. A huge cooling system using
liquid helium kept the satellite only a few degrees above absolute zero, reduc-
ing infrared emissions to nearly nothing.
The cryogenic design of the Air Force satellite is what gave the Bolshevik war
planners here so much confidence that it would succeed. They were sure that
the Russians would be unable to find it in time to destroy it before it was used
in war. But, my friends, the Bolsheviks in the Pentagon are wrong about the
new Russian target-tracking technique. It is not an infrared technique at all; in-
stead, it’s a revolutionary system which detects the atomic vibrations of matter.
The Russians call it Psychoenergetic Range Finding, or PRF.
When I first reported on Russia’s new PRF technique in AUDIO LETTER No.
42, I reported that the Russians regard it as their master secret weapon. The
longer it remains a mystery to the American Bolsheviks, the better it will be for
Russia; and so when Space Shuttle #4 launched the Air Force cryogenic sensor
last June, the Russians started playing a game.
Instead of destroying the satellite right away, they allowed it to be orbited suc-
cessfully. The Russians knew that the Attack Confirmation satellite could do
them no harm until war itself was about to begin, so they allowed it to stay
there untouched for as long as possible. The result was exactly as expected: the
long-term survival of the Air Force Sensor has convinced the Bolsheviks here
that they were right about Russia using CEIR. The Pentagon has walked into a
major Intelligence blunder, and the Russians are encouraging them to keep it
up.
Throughout the summer, Rockefeller cartel operatives within the CIA fed up-
dates about the Pentagon war plan to the Russians. Those reports continued to
say that the war timetable was remaining unchanged, targeted for mid-
September; so the Russian Space Command let the Air Force Sensor alone for
the time being.
705
Meanwhile the Russians began preparing in a totally unsuspected way for the
moment when they would destroy the satellite. Those preparations had to do
with Russia’s International Telephone service:
First, in June the Soviet Union drastically reduced the number of telephone
links to the West. They also made clouded threats to reduce service still further
at a later date. In order to keep the Intelligence analysts here from guessing
what was afoot, the Russians resorted to a little disinformation in the right
places. They created falsified leaks that there were unsettled conditions in the
Kremlin, a power struggle. The Bolsheviks here, who are always struggling for
power, swallowed it hook, line, and sinker.
The next major step was the one I mentioned earlier on September 2. That was
the day when Russia suddenly cut off all automatic dialing service to and from
the West. The Bolsheviks here were startled but still did not suspect what it
really meant. They were too preoccupied with rumblings of trouble in China to
worry for long about Russia’s telephones.
For the final step the Kremlin waited, hoping that the maneuvers to disrupt the
Stealth base in Sinkiang Province would succeed. On September 9 they re-
ceived the “Mission Accomplished” signal from the Rockefeller cartel. The
Sinkiang base was temporarily incapacitated, thanks to Nixon’s recommended
bureaucratic entanglement by the Chinese.
The next morning, Friday, September 10, there was a sudden total shutdown of
most International Telephone service to and from Russia; but in order to send a
message to America’s Bolshevik war planners, a few selected circuits were kept
open. Those included Leningrad, Kiev, Minsk, and Talinn. Their significance
lay in the fact that none were targets planned for the initial Stealth attack, which
I detailed last month.
The phone lines were cut off at 7:10 A.M. Eastern Daylight Time, or 2:10 P.M.
Moscow time. Moments later the Russian Space Command went to work. A
Russian Jumbo Cosmosphere was parked in a pseudo-orbit about two miles
above the Air Force Attack Confirmation satellite. It had been there for over
two months—from the moment the satellite was launched into orbit from Space
Shuttle #4. By using its electromagnetic propulsion system at low power, the
Cosmosphere had remained on station instead of slowly drifting away as a
normal satellite would; and parked as it was above the downward-looking Air
Force satellite, the presence of the Cosmosphere was never detected.
706
Audio Letter 79
Now the time had come! The Cosmosphere aimed its beam weapon and fired.
Shortly after 7:10 A.M. Eastern Daylight Time, Friday, September 10, there
was bad news for the Bolsheviks here. At the newly operational Air Force
Space Command in Colorado Springs there was a sudden loss of signal from
their Indian Ocean satellite. At first they could not believe that their critical At-
tack Confirmation satellite had been attacked. All sorts of things were tried in
an effort to re-establish contact with the satellite—all to no avail. The satellite
no longer existed!
REACTIONS TO SENSOR DESTRUCTION—DETERMINING FACTORS

OF DECISION
As that Friday morning of September 10 wore on, the “PROJECT Z” war plan-
ners were convened in crisis conference. The question at hand was: What do we
do now?
For a while there was an atmosphere of near panic. Some were sure that a first
strike by Russia was sure to follow and that the Pentagon should push the Nu-
clear Button without delay. Others argued that if that were the Kremlin’s
intention, it was already too late—Russia’s missiles would be on the way. At
the opposite extreme someone suggested that the whole “PROJECT Z” war
plan be aborted for now and rescheduled later on. Everyone agreed on one
thing: without the Attack Confirmation Sensor, any attack on Russia had be-
come far more risky. After launching the Stealth planes from Norway and
Turkey, it would just have to be assumed that they had destroyed their targets.
With the Attack Confirmation Satellite gone, there would be no way to confirm
that, so the all-out follow-up attack by America’s nuclear forces might run into
a lot more trouble than expected.
At that point someone remarked to the effect: We can still go with the back-up
plan—every target in Russia that is attacked by our birds will be obliterated. If
International Telephone service to Russian target areas is suddenly cut off at
zero hour, we can assume that our birds made it.
There’s an old military saying that goes: “There is always someone who didn’t
get the word.” The planner who suggested falling back on the back-up plan
based on telephones proved once again how true that saying is. Nearly everyone
shouted at him:
“The phones to Russia are already shut down!”
707
My friends, the Russians kept the International phone lines shut down for seven
hours that day. They wanted to make sure that if the Pentagon Bolsheviks
pushed the Panic Button, they would obtain no Intelligence at all by monitoring
telephone circuits. After the first two hours or so of the blackout, Secretary of
State George Shultz was accosted by reporters about it. Shultz told them, quote:
“It is very significant,” but would say no more.
By the time Washingtonians were finishing their lunch that day, a decision had
been reached about what to do:
“PROJECT Z” would continue on the original schedule, targeted for the follow-
ing Friday, September 17. Meanwhile every effort would be made to cut
through the Chinese red tape that was restricting use of the critical base in
Sinkiang Province. At the same time, it was decided to set other plans in motion
too, just in case “PROJECT Z” should finally fall through.
That is how it stood through the week leading up to “Z-Day,” September 17.
The “PROJECT Z” first-strike plan was in deep trouble, yet it was still on track.
It had been decided that if nothing else went wrong, the surprise attack on Rus-
sia would still be launched on the 17th, come what may.
The straw that broke the camel’s back came at almost the last possible minute
on Friday morning, September 17. At about 8:30 A.M. here in Washington a
well-known national newspaper reporter was interviewed on the Washington
NBC radio station WRC. The reporter, of the Washington Post, called attention
to my war warning for that day contained in AUDIO LETTER No. 78. He re-
portedly outlined the plan briefly for everyone listening in the Washington
Metropolitan area, and he added that if the Pentagon did have such a plan, pub-
lic exposure through my tape had probably reduced the chances that it would be
carried out.
My friends, that radio report here in Washington about the war plan on the
morning of September 17 was seemingly a small thing, but our Lord Jesus
Christ can always use little things to produce big results—and that is what HE
did on that morning of “Z-Day”!
Thanks to those of you who had written to editors, Congressmen, and officials
of all kinds about the war plan, the Pentagon was becoming edgy. The last thing
they wanted was public exposure of their war plan. When they heard the report
that morning over radio station WRC, they quite simply panicked. They had no
way of knowing just how widely their plan had become known, and so shortly
after 10:00 A.M. Washington time, Friday, September 17, 1982, the
708
Audio Letter 79
“PROJECT Z” first strike was called off. With less than five hours to go, the
countdown clock for NUCLEAR WAR ONE had finally stopped ticking!
Topic #2—Nearly 2000 years ago our Lord Jesus Christ described some people
as the sons of Satan who are liars from the beginning. Their inability to tell the
truth is the hallmark of this special category of people who were condemned by
our Lord. They never admit their own guilt about anything, but instead always
justify themselves, saying they are blameless. But our Lord Jesus Christ de-
clared that it is their kind who have shed the blood of innocent people from the
beginning of time.
In my opening remarks for AUDIO LETTER No. 78 last month, I mentioned a

tragic photograph which appeared in American newspapers on August 1. It
showed a nurse in the Beirut hospital feeding a tiny seven-week-old Lebanese
baby who had been horribly maimed by the Israeli bombardment. The baby was
swathed in bandages from the waist upward, including the entire head except
for a small area around the mouth. The baby had lost both arms at the shoulder.
There were several different versions of the photo carried by various newspa-
pers and wire services, and in some views the absence of the arms was
unmistakable. As I reported last month, the Government of Israel was enraged
over the photo. They insisted that they were blameless for the baby’s injuries
and demanded a retraction. As I reported last month, wire services here refused
to make a retraction.
For the moment it appeared that a tiny ray of truth had won out for a change.
But, my friends, the sons of Satan who control the Israeli Government could not
let the matter rest. They resorted to their old favorite trick which they refer to as
“creating new facts.” On September 1 United Press International finally caved
in to a solid month of Israeli pressure. On that day UPI published a pair of pic-
tures—on the left was the original UPI version of the hospital photo of the
mangled baby, and on the right was a new picture of a bouncing, robust baby
without a scratch held up to the camera by a cheerfully smiling nurse. Referring
to the original photo and report, the UPI caption reads in part, and I quote:
“Israeli authorities challenged that report and released the photo at right, made
August 22, saying it shows the same child after treatment. The infant had not
lost both arms but only suffered slight injury to the wrists, the Israelis con-
tended.”
The caption concludes with the words:
“UPI regrets the error.”
709
My friends, anyone who saw other published views of that original baby with
the arms gone would know that the new picture had to be a fake. The original
baby did not even survive until August 22! The new picture, allegedly taken by
that day for release by the Israelis, was not even made in Lebanon! The photo
shows an Israeli baby held up by an Israeli nurse, photographed in a hospital in
Tel Aviv.
The tragedy of that tiny Lebanese baby was multiplied a thousand times over by
the Beirut Massacre. As always, the Begin government is waving its blood-
spattered hands in gestures of total innocence.
Last month I described the Israeli doctrine of STATE TERRORISM in which

suffering and death are increased as much as possible as a tool of power; and in
the Beirut Massacre this month, we are once again seeing that doctrine of
STATE TERRORISM at work. In Damascus, Syria, PLO leader Yassir Arafat
went straight to the heart of the matter in an interview with the French newspa-
per Liban. He said, and I quote:
“Begin and Sharon are not Jews. The crimes they commit do not conform to
Jewish morality or tradition.”
My friends, why is it that it takes a member of a different faith, a Moslem, to

remind us Christians of something our Lord Jesus Christ said? Our Lord
warned us against being taken in by those who are of the synagogue of Satan
and the blasphemy of those who say they are Jews, but are not.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 50 nearly three years ago I detailed the origins of the
counterfeit Jews, the Khazar Jews. It is they who rule the nation that calls itself
Israel under the banner of political Zionism, and it is they who have been ex-
pelled by Russia’s new rulers and are creating a new Bolshevik revolution right
here in America!! The counterfeit Jews are a mortal danger to all real Jews as
well as to everyone else on earth.
We have been warned, but we do not heed those warnings; and so our world
continues to reel from one crisis to another, each one worse than the one before.
In Topic #1 I explained why Friday, September 10 was a turning point in the

joint Bolshevik-Zionist war plans. On that day Russia destroyed the Air Force
Attack Confirmation satellite which was parked over the Indian Ocean. Up until
that day the Pentagon Bolsheviks and the Israeli Zionists had spent two weeks
or so trying to lull Russia to sleep. Every effort was made to portray an impres-
710
Audio Letter 79
sion of relative calm in the war-torn Lebanon hot spot. Simmering crises else-
where around the world did not go away but they also failed to escalate as
originally planned.
Most important of all was the premature departure of the United States Marines
from Beirut on September 10. This was directly related to the Brezhnev-Reagan
HOT LINE call which I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 78 last month. In
that call the entity Reagan was told that a beachhead in Lebanon by the United
States troops will not be tolerated. The early departure of the Marines on Sep-
tember 10 was intended to send Moscow a false message to the effect: “All
right, we give up. There will be no war.” The idea was to try to promote over-
confidence on the part of the Kremlin leaders and make them relax.
If the ploy had worked, it would have restored some semblance of the surprise
element in the intended nuclear strike. But this attempt at deception by the Bol-
shevik-Zionist coalition did not work. As it turned out, Russia destroyed the
American Attack Confirmation satellite on the very day of the Marine pull-out,
September 10. So from that day onward the tactics changed again. The false
impression of calm gave way to a fast crescendo of new violence and war ten-
sions.
The new crisis build-up had two purposes: One was to provide a last-minute
crisis atmosphere of sorts to help explain away the sudden nuclear war which
was still planned for September 17, but by that point so many things had gone
wrong with the “PROJECT Z” war plan that its execution was no longer cer-
tain. And so the other purpose of the new crisis build-up was to get the older,
longer-range war plans in motion once again.
In my report last month I mentioned that the Israeli troops had already moved
north to the outskirts of Tripoli. Up to now Tripoli has been spared much of the
violence that has torn southern Lebanon, but on Saturday September 11 Israeli
MOSSAD agents set off a car bomb, made with over 150 pounds of TNT, in
downtown Tripoli. The alliances between Christians and Moslems that have
given Tripoli a semblance of peace up to now are under attack.
Two days later, Monday September 13, the focus shifted to the north. A huge
NATO amphibious exercise called “OPERATION NORTHERN WEDDING
‘82” got underway that day off the Danish coast. It involved over 160 naval
vessels, 250 combat aircraft, and some 25,000 troops from nine (9) countries.
Radio Moscow denounced the exercise as being (quote) “intensely belligerent,”
which it was. The so-called exercise was designed to seal up the Baltic, and
with it much of the Soviet Navy—and by strange coincidence, “OPERATION
711
NORTHERN WEDDING ‘82” was scheduled to last until Friday, September

17!
The following day, Tuesday September 14, the focus shifted back to Lebanon.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 78 last month I reported that the Lebanese President-
elect, Bashir Gemayel, was an Israeli puppet. I also reported that the Israeli plan
was to eliminate him, just as they did Sadat last year when it suited their pur-
poses. On September 14, the plan was carried out. As usual, the Israeli
Government pointed fingers at everyone else for what their own MOSSAD
agents had done.
Elsewhere there was shock over what was designed to look like a surprise. By
the way, even now the charade goes on. Just two evenings ago on September 28
our Bolshevik-dominated President kept it up in his news conference. Trying to
defend recent American policy toward Lebanon, he said:
“Who could have foreseen the assassination of the President-elect of Lebanon?”
Anyhow, on September 14 there were only three days to go until “Z-Day” Sep-
tember 17. The pace started speeding up fast. Within hours after the Gemayel
assassination, the pre-positioned Israeli Army began an invasion of West Bei-
rut. The Begin government gave the camouflaged excuse that it was “to prevent
a blood bath.” And as always they said at first this was only a limited and tem-
porary move, but by September 16 Israel had changed its tune. It was
announced that the Israelis intended to occupy the western half of Beirut in-
definitely. The Bolshevik allies of the Zionists here in Washington reacted as
agreed for public consumption. They complained about the Israeli actions, but
did nothing about them.
On Friday September 17 the Israelis completed their military conquest of West

Beirut. By that time the Israeli High Command was ordering actions that bor-
dered on insane frenzy. A United States Marine standing guard on top of the
United States Embassy building was narrowly missed by an Israeli sniper, and
the Soviet Embassy compound was attacked and invaded by Israeli tanks and
troops! Under International Law, that was equivalent to invading Russia itself.
During that final week, the Israelis were doing everything possible to produce a
sharp reaction from Russia to help explain away the impending eruption of nu-
clear war, but the Russians refused to take the bait. They did not react sharply
to the Beirut invasion because the PLO was now gone and with it the prospect
of all-out carnage. As for the invasion of their own Embassy, the Russians es-
sentially turned the other cheek. Instead of a major international incident, the
712
Audio Letter 79
Israeli smashing of Russia’s Embassy compound turned into a virtual non-

event.
When the “PROJECT Z” nuclear attack plan was finally scrubbed on that Fri-
day of September 17, all the efforts to goad Russia shifted gears. On that very
day the Beirut massacre of Palestinian civilians was already in progress. By late
the following Saturday evening the world learned that a new Guyana-type mas-
sacre had taken place. And, my friends, the purpose of this massacre was much
the same as that which took place in Guyana four years ago.
In AUDIO LETTER No. 40 for November 1978 I gave the details about what
happened in Guyana. It was mass murder, not mass suicide. It was perpetrated
in order to open the door to Guyana for a joint Commando force of Americans
and Israelis. Under cover of the Jonestown clean-up operation, a Commando
raid was mounted to wipe out a nearby Russian missile base. Likewise, the Bei-
rut massacre this month was perpetrated in order to open the door to Lebanon
for troops, which were otherwise forbidden to enter.
Earlier I referred to the Russian ultimatum of August 12 that an American

beachhead in Lebanon would not be tolerated. It was this Russian ultimatum
that caused the hasty departure of the Marines on September 10 even though the
Lebanese government begged them to stay.
When the Pentagon Bolsheviks saw their hurry-up war “PROJECT Z” war plan
going down the drain on September 10, they contacted their Zionist military
and Intelligence partners. The Israelis were given the green light to create an
overwhelming pretext for return of the American Marines to Lebanon. By the
week-end of September 17 the massacre was fully underway. Israeli forces
stood guard around the Beirut Sabra and Chatila Palestinian refugee camps
while Major Haddad’s and other Israeli-controlled militiamen committed mass
murder. During the nighttime Israeli flares lit up the sky over the camps to en-
able the slaughter to go on nonstop. After at least 36 hours, actually more than
that, the Israelis decided enough people were dead. Haddad’s and other military
forces were politely ushered out of the human slaughterhouse and transported
out of the vicinity.
On Monday afternoon September 20 the entity President Reagan went on tele-

vision briefly with a special announcement. He was ordering the Marines back
into Lebanon for more dangerous duty and without any pre-assigned time
limit—and this time the circumstances are such that they cannot be protested
successfully in public by Moscow. If the Russians were to tell the exact truth
about what happened, who would believe them? The notion that over a thou-
713
sand innocent men, women, and children were slaughtered just to bring the Ma-
rines back sounds preposterous—and, my friends, that is precisely why it
worked.
As I say these words, some 1,200 Marines have just re-entered Beirut, 50%
more than before. Another 1,200 are on the way, though this has not yet been
publicized. They can be held in reserve, or brought in at will.
Another of the plans I made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 78 last month is
now underway. THAT PLAN CALLS FOR A NUMBER OF OUR MARINES
TO BE KILLED IN LEBANON! It will be done by the Israeli MOSSAD and
then blamed on Arab extremists. If it works, it will help shove the world down a
new road toward eventual nuclear war.
The United States now has a solid beachhead in Lebanon as well as in the Sinai.
Russia has one by way of its proxy Syria. Now Russia and the United States are
eyeball to eyeball in the Middle East!
Topic #3—There’s an old saying to the effect, “Everyone talks about the
weather, but no one does anything about it.” That may have been true when
Mark Twain first said it nearly a century ago, but not any more. For several
decades men have been experimenting with all kinds of ways to modify the
weather. One of the earliest and best known techniques is that of cloud seeding
to generate needed rain. But the science of Weather Modification has long since
gone far beyond that.
It’s typical of many advanced new technologies that they tend to be first used
for military purposes, and are kept secret as long as possible. That is even more
true of Weather Modification than it is for most other advanced technologies.
The reasons are not technical so much as they are legal in nature. To understand
why, one need go no further than the old cloud-seeding methods I mentioned a
moment ago.
Suppose a farmer hires a cloud-seeder to bring needed rain to his crops at a

critical time in their growing season. The cloud-seeder waits until some promis-
ing clouds develop and then flies over them, dropping a fine mist of chemicals.
The chemicals help condensation take place in the cloud, and if all goes well
the farmer gets his rain. Unfortunately, other farmers farther downwind may be
equally desperate for the same rain. By the time the seeded cloud reaches them,
perhaps it is rained out. Perhaps no other rain develops soon enough to save
their crops. The result: they may try to seek damages against the farmer who
did the cloud seeding, saying that his tampering ruined their chances of receiv-
714
Audio Letter 79
ing rain. That is a small but very common example of the legal problems caused
by Weather Modification.
Today the knowledge exists to make massive alterations in the weather either
for better or worse. But the scale of potential legal problems has also expanded
with this knowledge. Today the legal ramifications of weather control are inter-
national and potentially violent. The net result is that the few nations possessing
these weather-control capabilities keep it secret.
Over four years ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 34 I described secret American
weather control installations which were then in operation. These were nuclear-
powered electrical grids running along the shores of the continental United
States. They were responsible for a number of strange weather phenomena prior
to that and for some time afterward; but within a year after I reported on them,
they were permanently disabled under mysterious circumstances. Several at-
tempts have been made to restore their operation, but up to now those efforts
have never succeeded.
The American weather-control grids were owned and operated by the Rockefel-
ler cartel and were intended primarily as a tool of monopoly. The giant
Rockefeller agri-businesses of America are trying to wipe out the small indi-
vidually-owned farms and take them over. Today they are succeeding at an
alarming rate, primarily through financial means; but for a while several years
ago they had the weather as an ally as well.
The other main world power in weather control is the Soviet Union. Over the
course of a number of past tapes I have described Russia’s advancing weather-
control techniques. Like the now defunct American weather grids, the Russian
techniques make extensive use of atmospheric electrical charges to control
weather, but there the similarities end. The Russian techniques are space-based
and use two legs of Russia’s space triad of strategic weapons. The orbiting
Cosmos Interceptors are not involved since they are basically nothing more
than military patrol craft, but the monster beam weapons at Russia’s five-year-
old Moon bases are used to create storms at sea, and the levitating Cosmos-
pheres use their charged particle beams to guide storms to their targets.
It has now been 2-1/2 years since I first detailed the new Russian storm-control
techniques in AUDIO LETTER No. 54. The following summer I gave a warn-
ing that these techniques were about to be used to create hurricanes like nothing
ever seen before. Shortly afterward Hurricane Allen terrorized America’s gulf
coast. It was one of the biggest, most powerful storms ever to threaten the area.
It threaded its way through the Caribbean Islands staying over water, gaining
715
strength. Then it began to sweep northeast along the coast in ways that mysti-
fied weathermen. Then very abruptly it just fell apart. The Russian controllers
had made a mistake, as I detailed in AUDIO LETTER No. 57.
It is now two years later. The hurricane season is again upon us, and the Rus-
sians now have a great deal more experience. Once again the Russians have
narrowly beaten back a surprise nuclear attack attempt by the American Bol-
sheviks; and now the Russians are starting to strike back beginning with the
weather.
During the hurricane season so far, our east and gulf coasts have not been trou-
bled by anything significant; instead, it is the western United States which is
suffering from hurricane problems—an unprecedented situation. The situation
is new, my friends, because it is man-made.
As I say these words, the remains of Hurricane Olivia are gradually dying out
over the northern Great Plains. It has brought incredible rains to the West
Coast, unheard-of floods in Utah, and September snows in the Rockies.
But if you think Olivia was bad, Hurricane Paul should be worse. Hurricane
Paul is following a northeasterly course from the Pacific that took it past the
southern tip of Baja California two days ago. It is being programmed to sweep
across America’s Great Plains breadbasket from around southwest Texas north-
eastward.
If the Russian weather controllers achieve a total success, the eye of the decay-
ing storm will follow a track across Oklahoma, Missouri, Illinois, Indiana,
Ohio, and onward toward New York City and New England. Hurricane Paul
will not remain a hurricane for long over land, of course, but wind is not what
the Russians want from this storm—it is rain, horrendous amounts of rain. It is
harvest time across vast areas of the Great Plains, the worst possible time for
rainstorms. Within a matter of days, the giant rainstorm remains of Hurricane
Paul may effectively mow down much of America’s promised bumper harvest
of grain—and this is only the beginning of what the Russians are preparing to
do in retaliation for America’s unceasing war intrigues. The Russians intend to
whittle away our military preparedness while making it harder and harder for
the Bolsheviks here to stay in power. By the time the Reagan one-year exten-
sion of grain sales to Russia runs out, we ourselves may well run short of grain!
Very soon the 1982 hurricane season will be behind us, but already the Rus-
sians are preparing to give America a very long, hard winter. Even as I speak,
the “Siberia Express” weather war is already returning. This year of 1982 began
716
Audio Letter 79
as the coldest winter of the century across much of the United States. There
were freezes in Florida, ice storms in Georgia, hurricane-force windstorms
along the Rockies, blizzards in the Northeast; and, my friends, it is all coming
back again!
In AUDIO LETTER No. 71 last January I described a new Russian weather

control technique that was responsible for these strange and extreme storms.
Weathermen refer to it as the “Siberia Express,” and with good reason. The air
that refrigerated much of North America last winter was coming straight from
Siberia, transplanted here by Russian weather modification. Last winter the
Russian “Siberia Express” technique was applied only for a few weeks, but this
time the cool-down is already underway. It began during August, and across
much of North America east of the Rockies there were record low temperatures
last month. In the dog days of summer, cooler temperatures cause no concern
because they just make the hot weather milder; but if the “Siberia Express”
weather control continues, North America will cool down farther and faster
than normal. What that means, my friends, is a very hard winter.
As usual, Governmental spokesmen here are not telling you the truth. There are
vague rumors floating around that we are in for a hard winter, but the explana-
tions are not true. Only two years ago the United States suffered a summer-long
killer heat wave and drought, and the experts blame sunspots. Now we’ve got
the opposite problems—drenching rains and abnormally-cool weather, and they
try to blame the same sunspots. The fact is, my friends, that the Russians are
not just talking about the weather, they are doing something about it. And be-
cause of the unceasing war plans of our own leaders, what the Russians are
doing to our weather will be very hard on you and me.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
Now it’s time for my Last Minute Summary. In this AUDIO LETTER I have
reported on the world’s near brush with nuclear war this month. As of this mo-
ment, the danger of immediate nuclear war is now much reduced and still
declining. Instead, longer-range intrigues are now resuming on the part of the
Bolshevik-Zionist joint military junta. In response to these and the postponed
“PROJECT Z” hurry-up war plan, Russia, too, is now on the offensive begin-
ning with the weather.
In the few moments left in this AUDIO LETTER, I should remark on late word
I have received about two items:
717
One item is that at least one United States Marine has already been killed today
in Lebanon. This is not the planned incident which I discussed in Topic #2, but
it is a harbinger of things to come.
The other item is a political alert. Last month I mentioned that the Bolsheviks
here were worried that they had not succeeded in completely rooting out Haig’s
coup d’etat machine. I have just received word that an effort is now underway
to set off major changes in the Reagan Administration. Among the develop-
ments, which may well take place shortly, are the resignations of at least two
Reagan Cabinet Secretaries. A scandal is also brewing within the Department
of Defense, which is the center of Bolshevik governmental power here; and the
White House itself may also be swept up in the turmoil.
My friends, the days ahead will not be easy. A hard winter, a collapse in the
economy, and more crises lie ahead. But we should all be thankful for life itself.
The enemies of our Lord Jesus Christ were stopped hours short of plunging us
into nuclear war. Instead, HE has given us one more chance; and, my friends,
we must not waste it.
718
Audio Letter 80
November 3, 1982
Beginning with this AUDIO LETTER I’m making a small shift in my recording
schedule from the end of each month to early in the month. This change will
help reduce conflicts with holidays and other problems during the course of the
year.
For years now a familiar slogan has been used in the advertisements for a popu-
lar pain reliever. The slogan was so effective that it helped build annual sales of
nearly half a billion dollars. The pain reliever became #1 in America with 37%
of the market, and yet for weeks now this famous slogan has been heard no
more. The slogan was: “Trust Tylenol. Hospitals do.”
Literally over night, just a month ago, Americans by the millions stopped trust-
ing Tylenol. A number of people in Chicago had suddenly died after taking
Extra-Strength Tylenol capsules. By October 1, six were dead and a number of
others gravely ill. A few days later the death toll rose to seven. The Tylenol
capsules which they had taken had been contaminated with one of the deadliest
of all poisons, cyanide. Instantly headlines about the Tylenol massacre pushed
all other news stories into the background here in the United States. A nation-
wide alert went out for people to stop taking Tylenol capsules until further no-
tice. Everyone was told to look for two suspect batches of Tylenol, identifiable
by their serial numbers. The booming Tylenol capsule production line was shut
down. The manufacturer launched a Tylenol capsule recall program. Many Ty-
lenol products were withdrawn from drug store shelves, and those that
remained were shunned by frightened customers.
Thus began a news story which has remained on everyone’s tongue for a solid
month. In most cases even the most dramatic news stories begin to loss their
impact after a week or so—but not the Tylenol scare. It has been nursed along
week after week, piece by agonizing piece like a real-life soap opera.
First there were worries that the poisoning might have been due to some horri-
ble production-line accident; then it was found that the deadly capsules had
719
been poisoned deliberately. After a week or so, new Tylenol poisoning cases
came to light in Oroville, California and in Philadelphia. Those stories revived
fears of a nation-wide poisoning threat all over again.
By mid-month the search for the Tylenol killer was closing in on the Chicago
area itself. For another week or so there were sensational stories day after day
about alleged “hot leads” in the case. Gradually they all fizzled out but only af-
ter keeping the story alive a while longer. By late in October the Tylenol scare
was at last beginning to die down in its impact.
But the Tylenol massacre was made to order to spawn copycat crimes by a few
unstable individuals here and there. Those copycat crimes were slow in coming,
so the major media were enlisted to help set them off. Time after time television
news reports about the Tylenol tragedy digressed into discussions in the “What
if...?” category. “What if the poison had been put not in Tylenol but perhaps
food or Halloween candy?” said the television voices. Time after time they
pointed out how easy it would be to do that and get away with it. And sure
enough, suddenly it started happening. Here and there people received eye
burns from adulterated eye drops. A man ended up in hospital after poisoning
by way of a carton of chocolate milk; and Halloween candy began showing up
with poison, needles, and razor blades. What had started as the Tylenol scare a
month ago has become an ever-widening fear of adulteration of everything we
buy for food or health.
My friends, the Tylenol massacre and all the other fears it has spawned will
fade from our minds eventually, but for now it has done its job to perfection.
That job was to take our attention away from certain events on the international
scene for now and to turn our attention inward instead. This change was desired
by the American Bolsheviks because of their failure in September to set off
NUCLEAR WAR ONE on schedule!
For the moment the Bolsheviks here are responding by turning their energies
inward to the domestic scene more intensely than before. As it stands right now,
the Bolshevik-dominated Reagan Administration expects to emphasize domes-
tic matters for roughly the coming year. They want to press forward with a
quiet new Bolshevik revolution here in America to tighten their control over
you and me. At the same time they also want to try to finish off their deadly
rivals for power—the Rockefeller cartel. If the Bolsheviks here can succeed in
doing these things, they will be in far better position to try again at nuclear war.
At present, my friends, the tentative plans of the Bolsheviks here call for a new
crisis sequence toward nuclear war to begin late in 1983, and culminate in war
720
Audio Letter 80
itself in early 1984! It will take that long for the military preparations for nu-
clear war to be recycled up to peak readiness. Between now and then, you can
expect major crises to erupt overseas which may look like they hold a threat of
nuclear war in themselves; but these interim crises over the next year or so will
actually have a different purpose. They will not be intended to lead in them-
selves to nuclear war but to improve America’s geostrategic position. If
successful, this process will improve the Pentagon’s chances when it is time for
nuclear war itself.
The process of turning inward by the Bolsheviks here is a temporary one but
very important. It must be understood if you are to understand many coming
events in our economy and in politics. At the same time, we must also keep our
eye on the ball and look beyond the temporary inward emphasis of the next
year or so. And it is time for an important update about what the Kremlin is do-
ing in response to all these things.
Topic #1—AMERICA’S ECONOMIC DECLINE INTO A NEW DARK

AGES
Topic #2—WAR COUNTDOWN TOWARD THE ISRAELI YEAR OF

DOOM
Topic #3—CHANGING OF THE GUARD IN THE NEW KREMLIN.
Topic #1:
The Stock Market—1980s/1930s
In recent weeks there’s been one seemingly bright spot in the increasingly grim
United States economy. With unemployment climbing, bankruptcies spreading,
and factories idle, the Stock Market alone has acted cheerful. In August the
prospect of dropping interest rates became the excuse for a dramatic upturn in
stock prices. Over the past 2-1/2 months we’ve seen a series of wild swings on
Wall Street that seem to defy all logic. Records have been set in trading volume
on one day only to be shattered by an even larger record on another day. Sev-
eral times recently the one-day jump in the Dow Jones average has reached
record levels. One of those days was October 8, the same day that it was an-
nounced that the official unemployment rate has reached double digits.
With unemployment at levels not seen since the Great Depression, the Stock
Market has continued to soar. Three days after the announcement of double-
721
digit unemployment, the Stock Market passed the 1000 mark on the Dow Jones
industrial averages.
The situation we are seeing now is described well by an article released by the
Associated Press in August. The article begins in the words, and I quote:
“Wall Street, which waited for years for the recession to begin, is starting to act
like the economic downturn is just about over. Even as companies report that
their profits in the second quarter were lower than last year, the Stock Market
has continued a rally that has pushed up the Dow Jones industrial average to its
highest levels in three years.”
My friends, the article from which I just quoted was published in August, as I
said—but not August of this year! It is dated August 3, 1980, over two years
ago. At that time the Stock Market appeared to be saying the same thing it ap-
pears to be saying now, that better times are just ahead; but of course better
times were not ahead. The Stock Market bubble of two years ago burst after a
while, while the economy kept heading downward.
What is going on in the Stock Market right now is just another stunt known in
some circles as a “Bear Trap.” A bear trap is an episode of gross manipulation
of the Stock Market by certain large institutional investors to unload unwanted
stocks. I first described how a bear trap works in AUDIO LETTER No. 33
when the bear trap took place in the spring of 1978. Another took place around
the late summer of 1980, producing the article from which I quoted earlier; and
now in the autumn of 1982 we’re watching as another Stock Market bear trap
snares its victims.
During September, and especially October, large amounts of unwanted stocks

were successfully dumped onto small investors. Instead of setting another new
record for a one-day rise in stock prices, the Dow Jones set a more disturbing
record a few days ago. On Monday October 25 the Dow dropped more than 36
points, the largest one-day drop since the crash of 1929. The excuse given was
that suddenly there are signs that those dropping interest rates just might head
up again.
My friends, the fact is that even a thousand (1000) on the Dow is worth only
about as much as 400 a decade ago due to inflation, and the wildness of the ups
and downs lately are a very ominous sign. They are a symptom of instability in
the Market, meaning a small stimulus produces big effects. That is what hap-
pened to the Stock Market in 1929, too, just before the big crash.
722
Audio Letter 80
The United States economy is fundamentally sick, and now it is having chills
and fever as reflected by the Stock Market up-and-down jumps. The two en-
gines of our economy, automobiles and construction, are still running at about
half speed. In the past I’ve explained why a sustained depression in these two
areas would inevitably spread to engulf our whole economy. And now it is hap-
pening!
Unemployment, as measured by the Government’s grossly understated statis-

tics, reached 10.1 per cent in September, the highest since the Great
Depression. Bankruptcies, too, have now reached a pace unequaled since the
Great Depression. Farmers are in a tailspin with projected farm incomes for
1982 down 24% from 1981.
Banking System Situation
And then there are the banks. The Great Depression of the 1930s really began
not with the 1929 Stock Market crash but with the collapse of our banking sys-
tem afterward. Likewise today, it is not the chills and fever of the Stock Market
that are the greatest economic danger—it is the dangerous condition of our
banks.
When I recorded AUDIO LETTER No. 44 in March 1979, I reported that the
Bolsheviks here in America were going after the banks. The Bolshevik coup
d’etat against their former Rockefeller allies had begun two months earlier with
the murder of Nelson Rockefeller; and by that March, Bolshevik moles were
going to work throughout the Rockefeller banking empire. As I reported in
AUDIO LETTER No. 44, they were starting at the top with the giant Chase
Manhattan Bank. If the American Bolsheviks can shatter Rockefeller banking
power, the Rockefeller cartel may well be doomed!
My friends, the process which I first made public in AUDIO LETTER No. 44 is
now far advanced. During the first eight months of this year 27 banks failed
here in the United States. Many others are teetering on the edge, and on August
23 it was announced that five of America’s largest banks are in deep trouble.
They are deep in the “red” due to the inability to collect on huge bad loans. The
five banks which were in the news that day are all members of the Rockefeller
group, and one of them is none other than Chase Manhattan itself.
The problem of bad loans now plaguing the Rockefeller banks is destined to
just keep getting worse, not better. The final crushing blow that could bring the
Rockefeller banks crashing down is the mountain of bad loans to foreign coun-
tries. Years ago when the Rockefeller cartel had no rival in governmental power
here, those loans were made without concern. Whenever loans went bad, they
723
always made sure the American taxpayer bailed them out through various gov-
ernmental devices; but now the situation has changed. The Rockefeller cartel no
longer exercises sufficient power over the whole of the United States Govern-
ment to bail itself out in this way. Instead their enemies, the Bolsheviks here,
are increasingly able to block the Rockefeller group.
This new situation was reflected in the World Economic Conference of the
World Bank and International Monetary Fund two months ago. At the confer-
ence, which was held in Toronto, Canada, the Rockefeller and Bolshevik
factions squared off against one another—and, my friends, the Bolsheviks won!
Here is basically what happened: Rockefeller cartel banking operatives both

from America and from abroad argued for increased quotas for the International
Monetary Fund—that is, they argued that the United States and other developed
nations should donate tens of billions of dollars to cover increased international
loans. Rockefeller spokesmen presented their arguments in terms of the needs
of the Third World nations, but what they were really worried about was the
possible consequences to their own banks of bad loans to the Third World. In-
creased IMF quotas from participating nations could have helped bail them out
of trouble. That is what the Rockefeller group tried to do by enlisting the sup-
port of the Third World nations themselves. But the American Bolsheviks
squashed it!
Speaking in Toronto on September 6, the entity Reagan declared:
“The United States cannot afford to bail out the world.”
What he really meant was that America’s Bolshevik government was not about
to bail out the Rockefeller cartel—and with that, increased IMF quotas were
refused.
So now, my friends, the Rockefeller cartel banking interests face an untenable

situation. They hold vast amounts of loans to Third World countries, and a lot
of it is bunching up and coming due. During 1983 more than half trillion dollars
in these loans will be coming due. About 80 per cent of that could end up going
unpaid to the banks by financially-troubled nations. That would add up to a
combined default of more than four hundred billion dollars ($400,000,000,000).
If the big banks should lose even a fraction of that unthinkable amount, it will
spell disaster for America’s entire banking system! Very quickly the collapse
will engulf the entire international banking system as well.
724
Audio Letter 80
As major American banks collapse, credit lines to industry will be cut off. Un-
able to finance continued operations, more and more businesses will close their
doors, unemployment will mushroom, and the depression which we already ex-
perience will grow far worse. The public will clamor for the Government to do
something—and do something it will! There will be reflation of our currency
(that is, more inflation in the depths of depression), and sooner or later the en-
tity President Reagan or his successor will declare a NATIONAL ECONOMIC
EMERGENCY—shades of FDR and 1933.
There is an ironic parallel between all of this and what happened half a century
ago to trigger the Great Depression. In the early 1930s a major New York bank
called the “United States Bank of New York,” a private bank, teetered on the
edge of failure. The bank appealed for help to the Federal Reserve System,
which by its charter is supposed to be the lender of last resort; but the Federal
Reserve refused to come to its aid. The result, which was predictable, was the
failure of the United States Bank. That started a chain reaction due to shared
loan arrangements and other factors which linked that bank to many others.
When the United States Bank failed, it dragged down others, which dragged
down still others. The progressive collapse of much of America’s banking sys-
tem dragged America’s whole economy downward into the Great Depression—
and all because of the deliberate inaction of the privately-owned Federal Re-
serve System.
Today the parallel to all this is taking place at the international level. This time
it is not just one bank but the whole Rockefeller banking network that is teeter-
ing due to bad international loans. So the bankers have appealed for help
through the international analog of the Federal Reserve System—that is, the
IMF. But at the Toronto Economic Conference the so-called Reagan Admini-
stration prevented that aid from being given. As a result, the whole Rockefeller
banking network is heading toward almost certain disaster; and because the
linkages among banks that existed in the 1930s exist again today, the whole
banking system of America and the world is threatened!
The irony, my friends, is just this: In the 1930s it was the Rockefeller interests
who helped to bring about the banking system collapse through their effective
control of the Federal Reserve System. That was how they acquired effective
control of American banking after it was rebuilt, but this time the shoe is on the
other foot! This time it is the Rockefeller bankers themselves who want help
and who face disaster because it has been denied them.
The United States is leading the world into a new depression even worse than
that of the 1930s, but there is a fundamental difference between what happened
725
50 years ago and what is happening now! That difference has to do with our
currency itself.
In the 30’s, times were hard but at least our money was still stable and valuable.
It was tough to earn a dollar; but if you did, you could buy a lot with it. Today,
in the 80’s, it’s different. The dollar is no longer stable; its value is shrinking
before our very eyes. While jobs are vanishing and wages are being restrained,
even the dollars we do earn are losing their buying power. The fact is that the
United States dollar is being destroyed deliberately. It is this process of ruining
our money itself that is leading to all the other chain reactions that are plunging
us into depression. This is what I was talking about in my 1973 book, THE
CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE DOLLAR. And the destructive tampering
with America’s currency is continuing—and even speeding up now!
Pending HR-7283—$100.00 Bill
A year and a half ago in AUDIO LETTER No. 63, I revealed a scheme was be-
ing cooked up to do away with our present $100.00 bill. At that time the plan
was still in its infancy. Since then it has continued to evolve even though the
original target date in late 1981 was not met.
On the first day of last month, October 1982, the stage began to be set for ac-
tion in Congress. A Pennsylvania Congressman, Richard Schulze, introduced a
bill which is tailor-made to Treasury Department specifications. The bill is des-
ignated HR-7283, and has the following long-winded title:
TO PROVIDE FOR THE RETIREMENT OF ALL UNITED STATES NOTES

OF THE DENOMINATION OF ONE HUNDRED DOLLARS ($100.00) AND
THEIR REPLACEMENT WITH NEW NOTES OF SUCH
DENOMINATION.
As the title implies, the present version of the scheme embodies one noticeable
difference from that which I reported a year and a half ago. Originally the plan
was to suddenly repudiate the $100.00 bill altogether. Now the plan is instead
to take away the present hundreds but replace them with new-issue hundreds
that look radically different. This refinement in tactics makes the plan look a
little different, but it will still accomplish all of the original objectives.
To see how little the plan has really changed in the past year and a half, one
need only look at the bill now before Congress, HR-7283.
726
Audio Letter 80
The original secret plan required that the present $100.00 bill be declared illegal
tender. Likewise, subsection © of the bill in Congress says, quote:
“Such notes shall cease to be legal tender on a date to be determined by the Sec-
retary.”
The original secret plan called for holders of $100.00 bills to be given a brief
turn-in period before they became worthless, and now HR-7283 says in subsec-
tion ©, quote:
“The Secretary shall provide for a ten-day period during which holders of circu-
lating United States Notes of $100.00 to be retired may exchange such notes for
new-issue notes.”
A key aspect of the original secret plan was that anyone turning in more than a
modest amount of hundreds would become automatic targets of suspicion. Your
name, address, and Social Security number were to be taken for investigation;
and sure enough, here is what HR-7283 now says in subsection ©, quote:
“In any case in which any one holder exchanges $100.00 notes in the value of
$5,000.00 or more, a record of the name, address, and Social Security or federal
employee identification number shall be recorded and forwarded to the De-
partment of the Treasury.”
Subsection (d) then says that this information will be provided, quote:
“...to federal, state, and local law enforcement agencies for use in criminal in-
vestigation or prosecution.”
The excuses being given for all of this are still following the secret plan I made
public a year and a half ago. In AUDIO LETTER No. 63 I reported that the
$100.00 bill ploy would be justified as an attack on crime and inflation. When
Congressman Schulze introduced the bill on October 1, he followed the Treas-
ury script to the letter. In his remarks printed that day in the
CONGRESSIONAL RECORD, Schulze said, quote:
“The purpose of this bill is to aid law enforcement officials in the fight against
drug trafficking and other crime. A side benefit would be the reduction in vol-
ume of dollars in the underground economy.”
But, my friends, the true purposes of the Treasury-inspired $100.00 bill strata-
gem are far different from those claimed. It is actually a power play aimed
partly at you and me and partly at the enemy of the Bolsheviks, the Rockefeller
727
cartel! The excuses of attacking crime and inflation are only a means to an end
to close down America.
To help protect yourself and your family in these very difficult times, I have
outlined what you can do in my book, THE CONSPIRACY AGAINST THE
DOLLAR. It is still good advice today. The main point is that you have most of
your assets abroad in hard currencies, not dollars; and also you should consider
the Currency Hedge Funds in the Common Market which help you to beat in-
flation.
My friends, our money system is being corrupted and destroyed. The result is a
progressive, irreversible disintegration of our economy of a kind that did not
happen in the 30’s. We are slipping backward in the direction of the Dark Ages.
Honest, stable money is essential to civilization itself. In primitive cultures

there is no money; everything is done by barter. That works only for very sim-
ple societies. The standardized medium of exchange known as “money” is
essential in order to make transactions more flexible and easy. It opens the way
for individuals to specialize more according to their skills. With specialization
comes diversity, breakthroughs, and advancement of civilization itself. All that
starts coming apart when money becomes a manipulated, unstable, dishonest
commodity.
The most dramatic and most ominous sign that a society’s money is becoming
useless is the reappearance of barter. It means that the society’s normal medium
of exchange—money—is not working. Today barter systems are spreading like
wildfire across America; and as it does, our civilization itself is disintegrating.
Our rulers’ greed for power is now leading us all toward a new Dark Ages.
Topic #2—For several years now the nuclear strategy of the United States has
been a first-strike strategy. Top Pentagon military strategists are preparing ac-
tively for nuclear war with Russia, and they intend for America to strike first.
It was not always this way; in fact, America’s shift onto a first strike posture is
a new development in American history. This is true even though America’s
leaders have repeatedly gotten America into war deliberately. The difference is
that in the past America was always dragged into war by at least appearing to
be attacked first. That enabled American public opinion to be rallied behind the
desired war against the chosen enemy. This approach has always been neces-
sary because most Americans would never support a war that they knew to be
America’s fault.
728
Audio Letter 80
America’s deliberate involvement in falsely defensive wars began as long ago

as 1898. On February 15 of that year the American battleship Maine was rest-
ing peacefully at anchor in the harbor of Havana, Cuba. Suddenly a giant
explosion rocked the ship and it blew apart. Some 260 American fighting men
aboard the ship lost their lives. To the cry of “Remember the Maine” America
went off to war. Afterward overwhelming evidence was found that the Span-
iards had not been responsible for the Maine disaster; instead, American
saboteurs had done the deed in order to bring on the desired war. But by the
time those facts began to surface quietly, most Americans were not paying at-
tention. We were just too pleased with ourselves for having crushed Spain and
become suddenly a global power.
In 1941 America’s leaders were spoiling for an even bigger war than America
had ever fought before. The reasons had to do with Saudi Arabian oil, first and
foremost, as I have detailed in the past. The Rockefeller Standard Oil interests
had been locked out of the Persian Gulf by British boycott tactics. To cure that
problem, the Rockefeller cartel had helped create a threat to Britain in the form
of Adolf Hitler.
By 1940 the threat was doing its job. The Battle of Britain was underway, and
Churchill was finally willing to come to terms. If the United States would inter-
vene and stop Hitler, then after the war America could have the Saudi oil.
To carry out the bargain, FDR and his Rockefeller sponsors had to get America
into war somehow. But most Americans did not want war; the only way to
change our minds about that was to arrange for America to be attacked. The
Germans were in no position to do that, but Japan was; and Japan, Germany,
and Italy were inseparably linked through the Tripartite Treaty; so if Japan
could be lured into attacking the United States, we would also be at war with
Germany automatically. As a bonus, this strategy also promised great new gains
for the United States in the Pacific itself. The solution, of course, was Pearl
Harbor.
When FDR called it a “Day of Infamy,” he was right. Roosevelt himself and
other top American leaders were guilty of high treason for their role in setting
up the Pearl Harbor disaster. I have given many details about this in past
AUDIO LETTERS including Nos. 1, 14, 22, and 34. Just in recent months, four
decades after the fact, pieces of the story have started to leak out and become
more widely known. For example, a book was published recently by the Pulit-
zer Prize-winning historian John Toland entitled “INFAMY—PEARL
HARBOR AND ITS AFTERMATH.” In the book he documents the fact that
FDR and his top military leaders had plenty of advance warning of the attack,
and yet no warning was given to the forces at Pearl Harbor! Why? Because
729
FDR wanted the Japanese attack to succeed. The deliberate sacrifice of more
than 2,000 American Servicemen’s lives was just the right medicine to cure
America’s anti-war attitude. To the cries of “Remember Pearl Harbor,” we
Americans went off to war to win Saudi oil for the Rockefeller oil cartel!
Once again today’s rulers of the United States are trying to get America into
another big war; but this time they dare not allow the enemy, Russia, to strike
first as was done at Pearl Harbor by Japan. America’s rulers in 1941 could af-
ford the luxury of throwing away a big chunk of naval power in the Pearl
Harbor attack. There was no chance that Japan could go on to actually defeat
the United States with its enormous industrial might, but today it’s different.
Today the luxury of time is gone. If the weapons are not ready when war be-
gins, they cannot be built in time to help; and even more importantly, the
intended enemy today is far more powerful militarily than the United States!
And so today’s top Pentagon strategists are first-strike oriented. In any military
campaign, he who strikes the first blow always has the advantage.
If the first blow is also a surprise, the advantage is tremendous because of all
factors of military strategy, surprise is the most important.
Just six weeks ago on September 17 the United States came within hours of ac-
tually launching a surprise nuclear first strike against Russia. It was the
culmination of a hurry-up war plan about which I first began reporting last Feb-
ruary in AUDIO LETTER No. 72. The struggle over this war plan spawned
major headlines this year. These included the Falklands War last spring and the
sudden forced resignation of Secretary of State Alexander Haig last June. The
plan suffered repeated setbacks and yet it stayed on schedule. It was only dur-
ing the final two weeks or so that the so-called “PROJECT Z” war plan finally
fell apart too far to proceed. The critical events which brought this about were a
policy change in Red China, Russian military action in space, and limited pub-
lic exposure at the last minute. I detailed all this a month ago in AUDIO
LETTER No. 79.
The war planners here were frustrated this time, my friends, but they came very
close to succeeding. Having come that close, they are convinced they will suc-
ceed on the next attempt, and so they already have a new war plan underway.
Under this new plan, preliminary preparations and crises are scheduled for
about the coming year. Then in late 1983 they presently expect to begin a new
final-crisis sequence to lead into nuclear war itself in early 1984.
730
Audio Letter 80
The new war plan was set in motion on September 14, three days before the
abortive end of “PROJECT Z.” The Israeli plan to murder Lebanese President-
elect Bashir Gemayel, which I had made public the previous month, was carried
out. That provided the excuse for the Israelis to invade Beirut and quickly ar-
range for a mass murder of Palestinian civilian refugees. The real pay-off of all
this was the return of American Marines to Beirut in the beginning of a new and
open-ended deployment in Lebanon.
In AUDIO LETTERS Nos. 78 and 79 I reported that the Marines had been sent
there to become the focus of a major incident. This will come about under the
joint plan of the Bolshevik-controlled United States Pentagon and the Israeli
Mossad. The Mossad is to arrange for a number of our Marines to be killed in
an incident that will be blamed on the Arabs! This will be used to inflame
American public opinion to help lead us into war, including ultimately nuclear
war. It is to be a replay of the strategy used in 1898 with the battleship Maine.
Already our psychological conditioning for this planned incident to come is un-
derway. Just two days ago a car bomb exploded close to a Marine position in
the south of Beirut. There were no serious injuries this time because there were
not meant to be any, but the atmosphere of danger to our leathernecks is being
dramatized. At the same time the Government is starting to talk about sending
in more Marines, many more, perhaps up to 5,000; and those who are already in
Lebanon are gradually fanning out into more and more dangerous duty areas.
All of this was set in motion in spite of blunt Russian warnings. This was ac-
complished by carrying out the Beirut Massacre; but the massacre also had a
dangerous side effect in the form of world-wide condemnation of Israel.
Throughout the latter half of September the reaction to the Beirut Massacre was
building fast, especially among the public of Israel and America. Within Israel
itself, ways were available to maneuver the protests and keep them from getting
out of control. But here in the United States it was essential to snuff out the re-
action to the massacre very quickly otherwise it could have done real damage to
the Bolshevik-Zionist junta that runs the American and Israeli military machine.
People were beginning to question America’s blind support for Israel’s military
power.
In order to blot out the Beirut Massacre from American minds, a second massa-
cre was perpetrated barely two weeks later. It was the Tylenol Massacre. The
specter of over a thousand rotting bodies in far-off Beirut were quickly forgot-
ten in the scare over those seven deaths in Chicago.
731
For most Americans, the Tylenol scare just blanked out everything else. It was
an evil masterpiece of psychological trickery. Most of us find it hard to identify
with what happened in Beirut, but we can certainly identify with a person tak-
ing a headache pill. One story had to do with a lot of foreign people in far-off
land; the other had to do with what was portrayed as a threat to each of us per-
sonally.
As I discussed in my introduction, the Tylenol story stayed on the front page for
a solid month, all through October. Now, finally, there is starting to be some
renewed emphasis of the Beirut tragedy in the news. We are hearing about eye
witnesses to the slaughter who have contradicted Defense Minister Sharon’s
claim that the Israelis could not see the killing. But now the psychological dan-
ger point is passed for the Israelis. It’s now “old news” to most people. No
matter what comes out now, it will have almost no chance of interfering with
the ongoing war plans.
The Reagan Bolsheviks and the Begin Zionists are looking ahead to next year,
but in doing so the Israeli cabinet has suddenly noticed something that makes
their blood run cold. It is right there on the Hebrew lunar calendar which uses
Hebrew letters instead of numbers to designate the year. For the next Jewish
New Year, my friends, those letters spell the word “doom.” The Begin cabinet
is reacting to this discovery as if the finger of God had appeared and written
that word “doom” on the wall of the Knesset—and no wonder, because they
have blood on their hands.
The present Jewish New Year began with the Beirut Massacre carried out under
the authority of the Begin cabinet, but the militant Zionists in Israel are reacting
as they always react when confronted with unwelcome facts. They never con-
sider changing their own ways, instead their solution is, in their own words, “to
create new facts.” And that is how they are trying to erase that word “doom”
from their calendar. On October 22 a resolution was passed before the Begin
cabinet to change the designation of the next New Year by rearranging the let-
ters.
The American Bolsheviks and their Israeli Zionist allies are starting a lengthy
process of recycling their war plans for another try. One factor in this new
process is Bolshevik intrigue to try to set off war between India and Pakistan. In
AUDIO LETTER No. 78 I reported that this war was targeted for this month,
November 1982, if “PROJECT Z” did not succeed first.
The key to war between India and Pakistan is the disputed territory between
them of Kashmir. Kashmir has been held together in relative stability since
732
Audio Letter 80
1975 by Sheik Mohammad Abdullah, known as the “Lion of Kashmir.” But

about five months ago Abdullah started having a series of heart attacks. The
heart attacks, my friends, were not natural. Finally two months ago on Septem-
ber 8 he succumbed to one of these attacks.
Abdullah’s removal from the scene has helped start setting the stage for the
Indo-Pakistani war I warned about in August, but the Russians know what is
afoot and they are advising India’s leader, Indira Gandhi, to defuse the situa-
tion. As a result, she invited Pakistan’s General Zia to New Delhi for talks on
improving relations. Zia arrived there two days ago, met with Mrs. Gandhi, and
left a group of diplomats to talk further. Whether all this will prevent the war is
an open question, but at least it should help slow down the Bolshevik intrigues.
The process of recycling for another war-try involves many aspects of the total
military picture. For one thing the Bolshevik Pentagon war planners hope to
rebuild some semblance of their secret weapons reserves. I first reported on
their existence and role in the intended nuclear war in AUDIO LETTER No.
73. These were the real reason for the Southern Hemisphere war last spring of
which the Falklands War was only the visible part. I can now report that the
Bolshevik-controlled secret naval facilities were not destroyed even though
they were put out of action. A crash program is now underway to repair the
damage, both at South Georgia Island and at the two southern New Zealand
sites. As I reported in AUDIO LETTER No. 74, a portion of the Bolshevik
Stealth Navy escaped altogether from the hostilities.
Another aspect of the Pentagon’s recycling process has to do with America’s

newly deployed secret Stealth Planes, called “Phantom War Planes.” These
have yet to be tested in combat but they are believed to be capable of success-
fully attacking Russia; but due to the sudden change in China’s policies in early
September, the crucial Sinkiang Province launch area is presently unavailable.
Should it still be unavailable a year from now, the Pentagon is determined to
have the next best back-up site ready to go. That back-up site, my friends, is
none other than Kashmir, the disputed area between India and Pakistan. It is far
inferior to Sinkiang Province, China, being nearly twice as far away from Rus-
sia’s Cosmosphere bases, but it is still better than anything else, so don’t be
surprised if Pakistan goes ahead and attacks India to seize Kashmir within the
next year, talks or no talks.
The Space Shuttle Missions
And then there is the space shuttle. As I’ve detailed in past tapes, the space
shuttle is the indispensable key to the Pentagon’s plans to use space for the
coming nuclear war. All 4 space shuttle missions up to now have been military
733
missions, described to the public as “test flights.” Now space shuttle launch #5
is about to take place, scheduled for November 11, just a few days from now.
Now the alleged test schedule has been used up.
In order to preserve appearances, there is no choice but to start following

through now with some launches of civilian payloads. That is what space shut-
tle #5 now on the pad at Cape Canaveral will be doing. For the first time there
will be no military payload on this shuttle. For that reason, on this flight we will
probably get to see what is actually happening during the mission.
Space shuttle #5 will be a “first” in other ways, too. The first four flights used a
skeleton crew of only two astronauts. This time there are four—Allen, Brand,
Overmyer, and Lanoir—three of whom are civilians.
But the most important “first” for space shuttle #5 will be one that is totally un-
suspected by the public. My friends, this will be the first mission to use just one
shuttle from start to finish.
The first four missions used the two-shuttle stratagem which I first made public
in AUDIO LETTER No. 62. Each time we watched a shuttle with the name
“Columbia” on the side take off from Florida. Once in orbit, the plan called for
the astronauts to carry out their military mission while the public was shown
falsified space movies about the flight. Then the two-man crew was to return to
Earth, not aboard the shuttle itself but aboard a two-man re-entry capsule. The
shuttle itself, if possible, was to return to Earth unmanned, landing by com-
puter-control in western Australia. Finally, back on Earth, the two astronauts
boarded a different shuttle with the name “Columbia” on the side. It was
boosted to high speed and then glided to Earth for the public to watch. But this
time it will be different. This time it is a non-military mission and there are four
astronauts, too many to fit into a re-entry capsule. The shuttle which takes off
from Florida will have to land in California five days later.
The NASA military shuttle managers believe there will be no trouble from Rus-
sia on this flight. It is purely non-military, and this shuttle is unarmed; but there
is still one major worry. That worry, my friends, is just this: Will the thermal
tiles really work? No one knows because no space shuttle has ever reentered
from orbital velocity before. All four of the shuttles we have watched blast off
from Florida have been destroyed in space by Russian space weapons before
they could return to Earth, so space shuttle #5 will actually make the first test of
the tiles. NASA believes that the tiles will hold. If they do, the landing at Ed-
wards Air Force Base on November 16 will look just like the four fake landings
we have seen up to now. If the tiles do not work, four astronauts may pay with
734
Audio Letter 80
their lives for the NASA deception up to now. Even so, having falsified four
allegedly successful landings, NASA will find a way to explain it away if space
shuttle #5 should end in disaster, because a year from now the space shuttle will
be needed to start preparing for war once again.
Topic #3—On Wednesday October 27 the man known as President Leonid

Brezhnev delivered a speech of major importance in Moscow. The speech came
on the heels of a surprise conference of all Warsaw Pact Foreign Ministers con-
vened in Moscow just five days earlier. The importance of the Brezhnev speech
was emphasized in every way possible. Brezhnev was flanked on the podium
by his five senior colleagues in the Politburo, and his audience of more than
500 consisted of the entire upper crust of the giant Soviet military establish-
ment. Present were all top Defense Ministry officials, all Soviet Marshals, the
Commanders of all the Russian military services, all regional Soviet Com-
manders, the Commanders of Soviet forces abroad, and the top echelon of the
Policy Directorate of the Armed Forces.
The Brezhnev speech was directed first and foremost to the Military and to the
Russian technological establishment which backs them up, but it was also di-
rected to the entire Soviet public and was broadcast in its entirety over nation-
wide television.
In his speech Brezhnev accused the United States of trying to bring about nu-
clear war. He said that America’s leaders have, quote:
“...raised the intensity of their military preparations to an unprecedented level.”
And he accused the so-called Reagan Administration of, and I quote again:
“...an aggressive policy which is threatening to push the world into the flames
of nuclear war.”
My friends, Government and major media spokesmen always try to lead us

Americans to discount all accusations like that by Russian leaders, but those
harsh words of October 27 in Moscow were not just rhetoric, far from it.
Brezhnev was referring to the Pentagon’s “PROJECT Z” nuclear strike plan
which came within hours of execution just six weeks ago!
Brezhnev even alluded to the superweapon aspect of the present war threat.
America’s radically new Phantom Warplanes are designed to nullify Russia’s
ability to stave off an attack with her beam weapons. Brezhnev assessed the
situation in the words:
735
“Competition in military technology has sharply intensified, often acquiring a

fundamentally new character.”
And he exhorted Russia’s technologists to find the solutions to the threat.
The Brezhnev speech was most notable for the change of policy which it re-
vealed. For 18 years now the Brezhnev image has been associated with detente,
but in this speech all that was virtually abandoned, devalued. Aside from one
brief passing reference, no hope was held out for reviving detente with Amer-
ica’s rulers. Instead, the whole thrust of the speech was that the Russian people
must prepare militarily for the days ahead. It was not a saber-rattling speech
directed at America; it was a call to arms directed to his own people.
My friends, the significance of this major change in stated policy can hardly be
overstated. It reflects two very important developments.
One of the developments that led to the Brezhnev speech is the Kremlin’s as-
sessment of the inevitability of NUCLEAR WAR ONE. As I have reported on
past occasions, Russia’s new anti-Bolshevik rulers know their old Bolshevik
enemies only too well. Having ousted the Bolsheviks from control of Russia,
the new Kremlin now is confronted by a Bolshevik-controlled American mili-
tary. The Russians are convinced that the Bolsheviks will just keep trying to set
off nuclear war until they finally succeed, and “PROJECT Z” was such a close
call in September that the Russians are not optimistic that they can stop the next
attempt.
The second development that led to the Brezhnev speech of October 27 is that a
changing of the guard is underway in the Kremlin. It’s not a power struggle in
the old Bolshevik sense of intrigue and infighting; instead, it’s an orderly suc-
cession among a tightly-knit group of men who are convinced that Russia must
prepare for action, and they want to take advantage of the lull right now while
the Bolsheviks here regroup in the wake of the “PROJECT Z” failure in Sep-
tember.
The Russian people are being prepared for the end of the Brezhnev era in the
very near future. For the very first time ever preparations are underway for a
Soviet leader to peacefully and voluntarily retire with honors. It will be just one
more step in the new Kremlin’s gradual step-by-step program of changing the
rules of life in Russia.
In one sense the so-called Brezhnev retirement will only be a ceremonial fic-
tion; the real Brezhnev died of complications from Russian flu on January 7,
736
Audio Letter 80
1978. I first reported his incapacitation and replacement by a ceremonial “dou-

ble” in AUDIO LETTER No. 30. Later, in AUDIO LETTER No. 33, I was able
to report the date of his death. Since that time several doubles have been em-
ployed to maintain the Brezhnev image until the time was ripe for change. That
time, my friends, has now arrived.
During the interim since the real Brezhnev’s death, a succession of several men
have held the reins of top power in Russia. First there was Defense Minister
Ustinov, leader of the “White Doves.” Then it was the head of the Soviet Navy,
Admiral Gorshkov. Next, power was shared among several men, but none of
these men could truly fill the shoes of the departed Brezhnev, and the search for
more effective leadership has continued. Now, my friends, that search is at an
end.
The new ruler of Russia is already taking the reins of power right now. It may
be some time yet before his true role becomes publicly visible, but his mark is
already being stamped on Russian policies. It was he more than anyone else
who was the architect of the startling Brezhnev speech, so called, of October
27. Russia’s new top ruler spent 15 years as head of Russia’s world-wide Intel-
ligence service, the KGB. When he took charge in 1967 his task was to
transform the KGB by rooting out all Bolshevik power over it. His success in
doing so helped set the stage for the final overthrow of the Bolsheviks from
Kremlin power in 1976 and 1977. Now he has been chosen to become the top
leader of the Soviet Union. The name of Russia’s new leader is Yuri Andropov.
Right now that name may be unfamiliar to you, but I urge you to start watching
for it in the news. Directly or indirectly we will be hearing more and more from
Andropov from this time forward.
LAST MINUTE SUMMARY
tried to give you some perspective on the probable direction of events over the
next year or so.
The Bolsheviks here failed to set off their nuclear war plan in September so
now they are recycling for another try in a year or so. Meanwhile they are turn-
ing inward to tighten their grip on America itself through economic means. At
the same time the Russians, too, are taking advantage of this breather for a
changing of the guard in the Kremlin. They are preparing for action with a new
strong leader at the helm.
Here in America the destruction of our currency is continuing with the $100.00
bill now targeted for special attack. By this economic route the civilization of
737
America itself is being undermined. Over the course of generations we Ameri-

cans have been lured to worship the so-called “almighty dollar,” so we have
come under the spell of those who have made the dollar corrupt as a tool of
power.
In the last analysis, the most basic cause of our deepening economic crisis is
something our Lord Jesus Christ tried to warn us about long ago. He said we
cannot serve two masters, both God and mammon—either we will love one or
we will cling to the other. Today America as a whole is clinging to mammon
and forgetting God! If that does not change, my friends, the ages ahead will be
dark indeed.
(This was Dr. Beter’s last Audio Letter)
738

Drbeteraudiolettersvol 2 BOOK

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Drbeteraudiolettersvol 2 BOOK

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

THE DR.

BETER AUDIO LETTERS

Copyright © 2009 Transactual Systems — All rights reserved

Printed in the United States of America by CreateSpace

Bulk purchases and reseller discounts, contact dave@transactual.com

AUDIO LETTER ® is a registered trademark of Audio Books, Inc.,

DR. PETER DAVID BETER

LET THE EVENTS SPEAK FOR THEMSELVES.

Audio Letter 41 — December 26, 1978 3

1 The economic countdown toward Nuclear War I

2 Spiritual warfare and the collapse of trust

3 Bolshevik maneuvering to buy time to rearm

Audio Letter 42 — January 31, 1979 21

1 The decline of the House of Rockefeller

2 The Bolshevik plot for a Pope’s Revolution

3 UFOs, IFOs, and Russia’s master secret weapon

Audio Letter 43 — February 28, 1979 37

1 The mysterious disappearance of Dr. Henry Kissinger

2 The plundering of the Rockefeller family empire

3 Our last chance to save Western Civilization

Audio Letter 44 — March 29, 1979 53

1 The hoax reappearance of Dr. Henry Kissinger

2 The impending collapse of the Chase Manhattan Bank

3 The Egyptian-Israeli Treaty for nuclear war

Audio Letter 45 — April 27, 1979 69

1 The domestic Guyana at Three Mile Island

2 The secret intelligence war of doubles

3 Last call for a Pilgrimage for Peace

Audio Letter 46 — December 21, 1975 85

1 Nelson Rockefeller’s revenge from the grave

2 The cosmosphere shuttles to prevent nuclear war

3 The modern rebirth of the Holy Alliance

Audio Letter 47 — June 28, 1979 101

1 The scientific background of the Russian robotoids

2 The Russian strategy to dismantle Bolshevik power

3 The shifting currents between war and peace

Audio Letter 48 — July 30, 1979 117

1 The final chapter in The Great Skylab Cover-Up

2 The secret war of the walking dead

3 How America will relearn the fear of God

Audio Letter 49 — August 27, 1979 133

1 Russia’s transformation of America’s Middle East policy

2 The domestic fallout of the Andrew Young affair

3 Russia’s two-front war against Rothschild world power

Audio Letter 50 — September 30, 1979 151

1 Runaway inflation and the collapsing American economy

2 The Cuban Crisis to destroy SALT II

3 The thousand-year war between Russia and the Khazars

Audio Letter 51 — October 27, 1979 169

1 The crash of the United States dollar

2 The Russian program to sell SALT II

3 The surprise Bolshevik deployment of synthetic automatons

Audio Letter 52 — November 30, 1979 187

1 Strategic Iran and the Islamic Khomeini Revolution

2 The Bolshevik Iran strategy for thermonuclear war

3 American hostages and the Battle of Tehran

Audio Letter 53 — January 21, 1980 205

1 War tensions and the late Shah of Iran

2 The surprise takeover by the Kremlin hardliners

3 The nuclear strike operations now in progress

Audio Letter 54 — February 24, 1980 221

1 The secret American defeat of January, 1980

2 Weather modification as a weapon of retaliation